
-olf 







»?**, '&MK5FJ *<°* '•SUm*! >°v 



'-Tfr«' .o» <^ '•?:,•' J 



jr ... ^""" .<*' 




"of 













v v . 



c. <?, .*. .*. 






* ^o* 









.*^r.* / \^^\<p v*^;-\/ %-^^v/ 

^ .SsJ&z.%. y.'A'i:./^ ^.tfifc.V yj 






*->' ; 









*???>* \/^$V* *v^?V* %^$\4? 



^/^-aflfe'v^'.-'' 










^t:^ % * *r V'Tri^ jP v * ^r^* > 



k *> -; 













»°V 



v- 



star-. ^«i >VSfe*. ^rf* .'.fro- ^ao* : 











L 0< 



oV 
> ^ V 




,4^ :vm*e^: ,o 










r oV l 










> ^ 














+*o« 



fcs? 



:*■ 






*<> ••TT.»* .** 



v^V- ' 











>v 






<* *<...• 







Z^ <& ♦ 



**b' 




^ 








* . 



» ^ 




: * « 



EXPLANATION OF THE PSYCHO-PHYSIOLOGICAL 
CHART OF SARCOGNOMY. 



All human faculties are inherent in the soul, and are manifested 
through the co-operation of the brain ; every distinct portion of the 
brain having a distinct function. The relation of the brain to the 
body through the spinal cord and other nerves establishes an exact 
sympathy between each part of the surface of the brain and the cor- 
responding parts of the surface of the body ; thus the upper half of 
one corresponds and sympathizes with the upper half of the other, 
and the lower half with the lower — the anterior with the anterior 
and the posterior with the posterior. The map of the organs of the 
brain is reproduced on the body. 

This wonderful discovery, made in 1842, has been verified in innu- 
merable experiments since by myself and my pupils, and, being a law 
of nature, is verified in every disease. But its easy verification by 
simple experiments, and its universal presence as the law of life in dis- 
ease, have not led to its discovery or even the suspicion of its existence- 
Its demonstration is so easy and convincing that the science will be 
universally recognized as the most important addition ever made to 
biology, as soon as the attention of the educated is seriously given 
to the investigation ; for all competent and candid observers will easily 
find what I have found, and what all my pupils readily discover in 
others or in themselves. 

In these engravings, designed not for psychic philosophy, but for 
the guidance of therapeutic treatment, I have not thought it necessary 
to make minute psychic divisions. Heroism, for example, is not sep- 
arated from Firmness, nor Approbativeness from Health, nor any sub- 
division introduced between Adhesiveness and Combativeness. 

The reader should understand that each portion of the surface of 
the body is related directly to a physiological function, and only 
indirectly to a psychic function, through its sympathetic connection 
with the psychic organ, the brain. When the nervous system is very 
active and sensitive, the psychic effects are conspicuous ; but when the 
opposite condition exists, there is far less of psychic effect from any 
operation on the body. 

To appreciate Sarcognomy justly this entire volume must be pe- 
rused, for a science cannot be satisfactorily represented by a map, 
nor is this volume a perfect and complete exposition of the subject; 
its chief purpose is to guide those who wish to reduce its principles to 
practice. Many things have been omitted which would have been 
introduced in a more extensive volume, and I would mention one im- 
portant omission as to the location just behind Sanity, marked as 
Dignity in the posterior view, which is of much value as a tonic to 
the mind and nervous system, reinforcing the will-power, mental and 
physical inspiration, and independence of character. 



THERAPEUTIC SARCOGNOMY. 



THE APPLICATION OF SARCOGNOMY, THE SCIENCE OF THE 



SOUL, BRAIN AND BODY, 



Therapeutic Philosophy and Treatment 



BODILY AND MENTAL DISEASES 



BY MEANS OF 



Electricity, Nervaura, Medicine and Haemospasia, 

With a Review of Authors on Animal Magnetism and 

Massage, and Presentation of New Instruments 

for Electro-Therapeutics. 



t 




By JOSEPH RODES BUCHANAN, M.D., 

author of 

System of Anthropology," "Manual of Psychometry," and "The New 
Education." Formerly Dean of the Faculty of the Eclectic 
Medical Institute, and Professor of Physiology 
and Institutes of Medicine in Four Med- 
ical Colleges successively from 

1846 TO l88l. 



BOSTON : 
G. CUPPLES CO., Publishers. 

1891. 



Copyrighted, 1S91, 
By J. R. BUCHANAN, M.D. 



All rights reserved. 



4 



Hodges &* Adams, Printers, 21 Knapp St., Bouoru 



TO 

MY NOBLE, WISE AND MODEST FRIEND, 

UNEQUALLED AMONG MILLIONS 

IN THE READY, JUST AND GENEROUS APPRECIATION 

OF GREAT TRUTHS, 

EULOGIO PRIETO, 

OF CUBA, 

(Jifn'a Ufllume is Effect ton atclg ©eotcaUo bg 

The Author. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

I NTRODUC TION 



Discovery of the cerebral functions. The grandeur of its scope and the resistance 
of mental inertia. A few honorable recognitions. The Medical Faculty, 
the Scotch Phrenologists, and the Academy of Sciences. The Eclectic 
movement. Position of the medical profession as expressed by Prof. Gross 
and others. Discovery and statement of Sarcognomy. Cerebral physi- 
ology and corporeal psychology. Practical value of Sarcognomy and char- 
acter of my lectures and demonstrations. Practical certainty. Future of 
Sarcognomy in relation to medicine. The present volume, . . 5- 

CHAPTER II. 

dF LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER, AND ITS LOCATION IN THE BRAIN. 

Ancient medical philosophy spiritual or vital. Des Cartes the apostle of modern 
scepticism. His visionary dogmatism. Prof. Huxley a follower. Medical 
scepticism criticised by Dr. Lionel Beale. Living structures confound 
materialism. Unfairness and intolerance of medical dogmatism. Its repu- 
diation by Dr. Reynolds. The unproved hypotheses of scientists. Physio- 
logical statements of Prof. Bennett and absurd theory. Phenomena of 
living bodies described by Dr. Beale. Phenomena of amoebae and white 
globules of the blood. Prof. Ranvier's statements. Phenomena of bacteria 
and vibriones. Ciliary movements illustrated. Movements of hydra. Life 
in simple microscopic structures. Vegetable life similar to animal. Illus- 
trative examples. Haeckel's wild hypothesis of spontaneous generation. 
Huxley's admission that abiogenesis never occurs. The example of 
Monera refutes materialism. "Bastian's description of amoebae and evasion 
of the issue. No anatomical difference to explain different vital endow- 
ments in the nerves. Vitality an independent and permanent existence 
which should be honestly recognized. Total failure of the fashionable 
physiology to explain muscular motion by caloric. Exposition of this ab- 
surdity. Fallacious ideas of the action of the brain and its influence on 
health. Fallacies in education. Chemical constitution of living matter. 
Brain matter different from Huxley's protoplasm. Oxygen a necessary ele- 
ment. Bioplasm cannot be chemically produced. Nervous influx indis- 
pensable to life. Life dependent on nervous centres and nuclei. Comes 
from the nervous system and leaves from the brain. Death from below 
upwards, as shown by Bernard. More important to energize the brain and 
soul than to cultivate the body. Effect of dark or watery blood on the 
brain. Effect of pressure. Effect of shower bath on head, and of ablation 
of the upper surface of the brain. Influx not exclusively to the bra'.n but 
also to the ganglia. Transference of senses to the epigastric region, and 
co-operation of central regions of the body with the brain. Influence of 
oxygen similar to a spiritual atmosphere. Influence of solar plexus, pineal - 
gland, and cardiac plexuses and ganglia. Cerebro-spinal system primitive 
seat of life. Development of the human embryo. Report of M. Gasparin on 
Belgian miners. Cerebral stimulants a substitute for food. Something 
more than chemical elements necessary. Spiritual causes equally important. 
Life arrested when transmission from brain is interrupted. 

Effect of injuries of the spinal cord. Fatality from severe laceration. 
Pathological effects of spinal injuries. Effects on the heart. Analogy to 
typhoid fever. Effects of injury of the brain. Typhus fever and cerebral 
disease. Effects of wounds of the brain. Bichat's experiments on the brain 



VI CONTENTS. 

in dogs. Majendie's injection of water. Great quantity of blood in the brain. 
Effects of injuries of nerves. Fallacy of Claude Bernard. Wasting of the 
muscles from lack of nervous influence. The ganglionic system dependent 
on the cerebro-spinal. Brain controls both voluntary and involuntary proc- 
esses, ............. 14—46 

CHAPTER III. 

CRITICAL DISCUSSION AND EXPOSITION OF ERRORS. 

Tenacity of the old ideas. Centralization of life in higher developments. In- 
capacity to realize the functions of the heart and the brain. Disregard of 
Gall and indifference to experiments. Prof. Mitchell's experiments. De- 
fective reasoning capacity. Origin of life by influx. Sanative power of the 
brain. Philosophy of life. Huxley's admissions as to the vital power. 
Opposition to psychic science. Importance of psychic co-operation. If 
life is but the forces of matter the largest animals must have the most. 
Superiority of the small. Psychic truth demands our support. Vague ideas 
of physiologists : Todd and Bowman, Bennett, Flint, Bain. Doctrines of 
John Hunter, Dr. Prout, Muller, Beclard, Bichat, Carpenter. Life is not 
transformed heat. Carpenter's absurdities. Beale's statements as to the 
nerves. Chemical action not the source of life. Life always comes from 
life, as matter comes from matter. 

Ultimate seat of life in the tissues, in fluids and imponderables. Living 
substances in the air. How to obtain amoebae. Vital actions of minute 
bodies. Their psychic life. Character and action of bioplasm. How it 
forms the body. Passage of vital forces by contact, in and out of the body. 
Nerve organization beyond the microscope, « 47-65 

CHAPTER IV. 

SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 

Definition of Sarcognomy. Its origin. Why do we recognize psychic in- 
fluence in the body. Contrary to prevalent medical doctrines. The mis- 
directed energy of the medical profession. Incapacity of the colleges for 
psychic investigations. The body has no psychic functions in man. Con- 
scious life in the brain, physiological processes in the body. Soul controls 
both. The triple reaction is the process of life. Vagary of Leibnitz. Fail- 
ure down to the present age to investigate these problems. The five great 
reasons for the failure. Ruskin's view of it. Gall and Swedenborg. Pur- 
pose of this work. Necessity for Sarcognomy. Its bases, philosophical, 
physiological, pathological and experimental. The triune sj-mpathies. Il- 
lustrations of Sarcognomy. To be treated only as a basis for healing. The 
three methods. Indications of impressibility. Psychic treatment. Man- 
ual treatment on brain and body. Correspondence of soul, brain and body. 
General statement and directions for operating. Laws of location of the 
organs, . 66-81 

CHAPTER V. 

THE SPINAL REGION — ITS ANATOMICAL, NEUROLOGICAL, AND THERAPEUTIC 

RELATIONS. 

Duty of the healer. Necessary predominance of the upper and posterior re- 
gions. Their antagonism to the abdominal region. Upward passes. 
Morbid tendencies and vital relations of the abdominal region. Dispersive 
passes. Medical applications. Spinal region: demonstration of its impor- 
tance. Treatment of intermittent fever by M. Gondret on the spine. 
Counter-irritation at the origins of nerves. Special endowments and in- 
creased development of different parts of the spinal cord. Flexor muscles 
governed by upper, and extensor by lower portion of the cord. Importance 
of the cephalic region of the spine. Its brachial plexus and phrenic nerve. 
Its extensive distribution. The vertebral ganglia and arteries. Their con- 
trol over vital powers explained anatomically. Electric experience of Dr. 
Rockwell. Resuscitation of a moribund patient through the cephalic re- 
gion. Importance of the cephalic region in fevers. Testimony of Drs. 
Gerhard and Beard. The upper dorsal nerves and cilio-spinal region at the 



CONTENTS. Vll 

second dorsal nerve. Connection of the cuneus and angular gyrus in the 
brain with vision. Testimony of Onimus and Legros as to the cephalic re- 
gion. Thoracic and abdominal divisions of the dorsal region. Pulmonic 
influence of the dorsal region. Cardiac region of the cord. Caries of the 
spinal vertebrae, as reported by Brodie, showing the functions of the cord. 
Pathological observations of Dr. Little. Anatomical connections of the 
upper dorsal region. Treatment of hooping-cough through the upper 
spinal region. Differences of the upper and lower dorsal region explained. 
Illustrations in consumption, pneumonia. Sympathies of the chest with the 
upper region of the brain. Influence of the affections. Illustrations in 
sunstroke, typhus, and insanity. Connection of pneumonia and delir- 
ium. 

Relation of the heart to the dorsal and cervical regions. Illustrations of 
the lower dorsal region. Connection of the cephalic region with respiration 
and circulation, through the phrenic nerve, ganglia, and plexuses. Rela- 
tions of dorsal region to respiration. Experiment of Onimus and Legros. 
Relation of the diaphragm to the spine. Explanation of coughs. The most 
effective current for stimulating the diaphragm. Control of the lower dor- 
sal region over the abdominal functions. The respiratory tract on the 
abdomen. Experiments of Valentine and observations of Sherwood. 
Backache from constipation. Opposite tendencies of the upper and lower 
portions of the spinal cord. Power of the lumbar region. Experiments of 
Brachet on the lumbar region. Experiments of Budge. Anatomical de- 
scription of the lumbar and sacral nerves. Seats of sexual functions. Ob- 
servations of Longet, Breschet, and Brachet. Sacral and hypogastric 
plexuses. Budge's sexual centre. Connection of the sexual and muscular. 
Antagonism to brain in pelvic region and lower limbs. General view of 
the spine and its nervous control. 

Correlation and combination of functions. Van Kempen's experiment. 
Roots of the nerves. Complex relations of the heart with ganglia, phrenic 
nerve, and spine. Relations of the thoracic part of the cord. Cervical 
ganglia and pneumogastric. Relations of splanchnic nerves. Combina- 
tion of brain, lungs and stomach. Connection of cardiac and pulmonary 
nerve forces. Importance of the ganglionic system, . . . 82-124 

CHAPTER VI. 

PRACTICAL DIRECTIONS FOR THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. 

How to invigorate the brain for various purposes. Stimulation of posterior part 
of the body. Stimulation of the cephalic region. Treatment of the lungs 
through brain and body and by hsemostasis. Treatment of diaphragm. 
Treatment of the liver, stomach and bowels. Calorification and urinary 
organs. The Sexual energies. Treatment of paralysis. Six methods of 
treatment. Cerebral paralysis, . 125-134 

CHAPTER VII. 

RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY IN ITS DIFFERENT REGIONS. 

Division of the brain by the vertical and horizontal lines. Rational illustration. 
Plan of the human constitution, front and back, above and below the ventri- 
cles. Fundamental law of direction. Action of basilar organs. Their ef- 
fect on the body. Coronal organs antagonistic to the basilar. Effects of 
each. How the paralysis of either becomes fatal. Superior vitality of the 
upper surface of the brain. Anterior and posterior basilar organs. Seats 
of vital force at the base of the brain. The anterior basilar region and its 
subdivisions. The gastric region. Seat of appetite. The love of stimulus, 
effect of its development. How to control intemperance. Medical remedies. 
The moral and religious cure. Effects of malaria and of animal food. Treat- 
ment of the digestive organs through the brain. General character of the 
antero-basilar region. Calorification, how to excite it ; how to protect it. 
Effects of its overaction. The respiratory region. Signs of pulmonic dis-~" 
ease in the mouth. Region of Sensibility. Its confirmation by Ferrier. 
The organ of Language. Heating and cooling the temples. Region of 
Somnolence and its mental phenomena. Anterior coronal region. Tem- 
poral region, ... ....... i35-'45 




Vlll CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

ZON AL ARRANGEMENT AND THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT OF THE BRAIN. 

Explanation of Zonal Arrangement, with illustrations. Its indications of con- 
stitutional development. General law of functions. Vertical Zone of Ex- 
citability. Treatment on the cephalic region. Treatment of the heart. Of 
the thoracic region and of the liver. The Gastric and Abdominal region, and 
the Crural. The Morbid Zone explained. Hygienic caution, and curious 
illustrations. Relation of disease to the brain. Treatment of the Crural 
region. The Sexual region. Treatment of special functions. Health 
and disease. Sleep and wakefulness. The ideal powers. General vigor. 
Feverish conditions. Mental soundness. Warmth. Mental discipline. 
Nature of nervauric treatment, 146-159 

CHAPTER IX. 

HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 

Definition of Health as an organ and faculty. Why that name is used. Effects 
of the organ of Health. ^ Animation. Health associated with happiness, 
virtue, and activity. Position and influence of the organ. Its ethical and 
spiritual relations. Vital power and animation, disease and death. Func- 
tion of the shoulders and crown of the head. Relations of Health to ethics 
and religion. Its position in the brain between the moral and physical. 
The spiritual as the support of physical health. Deficiency of Language for 
nomenclature. Bia, Zoe, Anima, Animus, Psyche, Psychobiosis, and Psy- 
chodynamia as names. Animation and Health. Difficulty of expressing 
psychic and physical life in conjunction. Their combination in the superior 
posterior region of the brain and body. Healthful physical and moral ex- 
ercises. Cultivation of the sentiments qualifies for healing. Love and 
Health correlative. Experience of Dr. Jennings. Personal healing by New- 
ton and others. The religious and spiritual elements. Necessity of sci- 
entific preparation for healing. 

Psychic Treatment. Permanent or constitutional health should be es- 
tablished. This requires moral power, not passive or negative, but active vir- 
tues. Power the element of success. Pursuit of duty the only satisfactory 
success. The higher virtues, heroic. Happiness may be brought to fami- 
lies and a perfect education to youth. Psychic treatment an indispensable 
part of education. Health and Virtue twin brothers. Special directions for 
treatment by the hand and the battery, ... . 160-173 

CHAPTER X. 

OPERATIVE METHODS. 

Transmission of vital power. Proof by experiments on frogs and by anatomy. 
Failure of electrical experiments by eminent physiologists. Functions of 
the convolutions which they could not reach. My reasons for neglecting 
galvanism. Medical opposition. Psycho-vital influences most appropriate 
to the brain. Discussion of the experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig. How 
to begin experiments. Use of plasters and other agents. Familiar illus- 
trations of Sarcognomy. Pathological illustrations. Initiating experi- 
ments. Vital emanations. Positive and negative poles. Evils and dan- 
gers of electricity. Relations of operator and patient. Necessary influences 
for the operator. Spiritual inspiration ; its philosophy and power. Power 
of diagnosis. Prof. Draper's testimony as to the spirit. Conduct in the 
sick chamber; hygienic precautions. Dispersive manipulations. Non- 
conductors. Effect of passes. Quackery of massage. Activity in heal- 
ing. Precautions for maintenance of health. Dangers of contagion, 174-194 

CHAPTER XI. 

NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 

Impressibility the first question; its various external indications and causes. 
Influence of love. Improvement at the critical period of life. Test by the 
hand. Test by the eye. The receptive or impressible condition. The use 



CONTENTS. IX 

of medicines. Impressible region of body. Passive and active methods. 
Influence of warmth, food, and medicine. Virtue the best foundation. Four 
controlling powers : health, brain power, vital force, sexual development. 
The shoulder. Plan of the human constitution. Parallelism of the spirit- 
ual faculties operating through the brain, and the physical powers dis- 
played in the body. The psycho-dynamic health power; why at the shoul- 
der; its proximity to the life centres; its connection with the spinal centre 
of power and ethical region of chest; its approbative character; relation 
to intercostal nerves. The foundation of Sarcognomy. Importance of shoul- 
der exercises. The shoulder as a regulating region and centre. Treatment 
on the back. Narrow and exclusive views deprecated. Back to back prac- 
tice. Fantastic theories and unscientific methods. Narrowness and preju- 
dice. Importance of protecting the shoulders and back. Nature protects the 
shoulders and back. Nature protects the vital regions of head and 
body, 195-207 

CHAPTER XII. 

THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 

Brain power and its location. Prior development of the brain. False doctrines 
corrected. Superior organs necessary to vitaLpower in man. Brain power 
compared to Health power. Connection of the latter with Moral power and 
conduct. Local treatment. Vital Force and sexual vitality. Locations of 
Vital Force. Its distinction from Health. Influence of Vital Force when 
roused. Its connection with Nutrition. Location of the latter. Its in- 
fluence on the constitution. Importance to invalids. Treatment through 
brain. Digestion. Its connection with the spine and with the gastric region. 
Organ of Alimentiveness. Its depressing influence. Buoyant Fortitude. 
Its moral association. Fasting. Influence of Firmness pathognomically ex- 
plained. Hunger and appetite. Best method of treating stomach. Physi- 
ological influences of Firmness and the shoulder. Gastric irritations and 
emesis. Gastric medicines. Proper manipulations. Region of assimila- 
tive absorption. Moral forces concerned. How to promote assimilation. 
Spiritual relations of this region. Intellectual and occipital influences. 
Retentive power of the latter. Relaxing power of the former. Contrast of 
the Adhesive and intellectual regions. Adhesiveness on the occiput and on 
the back. Combativeness, its location and influence. Importance of Ad- 
hesiveness to patients. Importance in society and business. Retentive in- 
fluence of the back. Its explanation. Region of Business Energy. Effect 
of spinal injuries. Of repletion. Co-operation of the energies. Conserva- 
tive and destructive agencies. Upper and lower part of the abdomen. Re- 
storative influence of Adhesive region; its connection. with Coolness and 
Sleep. Philosophy of the production of sleep, and the organs concerned in 
sleep and wakefulness, 208-225 

CHAPTER XIII. 

THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 

The Gastro-enteric region, its locations and treatment. The anti-abdominal or 
tonic (and the atonic) region. Its accurate demonstration and location by 
European physiologists subsequent to my discoveries. The brain convolu- 
tions that it occupies shown in engraving. Its psychic functions. Debili- 
tating influences of abdominal region. Philosophy of Intemperance. 
Its medical and electric treatment. Illustrative experiments. Organ of 
intoxication discovered. Remedies for gastric derangements. Philosophy 
of absorbent and repellent functions. Modes of treatment. 

Abdominal Locations. i, Epigastric region. 2, Assimilation. 3, 
Respiration. 4, Calorification. 5, Excitability. 6, Lethargy. 7, Sex- 
uality. 8, Melancholy. 9, Selfishness. 10, Irritability. 11, Abdominal 
functions from digestion to defecation. 12, Disease. 13, Expression. 
Philosophy of Calorification and Coolness. The lower limbs. The thigh. 
Locomotion, Nutrition, Turbulence. The leg, its relation to evolution. 
Fanciful notions of a microcosm. Range of forces in the genesis of man, 
mineral, vegetable, animal, radiata, mollusca, vertebrata, aquatic, aerial, 
mammalian. Locations of animal life on leg, its application to physiol- 
ogy and therapeutics. Suppression of inflammation in pneumonia and fe- 
ver, and control of all vital functions by Haemospasia, . . . 226-243 



X CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 

Exposition of Haemostasis and Dr. Buckler's experiments. Dr. Bevier's practice. 
Drs. Kellie and Robonan. Superiority of Hsemospasia. Junod and 
Hahnemann's case. Rationale of Hsemospasia. Balloons and caissons. 
Effects of light and heavy pressure on muscular and nervous systems. Ori- 
gin and reception of Junod's discoveries in Hsemospasia. Effects of Hse- 
mospasia. Summary of 293 cases. Professional neglect. Description of 
its success in thirty-three cases. Success of others. Its enlargement by 
Sarcognomy. Special treatment described. Treatment of spine. Aids to 
diagnosis. Various effects of pneumatic treatment. Description of pneu- 
matic apparatus, . 244-288 

CHAPTER XV. 

PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 

JLumbo-sacral region. Importance of sexual development. Its effects. Injury 
by deficiency. Its influence for health and development. Conjugal rela- 
tions. Centres of Love, spiritual and physical. Difference of the sexes. 
Sensibility of the womb. Pelvic disorders. Value of treatment on the back. 
Use of Helonias. Medical quackery. Inguinal region. Uterine region. 
Region of Sanity and Chastity. Sexual excitement, its control and its seat 
in the brain. Pathological cases illustrating its location. Influence of 
virility on Health and Vigor. Health as a co-operative. Centre of cerebel- 
lum as a re-inforcement of Vitality. Treatment of the eyes. Anatomical 
references and correlative organs that sustain vision. Pathological rela- 
tions to insanity and nausea. Morbid tendencies of the basilar and pelvic 
organs. The true nature of insanity. Its location in the brain and the 
body. How insanity is to be cured by treatment on the body and the brain. 
Counter-irritation on the back of the neck. The hypochondriac region con- 
cerned. Location of nausea on the body. The colon, cholic, nausea, vom- 
iting and diarrhoea. Nausea of pregnancy. Influence of nausea. Method 
of its treatment, . 289-304 

CHAPTER XVI. 

ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 

Deleuze and EsdailJs Works. 

Its marvellous phenomena. Opposition of materialism. Its unscientific char- 
acter. Its neglect by the medical profession and cultivation by Egyptian 
priests. Sarcognomy. Deleuze's " Practical instruction." His errone- 
ous theories corrected. His formula for magnetizing. The scientific 
method of producing the results. The localities on the head and the body. 
The evil effects of the unscientific method. Effects of the downward passes. 
Superiority of the upward. Nature of the magnetic seance. Blind empiri- 
cism. The improper method of removing pain or disease. Prevalence of 
contagion. Use of the breath and of water. Method of waking. Use of 
magnetized water. The baquet. Exalted powers of Somnambulism. Their 
source and philosophy. Explanation of the power of operators and best meth- 
ods. Blind routine of magnetizers. Failure of the medical profession. Harts- 
horn's translation, its valuable testimony. Mechanical ideas of the medical 
profession. How to produce insensibility. Testimony of Cuvier, La Place 
andGeorget. Corroboration by Pyschometry. Treatment of Dr. Elliotson 
in London. Cloquet's operation in the magnetic state. Clairvoyance of 
Miss Brackett. Duty of the disciples of truth. 

Value of Dr. Esdaile's " Mesmerism in India." His numerous cases and 
liberal sentiments. Facility of the practice in India. A mesmeric magician. 
Testimony of the Catholic Church to the truth of animal magnetism and 
prohibition of its practice. Dr. Esdaile's first experiments on a criminal 
patient described. Great increase of impressibility. Therapeutic benefit of 
the trance. Description and explanation of the processes used in magnetiz- 
ing. Of catalepsv and its removal. Intellectual and unintellectual methods. 
Demonstrations made upon a blind man. Controlling his subjects in court. 
Practical vaLue of Sarcognomy in India, 3°5 _ 338 



CONTENTS. XI 

CHAPTER XVII. 

MECHANOTHERAPY — INCLUDING MASSAGE. 

Mechano-therapy a quackery. Works of Schreiber and Murrell. French names 
for massage. Pedantic trivialities. Superiority of methods of barbarians, 
Sandwich Islanders, Chinese, Egyptians. Painful processes of mechano- 
therapy. Superiority of those not taught by the colleges. Old practice of 
Drs. Balfour of Edinburgh, Grosvenor and Cleobury of Oxford. Great- 
rakes' cures in 1662. Collegiate opposition. Liberal sentiments of Hoff- 
man. Professional prejudice. Mechanical benefits of massage. Preten- 
tious pedantry of the books. Ignorance of Ling, the author of the Swedish 
movement-cure. Practice recommended by Schreiber. Mechanical treat- 
ment of narcotic poisoning. Transfer of vital force. Treatment of sprains. 
Mechanical treatmentof the tonsils, the womb, tumors, oedema and diseases 
of the eye. Miscellaneous imperfect treatment. Superiority of the nervau- 
ric. Professional treatment of sprains. Concussion with the hands. Jap- 
anese shampooing. Summary estimate of mechano-therapy, . . 339-362 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

RATIONAL PRACTICE GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 

The proper philosophic view of medical science, sects, and prejudices. False 
ideas of poisons. Rational practice. Statements of Dr. Grosvenor Swan, 
Dr. J. P. Chamberlin, Dr. Wm. E. Wheelock, Dr. A. J. Symes, Dr. Z. L 
Baldwin, Dr. Orrin Robertson and L. A. Hulse, Esq., concerning their prac- 
tice, guided by Sarcognomy and Psychometry, 363-392 

CHAPTER XIX. 

THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 

Cultivation of the higher organs indispensable. The various methods illus- 
trated. Effects of high altitudes on the lungs. Importance of costal res- 
piration. Illustration of the subject by the Georgia Eclectic Medical Jour- 
nal. Relation of the upper thoracic region to the ethical. Exercises of 
the limbs. Influence of altitudes. Importance of nutrition to the brain. 
False theories of a medical author. The principles that should guide 
our exercises. Evil effects of excessive muscular culture and passional 
excitement. Plan of culture proposed. Cultivation of the soul and relig- 
ious sentiments as the basis of health. Of social intercourse and smiles. 
Importance of activity, energy and sport. Causes of exhaustion. Of vocal 
culture and oratory. System of culture devised by Mr. Checkley. Treat- 
ment of the skin. Tight lacing. Thoracic hygiene and atmospheric con- 
ditions, 393-419 

CHAPTER XX. 

SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 

With supplementary suggestions as to the spinal column, ganglionic nerves, anat- 
omy of the thorax, and relation of the limbs to the trunk, . . . 420-438 

CHAPTER XXI. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

General Statement. 

Nine methods of electrical treatment : galvanism, primary, secondary, com- 
bined, static, unilateral, statico-chemical, magnetic and electro-medical. 
Use of the commutator. Simple stimulation. Rheostat. Use of the 
alternating current and its locations. Anterior and posterior, superior and 
inferior. Method of using the negative pole. Method of manual and of elec- 
tro-medical treatment. Nature and use of the positive and negative in elec- 
tricity. Static electricity and magnetism, 439-454 

CHAPTER XXII. 

REVIEW OF THE CURRENT DOCTRINES OF ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The galvanic current, the Faradic and their phenomena — their taste — their ac- 
tion on the muscles. Negative and positive currents. Merits of galvanism, 



XI 1 CONTENTS. 

Faradism and static electricity. Their reception by the profession. Elec- 
tricity as a test of death. Heat developed by the current. Sensations from 
currents. Value of the Humboldt battery. Chemical effects and prolonged 
influences. Use of the two-plate battery. Action of galvanism on motor 
nerves and production of increased strength. Effects of direct, inverse and 
alternating currents. Character of the Faradic or induced current in com- 
parison with the galvanic. Experiment on vibrating cilia. Refreshing and 
strengthening effects of galvanism. Exhaustive effects of Faradism. Ano- 
djme effects of galvanism, and cases requiring Faradism — how its effects 
are produced. Cure of locomotor ataxy and neuralgia by galvanism — its 
catalytic effects. Cutaneous Faradization. Cure of contractions. Treatment 
of antagonistic muscles. Harsh effects of Faradism. Remarkable physio- 
logical errors of Prof. Claude Bernard. Antagonism of the sensitive and 
muscular systems. Relation of the nervous system to growth. Danger of 
Faradization on the front of the neck. Cures by galvanism when Faradism 
had failed. Effectof the interruptions. Comparison continued. Direct ac- 
tion on the muscles. Penetrative power of currents. Stimulant action of 
Faradism. Medication by electric currents. Removal of poisons by elec- 
tricity. Injurious effects of the common batteries. Advantage of the muriate 
of ammonia. Action of galvanism on the ganglionic nerves. Its anti-spas- 
modic influence. Distinction of voluntary and involuntary structures. 
Galvanic current down the bowels for constipation. Failure of Fara- 
dism. Differences of electrodes. Interruptions. Delicate currents. Prac- 
tical value of the primary current, intermediate between the galvanic and 
Faradic, 455*498 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

THE EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND DEMONSTRATION OF 

SARCOGNOMY. 

By Illustrative Experiments, . 499-53 1 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 

Electric treatment. Electricity as a stimulant and in cholera. Batteries for 
electro-therapeutics, the "different cells in use, their penetrative power. 
Combination of cell and coil. The common portable battery. Electric 
currents and their modes of application. The Faradic current, its use in 
infantile marasmus. Qualities of the currents. Galvanic batteries. Cur- 
rent measurement. Connections. Mode of application. Important im- 
provement. Electrodes. Electric measurements. The coil and the cell 
combined. Currents applied to the human body and their modification and 
combination. Movable coil. Standard coil. Electric baths. Static elec- 
tricity in nature. Its rationale misunderstood. Wires and electrodes. 
Static treatment by currents and shocks, not Faradism. Proper construc- 
tion for this. Method of using static electricity. Its combination with 
other currents and with magnetism. Use of the static currents, . 534"5^2 

CHAPTER XXV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 

Electric currents and batteries. Treatment of Head and nervous system, 
directions of authors. Paralysis. Cerebral disorders and their^ treatment. 
Chorea and spasm. Neuralgia. Treatment of eyes. Diphtheria. Tooth- 
ache. Hydrophobia. Treatment of Thorax. Pneumonia. Asphyxia. 
Consumption. Pleurisy. Diseases of the heart. Aneurism. The dia- 
phragm. Hiccough. Treatment of the Abdominal Region. Fevers. 
The stomach. Nausea and vomiting. Cholera. Constipation and hernia. 
Dropsy. Rectal diseases. The liver. Electric development. Treat- 
ment of Pelvic Organs, amenorrhcea, dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia 
and parturition. Hemorrhoids. Stricture of "the urethra. Impotence and 
spermatorrhoea. Diseases of the skin. Treatment of limbs. Use of ap- 
paratus. Batteries. Static apparatus. Electro-puncture. Cauteriza- 
tion, ... . „ 563-615 



CONTENTS. Xlll 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 

Change of plan. Concise review. Sympathy of brain and skin. Climate, 
cold, heat, moisture, electricity, clothing. Fever. Meningitis. Clammy 
sweats. Electric shocks: Nervous prostration and sweating. Dr. Luys 
on the intellectual influence of the skin. Illustrations of cutaneous an- 
aesthesia and impairment of the brain. Eruptive fever and cerebral inflam- 
mation. Small-pox, erysipelas, and scarlatina. Typhus and typhoid fevers. 
Sympathy of subjacent organs. 

Pulmonary Sympathies. Correspondence of lungs with brain and re- 
lation to the Pons Varolii as the seat of respiratory power. Relation to the 
nose and mouth. Effects of catarrh and asthma. Sunstroke. Experiments 
on rabbits. Consumption and its psychic symptoms. Heat and perspi- 
ration. Bronchitis and affection of the front lobe. Its exhausting effect. 
Sympathy of the abdomen with respiration. Pneumonia : affecting the 
whole brain, delirium, heat of skin, perspiration, antagonism to abdom- 
inal organs. Pleurisy: its relation to the womb; its more violent manifes- 
tations. Laryngitis: it* influence on the brain. Sympathies of the Heart : 
Its correspondence in the brain. Mania from heart disease. Prostration 
of the brain and impressibility. Mistakes of carditis for brain disease. 
Close sympathies of heart and brain. Different effects from other organs. 
Ganglia in the neck. Connection of apoplexy and hypertrophy of heart. 

Relations of the liver and subjacent region. Disease of its control- 
ling temporo-sphenoid convolution. Relations of different parts of the 
liver. Its proximity to morbid influences. The great depression of spirits 
that it produces. Its influence in delirium tremens and in jaundice. Dif- 
ference of its upper and lower surfaces. Morbid character of abdominal 
inflammation. Dysentery, typhoid, irritation of rectum and anus. Melsena. 
Fevers omitted. 

Sympathies of pelvic region. Relation to under-jaw region and de- 
structive effects on nervous system. Illustration of this by orificial surgery. 
Relation of womb to hypersesthesia and hysteria. The two regions of 
sensibility in the brain and in the body. Relation of uterine disease to in- 
sanity. Sympathy of brain and body not uniform. Pain of urethral 
caruncles. Prostrating effect of chronic diseases of the colon. Statements 
of Dr. Prout. Cases of rectal obstruction in Ireland. Injury of sacrum in 
a boy — of coccyx in a woman. Fractures of thigh. Mental phenomena 
of hysteria and quasi disease. Inflammation of the bladder. Influence of 
the sexual faculties. Physiological explanation. Extreme contagiousness. 
Puerperal mania. Morbid effects from glans and prepuce. 

Sympathies of the limbs. Correspondence of upper and lower. Pas- 
sionate tendencies of gout and rheumatism. Remarkable effects of injuries 
of the knee and the foot. Conclusion, 616-666 

Glossary, . 667-671 

Anatomical Illustrations, 672-675 



PREFACE. 



In this volume, prepared in the very limited time allowed by my 
engagements, I cannot claim that Therapeutic Sarcognomy is either 
very fully or very accurately developed. What time forbids to me 
will be more fully accomplished by my successors ; and perhaps in 
future editions the necessary emendations and additions may be 
made. 

Nevertheless, it is a fearless solution of the problem of soul and 
body, which lies at the foundation of all philosophy — a problem 
which my predecessors generally have shunned as if it were inacces- 
sible to human intelligence, Gall and Swedenborg alone having 
attempted each a partial solution. 

The correctness of my exposition of the triune constitution of man 
is sustained by the experiments which I have for many years been 
making in private and before classes, which my pupils have satisfac- 
torily repeated, and it is sustained by universal experience in the his- 
tory of diseases, which demonstrate according to their locality the 
laws of Sarcognomy. It has also a beautiful and interesting artistic 
illustration in the varieties of the human form, attitude, and gesture, 
which I hope hereafter to present. Nevertheless, in view of the 
history of scientific progress (which shows the ability of ignorance 
and falsehood to hold their ground for several generations against 
positive demonstration), it would be folly to anticipate a full and 
candid investigation of Sarcognomy by the leading authorities during 
the remaining years of the present century. Candid investigation 
of strange truths is not the habit of any nation, and is not taught in 
any system of education at present. The experience of Hahnemann 
and Beach, as well as prior reformers, shows the immense intellectual 
inertia of the colleges. 

The scientific innovator is compelled to realize the opposition of 
blind conservatism as Darwin did in 1845, when he wrote: "I am a 
bold man to lay myself open to being thought a complete fool and a 
most deliberate one ; " and again : " I know how much I open myself 
to reproach for such a conclusion, but I have at least honestly and 



2 PREFACE. 

deliberately come to it." Yet these conclusions were reached by 
moving along in accordance with the general trend of scientific thought 
among the most advanced thinkers. But he who opposes the spirit 
of the age, and the authority of all the universities and eminent 
authors, cannot reasonably expect justice or success in his lifetime, 
even with a strictly demonstrable science, for habit and prejudice 
are, as they ever have been, much stronger than reason, and the in- 
novator whose knowledge is revolutionary is refused a Jieariiig until 
he has gathered a considerable and influential following. To gather 
such a following and win a personal triumph has not been my purpose. 
I am content to know that (whatever errors or inaccuracies I have 
fallen into) I have surely developed eternal truths and laid a basis for 
the philosophy that will elevate the destiny of man. Of this philos- 
ophy Sarcognomy is an important part. 

As to the verity of my experiments on the brain and body on 
which the science of Anthropology rests for its evidence, I refer to 
my experiments before public audiences in New York and Boston, 
to the reports of many committees of investigation forty years ago, 
especially those of the faculty of Indiana University, the committee 
of Boston physicians and the New York committee of which Dr. 
Forry and the poet Bryant were members, and the unanimous testi- 
mony of those who have repeated my experiments wherever I have 
taught, including a number of eminent medical professors who have 
been my colleagues. The large and intelligent medical class of the 
Eclectic Medical Institute of 1849-50 (then the leading medical col- 
lege at Cincinnati) (Prof. Warriner being chairman) expressed their 
conclusions as follows : " Many of us at the commencement of these 
series of lectures were sceptical as to the impressibility of the subject 
in the waking state, but we take pleasure in announcing that the re- 
motest doubt is now dispelled. We have seen the subject deprived of 
muscular power ; we have witnessed a great increase of his strength ; 
we have seen any faculty of the mind brightened or subdued at pleas- 
ure ; we have personally performed many of the experiments set 
forth in the "Journal of Man," and can testify, as can many in this 
city who have witnessed our experiments in private circles, that the 
half has not yet been published to the world." The frequent repeti- 
tion of my experiments, not only in this country but in Great Britain, 
by the late Dr. Spencer T. Hall and many others,* in private and in 



* I have not thought it necessary to describe in this volume the numerous and 
marvellous experiments on the brains of adults during the last forty years, but would 
mention another class still more convincing. 

The eminent Dr. Ashburner, of London, published among accurate and well- 
authenticated facts the statement of his friend, A. Lidington : " I have many times 



PREFACE. 3 

public, has given as broad a foundation as could be demanded for the 
verification of such discoveries, even though they constitute a com- 
plete revolution in Physiology and Psychology. 

The "consensus of the competent" is the foundation on which all 
established sciences rest, and the competent are those only who seek 
the truth, and by carefully investigating a science arrive at positive 
and unanimous convictions. I cannot recognize those as competent 
who, when scientific demonstrations are made known to them, obey 
a thoughtless impulse or prejudice by neglecting or refusing to in- 
vestigate. No matter what their standing, they cannot be recognized 
as competent until they have shown their competency by candid and 
careful investigation. The French Academy in rejecting Harvey 
proved itself incompetent, and professors who from prejudice neglect 
investigation must ever be accounted as incompetent as the ignorant 
mob. 

On the other hand, the unanimous concurrence of all who have be- 
come well acquainted with Therapeutic Sarcognomy demonstrates its 
apparent scientific truth, and this concurrent sentiment of all who 
have attended my expositions was well expressed as follows, by the 
students attending the 8th session of the College of Therapeutics in 
Boston, in 1887 : — 

" We feel that we have been very fortunate in finding so valuable 
a source of knowledge, whose future benefits to the human race, in 
many ways, cannot be briefly stated ; and we would assure all who 
may attend this college or read the published works of Prof. 
Buchanan, or his monthly, the "Journal of Man," that they will, when 
acquainted with the subject, be ready to unite with us in appreciating 
and honoring the greatest addition ever made to biological and phys- 
iological sciences." 

Among the competent observers may be mentioned Prof. G. W. 
Winterburn, who as editor of the "American Homceopathist" expressed 
himself as follows : " Having been cognizant of the very valuable and 

excited the different phrenological organs of the brain of this child, and he has 
answered to each one most correctly ; for instance, when I mesmerized the organ of 
Tune, he has declared to me that he can hear beautiful music; and so with Venera- 
tion, he has felt irresistibly impelled to pray and speak of God and heaven. I have 
more often operated upon little children than adults, purposely to convince the people 
of the truth of your science; for surely children so young, and many of whom I have 
never seen before, could not be guilty of any deception." 

In my experiments with private classes, nearly every member of the class was usu- 
ally made a subject of experiments, which was not practicable with larger audiences. 
The report by Drs. Ingalls, Mattson, and others on my Boston lectures in 1843, 
said : "Most of us witnessed many hundred experiments on at least six impressible 
subjects — one a gentleman and member of the class, whose intelligence and moral 
worth cannot be questioned." 



4 PREFACE. 

original work accomplished by Prof. Buchanan in physiology, and having 
seen him demonstrate many times on persons of all grades of intellec- 
tual and physical health the truths he here affirms, the subject has 
lost the sense of novelty to us, and is accepted as undoubtedly 
proven." 

This volume is therefore presented, not to introduce the subject by 
argument and evidence, for the evidence has long been on record, 
but to introduce its readers to a portion of the vast science of Anthro- 
pology, the future guide of human progress. 

The knowledge of Therapeutic Sarcognomy, when widely diffused 
and incorporated in popular education, will bring the grand philoso- 
phy of Anthropology into familiar contact with daily life, enforcing its 
educational principles as to the development of character. It will 
give the mother and father a power of controlling their offspring in a 
manner heretofore unknown, by which the development of both soul 
and body may be gradually carried on tow r ard perfection, freeing the 
soul from selfish vices, freeing the body from disease and weakness, 
and clarifying the mind for the recognition of truth. 

In the treatment of disease it gives many suggestions arising from 
a new philosophy of life, many remedial measures now unknown in 
medical colleges, of wide application, and comprehensive methods of 
treatment, which upon impressible constitutions produce cures so 
marvellous and so speedy as to excite a stubborn scepticism among 
those who have been kept in ignorance of the powers of the nervous 
system. 

There is a large class of persons, constituting a large majority in 
southern climates, whose constitutions can be controlled and diseases 
relieved by nervauric treatment with the hand. To all such a knowl- 
edge of Therapeutic Sarcognomy will constitute a protection to 
health and a prolongation of life. 

It will guard them also by teaching them how to make a proper 
jhoice of medicines and avoid submitting to erroneous treatment, 
prided by their own psychometric skill. 

To another large class it will furnish facilities for successful electric 
reatment, under their own direction. The importance of thus pla- 
:ing scientific treatment within the reach of all will be realized when 
ve reflect that there are no diseases, excepting those of accidental or 
:ontagious origin, which may not be warded off in their first ap- 
proaches. To teach this to mankind will abolish a large majority of 
their ill-health. 



CHAPTER I.— INTRODUCTION. 



Discovery of the cerebral functions — The grandeur of its scope and the resistance 
of mental inertia — A few honorable recognitions — The Medical Faculty, the 
Scotch Phrenologists, and the Academy of Sciences — The Eclectic movement — 
Position of the medical profession as expressed by Prof. Gross and others — Discov- 
ery and statement of Sarcognomy — Cerebral physiology and corporeal psychology 
— Practical value of Sarcognomy and character of my lectures and demonstrations — 
Practical certainty — Future of Sarcognomy in relation to medicine — The present 
volume. 

In i 84 i I had the good fortune to consummate six years of investi- 
gation of the cerebral functions by the discovery that the functions of 
the human brain, instead of being an inaccessible mystery, as they have 
seemed to the scientific world, were really the most accessible of all the 
great secrets of nature, and that a method of investigation, the very 
simplicity of which had caused it to be scornfully overlooked, was com- 
petent to open the citadel of life, the organ of the soul, the seat of all 
consciousness, all faculties and passions, the organic embodiment of 
that divine principle in which exist all the potentialities of the universe, 
and consequently the basis of all science and wisdom. 

Of all subjects that have ever interested the mind of man, this is 
beyond all comparison the most important, whether we consider its 
scope and' its grandeur as a philosophy, the light which it throws on 
all other departments of investigation, or its immediate practical 
utility in reorganizing, correcting, and developing therapeutics, sociol- 
ogy, education, religion, pneumatology, and the arts of human expres- 
sion. Its scope, its power, and its grandeur in these respects cannot 
\>e adequately conceived until the sciences and the philosophies, that 
must result from such a discovery, shall have been developed and 
published, although to a clear intuitive thinker it may be apparent, 
as it was to David Hume, that in mastering Anthropology we conquer 
all science and philosophy. But few can realize this fully until they 
become acquainted with the vast extent of Anthropology. To many 
it becomes apparent when they master the first chapter of Anthropol- 
ogy — the science of Psychometry. 

Such a discovery in science and philosophy, bringing within our 



6 INTRODUCTION. [CHAP. I. 

reach a larger realm of truth than all the sciences and philosophies 
taught in the universities, was like the discovery of Columbus, which 
added a new and better world to geographical knowledge and national 
expansion, the initial incident which marked the humble beginning of 
a mighty change in human destiny ; and if it were not the still exist- 
ing condition of the human mind to be dominated by the past — if habit 
and conservative inertia were not still, as they have ever been, the 
dominant forces of human existence, the authentic announcement that 
such a discovery had been made in the honorable and sincere cultiva- 
tion of science would have commanded the attention of the civilized 
world, not with telegraphic speed, for telegraphs were then unknown, 
but as rapidly as the mail could have borne the news, and an imme- 
diate investigation by all the colleges and learned societies would have 
settled the question in the public mind, and made the year 1841 the 
most significant epoch in intellectual history — the year in which man- 
kind added demonstrable psychic to demonstrable physical science, 
by which we approach nearer to the world of causes and to the ele- 
ments of divine wisdom. But there were no collegiate organizations 
prepared or willing to look to the future, as there were none to wel- 
come the discoveries of Galileo and of Harvey. The great ear of the 
literary world was still turned backward to catch the lingering echoes 
of the crude speculations that preceded the dawn of science, for the 
names of Plato and Aristotle were still revered in the universities. 

It is true the announcement appearing in the " Louisville Journal " 
was copied throughout the United States, that my experiments on 
the brain were immediately repeated by Prof. Mitchell, of Jefferson 
Medical College, and that many repetitions of them in an imperfect 
manner were made before public audiences in this country and abroad, 
while I was myself for a few years actively engaged in presenting the 
subject by lectures and experiments, and challenging investigation by 
the scientific ; but it soon became apparent that habit, not reason, 
governed the world, and that a professor of European astronomy 
would not be no more uninteresting and unwelcome in China, than a 
discoverer presenting the key to a new world of science in Amer- 
ican colleges or scientific magazines, and I abandoned the thankless 
task of propagandism to confine my teaching to a college in which I 
addressed my own pupils. 

There were, of course, some honorable recognitions of my demon- 
strations (see credentials of Anthropology in the Appendix), and the 
"Democratic Review," recognizing logically the importance of the dis- 
coveries, affirmed that all prior discoveries in physiological science 
shrunk into insignificance in comparison with these discoveries in the 
brain ; but it was the only magazine, I believe, which had the logical 



CHAP. I.] INTRODUCTION. J 

capacity and the manliness to make such a statement, although it 
would not seem to require any great intellectual capacity to under- 
stand that a discovery of the functions of the brain, which reveals the 
exact capacities of the soul, and the mental and physiological powers 
of the brain, the seat of life, the controller of all physiological func- 
tions, the centre of all physiology and psychology, must be of far 
greater importance than any scientific discoveries heretofore made. 

I cannot speak upon such a theme in the language of diffidence and 
doubt, with reverence for the wisdom which governs the world (and 
forbids all rapid progress), for the true discoverer who has ascertained 
any fact is, as to that fact, an authority superior to the entire world 
to whom it is unknown. My discoveries of over forty years standing, 
often verified by others, and never refuted or seriously impeached, 
challenge attention still, but I present them only as a teacher to 
those who wish to profit by new science, without seeking to force 
them upon the attention of those who have no desire to enlarge their 
knowledge of such subjects. 

It is true that in my credulous and inexperienced enthusiasm I did 
at first suppose that a science derived from and resting upon experi- 
ment, and eagerly courting investigation by the experimental method 
— a science of unequalled importance and fascination — would speedily 
interest the educated classes of all nations, but I was quickly unde- 
ceived. Of the medical professors in whose halls I had heard the 
first exposition of medical science, I found but one (and he the most 
learned and distinguished) who had either the interest in the subject 
to induce them to investigate, or the intellectual training and knowl- 
edge that would have made them fully competent. Under his auspices 
I sent an account of my discoveries to what I supposed to be the 
most competent and appreciative body in Great Britain — the gentle- 
men who had maintained a phrenological society at Edinburgh and 
published the " Phrenological Journal," and were therefore familiar with 
novel investigations of the brain ; but my report, though authenticated 
by one whom they knew as a distinguished scientist (Prof. Charles 
Caldwell, the virtual founder of the Louisville Medical College), was 
too marvellous for them, and they simply filed it away (like a caveat) 
as a document fit to be preserved for future reference, but not fit to 
be published. 

After the failure with the Faculty, the failure at Edinburgh, and an 
abortive attempt to procure a thorough investigation by the Academy 
of Arts and Sciences at Boston, medical journals being closed against 
such investigations as mine, I thought it useless to seek any further a 
decision by any authoritative scientific tribunal, and united with other 
unconquerable liberals in the medical profession to establish a liberal 



8 INTRODUCTION. [CHAP. I. 

system of medical education and break the unreformable intellectual 
despotism which had held and still holds the great mass of the med- 
ical profession. That effort was successful, and the flourishing con- 
dition of the Eclectic party in medicine, which was then organized, 
gives promise that in time there will be freedom of investigation in 
medical study, medical practice, and medical discovery. 

That such discoveries as the new cerebral science which constitutes 
a complete Anthropology were entirely inaccessible to the mass of 
the medical profession under their old code, was very apparent ; and 
that they would not, under any circumstances, be examined by the 
National Association which dominates over the profession in Amer- 
ica, and therefore that it would be folly to address a memoir to them 
or invite an experimental investigation of the new science, I was very 
courteously but very distinctly informed, in a letter by the late Prof. 
Gross, in 1878, who was, if any one, then entitled to be recognized as 
the head of the profession in this country, and who, appreciating the 
impossibility under the code (and the unwritten code) which governs 
the Association, advised me to seek some scientific body outside of 
the medical profession, to investigate discoveries which belong to the 
sphere of medical science (of which biology is a conspicuous portion), 
entirely unconscious of the latent satire upon his profession which he 
expressed. 

I was previously well aware of its truth, as a memoir upon cerebral 
embryology which I offered the National Scientific Association at 
Cincinnati in 1851 was suppressed by the intrigues of medical oppo- 
nents who desired to crush the movement of medical liberalism rep- 
resented by our college ; and the committee of investigation appointed 
by the Kentucky State Medical Society at my request, in 1877, so 
entirely neglected their duties that they did not even hold a meeting. 

Under these circumstances, the reader will not wonder that this 
work comes forth, as a manual for students, on my own authority, not 
authenticated by the medical profession or any collegiate body, 
excepting its support by the parent school of American Eclecticism, 
in which for ten years my teaching was the recognized philosophy of 
the Institute. 

The present volume, however, is not an exposition of Anthropology, 
but a sketch of the therapeutic application of Sarcognomy, published 
in advance of its proper place in the exposition of Anthropology, to 
satisfy the demands of students for a text-book to aid in retaining my 
instructions, and to reach a great number of healing practitioners who 
need an exposition of the science which makes manual healing a 
scientific art. 

This application of my discoveries arises from the fact that in 1842 



CHAP. I.] INTRODUCTION. 9 

my discovery of the cerebral functions was completed by the discov- 
ery of the sympathetic relations of the brain and the body, in conse- 
quence of which, the functional operations of the brain, which when 
confined within the cranium are purely psychic, become, when trans- 
ferred to the body by the laws of sympathy and the laws of functional 
operation, physiological in their effects, and also, by the inevitable 
manner in which they use the body for their purposes in voluntary 
acts, produce the same effects which result directly from the laws of 
sympathy — a wonderful illustration of the ingenuity and divine 
wisdom of the plan of the human constitution. 

But the reactive effect of the same law renders operations which 
are purely physiological in the body, such as circulation, digestion, or 
muscular action, in their reflex influence on the brain, disturbing or 
modifying influences of psychic life. That such reflex influence is 
continually in progress, we readily perceive when we think of the 
effects on the brain and mind of an excessive dinner, a glass of brandy, 
or a copious inhalation of pure air; and a vast array of mental symp- 
toms accompanying diseases of various organs, which have been 
observed especially by homoeopathic physicians, carries us still further 
into a recognition of the special influences each portion of the body 
exerts, in its irritated or inflamed conditions, upon the state of the 
mind. 

Thus we have, by rational necessity, a science of cerebral physiology, 
or physiological influences of the brain, and, on the other hand, a 
science of corporeal psychology, or influence of the body upon the 
brain and mind. In all of which we understand that these inverted 
or reflex sciences, cerebral physiology and corporeal psychology, are 
partly sciences of sympathetic association and reflex influence, and 
partly sciences of functional action, as the vital forces in the brain 
act directly upon their subordinate apparatus in the body, and the 
organs of the body in their functional action directly influence the 
brain, by means of nervous connection, and by their influence upon 
the blood, which, as it passes through the body, receives and carries 
along the influence and modification produced by each organ. In 
addition to which, each organ in the brain or body is compelled for 
its own efficiency to use its correspondent organ, as Combativeness 
uses the muscles and heart, and as the vigorous muscular and cardiac 
action rouses the combative spirit — or as the perceptive organs use 
the eye, and the eye, in its visual action, rouses the perceptive facul- 
ties. 

Thus, we have a science of cerebral and corporeal correspondence 
and association, which, above, is cerebral physiology, and below, 
a compound science of corporeal psychology and physiology combined, 



IO • INTRODUCTION. [CHAP. I. 

which I have called Sarcognomy ; the primitive effect of any excite- 
ment in the body being physiological, and the secondary psycho- 
logical. 

It is this primitive physiological effect to which this volume will be 
mostly devoted, for Sarcognomy embraces not only the discovery of 
the sympathetic psychic effects, but the still more important principle 
that each vital function of the body and the soul is expressed at the sur- 
face of the brain and of the body, and that for every function there is 
an external locality at which it may be reached, and stimulated or 
tranquillized by nervauric methods, by electricity, or by heat, cold, and 
medical applications. 

How very important it is, then, that those who treat human diseases 
by the application of the hand or by electricity should know the in- 
fluence of each portion of the surface, and of the currents passed 
through the body from one locality to another, since these vital 
forces which have been discovered, and which are controlled by the 
hand (and the battery), are not merely specific and limited influences 
for each organ, but are also general influences for the brain and body, 
productive of general conditions, as, for example, the influences at 
the shoulder, which are universally tonic, and restorative to mind and 
body, the irritations of the abdominal viscera, which are peculiarly 
exhaustive and depressing, and the pelvic irritations, which derange 
the nervous system. The influence of the electric hygienic current 
animates every function of life, and every current through the body 
produces specific physiological and psychic effects. This gives us an 
entirely new conception of the vital forces of the human constitution. 

The principles of Sarcognomy were very briefly presented in my 
system of Anthropology thirty-five years ago, but without the full- 
ness of directions necessary to guide the medical practitioner in its 
application. When I resumed medical instruction in 1877, I began to 
teach classes the manual treatment of disease according to the prin- 
ciples of Sarcognomy, giving some hints also as to the collateral use 
of electricity ; and in the College of Therapeutics at Boston I have 
given a complete exposition of manual and electric treatment. But 
experience has convinced me of the absolute necessity of a manual for 
habitual guidance of the practitioner in a matter so entirely foreign to 
the education and habits of society. 

My lectures have been invariably accompanied by practical demon- 
stration of the truth of all that was taught ; the majority of the 
classes have been sufficiently sensitive to feel, recognize, and describe 
the influence of every function described by Sarcognomy, often throw- 
ing new light upon the subject by the peculiar manner in which each 
one was affected. 



CHAP. I.] INTRODUCTION. II 

As a method of healing, Therapeutic Sarcognomy was regularly 
illustrated upon the members of the classes by treatment of their own 
infirmities, pains, or diseases, as a demonstration of the value of the 
methods and a part of the instruction. There was no more hesitation 
or doubt than in the collegiate lectures which present and illustrate 
the experimental science of chemistry, nor will there be any difficulty 
or hesitation among those who read this volume, and, entering into 
the spirit of the subject, engage in the experimental demonstrations 
which would make them practically familiar with the subject, in the 
manner that I have recommended. Students who are now healing 
diseases upon the principles of Sarcognomy find their faith and 
zeal continually increasing by the results of practice. But I presume 
the result may be different with those who approach the subject in a 
spirit of antagonistic scepticism, and, without proper experimental 
inquiry, attempt to form opinions by a priori speculations upon the 
basis of their knowledge of other subjects and their ignorance of this. 
Perchance there may be reviewers, too, who would rather assail than 
investigate, and who do not feel that practical ignorance of any sub- 
ject is any disqualification for instructing the public. This volume 
was not written for that class, but for sincere seekers of scientific 
truth who have sufficient sincerity and rationality to recognize the 
same qualities in the author, and to believe that a system of science 
which has been cordially accepted by all who have become well 
acquainted with it is worthy of patient study. 

I might have introduced a long array of the unanimous testimony 
of those who have felt the truth of Sarcognomy in their own persons 
and of those who have been healed upon its principles ; but such is 
not the custom of scientific teachers. We state the truths that exist 
in nature ; we state what we have found, and we show others how to 
find the same. 

That which I have taught as to the constitution of man, which I 
have illustrated in thousands of experiments upon others, is also to 
me a matter of personal knowledge. I feel the influence of many 
localized functions described in Sarcognomy, and I can speak of them 
with confidence as I could say that I see with my eyes or hear with 
my ears, and hence I do not feel like arguing upon such subjects or 
adducing any testimony as to truths which are so familiar. 

Yet, although I do not consider such testimonials necessary in this 
volume, I am not indifferent to the expressions of those who honor- 
ably and sincerely study the laws of nature in the same spirit as 
myself, and who by their observations may throw additional light 
upon the laws and phenomena which I have so briefly stated. I 
would therefore earnestly invite the correspondence of those who 



12 INTRODUCTION. [CHAP. I. 

undertake to investigate and practice in this new department and to 
cultivate a science which time has not permitted me to elaborate to 
the perfection in which it may be enjoyed by posterity. 

I shall respond with equal pleasure whether my correspondent 
shall enumerate his triumphs or state his difficulties ; whether he 
desires additional information or contributes facts and discoveries 
made by himself in the boundless field of Sarcognomy and Therapeu- 
tics. 

The period of life at which I have arrived does not permit me to 
anticipate witnessing the future triumphs of Sarcognomy and its rev- 
olutionary influence on medical science, or the new aspects its thera- 
peutics may assume under scientific cultivation, and I am, therefore, 
more desirous of communicating with those who become my co-labor- 
ers in this science, of which this volume is a partial exposition only. 
In another volume 1 propose to show the existing status of Electric 
Therapeutics, and the fundamental changes in its practice and princi- 
ples which are made by Sarcognomy, as well as the new apparatus by 
which I hope to enlarge its powers and render it more worthy of gen- 
eral use by medical practitioners and manual healers. With or with- 
out the aid of electricity Sarcognomy must become a very important 
element in popular hygiene and education — a grand agency 
for the prevention of disease and development of health. 

In the higher civilization of the approaching century a knowledge 
of the constitution and laws of the soul, brain, and body, which con- 
stitutes the only philosophic basis of hygiene, therapeutics, education, 
religion, and sociology, will become the most important acquisition of 
a liberal education, and will be considered a necessary element in the 
education of all. 

It is well, before offering the specific therapeutics of this volume, 
to glance at the entire scope of the Therapeutics to be developed by 
Sarcognomy. If the healing art is based upon the true science of 
life, and if (as will be shown) life is an enduring spiritual power, in a 
being of wonderfully complex constitution and capacities, which 
organizes the human form into a complete expression of itself and of 
every faculty of its complex existence (designed to act on matter here 
and in a spiritual world hereafter) — each faculty having a double 
purpose, spiritual and material, and having a specific structure for 
manifestation in the brain and in the body — and if these vital 
powers (their localities being shown by Sarcognomy) can be reached, 
stimulated, strengthened, and modified by other means than drugs, 
with a precision never before known, may not this new therapeutics 
largely supersede the drugging method by virtue of its simplicity and 
safety ? To what extent this can be done must be shown by the stu- 
dents of Sarcognomy. 



CHAP. I.] INTRODUCTION. 1 3 

To a large class, at present, the vital nervaura has proved suffi. 
ciently potent to make medicines unnecessary, but to a still larger 
class, in the temperate zones, it is not sufficient, and cannot be sub- 
stituted for the cheaper agency of medicine to any great extent. 
For that larger class, however, we have the irresistible agencies of 
electricity and caloric, the application of which needs only the guid- 
ance of Sarcognomy to which this volume is devoted. With such 
agencies at command, enthusiasts may exclaim, " Throw physic to the 
dogs ; " but medical remedies are too potent, too convenient and eco- 
nomical, to be discarded by those who understand their value. Nor 
can they be very extensively discarded to introduce the use of elec- 
tricity, until its application shall have been perfected by Sarcognomy, 
and until by apparatus different from any now in use it shall have 
been made more genial, safe, and curative. The new methods of Psy. 
chometry and Sarcognomy will give to society that thorough under- 
tanding of remedies which will render their use safe, and removes 
one of the great evils of the old-fashioned practice. 

In this volume, the nervauric method, which uses the human hand, 
will be fully presented, with the anatomical and physiological bases of 
Sarcognomy, and with incidental instruction in the use of electricity. 
The numerous illustrations of Sarcognomy in the principal diseases 
will be briefly stated, the important psychic laws of therapeutics 
will be explained, the mechanical methods of controlling the circula- 
tion illustrated, and the processes of Animal Magnetism, Massage, 
and Psychic Healing reviewed. 

Boston, 1889. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER, AND ITS 
LOCATION IN THE BRAIN. 

Ancient medical philosophy spiritual or vital — Des Cartes the apostle of modern 
scepticism — His visionary dogmatism — Prof. Huxley a follower — Medical scep- 
ticism criticised by Dr. Lionel Beale — Living structures confound materialism — 
Unfairness and intolerance of medical dogmatism — Its repudiation by Dr. Reynolds 

— The unproved hypotheses of scientists — Physiological statements of Prof. Ben- 
nett and absurd theory — Phenomena of living bodies described by Dr. Beale — 
Phenomena of amoeba? and white globules of the blood — Prof. Ranvier's statements 

— Phenomena of bacteria and vibriones — Ciliary movements illustrated — Move- 
ments of hydra — Life in simple microscopic structures — Vegetable life similar to 
animal — Illustrative examples — Haeckel's wild hypothesis of spontaneous genera- 
tion — Huxley's admission that abiogenesis never occurs — The example of Monera 
refutes materialism — Bastian's description of amoebae and evasion of the issue — No 
anatomical difference to explain different vital endowments in nerves — ■ Vitality an 
independent and permanent existence which should be honestly recognized — Total 
failure of the fashionable physiology to explain muscular motion by caloric — Expo- 
sition of this absurdity — Fallacious ideas of the action of the brain and its influence 
on health — Fallacies in education — Chemical constitution of living matter — Brain 
matter different from Huxley's protoplasm — Oxygen a necessary element — Bio- 
plasm cannot be chemically produced — Nervous influx indispensable to life — Life 
dependent on nervous centres and nuclei — Comes from the nervous system and 
leaves from the brain — Death from below upwards, as shown by Bernard — More 
important to energize the brain and soul than to cultivate the body — Effect of dark 
or watery blood on the brain — Effect of pressure — Effect of shower bath on head, 
and of ablation of the upper surface of the brain — Influx not exclusively to the 
brain but also to the ganglia — Transference of senses to the epigastric region, and 
co-operation of central regions of the body with the brain — Influence of oxygen 
similar to a spiritual atmosphere — Influence of solar plexus, pineal gland, and car- 
diac plexuses and ganglia — Cerebro-spinal system primitive seat of life — Develop- 
ment of the human embryo — Report of M. Gasparin on Belgian miners — Cerebral 
stimulants a substitute for food — Something more than chemical elements neces- 
sary — Spiritual causes equally important — Life arrested when transmission from 
brain is interrupted. 

Effect of injuries of the spinal cord — Fatality from severe laceration — Patholog- 
ical effects of spinal injuries — Effects on the heart — Analogy to typhoid fever — 
Effects of injury of the brain — Typhus fever and cerebral disease — Effects of 
wounds of the brain — Bichat's experiments on the brain in dogs — Majendie's 
injection of water — Great quantity of blood in the brain — Effects of injuries of 
nerves — Fallacy ofClaude Bernard — Wasting of the muscles from lack of nervous 
influence — The ganglionic system dependent on the cerebro-spinal — Brain controls 
both voluntary and involuntary processes. 



CHAP. II. J LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. I 5 

The medical philosophy of to-day is low in the trough between the 
great waves of thought which once touched the higher realms of 
being, and will again in its reaction from a downward career. 

The old medical philosophy which exclusively ruled the world until 
the 17th century, recognized the spirit or pneuma as the basis or 
essence of vitality.* Van Helmont, Stahl, Harvey, Hunter, Cuvier, 
and Bichat were vitalists, recognizing the vital force as distinct 
from and superior to the chemical forces which were subordinate 
and antagonistic to vitality. 

Des Cartes (1596-1650), the apostle of Scepticism, led the way in 
that style of dogmatic denial, inspired by the combative animal 
nature, which has done so much for the limitation of human knowl- 
edge and the diffusion of falsehood ; for dogmatism is not merely 
agnostic and sceptical — not content with simply ignoring principles 
or truths that are great and wonderful, but associated with a self- 
sufficiency which prompts to the arrogant presentation of a priori 
hypotheses, often of the most absurd nature, to sustain its own con- 
tracted views, which originate in the rejection of evidence and neg- 
lect of observation. His astronomical system of vortices was but a 
crude speculation, which was set aside by the scientific researches of 
Newton. Equally visionary were his conceptions of the human con- 
stitution as a physical body operating wholly by physical laws, but 
giving lodgment to a soul in the pineal gland, which was simply a 
spectator, having no action upon the body and receiving no influence 
from it — a baseless notion, more fully developed afterward by 
Leibnitz. The speculative dogmatism of Des Cartes has commended 
him to the admiration of the famous modern sceptic, Prof. Huxley, 
who has revamped the other insane notion of Des Cartes, that ani- 
mals are mere machines, operating without consciousness or thought, 
as a clock or any other physical apparatus — a very logical inference 
from materialism. 

• The Cartesian spirit of dogmatism, limiting the mind to the concep- 
tion of physical facts, has taken possession of the medical profession, 
and Dr. Lionel Beale well says : — 

"The disciples of the new philosophy insist that there is but one 
force or power in nature, that the sun is the source of that force, and 
forms livers, hearts, lungs and brains ; and that every living thing is 
formed by him ; that, in the language of Bence Jones — 'The one 
law of the union of force and matter, and of the conservation of 
energy, obtains throughout the organic as well as the inorganic crea- 



♦Van Helmont located the 6oul in the epigastric region, because he supposed 
the brain had no circulation of blood. 



1 6 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

tion.'* I feel quite sure that if the physicists who make these con- 
fident assertions could condescend to study the phenomena of very 
simple living things, they could very soon discover that they had no 
case at all. Physico-chemical dogmatizing of this kind has been 
going on for twenty years. It has done nothing towards unravelling 
the mysteries of life which meet an honest student of nature at every 
turn, and it has led a number of idle people to believe that we really 
know a great deal more than we do know." v 

The "simple living things" which confound materialism are seen 
in every living structure. Such structures are built up by a struc- 
tureless, transparent jelly, called protoplasm, or more properly 
bioplasm, which is the seat of life, and is self-moving with motions 
for which no scientist has ever discovered any other cause than 
vitality — with a power of assimilating and vitalizing dead matter, 
and a power of organizing structures for the formation of which no 
reason can be given except that their formation is the result of the 
vitality which maintains the mysterious motions of the bioplasm. 

Medical dogmatism is not philosophic ; it is not a faithful seeker 
of facts, but rejects or stubbornly evades those which might give 
deeper philosophic views, and seems to hold that any fact contradict- 
ing materialistic theories may be ignored entirely, or may be dis- 
carded on any frivolous pretext, and that any author who records 
such facts should be suppressed or ignored. Hence a large amount 
of most valuable scientific literature is entirely unknown to the pupils 
of the colleges, and this ignorance is firmly maintained ; for the phy- 
sician is ostracised or scoffed at, and the professor ejected from every 
honorable position, who treats all facts with fairness and makes no 
secret of his convictions. Yet all are not governed by this absolute 
materialism. Dr. Reynolds, in the address on medicine delivered in 
1874 before the British Medical Association, said: "Physical force 
may be compared to vital acts, but life itself is the special property 



*"Dr. Tyndall teaches people that the sun "forms" muscle and "builds" the 
brain, and jet omits to tell them that such very rough and simple pieces of mech- 
anism, comparatively speaking, as water-mills and wind-mills and clocks and 
watches are really formed and built by the sun. This omission requires an explan- 
ation upon his part, for it must be obvious even to a child that if the sun can form 
a muscle, and build a brain, it ought to be able to perform such comparatively sim- 
ple operations as raising a wall or building a house or making a wheel. Still Dr. 
Tyndall does not say that walls and houses and clocks are the -workmanship of the 
6un, though he has nevertheless affirmed, without explaining what he means by the 
phrase, that lilies and verdure and cattle are the sun's workmanship." — (Beale on 
Protoplasm, or Matter and Life.) 

This idea of Tyndall does not differ much from the theory of Carpenter that 
caloric, by transformation into vitality, produces the vital phenomena. Writers 
who ignore life cannot avoid falling into some absurdity. 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 1 7 

or the condition of the special material which effects that peculiar 
relation, and it is as far from comprehension now as a thousand years 
ago." To the suggestion that by further experimentation we may 
get rid of the term and the idea of life itself, and so make a great 
advance in science, he says : "I believe it will not be done, but that 
there will ever remain the same kind of mystery with regard to life 
itself . . . that still shrouds the nature of the simpler forces, 
such, for instance, as gravitation or heat." "The view that is taken 
of the correlation of vital and physical forces, when it assumes the 
form that I have mentioned, is, I think, mischievous in therapeutics." 
He refers especially to the abuse of electricity, which "has again and 
again been used when it could by no possibility have been productive 
of the slightest advantage, and when the production of such enforced 
action of muscle and nerve has but diminished the strength and 
exhausted both the energies and the endurance of those who had not 
one grain of either of those qualities to spare." What was needed, 
he says, was the "conservation of the central nutrition, and a conse- 
quent addition to the stock of vital force," not " Faradization, alcohol, 
or strychnia." 

Alas, if the whole tale could be told of the destruction of health 
and life by false and narrow medical theories, it would rival the hor- 
rors of war. 

The fact that chemical manipulation cannot produce the most 
highly organized substances and structures which are developed in 
human bodies, does not embarrass the anti-vital colleges, for they can 
hold on to their improved JiypotJusis a thousand years, and if at the 
end of that time they shall have produced the greater portion of those 
substances by chemical methods, they will be still as far off as ever, 
for they will be unable to make any of their substances act as living 
bodies do, and it will still be as apparent as ever that life comes only 
from life, and never from mere organization. But it will not require 
a thousand years to improve the brain development sufficiently to 
enable men to investigate in a candid spirit, and give due weight 
to facts a thousand times demonstrated. Prof. John Hughes Bennett 
gives the following interesting illustrations of vitality : " Other 
movements which are unquestionably vital occur in the molecules of 
the yolk, on the entrance into the ovum of the spermatozoid. Here 
it cannot be maintained that the results are purely physical, because 
in different ova we see such widely varying effects from apparently 
the same cause. Neither can it be attributed to any direct influence 
of the cell, or of its nucleus — the germinal vesicle. For example, 
an egg is fully maturated in the female organs of generation, and 
would prove abortive if a spermatozoid did not find its way through 



l8 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

the zona-pellucida, and get amongst the molecules of the yolk. As 
soon as it does so, the apparently purposeless Brunonian movements 
receive a new impulse and direction. Both spermatozoid and germi- 
nal vesicle are dissolved among them, and wonderful phenomenon of 
the division of the yolk takes place, not by cleavage or other action 
of the cell-wall or nucleus, but by the separation of the mass into 
two masses instead of one. The nature of the phenomenon in this 
case may be compared to what is observable in a dense crowd of men 
called upon to pass over to the right or left hand in order to settle 
any disputed question by a majority. At first unusual confusion is 
communicated to the whole — some hurry in one direction, others in 
another ; but after a time is seen at the margins, where the crowd is 
least dense, a clear space, which gradually approaches the centre, 
and at length bisecting the whole, produces a complete segregation 
of the crowd into two portions. So with the molecules of the yolk 
in the egg after impregnation. Their movements are directed by 
conditions which did not previously exist, and a stimulus is imparted 
to them which causes the peculiar result. It is the division and sub- 
division of the yolk, wholly or in part, which produces the germinal 
mass out of which the embryo is formed, and this not by any direct 
influence of the cell or nucleus, but in consequence of a power inher- 
ent in the molecules themselves, 'which was communicated to them 
for a specific purpose." 

And yet this same Professor J. H. Bennett who has given this 
clear description of vital operations stultifies himself by surrendering 
to the doctrine that life is " but a condition of matter " — ay, the elo- 
quence of a Demosthenes or the poetry of Milton is " but a condition 
of matter." 

How much more philosophically does Dr. Lionel Beale treat the 
subject as follows: "Although plants and animals have been often- 
times compared with machines, no one has yet taught exactly in 
what particulars any plant or animal is like any machine. For my 
part I cannot discover the slightest resemblance in origin, form, com- 
position or mode of action. I have looked over and over again at 
the matter of the living plant and animal in which and by which the 
wonderful changes characteristic of it are effected in health and 
in disease, but I have seen nothing save a little transparent, structure- 
less, colorless, semi-fluid stuff. I even see this move. While under 
my observation various substances of complex chemical composition 
may be formed through its agency, but the highest magnifying 
powers do not enable me to form any conception concerning how this 
is done. The living matter may increase in size, and I may see it 
divide and subdivide so as to give rise to other masses like itself. But 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 19 

Jiozv it moves, how it grows, how it forms, and how or why it divides, 
I cannot tell. I know, however, it does not move like any mechan- 
ism of which we have any experience, for it moves in any and every 
direction, and every minute portion exhibits movements of its own 
accord, not from being pushed or pulled by others. There is no 
machine that moves of its own accord in any part. The parts of a 
machine are moved. The living matter does not grow like a crystal, 
for the stuff of which it is made cannot be detected in the solution 
around it, nor is the matter deposited particle after particle upon the 
surface." "There is, as I have shown, a great distinction between 
the inanimate grannies or molecules which may be precipitated from 
fluids and the living molecules which spring from pre-existing mole- 
cules. I have adduced reasons for believing that living, independent 
organisms exist, which are so small as not to be visible by the highest 
power until they have lived for some time and grown." 

" A number of minute living particles being suspended in fluid 
never run together and form collections. So far from aggregating 
together, they divide and subdivide and multiply enormously in num- 
ber. Inanimate particles, on the other hand, always become aggre- 
gated together or coalesce to form larger masses. Under no 
circumstances known do living particles become aggregated to form 
a compound living mass, but each absorbs nutrient matter and 
divides into smaller masses. Indeed, living particles multiply in 
number, emanating from, instead of collecting towards, centres!' 

There are numerous phenomena in every animal body which are 
entirely distinct from the operation of physical forces, and which to 
a clear intuitive mind are an instantaneous demonstration of a con- 
trolling power utterly different from mechanical and chemical energies. 
The incessant locomotion and change of form occurring in amoebae 
and in the white globules of the blood cannot be explained mechani- 
cally. These white globules (which in man vary from one fiftieth to 
one five-hundredth of the red, in number, show continual changes on 
their surface, putting out or withdrawing a small portion of their 
exterior, like living amoebae, until after a few hours this vital prop- 
erty disappears and they remain spherical and at rest. Professor 
Huxley describes them as " creeping about as if they were indepen- 
dent organisms." Professor Ranvier, in his Lectures in the College 
of France says : " In studying the amoebae, white globules of the blood, 
and the lymphatic cells (organic equivalents of the nervous system) 
we have stated that their movements, styled amoeboid, are not pro- 
duced by accident or at random. The prolonging of their substance 
in their movements shows itself at the points where the cellules are 
subjected to some irritation. The cell is then sensible, and its sensi- 



2Q LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

bility excited acts on its mass, which responds by a movement. The 
amoeboid cell is then an element at once nervous and muscular, but 
its sensibility and mobility are not localized ; they do not depend 
upon any organic differentiation according to the precise expression 
of naturalists. This differentiation begins among beings a little more 
complex — such, for example, as the polypi." The white corpuscle 
thus has the character of a minute animal or animalcule, and, accord- 
ing to one microscopic observer, reproduces itself abundantly by dis- 
charging successively the nuclei in its interior, which go forth 
independently originating new corpuscles. 

Unaccountable are the movements, continually in progress, of the 
granules in the interior of the white corpuscles, which continue 
after the white corpuscle has been dissolved and its contents have 
escaped. Nor is there any physical explanation of the movements 
of bacteria and vibriones which originate when animal matter is 
undergoing decomposition in fluids. Still more mysterious are the 
strange movements of conception when the male and female ele- 
ments unite in forming the embryo. The materialist looks at this, 
and instead of drawing the most obvious and natural inference, and 
recognizing the presence of life-force, substitutes the hypothesis that 
in some future age we shall discover the physical causes which he 
supposes to be the agents, without any scieiitific basis for his opinion. 

The origination of bacteria and vibriones in fluids from matter 
once vitalized as vegetable or animal substance (independent of the 
atmospheric germs for which M= Pasteur contends so firmly) would 
give no substantial aid to the hypothesis of the materialist. It 
would simply prove that life is capable of entering into very close 
union with certain albuminous substances, so close as to remain in 
combination after the substance is separated from the body in which 
it was produced, in which it worked in combination with the general 
vitality. There is no vital chemistry to explain this combination of 
organized -matter with vitality except that which I have derived from 
Psychometry. That the globules of blood and of milk, separated from 
the body to which they belong, originate new forms of life, as bacteria, 
vibriones, or the mildew on milk, is well known ; and it has also been 
observed that the general vitality does not always control these sub- 
ordinate growths, as some species of bacteria have been observed in 
the fluids of various plants, such as the Apocynum Cannabinum 
(Indian hemp), Asclepias Cornuti (milk-weed), and Sambucus Cana- 
densis (elder), which are supposed to be transformed starch globules. 
Bacteria and fungi have been found in the interior of the brain, of the 
liver, in hepatic cells, epithelium cells, membranes and other parts of 
dead animal bodies or parts of living bodies undergoing decay. They 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 21 

have also been found in eggs. Their occurrence in the living body, cir- 
culating in the blood (as I have found in certain patients), is simply an 
evidence of the failure of the general vitality to control subordinate 
parts, allowing abnormal action to take place, as occurs in fever, 
inflammation, and gangrene, when vitality is injured and unable to 
control the fluids of the body, which continually tend by their chem- 
ical properties toward decomposition, in which new forms arise ; for 
which reason antiseptics give great assistance to vitality in fevers, in 
controlling the fatal septic tendency of animal compounds. The 
bisulphites of lime and soda, by their great antiseptic power, counter- 
act the degenerations of fever and the tendency to evolution of bac- 
teria. 

The foregoing facts show that structures occupied by vitality have 
the power of organizing and vitalizing matter of which they take 
possession, imparting thereto vital powers which may be retained 
after disconnection from the vitalizing structure. This is also 
signally displayed in the ciliary movements which prevail so exten- 
sively throughout the animal kingdom (except among the Articulata). 
The moving cilia are almost always present on the mucous and 
serous membranes, especially of the digestive and respiratory pas- 
sages, and are sometimes found on external surfaces. These cilia, 
varying in length from i-iooo to i- 12000 of an inch, are in continual 
motion, waving like a field of wheat in a breeze, at an average rate 
of about 200 to 700 vibrations a minute — a movement as completely 
inexplicable and apparently spontaneous or causeless as those of the 
amoebae — a movement which propels the fluids in which they wave. 

The still more marvellous fact concerning the cilia is that they re- 
tain these vital motions when detached from the animal to which 
they belong, or after its death. A piece of epitheliun scraped from 
the throat of a living frog will continue for many hours, if kept 
moist, to show these motions of the cilia. It has been observed for 
seventeen hours. The continuance of the ciliary motions after 
dcath has been observed as long as sixteen days in a turtle, after 
death by decapitation. In the higher animals, however, it generally 
ceases on the second day, in accordance with the general law that as 
organization advances to a higher grade, life is more concentrated in 
the headquarters of the nervous system, and less identified or con- 
nected with lower structures. 

When through a microscope we observe the cilia in motion, we feel 
that we are in the presence of a mystery for which no physical laws 
give any explanation, and upon which physiologists have thrown little 
light. It is an arbitrary, mysterious fact, that as gravity unaccount- 
ably draws bodies into aggregate masses, life unaccountably draws 





22 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

atoms into organic forms, and then gives them most mysterious mo- 
tions. 

Dr. Beale offers the only explanation of ciliary motion by showing 
that the cilia are fine tubes occupied by 
an extension of the bioplasm which is found 
at their base. This, however, only shows 
that the mystery consists in the action of 
the bioplasm that impels the ciliary motion. 
Spontaneous action is the mystery of life. 

Bennett confesses that their movement 
" must depend on an inherent power, the 
nature of which is essentially vital" and 

A few cilia from the frog's tongue, i > i 

showing their connection with the "they are clear and structureless. 

bioplasm, which can be traced Beale -^ the annexed yiew Q f cilia 

into each cilium ; magnified 1400 ° 

diameters. from a frog's tongue magnified 1400 times. 

Where life exists, it needs not the organs to which we are accus- 
tomed to refer it. It works in a simple 
jelly ; and in the hydra locomotion is effec- 
ted by its members, in which we can find no 
trace of either a muscular or nervous system. 
Hence it is evident that all the powers of life which in man are so 
grand and complex can exist in a rudimental stage in any bioplasm, 
and from that bioplasm elaborate structures of a higher type. 

The phenomena of life extend from its ample development in man, 
all the way through the animal and vegetable kingdoms, to the border 
of the mineral, and its essential nature is everywhere the same, vary- 
ing only in degree. It has everywhere a sensibility or receptivity for 
impressions, and a reactive power, a vital force, tending downward, 
and a spiritual, sustaining, reproductive force, tending upward, mani- 
festing itself in the conservation of the species and in forms more or 
less beautiful — conditions more or less beneficent. Minute insect 
brains have a psychology as complex as that of the whale. 

The simple cells of animal life, consisting of protoplasm and nu- 
cleus, still retain a psychic capacity by which they select and appro- 
priate their food. The Vampyrella Spirogyrce, consisting merely of 
protoplasm and nucleus, attacks the Spirogyra only, for food ; and the 
simple cellule, the Monas amyli, feeds only on grains of starch. 
According to our most recent authority, A. Binet, the minute cellu- 
lar beings revealed by the microscope all have a " complex psychol- 
ogy." "Psychic life" (he says) " like its substratum, living matter, 
is, when closely studied, an exceedingly complex subject. This fact is 
with me a profound conviction ; it rests, not upon abstract ideas and 
methods, but upon the observations that I have given, — observations 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 23 

that are not founded upon my own personal authority alone, but 
which are drawn from the highest authorities, and most of which I 
have been able to verify with my own eyes." 

To perceive what is near us, to pursue and attain what is desired, 
avoiding what is not desired, to exercise the necessary perseverance, 
and suspend action when there is no motive, or increase its vigor as 
required, — such are the psychic elements that belong to the simplest 
animal structures revealed by the microscope. They are never re- 
duced to simple irritability. 

If this occurs anywhere it must be in the vegetable kingdom, but 
even there vitality manifests itself in a rationally or properly directed 
impulse and action which cannot be explained by chemistry or 
physics. There is a feeble remnant of that intelligence which recog- 
nizes the situation, and that volitionary impulse which acts according 
to circumstances. When the radicle and plumule of a bean appear,, 
why does the radicle always turn down, whatever its position, and the 
plumule turn up ; and when roots grow down in the ground is not 
their ability to find their way something that resembles intelligence. 

Darwin says : " It is hardly an exaggeration to say that the life of 
the radicle, endowed as it is with such diverse kinds of sensitiveness, 
acts like the brain of animals." 

To -the modern student (says Arthur Smith in the " National Re- 
view"), "the plant is no longer an inanimate being, but stands re- 
vealed as an organism exhibiting animal functions, such as breathing, 
circulation of the blood or sap, various complex movements, and 
sleeping, which are as certainly equally well defined as are the analo- 
gous traits in the existence of the animal." 

" All those who have studied the habits of plants know full well 
that they have the power of adapting themselves to circumstances, 
and have many movements and traits that are the very reverse of 
automatic. Numerous instances might be pointed out in which not 
only are the signs of sensibility as fully developed in the plant as in 
the animal, but many phases of animal life are exactly imitated. Take, 
for example, those wonderful plants, the Mimosae, sensitive to the 
most delicate touch. It folds itself at the close of day, and there is 
no doubt, if it were not allowed to sleep it would like ourselves soon 
die. This is not only an example of the necessity of sleep for the 
regaining of nervous energy and recuperation of brain power, but a 
proof of the existence of the same in the vegetable kingdom. Then 
there are the carnivorous plants, the Venus fly-trap (Dionaea), for in- 
stance, which will digest raw beef as readily as its insect prey. A 
still more remarkable instance of intelligent plant movement is found 
in one of the lowest forms of the vegetable kingdom, Pteronospora 



24 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

infestanSy the well-known potato fungus. When the spore cases 
burst a multitude of little bodies escape ; if these bodies gain access 
to water they develop a couple of curious little tails, and by means 
of these tails they swim about after the manner of tadpoles." 

To ignore the existence of vital power as a peculiar self-guiding 
energy in all living growing beings, seems like a stolid suspension of 
our reasoning faculties. Nor is it at all unreasonable to believe that 
this vital power, after its separation from matter, may continue to 
exist in a different sphere in accordance with the doctrine of the in- 
destructibility of force. 

That there is something in plant life correlative with humanity is 
shown in the admiration and love that are given to flowers and trees 
and the actual worship of flowers by some Persians. That human 
vitality can in some cases materially aid the growth of plants is an 
opinion that some profess to base on experience, but has not been 
tested by scientific investigation. 

To deny the existence of life power as something distinct from 
matter, is to assume that matter may come together and originate 
life by its accidental grouping. But this has been sought in vain ; 
and Haeckel has been driven to rely upon the Monera or Amoeba, in 
which the marvellous properties of life are manifested by an appar- 
ently homogeneous speck of gelatinous matter, as the " primeval par- 
ent of life on the earth!' This example he considers of "the very 
greatest importance to the hypothesis of spontaneous generation;" 
but his example proves nothing, except that he can, as he says, 
"" easily imagine their origin by spontaneous generation;" and he 
must also imagine a miraculous transformation of the lower into the 
higher order of animal life, proceeding through countless ages with- 
out leaving any record ; so that his theory at last is but an affair of 
imagination, like the vortices of Des Cartes. If this " semifluid, 
formless, and simple lump of albumen," as he describes it, is "the 
primeval parent of all other organisms," why does not a formless and 
simple drop of albumen from an egg or from the coagulable lymph of 
the blood manifest the same active life and again act as " the prime- 
val parent of all other organisms ? " Why do we never see an 
example of the spontaneous origin of vital protoplasm and its prog- 
ress as a primeval parent into " all other organisms " ? Such things 
never occur in nature, and even Prof. Huxley, the champion dogma- 
tist of materialistic writers, said in his article in the third volume of 
the " Encyclopaedia Britannica : " " Of the causes which have led to 
the origination of living matter it may be said that we know absolutely 
nothing ; " and again : " The fact is that at the present moment there 
is not a shadow of trustworthy direct evidence that abiogenesis does 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 25 

take place or has taken place within the period during which the 
existence of life on the globe is recorded." 

The example of the Monera, instead of helping the materialist, is 
really one of the best evidences of the futility of their hypothesis, as 
it shows that vitality is competent to display its powers in an organi- 
zation of the simplest character, while a structure apparently the 
same, without the vitality, simply goes into decomposition. The 
vital power displayed by the amoebae are not explicable by any com- 
plexity of organization. "The amoeba/' says Bastian, " is forever 
changing its form. It is composed of a clear, jelly-like material, 
endowed with a superabundance of that intrinsic activity character- 
istic of animal life generally. Those internal molecular movements, 
indeed, which are inferred to occur to a marked extent in all living 
matter, seem to take place in it in a pre-eminent degree. Its whole 
substance shows a mobility of the most striking kind. It continually 
moves through the water or over surfaces, by alternate projections 
and retractions of its active body-substance." Thus, without visible 
muscles it moves, and without a digestive apparatus it takes and 
digests food, taking it at any point of its surface. The vital powers 
are, as Bastian says, " uniformly possessed by all parts of the organ- 
ism," " composed almost wholly of undifferentiated protoplasm." 
And from this "undifferentiated protoplasm," or " jelly-like mate- 
rial," the vital energy builds up the muscular and other organs. The 
formation of muscular and nervous tissue by vital processes acting on 
the jelly-like substance, is the conclusion adopted by Bastian ; and 
what other conclusion could be adopted, in view of the facts of embry- 
ology, than that life constructs its organs in the first place, as it modi- 
fies them continually so long as it holds them. But Bastian, as a 
materialist, is compelled to express himself vaguely ; instead of a 
vital force modifying and carrying on development, he regards the 
processes as the cause of the development — thus assuming that all 
the powers of life are inherent in the jelly-like substance. But if 
this were so (nature operating by unvarying laws) we might expect 
that all such jelly-like substances would show the same inherent 
powers of life, and if they did it would give great plausibility to the 
position of the materialist. In meeting the issue Bastian uncon- 
sciously resorts to a subterfuge. To say that "vital processes" are 
the cause of anything is as lucid as to say that locomotion is the cause 
of our travelling. Vital processes are not a substance or a power, but 
merely a name for the action of vitality. If we deny the vitality, 
then the processes are merely chemical and mechanical, and the use 
of the word vital is inappropriate. 

Organization is not the cause but the effect of vitality. The most 



26 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

learned anatomists can discover no organization that explains the 
movements of amoebae, and they seek in vain for any perceptible dif- 
ference in peripheral nerve filaments between those which have sen- 
sitive and those which have motive power. Vitality or vital power is 
continually going beyond organization, seizing and appropriating 
dead matter, and endowing it with vital properties by the union with 
an existing organism which is called assimilation ; and when suffi- 
ciently developed and free from material incumbrance, it is competent 
to take hold of dead matter, producing wonderful changes and trans- 
mutations, or moving large bodies weighing more than the human 
form with great force. These facts, older than any facts of modern 
scientific discovery, and' in recent years as extensively demonstrated 
before intelligent and critical observers, are unknown only to those 
who do not desire or seek to know them. If eminent scientists close 
their eyes and turn away their heads when their dogmas are demol- 
ished, they may nevertheless live long enough to blush for their wil- 
ful ignorance. I do not choose to follow their shameful example in 
ignoring the most wonderful Scientific facts established in the nine- 
teenth century, in which an invisible, immaterial, intelligent energy 
has lifted tables, pianos, and other heavy bodies, has produced chem- 
ical changes in liquids, constructed cloths of delicate texture, and 
produced beautiful drawings, paintings and flowers. 

There is no evasion of the issue. Either chemical and mechanical 
forces do all that is done, or a higher and subtler power, called vitality 
or spirit power, does what is essential. If that higher power exists, it 
is, like other primitive forces, indestructible, and must be capable of 
existing in other forms and places when it leaves any embodiment. 
Like caloric, it passes from one place to another without loss ; but, un- 
like caloric, it has an organized coherence which prevents its dissipation 
or reduction. The honest and enlightened scientist who is not 
cramped by bigotry or dogmatism is bound to seek the existence of 
this force after it departs from the human body, if it can be any- 
where detected ; and when millions, uncramped by prejudice, have 
followed and recognized it in spiritual forms, in more perfect exhibi- 
tion than it makes in the human body ; when, moreover, the research 
has been most severely critical and exact, conducted often by those 
whose names are eminent in science, — to refuse to investigate or even 
look at the results of investigation is the same exhibition of fatuous 
bigotry which was arrayed against Galileo. 

The fashionable Physiology, in its attempted explanation of mus- 
cular motion independent of life, is compelled to rely upon a mere 
hypothesis. It pretends to account for muscular power as a result of 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 2J 

the combustion of elements of the muscle or of the blood, which 
furnish carbon and hydrogen.* 

But combustion does not generate contractile power ; on the con- 
trary it generates caloric, which is an expansive power, and which, so 
far from favoring muscularity, is a relaxing, debilitating influence ; 
and the greatly increased combustion of fever is accompanied by the 
almost entire destruction of muscular strength. To assume that an 
expansive force like caloric is under such circumstances converted 
into a contractile force, when there is no example in the human body 
or in any department of nature of such a transformation, is a most 
unscientific and unwarrantable exercise of a credulous imagination. 
It is difficult for me to comprehend how men of scientific ability 
could have yielded to so evident an absurdity, unless we suppose that 
they were dominated by an invincible materialism and willing to over- 
look any fallacy to sustain that hypothesis ; yet even Liebig 
assumed that muscular tissue became disintegrated and oxidated and 
thereby evolved caloric, which contracted the muscle and did the 
work i ! ! Could human folly go any farther ? Traube, following the 
same baseless theory, maintained that muscular action was due to the 
combustion, not of muscle, but of fats and carbohydrates. Seriously, 
however, if such a notion deserves a serious argument, how does the 
nervous system gather and hold this caloric, to discharge it on the 
muscle when we wish to act. We know the caloric is immediately 
diffused according to the laws of conduction. Caloric in the steam 
engine manifests force, but it is expansive force alone, it never shows 
contractile power. Combustion occurring in a muscle is the same 
chemical fact as when it occurs elsewhere, and must produce the 
same effect — but the more rapid the combustion, the greater the 
heat, the more the muscle is relaxed. The muscle is much more con- 
tractile when cold, and its maximum persistence of contraction is in 
the coldness of death — the rigor mortis. Contractility belongs to 
cold and magnetism, but the attractive power of the magnet is de- 
stroyed by heat. Contractility is a property of muscular substance 
given to it by the forces of vitality in its organization, and controlled 
by vitality in its operation, but it is still an unsolved mystery in phys- 
iology. Certainly it is not the effect of combustion, nor is it any 
less conspicuous in the cold muscles of the fish, in which there is so 



* "According to Hermann, who has specially studied the chemistry of the devel- 
opment of heat during muscular contraction, muscular work is the result of the 
decomposition of nitrogenous substances." — Dr. Beard. This is an inversion of 
the truth. The decomposition of nitrogenous substances is a consequence of mus- 
cular action, which hinders and ultimately arrests all muscular action instead c\ 
causing it. 



28 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

little of oxidation.* How entirely fanciful this oxygen and caloric 
theory appears when we attempt to apply it to the movements of 
amoebae ! 

It is very remarkable that this obvious sciolism should have been 



so unanimously adopted with unquestioning faith by modern biolo- 
gists, when it is but a metaphysical inference from their a priori 
dogma of matter and force, as the cause of all things, though a 
moment's candid reflection might have suggested that when one 
form of force is converted into another, it entirely disappears by the 
transformation, and exists only in the new form. The work that is 
done in a steam engine is commensurate with the consumption and 
disappearance of caloric, but there is no evidence that caloric is ever 
in the slightest degree consumed or diminished by muscular contrac- 
tion ; on the contrary, there is commonly an elevation of temperature 
about two degrees by vigorous muscular contraction. All the caloric 
generated in the human body by the consumption of oxygen — all 
the oxygen is capable of producing — exists in the body as caloric, 
until it is lost by radiation, conduction, and evaporation. The inge- 
nuity of chemists has been severely taxed to discover the chemical 
processes in the human body which are adequate to account for the 
amount of caloric that we know is generated and discharged ; and it 
is not entirely certain that they have discovered a complete explana- 
tion. Hence there is no possible opportunity for discovering chem- 
ical or combustion processes to manufacture something convertible 
into contractile force, when all that can be discovered is known to be 
devoted to the production of sensible caloric, which is discharged 
without doing any work in the body, precisely as it is from the fire 
that warms our apartments, having performed its sole office of main- 
taining the warmth which is a necessary condition for the control of 
matter by spirit and for all physiological processes. I would not 
think it worth while to discuss seriously this physiological sciolism but 
for the fact that it has been flourishing for near thirty years and still 
contaminates our whole physiological literature. 

As, according to the fashionable physiology, vitality is a result of 
chemical processes in the body, to which the convoluted brain contrib- 
utes nothing, and from which it expends a great deal, we have been 
warned against the effects of cerebral excitement, of mental cultiva- 
tion and of precocity, as though the action of the brain were both 
exhausting and dangerous. 

All of these theories were erroneous, and based upon inaccurate or 
incomplete knowledge. Education and mental excitement are injur- 

* Salmon and other fishes display wonderful muscular power in leaping out of the 
water ten or fifteen feet, ascending waterfalls. 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 29 

ious only when they exercise, excite, or fatigue the anterior, intellec- 
tual and sensitive portions of the brain, instead of giving normal exer- 
cise to the whole brain, which is in the highest degree invigorating, 
and far more beneficial than muscular exercise. 

Among medical authors, ignorance of the brain has been too pro- 
found to discriminate between or understand its functions, and to 
know that the frontal region alone is exhaustive to the vital forces, 
while the occipital half is the very seat and source of vital power. 

Not understanding this, the world has adopted an educational sys- 
tem which attempts to exercise the frontal brain alone, which 
exhausts the physical and moral energies, undermines the health, 
injures the eyes and shortens life. Then, attributing these evils to 
education and cerebral activity, it regards the latter as unfriendly to 
health, and unsuitable for woman, when, in reality, a normal or com- 
plete education is an evolution of health and vigor, and the cerebral 
activity which embraces the emotions and energies is a grand reno- 
vator of health and invigorator of the constitution. 

Influenced at first by the old theories universally taught in the col- 
leges, it was difficult for me to understand the true relations of the 
brain to vitality, until by many experiments and prolonged study it 
became apparent that vitality was not the product of organization, 
but organization was the product of vitality, which is the organizing 
and sustaining power, the dominant power in our complex constitu- 
tion. This vitality has ever eluded and baffled the medical profes- 
sion, because they have regarded biology as one of the physical 
sciences, and thus, reversing the plan of nature, have regarded com 
binations of matter as the source of life (although they have been 
unable to produce life by any chemical combination), and hence have 
fixed their attention on matter alone, ignoring life — treating it as a 
phenomenon or a fact — of no substantial existence or power, and 
entirely refusing to follow or witness the evidence of its continued 
existence after its separation from matter, because such evidence 
annihilates dogmatic theories. 

That this gross materialism has usurped the control of biological 
science is sufficiently evident when we find that a President of the 
American Association for the Advancement of Science could give a 
public lecture in New York, denying vitality as a power, and assum- 
ing its origin from mechanical and chemical causes, without a word 
of protest from scientists, clergy, and literati. Such scientists expect 
by tbermometric observation to^find the calorific and mechanical 
equivalents of thought and emotion, as Joule determined the mechan- 
ical equivalent of caloric ! They are altogether too serious and posi- 
tive to see anything ludicrous in such speculations, which have been 



SO LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 

sanctioned by Huxley, who says he believes "we shall arrive at the 
mechanical equivalent of consciousness,^/^ as we have arrived at the 
mechanical equivalent of heat." Of course then we shall know just 
how many grains, ounces, or pounds a poem or a philosophical theory 
weighs. Positive dogmatism never knows when its extravagance 
has become ludicrous, and Prof. Huxley afforded a good illustration 
when he revamped the theory of Des Cartes that animals were 
machines as much as clocks, moved by certain physical forces with- 
out consciousness. But as there are many animals with which he 
could not compete in the knowledge and memory of localities person- 
ally observed, or in strength of parental affection, or in the skill and 
courage of a combat for life, his logic would be just as good to prove 
himself an unconscious machine ; and in fact a dogmatic philosophi- 
zer who cannot or will not reason fairly has a much closer resem- 
blance to a machine than he would suspect. 

Prof. Huxley is a brilliant illustration of the power of self-confident, 
undiscriminating, and reckless assertion in imposing upon a public, 
well prepared by its ignorance of the subject to accept him as an 
oracle. He asserts " protoplasm " to be the basis of life ; but, with a 
slipshod looseness unworthy of a scientist, he applies that term, not 
to the true bioplasm, the living matter which displays a formative 
power and ail the endowments of life, but indiscriminately to dead 
and living matter, to muscular and nervous structures, solid sub- 
stances ; while the true bioplasm is never either a solid or a structure 
of completed organization. His loose expression covers all albumin- 
oid materials, and in fact amounts to nothing more than a jumble of 
all substances which are substantially composed of something near 
the old formula, Carbon 51.8, Oxygen 21.3, Nitrogen 15, Ash 4.25. 
Instead of calling this "the physical basis of life," he should have 
c died it the chemical basis of the animal body. In his loose phrase- 
ology, roast mutton is protoplasm. 

Such language reads more like the rattling talk of a physiological 
demagogue {ad captandnm) than the accurate expression of a scien- 
tific mind. To this mongrel protoplasm, dead or living alike, he 
ascribes the vital capacities which are never found except in the liv- 
ing unorganized bioplasm, deriving its properties from a prior bio- 
plasm as far back as we can trace its ancestry. But Prof. Huxley 
would have his blind followers believe that whenever the carbon, 
oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen, etc., are well combined in due pro- 
portion life will be produced. Nature demands a prior life, but he 
ignores that fact. But the absurdities of Huxley's assertions are 
too numerous to be criticised further. The Huxley doctrine of the 
"Physical Basis of Life" has been refuted by J. H. Stirling, LL.D., 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 5 1 

in bis work, " As regards Protoplasm, in relation to Prof. Huxley's 
Essay on the Physical Basis of Life," and this refutation has been 
pronounced "complete and final" by Sir John Herschel. 

We are compelled to choose between this gross scientific material- 
ism — which annihilates Pneumatology and Religion — and the true 
science of life, which recognizes its potentiality in the living body, 
and, accepting the irrefutable and superabundant evidence of its con- 
tinued existence after separation, enters with pleasure upon the pro- 
found and sublime study of pneumatology, in which science enters 
the sphere of wisdom and love. 

If life is a reality, a power, a cause, and not a mere phenomenon 
or effect, the question arises where it is located, whence it comes, 
and how it is fed or sustained. These questions must be answered 
before we can determine the relation of vitality to the brain. 

If life is a distinct element of permanent existence — as permanent 
and as distinct as the oxygen which constitutes the major part of the 
human body, — it must be, like other elements, derived from some 
abundant supply of the same element, and if it increases, it must 
increase by influx from its source, as do the ponderable elements 
which are supplied by influx of food. 

The ponderable elements do not supply life, but only an apparatus 
for its use. When their supply ceases, the physical apparatus of life 
is lacking, and we die of inanition — i. e., life leaves a structure which 
is incompetent to hold it, or, rather, to which it cannot hold. 

As bodily structure comes from material influx, it is equally true 
that all life is from influx. There is no such thing'as life inherent 
in structure, all life being influx, and this becomes evident by 
a brief and simple course of reasoning. 

The life of any limb, or other part of the body, depends immedi- 
ately upon the influx of blood, and its death follows the entire loss or 
removal of the blood. When the blood is excluded from a muscle it 
is benumbed, and if the exclusion continues it produces gangrene (total 
death). The increased development of vitality which comes from an 
increased supply of blood is seen when the circulation of the face is 
increased by section of the cervical ganglionic nerves. In these 
cases the evolution of heat is greater, the sensibility longer resists 
the influence of chloroform, the rigor mortis is later in its appear- 
ance, and putrefaction does not begin so soon. But the blood has 
no more inherent vitality than the limb. If it stagnated in the limb, 
the limb and the blood would die together. It obtains the condi- 
tions of vitality in the lungs, and dies when deprived of those condi- 
tions. But it is not the structure of the lungs that imparts the 
conditions ; it is the air that enters the lungs, without which influx 



3- LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

lungs, blood, and organs all die. Thus there appears to be an influx 
through the head, by the trachea, of a vitalizing element, which we 
call oxygen, which is a magazine of the conditions necessary to vital- 
ity, but not of vitality itself. Food supplies the physical elements, 
and the continued influx of both is essential to life, but does not 
make life. The limb that is supplied by alimentation and respira- 
tion with good blood is not thereby kept alive, but only in a viable 
condition. 

The material element capable of forming the structures that mani- 
fest life is a substance similar to albumen, in which carbon is a little 
more than half. The solid elements of flesh and blood are compounds 
of which the average composition is very near this formula : Carbon 
51.9, Oxygen 21.3, Nitrogen 15, Hydrogen 7.6, Mineral elements 4.3. 
In fibrin there is three per cent, more of carbon and a trifle less of 
hydrogen. In the nervous system this albuminous or protein ele- 
ment is associated with a quantity of phosphorized fat of variable 
amount, sometimes an equal quantity or even a trifle more, sometimes 
only half as much. In the albumen of the blood, which corresponds 
nearly with muscular substance, Mulder found 400 atoms of carbon, 
310 of hydrogen, 120 of oxygen, 50 of nitrogen, 2 of sulphur, and 1 
of phosphorus. In the nervous matter of the brain and nerves the 
chemical character is materially different, as the fatty matter, which 
is often one half of its substance (excluding water), contains almost 
exactly the same number of atoms of hydrogen as of carbon. The 
brain, therefore, is distinguished from the rest of the body by its 
greater amount of hydrogen, in which it differs from the protein 
basis of bodily structures, or what Huxley has called protoplasm, "the 
physical basis of life." Thus, as we see, vitality has its Jiome in a 
structure which differs so much from the so-called protoplasm that it 
is apparent that Prof. Huxley has generalized in a very hasty and 
unscientific as well as dogmatic manner. He would not have been 
much farther from the truth if he had maintained that fat was an 
essential " physical basis of life, " for it is as necessary as protein or 
protoplasm (which are synonymous with Huxley). Materialists can- 
not discuss the mysteries of biology without running into absurdities ; 
such, for example, as Dr. Hammond's theory that we need not die if 
we could keep up an exact balance between the waste of the body and 
its supply by food. In addition to this combination of albuminoid 
and oleaginous matter, as the receptive substance, life requires the 
presence or environment of oxygen. This is essential to all vital pro- 
cesses. Seeds which are entirely deprived of air will not germinate, 
and an excessive supply of oxygen accelerates the germination. In 
animals the demand for oxygen is proportional to the activity of life. 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 33 

That the kingdom of vitality or vital force is as widely distinct 
from that of mere physical force as electricity is distinct from gravity 
or hydrogen distinct from gold, is shown by the fact that it is impos- 
sible to construct bioplasm by any physical or chemical forces, no 
matter how well the materials are brought together. Sir H. Roscoe 
says very truly : " Protoplasm, with which the simplest manifestations 
of life are associated, is not a compound but a structure built up of 
compounds. The chemist may successfully synthetize any of its 
component molecules, but he has no more reason to look forward to 
the synthetic production of the structure than to imagine that the 
synthesis of gallic acid leads to the production of gall-nuts." 

But an influx from the nervous system is necessary to give the vital 
capacity for sensation and motion ; and influx through the nervous 
system is necessary to give motion to the heart and the proper con- 
ditons to the blood-vessels for circulating the blood. Hence without 
the nervous system there can be neither conscious active life in 
man, nor the circulation of blood and respiration of air which give 
the conditions of vitality, nor the consumption of food which supplies 
material. 

In recognizing the nervous centres as the seat of life we are sim- 
ply recognizing the universal law of the animal kingdom, in which 
we see that the rank and character of every animal is determined by 
its nervous system, of which the brain is the principal portion. 
Even when we descend to the smallest micro-organisms, with a 
nucleus, that can be investigated, we find that their life and psychic 
endowments belong to a small central structure, the nucleus, from 
which the power, action, growth, and reproduction are. imparted to the 
protoplasm that constitutes their bulk. 

The experiments on micro-organisms, ciliated infusoria, such as 
the Stentor and Cyrtostomum, by Gruber and Balbiani have demon- 
strated that the life of these minute animals (the cyrtostomum meas- 
ures three thousandths of an inch) depends upon their central nuclei, 
and that, if they are divided into two or more parts, any part which 
contains a nucleus will grow until it reproduces a complete animal, 
but that parts which have no nucleus, being merely protoplasm, can- 
not grow into a complete animal but die in from four to eight days, 
although they move about with freedom while they live, as a decapi- 
tated chicken will flutter for a time without its brain, and cold-blooded 
animals have their lives prolonged after the loss of the brain. 

As life is manifested by sensation, motion, circulation (and conse- 
quent nourishment), and as all three are dependent on influx from the 
nervous system, it is obvious that life really comes into all parts from 
its seat in the nervous system. And although the digestive organs 



34 L1FE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

supply material and the lungs supply by means of oxygen the impon- 
derables, their actions depend on the nervous system, and are but 
subordinate contributions incapable of evolving life, which comes 
entirely by the nervous system, and takes its departure therefrom 
when it leaves the body, first abandoning its outposts in the lower 
limbs, concentrating to the upper end of the spinal cord, lingering in 
the chest, then in the base of the brain, and finally leaving from the 
upper portions of the brain, in accordance with pathognomic laws, 
and as has been observed by clairvoyants. After death, the muscles 
of the limbs, as shown by Onimus, lose their contractility much 
sooner than the muscles of the trunk, and the extensors before the 
flexors. A similar order of succession is observed in general palsies. 
In the application of electricity we find the excitability of the nerves 
greater as we approach their origin at the spinal cord. 

That death occurs from below upwards was illustrated by the cele 
brated physiologist Claude Bernard, in experiments on the nerves 
and muscles of frogs. When the animal dies from loss of blood or 
from woorara poisoning, the filaments of nerves nearest the muscle 
first lose their vitality, the nerves die from the periphery to the cen- 
tre, and the muscles that have ceased to obey their nerves may be 
roused by induction currents applied nearer the spine or upon the 
spinal cord at the roots of the nerves The death of the nerves, as 
shown by Von Bezolcl, begins in the filaments which are distributed 
in the muscles, which gradually lose their power, and progresses 
through the trunk of the nerve to the spinal cord. The convulsions 
produced in rabbits by excluding the blood from the brain are most 
marked and prolonged in the hind legs, and they also soonest pass 
into cadaveric rigidity. 

If then life emanates from the nervous system which actuates the 
muscles, the lungs, the digestive organs, and the circulation, and 
which also controls nutrition — it is evidently a vital neurological 
influx, which through the nervous system controls the material influx 
of food, water, and oxygen and their assimilation, and the seat or 
channel of this influx must be sought in the controlling portions of 
the nervous system, which we know are in the cranium. 

In discovering this truth we are led to important practical conclu- 
sions for hygiene and for virtue. We learn that it is far more impor- 
tant to cultivate and energize the brain and the soul than to confine 
our attention to purely physical matters. We learn that with proper 
spiritual energy man's life may be efficient and successful, but with- 
out that higher energy, an abundant nourishment may develop only 
a gross and degraded humanity. 

The knowledge of the vital power of the brain enables us to pro- 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 35 

ceed with great confidence when by the nervauric methods we treat 
the entire constitution through the brain. We know that a current 
of dark blood through the brain will suddenly deaden all the powers 
of life, or a current of watery blood will enfeeble them. A sudden 
pressure on the brain makes a blank in our conscious existence, and 
even a current of water on the head may subdue the vital energies. 
Prof. Stokes, recommending Dr. Abercrombie's method of shaving 
the scalp and pouring upon the head, held over a basin, the contents 
of a jug of cold water from a height above, says : " So great and instan- 
taneous is the depression of the vital power produced by this mode, 
that it must be used with caution. There are numerous cases of per- 
sons in the highest state of maniacal excitement, reduced in a few 
moments to a low and weak state by this powerful remedy. There 
are also instances of its rapidly depressing effect in the early stages 
of acute hydrocephalus." 

The depressing power was of course chiefly produced upon the 
upper surface of the brain, which was most exposed to the action of 
the cold water, and which is so important as a source of vitality. 
Life retreats from below upwards toward its citadel — from the limbs 
toward the spinal cord, from the cord to the brain, and from the base 
of the brain to its summit, where severe injuries are fatal. Valentin 
says : " If one removes the two hemispheres of a mammal by slices the 
mental activity sinks the lower, the further the loss of substance 
proceeds. When the ventricles of the brain are reached, complete 
unconsciousness is wont to appear." 

In asserting life to be an influx we do not assert that the influx is 
exclusively into the brain. The brain being the supreme seat of life 
and associated with influx leads to the inference that nervous life 
elsewhere may in like manner be associated with influx. There is a 
vigorous life in fishes, in which the cerebrum is very small and the 
entire brain very small in proportion to the spinal system. 

The ganglia of insects, which correspond to our cerebro-spinal sys- 
tem, are the seat of a very active influx, producing greater psychic 
manifestations in proportion to their size than we have in' the human 
brain. In cold-blooded animals (reptiles and fishes) the heart con- 
tinues to beat many hours after decapitation, and even after it has 
been taken out of the body, if its ganglia are not destroyed. Even 
in warm-blooded animals (as the rabbit) the heart continues many 
minutes after death produced by stopping the cerebral circulation. 

Hence there is probably an influx of life, capable of sustaining 
muscular and visceral action, distinct from that which comes into the 
brain. I say probably, for when we consider the complete analogy 
between the brain and body, the assertion of an influx to the brain 



6 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 



renders the influx to the nervous system of the body probable, as it 
maintains for a time its vitality after decapitation and for a consider- 
able time in the acephalous foetus, as well as cases in which, by con- 
cussion, hemorrhage, or ramollissement, the influence of the brain is 
more or less excluded. The body, according to analogy, must have a 
region of influx as well as the brain, and this region must be inte- 
riorly on or near the median line, which would be along the bronchi, 
the pulmonic and cardiac plexuses, and the solar and semilunar gan- 
glia. 

This is further confirmed by the fact that in somniloquent condi- 
tions intelligence and the external senses have been transferred to 
the epigastric region. Although the primary function of this corpo- 
real region may relate to atmospheric and chylopoietic absorption, the 
transferability of the spiritual faculties to the body would indicate 
spiritual capacities in the trunk, and probably capacities for spiritual 
influx, for the bodily region acts in concert with the cerebral, and it 
is not extravagant to assume that the soul does in a certain sense 
occupy the entire body, which may be regarded as an essential 
appendage of the soul. The influx of thought and emotion to the 
brain is greater when the life and action of the central region of the 
body is greater, and while the energetic action of the limbs and mus- 
cular system generally exhausts the brain, that of the heart and chest 
(and I may add stomach) greatly increases its power. What is the 
nature of this influx is as yet unknown. It probably comes in with the 
air, without which it cannot occur, and we may suppose the lungs to 
maintain the same relation to the atmosphere as the brain to an 
ethereal or spiritual atmosphere. This view is illustrated by the 
recent experiments of Dr. B. W. Richardson, showing that air which 
has been respired loses its life-supporting quality, independent of any 
change by loss of oxygen or acquisition of carbonic acid. Indeed, we 
know that the life supporting quality of the atmosphere is continually 
varied as it comes from dry and sunny regions or from dark and damp 
localities, there being some element or condition in it which chemists 
have not detected. 

This influx to the thoracic ganglia and that to the solar plexus cor- 
respond with what we believe occurs in the brain. The pineal gland 
is the organ of the chief cerebral influx, and our Sarcognomy recog- 
nizes the solar plexus as the correspondent of the pineal gland, enjoy- 
ing the same influx on a lower plane. 

The cardiac plexuses and ganglia, which alone can sustain the 
heart when it is removed from the body, and in cold-blooded animals 
for many hours, have in man a connection with and partial depend- 
ence upon the three ganglia in the neck ; of these the superior cer- 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 37 

vical controls the anterior circulation and consequent development of 
the brain, while the vertebral controls its posterior circulation and 
development. 

Thus it appears that the cardiac nervous system which sustains- 
the circulation that animates the entire person, is intimately asso- 
ciated with the brain as a centre of life, supplying blood to the brain 
in return for vital influence, each being essential to the other. 

If we should follow the theory suggested by analogy, of the priority 
of the inferior structures, we might suppose the ganglionic system to- 
be the primitive seat of life in the human body, and the brain its 
latest evolution, but such a theory is not verified by the microscope,, 
as the cerebro-spinal nervous system is the first distinct nervous 
organization seen when the ganglionic system is entirely imperceptible. 
The first thing distinctly seen is the primitive streak of nervous mat- 
ter formed in the serous membrane (which soon overlaps it and forms 
the spinal column), one end of which is manifestly enlarged as the 
beginning of the brain. The brain is therefore an original structure, 
and not an outgrowth from an inferior apparatus, though very 
incomplete in its germinal condition. In human ova three or four 
weeks old we find the embryo (according to Todd and Bowman) not 
more than two lines in length. At this very early stage they say 
"the anterior cerebral vesicles are well marked, and immediately 
behind them are the very large corpora quadrigemina." The heart is 
not yet fully formed, and projects from the anterior surface of the 
body as a bent tube, "consisting of a simple auricle and ventricle.'* 
" Behind the heart is seen the liver." 

Thus does the brain originate by the laws of germinal growth, 
before a complete vascular system has appeared, hence it does not 
appear to be built up in the first instance by the ganglionic system 
and their subordinate vessels, but appears to be organized at the 
beginning of the human structure. 

This statement of Todd and Bowman, however, appears to be incor- 
rect as to the time of development, for the very careful observations 
of Tiedemann and his predecessors did not find so advanced a devel- 
opment in the first month of the human embryo, in which he found 
only a translucent and fluid condition, without a trace of organization ; 
the same being true of animals in a corresponding though earlier 
stage. The writings of Harvey and Haller contain the same state- 
ment. 

In the fifth and sixth weeks from conception, when the embryo is 
four or five lines long, it is still nearly transparent and the germ of 
the brain is still fluid, though disposed to subdivide into different 
structures, the development of which he regards as controlled by the 



38 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

serous membrane, the pia mater, in which blood-vessels first appear. 
In this stage the head is relatively large, presenting a slight appear- 
ance of mouth and eyes, while the limbs are indicated only by slight 
projections ; a condition which illustrates the priority of the brain. 
In the fluid states at the origin of life vitality has a perfect organ, 
izing power without machinery. In the seventh and eighth week, 
the embryo being seven or eight lines long, with some indication of 
nose and ears, the transparency is greatly diminished. Bones and 
muscles are not yet apparent, and the brain has the consistence of 
the white of an egg and may be examined after hardening with alco- 
hol. It then exhibits the essential elements of a brain — the rudi- 
ments of the cerebellum curving out from the medulla oblongata on 
each side, but not yet united on the median line, above which are the 
quadrigemina, thalami, striata, and germinal beginning of the hemi- 
spheres of the cerebrum. The quadrigemina, like the cerebellum in 
this stage, are but leaflets turning in to the median line but not yet 
united, and measuring one line. The thalami measure two thirds of 
a line, and the striata one line, on the margin of which is a small 
leaflet or membraniform structure destined to form the hemispheres. 

It is thus clear that the cerebro-spinal nervous system has a prior- 
ity of organization starting from a single cell, advancing into a homo- 
geneous fluid condition, becoming gelatinous and ultimately fibrous 
and cellular, the muscular and osseous system following at a long 
interval. At what stage the ganglionic system becomes organized 
and active the microscope has not revealed, as it is too minute for 
observation. 

In the full development of man, the brain becomes the central con- 
trol and channel of influx. To what extent the ganglia of the abdo- 
men and thorax participate in this influx is a question for future 
investigation. The pre-eminence of the brain in vitality cannot be 
doubted, as gifted individuals, in exalted religious and spiritual condi- 
tions of the brain, become so highly charged with vitality as to expel 
formidable diseases by laying on hands or even by coming near the 
patient, and directing their mental energy to him, thus showing that 
they have in their brain and spiritual life an excess of power which 
may be transferred to another. But when the brain is suddenly 
paralyzed by concussion, crushing, or lightning stroke, there is an 
instantaneous and complete death through the body, — the heart as 
well as the muscles suddenly ceasing, and the blood being so thor- 
oughly killed as not to coagulate. 

The influence of a regimen which stimulates the brain was shown 
by the report of M. Gasparin to the French Academy upon the diet 
of the working population. He ascertained the usual amount of 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 39 

nitrogenous food in the diet of the laboring population of France, 
and ascertained that Belgian miners performed the most vigorous 
labor, beyond the average of French miners, with much less food — 
less even than the inmates of workhouses and the monks of La 
Trappe. " The mining population of the environs of Charleroi " (says 
M. Gasparin) " have resolved this problem to nourish themselves com- 
pletely, preserve health and great vigor of muscular strength, upon a 
diet with less than half of the nutritive principles of that indicated 
by observation in Europe." 

The distinctive peculiarity of the diet of the Belgian miners is the 
use of a potent cerebral stimulant. They use three times a day half 
a pint or more of coffee, using no other beverage, — coffee, bread and 
butter being the major part of their diet. This gives a stimulus to 
vitality which resists the rapid disintegration of the tissues, and by 
diminishing the amount of excretion diminishes the necessity for 
food in proportion. In the same way the demand for food diminishes 
in those who live under high heroic excitement, like Kossuth, who in 
the Hungarian war was accustomed to take but one meal a day. 
"We know," says M. Gasparin, " how sober people are who drink 
coffee. The prodigious abstinence of the caravans, the slightly nutri- 
tive regimen of the Arabs, come with all the authority of experience 
in support of the effects attributed to this beverage ; and the distri- 
bution of coffee to the French troops during their fatiguing marches 
through Algeria is regarded by the officers as one of the best means 
of enabling the troops to support them." Physicians are well aware 
of the sustaining effects of Erythroxylon coca, so long used by South 
American Indians for protection against fatigue and hunger, being a 
powerful cerebral stimulant. 

There is much truth in the conclusions of M. Gasparin, but he 
overlooks the fact that human constitutions are not all alike, and 
that some are naturally able to live on a smaller quantity of food than 
others from having greater tenacity of constitution and greater power 
of appropriation of nourishment. 

Food must give us something else in addition to the chemical con- 
stituents of the body — ■ something that sustains our spiritual energy > 
without which health declines. The fibrin of the blood is, chemically 
speaking, a complete embodiment of nutriment, but dogs fed upon it 
will starve in about a month, according to Majendie, for it is lacking 
in something not yet understood. Human beings need spiritual food 
— something addressed to the emotions — sympathy, respect, love, 
gayety, hope, emulation, and something to encourage ambition. The 
hopelessness and dreariness of the situation paralyze every energy, 
accelerate disease, and shorten life. Hahnemann well said in his 



40 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

" Organon : " " Spiritual sufferings greatly undermine the state of 
health, and even the most skilful physician will find it impossible to pro- 
cure the patient relief under those unfavorable circumstances. Grief 
and sorrow are the principal causes which either develop latent psora 
or aggravate an already existing secondary psoric affection. Excessive 
fatigue, working in marshy regions, great injuries and wounds, exces- 
sive heat and cold, starvation, poverty, not wholesome food, unhappy 
marriage, and a gnawing conscience, etc., which are causes that 
exhaust the brain, bring on disease." 

It is easy to verify the transmission of life from the brain to each 
and every organ of the body by interrupting the channels of its 
transmission, and finding that life is impaired or destroyed in propor- 
tion to the interruption, as a stream is diminished when its fountain 
is obstructed, and disappears when it is closed. 

The spinal cord through which the brain power is transmitted is so 
strongly protected by the bones of the spinal column that it is only in 
severe injuries that we discover its importance. In the nervauric ex- 
periments which I have introduced, we are exempted from the neces- 
sity of studying the records of surgery or engaging in the tedious 
cruelties of vivisection, as the human hand can evolve any local func- 
tion regardless of the hindrance offered by bones and integuments. 

Injuries of the spinal cord operate with terrible effect upon all 
parts which lose their connection with the brain by the injury, or have 
their connection impaired. 

Brodie says that " wounds which penetrate through the external 
parts into the spinal cord are almost invariably fatal at a very early 
period, the examples of recovery from them being very few in num- 
ber." " The effect of a violent concussion is at once to impair, and 
even to destroy, the functions of the spinal cord, sometimes even 
causing the patient's death in the course of a few hours." 

It is well known that when the cord is divided or severely injured 
by compression, all sensation and voluntary motion are lost below the 
point of injury. The inferior parts are beyond our consciousness and 
beyond our control, as if they belonged to another individual. Surely 
such facts should have fixed in the minds of biologists the truth that 
life belongs to the brain and to other parts in proportion as it is bor- 
rowed from the cerebro-spinal system, of which the brain is the com- 
manding centre. 

Injuries of the spinal cord seldom amount to an absolute isolation 
of the parts below the injury, as the physical connection exists not- 
withstanding the laceration or compression. But if the injury be 
sufficiently severe and sufficiently high on the cord, then death is 
speedy. The quickest way to kill an animal (except crushing the 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 41 

brain) is to sever the cord just below the cranium. " A case of sud- 
den death from dislocation of the second vertebra is recorded by 
Petit, and other similar cases are described by Sir Charles Bell and 
Mr. Stafford. The latter author mentions two cases of death taking 
place immediately from fracture of the second and third cervical ver- 
tebrae. " I attended a young gentleman who labored under symptoms 
of caries of the superior cervical vertebra, and who, having eaten a 
hearty dinner, suddenly expired while altering his position in bed." 
(Brodie.) Evidently, as all life in the body proceeds from the brain, 
the severance of the spinal cord immediately below the cranium, or 
its severe compression, must be immediately fatal, and all surgical 
records confirm this statement. 

A remarkable illustration of this is mentioned by Sir Charles Bell 
in his "Anatomy :" "A young man was brought into the Middlesex 
Hospital, who had fallen upon his head. He soon recovered, and lay 
prostrate for some time without exhibiting a symptom to raise alarm. 
He had given thanks to the assembled governors of the hospital, and 
had returned into the ward for his bundle, when, on turning around to 
bid adieu to the other patients, he fell and in the instant expired. Upon 
examining his head, it was found that the margins of the occipital 
hole had been broken : no doubt it had happened that in turning his 
head the pieces were displaced, and closed and crushed the medulla 
oblongata as it passes from the skull." 

But as spinal injuries commonly amount only to a slight laceration 
or a slight compression, life though greatly impaired may in some 
cases continue until the injury has been repaired. 

In these cases, however, organic life is gradually impaired to a great 
extent — an extent proportional to the injury. Thus the bladder 
becomes paralyzed and incapable of expelling its contents. The 
secretion of urine is either entirely suspended or becomes quite morbid, 
having a disgusting odor, an unnatural color, and amorphous sediment. 
It is most commonly ammoniacal (corresponding to its decay when 
outside of the body), turbid, and full of unnatural mucus derived from 
the bladder and frequently containing blood. In other cases the qual- 
ity of the urine changes from day to day. The bladder, by impair- 
ment of its vitality, is in a congested condition, with adhesive mucus 
and phosphate of lime in its interior. 

The bowels become torpid and require the most powerful purgatives 
to move them ; the abdomen becomes tympanitic. Evacuations 
sometimes take place unconsciously and involuntarily. Vomiting 
occurs in other cases, ejecting large quantities of dark-colored fluid. 
The alvine evacuations are sometimes of a black tarry character and 
highly offensive odor. 



42 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

The external parts show an equal loss of vitality, and sloughs are 
formed, and gangrene developed from the mere pressure of lying on 
the bed. Sloughs often appear on the sacrum, nates and ankles as 
early as the second day. The sloughing is more severe when the 
injury is higher up, and consequently vitality more completely 
excluded, and all the surgeon can do is to endeavor to diffuse and 
moderate the pressure. 

Notwithstanding the severe consequences to the body, the brain is 
not usually affected unless the injury be above the cephalic and pul- 
monic regions of the cord, with which the brain maintains a close 
sympathy. " I have seldom observed," says Brodie, " the sensorium 
to be materially affected, except where the injury was in the cervical 
portion of the spinal cord." 

The heart is not directly dependent on the spinal cord, but indi- 
rectly through the ganglionic system, and consequently is not liable 
to the same sudden paralysis as the voluntary muscles ; nevertheless 
" the first effect which a severe injury of the spinal cord produces on 
the circulation is to lessen the force of the heart's action and to cause 
a state of general depression and collapse, the pulse being very feeble, 
contracted, and sometimes scarcely perceptible. When the injury is 
in the lower part of, the neck, the patient not infrequently dies before 
complete reaction is established, the pulse remaining feeble to the last. 
In the majority of cases, after the first twenty-four hours the pulse rises 
to 96 or 100 a minute ; but still it is feeble and contracted, indicating 
a state of great general debility. The appearance of the tongue cor- 
responds to the character of the pulse ; it is not unusual at the end 
of twenty-four hours to find it dry and parched, covered with a brown 
fur, which is soon converted into a black crust, resembling what we 
observe in the last stage of a continued fever." 

The blood also has the characteristics of fever, the coagulum being 
large and loose, or soft as when its vitality is reduced by miasmatic 
poison. 

The analogy of the conditions produced by obstructing the action 
of the brain on the body to those produced by the devitalizing power 
of malaria and the consequent fever is quite striking ; and it is a curi- 
ous coincidence that in a case described by Sir Charles Bell, in which 
there was a fracture of the eleventh dorsal vertebra, death took place 
on the fifth day, preceded by typhoid symptoms — symptoms which 
indicate inflammation of the ileum, which is controlled by the lower 
dorsal portion of the cord — the portion injured in this case. 

Injuries and morbid conditions of the brain produce a great 
variety of morbid conditions in the body ; and Dr. Brigham remarks 
that " after death from injury of the brain, putrefaction of other 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 43 

parts of the body takes place much more rapidly than after death 
from the injury of other organs." Decomposition is very rapid 
after death by sunstroke, by lightning, or by suddenly fatal poisons, 
as these causes attack the brain and nervous system. 

The direct injury of the brain by miasmatic poison, which is the 
cause of typhus fever, develops a group of symptoms singularly 
analogous to those which follow the impairment of its influence by 
injury of the spinal cord. After the death of 150 from sunstroke, 
at Chicago, in July, 1887, the authorities were urgently called on 
for immediate examination, as the bodies were decaying. "After 
no disease " (said the coroner) " does a body decompose so quickly as 
after sunstroke." 

"Most of the fatal cases of typhus " (said Prof. Graves) "at present 
die of cerebral disease." "In the genuine typhus fever" (says Dr. 
Gerhard) " this is almost always the case : very few patients die of 
this disease without strongly marked cerebral symptoms." And yet 
there is seldom any appearance of inflammation of the brain in such 
cases. The functional impairment of the brain alone is enough to 
destroy life, and even the act of rising from the bed and standing 
erect, so as to draw the blood by gravitation from the brain, is 
sufficient in cases of exhaustion, especially cholera and typhoid 
fever, to produce the death of patients, who but for that imprudence 
might have been saved. 

Traumatic injuries of the brain are liable to result in general 
impairment of health or tuberculization, . even when there is no 
immediate appearance of serious damage. Dr. R. H. Reed, of 
Mansfield, Ohio (in a paper before the National Association of 
Railroad Surgeons, at St. Louis, May 2, 1889), detailed six cases of 
wounds of the head, from which he drew the conclusion " that grave 
injuries of the brain are liable to be followed with such a degree of 
devitalization of the economy as to favor general tubercular degen- 
eration," and that an embolus may cut off the blood supply of a 
certain arterial territory, and so devitalize that portion of the brain 
and result in an abscess and death." The brain degeneration in these 
cases was generally indicated by the presence of phosphates and 
indican in the urine. 

When we experiment upon the brain directly we are vividly 
impressed with the control of all life. A fracture of the skull, leaving 
a broken piece of bone compressing the brain, arrests the conscious 
life in the midst of its ideas of the moment, which are resumed as 
the pressure is removed. The paralysis and the numerous forms of 
disease produced by affections of the brain, the convulsions, fevers, 
hemiplegia, insanity and diseases of many varieties demonstrate the 



-14 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

brain to be the most important organ. Every change in the circu- 
lation of the brain produces corresponding changes in mental activity 
and vital power. 

Bichat made some instructive experiments on dogs to illustrate the 
effects of blood upon the brain. In his work on " Life and Death," 
page 247, he says: "I opened the carotid and the jugular vein of 
another dog, and after tying the extremity of the carotid next the 
heart, received the blood of the jugular into a warm syringe and 
injected it into the brain. The creature appeared immediately to be 
agitated, breathed quickly, and seemed to be in a state of suffocation 
similar to that of asphyxia. Its animal life became entirely extinct ; 
the heart, however, continued to beat and the circulation to go on 
for half an hour afterwards, at the end of which time the organic 
life was terminated also. This dog was of middle size, and about six 
ounces of blood were injected with a gentle impulse, for fear of that 
being attributed to shock which ought to have been the result of 
the nature and composition of the fluid. I repeated this experiment 
upon three dogs the same day, and afterwards at different times 
upon others. The result was invariable, not only as to the asphyxia 
of the animal, but as to the concomitant appearances. 

"I have killed animals in this way with ink, oil, wine, and water 
colored with indigo. The greater number of the excrementitious 
fluids, such as urine, bile, the mucus of catarrhs, occasion death by 
their simple presence on the brain. The serosity of the blood is 
fatal, but not so quickly. I have injected them all into the crural 
artery. In this way they are none of them mortal, but occasion 
always a torpor amounting even to paralysis at times." 

Majendie found that injecting a considerable quantity of water 
into the veins of an animal produced a kind of stupidity which 
indicated a want of action in the brain. 

Physiological anatomy alone indicates plainly that the brain must 
be the most important organ in the body, since it receives, as com- 
monly estimated, six times as much blood in proportion to its size as 
other portions of the body ; hence it must perform far more 
active and important functions than the other organs. 

Without looking farther, we have facts enough to establish clearly 
that all life depends upon the brain, and that just in proportion as 
the influx from the brain is hindered by any injury to its well-pro- 
tected channels, every vital process is deranged or suspended. If 
the hindrance be absolute and complete, death is immediate, for the 
death of the body deprives the brain of the conditions and elements 
necessary to retain vitality. 

Injuries of the nerves, also, by cutting off their dependent parts 



CHAP. II.] LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 45 

from the spinal cord, show similar results, in loss of vitality and 
predisposition to disease. It is stated in the Medico-Chimrgical 
Review, vol. 22d, that Mr. Earle cut the ulnar nerve behind the 
elbow, and that in consequence the fore-arm became disposed to 
constant attacks of inflammation, and the temperature of the little 
finger was four degrees lower than that of the other. 

According to Demarquay (" De la Regeneration des Organes et 
des Tissus ") when a nerve has been cut, the central end in 
connection with the nervous system does not degenerate, but the 
exterior end does, rapidly undergoing a fatty degeneration, com- 
pleted in six or eight weeks. The muscles begin to degenerate 
in about three weeks. But with regard to paralyzed nerves and 
muscles which retain their connection with the central system, it 
is remarkable how well they are preserved for a long time. " It is a 
common observation " (says Dr. Poore) " that after a hemiplegia has 
endured for many months, the wasting of the muscles is often 
trifling in the extreme, and as often as not the electric irritability 
to both forms of the current remains the same as on the healthy 
side. If, however, a man injures a peripheral nerve — say his ulnar, 
or one of the branches of the external popliteal — it is astonishing 
with what rapidity the muscles supplied by the injured nerve waste, 
and how soon the electric irritability becomes altered." The 
muscles cut off from their nerves would not only waste away and 
lose all irritability, but would also die and rot, if it were not for the 
vascular connection which brings them living blood, and also the 
influence of the ganglionic nerves, which are coextensive with these 
blood-vessels. Claude Bernard claims that the growth and changes 
of all the organs are affected through the nervous system only by 
the control of the blood-vessels, but in this case we see the blood 
vessels and their nerves uninjured and the blood supplied, but 
atrophy occurs because the vitality from the brain and spinal cord 
has been cut off, except so far as it may be supplied by the blood 
and the vasomotor nerves. If the theory of Bernard were true, there 
could be no atrophy after the section of a muscular nerve. Yet 
Bernard is one of the most eminent modern physiologists, and in 
trying to locate vitality in the tissues instead of the central nervous 
system, he is merely following the mechanical an ti- vital drift of the 
profession, which he has carried to the redttctio ad absurdum. 

There is a great wasting of the muscles even when they are not 
cut off from the cord and brain by section of their nerves, in cases 
of hysterical paralysis. In these cases there is a loss of sensibility 
as well as motion, and consequently the muscles can have no reflex 
influence from the cord, and it no longer sustains them. 



46 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. [CHAP. II. 

The ganglionic system extending along the spinal column, and 
sending its ramifications along all blood-vessels, has been regarded 
as an independent seat of life, but in man, at least, its action soon 
ceases when the influx from the brain is cut off. 

The spinal and ganglionic systems are connected along the whole 
sninal column ; and Bernard has shown the ganglionic (vasomotor) 

- s of the upper extremities arise from the roots of the dorsal 
1 nerves from the third to the seventh pair, and those for the 

.v : extremities from the lower dorsal and lumbar roots. Hence 
Li upper dorsal region of the spine has an influence upon the arms 
as w -11 as the cervical region which originates the brachial plexus. 

That the ganglionic or sympathetic system which supplies and 
governs the heart and all the blood-vessels is under cerebral control 
is shown in the facility with which mental conditions agitate the 
heart, disturb the stomach, or derange the bowels, even producing 
f anting, convulsive action of the heart, vomiting, or an attack of 
cholera, and in impressible hypnotic subjects producing actual disease 
of the nature of what is impressed on the mind. None of these 
experiments are more remarkable than the production in St. Francis, 
in 1224, and a number of Catholic devotees of both sexes since, of 
the stigmata or imitation of the wounds of Jesus, which sometimes- 
even bleed. The same pervasive power of the brain controls and 
modifies the life and growth in the womb. In short, there is nothing 
in man beyond its control. 



CHAPTER III. 

CRITICAL DISCUSSION AND EXPOSITION OF 
ERRORS. 

Tenacity of the old ideas — Centralization of life in higher developments — ■ Inca- 
pacity to realize the functions of the heart and the brain — Disregard of Gall and 
indifference to experiments — Prof. Mitchell's experiments — Defective reasoning 
capacity — Origin of life by influx — Sanative power of the brain — Philosophy of 
life — Huxley's admissions as to the vital power — Opposition to psychic science — 
Importance of psychic co-operation — If life is but the forces of matter the largest 
animals must have the most — Superiority of the small — Psychic truth demands 
our support — Vague ideas of physiologists: Todd and Bowman, Bennett, Flint, 
Bain — Doctrines of John Hunter, Dr. Prout, Muller, Beclard, Bichat, Carpenter — 
Life is not transformed heat — Carpenter's absurdities — Beale's statements as to the 
nerves — Chemical action not the source of life — Life always comes from life, as 
matter comes from matter. 

Ultimate seat of life in the tissues, in fluids and imponderables — Living substances 
in the air — How to obtain amoebae — Vital actions of minute bodies — Their psy- 
chic life — Character and action of bioplasm — How it forms the body — Passage 
of vital forces by contact, in and out of the body — Nerve organization beyond the 
microscope. 

How clearly does it appear, when we consider ail the facts, that 
life in the body is an influx from the brain, not only in its voluntary 
but in its involuntary processes, all of which are controlled by the 
action of the brain and responsive to its emotional conditions, which 
not only control every secretion, every movement of fluids and every 
vital change,* but transmit a similar life with all its psychic and phy- 
siological peculiarities to a new being in the womb. 

And yet so strong is the domination of habit and of world-wide 
opinions, that I retained the old biological ideas on this subject 
longer than I am willing to confess, without comparing them with 
facts. Like other physiologists, I regarded the brain as an addition 

*The most perfect demonstration of this is found in the famous stigmata of relig- 
ious fanatics, in whom the power of imagination has reproduced the appearances of 
the crucified body of Jesus. This has assumed a more scientific shape in the recert 
experiments of several cultivators of hypnotism at Pans, who have succeeded in pro- 
ducing blisters by mental suggestion. It is nearly half a century since experiment- 
ers in America have shown that their subjects can be made instantlv to show the 
symptoms of any disease. A fact neglected by the profession, because the operators 
were not physicians. These facts place beyond any doubt the truth that every func- 
tion in the body is subject to mental or cerebral control. Hypnotizers have recently 
shown the control in this manner of the heart and the pulse. 



48 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

to a solid system of life developed at a lower stage of living in the 
body and the nerves, — not perceiving that as life is in all cases an 
affair of the nervous system, it must necessarily centralize in the 
highest development or controlling structure of the nervous system, 
instead of remaining in its subordinate parts, as it is a law of the 
animal kingdom that with advancing development the functions dif- 
fused through the body shall become centralized in organs of greater 
power and superior organization. Thus the heart becomes the chief 
reliance for circulation, instead of the diffused capillary system, and 
the brain instead of the spinal and ganglionic systems, which still 
remain in a subordinate position, as do the capillaries in the circula- 
tion of the blood. To ignore the brain as the chief seat of life would 
be as unscientific as to ignore the heart as the cause of the circula- 
tion. 

The materialistic physiologists who ignore the concentration of life 
in the brain, and suppose the spinal cord and adjacent ganglia to be 
the entire sources of the organic functions to which they hold an im- 
mediate executive relation, have reflected but little upon the absolute 
dependence of all upon the brain, and the speedy suspension of all 
when the influx from the brain is interrupted. 

It is characteristic of animals to scan phenomena closely without 
dwelling upon or even discovering their causes, and it shows how lit- 
tle the general intelligence of the human race has advanced beyond 
the stage of animal life, to observe that in the days of Harvey almost 
the entire medical profession could look at the passage of red blood 
from the heart and the return of the venous blood toward the heart, 
the arrangements of its valves and its forcible action, without realiz- 
ing that the heart was the active agent of the circulation, but stolidly 
rejecting the idea, and treating with coarse derision this simple and 
manifest discovery. 

Is it not the same intellectual incapacity to-day which hinders the 
recognition of the paramount power of the brain as the seat of vital- 
ity, and prevents the consequent direction of investigations to dis- 
cover the locations, the laws, and the philosophy of life in the seat of 
its existence, by comparative development as illustrated by Gall; by 
accurate pathological investigations of psychic as well as physical, 
functions ; by the study of the marvellous facts developed by the 
cultivators of animal magnetism ; or by my own method of vital excit- 
ation of the brain and psychometric exploration of its functions. 

The method of Gall (studying comparative development in men 
and animals) was eminently rational, and no one has ever followed 
that method as a student of nature without realizing that Gall had 
made many important discoveries. But his method was abandoned 



CHAP. III. CRITICAL DISCUSSION. AO 

■i • • 

by the profession generally, for no reason, apparently, but its aversion 
to psychic studies. His inaccuracies were treated as falsehoods, and 
a host of frivolous objections were brought forward, the majority of 
which were based on ignorance of the subject and ignorance of the 
doctrines of Gall — and under such influences the present generation 
of physicians has become confirmed in the prejudices of ignorance 
against a science of which they have no valuable knowledge. 

Hence it was that my demonstrations of the brain, before the Bos- 
ton committee of physicians, before the Faculty of the Indiana State 
University, and on many other occasions in collegiate institutions, 
have produced no impression on the profession beyond the sphere of 
my personal presence, and the repetition of my experiments by the 
famous Prof. J. K. Mitchell, of the Jefferson Medical College of Phil- 
adelphia, produced no more impression than a sky-rocket would make 
on the darkness of the night. 

Prof. Mitchell was a man of genius, but not of the moral courage 
which appreciates, upholds, and diffuses truth. He could not realize 
the splendor and the power of a revelation of the functions of the 
brain, which he knew would make even less impression upon the 
well-organized and consolidated mass of the medical profession than 
did the discovery of Harvey, which was so simple and so easily 
within the grasp of the humblest intelligence. Hence he ceased to 
speak of the subject or manifest any further interest in it, and for 
these forty years past, physiological instruction has gone on, blind to 
the greatest and most fundamental truths, the ignorance of which 
has had far more serious and disastrous effects than the ignorance of 
the circulation, for it was an ignorance of the basis of all medical 
philosophy, ignorance of the basis of insanity, ignorance of the phil- 
osophy of animal magnetism, and ignorance of the greatest powers of 
the human mind, through which all rapid intellectual progress will 
hereafter be made. 

The state of intellectual hebetude which permits the cultivation of 
physiology, in the study of its minor phenomena, to the neglect of 
the brain, with a vague and dreamy notion that the brain, as to its 
convoluted structure, maintains some vague relation to psychic phe- 
nomena in their aggregate, without having, as all other nervous struct- 
ures are known to have, specific functions in special structures, and 
without realizing that its wonderful psychic powers are anything more 
than results of chemical and mechanical processes, is partly the 
result of our miserably defective education, and partly the result of 
imperfect development of the higher faculties which seek and appre- 
ciate the highest truths, and cannot therefore be overcome until a 
higher ethical condition shall place society, or at least its teachers, ort 
the plane of philosophy, which is far above the animal nature. 



SO CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

When we understand clearly that life is located in the brain and 
its subordinate spinal and ganglionic structures, we may inquire 
whether it originates there, or comes by influx and is replenished 
from the limitless ocean of unembodied life which is invisible — 
whether the over-soul of the universe does by any intelligible species 
of influx sustain and develop the life of individuals, which seems to 
be a fragment of the Divine nature — will, wisdom, and love. 

That there is such an influx I believe, for as life is the potential 
element that survives the body, and is therefore distinct from all 
material structures, and capable of growth and development while in 
the body, it must have an influx distinct from the influx of food, and 
that influx must come from other life, or vital elements which are 
also distinct from matter. 

Whether and to what extent this influx is a direct, immediate influx 
from the spirit world, or is an indirect influx by coming in as an 
influx of ideas and emotions from the wise organization, order, 
beauty, and benevolence of the visible world, or coming in with organ- 
ized matter, and developing from food and air, is a profound question. 
To me it appears that we have both the direct and the indirect influx, 
and that there are potentialities in food and air which are received 
into the body, and combined with, as subordinate to, the higher influx 
which is purely spiritual. The discussion of this would be out of 
place here, further than to say that the healer may often use this 
spiritual influx for his own benefit and for that of his patient. The 
great positive life must be the source of all other life, controlling all 
evolution of life on this globe, inflowing to man before birth, and con- 
tinuing through life, which influx controls the subordinate influx of 
light, oxygen, and food. After this subordinate influx has ceased, 
and the body has become unfitted for farther influx of life through 
the nervous system, the vitality or soul which takes its departure 
becomes in a far higher degree the recipient of a continued influx. 
The non-perception and non-recognition of this influx by scientists is 
no objection to its reality. The chief stars of the stellar universe are 
unknown and unrecognized — by the common mind, by those who 
have not used the telescope ; and no matter how many hundred mil- 
lions ignore or disbelieve the invisible influx, its distinct perception 
by a single telescopic mind establishes its reality. 

When the laws of divine influx are studied and obeyed, there will 
be men and women with nobler physical forms, far less liable to dis- 
ease, or to early decay and death. The study of the brain and soul will 
lead to that noble result. 

With this hasty glance it will be apparent that I regard the brain 
as the source and not the consumer of life, and that we may, advan- 



CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 5 I 

tageously, stimulate the brain for sanative effects, when we under- 
stand its organology. The natural stimulus of the brain, as our 
spiritual energies are roused in conquering obstacles, pursuing our 
pleasures and enjoying society, develops our entire being, physical 
and mental. Force of character, arising from the occipital brain, not 
only leads to success, but energizes and develops the body. Men 
degenerate when confined for twelve or fourteen hours to quiet, hum- 
ble work, and deprived of the exercise of the active ambitious facul- 
ties of the occipital region. Cerebral energy is therefore an essential 
condition of health, and the treatment of the brain, which requires 
accurate knowledge, is an important part of nervauric treatment. 

Having thus shown that life is ever an influx, let us look to the ori- 
gin of this influx. Does life from the celestial world of life come to 
earth and summon from the elements the matter that it needs for an 
animal or vegetable being ? 

It does, and yet apparently does not. If life and matter stand 
apart, one must approach the other — life must approach, for matter 
cannot. But we are not accustomed to witness the process. We 
simply observe that life enters a small portion of bioplasm which is 
adapted to life by its properties and which has previously been organ- 
ized by life. The life that enters is a part of the organizing life of 
parents which evolved both the matter and the spirit. 

It is beyond the range of our present science to speak of the time 
when life was not on earth, and when it began to organize a proto- 
plasm for the reception of the lowest forms of life, and to have the 
continuous influx by which the lower were elevated to the higher 
forms. This will all be understood in time, but at present we simply 
perceive that life occupies, at its origin, a speck of protoplasm, and 
that from this speck, holding in itself the invisible and incomprehen- 
sible life, all forms of life originate. The physical organism is noth- 
ing but a nidus, a startin < point from which the creative power of 
the life proceeds to the production of the man, the animal, or the 
plant. And thus it becomes self-evident that an invisible spiritual 
power contains the potentiality of every possible living being. It 
builds up the structure, grows with its growth, fills it at maturity 
with all the powers of life, and within a limited period abandons its 
home, fully developed to seek another sphere of existence where the 
vision of the materialist refuses to follow it. He will follow the cal- 
oric which gives to steam its enormous power, when it has left the 
steam as powerless water, and find that it still exists as caloric in a 
different environment, but he will not follow the vital forces when 
they leave the body, nor will he listen to any testimony that they 
have been perceived, felt, heard, and understood after this departure. 



52 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

He is willing to perceive that caloric, after its departure from steam 
or iron, may again appear and enter other water or iron, but that 
human vitality can return to impress other human forms he will not 
admit, though, so far as it can be established by scientific testimony, 
it is as well established as any fact in chemistry. 

Even when standing before the facts which demonstrate the nature 
and power of life, the stubborn sceptic refuses to use his reason and 
surrender his prejudice. Huxley, the prince of sceptics, states the 
case thus : Speaking of the speck of protoplasm in which life begins 
its operations, he says : " Strange possibilities lie dormant in that 
semi-fluid globule. Let a moderate supply of warmth reach its 
watery cradle, and the plastic matter undergoes changes so rapid, and 
yet so steady and purpose-like in their succession, that one can only 
compare them to those operated by a skilled modeller upon a formless 
lump of clay. As with an invisible trowel, the mass is divided and 
subdivided into smaller and smaller portions, until it is reduced to an 
aggregation of granules not too large to build withal the finest 
fabrics of the nascent organism. And then, it is as if a delicate fin- 
ger traced out the line to be occupied by the spinal column and 
moulded the contour of the body, — pinching up the head at one end, 
the tail at the other, and fashioning flank and limb into due propor- 
tions in so artistic a way, that after watching the process hour by 
hour, one is almost involuntarily possessed by the notion that some 
more subtle aid to vision than an achromatic would show the hidden 
artist, with his plan before him, striving with skilful manipulation to 
perfect his work." 

But this involuntary suggestion of reason that there is a " hidden 
artist," a hidden power working to a certain end, the professor of 
materialism suppresses as easily as a dogmatic theologian suppresses 
any involuntary suggestion of reason which would disturb his dog- 
matic faith. He can recognize invisible caloric, invisible electricity, 
invisible actinism, invisible affinity, but invisible life he will not rec- 
ognize, for it is against his dogmatic creed, and when it comes back to 
demand recognition in other forms he will not look, as Horky would 
not look through Galileo's telescope, and Huxley said the investiga- 
tion was of no interest to him and treated it with contempt. 

The arrogant mind which refuses to recognize the returning spirit, 
or listen to any evidence of its return when it enters a human body, 
giving to its subject while present a marvellous intelligence far 
beyond his normal powers, and giving to the ministrations of his 
hand a healing power over disease which cannot be rivalled, becomes 
an almost criminal indifference to human welfare and progress. To 
burn a library and thus deprive its readers of ready access to the 



CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 53 

wisdom of the past is not so great a crime as to make war upon the 
influx of the vast stores of knowledge which humanity is realizing as 
it advances to the future. 

These suggestions are not foreign to this volume, for the co-opera- 
tion of the spirit world is the most powerful agency for increasing 
the controlling power of the human hand : and the penetrating power 
of the clairvoyant and psychometric faculties. Operators who have 
thus been sustained and guided have often told me that the prin- 
ciples of Sarcognomy corresponded with the instructions they had 
received from spiritual sources. 

Finally, I would suggest that if life is but " a collocation of the 
forces of inorganic matter," the larger the collocation the grander 
and more brilliant must be the result. The whale, the mastodon, 
and megalosaurus should be the grandest types of life. But if life be 
something entirely different from matter — a power by which matter 
is wielded, the larger the amount of matter the more difficult it must 
be for the inspiring vitality to wield it effectively and display its high- 
est powers. The largest and most corpulent men and women would 
show less inspiration or mental and physical ability than persons of 
medium size. The man of four or five hundred pounds is never an 
influential element in society. The lion, the tiger, the fox, and the 
squirrel show vastly more vital energy than the hippopotamus and 
rhinoceros. The smallest fish excels the monsters of the sea in 
locomotive energy, and the little birds that soar in the air where man 
cannot follow them exhibit a vital power and brilliance in inverse pro- 
portion to size, its maximum being attained in the little humming 
birds ; and still the power of the living organism increases as we go 
down to insects. If an elephant had the same proportional power it 
could leap over mountains or fly like a shot from continent to conti- 
nent. Even among insects the smaller excel the larger in vital en- 
dowments, and, according to M. Felix Plateau, in the same group of 
insects the force varies inversely as the weight, both in power of 
traction and power of flight. Nor do the mental endowments decline 
with the diminishing size ; on the contrary, the largest animals that 
exist on land or in the sea, or that ever have existed, are far inferior 
in psychic endowments and capacity for intelligent combined action 
to the little colonies of ants, and the eagle or lion shows less skill in 
predatory warfare than the humble little spider. It was a small man, 
five feet three inches high and weighing about a hundred pounds, 
when he began, whose armies changed the map of Europe. . 

Spirit perpetually struggles with matter to which it is bound : the 
struggle of ages is in progress to-day ; and we have reason to believe 
that in the progress of evolution the mastery of spirit over the condi- 



54 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

tions of the material world will be far greater ; but at present we can 
look for our entire development only to that higher stage of life 
which is unencumbered by matter. 

The discussion of spiritual life in this chapter would be regarded 
by the majority of scientists to-day as out of place in a work of prac- 
tical science, but truth is always practical — always leads to better 
conditions in human life; and this especial truth is destined to 
become more and more important, more and more prominent in the 
healing art and in all social relations, as civilization advances ; and it 
pre-eminently needs the attention and support of honorable scientific 
teachers at the present time, when it is so little known to the leaders 
of society. No one is worthy to be a teacher who looks solely to 
present popularity and profit, which are gained by coinciding with the 
educated masses, colleges, and sects. Nothing is more urgently 
needed for human progress than an honest, unselfish devotion to 
truth. 

In signal contrast with the intelligible explanations of life just 
presented, let us see how physiologists have been groping in the dark, 
and either evaded this question entirely by unmeaning expressions 
or confessed their absolute ignorance, like Todd and Bowman, who 
were unable to arrive at any conclusion in their " Physiological Anat- 
omy and Physiology of Man." 

The most prevalent doctrine of the schools is that life is the 
product of the chemical energies of matter in its organized condition, 
or, as expressed by Bennett, " Our modern view of life is, not that it 
is independent of matter, but a condition of matter ; in other 
words, that material substances found in the atmosphere and in plants 
and animals, influenced by certain forces, have peculiar properties 
communicated to them. These properties are the power of growth 
in certain directions, contractility, sensibility, and mental acts ; the 
exercise of any one of which constitutes life." "We are as ignorant 
of the true nature of physical as we are of vital properties." 

Notwithstanding the confession of ignorance, this is a positive 
assertion, that " mental acts " are produced by organized matter, a 
doctrine most unequivocally expressed by the American physiological 
author, Flint, in saying that the brain secretes thought as the liver 
secretes bile. Physiologists simply stare at the fact that vital func- 
tions are manifested, and that the manifestation comes from organ- 
ized matter, and there they rest, in the assumption that the power 
belongs to the matter in consequence of organization. Prof. Bain, 
who has been regarded as a philosophic writer, speaks of life in his 
work on the " Senses and Intellect," page 60, as " a collocation of the 
forces of inorganic matter" ! ! 



CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 55 

John Hunter, however, recognized the truth that "mere composi- 
tion of matter does not give life," and therefore inferred that there 
must be a distinct vital substance which he called materia vita? (mat- 
ter of life) diffused through the body, which Dr. Abernethy supposed 
to be similar to electricity. . 

Dr. Prout, author of one of the Bridgewater Treatises, went a lit- 
tle farther, and supposed that the phenomena of life must be due to 
certain organic agents of great variety among animals and plants, " an 
ultimate principle endowed by the Creator with a faculty little short 
of intelligence, by means of which it is enabled to construct such a 
mechanism from natural elements, and by the aid of natural agencies, 
as to render it capable of taking further advantage of. their properties 
and of making them subservient to its use." 

This was a rational inference from the facts, but why could not Dr. 
Prout go a little farther and recognize the fact that this organic agent 
was nothing else but the spiritual element inherited from a prior life, 
the departure of which at death left the organized body without a 
single vital power. When we recognize that spiritual element and 
trace its action through the brain and nervous system the explanation 
of life is complete. 

But the suggestions of Prout were rejected as fanciful, though 
Muller, the German physiologist, ventured to assert almost the same 
thing — that there was an "organic force" in the whole constitution 
which generated the organs. fc ' This rational creative force " (said he) 
" is exerted in every animal strictly in accordance with what the nature 
of each requires : it exists already in the germ, and creates in it the 
essential parts of the future animal." This is very true, but what 
rational creative force is there in man but that which the parent gives 
to the germ and which when it is withdrawn leaves the body without 
any vital power. The materialism which refuses to recognize the 
soul, and neglects the psychic study of the brain, is what has obscured 
the intelligence of physiologists, and left them to fall back on such 
vague expressions of ignorance as where Beclard calls life " the 
special activity of organized bodies/' Lawrence calls it " an assem- 
blage of all the functions," and Bichat " the sum total of the func- 
tions which resist death " — in which there is no explanation of any- 
thing. 

The learned Prof. Carpenter, though not a strict materialist, 
makes a still more blind and confused statement in his " Principles of 
Human Physiology," in which he says: " The source of this Vital Power 
is to be found, not in the organization of the being itself, but in the 
forces which operate upon it ab extemo ; and that it has the same 
close and intimate relation with the Heat, Electricity, Chemical 



56 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

Affinity, and other agencies of the Inorganic world, which they have 
been proved to have with each other: so that just as Heat acting 
upon water generates Mechanical Force, or when applied to a certain 
combination of metals excites Electricity, so when brought to bear 
upon a torpid animal or upon a seed (in which the material conditions 
of this activity are present) it manifests itself as Vital Force." In 
other words, vitality is transformed Heat. 

It is true that caloric is necessary to vital operations, but there is 
not the slightest evidence of its being transformed in the body. The 
food which comes in ab externo is equally necessary and is really 
transformed in the body : hence he might more rationally have made 
food the source of vitality. The same might be said of water, with- 
out which there is no life. The Rotifer when dried appears quite 
dead, but, water supplied, it manifests life : so we might in Dr. Car- 
penter's fashion call water the source of life, as there is no life with- 
out it. With still better reason he might have called oxygen the 
source of life. 

Dr. Carpenter, though a very learned physiologist, was not a pro- 
found or acute thinker, but was capable of following a speculation to 
very absurd results, as when in following up the chemical theory of 
the value of food and its calorific power he asserted that starch would 
be a better diet than animal food for the Polar regions with the ther- 
mometer forty or fifty degrees below zero. His language was : ' A 
savage with one carcass and an equal weight of starch would sup- 
port life for the same length of time during which another restricted 
to animal food would require five such carcasses." 

No savage or scientist was ever silly enough to act on this theory 
that a hundred pounds of starch would support life and warmth as 
well as four hundred pounds of meat, for meat is indispensable in 
arctic climates. The blunder of Dr. Carpenter was owing to a mis- 
take in his chemical calculations, which, however, has not been 
observed or corrected by his cotemporaries. 

His error in placing the source of life in external agents was owing 
to that very common obtuseness among physiologists which leads 
them to turn away from the brain and soul, of which they know so 
little, and try to explain life without them, which of course results in 
failure and absurdity. 

The chemico-mechanical theory which ignores life leads to the gen- 
eral reception of that most baseless theory that the combustion of 
carbon in the body produces muscular power, although the most 
extreme combustion of carbon, producing feverish heat, is accom- 
panied by the total destruction of muscular power. 

The same theory requires the assumption that chemical action in 



CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 57 

the brain and nerves is the source of mental and nervous energy. 
Of this Dr. Lionel Beale, who has no superior in England in micro- 
scopic physiology, says : "The view that nerve energy is stored up in 
chemical compounds which undergo change during nerve action is 
still taught. That such an idea should be stated at all betrays igno- 
rance of the character of the axis cylinder of the nerve itself. If we 
examine the axis cylinder, say of the sciatic nerve of a frog, what do 
we find ? A firm, tough, fibrous-like, flattened band, not easily torn, 
and evidently consisting of a tissue of slow growth — in fact, the 
very last characters we should expect to meet with in a tissue prone 
to rapid chemical change. Neither is a structure surrounded by ten 
times its thickness of oily matter (myelin) favorably situated for tak- 
ing up new materials and quickly getting rid of products of decay. 
One of the least permeable substances in the body is the myelin of 
the nerve fibre, and yet through this must pass all the material from 
the blood to renovate the disintegrated axis cylinder, if nerve action 
is due to such chemical change in the nerve fibre itself." 

When we ignore the power of the soul and the brain we are com- 
pelled to make many such baseless assertions. 

It is utterly impossible to trace vital phenomena to chemical action/) 
The chief chemical action, combustion, produces neither muscular, 
mental, nervous, nor nutritive power. It is positively antagonistic 
both to muscularity and to nutrition. The most complete formative 
nutrition occurs before birth, when the chemical process of combus- 
tion has not yet commenced. Combustion simply produces heat, 
which is a necessary condition for vital processes, and when that heat 
is furnished in warm climates by the atmosphere, less combustion 
occurs and less food is needed ; the demand for food is to supply the 
waste of the tissues, as they wear out, and an excessive supply might 
result in fever. And yet both mental and muscular vigor are main- 
tained when the chemical generation of heat is so nearly suspended. 
If under such conditions the spiritual vitality be sufficient to check 
the ordinary decomposition, life may be maintained without food for 
very long periods, and the entire suspension of life in the well- 
attested cases in which Hindoos have been buried for months becomes 
credible. 

The characteristic of vitality is that it is utterly inexplicable by 
any known chemical or mechanical cause. It is an original independ- 
ent power, as much as our own will power, making matter move, 
grow, and pass through many changes to produce a definite, complex, 
and valuable result which never has been and never can be imitated 
by any other power. 

This vital power has never come from any organization of matter, 



58 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. Ill 

either accidental or designedly produced, but has always come 
from a preceding vitality of which it is the continuation, which vital- 
ity has existed solely in a delicate, fluid, self-moving material, in the 
interior of living bodies, which has the power of taking hold of other 
matter and transforming it in a manner peculiar to life. 

Thus are all living bodies formed, and their form is due to the 
character of the original vitality, for the source of which we are com- 
pelled to look along the endless line of prior life ; and finding that it 
has never originated from dead matter, we are compelled to seek its 
origin in the life which exists independent of matter, one form of 
which, after dwelling in matter, returns to the immaterial mode of 
existence as the spiritual man. 

Life, being immaterial or spiritual, must evidently have entered mat- 
ter from the spiritual world — the infinity of which we call Divine. 
How, when, and where this incarnation of the Divine has occurred is 
a question which is not beyond human capacity. The future will 
reveal. 

THE ULTIMATE SEAT OF LIFE IN THE TISSUES. 

Life is an element of infinite freedom and versatility of action — 
the very antithesis of dead matter, and consequently can associate 
with matter only in its refined and mobile forms. Its most congenial 
home is in association with imponderable elements. In material organ- 
isms it locates exclusively in fluid substance, and not in compact solid 
material. 

If the moisture of the air be condensed on a glass vessel containing 
ice, we obtain evidence of the vast diffusion of the minute forms of 
life inherent in fluids. A good magnifying power will exhibit soft 
amorphous transparent particles suspended in the fluid, very difficult 
to detect by the microscope, and another class of oval or spherical 
particles consisting of the soft transparent substance in a firmer mem- 
brane. The mass of structureless bioplasm constituting the amoebae 
may be obtained by putting in water a small fragment of animal or 
vegetable matter and leaving it a few days in the light. The amoebae 
may be seen actively moving without apparent organs of motion, and 
taking in food without apparent digestive organs. Though less than 
the hundred thousandth of an inch, they show active movements and 
change of form. The same continual movements and change of form 
are seen in the human mucus corpuscles or white blood corpuscles, 
movements originating in their substance without external cause. 

The living matter of animal bodies consists of free transparent sub- 
stance, or of such substance enclosed in a capsule. This transparent, 
structureless fluid is the peculiar substance or bioplasm possessing 



CHAP. I 



II.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 59 



life, and has the capacity for vital movements, differing from all other 
substances. Not merely in the amoebae or any other definite forms 
do these powers exist, but wherever this transparent structureless bio- 
plasm exists it manifests this mysterious self-acting power, and a still 
more mysterious control over adjacent matter, changing it from dead to 
living matter with new properties as the adult animal assimilates food. 
Moreover, it has in miniature all the properties of life — not only 
locomotion, digestion, and growth, but choice in the selection of its 
food, and even the power of preying upon small organisms as one 
animal preys upon another — as the snake swallows a frog — and pur- 
suing and uniting with another organism as if attracted by love. The 
white corpuscles of the blood can devour bacilli, and the male sper- 
matozoa rush on with persevering, active, and diversified movements of 
their tails, circular or undulatory, to seek and enter the female ovule, 
their eager conjunction being a repetition, on a smaller scale, of the 
affectionate union of the male and female to whom they belong. The 
" psychic life of micro-organisms," so clearly shown by A. Binet, is 
just as real in those simple bioplasmic elements in man, the white cor- 
puscles and the spermatozoa. Thus life, which is fully developed in 
man, is everywhere in the animal kingdom essentially the same, even 
in the smallest bioplasmic element. In the spermatozoon it partakes 
of the energy or debility of the man, and carries in itself a micro- 
scopic embodiment of all his characteristics, as the acorn embodies the 
characteristics of the oak, and hence it acts with the characteristics 
of its parent in its microscopic existence as well as when that existence 
has been enlarged to the human type in the infant. Wonderful is 
the perfection with which the spermatozoon represents the man. 

Bioplasm has everywhere the power which we see in the amoebae, 
of continually absorbing and vitalizing other matter, and also of form- 
ing from itself solid substances, or throwing off liquid or gaseous 
matter, and it is the essential element of all living bodies from which 
all structures of animals and plants are formed, owing its origin, so 
far as we can trace, to prior bioplasm, since it never originates from 
dead matter. Each species of bioplasm has different vital properties 
and capacity for forming different substances. How the life resid- 
ing in bioplasm determines the formation of muscle, bone, integu- 
ment, nerve, etc., is still an unfathomed mystery, infinitely beyond the 
reach of physical science. We can learn only that life is organized 
power, working with a certain intelligence toward its own manifestation 
in matter. Our best conception of its nature is that which we derive 
from consciousness, as we are living beings. But when we examine 
the bioplasm with the highest microscopic powers, enlarging diame- 
ters 5000 times, we get an objective view of the working of this 



60 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

power (of which we are conscious in our own voluntary movements) 
as it displays itself in the bioplasm. Dr. Beale says : "The compo- 
nent particles of the bioplasm evidently alter their positions in a 
most remarkable manner. One particle really moves in advance of 
another or around another. A portion may move into or round 
another portion. A bulging may occur at one point of the circumfer- 
ence, or at ten or twenty different points at the same moment. The 
moving power resides in every particle of the very transparent, invari- 
ably colorless and structureless material, for by the very highest powers 
only an indication of minute spherical particles can be discerned. 
Because molecules have been seen in some of the masses of moving 
bioplasm, the motion has been attributed to these. It is true the 
molecules actually move, but the living transparent material in which 
they are situated moves first, and the molecules are carried by the cur- 
rents into the extended portion. . . The movements of bioplasm are 
totally distinct from contractility, as manifested by any form of muscu- 
lar tissue, since they take place in every direction and every movement 
differs from the rest." Thus its vitality belongs not to an organism, but 
to all its particles, molecules, or atoms independently. The psychic 
capacities of ants and of many minute insects show that infinitesimal 
particles of living matter may have high psychic capacities. 

How this active bioplasm produces the structures of the body is 
explained by Dr. Beale as follows : " Men and animals, all their 
tissues and organs, their forms and structures, result from series of 
changes which commence in a portion of matter too minute to be 
weighed, which is perfectly colorless, and which appears perfectly 
structureless. Even if the particle of bioplasm be magnified 5000 
diameters, not the faintest indication of fibres or particles exhibiting 
any special arrangement — in fact, not a trace of anything having 
structure — can be discerned." 

" The speck of living matter, however, absorbs certain substances, 
and increases by assimilating matter it selects, and changing it into 
matter like itself. Thus it gradually grows, and where it has attained 
a certain size, perhaps one two-thousandth of an inch in diameter, it 
divides ; or small portions are detached from it, each of which grows 
like the primary particle, and in the same way gives origin to succes- 
sors from which tissues are at length produced. Form and structure 
result from the death of the bioplasm, and no matter that is alive 
possesses either." (Protoplasm, p. 302.) 

Thus the solid tissues of the body are, as it were, the apparatus 
vitalized by the unseen bioplasm, which is itself but fluid matter 
inhabited by life, itself a power as intangible and mysterious as grav- 
ity. The structures which it forms by developing cells, and the glob- 



CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 6l 

ules and fibrillae of the nervous system, through which it controls 
our voluntary movements, are illustrated in the following sketches. 
(See Plate of bioplasm and nerves.) 

In these we see that the ultimate relation of nerve to muscle is 
simply that of contact, and consequently that the transmission of the 
vital force of volition, which moves the muscle, is simply the passage 
of that force or influence from one fibril to another — substantially 
the same fact as that against which medical dogmatism battles — the 
passage of human nervauric influence from the hand of the operator 
to the subject, by which so many vital influences are produced, and 
muscles are contracted. The same thing is seen in the brain, the 
spinal cord, and the ganglia. A great number of the ganglion globules 
or cells of various degrees of maturity, which abound where large ner- 
vous masses are found, have no fibrous or tubular connections, and 
consequently exert their influence only by contact with the delicate 
fibrillae and nerve tubes among them.* "It is most probable " (says 
Solly) " that the nucleated cells of vesicular neurine are the active 
agents in the production of nervous power." Yet, if these produce 
a nervous power to be transmitted to the body, it must pass by con- 
tact, as they are isolated from the nerve channels which connect 
with the caudate vesicles and maybe traced in their downward course. 
I think it quite certain that influences are continually passing through 
the body for which we cannot trace definite routes ; and the power 
transmitted by the nerves traverses a homogeneous semifluid sub- 
stance, not as a liquid or gas, but as an indefinable power trans- 
mitted by contact or continuity of substance. What right have we to 
suppose that this transmission of power is abruptly arrested at the 
surface of the body ? All sensitive persons know by their personal 
experience that it is not. 

As the search for life ends in the mystery of a bioplasmic fluid, so 
does the search for its principal seat in the nervous system end in a 
delicacy of structure which is beyond the reach of the microscope. 
In the lowest organisms the nerve substance is beyond discovery — 
even leading some physiologists to suppose that it is diffused through 
the substance of the body. 

* These detached cells are an exception to the general structure of the nervous 
system, and are supposed to be germinating cells not yet sufficiently developed to 
display fibrous connections. 




FlG 7 ^_ s:; 

The production of formed material from bioplasm. in epithelial cells 

fWffli 




Disfribution of finest nerve fibres which result from the division of dark-bordered nerve fibres to 
the elementary muscular fibres of the thin mylo-hyold muscle of the hylaorgreen tree frog. Tba 
diameter of each muscular fibie is Jess than tHat Qf a human red blood corpuscle. 



FlG.lo 




PLATE I 
BIOPLASM 

AND 

NERVES 




CHAP. III.] CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 63 

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATE BIOPLASM AND NERVES. 

In Fig. 1 we see minute living amoebae magnified five thousand times, pictured 
in one of their momentary forms. If photographed every minute no two photo- 
graphs would be the same, for every portion of their substance moves independently, 
like the individuals of an army; and this internal living motion belongs in like man- 
ner to the white blood globules of man, the pus corpuscles and the mucus corpuscles, 
so long as they are alive, showing that vitality is intimately combined with every por- 
tion of living matter. 

In Fig. 2, A and B show the mysterious structure of the cerebellum. In A 
the letter a indicates a round ganglion globule containing a little nucleus, and b 
refers to the delicate nerve-tubes. These structures lie in a bed of fine granular 
matter, containing many nuclei. These are from the interior of the cerebellum. 
The surface structure of the cerebellum is shown in B. a refers to a ganglion globule 
not 30 large as that in A, for the structures at the surface of the cerebrum and cere- 
bellum are much finer than those in the interior, which connect with the muscular 
system of the body. The granular matter with nuclei appear as in A. Coarseness 
of structure in the nervous system is found in the muscular nerves and the central 
portions with which they connect. Sensitive structures are finer, the emotional and 
intellectual finest of all. 

In Fig. 3 we have a ganglion cell of the green tree-frog, from its sympathetic or 
involuntary system, showing a complex organism, acting like a little brain upon the 
straight fibre and the spiral fibre which it gives off. This little cell controls and 
sustains the parts that it supplies more wisely than it could be done by voluntary, 
action. Life would be impossible if its processes were not sustained by involuntary 
action, — but what does science know to-day of these involuntary processes. 

In Fig. 4 we observe the origin of life as near as we can approach it, — the devel- 
opment of a spermatozoon, a possible future animal (after Wagner), occurringin the 
vesicle of evolution, but we learn nothing of the power that forms it. Life remains 
a mystery. 

In Fig. 5 Dr. Beale shows the origin of tendon from the central bioplasmic sub- 
stance that forms it. We know the process exists, but we do not understand it. We 
simply know that a certain soft or fluid material has organizing power. 

In Fig. 6 we have a nerve vesicle, called caudate, because it has many branch- 
ing processes running off to minute filaments which are like the interior portion of 
larger tubular nerve fibres, one of which is seen in the figure. This vesicle is from 
the posterior horn of the gray substance of the spinal cord. It shows the complex 
radiations and connections of nervous matter, which are still more numerous and 
much finer in the brain. 

In Fig. 7 we see, as in Fig. 5, the formative element or bioplasm existing and 
operating in epithelial cells, the formed material increasing as the central bioplasm 
is consumed in making it. 

In Fig. 8 we learn something of the origin of our own lives. In the germinal 
membrane appears a roundish spot, where two membranes are in contact, a serous 
and a mucous layer, the former to develop the nervous and muscular systems, the 
latter the digestive organs. The central portion of the geiminal area becomes a 
pellucid area, in which appears a delicate line, the primitive groove, appearing in 
the serous layer. This is the beginning, and at this beginning we find one end 
wider than the other; at this end the head is formed. Cells are developed on each 
side of the primitive groove, making what are called the dorsal laminae. They 
form a tube for the head, in which appear its three essential parts, or germs of 
cerebrum, cerebellum, and optic lobes. 

The first appearance of the nervous system, the " primitive trace " in the serous 
membrane, is a" delicate and pale-white line rising somewhat above the general sur- 
face of the germinal area; the thicker portion is destined to become the head of the 
embryo." The spinal cord and rudimentary brain are thus developed at the beginning 
of life, the origin of the brain being at three positions, the medulla oblongata from 
which comes the cerebellum, the inferior ganglion which originates the cerebrum, 
and retains the name of optic thalamus and corpus striatum, and the intermediate 
body, the optic lobes or corpora quadrigemina which are the largest part of the brain 
of a fish, but decline to a very small size in man. 

The figure which is here presented as giving the origin 01 the nervous system is 
taken from Bischoff, and shows the parts magnified eight times. We learn from this 
the dominating priority of the central nervous system, the structure in which con- 
scious life resides. The letter B refers to the brain and L to the lumbar enlargement 
of the cord. The spinal cord is first completed at the middle of its length. 

In Fig. 9 Dr. Beale has shown the wonderfully minute distribution of fine nerve 
filaments among the muscular fibres of the frog, which are less than the three 



64 CRITICAL DISCUSSION. [CHAP. III. 

thousandth of an inch in diameter. The fine nerve filaments would appear less than 
the twenty thousandth of an inch. There is no union or plunging of nerve fila- 
ments into the muscular fibre, and consequently, when we consider the nervous in- 
fluence that produces muscular action, it is proven by minute anatomy that this 
influence is something that passes from the nerve fibre to the muscle fibre. This 
passage of nerve currents, like currents of electricity in the nerves and beyond them, 
is an important principle in physiology, which is the basis of the revolution in phy- 
siology that ray experiments establish, and the wilful ignoring of this truth is* what 
has paralyzed the progress of biology in its higher realms. 

In Fig. 10 we have Dr. Beale's explanation of the fundamental fact of life and 
growth. A formed cell is displayed with its centre of living matter or bioplasm. 
Toward this centre of life the liquid pabulum flows in as indicated by the arrows, 
and becomes vitalized ; a refers to the bioplasm, c to the fresh-formed material, 
and c * to the exterior material of older growth. This is the philosophy and 
mechanism of all growth. But science has yet to reveal why we grow at all, and 
why we cease to grow. That is a matter of vitality, and the world's scientists stop at 
the margin of vitality, either resting in contented ignorance or indulging in stupid 
mechanical conjectures. I am not content with this ignorance, but having 
approached the citadel of life, I affirm that it can be entered by the path of Psycho- 
metry. We can but say at present that dead matter is vitalized by contact with the 
bioplasm, and the same principle is illustrated, on a large scale, by the manner in 
which a healthy living person imparts vitality by contact to an invalid. 

In Fig. ii is presented another illustration of vital mysteries, the cilia, which 
by their ceaseless movement defy all explanation. Dr. Beale traces their connection 
with a bioplasm at their base, thus showing that their motion is but another illustra- 
tion of the well-known property of bioplasm, voluntary or self-originated action. 
Life is the moving power of the animal and vegetable kingdoms, and the inscrutable 
divine life of the universe is the supposed source of all its movements. 



The wonderful forms assumed by the nervous substance, and the vast variety of 
structures produced by the bioplasm, evince its possession of a creative or rather 
organizing power which implies independent action or motion in itself, a perfect 
autonomy inherent in its nature. Dr. Beale says : " It must, I think, be admitted that 
there is a great accumulation of evidence in favor of the general conclusion that all 
living 1 matter possesses a pozver of movement. It seems to me that not one step in 
growth can be explained unless the particles of living matter move by virtue of some 
inherent force or power, which acts independently of, and is capable of overcoming, 
the force of gravitation. The movements of living matter have been observed in 
many of the lower forms of living structures. I have described the phenomenon as it 
may be seen in the mucous corpuscles and young epithelial cells of the nasal and 
bronchial mucous membranes, and although I have not seen the movements in the 
living matter of the tissues generally, there seems to me the strongest evidence 
that such movements actually occur." 

The mysteries of life recede as we approach. When we look at the minutest ner- 
vous structures, the microscope reveals a complexity of structure which still excites 
greater wonder. A fully formed ganglion-cell from a ganglion in the sympathetic 
system of the common frog (see Fig. 3), looks as mysterious and inscrutable in struc- 
ture and operation as the human brain. The spiral fibre comes from the circum- 
ference of the cell and has its own destination. The straight fibre comes rrom the 
interior of the cell, and proceeds to an opposite destination. The straight fibres 
that pass through cells are not merged in their substance, but pass through the soft 
bioplasm which surrounds and vitalizes them. 

These mysteries lie beyond the present instrumentalities of science, but not 
beyond the reach of Psychometry: and could my life be prolonged for another half 
century of investigation, I might safely promise a solution of many of these mys- 
teries which the microscope cannot solve, for structure does not reveal function. 

The ganglion, with its extension of fibres, reminds us of the relation of the brain 
and spinal cord. There are myriads of these microscopic brains throughout the body. 



CHAP. IIJ.J CRITICAL DISCUSSION. 65 

sending their commands through their dependent fibres, and Dr. Beale informs us 
that " every nerve-cell, central or peripheral, has at least two fibres in connection 
with it." By them it maintains its central and peripheral connections. 

The mystery of vital action lies in the influence carried by the infinitesimal fibrils 
from the ganglion. There has been great obscurity as to the relative powers and 
participation in the processes of life of the spinal and ganglionic systems. They have 
been regarded as essentially distinct, one voluntary and the other involuntary; 
but that distinction is not absolute, as the mind controls organic life in a slower 
manner, producing conditions of disease in health (even producing in some cases 
stigmata). 

Moreover, their fibres are inextricably commingled, so that we cannot determine 
how the partnership is conducted, and one class appears to be capable of substitu- 
ting the other, as in serpents the alimentary canal, instead of depending solely on 
the ganglionic system, is supplied from the spinal cord in its lower, and from the 
pneumogastric in its upper portion. Dr. Beale has made the most minute observa- 
tions, describing fibres not exceeding the sixty thousandth of an inch in diameter, 
claiming that others exist too fine to be detected by the microscope, and showing the 
distribution of nervous filaments around arteries as small as the eight hundredth of 
an inch. Dr. Beale has seen in the frog the same nerve supplying both the artery 
and the voluntary muscle. That these fibrillar were in any way different he did 
not discover; they appeared the same. In short, we can only say at present that the 
nervous system presents varieties of perfect and imperfect conductors for our spirit- 
ual energy, none excluding- it entirely. 

When we consider the power of life as demonstrated in bioplasm, and trace that 
power to the brain and soul, we are prepared to recognize the importance of the 
vital power as the most important agency known in therapeutics, the proper intro- 
duction of which will be the most benignant innovation ever made, incomparably 
more valuable than anything that has been done heretofore. 



CHAPTER IV. 
SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 

Definition of Sarcognomy — Its origin — Why do we recognize psychic influences 
in the body — Contrary to prevalent medical doctrines — The misdirected energy of 
the medical profession — Incapacity of the colleges for psychic investigations — The 
body has no psychic functions in man — Conscious life in the brain, physiological 
processes in the body — Soul controls both — The triple reaction is the process of 
life — Vagary of Leibnitz — Failure down to the present age to investigate these 
problems — The five great reasons for the failure — Ruskin's view of it — Gall and 
Swedenborg — Purpose of this work — Necessity for Sarcognomy — Its bases, phil- 
osophical, physiological, pathological and experimental — The triune sympathies — 
Illustrations of Sarcognomy — To be treated only as a basis for healing — The three 
methods — Indications of impressibility — Psychic treatment — Manual treatment 
on brain and body — Correspondence of soul, brain and body — General statement 
and directions for operating — Laws of location of the organs. 



The word Sarcognomy was coined in 1842, as the name of the 
new science which arises from the discovery of the compound psychic 
and physiological character of the human body, revealed in the experi- 
ments in which I ascertained that the same psychic and physiological 
effects which I produced on the head could be produced on the body. 

Derived from Sarx or Sarcos, flesh, and Glioma, an opinion, it 
means etymologically a knowledge of the flesh, or recognition of its 
character and relations. Practically, as the name of a new science, 
it means a knowledge of the physiological and psychological powers 
which belong to each part of the body in health, in excitement, and in 
disease, and consequently an understanding of the correlation of soul, 
brain and body. 

I had discovered in the human body its pervading and controlling 
influences exercised through the nervous system, and recognized at 
its surface as physiological and psychological, by experiments made 
in 1842, and published by my lectures, by the Journal of Man and 
" System of Anthropology" — and applied by myself and pupils in 
the treatment of disease. 

But why do we recognize psychological influences at the surface of 
the body ? The life forces of the body as heretofore understood are 
solely physiological ; and physiological powers are regarded by the 
materialistic school, which predominates in the medical profession 
to-day, as mechanical, chemical, and electrical — resulting from the 
same elementary forces which belong to the mineral kingdom, which 
is void of life. Hence there can be nothing psychic in the body, nor 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 6j 

anything which (according to the leaders of the old-fashioned portion 
of the medical profession) will not ultimately be resolved into chem- 
ical processes.* 

We do not affirm that the human body per se performs any psychic 
function, although the voluntary action of the body of an alligator 
after decapitation would seem to indicate the presence of a psychic 
or conscious element, which, as we descend in the animal kingdom, 
is less concentrated in the brain. 

In man is verified the general law of the animal kingdom, that 
functions are more centralized and separated as we ascend in the 
scale. The psychic faculties are concentrated in the brain, and there 
is no conscious sensation or perception in any part of the body, until 
the impression originating there has been conveyed along some nerve 
to the brain. As sensation and perception are thus realized in the 
brain, and never without its co-operation, it would appear erroneous 
to locate them in the body at all. The body, however, is the seat of 
physiological processes, and the brain of conscious life, which operates 
upon and through the body, and the soul is life itself, which operates 

* Hence the physiological zeal of the medical profession to-day is directed mainly 
to the chemical processes and laws which are manifested in living bodies — the con- 
sequences of which will continue to be, as they have been, an immense addition to 
our stock of chemical knowledge, accompanied by an immense neglect of the science 
of life, and an increasing intensity of ignorance of true vital science, which is sadly 
impressive to one who understands the psychical elements of humanity. In look- 
ing at a trained pugilist, athlete, gladiator, or acrobat, we are impressed with 
admiration of their superior physical powers, but when we come to know them as 
men and look for something more than skilful muscularity we feel a great disap- 
pointment. So when we look at the achievements of the medical profession in the 
physical sciences connected with man — their vast accumulations in anatomy, min- 
ute histology, chemistry, pathology, mechanical and chemical physiology and com- 
parative biology, we are profoundly impressed with the greatness of their extremely 
laborious investigations and achievements in the physical sphere; but when we 
come to the ethical sphere, to the achievements of the science as a benefactor of 
humanity, we are painfully impressed with the slowness of progress and the stolid 
neglect or active hostility which have been displayed toward the noblest work of 
medical philanthropy — the healing of the sick by new remedies and new methods; 
and although this barbaric insensibility has greatly diminished within fifty years, 
there is still enough to maintain a fierce hostility against the only method of medi- 
cal practice ever discovered which is incapable of doing any harm by its own cura- 
tive agency. This digression naturally comes before us when we realize that the 
preoccupation of the mind by exclusive physical science and by the dogmatic con- 
viction enforced by all surrounding authority, that nothing but physical science has 
any reality, establishes a mental condition totally unfitted for the study of life which 
is not physical, and of its laws, which are widely distinct from those of the labora- 
tory, as much as a life of pugilism would unfit one to cultivate and practise the 
Christian virtues. Thus, as national wars have prevented the growth of true relig- 
ion, so does a dogmatic and intolerant materialism, pervading every department of 
scientific education, disqualify for vital and psychic studies, although physical 
science fer se, in its proper place, and unaccompanied by dogmatism which sneers at 
evidence, is entirely harmonious with and beneficial to the cultivation of the higher 
departments of science. I do not, therefore, anticipate any proper investigation of 
my own scientific discoveries by the scientific societies or universities generally 
until they have undergone such a change in their dominant spirit as will probably 
require a century for its accomplishment. When that time arrives — when thou- 
sands of investigators, in a philosophical spirit, shall carry on those investigations 
which adverse circumstances have not permitted to myself — the brilliance of that 
era will contrast with this century as it contrasts with the middle ages of Europe. 



68 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

through the brain, and through the brain reaches the body, in which its 
impulse and influence are manifested, as when an emotion or passion 
of the soul, such as love or anger, working through the brain, makes 
its expression in the body, by the voice, the actions, and the circula- 
tion of the blood. 

The process of life, however, is not merely action of the soul on 
brain and body, for the conditions of the body in health and disease 
continually react on the brain and soul, and under the influence of 
alcohol, or of fever, the psychic action is entirely changed. The 
mind and character are thus modified by the conditions of the body, 
and all life is the reaction between soul and body, through the brain, 
the grand centre in which we find and interpret all the powers and 
principles of Psychology and Physiology. Hence no physiological 
processor condition exists in the body without something correspond- 
ing thereto in the brain.* 

Familiar as this reaction or sympathy has been to all mankind, and 
forcibly as it has been exemplified in the processes of disease, under 
the daily observation of many thousand physicians for many thousand 
years, I know of no systematic attempt to bring this chaotic mass 
of phenomena under the jurisdiction of science. It has always 
appeared to me very remarkable that men of scientific and literary 
pursuits should be so entirely and passively content in ignorance of 
the boundless worlds of surrounding truth yet unexplored, even when 
these truths are a part of their daily and hourly experience. For 
this there appear to be four evident reasons. The engrossing neces- 
sities of subsistence, of labor, business, pleasure, and ambition leave 
the multitude little time for even serious thought upon the mysteries 
of life. 

Secondly. The engrossment of ambitious minds in their imme 
diate environment, and the consciousness of their own energetic 
capacities and success, give them a feeling of self-sufficiency, an 
exalted idea of their own attainments, and a habitual unconscious- 
ness of the infinite realm of the unknown upon which we have made 
so small an encroachment. Thus arises a tacit notion, expressed in 
acts but seldom in words, that we have nearly attained the bound- 
aries of the knowable, and that attempts to explore new regions origi- 
nate fanciful delusions, scarcely worthy of serious attention, as there 
is nothing very important to be discovered. 

Thirdly. As the engrossing pursuits and delusive ambitions of 

* Of all the baseless speculations of metaphysical philosophizers, the greatest 
departure from the truth was the doctrine of Leibnitz that there was no reciprocal 
influence between the soul and body: " Everything" (said Leibnitz) 4< takes place in 
the soul as though there were no body, and in the body everything takes place as 
if there "were no soul." 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 69 

our leading people produce a state of mind unfitted for the explora- 
tion of the unknown, this disability is vastly increased by our systems 
of education, which utterly fail to develop invention, originality, and 
power of independent reasoning. Hence the few fitful efforts to 
investigate and explore are generally profitless, and productive of 
crudities or delusions, and the feeling is fostered that the unknown is 
chiefly the unknowable. 

Fourthly. A dominating love of scientific and philosophic truth 
for its own sake is a rare quality, and seldom strong enough to induce 
any one to devote himself to the unknown, when the result of suc- 
cess is the development of existing error and ignorance, offending 
the vanity of the entire class of teachers and leaders, and isolating 
the discoverer from the sympathy and fellowship which are essential 
to success in all pursuits. In all professions and classes the existing 
state of opinions is maintained not only by that immense power, the 
inertia of fixed habit, but by an unyielding hostility to innovation. 
The medical, clerical, and legal professions, and the business classes 
also, furnish so many illustrations of this, that a very instructive 
volume might be made by a periscopic view of the steady war- 
fare against truth and its discoverers throughout all the historic 
ages — a warfare still maintained with energy, though the battle-fields 
are changed, and the soldier, jailer, and executioner have little to do 
m the modern processes of freezing and drowning unwelcome arrivals 
from the Divine sphere of wisdom. 

Fifthly. In all ages the spirit of dogmatism has made men unfair 
and intolerant towards all opinions but those into which they have 
been educated, or have been led by passion and prejudice. At the 
present time materialism rules, and the scientific classes imbibe it in 
their education unconsciously. Hence there is a prevailing disposi- 
tion to ignore everything that is not materialistic, and to meet the 
profoundest truths with that supercilious contempt which prevents 
all candid investigation. Biological questions are studied in so one- 
sided a manner as to justify in some cases the sarcasm of Ruskin 
that scientific men have so contracted modes of thought that " if 
beyond this safe and beneficial business they ever try and explain 
anything to you, you may be confident of one of two things, either 
that they know nothing (to speak of) about it, or that they have only 
seen one side of it, and not only have not seen, but usually have 710 
mind to see the other." 

Such are most apparent explanations of the remarkable fact that 
now, near the end of the nineteenth century, no one has yet attempted 
to explore and describe the triune constitution of man — the union of 
soul, brain, and body, and the laws of their vast and various sympa- 



70 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

thies and interactions, which are of so grand importance not only in 
Medical Philosophy and Therapeutics, but in Hygiene, Education, 
Mental Philosophy, Ethics, ^Esthetics, Sculpture, Painting, Forensic 
and Dramatic Eloquence, and last, not least, Pneumatology. These 
remarks apply of course to the prevailing doctrines of science and 
philosophy — to what is recognized in the Universities. I do not 
refer to the bold exploration of the brain and its psychic functions by 
Gall, nor to the still more extraordinary scientific doctrines and specu- 
lations of Swedenborg, both of which the colleges have laid aside 
without investigation, and neither of which has grasped the entire 
problem of the triune constitution of man. 

The warfare of theologians against scientific progress has been 
grandly illustrated by Andrew D. White, late president of Cornell 
University, in his essays on the "Warfare of Science." That hostil- 
ity still exists, and works in co-operation (strange to say) with the 
dogmatism of the most resolute opponents of both theology and relig- 
ion. The narrowness of theologians and the narrowness of physical 
scientists (arising from the ignorance of both) makes them equally 
hostile to the profound philosophy which deprives both parties of 
their bigotry, bringing science and religion, and consequently scientists 
and theologians, into harmonious accord. 

Why do the representatives of theism and of atheism unite in hos- 
tility to new truth and almost forget their own antagonism ? If the 
truth must be spoken, the one party is not truly religious and the 
other is not truly scientific, for both religion and science demand the 
pursuit and the eager acceptance of truth. The profound physiolo- 
gist Dr. Lionel Beale expresses his views as follows: "Those who 
have started upon the scientific pilgrimage, and have made up their 
minds to encounter the well-known hardships and disappointments, 
and have determined to bear the poverty of their lifelong journey, have 
not received the blessings of any church to encourage their hopes or 
to lighten their burthens. No miracles have been performed for 
them. No shrine has been pointed out where they may place their 
offerings and then return home to rest in peace. They must work on 
as long as power remains to them to work, and patiently endure to 
the end. No church is interested in their trials or takes any account 
of their virtues. And this must be, since science can never bow to 
authority, submit to the arbitrary dictates of any earthly power, or 
consent to be governed in her progress by any time-honored rules. 
Science asks only to be permitted to work on. She longs neither for 
honors, nor wages, nor power." 

" Happily the interrogators of nature may henceforward, pursue 
their work without fear of being interfered with by religious societies 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 7 1 

or teachers. I wish it were equally certain that scientific men would 
never have to suffer injustice and tyranny at the hands of arbitrary 
and arrogant representatives of science. It is in writings called 
scientific that the true spirit of intolerance is occasionally observed 
to breathe, nowadays, and scientific individuals and scientific minori- 
ties have occasionally suffered injustice at the hands of fellow-work- 
ers." (Beale on Protoplasm, Matter, and Life, p. 335.) 

The largest and most thoroughly organized body of scientific men 
is that which belongs to the medical profession and is controlled by 
the medical colleges, which sustain the relation of Alma Mater. 
These are organized in the American Medical Association, upon as 
rigidly proscriptive principles as ever animated the theologians. The 
most forcible expression of this intolerance was that made by a surgi- 
cal professor in Kentucky when he claimed that the clergy were fully 
equal to the doctors in liberality, for the latter believed that Homoe- 
opathic physicians should be allowed to practise only in the peniten- 
tiary and upon each other. 

So notorious and so pragmatically bitter has been this collegiate 
hostility to innovation and innovators, that I have never, except in one 
instance, attempted to interest a collegiate faculty in scientific dem- 
onstrations. That attempt, made in my twenty-seventh year, though 
sustained by the Board of Trustees and the professor of Physiology, 
at Louisville, succeeded only in proving that there was but one mem- 
ber of the Faculty who could be induced to give the subject any 
attention.* 

As this attempt was nearly half a century ago, it is possible that there 
may be to-day in the colleges a small percentage of men who have a 
share of the spirit of progress. But little is to be hoped from a body 
of men so profoundly miseducated, and associated together upon 
false principles, sustaining the so-called professional ethics (?) of the 
code of the National Medical Association. There could be no clearer 
statement of its essential spirit than the frank declaration of Dr. W. 
A. Hammond, of New York, in the form of a novel,! that the motives 
of physicians in the practice of their profession were entirely selfish 

* A member of this Faculty, Professor Gross, was subsequently generally recog- 
nized as standing at the head of the profession in America, and in that position 
politely assured me that the Association would never take any steps to investigate 
anything that I might discover, because they were governed by their code and I 
was not. 

t A character in the novel is made to say : " It is my deliberate opinion, based on 
a very careful study of doctors, that they don't care any more for the poor or for 
humanity in general than I do, and that'is not much, I assure you. As to Dr. Arn- 
dell, I believe that for humanity in the abstract he has the most supreme contempt. 
He and others like him are willing to help humanity, but they do it for the sake of 
their science, not from any love of the human species. Of course, the race is bene- 
fited, for whatever advances medical science helps mankind, but that is not the 
primary object of the doctors." 



J2 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

— a confession which justly represents the large class who sympa- 
thize with him, but which a better class would indignantly repudiate. 
The power of such a class, in presiding over medical instruction, to 
debase or demoralize the incoming members of the profession is self- 
evident, and its results are widely seen. 

In this book I propose to present but one of the many aspects of 
Sarcognomy, viz., its therapeutic utility, and the instruction which it 
gives us in reference to healing the human constitution by the hand, 
the electric poles, and the various external applications which produce 
different effects as they are applied to different parts of the body, 
for every physiological as well as every psychic function has a 
special portion of the surface through which it may be reached and 
excited. 

A knowledge of the physiological and psychic forces or influences 
connected with each part of the body is as necessary to judicious 
treatment by Electricity as Anatomy is to surgery ; and the present 
state of Electric Therapeutics may be compared to the condition of 
surgery at the siege of Troy, anterior to anatomical dissections. 

Equally necessary is it as a scientific basis for Nervauric practice 
of what has been called Magnetic Therapeutics or treatment by 
Animal Magnetism, and for the blind, clumsy processes called Mas- 
sage, which have arisen from a sense of the necessity of manual treat- 
ment, and have been adopted in ignorance of the neurological laws of 
vitality, as well as disregard of the extensive experience of magnet- 
izers during the last hundred years. 

The philosophical basis of Sarcognomy is the threefold constitu- 
tion of man, and the very intimate sympathy and parallelism of soul, 
brain, and body, which enable us, through either of the three, to 
affect the other two in a corresponding manner. 

Its practical physiological basis is the fact that the exercise of 
every psychic faculty, emotion, or impulse produces a characteristic 
and definite effect on the body, as well as in the brain, while the 
exercise of any portion of the body produces a characteristic effect 
on the brain and mind, the locality of which can be specified on the 
brain. 

The pathological basis is the fact that every disease of the body 
affects the brain and produces a particular and distinct effect on the 
mind, so that diseases have a mental as well as a physical symptoma- 
tology, which has been especially observed by Homoeopathic physi- 
cians. 

The experimental basis is the fact that in applying the hands or 
fingers upon the head of an impressible person, under proper condi- 
tions, we stimulate the subjacent portion of the brain, and rouse it to 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 73 

the manifestations of its functions with a vigor proportioned to the 
impressibility, the physiological and psychological results being a 
complete development of the cerebral functions (the discovery of 
which I made in 1841) — and that the application of the hands on the 
body produces the same evolution of the physiological and psychic 
functions as the application to the head at the corresponding locality 
— the discovery of 1842. 

Thus the entire surface of the brain corresponds to the entire sur- 
face of tne body, maintaining therewith an active sympathy in our 
experiments, precisely as it occurs in the progress of diseases and 
local excitements. The facts of disease sustain the localization of 
Sarcognomy, and the map of Sarcognomy explains the philosophy of 
disease. 

Sarcognomy is also illustrated by the laws of development, by nat- 
ural language or gesture, and by the intuitive judgment which arises 
in our minds on seeing different forms which express different charac- 
ters — the whole person being as expressive as the face to close observ- 
ers. When we contrast Venus and Hercules, Jove and Apollo, or 
Washington and a degraded sot, a lion and a lamb, or greyhound and 
hog, we realize that the entire form is an embodiment of character. 

Putting aside the pathological, philosophical, and physiognomic 
aspects of the subject, I propose to treat Sarcognomy only as the 
basis of the practical art of healing. 

In acting upon the triple combination of soul, brain, and body we 
may fix our attention as appears best on either one or all three. 

If the constitution is highly impressional (manifested usually by 
breadth and height of the front head) mental influence will be efficient, 
and the nervous system will respond readily to nervauric treatment. 
This impressibility is greater among the natives of warm climates, 
greater in summer than winter, and generally greater in females than 
in males Breadth of the temples from right to left and largeness of 
the pupils of the eyes, with fullness of the upper part of the face, 
are favorable indications. 

A simple method of testing this impressibility is to pass the ends 
of the fingers close to the open extended hand of the patient, who, 
if impressible, will feel a slight coolness at each passage of our fingers. 
When this occurs, we may be sure that the application of the hands 
on the body or head will be effective. When the fingers are thus 
passed slowly, no breeze is produced, and simple sensibility would 
feel the warmth radiated from the hand. A feeling of coolness is 
produced only by an impression on the nervous impressibility. 

I recommend the application of the hands on the body for the pur- 
pose of healing, because, the disease being located in the body and 



74 SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

the vital forces emanating from the spinal column, it is desirable to 
approach as near as possible to the difficulty that is to be removed 
and the seat of the vital force on which we operate. 

It is true that diseases may be treated by the soul power alone, 
without any contact — the health, benevolence, and will power of the 
operator being effective without contact upon the patient, who sits 
near him or in some cases at a distance, if the proper rapport exists ; 
but in the present condition of society in northern climates it is only 
a small minority who can be treated in this way. 

Contact is generally necessary to efficient treatment, as it is to 
efficient contagion, and it is too evident for argument that the farther 
apart two persons are placed, the less effect they can have upon each 
other. 

The contact of the hand with the skin is therefore desirable for the 
most complete effect, and the fewer the garments between the hand 
and the patient, the better. Nevertheless patients are successfully 
treated without removing any of their clothing. The vital influences 
emanating from an operator are more diffusive in proportion to their 
subtlety, and while caloric and electricity are resisted by clothing, the 
subtler forces, which reach to great distances, are not hindered. 
Operators in whom these subtler forces are abundant, and who pro- 
duce effects without contact, are not hindered by clothing ; and static 
electricity, which like the nervous forces plays upon the surface, also 
produces its effects through the clothing. There is a class of patients 
who realize the effects of the hand when it is not even in contact 
with the clothing, and a class who feel the influence, not only of per- 
sons at a distance, but of their departed friends, and even the ancient 
inhabitants of the spirit world. If such facts are unknown to physi- 
cal scientists generally it is because they shun psychic phenomena. 

In operating upon the body, we have the advantage that we may 
use percussion, friction, and dispersive passes — the friction and per- 
cussion not being appropriate upon the head. 

Effects produced on the body are local and physiological, but 
become psychic in proportion as the brain sympathizes with the spot. 
In persons of a low grade of susceptibility there is less sympathy 
between the mind and body, and operations on the body do not pro- 
duce the distinct psychic effects which occur in the impressible. 

Effects produced on the brain are mental and become physiologi- 
cal only as the cerebral influence extends to the body. But as the 
brain is the controlling organ, it is obvious that it may produce any 
amount of physiological action ; and forty years ago I operated chiefly 
through the brain, being interested in demonstrating its physiological 
powers. When we wish to do all that is possible, we should operate 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 75 

on body, brain, and soul, treating the latter by our own psychic force 
of will and emotion, with a resolute desire to cure, and rendering the 
individual as passive as possible by the methods I shall explain. The 
desire to heal, born of love, is the healing agency, and the force of 
will or occipital energy is the power that subdues the patient to pas- 
siveness — a power which may exist without a high degree of healing 
capacity. 

Correspondence of Soul, Brain, and Body. 

When we make a map of the cerebral organs and understand their 
relative positions, we are well prepared to understand their corre- 
spondences on the body, which are very simply arranged. 

The superior part of the brain corresponds to the superior part of 
the body, the basilar portion of the brain corresponding to the lower 
half of the body — the lateral ventricles of the brain corresponding 
nearly with the upper part of the waist. The lower end of the trunk 
corresponds with the base of the brain, as externally indicated at the 
junction of the head and neck. 

The limbs are a departure from the compact form which would 
most easily coincide with the head. The lower limbs correspond 
with the basilar region, represented or covered by the neck and 
marked Crural. The upper limbs correspond with the Brachial 
region of the occiput, which starts from Firmness and extends down 
the middle of the occiput, embracing the regions appropriated to 
Ambition, Ostentation, Self-Esteem, Self-Confidence, Domestic 
Affection, Love of Power, Arrogance, and Hostility. 

The superior anterior fourth of the head corresponds to the ante- 
rior surface of the thorax, and is marked Anterior Thoracic. The 
face corresponds to the abdominal region. The entire occipital region 
above the Crural, and exclusive of the Brachial, corresponds to the 
back, and is called Dorsal. 

The spinal column being the source of the nerves that vitalize and 
sustain the trunk, it follows that the anterior regions of the body are 
related to and dependent upon the posterior regions in the manner 
indicated by anatomy, and as the brain corresponds with the body we 
must infer that the posterior regions of the brain have a like domi- 
nant influence over the anterior. This was explained in the " Outlines 
of Anthropology," and especially or minutely under the head of Path- 
ognomy, showing that each organ of the brain had by the law of its 
action a specific relation to a certain anterior organ. The compari- 
son of the head with the anatomy of the body shows something sim- 
ilar, for the distribution of the spinal nerves anteriorly, if illustrated 
by a similar distribution on the head from its dorsal (and spinal) 



76 



SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 



[criAP. IV. 




region would appear as in the annexed engraving ; and if the condi- 
tions of the head correspond to those of the body the anterior organs 
must be the excitants of the posterior, while the posterior sustain the 
vital force of the whole, bearing in mind, however, that the superior 
sustain the inferior organs, as vitality descends from higher to 
lower organs. 

When we trace these lines 
of co mection and corres- 
pondence, which we transfer 
from the body upon the head, 
we are struck with their close 
analogy to the lines of corre- 
lation established with exact- 
ness for the brain by Path- 
ognomy, and if the reader 
has been familiar with Patbog- 
nomy, which is an exact and 
positive psycho-geometric 
science, he may be as much 
interested as myself in ob- 
serving this unexpected illus- 
tration derived from the correlation of organs in the body. In this 
case two independent lines of research, Pathognomy having preceded 
Sarcognomy seven years, arrive at a common conclusion and mutual 
corroboration. 

To this mutual corroboration of Pathognomy and Sarcognomy may 
now be added an additional confirmation from the more recent dis- 
coveries of vivisection and pathology. We learn from Pathognomy 
(what is verified by common observation) that the lower occipital 
organs give great energy to the eye, as is seen in the penetrating- 
glance of courage and arrogance. It has been shown by vivisection 
and pathology that there are two lower occipital regions, the injury 
or disease of which injures vision. The partisans of these two 
regions contend each for his own, but both are right, for the two 
regions are shown by Pathognomy and Psychology to coincide or co- 
operate. In like manner the upper regions of the occiput co-operate 
with and invigorate the rational understanding and the friendly senti- 
ments, as the upper region of the spinal cord sustains the upper ante- 
rior thoracic regions. 

A thorough understanding of cerebral science shows that the pos- 
terior regions sustain the anterior in the brair\ as the posterior region 
of the body sustains the anterior ; and that the superior region of the 
brain sustains the inferior, as the superior half of the body sustains 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 77 

its inferior half. This sustaining power of the superior region of the 
brain has been fully shown by vivisection and pathology. 

From this description we learn that the posterior half of the brain 
controls and sympathizes with the forces of life which belong to the 
spinal column and the entire back and limbs, while the lovely and in- 
tellectual elements associate with the breast, and the sensitive, 
impressional, relaxing elements coincide with the abdomen. Hence, 
to invigorate the vital forces, the hand should be applied to the back 
of the head, or the posterior surface of the body. , 

If applied upon the neck, it invigorates the lower limbs, sending 
the circulation and vital forces downwards, warming the feet and sus 
taining physical vitality. The organ of vitality, or rather Vital Force, 
is at the base of the occiput, and its correspondence at the posterior 
summit of the thigh. Hence the application of the hand on the back 
of the neck is an excellent method of renovating exhausted vitality, 
invigorating locomotion, and relieving determination of blood to the 
head and chest — effects which may be enhanced by applying the 
hand at the summit of the posterior aspect of the thigh, on the region 
of Vital Force. 

When one hand is applied upon the occipital base and the neck, 
and the other upon the upper half of the occiput, we produce a pow- 
erful and health-giving effect, as the upper part of the occiput (cor- 
responding with the upper half of the back) contains the most perfect 
sanative energy of the constitution in the organ of Health and its 
surrounding group. The application of the hands upon the upper 
part of the occiput and upon its base or junction with the neck cor- 
responds with their application on the shoulder blades and the sum- 
mit of the thighs and base of the trunk — with this difference, that a 
relatively larger space may be covered on the head, and if, instead of 
touching Health and Vitality with the fingers, we apply the whole 
hands, covering nearly the whole occiput, we cover a space corre- 
sponding to the entire back and arms, and thus produce a very exten- 
sive effect, rousing the entire will power and physiological energy. 
This can be conveniently done while the patient is lying on his back 
in bed. My statements on this subject rest upon innumerable experi- 
ments during forty-seven years, and their successful repetition by my 
students in investigations and in the treatment of diseases. 

In applying the hands upon the superior anterior region of the 
head, which corresponds with the anterior part of the thorax, we pro- 
duce the amiable and soothing influences which belong to the gentler 
emotions. We may proceed now in this consideration of the differ- 
ent regions of the head, which the unskilled may cover with the hand, 
and hereafter will proceed with the specialization of organs which 



?S SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

the skilled operator, understanding localities, may touch with the ends 
of the ringers, when a more special and limited influence is desired. 

The influence of the anterior superior region of the brain is 
remarkably soothing and happy, rendering the patient entirely amia- 
ble, good natured, patient, obedient, cheerful and more impressible to 
the nervauric treatment. Hence it is often desirable to impress this 
region, to establish the best relations between the physician and 
patient. ■ But we should be careful not to carry it too far, in very 
impressible persons, for it antagonizes the base of the occiput, in 
which the strong physical energies and impulses reside. These it 
reduces to tranquillity by a quieting and anodyne influence, but when 
the vital forces are very feeble, they would become too quiescent and 
weak under continued excitement of the anterior coronal region, the 
tendency of which is toward trance, or complete suspension of physi- 
cal activity. The special locality in which this tendency to trance 
exists in the highest degree, is about an inch and a half at each side 
from the sagittal suture, nearly at the posterior corners of the rect- 
angular space assigned by Gall and Spurzheim to Veneration. 

While the foregoing caution is necessary in reference to those deli- 
cate, impressible constitutions in which excitement of one portion of 
the brain may go so far as to overpower and suppress the opposite 
region, it is not necessary in reference to constitutions of greater 
intesrritv, in which the brain does not become unbalanced. In such 
persons the stimulation of the upper surface of the brain produces 
the happiest effects, for it draws the vitality upwards, invigorates the 
brain, and renovates life at its fountain. 

Of the superior organs, or upper surface of the brain, the anterior 
are correlative with the posterior, so that each in a normal brain tends 
to excite the other, as explained in the "Outlines of Anthropology" 
(chapters 19 and 20). Hence, the general normal effect of exciting 
the higher organs is not only to increase the virtuous and amiable 
sentiments, but to increase the general power of the brain, enjoyment 
of life, and the abundance of health. We know this by a threefold 
demonstration. 1. The cheerful sentiments, the enthusiasm, hope, 
firmness, and energy of the higher organs are known by all mankind 
to be the sustaining and invigorating elements of character. 2. The 
effect of stimulating the higher organs is felt by every subject as 
highly agreeable, invigorating and healthful. 3. The effects of dis- 
ease in the upper region of the brain are destructive to health and 
energy — paralysis being one of its common effects, as reported from 
hospitals, preceded, of course, by general prostration. 

Hence, in the treatment of invalids the most pleasant and satisfac- 
tory results are attained by treating the superior surfaces of the brain 



CHAP. IV.] SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 79 

and of the body, and a great number of cures have been effected by 
treating the higher emotions of the soul without contact with the 
body, or any medicinal methods. Religious emotions are highly 
curative, and the " divine healing " of prayer, song, faith, and other 
religious processes has produced many marvellous cures, for the 
emotions of the upper brain may be stimulated by mental or spiritual 
influences as powerfully as by direct action on the impressible brain. 
It is therefore the duty of the practitioner so far as possible to stim- 
ulate the higher powers by spiritual as well as manual means — in 
other words, to rouse the faith, hope, love, and devotion of his 
patient. To do this he should not rely upon any form of words, but 
should carry that faith, hope, love, enthusiasm, and resolution in his 
own person, from which by contagion it should go to his patients 
whenever he approaches them, even if he is not in contact. 

This is the secret of the success of many physicians neither very 
learned nor very skilful. Their love is their healing power. Hence 
it was that Dr. Jennings, of Derby, Conn., near half a century ago, 
finding that his medicines did not accomplish much good, ceased to 
give anything but bread pills, colored powders and liquids, but 
retained his patients even after he had told them of the deception. 

In addition to this personal potency which the physician should 
develop in his own moral nature, he may do much by vocal music. 
Songs of a cheering and inspiring character, adapted to the feelings 
of the patient, and skilful instrumental music, are very important aids 
in healing. But I must protest against any music which is merely 
technical, and not full of emotion, not calculated to rouse our senti- 
ments. A great deal of our common music, including even the most 
pretentious, is utterly worthless for any good purpose. To listen to it 
is a waste of time. 

These principles are not new. Physicians and friends generally 
realize the necessity of sustaining hope in a patient, and surrounding 
him with pleasant influences. What better influence can we have 
than faith in a Divine Providence, conviction that an immense love 
broods over and sustains humanity, and that even if our career be 
shortened on earth it is thereby extended into a more glorious and 
happy realm. The physician should cherish and diffuse such senti- 
ments. 

The fashion of mental healing by resolutely ignoring disease, fixing 
the mind upon the conception of perfect health, and the all-pervading 
benignity of the Deity, is not at all irrational in essence, though 
mingled with so much metaphysical nonsense in the denial of the 
existence of matter and existence of disease. These crazy theories, 
however, do not diminish the potency with which the intense optim- 



SO SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. [CHAP. IV. 

ism acts as a curative power when the spiritual energy of the opera- 
tor meets with impressible receptivity in the patient. Absurdity is 
not physically injurious, and nonsense of a lively character is rather 
invigorating. 

Effects do not occur without causes and conditions. A feeble 
spirit would produce no effect upon a hard, resisting nature, but one 
who has a strong spirit capable of transcorporeal action will affect 
many, and will produce miraculous results when meeting passively 
impressible natures. Such is in fact the experience of this class of 
healers. One of the most prominent confessed that not more than 
one in twenty of her pupils would be successful. 

The ready smile, the cheerful words, the sprightly anecdote, the 
affectionate manner, and the inspiring promises of the physician, 
based upon knowledge and experience, are appreciated by all as a 
healing power, and Sarcognomy shows how by special local treatment 
to produce additional effects beyond all that spiritual influences pro- 
duce upon the mind. 

In operating on the superior surface of the brain we should under- 
stand, that by the general law of organology we find stronger influ- 
ences as we go back, and gentler toward the front. 

If we understand the general laws of organology, we are less 
dependent upon the memory of special localities. The controlling 
principles are quite simple. The energy of any organ may be deter 
mined by its anterior or posterior position. The intellectual and 
sensitive organs of the extreme anterior portion of the head are' not 
only void of physiological power, but tend to check and exhaust it 
when acting alone. Hence, severe injuries of the anterior end of the 
brain produce little or no physiological injury unless an inflammation 
should be produced. In the case of Phineas Gage, of Vermont, an 
iron crowbar shot through the head from the cheek bone upwards 
produced but little immediate effect, and was soon recovered from. 
(See my "Outlines of Anthropology," chapters 17 and 18.) 

The back of the head, the extreme occipital portion, gives power 
and ambitious impulse. Between the posterior pole of power and the 
anterior pole of weakness, position determines the power, and when 
we think of any faculty, emotion, or impulse, we can determine its 
longitude on the head by a consideration of its energy. Thus Mod- 
esty would be anterior, as Vanity would be posterior. Liberality and 
generosity would be anterior — avarice posterior — sympathy anterior, 
stubbornness posterior, etc. 

The latitude or height can be determined with equal ease by the 
proper rule, as it corresponds to the moral elevation, and thus I have 
taught an intelligent class in an hour to locate any faculty in its 
proper organ with approximate correctness. 



CHAP. 



IV.] SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 8 1 



Organs are higher in the brain as they are of a more kind, loving, 
spiritual nature, and lower as they are more animal, selfish, and vio- 
lent. Love and tenderness are at the summit — hate and cruelty at 
the base. These principles have been established by innumerable 
experiments upon the brain in intelligent persons in their most nor- 
mal and intelligent condition. 

A similar law applies to the body. The vital forces are at the 
back. The spinal column is the commanding region. The upper 
portion of the back is the seat of those normal powers which happily 
combine the moral and physical influences, and in their greatest 
development produce the best results. A large development of 
the shoulder is the best conformation for a superior constitution, 
while the development of the thighs and lower part of the back 
gives the greatest vital force, but with less moral power and equable, 
healthful action. The passions and appetites are below — the nobler 
impulses above. 

Anteriorly, above the diaphragm, we find the gentle and refining 
influences ; below the diaphragm the sensual, sensitive, and morbific. 

This general survey indicates the obvious principles of nervauric 
treatment. The entire posterior half of the surfaces of the head and 
body constitutes the tonic or invigorating region, the region of vital 
power, upon which the nervauric healer will chiefly expend his ener- 
gies — the treatment being applied higher or lower according to the 
location of the disease. In the majority of cases, both upper and 
lower energies require to be roused, but in all cases the upper pos- 
terior region of the head and body requires special attention. 

In the application of electric currents, the backward direction 
(towards the spine) is the most generally beneficial, and the upward 
currents are more extensively beneficial than the downward. In the 
application of massage or rubbing, the posterior surfaces of the body 
are most beneficially treated and are more capable of enduring vigor- 
ous treatment. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE SPINAL REGION — ITS ANATOMICAL, NEURO- 
LOGICAL, AND THERAPEUTIC RELATIONS. 

Duty of the healer — Necessary predominance of the upper and posterior regions 

— Their antagonism to the abdominal region — Upward passes — Morbid tendencies 
and vital relations of the abdominal region — Dispersive passes — Medical applica- 
tions — Spinal region : demonstration of its importance — Treatment of intermittent 
fever by M. Gondret on the spine — Counter-irritation at the origins of nerves — 
Special endowments and increased development of different parts of the spinal 
cord — Flexor muscles governed by upper, and extensor by lower portion of the 
cord — Importance of the cephalic region of the spine — Its brachial plexus and 
phrenic nerve — its extensive distribution — The vertebral ganglia and arteries — 
Their control over vital powers explained anatomically — Electric experience of Dr. 
Rockwell — Resuscitation of a moribund patient through the cephalic region — Im- 
portance of the cephalic region in fevers — Testimony of Drs. Gerhard and Beard — ' 
The upper dorsal nerves and cilio-spinal region at the second dorsal nerve — Con- 
nection of the cuneics and angular gyrus in the brain with vision — Testimony of 
Onimus and Legros as to the cephalic region — Thoracic and abdominal divisions 
of the dorsal region — Pulmonic influence of the dorsal region — Cardiac region of 
the cord — Caries of the spinal vertebrae, as reported by Brodie, showing the functions 
of the cord — Pathological observations of Dr. Little — Anatomical connections of 
the upper dorsal region — Treatment of hooping-cough through the upper spinal 
region — Differences of the upper and lower dorsal region explained — Illustrations 
in consumption, pneumonia — Sympathies of the chest with the upper region of the 
brain — Influence of the affections — Illustrations in sunstroke, typhus, and insanity 

— Connection of pneumonia and delirium. 

Relation of the heart to the dorsal and cervical regions — Illustrations of the 
lower dorsal region — Connection of the cephalic region with respiration and circu- 
lation, through the phrenic nerve, ganglia, and plexuses — Relations of dorsal region 
to respiration — Experiment of Onimus and Legros — Relation of the diaphragm to the 
spine — Explanation of coughs — The most effective current for stimulating the 
diaphragm — Control of the lower dorsal region over the abdominal functions — The 
respiratory tract on the abdomen — Experiments of Valentine and observations of 
Sherwood — Backache from constipation — Opposite tendencies of the upper and 
lower portions of the spinal cord — Power of the lumbar region — Experiments of 
Brachet on the lumbar region— Experiments of Budge — Anatomical description 01 
the lumbar and sacral nerves — Seats of sexual functions — Observations of Longet, 
Breschet, and Brachet— Sacral and hypogastric plexuses — Budge's sexual centre — 
Connection of the sexual and muscular — Antagonism to brain in pelvic region and 
lower limbs —General view of the spine and its nervous control. 

Correlation and combination of f mictions — Van Kempen's experiment — Roots ot 
the nerves — Complex relations of the heart with ganglia, phrenic nerve, and spine 

— Relations of the thoracic part of the cord — Cervical ganglia and pneumogastric 

— Relations of splanchnic nerves— Combination of brain, lungs and stomach — 
Connection of cardiac and pulmonary nerve forces — Importance of the ganglionic 
system. 

The enlightened healer understands that he must not merely 
remove the existing- disease and the morbid elements in the body, 
which was the general aim of the drug practice (operating very often 
with remedies very imperfectly understood), but that he must, by 
that direct and congenial aid which drugs seldom give, rouse each 
organ to a more vigorous performance of duty, and rouse the whole 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 8$ 

constitution from its depression, to assist by the general vital force 
each special organ, and then, if possible, so invigorate the psycho- 
dynamic health region as to place the whole being on a higher plane 
of life. 

There are certain general principles to be continually borne in 
mind. Health, happiness, and efficiency depend on the predominance 
of the upper half of the back and the upper half of the occiput — over 
the abdominal region of the body, and the anterior inferior region of 
the brain covered by the face.* 

Upward and backward passes over the front of the body, but espe- 
cially over the abdomen, are of great benefit in nine tenths of the 
cases of disease. When you find one fatigued, debilitated, feverish, 
melancholic, or depressed in any way, the brisk upward passes over 
the abdomen, either upon the clothes or upon the uncovered person, 
are always felt as restorative, refreshing, and strengthening. The 
abdomen is the castle and battle-ground of disease, where life is 
busily engaged in conquering, to assimilate the dead matter intro- 
duced, and where the portal vessels gather the most degenerate and 
devitalized blood of the whole body. There are the abundant nerves, 
the acute sensibilities, and the atonic relaxation which invite disease. 
There is the continual gathering of all the foul, dead, and morbid 
matter of the body, prior to its expulsion; there is the open thorough- 
fare of dead matter, coming in to be vitalized, and taxing the re- 
sources of vitality to lift it to a higher condition. If it is not at once 
controlled and partially dissolved by the healthy energy of the secre- 
tions, it becomes an immediate oppression and cause of debility, dis- 
ease, or suffering. The abdominal organs are therefore a continual 
tax upon the constitution, to assist their battle with dead and decay- 
ing matter, and its accumulation either as undigested food or as 
unexpelled decomposition, lowers the general vitality, which gains its 
maximum vigor only after the expulsion of the waste and the diges- 
tion of the food supply. There is a sensible increase of vigor after 
every act of digestion and every act of expulsion. The vigor of 
these acts depends upon the spinal column, extended along which 
we find the spinal cord and sympathetic ganglia. 

♦This does not imply that the abdominal region is the seat of injurious influ- 
ences, or that it is not absolutely necessary to human life and harmonious develop- 
ment, but simply that the abdominal region has not the vitalizing, elevating, and 
protective power which belongs to the chest, and that if it were the ruling element 
of the constitution there would not be sufficient vital force to animate and perfect 
the crude material which it introduces but does not fully vitalize, and to resist the 
malign impressions to which the nervous system of the abdomen is continually 
liable. The vitality which enters by the brain and chest elevates the constitution 
from abdominal helplessness, and as soon as the thorax ceases to act in respiration 
the fatal decline of life begins. A low grade of life, such as that of the oyster, may 
exist when the digestive apparatus is the chief element of the constitution and the 
respiration is reduced to a minimum. 



84 THE SPINAL REGION, [CHAP. V. 

Morbid and excessive concentration of excitement to the abdomen 
is lowering, and its dispersion is invigorating — hence, in addition to 
the upward and backward passes, dispersive passes from the lower 
region of the abdomen down the thighs are highly beneficial, trans- 
ferring the excitement from the hypogastric region of depression to 
that of physical force — the thighs and legs — as the upward passes 
carry it to the shoulders. 

[The doctrine that the relaxing influences belong to the abdominal 
region, and the energetic influences to other portions of the constitu- 
tion, is illustrated by many familiar facts, beside the terribly debilita- 
ting and prostrating effects of abdominal diseases. Whenever we 
make a vigorous exertion, calling forth our maximum energy, the 
abdomen is powerfully compressed by the abdominal muscles and 
diaphragm, the descent of the latter being sustained or aided by the 
closure of the larynx retaining the air in the chest, the compression 
of which assists the downward pressure. Without this compression 
of the trunk, driving out the abdominal blood into the muscular sys- 
term brain, and spine, our maximum energy cannot be attained. On 
the other hand, the congestion of the blood in the abdominal region 
from any cause is extremely depressing and dangerous, as we see in 
congestive chills and the collapse of cholera.] 

In a great many cases a single treatment in this way by an efficient 
healer will break up a commencing fever, or arrest the progress of 
one which is more advanced. It will also relieve cases of diarrhoea 
and cholera morbus, menstrual disorders, hysteria, and melancholy. 

Following this operation, the hands should be placed on the region 
of Health on the shoulder blades, the perfect vitality of which has 
already been explained, and a gentle or vigorous percussion applied 
over the whole upper part of the back, from the neck ten or twelve 
inches down. 

A gentle stimulant or mild capsicum plaster, six or eight by ten or 
twelve inches, according to the size of the person, may be placed 
across the shoulders, to maintain the impression thus produced, and 
left upon the patient for a few hours. 

If any particular remedy is plainly and positively indicated, it may 
be applied upon the skin as an embrocation under the plaster, in the 
form of a tincture or strong decoction, and its constitutional effects 
produced without introducing it in the stomach. The most sensitive 
locality for the external application of medicines is on the median line 
between the sternum (breast bone) and umbilicus. 

As the physician should combat not only the prostration of the 
vital powers generally, but the special debility, disorder, and disease 
of each organ, he will go to the basis of the vital forces in the spinal 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. ' 85 

column to ieinforce the dilapidated energies. The vital forces and 
positive elements are in the posterior half of the brain and the body 
— the sensitive and negative in the anterior. This is the general 
plan of the animal kingdom. In the torpedo, for example, the spinal 
side of the body is positive and the abdominal surface negative. 
The current is from the spinal toward the abdominal surface. 

The commanding importance of the spinal region has not escaped 
the observation of the most enlightened practitioners of electro- 
therapeutics. Dr. Beard says : " In the employment of general fara- 
dization particular attention should be given to the spine, even at the 
expense of neglecting other portions of the body ;" and he recog- 
nizes the upper dorsal region as the most important portion of the 
spine. 

M. Gondret in 1850 (in " Encyclographie Medicale ") published his 
method of treating intermittent fever, which he stated had in his 
hands never failed to cure. He applied eight or ten cupping glasses on 
each side of the spinal column from the neck downwards, letting them 
remain about thirty or forty minutes. This was simply dry cupping, 
as no scarification was used. The application was made at the begin- 
ning of the cold stage, or preferably a quarter of an hour before. 
This he stated not only prevented the attack but overcame the sub- 
sequent fever. One application of the cups, he stated, was sufficient, 
except in long-standing cases, which might require three or four. 
This method, he stated, had never failed in his practice of twenty- 
seven years. 

He stated that when there was headache, giddiness, heat and 
heaviness of the head, " I apply cups to the back of the neck, and 
sometimes take away an ounce or an ounce and a half of blood* 
which immediately relieves ; if there is cough, difficulty of breathing, 
palpitation, etc., I apply them between the shoulders and draw two or 
three ounces of blood, and so on. By following this plan I always 
find the symptoms disappear in a short time." 

M. Gondret certainly found the correct locations, and his practice 
was rational, but in the medical profession the most valuable ideas 
which do not emanate from a college or a high authority easily fall 
into oblivion. Authority is more influential than truth. 

As another illustration of the same principle, rheumatic pains in 
the arms may often be controlled by cupping at the origin of the 
brachial plexus on the back of the neck, and pain of the jaws and 
teeth in dental operations may be controlled by the application of 
ether in front of the ear at the origin of the trifacial nerve. Facial 
neuralgias may also be treated on the same principle. They were 
cured by my colleague Prof. T. V. Morrow by counter-irritation near 



86 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

the origin of the trifacial nerve (in front of the ear) with the eclectic 
irritating plaster. 

The seats of the various energies which may be roused through 
the spinal column are arranged in a very simple and intelligible way 
along the spine. In all animals the different portions of the spinal 
cord, instead of being a simple uniform channel from the brain to the 
muscles, vary in size according to the development of spinal nerves 
for the different parts of the body. 

That the spinal cord is not a mere channel to and from the brain, but has special 
endowments in every part, is shown by its varying size in different portions. Volk- 
mann, by weighing four portions of the spinal cord of the horse, found them to 
differ greatly. That below the second pair of nerves weighed 219, that below the 
eighth 293, that below the nineteenth, 163, and that below the thirtieth 2S1 grains. 
In all animals the cord is larger where important nerves are given off. 

Volkmann has shown also that each pair of the lymphatic hearts of frogs depends 
for nervous influence upon a small section of the cord, destruction of which arrests 
its movements, but destruction of no other part has this effect, if the special portion 
is not disturbed. 

The interesting experiments of Dr. F. Harless on frogs, corroborated by those of 
Engelhardt and Potelli, show that in them the upper part of the cord governs the 
flexor and the lower the extensor muscles. For the upper limbs the division between 
the flexor and extensor portions was at the fourth vertebra ; for the lower, the divi- 
sion was at the fifth. There is something analogous to this in man; for the emo- 
tions and impulses connected with the upper part of the spine and the corre- 
sponding upper region of the brain tend to acts of a more gentle character, in which 
flexion is employed, while acts of violence, which employ the extensors, proceed 
from the inferior region of the brain and the corresponding inferior region of the 
spine. As the flexor functions are located higher, they survive extension in paraly- 
sis and in death. 

The dorsal summit of the spinal column is the region that invigo- 
rates the brain, and may therefore be called Cephalic. The stimula- 
tion of that region gives strength of will, dignity of character, self- 
reliance, and all that belongs to conscious strength of character. 

The three upper dorsal and four lower cervical vertebrae are the 
location of the channels of the power which invigorates the brain 
and the entire character. The elevation of this part in a proud, 
manly erect attitude expresses the strength of the character, and its 
depression in a drooping attitude characterizes humility, timidity, 
feebleness, and disease. There may, however, be a large amount of 
the coarser energies from the lower part of the spine when the nobler 
energies of this region are defective, as we see in misers and men of 
bad, coarse character, whose shoulders droop while the back projects. 
It is from this region that the nerves proceed which supply the arms 
by which man exercises his intelligent vigor and enforces his author- 
ity. The arms are physiologically associated with the occipital organs 
near the median line, in which are situated the commanding and ambi- 
tious faculties. The capacity of the cephalic region of the body to 
sustain the brain power makes it important, not only to success in 
life, but in overcoming the irresolute feebleness of ill-health and pros- 
tration of severe diseases. Hence, when the patient is failing in for- 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 8? 

titude, stability, self-control, power of attention and self-reliance, 
this is the region to be roused, while we should disperse from the 
hypochondriac regions — the margin of the ribs, in which the 
enfeebling, depressing elements are seated. 

I do not mean by these remarks that the power of the spine over- 
rules that of the brain, but that it is a co-operative instrument, as the 
entire body, by the laws of Sarcognomy, responds to the entire brain 
in sympathetic co-operation. Each portion of the body co-operates 
with and strengthens the portion of the brain with which it is in 
sympathy. As the eye is the necessary instrument of the perceptive 
organs, and the muscles the necessary instrument of combativeness, 
it is obvious that the loss or decay of these instruments would dimin- 
ish the perceptive and the combative powers. 

The upper region of the spinal cord, which I designate as Ceph- 
alic, is by far the most important, as it is also the largest portion. 
Even the great muscular power of the lower limbs, sustained by an 
enlargement of the cord at the beginning of the lumbar region, does 
not require so large a development. The posterior or sensory roots 
of the spinal nerves show a more marked predominance over the 
anterior or motor in the cephalic region, corresponding to the refined 
sensibility of the upper part of the body. These sensitive fibres are 
softer and finer than those of the anterior motor nerves. 

The cephalic region embraces the four lower cervical and three 
superior dorsal nerves, which hold under their jurisdiction the arms, 
shoulders, and upper part of the chest. By these muscles are exe- 
cuted all the movements of the arms, hands, and shoulders, while they 
erect the head as well as the shoulders, and produce all the command- 
ing dignity of human attitudes. The region of the body to which 
the nerves of the cephalic region are distributed may be called the 
cephalic region or zone — the region which sympathizes with the 
brain and sustains its functions. This I state, not from anatomical 
inferences or theories, but from experimental facts — the production 
of similar conditions by the brain and by the body. 

The largest nervous emission from the cephalic region is the 
brachial plexus, devoted to the arms, formed from the fifth, sixth, 
seventh and eighth cervical nerves, and first dorsal. The anterior 
branches of these nerves form the brachial plexus, and the poste- 
rior go to the muscles and the integuments of the lower part of the 
neck, corresponding externally with the cephalic region. 

In addition to the nerves of the arm, the brachial plexus and its spinal roots give 
off nerves for the upper thoracic region — the anterior and posterior thoracic, the 
supra-scapular, sub-scapular, and superior muscular, and supply the major and 
minor psctoralis at the lateral front of the chest, theserratus magnus on its lateral 
surface, and in the neck and shoulder supply the longus colli, complexus, spinatis 
cervicis, multifidus spina?, scaleni, rhomboidei, supra and infra spinatus, shoulder 



88 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

joint, terres major, subscapularis, subclavius, levator anguli scapulae — and latissi- 
mus dorsi at the back of the chest. There are also two large nerves from the fourth 
cervical (acromialis and clavicularis), which pass to the surface of the front of the 
chest, between the sternum and acromion process. From the lower part of the 
cephalic region — the first, second, and third dorsal nerves — proceed the intercosto- 
humeral nerves, which supply the posterior inner part of the arm, the lower part of 
the scapula, and the surface in the axilla. This location corresponds closely in its 
character with the cephalic region at the spine. The upper dorsal nerves in their 
anterior or intercostal distribution correspond with the course of the ribs, and there- 
fore relate to the upper part of the chest —the third and fourth supplying the mam- 
mary gland. Hence the region above the mammary gland may be properly included 
in the cephalic zone, with which it is also identified by its functional sympathies 
with the highest elements of humanity, connected with the upper portion of the 
brain, the region of Love, Philanthropy, Hope, Religion, and Integrity. The con- 
nection of the upper dorsal region with the mammas, the seat of Love, illustrates 
the correlation of Love and Health in the brain, which correspond to the mammae 
and upper dorsal region. 

The fact that the cephalic region of the trunk is also a brachial 
region, being the origin of the brachial plexus, indicates an important 
relation of the arms to the brain, and hence the importance of exercises 
of the arms and shoulders to prornote the energy of tlie brain. 

This intimate association is illustrated by anatomy, as the arms 
and the head receive their common supply of red blood through the 
same arteries, the subsclavian, and return it likewise through the sub- 
clavian veins. Hence the increase of the subclavian flow brings a 
simultaneous increase of energy to the arms and the brain. We 
may suppose that any organs dependent on a common vascular trunk 
for their supply may be associated in action. The arms are the 
agent by which our intelligent plans and purposes are executed. 
They are the chief instruments of the brain, all skill being mani- 
fested by the fingers and the play of our emotions and energies being 
expressed by gesticulation of the arms. 

There is another striking illustration of this correlation. The arms 
(including hands, of course) attain their highest development in man. 
So does the occipital brachial region, in which man excels very far all 
animals. This occipital region gives the ambitious impulse, the spirit 
of command and dignity of character which are so pre-eminent in 
man, and which are sustained by his superior brain and his efficient 
arms, which make arts and manufactures possible. If his hands 
were reduced to paws or hoofs, his pre-eminence would be lost, his 
civilization undeveloped, and, his ambition and self-respect having no 
adequate foundation, the organs would fail, and his occiput be re- 
duced to the animal type. 

Another very important relation of the cephalic region, illustrating 
its commanding position, is found in the phrenic nerve, commonly 
regarded merely as the nerve of the diaphragm, but really one of the 
most important and extensively related nerves, comparable to the 
pneumogastric and sympathetic, and similar to the sympathetic in 
some of its functions, but going more freely to the diaphragm than 
the heart. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 89 

The phrenic originates from the third, fourth, and fifth cervical, 
also communicating with the vertebral ganglion, and thus associates 
the cephalic region with its very extensive and important functions, 
as the vertebral is the commanding centre of the vital energy of the 
occipital brain and spine. Through its branches to the lower vena 
cava, pericardium, and right auricle, it has an important influence on 
the heart, assisting its action. This is probably the reason that the 
right heart, being thus more intimately associated with the brain than 
the left heart, is the last to die, as shown in experiments on animals. 

Through its distribution to the diaphragm it becomes an important 
vital nerve, and connects the cephalic region, from which it comes, 
with the act of inspiration as well as with the action of the heart, 
with which it is connected by the direct branches just mentioned, 
and by its association with the vertebral ganglion, which is one of the 
sources of power to the heart. This arrangement illustrates the 
character of the cephalic zone as the source of life, in which it corre- 
sponds with the brain, which is the primal source. 

As the sensitive nerve of the pleura costalis, the sensibility of 
which is very acute in pleurisy, it represents a region that sym- 
pathizes with the upper cerebral surface and connects also with pul- 
monic regions of the spine. 

Finally, by its distribution to the peritoneum, liver, small intestines, 
and supra-renal capsules, it brings these regions into a close relation 
with the brain and lungs, such as we see illustrated in the coughs 
and convulsions produced by the intestinal irritation of worms. 

This latter distribution is an important fact in Sarcognomy, as 
without it there would be no anatomical explanation of the functions I 
have found at the abdominal surface (the regions of Respiration and 
emotional expression for the entire brain). But even this anatomical 
illustration is hardly an adequate explanation of my discovery, which 
requires some additional knowledge for its full comprehension. 

The cephalic region of the spine is closely connected with the ver- 
tebral ganglia (lying at the junction of the cervical and dorsal verte- 
brae, or between the last cervical vertebra and the first rib). They 
are under the immediate control of the cephalic region, as all the 
ganglia communicate with and are controlled by the adjacent regions 
of the cord. Branches may be traced from the seventh and eighth 
cervical nerves to this ganglion. The vertebral ganglia are the gov- 
ernors of the entire circulation of the posterior half of the brain and 
its downward extension, the spinal cord. They lie on the vertebral 
arteries which give the supply of the posterior part of the brain and 
the spinal cord, and send a plexus along the course of these arteries, 
which accompanies their ramifications (after forming the basilar 



90 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

artery) with minute branches, which finally connect with the analo- 
gous branches coming from the carotid plexus along the carotid arte- 
ries and branches for the anterior half of the brain. 

When the operator's hand is placed on the cephalic region, it covers 
the subclavian artery (for the brain and the arm) adjacent to the last 
cervical vertebra, the vertebral arteries which supply the brain and 
spine, and the vertebral ganglia which not only control the circulation 
of the energetic portion of the nervous system, but contribute to sus- 
tain the action of the heart. 

The superior regions of the brain sympathize with the superior 
region of the chest, as is shown by Pathology (and as I have often 
felt in my own person), in accordance with which fact the vertebral 
ganglia (belonging to the cephalic region) send some branches down 
to unite in the pulmonary plexus (which is supplied from the third 
and fourth ganglia in the dorsal region) with the pneumogastric, the 
sensitive nerves of the lungs and heart. 

They also co-operate with nerves from the cephalic region, viz., the 
seventh and eighth cervical and first dorsal, in forming the axillary 
or brachial plexus, which controls the arms and shoulders. Moreover, 
they send down one of the principal nerves of the heart. Probably 
this nervous connection may explain the pain felt in the left arm as 
far down as the elbow in cases of cardiac disease. 

From the first three dorsal vertebras proceed the anterior spinal 
nerves, called intercosto-humeral, which supply the inner and pos- 
terior surfaces of the arm, the axillary region, and a portion of the 
upper frontal surface of the chest. These surfaces, according to Sar- 
cognomy, correspond with the regions of dignity, cheerfulness, author- 
ity and affection in the brain, and a portion of the emotional and 
intellectual region sympathizes with the frontal distribution of the 
first dorsal : the first three nerves are therefore strictly cephalic in 
their distribution. 

Thus we see the cephalic region is a great centre of power, sustain- 
ing through its subordinate ganglionic nerves the posterior cerebral 
lobes, cerebellum, and spinal cord, while it controls the upper limbs, 
sustains the action of the heart, and contributes to the organic life of 
the summit of the lungs, which sympathizes with the upper part of 
the brain. At the same time the posterior nerves from the cephalic 
region of the cord supply the integuments of the upper part of the 
back, which Sarcognomy shows to sympathize with the. upper occipital 
region of the brain. In short, we have here the vital knot, the com- 
bination of the executive power of the arms as well as the cerebro- 
spinal and cardiac power, with the pulmonic region, which is at once 
the sympathetic support of the brain and the inlet of life conditions 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 91 

to the body — spirit life, blood life, action, and inspiration being here 
inextricably combined. Hence, in exciting this region in the impres- 
sible, they feel a great sense of additional strength and manhood, or 
force of character, for it commands the entire forces of the body. 
Any one who wishes to realize its influence, if not impressible by the 
hand, may realize it by placing upon it a gently stimulating plaster, 
and if the plaster should also extend down as far as the sixth dorsal 
vertebra, the stimulation of the lungs and heart will greatly increase 
the effect and enhance the capacities for social or oratorical exertion. 

In looking over the experience of electric therapeutists, I cannot 
but wonder that they should have so generally failed to recognize the 
local influences revealed by Sarcognomy, when they are clearly indi- 
cated by the history of diseases. 

The cephalic region of the cord, however, has not entirely escaped 
observation. Dr. Rockwell, in "Lectures on Electricity," says: "The 
back part of the head and tipper portion of the spine (cilio-spinal centre) 
will usually bear powerful applications ; and it is an interesting and 
important fact that applications to this centre will produce far greater 
tonic effects than when the pole is applied to any other one portion of 
the body." No doubt much of his success in electric treatment was 
due to his discovery of this fact.* Dr. Rockwell is a stronger 
advocate of faradization than the majority, and superficial faradic 
currents might be used with great benefit on the two regions he 
mentions. 

That the cephalic region sustains the power of the brain was illus- 
trated in a case reported in the London " Lancet," by Joseph Ewart. 
In this case a married woman of twenty-nine, after undergoing an 
amputation of one of the metacarpal bones of the hand, under chloro- 
form, fell into a state of insensibility, with contracted pupils and very 
feeble, laboring respiration. After efforts at her resuscitation for two 
hours and a half there was no recuperation, but diminishing respira- 
tion and increasing coldness. In this dangerous condition galvanism 
was applied for two or three minutes over the chest and " top of the 
spine," and through the brachial plexus. This was exactly the proper 
application to rouse the brain, and it produced immediate recovery. 

*An additional illustration of the character of the cephalic region of the body 
may be found in the muscles which it contains. The trapezius, rhomboideus major 
and minor, upper serratus, splenius colli, semi-spinales colli and dorsi, spinalis cer- 
vicis, upper interspinales and multifidus spinae, all contribute to maintain the firm, 
erect attitude of head and shoulders which is pathognomic of strong character and 
sustained energy. These are adjacent to the spinal cephalic region. The muscles 
further off, controlled from the cephalic spine, in the shoulders and arms, with the 
serratus magnus and pectoralis, On the chest, are the muscles of intelligent action 
and expression, by which mainly the conceptions and purposes of the brain are 
carried out; while the inspiration that vitalizes the brain is obtained through the 
fourth and fifth cervical andThe upper intercostal nerves and muscles, aided by the 
upper serratus, serratus magnus, and upper levatores costarum. 



92 THE SPTNAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

She rose from the bed, sighed frequently and profoundly, opened her 
eyes, and was able to answer questions. 

A knowledge of the character of the cephalic region may be of 
great value in diseases which, like typhus, affect the brain. Dr. 
Gerhard, of Philadelphia, discovered the value of the cephalic region 
in the treatment of typhus fever. 

Scarified or dry cups, applied to the nuchae or along the spine 
between the shoulders, have been found of great efficacy in removing 
or diminishing the suffusion of the eyes, the injection of the face, the 
headache, the delirium, and other symptoms. They constitute in 
nearly all the cases a part of the treatment pursued by Dr. Gerhard 
at Philadelphia in 1836. Speaking generally of dry cups, he says: 
" Applied in considerable numbers, and left upon the nape of the 
neck and between the shoulders for twenty minutes or half an hour, 
they always seemed to me more powerful in nervous functional 
derangement, not attended with inflammation, than scarified cups. I 
have used them largely in the treatment of the apoplectic symptoms 
of malignant intermittent with the best effects, and resort to them 
with confidence as one of the most poiverful means of controlling dis- 
cordant nervous action." (Bartlett on Typhoid and Typhus.) 

Dr. Beard, by his experience in electrical treatment, discovered the 
great importance and controlling power of the upper dorsal region, of 
which he says (page 391): " There is no other single place on the sur- 
face of the body where the electrical influence can be communicated 
to so many important nerves as at the cilio-spinal centre." " This 
application is a very important factor in general faradization, and 
will achieve decided tonic effects on the system even when no other 
portion of the body is touched by the current." The anatomical 
reasons which he gives, however, are entirely inadequate to explain 
its importance. 

The stimulation of organs by nervauric influence is not limited to 
any exact lines, but is always diffusive. Hence I shall not assign any 
exact boundaries to the localities to be acted on, but allow them to 
overlap. I speak of the second and third dorsal vertebrae in the 
cephalic group, although their adjacent ganglia are tributary to the 
upper portion of the lungs. The second and third dorsal spinal 
nerves supply the posterior aspect of the arm, and inner aspect of 
arm and fore-arm, which associates them practically with the brachial 
plexus that springs from the cephalic region. The region these two 
nerves supply corresponds with the posterior lobes of the brain along 
the median line and turning in between the hemispheres. 

There is another curious fact, illustrating the cephalic influence 
of the upper part of the spinal cord, viz., that the second dorsal nerve 



CHAP. V.J THE SPINAL REGION. 93 

originates the expansion of the pupil of the eye. Yet such is the 
diffusive tendency of impressions on the nervous system that this 
influence may be excited anywhere from the first cervical to the 
sixth dorsal nerve ; hence this space has been called the cilio-spinal 
region. But exact experiment has shown that the second dorsal 
nerve is the sole seat of this spinal power. It is, however, exercised 
or transmitted through the sympathetic ganglia and nerves of the 
neck, the section of which deprives the pupil of the power of dilation 
by cutting off communication with the cord at the second dorsal , 
nerve. 

Why there should be such a control of the iris at the second dorsal 
nerve is a mystery, but when we find it identified with the brachial 
region, supplying the posterior surface of the arm, we recollect that 
the posterior surface of the arm corresponds in Sarcognomy with the 
occipital region on the median line, to which anatomists give the 
name of the cuneus, and in this cuneus they find so close an associa- 
tion with the optic nerve in its diseases as to induce them to infer 
that it is the seat of vision. Moreover, the same claim is made for 
the angular gyrus, in consequence of the experiments of Ferrier on 
pigeons, in which its injury produces blindness. There is a good 
pathognomic reason for both locations, for they are coinciding or 
co-operative organs ; the cuneus of one hemisphere co-operates with 
the angular gyrus of the other. That both are associated with vision 
and give power to the eye agrees with my experiments, though I do 
not believe that vision is independent of the perceptive intellectual 
organs. Another reason in favor of the cuneus, in connection with 
the cilio-spinal region, is that its influence is expansive. 

Onimus and Legros have ascertained by their electric investiga- 
tions the value of the cephalic and upper dorsal region as to its con- 
trolling influence in the head, not knowing the neurological relations 
of the parts, but guided by the cilio-spinal phenomena. " In peri- 
pheric lesions" (they say) "it is advantageous to electrize only the 
nervous centres." " Hence, to act on the circulation of the head and 
especially of the eyes it is preferable to electrize the cilio-spinal cen- 
tre, rather than to place the electrodes directly on the face or near 
the eyes," which is very true, as applications on the face would be 
rather injurious to the cerebral circulation. 

The upper half of the dorsal region of the spinal column may be 
regarded as its thoracic portion and the lower half as abdominal. 
Hence, in treating affections of the lungs and heart, we act upon the 
upper half, reaching the nerves emitted at the first six vertebrae. If 
the first three are accessary to cephalic action, they are none the less 
pulmonic, as the upper pulmonic region is directly tributary to the 
brain by sympathy and correspondence. 



94 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

The application of the hand on the upper dorsal region, between 
the shoulder blades, produces a wholesome, invigorating effect on the 
lungs, and a similar effect is produced by any other stimulating 
application. Anatomy illustrates the relation of this region to the 
lungs through the blood-vessels. The aorta from the third to the 
sixth dorsal vertebrae sends off the bronchial arteries, which are the 
arteries of the bronchial region and the lungs. The posterior pul- 
monary plexus and the root of the lungs through which they are 
supplied with air are on the level of the three upper dorsal vertebrae. 
To speak exactly, the bifurcation of the trachea is opposite the third 
and fourth dorsal vertebrae. 

The heart, too, is invigorated from this region, and we cannot 
entirely isolate the cardiac and pulmonic influences. The five upper 
ganglia in the dorsal region send branches to the cardiac plexuses 
formed by the union of the pneumogastric nerves with those of the 
three cervical and upper dorsal ganglia. These plexuses sustain the 
heart. 

Hence diseases in this locality affect the heart. Sometimes the 
symptoms of an acute affection of the heart have manifested them- 
selves, when the irritation was seated in the dorsal region. M. Serres 
relates a case of meningeal inflammation and ramollissement of the 
cord, in which the heart's action and impulse were of such a nature 
that the disease was pronounced to be dilation with hypertrophy of 
the left side of the heart, which notwithstanding proved to be per- 
fectly sound. 

Below the first dorsal nerve (which goes to the arm) the next seven 
spinal nerves, going anteriorly, supply the muscles and integuments 
attached to the ribs, and thus, although they do not supply the lungs, 
they are associated therewith in action, giving inspiratory power to 
the intercostal muscles, and sensibility to the chest. The interior 
and exterior of the thorax are thus connected with the upper region 
of the cord, which may be strictly called thoracic, as it governs the 
thorax both internally and externally, and the posterior dorsal nerves 
supply the muscles and integument of the back — the upper half of 
them supplying the thoracic region. 

As we find the maximum excitability (which is intermediate 
between power and sensibility — between impression and reaction) 
on the lateral surface of the head and body, we are not surprised to 
discover that the corporeal region of Inspiration is on the lateral sur- 
face of the thorax (see map) behind the mammae, running down to 
the seventh rib and thus corresponding with the anterior distribution 
of the intercostal nerves and muscles, the agents of costal inspiration, 
and associates of the phrenic nerve in diaphragmatic inspiration. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPTNAL REGION. 95 

The costal inspiration is more cephalic and spiritual in its associa- 
tions with the brain; and diaphragmatic inspiration which belongs to 
a lower position on the head and body is associated with the basilar 
region and impulsive energies and passions. 

According to Drs. Griffin, when the dorsal region exhibits tender- 
ness, we find pains about the chest or in the side, weight and con- 
striction of the chest, cough and fits of syncope, sense of sinking, 
loss of appetite, gastrodynia, pain in the region of the liver, and hic- 
cough " — all of which is explained by the functions of the dorsal 
region. 

If physicians had been accustomed to report the pathological effects 
of irritation of the spinal cord, we should have had a fine illustration 
of its functions. 

Dr. Robert Little, in the "Southern Medical and Surgical Journal," 
described the effect of spinal irritation as follows : " Irritation of the 
cervical division is indicated by pains in the face, temples, and scalp, 
accompanied frequently by rigidity of the muscles of the jaw, when 
confined to the superior part. When the irritation is lower down, 
there is pain in the region of the clavicle, scapula, and chest, extend- 
ing along the arm, giving rise to great lassitude, sighing, spasmodic 
twitchings of the muscles, etc. When the dorsal division is affected, 
we have, in addition to a few of the foregoing, stricture across the 
chest, difficult breathing, palpitation of tJie heart, a?zgina pectoris, dart- 
ing pains in the intercostal muscles, edges of the ribs and the epigas- 
trium. Lower down still in the dorsal division pains in the stomach 
and abdomen are felt. In addition to these, a burning sensation in 
the sternum and ensiform cartilage is said to be always present in 
decided cases of irritation of the dorsal nerves. When the lumbar 
and sacral division are in a state of irritation we have pains of an 
acute lancinating character, soreness in the skin and muscles over the 
genital organs, spasmodic twitchings along the course of the crural 
nerves, together with an unsteady carriage in walking, the patient 
having no confidence in his ability to retain an erect position, and 
exhibiting the reeling appearance of a drunken man." He ascribes 
also to the superior spinal nerves "throbbing of the carotid and tem- 
poral arteries, acute pains in the head, violent palpitation and painful 
sensation of the heart, and a feeling of inability to expel the air from 
the lungs." 

The influence of the various portions of the spinal cord was imper- 
fectly illustrated by Sir B. C. Brodie in his work on diseases of the 
joints. His reference to the constitutional symptoms, though limited, 
shows several important facts, such as the following: — 

In caries of the cervical vertebrae there is pain in the neck, some- 



g6 THE SPINAL REGION, [CHAP. V. 

times quite severe. Pains in the arms and shoulders seem followed 
by paralysis. " In all cases there is pain in the occiput and temples* 
which is, however, most severe when the disease is situated in the 
two or three superior vertebrae." In some advanced cases, the cord 
being irritated by pressure, " the patient complains of increased pain 
in the head, followed by convulsions, stupor, dilated pupils, and other 
symptoms of effusion of fluid on the brain ; and on examining the 
body after death, we find that such effusion has actually taken place, 
there being a collection of fluid in the ventricles or in the base of the 
cranium, or in both of these situations." 

This is the location which my experiments prove to be associated 
with cerebral disorder, and on which counter-irritation has the best 
effect on the brain, as many physicians have realized. 

"In caries of the superior dorsal vertebrae, besides the usual 
pain and tenderness of the affected parts, the patient complains of 
pain and a sense of constriction in the chest \ and when the disease is 
in the inferior dorsal vertebrae there is a similar sensation in the 
epigasrtium, pain in the abdomen generally, and a disturbed state of 
the functions of the alimentary canal. Occasionally the urine is alka- 
line, or contains albumen, from which circumstance, in connection 
with the existence of pain in or near the region of the kidney, it is 
sometimes difficult to determine, in the first instance, whether the 
patient labors under caries of the spine or disease of the kidney." 

Of course the progress of the disease downwards involves the 
lower part of the body. 

" As the disease advances the patient in some instances complains 
of pains which are referred to one groin or hip. This circumstance 
not infrequently occasions an error in diagnosis on the part of even 
practical surgeons. Afterwards pains and a sense of constriction are 
felt in the legs and thighs. Then the muscles are found to be not 
properly under the dominion of the will, so that the patient occasion- 
ally loses a step or trips in walking. This is probably followed by a 
complete loss of voluntary power. Paralysis of the bladder and incon- 
tinence of the urine and faeces sometimes accompany paralysis of 
the lower limbs." 

Abscesses are formed, which appear on the chest or the abdomen, 
sometimes occupying the space between the ribs and groin. Caries 
of the lumbar vertebrae produces pains in the loins, abdomen, and 
groin. In cases of lumbar abscess, he has always found caries of the 
vertebrae its cause. 

Thus it is anatomically and neurologically certain that the upper 
half of the dorsal region is thoracic, and is the region on which to 
treat all thoracic affections. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 97 

The close relation of the upper dorsal region to the functions of 
the lungs is illustrated by their anatomy. Cruveilhier says : " The 
pulmonary plexuses which are completed by filaments from the great 
sympathetic are situated behind the root of each lung, or, to speak 
more exactly, behind the bronchi." These nerves "may be traced as 
far as the ultimate ramifications of the air-cells." In large animals 
they can easily be seen entering the circular muscular fibres which 
surround the bronchial tubes. Hence we perceive that when the 
hand is placed upon the upper dorsal region, it is in close relation to 
the ganglionic and pneumogastric plexuses which control the lungs. 

Dr. J. L. Pidduck, in the " Lancet," speaking of the treatment of 
hooping cough, recommended counter-irritation at the summit of 
the spine, and said : " Leeching the upper part of the spine and 
blistering between the shoulders, by arresting the violence of the 
cough, speedily remove the congested and inflammatory states of the 
brain which the hooping-cough frequently occasions." 

The thoracic region has widely different characteristics in its upper 
and lower regions. The lower portion of the chest, brought into 
play by the diaphragm, is associated with vigorous, active life, and is 
most readily brought into play by the active exertion of the lower 
limbs. Its tendencies in disease are chiefly inflammatory. The 
upper portion of the lungs is the part used in quiet sedentary occupa- 
tions, and is therefore more nearly associated with the intellectual 
and moral faculties. It is the chief location of consumption, a dis- 
ease arising from imperfect physical development and blood-supply^ 
The superior portion of the chest is associated with the delicate, 
refined sentiments which are antagonistic to animal force. The 
organ of Mortality or ecstatic trance, belonging to the upper surface 
of the brain, has its correspondence on the upper surface of the chest, 
above the nipple. Hence diseases in the upper portion of the lungs 
tend strongly to death ; and this was the cause of the invariably fatal 
character of pulmonary consumption until within the last forty years 
more correct ideas of its treatment have been slowly gaining ground 
against dogmatic opposition. Pneumonia, belonging chiefly to the 
lower or more vitally energetic portion of the lungs, would never 
have been considered a very dangerous disease but for the absurd 
and injurious methods of its treatment. But pneumonia, too, becomes 
a very dangerous disease when it seizes the upper portion of the 
lungs. Prof. Boling says that pneumonia, "commencing at the apex 
of the lung, is in proportion to the number of cases the most fre- 
quently fatal form of the disease." He had met with about six cases 
of this affection ; they all proved fatal — the deaths occurring from 
less extensive alteration than usual. Prof. Eberle used to speak of 



98 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

suddenly fatal cases of relapsing pneumonia from congestion of the 
superior portion of the lungs, with so little disturbance that they had 
what he called a "morbidly natural pulse." These fatal upper-lung 
cases of pneumonia are accompanied by a persistent mucous or crepi- 
tant rhoncus, that should warn us of the Janger, which is also found 
in fatal consumptive conditions. 

Costal respiration, which develops the upper part of the chest, the 
seat of refined sentiments, is more characteristic of women, as dia- 
phragmatic respiration, which develops more vital impulse, is charac- 
teristic of men. Hence, women have smaller waists, and are more 
willing to undergo tight lacing. 

The upper part of the chest, corresponding with the upper surface 
of the brain, co-operates in determining the vital forces upwards or 
toward the head. The upper part of the chest, therefore, is the region 
of cephalic tendencies, and there are a great number of pathological 
facts that illustrate this proposition, which I may present when I 
undertake a full exposition of Sarcognomy. 

We may say that the entire chest above the waist, being the upper 
portion of the body, corresponds with the upper portion of the head, 
above a line running back horizontally from the brow. The absolute 
summit or upper surface of the head corresponds to a region occupy- 
ing the upper surface of the shoulders and summit of the spine and 
extending low enough in front to include the mammae. 

The upper surface of the brain manifests functions, according to 
the law of pathognomy, which are associated with the happy and 
benevolent upward tendencies, and the same remark is, of course, 
applicable to the corresponding upper surface of the chest. The 
mammae are associated with the function of love in its physiological 
and psychic operation, and hence their development brings on the age 
of love and the fitness for its duties. The same loving and happy 
influence is associated with the upward development of the womb, 
and the opposite condition with its drooping and prolapsing tendency. 
Hence the womb and the mammae, as well as the upper surface of 
the brain (the seat of loving emotions), are in close sympathy from 
the similarity of their tendency. The elevation of the womb in 
pregnancy brings on the development of the mammae, and the love 
and caresses of the child have a similar influence to produce and 
sustain it. 

Cazeaux, in his work on midwifery (p. 1064), relates the case of a 
woman, Angeline Chaupfaille, sixty-two years of age, who undertook 
to nurse her grand-daughter and occasionally presented her nipple to 
the child. Although it was twenty-seven years since she had borne 
children, this emotional influence brought on a full supply of milk, 
and she nursed the child a whole year till it was weaned. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 99 

A striking illustration of this sympathy is afforded by cases of sun- 
stroke, which are supposed to be simply affections of the brain. In 
three fatal cases of sunstroke, which occurred in the Sixty-eighth 
regiment, at Madras, India, autopsies were made by Surgeon Russell, 
who found in all alike no material disorder in the brain, "but in all 
three the lungs were congested even to blackness, through their 
entire extent." 

In a violent outbreak of typhus fever among the British troops in 
Spain, as reported by Surgeon Bacot, the patients came to the hospi- 
tal very much depressed, sad, and melancholy; " giddiness of the 
head was a frequent complaint, and deep and constant sighing zuas a 
universal symptom" This sighing inspiration is an effect of the 
upper region of the brain, especially under depressing influences — a 
common effect of the amiable emotions which elevate the chest and 
the feeling of depression which acts on the diaphragm anteriorly. 

Dr. Bartlett says " the morbid alterations which are found within 
the cavity of the chest seem to be more constant and more important 
in typhus than in typhoid fever. The lungs were more or less 
changed from their healthy condition in all the cases reported by Dr. 
Gerhard. This change generally consisted in a somewhat peculiar 
condensation of a portion of one or both lungs. . . Of forty-three 
cases examined by Dr. Reid, there was more or less lesion of the lungs 
in all." It appears from a careful comparison that extensive engorge- 
ment and congestion of the lungs were more frequently associated 
with those cases in which there was increased serous effusion within 
the cranium, than with those where this condition did not exist. 
Nearly all these patients exhibited more or less prominent cerebral 
symptoms. Dr. John Cheyne, who made a number of dissections in 
Dublin, said " our expectations were never disappointed as to the 
state of the brain. . . The vessels of the head were turgid ; there 
was increased vascularity of the brain, especially on its surface." 

Thus it appears that the state of the cephalic circulation, whether 
hyperemic, irritated, or congested, is responded to by similar condi- 
tions in the lungs, and I have often personally experienced that a 
determination to the upper region of the brain, stimulating the amia- 
ble and intellectual faculties, is produced by the partial hyperemia of 
the lungs in a cold affecting their upper portion. 

The power of the lungs to affect the brain is familiar to physicians. 
M. Grisolle, in a clinical lecture, said " delirium is one of the most fre- 
quent and most severe cerebral accidents by which pneumonia can be 
complicated. One third of the cases in which this complication is 
observed refer to habitual drunkards. When both lungs are affected 
delirium is more frequent. Drs. Hourman and Dechambre state that 



IOO THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

delirium usually accompanies pneumonia in the aged pensioners of 
La Salpetriere. The delirium makes its appearance at the end of the 
first week or beginning of the second, and varies in its intensity from 
quiet divagations to the most violent sort of furious raving. The 
appearance of delirium during the progress of pneumonia increases 
the severity of the prognosis." 

Dr. H. W. Ranking, editor of the Half-Yearly Abstract, says of 
the foregoing statement : " Delirium is a more common accompaniment 
of pneumonia than is here represented. In children it is frequently 
one of the first symptoms. We have seen it before crepitation was 
fairly established." 

The history of insanity furnishes another illustration of cephalic 
and pulmonic, sympathy. The leading cause of death among the in- 
sane, according to Dr. Thurnam's tables, is disease of tJie respiratory 
organs ; the fatality of which excels that of epidemic, endemic, and 
contagious diseases, apoplexy, paralysis, and epilepsy combined. 
Dr. Fischel, of Prague, reported that in that city seven per cent, of 
the deaths of the insane were caused by gangrene of the lungs. Dr. 
Webster, in the third volume of Medico-Chirurgical Transactions, 
made a report upon the lunatics of Bethlem Hospital for six years 
(1798 in number), and reported the dissection of sixty-seven, in all of 
which morbid conditions (chiefly serous effusion) were found in the 
brain. Of the sixty-seven the organs of the chest were more or less 
diseased in sixty-two. In the abdominal viscera morbid changes were 
found in but thirty. 

Dr. Vierordt, of Carlsruhe, in examining fifty-one cases of typhus 
fever, states that the lungs were never healthy. They exhibited a 
wrinkling and dark red color of the bronchial membrane, with ademic 
and hypostatic congestion, carnification, hepatization, and in two 
cases, gangrene. 

(An interesting anatomical illustration of this blending is observa- 
ble in the location and action of the serratus posticus superior, which 
rises from the cephalic region and runs in the cephalic and pulmonic 
zones, to act as an inspiratory muscle". It proceeds from the sixth, 
seventh, and eighth cervical, and first and second dorsal to the second 
third, fourth, and fifth ribs, beyond their angles, and therefore acts as 
inspiratory muscles for the upper part of the chest.) 

That the lower part of this thoracic region holds a close relation 
with the heart can easily be shown by experiment with the hand. 
Its effect is not exciting or agitating, but strengthening to the heart, 
and thereby rousing and invigorating to the whole constitution, but 
with rather less composure and tranquillity than by the pulmonic and 
cephalic regions. Sedative applications to this region will diminish 



CHAP. V.] .THE SPINAL REGION. IOI 

the activity of the heart. A galvanic current down the dorsal region 
will diminish its excitability and retard its pulsation, according to 
Althaus ; the current he used was that of from forty to sixty cells. 
The heart responds to influences from all parts of the brain and all 
parts of the body. In my experiments on the brain I have been able 
to produce all varieties of the pulse. 

The heart is not dependent on the thoracic region alone, for its 
chief ganglionic nerves come from the sympathetic ganglia in the 
neck, which are connected with the cervical region of the cord, and 
it is also influenced by the pneumogastric nerve (which serves to 
exercise a restraining power). Thus it seems that both cervical and 
upper dorsal regions sustain the heart — in other words, it is asso- 
ciated closely with our whole vital brain force, through the ganglia 
which simultaneously sustain the brain and the heart, thus making 
the neck pre-eminently a vital region — a region that links the cere- 
bral with the corporeal seat of life. 

A similar close association occurs in the spine, in which the ceph- 
alic and thoracic regions are adjacent — the latter combining the pul- 
monic and cardiac influences in close association. The five or six 
upper dorsal ganglia, forming a sort of plexus, supply filaments which 
run to the aorta and join the great mass of ganglionic nerves that 
sustain the heart, the second, third, and fourth ganglia supplying fila- 
ments to the posterior pulmonary plexus. The thoracic and abdomi- 
nal regions divide the spine between them nearly equally, the lower 
ganglia being abdominal. 

The ganglia and their nerves are the sources of the power that sus- 
tains the heart, and they have close associations with the cord from 
the base of the cranium to the middle of the dorsal region. They 
are also the sustaining power of the pulmonic region, although the 
pneumogastric is the chief source of the pulmonary plexuses, which 
also receive branches from the vertebral ganglion. 

But whatever the anatomical arrangement, the fact that the hand 
applied about the sixth dorsal vertebra energizes the heart is sufficient 
for therapeutic purposes. Dr. Steiner, of Vienna, has in several 
cases succeeded in resuscitating animals whose hearts had ceased to 
beat, by applying the positive pole to a needle at the heart, and the 
negative to the seventh intercostal space. This was in accordance 
with Sarcognomy. 

The lower dorsal region, which by its spinal nerves gives rigidity to 
the trunk, and by its ganglionic nerves sustains the chylopoietic 
organs, receives the name of Business Energy in our chart, as the ex- 
pression of its effect on character. Its impairment greatly diminishes 
the force of character. " In a case described by Dr. and Mr. Griffin, 



102 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

sudden insensibility was always induced by even slight pressure on 
the seventh or eighth dorsal vertebra. In another case a sense of faint- 
ness was engendered in the same way : " On examining the spinal 
cord, although there did not appear to be any tenderness, the sensa- 
tion of pain was excessively disagreeable to him throughout its whole 
course. When the finger rested on one of the dorsal vertebrae he 
grew pale and terrified, and would have fainted had the pressure been 
continued. He felt no pain, but a sudden indescribable sensation or 
thrill through every nerve in his frame, which was inconceivably hor- 
rid." (Murrell on Massage.) 

At the upper margin of the cephalic region the fifth cervical nerve 
sends off a branch to unite with the fourth in forming the phrenic, 
the great inspiratory nerve of the diaphragm (and auxiliary nerve of 
the heart and abdominal viscera), which is thus brought into con- 
nection with the brain, associating the action of the brain with phy- 
sical as well as spiritual inspiration — the association being completed 
by nerves from the vertebral ganglion to the phrenic, and branches 
from the seventh cervical, which go to the vertebral ganglion and also 
(according to Bell) generally supply filaments in company with the 
sixth to form the phrenic. Thus we perceive how closely the func- 
tional life of the brain is associated with the transmission of both life 
and oxygen to the body. Let us look closely again at the distribu- 
tion and relations of the phrenic nerve. 

In the interior of the chest, the phrenic nerve not only supplies 
the pleura costalis (with some help from the pneumogastric in the 
internal lamina), but supplies the mediastinum or most interior region 
which sympathizes with the interior and more spiritual region of the 
brain, near the falx, between the hemispheres, the activity of which 
stimulates inspiratory action. Our highest faculties invariably stimu- 
late inspiration in the upper portion of the chest. Thus the most 
superior part of the cephalic region of the spine seems to associate 
with inspiration and with the superior and interior regions of the 
brain, while its most inferior portion (according to the general laws of 
the nervous system) has an inferior function, as it sends off the first 
dorsal and last cervical nerves, by which the muscles and integuments 
of the hand are supplied. It is a beautiful illustration of the wise 
and ingenious plan of the human constitution that the cephalic power 
in the cord which is in relation to the high and interior regions of the 
brain — the channel of this higher influx of life, is also in relation 
with the inspiration vhich gives an influx of vital conditions to the 
body, making our compound life a possibility. 

The phrenic nerve also participates in the cardiac power. Oppo- 
site the third rib, it sends branches to the pericardium. It also sup- 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 103 

plies the right auricle of the heart and inferior vena cava ; and ex- 
periments on dogs and rabbits show that irritation of the phrenic 
puts the right auricle into contractile movement. 

Thus we see how closely the brain power and cephalic region of 
the cord are associated 1 with both circulation and respiration, and, in 
fact, with all the viscera, for the phrenic and pneumogastric nerves, 
the former from the middle cervical region, and the latter from the 
medulla oblongata in the cranium, convey to the brain the sensations 
of the abdominal as well as thoracic organs, and of their serous mem- 
branes, which are supplied by the phrenic. Thus we perceive a direct 
anatomical channel for the sympathies which we know to exist. 

The brain belongs not to the locomotive or active, but to the vis- 
ceral system, and it sympathizes with all the thoracic and abdominal 
viscera. Upon the lungs it depends for the vitalizing influence of 
red blood. Upon the abdominal organs it depends for the existence of 
the red blood, since they supply, through the thoracic duct, the digested 
material of the blood, and by their excretions they maintain its purity. 
Upon the kidneys it depends for the removal of narcotic and disturb- 
ing elements. 

The intercostal spinal nerves, which are from the dorsal tract, are 
combined with the ganglionic filaments in their distribution to the 
walls of the chest, and also to the diaphragm. (The latter distribu- 
tion is not usually mentioned in text-books of anatomy, and their 
description of the phrenic nerve is also defective.) Thus although the 
upper dorsal is the special pulmonic region, there is a respiratory 
influence through the whole dorsal tract, operating above through the 
intercostal or rib-lifting muscles, and below through the diaphragm 
and abdominal muscles, which latter are supplied from the lower dor- 
sal region and constitute the apparatus of expiration. The pulmonic, 
cardiac, cephalic and abdominal influences of the dorsal region are so 
important as to make it a dangerous location for disease. The 
"Cyclopedia of Practical Medicine " says : "It has been observed 
that the fatal termination is much more rapid when the dorsal region 
is the seat of disease." 

Let us then understand that while the upper dorsal region is the 
pulmonic and cardiac tract, the entire dorsal region is a respiratory 
tract, acting above by the ribs, and below by the abdominal muscles 
and diaphragm. And although the lungs and heart should be treated 
directly on the upper dorsal region, a cough, which involves the 
irritation of the expiratory abdominal muscles, has its immediate seat 
in the lower dorsal region, which controls the expiratory coughing 
muscles, and they depend much upon the irritability of that part of 
the cord. Hence, an embrocation or manipulation designed for the 



104 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

relief of a cough may be very properly applied on the lower dorsal 
region, for injuries or irritations of that region may produce a spinal 
irritability shown by coughing. In a case of fracture of the eleventh 
dorsal vertebra, and softening of that portion of the cord (reported by 
Brodie) a cough would be brought on by any slight change of posi- 
tion. 

It is quite interesting to find that the physiology of the dorsal 
region of the cord has been well illustrated in the electric experi- 
ments of Onimus arid Legros. In their forty-seventh experiment, 
the spinal cord of a dog was exposed at the third and fourth dorsal 
vertebrae, and divided. In the superior part of the divided cord an 
upper current increased the blood pressure as it stimulated the por- 
tion of the cord connected with the cervical ganglia, and the respira- 
tion became very deep. 

On the lower part of the divided cord a current from the cut end 
downward raised the pressure higher than the current through the 
upper part. A farad ic current through this lower part produced at 
once a rapid elevation of the blood pressure and a considerable fall 
as the excitability was exhausted, when the action of the heart sud- 
denly ceased. This appears to be a fair demonstration of the connec- 
tion of the lungs with the region above the fourth dorsal vertebrae 
and of the heart with the region just below. 

In a case of dislocation between the sixth and seventh vertebrae 
reported by M. Carassus in the " Gazette Medicale," it is stated that 
the pulse was feeble and frequent. The cord in this case was com- 
pressed by the sixth vertebra, and its posterior part at the junction 
was softened. There was complete paralysis below the injury. The 
mental faculties were clear ; death ensued in twenty-four hours. 

Injuries at the lower cervical vertebrae, below the sixth cervical, 
destroy all power either of inspiration or expiration, except by the 
diaphragm, controlled by the phrenic nerve, and by such assistance as 
mav be given bv the trapezius, serratus magnus anticus, and sterno- 
cleido-mastoid, in lifting the ribs— an assistance which is not very 
important and would not sustain life long. 

The diaphragm is not entirely disconnected from the spinal sys- 
tem, as it may be excited from the sixth, seventh, and eighth inter- 
costal spaces, by the hand and by electric currents. At the sixth, 
seventh, and eighth vertebrae, electric or nervaufic stimulation gives 
vigor to its action, but not the restless excitement which is produced 
at the lateral surface of the trunk. Its connection with the spine is 
through branches of the intercostal nerves, as described by Luschka, 
and indirectly through the ganglia and splanchnic nerves and the 
solar plexus. The dorsal ganglia are the vasomotor control of the 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 105 

intercostal arteries, which anastomose with the phrenic arteries, and 
they have direct communication with the phrenic nerve, through the 
great splanchnic and the ganglion diaphragmaticum, as well as a 
controlling influence on the diaphragm through the great splanchnic, 
solar plexus and phrenic plexus, the immediate agent of its organic life. 
The diaphragm, therefore, has a close relation to the spinal and gan- 
glionic regions between the sixth and tenth vertebrae, and we may 
therefore recognize a phrenic zone, extending as low as the solar plexus. 

The lower dorsal region has some other relations to the diaphragm, 
as the latter co-operates with the expiratory abdominal muscles, 
when it is necessary to compress the abdominal viscera, but not the 
lungs, as in vomiting or defecation, or if we wish to speak while 
engaged in laborious efforts. The great solar plexus, connected with 
the lower dorsal region, originates superiorly the phrenic plexus 
which goes to the diaphragm and phrenic artery, and communicates 
with the phrenic nerve. 

As the lower dorsal region contains the ganglia which emit the 
splanchnic nerves that pass down through the diaphragm and govern 
all the abdominal viscera, we perceive how abdominal irritations in 
any of the organs may disturb the lower dorsal region and become 
the cause of a cough or its aggravation, as is seen in a liver cough or 
stomach cough. Most generally, however, coughs begin in an irrita- 
tion of the lungs, which is conveyed by their sensitive nerve, the 
pneumogastric, to the medulla oblongata within the cranium, and if 
the irritation be sufficient, it is propagated downwards to the lower 
dorsal region, and produces the convulsive expiration which is called 
a cough. But before reaching that region it starts the phrenic nerve 
in the middle of the cervical region, and produces by it an act of 
inspiration by the diaphragm, and then in the upper dorsal region 
it starts the intercostal muscles, lifting the ribs, and as the chest 
expands, the irritation reaches the lower dorsal region and the cough 
or sneeze explodes by means of the abdominal muscles. 

Quieting anodynes, either by inhalation, by swallowing medicine, 
or by manipulation, diminish the irritability of the pneumogastric and 
the spine, and thus relieve the cough. As secretion generally dimin- 
ishes irritability and soothes the surfaces, expectorant remedies are 
in that way beneficial. 

The diaphragm, lying between the thoracic and abdominal cavities, 
must be in sympathy with the middle dorsal region. It is also in 
sympathy with the lumbar region, for the exercise of the latter in 
violent locomotion compels deep respiration. Respiration will there- 
fore be invigorated by faradic currents through the length of the spine. 
It may also be excited into greater activity by faradic currents from side 



106 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

to side at the lower margin of the ribs, while the same currents higher 
on the ribs will produce a more pleasant costal respiration. The 
lower level of the ribs produces the respiration of excitement and 
irritation. Currents through the phrenic zone or level of the dia- 
phragm stimulate respiration, but not in the most satisfactory or 
effective manner. 

The most effective way of forcing deep respiration — the one most to 
be relied on in cases of drowning, is by using the Sarcognomic organ of 
Respiration on the abdomen, placing an electrode about two inches 
below the umbilicus ; this will produce deep respiration by the 
diaphragm. If the negative pole on the hypogastric region produces 
too much local disturbance of the muscles, the positive may be sub- 
stituted, or the current may be sent through the hand as an elec- 
trode. One pole should be on the hypogastric region and the other 
on the lower cervical or junction of cervical and dorsal. The cur- 
rent in this case will correspond with the course of the phrenic 
nerve, and this is better than trying to reach the phrenic nerve at the 
side of the neck, or to stimulate through the phrenic zone.* 

As the brachial region or cervico-dorsal junction is the command- 
ing centre from which the respiratory impulse is sent, and gives it 
more force than any other location, the same principle is applicable 
to other functions, and the combination of this region of will power 
with any other seat of local functions will enhance the result, just as 
an energetic determination invigorates every act. A current from 
the cervico-dorsal centre enlists the full power of the spinal cord, and 
thus develops a maximum energy. It is true that a current from 
powerful central organs, if continued, will exhaust them and make it 
necessary to reinforce by a centripetal, hence for efficient action an 
alternating current which stimulates at both ends is best. The fara- 
dic is an alternating current, but its poles are not exactly equivalent, 
as they have in some degree a positive and negative character or 
influence. The alternating current of commutation, with the primary 
or magneto-galvanic current, is the most appropriate for vigorous 
stimulation. This I call the reciprocal current. Its application in 
cases of suspended animation, from the cervico-dorsal region to the 
region of vital force on the thigh, is very effective. 

The abdominal region on which I have located the respiratory 

impulse is the active agent in diaphragmatic respiration. Every 

inspiration, by descent of the diaphragm, throws out the Respiratory 

tract, and every expiration is performed by means of the abdominal 

muscles and an inward movement of the Respiratory region. 

* I have sometimes misled my pupils by a little absence of mind, diverting their 
attention locally and forgetting to impress the importance of the cervico-dorsal 
region, especially in reference to respiration. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 107 

That the inspiratory tract should be exterior to the expiratory cor- 
responds to the fact that in diaphragmatic or abdominal respiration 
the exterior portion of the abdomen is projected in inspiration, and 
withdrawn or depressed in expiration, while the central portion is 
relatively prominent in expiration. 

Leaving the upper dorsal half as the thoracic region (for lungs and 
heart) we should presume that the lower half must maintain relations 
with the regions below the diaphragm ; accordingly, we find that the 
spinal nerves of the lower half pass down over the ribs and distribute 
to the muscles and integuments of the abdominal walls, including 
the diaphragm, while the adjacent ganglia of the sympathetic system, 
sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth, send down through the dia- 
phragm the splanchnic nerves, which form the solar plexus, control- 
ling the abdominal viscera. The solar plexus comprises not only the 
ganglionic nerves, but branches from the pneumogastric and phrenic, 
especially of the right side. 

Hence, we apply the hand on the lower dorsal region for the 
invigoration of liver, pancreas, stomach, bowels, and kidneys. It is 
the most inferior of the dorsal ganglia (tenth, eleventh, and twelfth, 
or twelfth alone) which form the lesser splanchnic (ganglionic) nerve 
which supplies the kidneys (which are located at the bottom of the 
dorsal region) by forming the usual plexus. 

We understand the power of the solar plexus, formed by branches 
from the lower dorsal ganglia, when we look to its extensive ramifica- 
tions. It sends branches along the abdominal aorta and forms the 
subordinate controlling plexuses of the abdomen, viz., the phrenic, 
caeliac, gastric, hepatic, splenic, renal, supra-renal, superior and infe- 
rior mesenteric and spermatic plexuses, which supply the stomach, 
liver, spleen, pancreas, duodenum, intestines, testes, and ovaries. 

At the last vertebra of the dorsal region we find the ganglionic 
origin of the nerves of the kidneys and the kidneys themselves at 
the junction of the dorsal and lumbar vertebrae 

Thus the anatomical structure directs us to the lower half of the 
dorsal region for the treatment of the abdominal viscera generally — 
the kidneys being reached at the lower, and the liver at the upper 
vertebrae of this tract, their functions being also modified through 
the lumbar region. 

Although the locations of the ganglia and spinal nerves are a cor- 
rect guidance to locations of functions and methods of treatment, it 
is quite possible that the origins of functions in the spinal cord are 
materially higher than the nerves and ganglia by which they are 
manifested. Thus, according to Valentin, who has made the best 
illustrative experiments, contractions of the alimentary canal may be 



ioS 



THE SPINAL REGION. 



[CHAP. 



Corneal rertebrtz. 



produced by irritations of the roots of the dorsal, lumbar, and sacral 
nerves, or by the lower half of the thoracic ganglia, the lumbar and 
sacral ganglia, also by the splanchnic nerves and gastric plexus. 

However, muscular contractions of the stomach have been pro- 
duced by irritating the roots of the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh 
cervical nerves, and first dorsal, in the rabbit. The seventh nerve 
appeared to act on the pyloric end of the stomach. A similar effect 
was produced by irritating the first thoracic ganglia of the sympa- 
thetic. The first three cervical nerves and the adjacent ganglia 
acted on the oesophagus. We know also that the functions of the 
stomach are largely dependent on the origin of the pneumogastric in 
the medulla oblongata, as the pneumogastric controls the movements 
of the stomach, and has a controlling influence on the secretion of 
the gastric juice. 

In an ingenious work by Dr. Sherwood on the " Motive Power of 

Organic Life," 
published at New 
York in 1841, a 
chart was given il- 
lustrating a method 
of diagnosis by 
pressure along the 
spinal column, find- 
ing a tenderness at 
various points cor- 
responding to mor- 
bid conditions of 
organs. This chart 
would indicate that 
the sensitive points 
along the spinal 
column are some- 
what h i gh e r in 
location than the nervous origins to which I have referred as a guide 
in Sarcosnomy. The explanation probably is that nerves are affected 
bv irritations above their origins. Their connections may extend 
higher than they can be traced. Dr. T. F. Beck has traced the 
splanchnic nerves as far up as the first dorsal ganglia. 
The above is Dr. Sherwood's drawing. 

Experiments in vivisection illustrate the physiology of the abdom- 
inal region. After section of the splanchnic nerves, a gentle faradic 
current applied to their peripheral end has caused increased action 
of the intestines. 



Dorsal V6rtebrte. 



<h coccyx. 




Her* to find them of 
ibe kidneys. 



Aod here to fiod 
them of the gemul 
organs. 



Valentine found that the galvanization of the 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. I(X) 

superior thoracic ganglia revived the pulsation of the heart after it 
had ceased, and increased the frequency of the beats when already 
in action. Mild galvanization of the splanchnic nerves that arise 
from the six lower dorsal ganglia of the sympathetic increases, while 
strong galvanization diminishes, the peristaltic action." 

It was formerly believed, and even supposed to be proved by 
experiments, that gastric digestion depends entirely on the pneumo- 
gastric nerve, although it is well known to be almost wholly a sen- 
sory nerve at its origin, and the digestive function has reappeared in 
the stomach after section of the pneumogastric, when time has been 
allowed to recover from the immediate effects of the injury. More- 
over, the irritated secretions produced in the stomach by a poison 
appeared the same when the pneumogastric nerves had been divided 
as when they were whole. This was evidently under the control of 
the sympathetic or ganglionic nerves, which proceed from the lower 
dorsal ganglia to the solar plexus, and are combined with spinal fila- 
ments. Hence it is through that route we reach the stomach — the 
nerve tracts in which electric experiments demonstrate the control 
of intestinal movements. 

The relation of the lower dorsal region to the abdominal organs 
was illustrated in a fact mentioned by Sir James Sawyer, in the 
" Lancet" (January I, 1887), that a certain variety of backache is 
attributable to the condition of the colon. It is "a pain, aching dull 
and heavy," " extending right across the back," " in a transverse line 
about half-way between the inferior angles of the scapulae and the 
renal region." "This pain I venture to attribute to a loaded colon," 
"faecal accumulation in the large intestine," "I have found it disap- 
pear after the exhibition of an efficient cathartic," "this form of back- 
ache is a concomitant of habitual constipation." He found it 
relieved by a pill containing one, two, or three grains of Socotrine 
aloes, combined with one fourth grain of sulphate of iron and one 
grain of extract of hyosciamus. (I would remark that belladonna 
would be even better than hyosciamus as an adjuvant and corrigent 
of aloes, assisting evacuation but preventing irritation. A fourth of 
a grain would be a sufficient dose.) 

In treating the lower section of the dorsal region for the viscera 
we influence also the regions supplied by its spinal nerves, viz., the 
muscles and integuments of the abdomen — the transverse oblique 
and rectus muscles, by which the abdominal viscera are kept in 
motion and their contents compressed, and by which the actions of 
coughing, vomiting and defecation are performed. Sir Benjamin 
Brodie relates that in a case of injury of the spinal column at the 
sixth dorsal vertebra, the muscles of the abdomen were paralyzed 



110 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

and unable to co-operate in expiration ; hence coughing was impos- 
sible. 

As the lower dorsal region for the abdomen supplies muscular 
power for its motion, so the upper dorsal region for the thorax sup- 
plies power for its action by the intercostal inspiratory muscles, and 
also moves the pectoralis major. 

From this review it is apparent that the upper portion of the spinal 
cord tends to sustain the growth of the head and chest, and to expand 
the lungs, while the lower portion, developing the abdominal viscera 
and the lower part of the body, tends also by expiration to contract 
the development of the lungs and chest, and co-operates with the 
basilar organs. In all great muscular struggles the abdominal mus- 
cles are strongly contracted. In emotional character the thoracic 
region co-operates with the higher impulses and principles, and in 
growth it co-operates with the brain. Hence we draw the practical 
conclusion that increase of thoracic development is of the greatest 
importance in hygienic and moral culture, and that mountain regions 
or elevated plains produce a higher and more intellectual develop- 
ment of humanity as they cause a greater expansion of the chest. 

In the lumbar region, the ganglia go to supply the lumbar plexus 
of the spinal system and also to the aortic plexus, which controls 
important arteries and plexuses and brings them into connection with 
the solar plexus. 

The spinal lumbar plexus, formed by the lumbar nerves and the 
last dorsal, constitutes the chief motor power of the thighs, and by 
its lowest nerve, the lumbo-sacral, exercises an important control over 
the reproductive organs. 

Thus it appears that the lumbar region has, through plexuses, an 
important control of the inferior portion of the alimentary canal, and 
the abdominal region of the spinal column extends from the middle 
of the dorsal region to the sacrum. Its lower portion is called the 
cauda eqznna (horse tail), as the trunk of the spinal cord does not 
usually extend below the second lumbar vertebra. 

These propositions are illustrated by pathological and experimental 
facts. Brachet divided the spinal column of a dog between the third 
and fourth lumbar vertebrae. He kept him two days and fed him. 
Neither faeces nor urine was discharged — they accumulated in large 
quantity. He kept a young cat seven days after severing the spinal 
cord between the third and fourth lumbar vertebrae, and fed it as 
usual. The rectum and bladder became enormously distended, and 
a small portion only of faeces and urine escaped. In the case of a 
man whose spinal column had been fractured by a fall from a high 
tree, the lower limbs, rectum, and bladder were paralyzed and had to 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. Ill 

be relieved mechanically, while he had no feeling of the necessity for 
evacuation. 

Division of the spinal cord of the dog below the fifth lumbar verte- 
bra destroys the power of the sphincter of the bladder, producing 
incontinence of urine. According to Budge, division at the fourth 
lumbar in the dog causes the bladder to become filled and distended, 
but does not affect the sphincter. He locates the genito-spinal cen- 
tre in the dog at the fourth lumbar. The ano-spinal centre is located 
by Masius at the lower third of the fifth lumbar vertebra. Excita- 
tion of the third and fourth sacral nerves causes contraction of the 
sphincter, while section of the roots of the third, fourth, and fifth 
sacral nerves produced incontinence. After section of the third and 
fourth sacral the bladder could not be made to act by irritating 
either sympathetic or the upper portion of the cord. The lumbar 
region of the cord controls the relaxation of the sphincter of the 
bladder. 

The relation of the lumbar region to the vital forces may be illustrated by refer- 
ence to the anatomy of the lumbar nerves, of which the posterior branches supply 
the lumbar and gluteal regions as far as the head of the thigh-bone (trochanter) 
and the erector spinae and interosseous muscles. 

The anterior or principal branches are five, increasing in importance as we 
descend. The second is about twice as large as the first, and the third twice as 
large as the second. The fourth is larger than the third, and the fifth larger than 
the fourth, from which, with the aid of the fourth, originates the important lumbo- 
sacral nerve. 

The lumbar region is accessible to treatment from the dorsal region, or ribs, to 
the sacral region, or hips; the anterior nerves just mentioned form the lumbar 
plexus, which by its spinal nerves and its ganglionic connections supplies the 
lower abdominal region externally, and internally the genital region, thighs, and a 
portion of the legs. 

i. The first nerve gives off the ilio-hypogastric and ilio-inguinal (sometimes the 
ilio-hypogastric alone). Their names indicate their distribution. They pass over 
the ilium (hip-bone), the ilio-hypogastric going to the buttocks (the skin over the 
glutei muscles), and the hypogastric branch to the integuments of the hypogastric 
region (the lower part of the abdomen). It also gives muscular filaments to the 
lower part of the abdominal muscles and to the iliacus, situated interiorly, which 
lifts the thigh or lowers the trunk. The ilio-inguinal passes through the trans- 
versalis muscle of the abdomen, through inguinal region and external abdominal 
ring, to the integuments of the scrotum, the spermatic cord, the pubic and labial 
surfaces, and the upper, inner surface of the thighs. Thus we perceive that the 
first lumbar nerve has some association with the sexual region. 

2. The second lumbar nerve gives off the genito-crural or external pudic, assisted 
by a branch from the first. This genital branch supplies the spermatic cord, the 
cremaster muscle and investments of the testis, and in the female the round liga- 
ment and external labium. It supplies also the integuments of the groin and the 
lower border of two of the abdominal muscles. This illustrates the association of 
the groin and the sexual functions. 

The crural branches of the genito-crural, passing down with the external iliac 
artery, go to the integument of the front of the thigh, half-way to the knee. Thus 
through the genito-crural and ilio-inguinal, which are close neighbors in distribu- 
tion, the upper anterior and inner surface of the thigh is associated with the sexual 
functions, and this group of sexual and upper crural influences belongs to the space 
corresponding to the upper half of the lumbar region, where we find also the sensi- 
bility of the posterior surfaces. 

The second nerve, with some assistance from the third, also gives branches to 
the psoas muscle and originates the external cutaneous, which sometimes comes 
from the third and fourth. It passes out under Poupart's ligament in front of the 
ilium, to distribute along the outer and exterior posterior aspect of the thigh as far 



fI2 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

as the knee, passing over the tensor vaginae and vastus externus muscles — a region 
associated with great muscular energy. 

The external cutaneous also sends a posterior branch to the buttock and upper 
part of the thigh. 

3. From the second, third, and fourth in combination originates the chief nerve 
of the lumbar plexus, the a?iterior crural or femoral nerve, the chief muscular nerve 
of the thigh, supplying the muscles and integuments of its anterior and inner side. 
It supplies the vastus externus, vastus internus, rectus and crureus, pectineus and 
sartorius, and sends the long saphenous nerve (which accompanies the femoral 
artery and then the saphena vein), supplies the knee joint, and below the knee the 
anterior and inner border of the tibia and dorsum of the foot. In other words, it 
supplies the large muscles of the fore part of the thigh, which are much larger than 
the posterior muscles (excepting the tensor vaginae and sometimes the pectineus), 
and gives nerves to the psoas magnus and iliacus internus. (The psoas muscle 
bends the trunk upon the pelvis.) 

From the third and fourth descends the obturator nerve, which belongs chiefly 
to the adductor muscles that bring the thighs together. It supplies the adductors 
magnus longus and brevis, gracilis, external obturator, and sometimes the pecti- 
neus. It also supplies the hip joint and posteriorly the knee. 

From this review it appears that the sexual region has some association with the 
upper lumbar nerves, but that their functions become more simply muscular and 
sensitive in the lower lumbar region until we reach the last, the lumbosacral nerve, 
where the sexual functions reappear in force and continue into the sacral region. 

The lumbar plexus gives the nerve-power for the muscles and 
integuments of the thigh, with only a slight influence on the abdomi- 
nal muscles at their lower margin, from the nerves nearest the dorsal 
region, which have some connection with the sexual integuments 
and functions. There is, however, in the whole lumbar zone of the 
trunk, the vascular nerve-power (vaso-motor) of the whole alimentary 
canal, and when we operate on the lumbar region we influence all 
the abdominal viscera. We know this experimentally, and when we 
look for the anatomical reasons they are very apparent in the gan- 
glionic nerves, as the upper lumbar vertebra is opposite the solar 
plexus, which governs through the blood-vessels by its subordinate 
plexuses the whole abdominal and pelvic apparatus. Hence the hand 
applied at the junction of the dorsal and lumbar vertebrae, adjacent 
to the solar plexus and the end of the trunk of the spinal cord from 
which the lumbar and sacral nerves descend, covers a great centre of 
power for both the voluntary animal and the involuntary organic life. 
The lumbar enlargement of the cord extends through the twelfth 
and eleventh dorsal vertebras. The lumbar region also sends out 
four or five lumbar arteries at each side, which curve around the ver- 
tebrae and supply the walls of the abdomen, as the intercostal arteries 
from the dorsal region supply the walls of the chest. The lumbar 
arteries also supply the adjacent portion of the back and spinal 
column, including the spinal cord. 

The entire vascular circulating power of the abdomen is adjacent 
to the lumbar vertebrae. The iliac arteries for the lower limbs and 
pelvis bifurcate opposite the fourth lumbar vertebra, and from that 
locality to the upper end of the lumbar vertebrae we find, first, the 
caeliac plexus and artery supplying the stomach, liver, and spleen, by 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. I 1 3 

its three branches, — the superior mesenteric plexus and artery sup- 
plying the small intestines and half the colon, the inferior mesenteric 
plexus and artery supplying the remainder of the colon and the rec- 
tum, and between the two mesenteric arteries, the spermatic. 

The lumbar ganglia send branches to the aortic plexus (a continua- 
tion of the solar), which originates the inferior mesenteric and part of 
spermatic, and terminates in the hypogastric, to which the lumbar 
ganglia also send branches. The hypogastric is especially the plexus 
of the sexual organs. 

Hence, although the nerve power of the abdomen connects with 
the lower dorsal region, the lumbar region is equally important, as 
influences applied to the lumbar region affect everything from the 
diaphragm to the end of the rectum (the diaphragm included), 
through the arteries, and the ganglia and plexuses which control the 
circulation and organic life of all the abdominal organs. Moreover, 
the organs themselves are opposite the lumbar region, the stomach 
being opposite the first two lumbar vertebrae, the duodenum opposite 
the third, and the mesentery and umbilicus opposite the fourth. On 
the same level we find the mesenteric glands tributary to nutrition, 
and the receptaculum chyli adjacent to the second lumbar. The 
liver alone has a higher location, being opposite the last two dorsal 
vertebras. Hence we reach the liver, stomach, spleen and pancreas 
at the junction of the dorsal and lumbar vertebrae, and hold the 
nutrient absorption between our hands when one is applied above the 
umbilicus and the other at the two upper lumbar vertebrae. As the 
lumbar region contains the chief motor power of the lower limbs, 
there must be a close connection of the bowels and the muscles of 
the thigh, which is evinced in the tendency of sedentary pursuits to 
promote constipation, and the prompt effect of walking in renewing 
a diarrhoea or cholera which has been arrested and which can be kept 
in check only by lying down. 

The lumbo- sacral, much the largest of the lumbar nerves, comes 
from the fifth nerve and a branch of the fourth. It enters the pelvis, 
and, joining the first sacral nerve, it becomes a part of the sacral 
plexus, which is thus constituted by the last two lumbar and four 
sacral nerves. The lumbo-sacral, being an important nerve, its origin 
is probably a chief source of the sexual energy coming from the sacral 
plexus. Near the lumbo-sacral nerve we find the internal iliac artery, 
which supplies the sexual region, by pubic, pudic, uterine, vaginal, 
vesical, and hemorrhoidal branches. 

The third and fourth sacral nerves, by their anterior branches, 
combine with the adjacent ganglionic nerves, and go to the hypo- 
gastric plexus of the sympathetic system, which controls the sexual 
functions. ■ 



114 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

As my external nervauric experiments showed the junction of the 
lumbar vertebras and sacrum to be the chief seat of the sexual func- 
tion, it is interesting to observe that the sexual functions have 
sources above and below the lumbo-sacral junction (the lumbar nerves 
above this point have a connection with the sexual apparatus, the 
external pudic or genito-crural arising from the second lumbar nerve), 
- and that anatomy evidently indicates the lumbo-sacral region as the 
chief source of the sexual functions, the derangements of which, 
it is well known, are commonly manifested by pain or tenderness at 
the lumbo-sacral junction. 

Longet and Breschet regard the lumbar portion of the spinal cord 
as the nervous centre of control for uterine action, but it is not cer- 
tain whether the major portion of the sexual functions depends on the 
spinal or on the adjacent ganglionic structure, as the division of the cord 
in the middle of the lumbar region of a bitch by Brachet did not prevent 
an impregnation soon after, and he also states that impregnation 
occurred in a woman in whom paraplegia was so complete that she had 
no sensation in the sexual act. This, however, would make no mate- 
rial difference in nervauric treatment, as the operations on the spine 
affect the adjacent sympathetic region. 

The lumbo-sacral sends off a branch to the glutei muscles, which 
have in consequence an association with the sexual function, known 
to voluptuaries ; and the lower lumbar ganglia, by their connection 
with the aortic and hypogastric plexuses, are in close relation to the 
sexual functions. Moreover, the lumbo-sacral junction is adjacent 
to the origin of the internal iliac artery, which supplies the whole 
pelvic viscera, and faradization of the lower lumbar region acts most 
efficiently upon the bladder. 

The sacral plexus thus, by its downward extension, brings the leg 
and foot and posterior region of the thigh into close association with 
the pelvic viscera (especially the sexual organs), which are supplied 
by its anterior or internal branches. These internal branches are the 
hemorrhoidal, vesical, vaginal, uterine, and pudic, going to the pelvis 
and perineum, their names indicating their destinations — the regions 
of the rectum, bladder, and sexual organs. The vesical or bladder 
nerves supply filaments also to the vesiculae seminales, prostate gland, 
and female urethra. The pudic nerve is the chief nerve of the geni- 
tal organs, and comes chiefly from the third sacral. The continuation 
of the lumbo-sacral in the first sacral nerve produces under stimula- 
tion the flexion of the leg, foot, and toes.* 

* The sacral nerves give branches posteriorly to the sacro-lumbalis muscles and 
integuments of the nates and anal region. The lumbo-sacral and first four sacral 
nerves unite in forming the sacral plexus, which is rather a large nerve than a 
plexus. This plexus, adjacent to the rectum, sends off two great nerves — the greater 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. I I 5 

The last lumbar and the third and fourth sacral nerves send 
branches to the Jiypogastric plexus, which is the chief immediate con- 
trol of the sexual apparatus. The external sexual locality therefore 
for Sarcognomy should be the lumbo-sacral junction and space 
extending above and below it, and the entire lumbar and sacral 
regions may be regarded as having sexual influences, through the 
surfaces at and around the sexual organs, and by connections with 
the hypogastric plexuses. Moreover, we find opposite the superior 
lumbar vertebrae the spermatic arteries, a source of sexual power, as 
they supply the male testes and the female ovaries. (In birds, the 
kidneys and supra-renal capsules lie in contact with the testes and 
the ovaries, and in man the testes in the embryonic condition are near 
the kidneys.) 

The hypogastric plexus is formed from the sacral ganglia, aided by 
the third and fourth sacral spinal nerves, and the inferior mesenteric 
plexuses with which it connects. This is especially the sexual plexus, 
as it follows and controls the arterial supply of blood to the sexual 
organs. 

It is difficult in such a commingling of nerves, where the sexual 
powers are reinforced from different sources — from the upper and 
■lower lumbar and sacral regions, to fix upon its chief centre anatomi- 
cally ; but nervauric experiments and the principles of Pathognomy 
direct us to the lumbo-sacral location as its commanding centre at the 
spine, as the sexual organs themselves are the immediate seat of the 
functional energy and excitement. In this matter, as in all other 
developments of Sarcognomy, I have followed experiment without 
regard to anatomy — only looking to it afterwards to see that it gave 
no incompatible facts. As to the lumbo-sacral junction, anatomy and 
physiological experiments confirm the nervauric discovery, showing 
the lumbo-sacral junction to be the sexual centre, although the dis- 
tribution of nerves might have led to a different opinion. 

Budge, who discovered the cilio-spinal centre (governing the iris), 
" has discovered a similar centre in that portion of the spinal cord 
which corresponds to the fourth lumbar vertebra. By faradization of 

and lesser sciatic nerves. The great sciatic, the largest nerve in the body, is the con- 
tinuation of the sacral plexus, deriving filaments from all the nerves that supply the 
plexus. The great sciatic supplies the obturator internus, the gluteus, and the flexor 
muscles of the thigh, the adductor magnus, biceps, and external rotators and exter- 
nal surface of the ham, and sends down an important continuation, the popliteal or 
posterior tibial, which ends in the external and internal plantar, and becomes the 
chief nerve of the muscles and integuments of the leg and foot. It supplies the in- 
teguments of the leg, and the gastrocnemius, plantaris, popliteus, and soleus mus- 
cles, also the tibialis posticus and long flexors, and the ankle and the sole of the 
foot. The plantar nerves supply the muscles of the foot. 

The smaller sciatic nerve supplies the gluteus maximus and gracilis, and the in- 
teguments of the upper and posterior aspect of the thigh to the knee, and supplies 
some filaments to the flexor muscles. 



Il6 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

the same, powerful contractions of the vasa deferentia, the bladder, 
and the lower portion of the rectum are caused. The same effects 
are produced by stimulating a small ganglion, situated in the neighbor- 
hood of the fifth lumbar vertebra, and which receives branches from 
the third and fourth lumbar nerves. This ganglion Budge has called 
the genito-spinal ganglion" 

Dr. Beard has also observed the influence of this region. He says : 
"If a strong current can be applied over the lower portion of the 
spine, between the upper borders of the ossa innominata, a slight sen- 
sation is sometimes, though by no means uniformly, communicated to 
the rectum and the male genital apparatus, the penis and the testicles, 
through the spinal nerve-supply." 

Still more remarkable is the mingling of the locomotive and sexual 
powers in the spinal system. The lumbar region, chiefly for the thigh, 
and the sacral region, chiefly for the leg (and posterior of the thigh), 
are the sources of the sexual powers, which thus arise from the midst 
of the greatest physical force. Hence, in their maturity, they develop 
or sustain the greatest energy, as we see in the contrast between 
the sound and the emasculated animal. The active life, which develops 
the greatest muscular energy, also develops the greatest virile force, 
and hence population is not checked by the struggles of poverty so 
much as by the indolence of wealth. 

The consociation of virility and the more turbulent energies cor- 
responds with the usual course of nature. The season of sexual love 
among most animals is a season of restless energy and often of fierce 
combat. Among men it is the source not onfy of social animation 
but of a great deal of turbulent lawlessness, jealousy, and violence. 
The impetuous lover fights all rivals or obstacles, and sometimes when 
disappointed is ready to murder the woman who has rejected him and 
terminate his own life in his blind fury. The sacral region is a region 
of insane tendencies and of great force. 

The sexual power which belongs to the spinal system, and which is 
an aggressive impulse, is distinct from the sexual sensibility and 
excitability which belong to the sexual organs, the influence of which, 
intemperately used, tends to debility and exhaustion. Both belong to 
the lower end of the trunk, which antagonizes the head and summit 
of the chest, according to the law of antagonism which is a fundamen- 
tal principle of Biology. 

The lower limbs are especially antipodal to the brain, and in this 
they coincide with the excretions of the pelvis. 

The foot is the most thoroughly anti-cephalic region, with the 
strongest tendency toward sleep or coma, and it is dependent upon 
the sacral plexus through its continuation, the great sciatic nerve. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 11/ 

The sacral plexus is in close relation with the fecal and urinary matters 
which depress the nervous system. The foot, under the influence of 
warmth, is effective in subduing the brain to sleep, and under the 
influence of fatigue from prolonged walking lowers all the cerebral 
powers. 

It would then seem probable that the pelvic distributions of nerves 
from the sacral plexus should have a similar anti-cephalic and lethargic 
character, and in fact we find in the pelvis the influences most hos- 
tile to cephalic integrity, tending to develop every form of hysteria, 
coma, paralysis, dementia, and insanity. 

The pelvic region receives the dead substance rejected from all the 
organs — devitalized, benumbing, debilitating. The solid waste of 
the body comes to the colon and rectum, the fluid waste comes by the 
kidneys and ureters to the bladder. The urea thus discharged is a 
narcotic element, torpefying to the brain, and we find in the pelvic 
region at the mons veneris a tendency to lethargy and coma similar 
to that which, on the head, appears under the jaw just above the 
larynx — a quality manifested not only in cerebral disorders, but in 
the manner, when largely developed, as was seen in Mr. Webster, in 
whom, notwithstanding his great development of brain, there was an 
extreme dullness and slowness of mental action, quite a contrast to 
that of Mr. Clay and Mr. Calhoun. 

The explanation of this lethargic tendency at the mons veneris, 
which quite surprised me when I discovered it, is found in the narco- 
tic character of the contents of the bladder behind the mons. It is a 
curious coincidence that the pubic region in question receives nerves 
(the ilio-scrotal or ilio-inguinal branch) from the musculo-cutaneous, a 
branch of the first lumbar nerve, which is in close proximity to the 
kidney from which the narcotic element takes its departure. The 
ilio-scrotal supplies the skin of the pubis, penis, scrotum, and female 
labia. The nerve is thus at each end in relation with narcotic 
impressions. 

The lower pelvic region is the region of insanity and all forms of 
mental and cerebral degeneracy — that is, predominant irritations 
and excitements in that region produce all forms of cerebral derange- 
ment. 

How nearly parallel these forms of cerebral disorder of pelvic ori- 
gin are to the forms of mental degradation produced in connection 
with parts below the knee I will not discuss at present. 

We have now hastily surveyed the spinal column, the repository of 
vital forces of the body energized by an influx from the brain above. 
We perceive that from its summit, which co-operates with the brain 
and summit of the lungs, to its lower end devoted to the legs, it is a 



I iS THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

collocation of unitized forces, acting on the different segments of the 
body by its voluntary spinal nerves, by the adjacent ganglia, and by 
the blood-vessels those ganglia control, thus determining all activity 
and all growth. 

The nervauric healer, with these principles impressed on his mind, 
will give more attention to the spinal region than to any other portion 
of the body. 

The instant control of the spinal cord over all parts of the body 
renders it the channel of all sympathies, as we perceive when the 
cooling of one hand or foot has a cooling influence on the other, 
which was illustrated by the experiment of Dr. James J. Putnam on 
frogs, in which electrization of one foot produced contractions of the 
blood-vessels of the web of the opposite foot, and by the experiment 
in which Brown-Sequard showed that pinching one arm caused a fall 
of temperature in the opposite arm through its effect on the cervical 
spine. 

Correlation and Combination of Functions. 

Notwithstanding the distinct specification of the several regions 
of the spinal cord which has been shown, we cannot speak of these 
as distinctly separate and isolated regions, for every organ is in some 
way related to other portions of the cord than the region of its spinal 
control, and all inferior organs depend upon the immediate superior 
tract, through which communication is maintained with the brain 
and its continuations. Van Kempen found that a longitudinal sec- 
tion in the middle of the spinal cord, along the fifth, sixth, and seventh 
cervical vertebrae, in dogs and rabbits produced a partial paralysis in 
the posterior limbs, seeming to indicate that nervous fibres for the 
lower limbs decussated in the cervical region. (This experiment 
illustrates the galvano-tonic contractions of Remak, who excited con- 
tractions in the anterior limbs by galvanizing the posterior. ) 

It is an interesting coincidence that the region of the brain, at the 
posterior part of the sagittal suture, which corresponds- to the cervico- 
dorsal region, is recognized by recent experimenters in vivisection 
as the seat of controlling power for the posterior limbs. 

Pathologists might be puzzled to account for paralysis in the lower 
limbs by affections in the cervical region, which this experiment 
would explain. It also adds to our knowledge of the commanding- 
importance of the cephalic region in controlling everything below it. 
The regions of the neck through which we excite the lower limbs in 
acting on the brain, are closely associated with the cervical region 
that controls the upper limbs. The crural region of the brain is 
marked on the neck, through which we reach it, close to the brachial 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. I IQ 

region of the spine, the source of the brachial plexus, and the upper 
and lower limbs are curiously parallel in their psychic relations, but 
in higher and lower spheres. 

Anatomy further illustrates the commingling of functions by the 
fact that spinal nerves are not limited in their connection to the spot 
where they appear to unite with the cord. wSensory nerves, when 
they unite with the cord, run a little way up or down, or in both 
directions, and then cross to connect with the opposite side and carry 
out the general law of decussation. We know not how far the fila- 
ments pass before effecting their connection with some ganglion-like 
substance as their origin. 

The heart not only responds to the upper dorsal region, but by its 
intimate dependence on the three cervical ganglia is brought into 
close relation with the brain and the cervical region of the cord, which 
associates with these ganglia. Moreover, it has close relations with 
the third, fourth, and fifth cervical nerves, the origin of the phrenic, 
by the phrenic distributions which supply the pericardium and the 
vena cava. The right phrenic goes to the lower vena cava and the 
adjacent portion of the right auricle, while the lower vena cava and 
contiguous portion of the right auricle are supplied from the mixed 
phrenic and ganglionic nerves of the diaphragmatic plexus. Irritations 
of the phrenic nerve have produced contractions of the right auricle 
and diaphragm in dogs. It is clear, therefore, that both inspiration 
and circulation depend upon the cervical region, and are not so much 
centralized in the medulla oblongata as commonly supposed. The 
phrenic nerve communicates extensively with the branches of the 
middle and inferior cervical ganglia, the motor ganglia of the heart, 
and supplies the pericardium from its branches opposite the third rib, 
and also from its ramifications at the diaphragm. Moreover, the 
costal pleura (a portion of which is in the precordia over the heart) 
is supplied with its sensibility by the phrenic nerve, and thus con- 
nected with the middle cervical region. This region was intimately 
concerned, as well as the pericardium, in the faradization by which 
Duchenne roused the action of the heart. 

Again, the heart has some connections with the lower dorsal region, 
for the solar plexus, originated by the splanchnic nerves coming from 
the sixth to the tenth dorsal ganglia, sends up branches through the 
diaphragm to the pericardium, by the diaphragmatic plexus. 

The pulmonic and cardiac regions lie together in the cord, and the 
lungs are supplied largely by the pneumogastric nerve, which also 
supplies the pulmonary pleura, and is the great sensitive nerve of the 
thoracic cavity, the sensitive excitation of which is so subduing to the 
heart. Thus the heart is in relation to pulmonic sensibility and the 



120 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

origin of the pneumogastric at the medulla oblongata, as the moder- 
ator of its action. The influence of the viscera is subduing or soft- 
ening, while that of the spinal column is invigorating. The anterior 
central portion of the chest, corresponding with the anterior portion 
of the cerebrum and identified with the pneumogastric nerve, has the 
subduing influence which is shown in our experiments on the brain, 
and in the stimulation of the pneumogastric nerve, while the spinal 
column, like its associate posterior region of the brain, gives to tlie 
heart its various forms of energetic action. 

Adjacent to the four upper dorsal vertebrae we find the recurrent 
laryngeal nerves — the left rising lower than the right, — beneath the 
aortic arch, which ascend to the larynx, and are associated with the 
cervical ganglionic nerves. Hence, through this region comes the 
power of the voice, and the power of closing the larynx firmly, which 
comes into play when we exert our maximum strength. The voice 
is the most spiritual of all the physical powers of the body, and it 
comes through the cephalic region, as it comes through the power of 
the spinal accessory nerve to the recurrent laryngeal, and the spinal 
accessory rises by several roots above the seventh cervical, and partly 
from the medulla oblongata, which is probably the real source of the 
vocal power. In this region also, we have the descending branches 
of the pneumogastric, which join the cardiac plexus and give sensi- 
bility and sedative relaxing influences to the heart, as well as the 
anterior and posterior pulmonary plexuses, the latter joined by the 
nerves from the third and fourth dorsal ganglia, and going to supply 
the substance of the lungs, which are partly supplied from the cardiac 
as well as the pulmonary plexuses ; in which we see a further illustra- 
tion of the combination of cardiac and pulmonary energies, and their 
joint relation to the pneumogastric nerves and the upper section of 
the cord. 

Again, the cervical ganglia which control and sustain the heart are 
at the same time the regulators of the brain, determining the amount 
of circulation in its anterior and posterior regions and in the spinal 
cord ; and, as the brain demands a larger supply of blood, or the 
muscles demand more power, they start an increased cardiac energy 
to supply the demands created by the passions ; but when the gentler 
emotions demand peace, their responsive region (the upper pulmon- 
ary) rouses the pneumogastric nerve, tranquillizing and relaxing the 
heart. 

The heart is closely related to the diaphragm, to which it is so 
closely situated, and their controlling regions in the brain and cord 
are so closely connected as to insure their co-operation. The same 
exertion or passion which accelerates the pulse also increases the 
action of the diaphragm. 



CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 121 

The entire study of this subject illustrates the supreme location 
of life in the brain and the cephalic portion of the spine and trunk 
which control and contain the heart. The location of life in our 
supreme psychic organ enables us to understand how easily it may 
be sustained or reinforced by psychic power. 

The lack of definite limitation in the nerve-supply of organs is 
apparent in all parts of the cord. The splanchnic nerves for the 
abdomen are connected no higher than the sixth dorsal ganglia, but 
their fibres may be traced up as high as the third or the first, thus 
giving the abdominal region a nervous association with the lungs, 
heart, and brain. In the sexual apparatus not only do we trace a definite 
anatomical connection (verified by nervauric experiment) between 
the sexual organs and the sacral region and lumbo-sacral junction, 
but we find an important influence in the lumbar region, as the 
genito-crural nerve arises from the second lumbar, and the lumbar 
ganglia go to form the lumbar, aortic, and hypogastric plexuses, 
which control the pelvic viscera ; and we observe that the spermatic 
arteries which supply the testes and ovaries originate at the head of 
the lumbar region, controlled by the spermatic plexus, which, derived 
chiefly from the renal, is thus connected with the lowest dorsal 
region, which originates the minor splanchnic nerve, the source of 
the renal plexuses. Hence we speak of the genito-urinary organs, 
which are anatomically connected. 

Thus in the intricate machinery of life there are so many forces 
brought to bear upon every organ, to stimulate, to modify, or to 
arrest its action, that if we were not guided by a comprehensive phil- 
osophy and an exact knowledge of the dominant laws, we might fall 
into serious mistakes. 

In localizing the source of any function we locate the more impor- 
tant source of action and not an isolated concentration of the entire 
power. The nervauric physician should understand the relation of 
each organ to the entire nervous system. 

Finally, it may be asked, how do the facts of anatomy coincide with 
the localities of Sarcognomy ? There must be a coincidence, as two 
classes of facts cannot be in collision. Sarcognomy does not affirm 
an isolation or separation of influences. Every location on the brain 
or body, though it may influence one function in a greater degree 
than others, is not limited thereby, but exerts in various degrees 
modifying influences on other functions, assisting the neighboring 
and checking the most remote. 

The nerve forces of the heart and lungs are inextricably mingled 
with each other, both in the ganglia and plexuses near the heart and 
in those along the spine, and even the lower dorsal region has rela- 



122 



THE SPINAL REGION. 



[CHAP. V. 



tions to the heart. The heart and aorta confront the entire tract 
from the second to the tenth dorsal vertebra, the body of the heart 
occupying the space from the fourth to the tenth vertebra, and the 
arch of the aorta corresponding to the second and third vertebra. 
The trunk of the aorta extends down to the fourth lumbar vertebra, 
dividing then into the iliac arteries that supply the pelvis and lower 
limbs. Hence the nervauric influence of the hand may reach the 
heart at any point from the third to the tenth vertebra in conse- 
quence of its proximity, and that influence would be specially effect- 
ive from the third to the sixth vertebra, because it would reach the 
cardiac plexuses and ganglia, the immediate source of its action. 
The sixth vertebra may be considered the central locality for cardiac 
influence. The fourth vertebra is on the level of the origin of the 
aorta. Anteriorly, the heart corresponds to the space between the 
second and sixth ribs (the aorta rising to the first), and its lower end 
touches the wall of the chest two inches below the nipple and one inch 
nearer the median line. (The base of the sixth rib in front corre- 
sponds with the tenth dorsal vertebra behind.) The heart may be 
reached in front, but the frontal influence is feeble compared to the 
dorsal, and the left side, which is the more muscular side of the heart, 
is toward the back. The intercostal nerves and arteries, which sup- 
ply the chest around the heart, proceed from the space between the 
second and sixth dorsal vertebrae. The sympathetic psychic connec- 
tion of the sixth dorsal region with the brain shows that it is adapted 
to sustain healthy and vigorous cardiac action. A calm and firm 
action of the heart is produced by the influence of the cephalic region 
of the cord, which is best adapted to sustaining the action of the 
brain. 

As the facts of Sarcognomy thus locate the best cardiac power in 

the upper dorsal region, which is 
free from the exhausting violence of 
the neck and of the lower part of 
the body, we shall find the corres- 
ponding beneficent cardiac influence 
of the brain in the upper occiput, on 
a line from the cavity of the ear to 
the centre of power on the median 
line (usually indicated by the central 
radiation of the hair.) 

The hand stimulating this spot 
produces a tonic effect — a just 
medium between the opposite influ- 
ences of the gentle anterior superior region and the violent force of 




CHAP. V.] THE SPINAL REGION. 12$ 

the posterior inferior. This tonic power for the heart is near the 
centre of power, which modern anatomists have confirmed, calling it 
the superior parietal lobule and giving it the command of the locomo- 
tive power of the lower limbs. 

The vigor given to the heart by this location is shown in a strong 
but normal pulse. In passing forward upon the brain, the pulse 
gradually softens — in passing back downwards it becomes harder or 
stronger, indicating an increased blood pressure. 

There is no more decisive way of showing the impressibility of the 
brain and its physiological control of the body, than thus to stimulate 
and modify the action of the heart by applying the hands on different 
parts of the head. No psychic effects are quite convincing to those 
who have been thoroughly educated into collegiate scepticism, for 
they are well armed with fanciful hypotheses and shrewd suspicions 
against anything that is not physical ; but the silent testimony of 
the pulse is unanswerable ; and when given to a Boston committee in 
1843, Doctor Flint, who felt the pulse, said to me, " Your experi- 
ments are too perfect." 

A powerful and tumultuous action of the heart is produced by the 
three cervical ganglia which co-operate with the basilar region of the 
brain, the seat of the turbulent impulses and animal force which we 
rouse by placing the hands on the neck near the cranium. The large 
neck is a well-known indication of strong circulation and strong pas- 
sions. The cervical ganglia are equally cephalic and corporeal in 
their functions, and sustain the brain and heart in scenes of the wild- 
est violence. 

The anatomical commingling of nervous forces which we find 
serves as an additional illustration not only of the sympathies of 
organs, but of that intimate correlation and blending of functions 
which is revealed in the study of the brain, in which we find no organ 
which has not a diffusive influence, extending beyond its own juris- 
diction into the sphere of other functions. 

The intimate and powerful sympathies of the stomach with the 
brain and lungs, and its controlling influence over the vital energies 
generally are explained by its relation to the pneumogastric and 
phrenic nerves, the solar plexus and the lower dorsal region of the 
spinal column as well as the gastric region at the base of the middle 
lobe of the brain. 

The solar plexus exercises a dominant influence over all below it. 
The lower dorsal region and its correspondence in the brain, the 
region of Business Energy, give a general capacity for the active 
duties of life. Hence, when they are enfeebled or oppressed by the 
condition of the stomach, with which they are associated — by its 



124 THE SPINAL REGION. [CHAP. V. 

load of undigested food, its morbid contents, or oppressive, nauseating 
medicines, there is a general unfitness, incapacity, and aversion for 
our daily duties, and inability to make any great exertion, whether 
physical or intellectual, especially anything requiring skill. 

As the gastric region of the brain (in front of the ear) is antagonis- 
tic to fortitude and energy, any very strong impression on the 
stomach enfeebles the nervous energies, but as it is a region of great 
sensibility (the epigastric region corresponding to Sensibility in the 
brain) the medical or hygienic influence of everything it receives is 
so strongly felt as to affect the whole constitution, and medicines 
swallowed may affect the system instantaneously, prior to any absorp- 
tion. 

The best condition of our energies is after the process of digestion 
has ceased and the nourishment been absorbed, the stomach remain- 
ing quiescent. Although the abdominal organs support the constitu- 
tion by their contributions through the thoracic duct, they tax the 
constitution to the extent of the nervous energy they require. Hence 
the highest nervous and psychic conditions may be attained in cli- 
mates which require but little food. 

I would remark in conclusion, that in nervauric and electric treat 
ment we are not to confine our attention, as has been the fashion, to 
the cerebro- spinal system, overlooking the immediate agents of vital 
functions, for it is well established that the immediate agents of all vital 
processes are the ganglionic nerves or ganglia. Animals may exist 
without a cerebro-spinal system, and the human fetus may be developed 
without either brain or spinal cord. To the ganglionic or subordinate 
system nature adds a controlling spinal system, and to this adds a 
controlling brain. But the ganglionic system, thus overruled, carries 
on the machinery of life ; and when we treat the spinal column we 
control the adjacent ganglia as well as spinal nerves, thus controlling 
circulation, sensation, and unconscious action in the viscera. Physi- 
ologists have not given sufficient thought to this commanding relation 
of the spinal cord to the viscera, and none to the corresponding defi- 
nite relations of the brain, nor have the ganglionic functions been 
studied in a practical manner for local treatment. 



CHAPTER VI. 

PRACTICAL DIRECTIONS FOR THERAPEUTIC SPINAL 

TREATMENT. 

Understanding the foregoing exposition of the spinal powers, the 
operator will have little difficulty in treating the spinal column — the 
most important region of tJie body for the healing art — according to 
the following directions, recollecting that we stimulate the impressi- 
ble temperament by the application of the hand, by gentle percussion, 
or by the negative pole of a gentle electric current, and that what- 
ever we do upon the body may be aided by treating the corresponding 
region of the brain. 

i. To invigorate the brain and all our energies, stimulate the 
junction of the cervical and dorsal vertebrae, or union of the neck and 
the trunk. 

2. To reinforce this region, stimulate the region of Sanity, just 
below the arms. The union of the two functions produces a greater 
effect as they are analogous or correspondent. The region marked 

» Sanity produces psychic or moral firmness and self-control, and sup- 
presses all disorders of the nervous system. 

3. For the more complete invigoration of the brain and the entire 
constitution, the treatment may be applied not only to the cephalic 
region of the spine, but upon the entire shoulders, and the arms 
down to the elbow. 

4. While stimulating the cephalic region, the effect may be assisted 
by dispersive upward passes from the margin of the ribs in front 
(region of Disease). If a galvanic current is used, the positive pole 
applied by broad rheophores below the margin of the ribs anteriorly 
and the negative on the cephalic region, will produce a great concen- 
tration to the cephalic locality, — a very tonic, sustaining influence. 
The entire upper portion of the back has a tonic, sustaining character. 

5. If it be desired to use the brain power for intellectual purposes, 
we should also stimulate along the course of the sternum, in conjunc- 
tion with the cephalic spinal region and Sanity, by the hands, by gentle 
faradic currents, or by the reciprocal galvanic. 

Across the lower end of the sternum, between the mammae, it could 
be directed to impressional, psychometric and clairvoyant investi- 



126 THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. [CHAP. 

gations. If the object should be a general mental elevation to a lofty 
plane of thought, opening the mind to spiritual influx, we may 
stimulate the region of Inspiration, on the side, parallel to the anterior 
line of the arm, which corresponds to the temples — the region of 
Ideality, Modesty, Reverence, and Sublimity. 

6. If we wish to use the mental energy in speech (conversation or 
oratory) we should combine with the Cephalic the Pulmonic region, 
just below it (marked Oratory), which would co-operate admirably 
with the region of Inspiration. For mediumistic speech we need both 
Inspiration and Idealism — the latter being easily covered by the hand 
across the lower end of the sternum. The term Idealism is used for 
the whole Ideal region, including Imagination, Spirituality, Marvel- 
lousness, and Somnolence. 

7. If we would use our mental energy for physical achievement, we 
should combine with the Cephalic region that of Vital Force and the 
entire thigh ; also the lumbar region and the organ of Force 
behind the lower part of the humerus on the trunk. 

8. If we would use it for an ambitious career, we should excite the 
energies of the arms — especially the regions of Ambition and Love 
of Power, on the upper arm, and the whole space across from tip to 
tip of the shoulders. On the brain place one hand across the upper 
occiput, behind the organ of Firmness. 

9. If we would use it for the attainment of moral excellence and per- 
fection, we should extend the stimulation from the cephalic region, 
over the shoulder, on the front of the chest, as far as the nipples. 
The corresponding stimulation of the upper surface of the brain in 
the middle region (across Religion, Hope and Love) is in many 
cases highly important. The bright, calm, and happy feeling pro- 
duced by this region subdues restless and unpleasant passions, and 
sustains the activity of the brain, giving a capacity for pleasant 
intellectual and social intercourse, and bright intellection. Hence 
the region of Love and Hope may be beneficially stimulated in 
connection with Health and the occipital energies generally. A 
happy influence may be produced by combining the coronal and basilar 
regions of the brain — one hand being across the region of Love and 
the other around the base of the cerebellum, thus giving physical and 
psychic vitality in harmonious combination. This harmony is nec- 
essary to high health. Paralysis may be due to a decided predomi- 
nance of the basilar organs and the failure of the higher sentiments 
to maintain the cheerful activity of the brain. Over exertion prompted 
by unbalanced selfish impulses is one of the main causes of brain 
exhaustion and consequent prostration of health. The cultivation of 
the affections in family life is the principal means of maintaining a 



CHAP. VI.] THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. \2J 

healthy balance and supporting the normal condition of the brain — 
hence the greater longevity of a married than a celibate life, which is 
always the effect of a happy marriage. There is a considerable class 
in whom it is important to stimulate the upper surface of the brain 
and the region including the mammae and upper surface of the 
shoulder. 

There is an obvious reason for this in the principle that all unbal- 
anced action is injurious. The basilar forces leading to physical 
exertion continually tend to brain exhaustion, carrying its vitality 
into the body, as we see in the complete nervous prostration after 
violent efforts and the stultified dullness produced by a life of exces- 
sive labor. On the other hand, a life in which the activity of the 
higher emotions is greater than that of the animal forces is accom- 
panied by a superior condition of the brain. Thus do love and 
religion become conservators of health, while excessive culture of the 
muscular system is at the expense of the brain ; and athletes in 
training sometimes diminish their power by this reduction of the 
vitality of the brain. Excessive exertion may result also in that 
hypertrophy of the heart which is so injurious and destructive to 
the brain. 

The importance, and indeed the absolute necessity, of cultivating 
the higher sentiments for the maintenance of health is demonstrated by 
the frequent occurrence of paralysis and death from diseases of the 
upper surface of the brain ; and the wonderful power of enduring 
fatigue and privation produced by the sentiments of hope and 
courage, which belong to the upper surface of the brain. Hence 
in the treatment of patients it is often necessary to stimulate the 
upper surface of the brain for its calm, cheerful, and sustaining- 
influence. The best results are produced when the operator can give 
that aid from the energy of his own higher faculties. Indeed no one 
is really fit for the duties of a physician who has not strong senti- 
ments of love, hope, and firmness. 

10. If our chief object is to encounter enemies and difficulties, we 
may also stimulate the lower posterior half of the body, especially 
the region on the level of the lumbar vertebrae and below. If our 
object is to gain social influence and ascendency, we may stimulate 
the whole of the upper posterior surface of the crunk and the entire 
arms, or at least to the elbow. From the top of the shoulders down- 
ward for a space of ten or twelve inches may be regarded as the social 
region. 

1 1. To stimulate the Cephalic region in the head, we may touch the 
regions of Firmness and Dignity (marked Self-respect). To produce 
a strong and harmonious combination of cephalic energies, we may 



128 THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. [CHAP. VI. 

extend the hand across Firmness and Dignity, so far as to include the 
regions of Sanity and Magnanimity (at the prominent centre of the 
parietal bone) thus covering the posterior part of the cephalic region 
of the brain. In all cases we improve the sustaining faculties by 
passes upward and backward from Disease and Insanity (the cheek- 
bone and the under-jaw regions) towards the crown of the head, the 
capillary centre. The pass is a light brushing movement with the fin- 
gers. 

12. To invigorate the lungs in any condition whatever, we may 
stimulate the upper half of the dorsal region (the six upper vertebrae). 
Precision in confining the hand to one locality is not desirable in 
therapeutic treatment, for adjacent localities are always co-operative- 
The pulmonic zone extends around the chest in the direction of the 
ribs, nerves, and blood-vessels ; but on the frontal, sternal surface we 
have not the elements of vigor. Hence we do not usually extend our 
manual treatment, except at the summit, much beyond the side, in 
which we find a region of Inspiration (near the ends of the intercostal 
arteries) (see map) corresponding with the organs of Sublimity and 
Reverence — a region which animates the lungs, and prompts a fuller 
breathing by the ribs, but does not impart permanent vigor or tonicity, 
and would, therefore, not be beneficial in inflammatory conditions* 
which should be counteracted on the tibial surface of the leg. Never- 
theless the upper frontal surface of the chest promotes the fulness 
and circulation of the lungs (in connection with pleasing emotions) 
and may therefore be used when we wish to increase their circulation, 
especially in asthmatic conditions and irritable states of the system. 
Moreover, any operator of a benevolent, sympathetic temperament and 
strong vitality may do good, however ignorant, by placing his hands 
upon the patient, though without producing the speedy and thorough 
cure to which he would be guided by Sarcognomy. A state of irrita- 
tion in the lungs may be soothed by the anodyne influence of the 
region of Patience, at the top of the shoulders. Bronchial irritation 
and congestion may be overcome by the regions of Repose and Cool- 
ness, which operate much like a combination of quinine and hyoscia- 
mus or opium. The hyperemic conditions of pneumonia may be best 
counteracted by the tibial region of the leg and the foot, on which we 
apply the hands, or to which we send an electric current from the ante- 
rior surface of the chest. In those who are less impressible, a similar 
effect may be produced by hemastasis, by inserting the lower limbs in 
hollow vessels (the pneumatic boot) from which the air has been par- 
tially extracted by an air-pump, so as to draw the blood with great 
force into the limbs, giving prompt relief to the congestion of the 
lungs. (See chapter on Hemastasis.) If such apparatus is not in 



CHAP. VI.] THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. 1 29 

reach, ligatures around the thighs to produce an accumulation of blood 
in the limbs for a few hours will answer the same purpose, though less 
efficiently. 

In speaking of the frontal region of the chest and the brain as defi- 
cient in vital force, I do not mean that their influence is objectionable. 
On the contrary, though deficient in vital force they contribute to the 
general activity of the brain, and serve to call out the occipital ener- 
gies by their laws of association. This is especially true of the sum-' 
mit of the chest, from the shoulders to the mammae inclusive. This 
region is correlative with that of Health — that is, it uniformly co- 
operates with it. Hence there is great propriety in combining the 
anterior and posterior stimulation of the upper part of the chest, 
which develops the noblest and most hygienic elements of the consti- 
tution. 

13. To treat the lungs through the head, we operate on the corre- 
sponding regions to those we treat on the body, giving vigor by the 
upper occiput, anodyne influence by Patience, Heroism, and Repose, 
full inspiration by the temples, bronchial relief by Sleep and Coolness, 
and deep diaphragmatic respiration by the respiratory region below 
the mouth. As the exercise of the thighs by running, leaping, or 
ascending heights promotes deep diaphragmatic respiration, so does 
the stimulation of the thigh (or of the crural region) or their expan- 
sion by hemastasis. The sedative and cooling effect of the tibial 
region cannot be distinctly produced through the neck on the brain, 
owing to the variable position of the head, but may be approximated 
on the lower part of the neck. 

14. In treating pulmonary diseases it is always beneficial to reinforce 
the pulmonary vitality by stimulating the pulmonic region of the 
spine, but not so beneficial to stimulate the region of Inspiration, 
except when respiration is imperfect, the lungs being dry, constricted, 
or asthmatic. Congestive conditions of the lungs, such as pneumonia, 
or irritated conditions approximating pneumonia, are benefited by 
stimulating not only the pulmonic region, but the whole posterior 
thoracic surface, which includes Firmness, Health, Coolness, and 
Repose. The cephalic region, which energizes the arms, is also bene- 
ficial. Both upper and lower limbs, when stimulated by the hands, 
by hot applications, or stimulating plasters, divert from the lungs and 
relieve their congestions and irritations on the same principle as 
haemastasis. The most prompt and effective method of relieving 
any congestion of the lungs is to retain a large amount of blood in 
the limbs by ligatures at the thighs and shoulders, tight enough to 
check the return of venous blood, but not to hinder the entrance of 
the arterial. It is more efficient than the greater part of the medical 



130 THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. [CHAP. VI. 

treatment which has been in vogue, but has been signally neglected 
by the medical profession. Haemastasis is more effective when 
following evacuations by the kidneys and bowels, reducing the 
volume of the blood, and when the limbs are kept warm. 

15. To rouse the diaphragm for forced respiration in asphyxia or 
drowning, it is necessary to use powerful stimulation. Faradic cur- 
rents may be sent from the cephalic to the lumbo-sacral region or to 
the seat of vital force at the summit of the thigh, or preferably the 
reciprocal galvanic current. This I think effective for rousing the 
vital forces, but similar currents between the cervical or upper 
dorsal and the respiratory region, just below the umbilicus, are more 
efficient and stimulating to respiration. The current from the cervi- 
cal region passes along the course of the phrenic nerve. But before 
such means can generally be attained, respiration may be restored 
by manual force. The patient being placed in a reclining position 
(say an angle of forty-five to sixty degrees above the horizontal) and 
vigorous compression applied rapidly to the abdomen and lower part 
of the chest by two or more persons, to expel the air, which will be 
brought into the lungs by the reaction when the ribs expand by their 
elasticity, and the bowels descend by their gravity. The reaction of 
the ribs may be assisted by jerking the shoulders upwards at the 
moment. 

The continued repetition of these movements may recover from 
apparent death, and the recovery will be assisted by the primary 
current from the hypochondriac region of the body to the cephalic 
region of the spine, and by alternating currents across the neck and 
the base of the brain posteriorly, as well as the currents recom- 
mended for the diaphragm. 

16. To rouse the liver, we stimulate along the sixth to the eighth 
vertebrae, and the corresponding ribs. It is not desirable to carry 
this beyond the middle of the lateral surface, as it becomes a depress- 
ing influence anteriorly. When we would rouse from a torpid state, 
the liver being small or contracted, we may treat on the side, but in 
congested, hyperemic, irritated or inflammatory conditions, the treat- 
ment should be on the back — one hand on the hepatic location and 
the other on Health, with dispersive passes from the hypochondriac 
region. 

Morbid states of the liver are benefited by currents from the 
hypochondria (especially of the right side) toward the upper dorsal 
region and region of Health. The best influences are produced when 
currents sent into the person are passed through the person of the 
operator, and applied by his hand. 

17. From the seventh to the twelfth dorsal vertebrae inclusive, we 



CHAP. VI.] THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. I3I 

stimulate the stomach and the organs immediately below it.* The 
gastric zone extends along the direction of the ribs, and the specific 
anterior location for exciting hunger, thirst, and love of stimulus, 
corresponding to the organ just in front of the ear, is on the abdo- 
men below the ribs about six inches from the umbilicus, and three or 
four inches higher. At this locality, we may not only stimulate 
digestion, co-operating with the spinal location, but may control the 
drunkards thirst by dispersive passes on the sensitive, — stimulating 
at the same time the power of fortitude and temperance, which are 
roused on the top of the shoulder. This may be achieved by electric 
treatment, placing the positive pole at the gastric location just men- 
tioned, and the. negative on the middle of the upper surface of the 
shoulder. 

18. From the eighth dorsal to the last lumbar vertebrae we energize 
the functions of the bowels, and along the gastro-intestinal location 
on the abdomen we may assist in the same effect. We may use the 
hands, or the faradic and primary currents. Upon the spine we ener- 
gize at the same time the lower limbs, but at the abdominal locations the 
tendency is more relaxing than invigorating. Hence, the positive 
pole is more appropriate to the abdomen and the negative to the 
spine, but alternating currents produce the most efficient abdominal 
action. 

19. On the lumbar vertebrae, especially the lower half, we may 
invigorate the calorific energies, which are developed by the organ of 
Calorification, located on the abdomen, with the difference that the 
latter is more feverish and superficial in its effect and the former 
more substantial and wholesome, being associated with general vigor. 
An alternating current from the lumbar region to the seat of Calori- 
fication in front is the best calorific proceeding. 

20. At the upper lumbar vertebrae we may excite the urinary organs 
— the kidneys being adjacent to the lumbo-dorsal junction and deriving 
their nerve power from the renal plexus, coming from the tenth and 
eleventh dorsal ganglia. The bladder may be affected through the 
sacral region. 

21. At the lumbo-sacral junction, and about three inches below it, 
we may excite the sexual energies, as this region is the source of sexual 
functions in both sexes. The influence of the lumbo-sacral region, 
like the upper part of the cerebellum, tends to normal amativeness 

* Dr. D. Graham, a Boston practitioner of massage according to the mechanical 
theory, was surprised to discover this effect from the dorsal region in a case he was 
treating for writer's cramp, in which he rubbed the back, from a belief that it had 
been injured. He says in a report of this case: "After the third massage, which 
included the back, he was almost faint with hunger, though he had just had dinner 
before coming to me. I have observed the same effect in other cases; in one a 
physician, from percussion alone, a few minutes on the back." He evidently had 
very good subjects, and could have treated them more effectually if he had under- 
stood Sarcognomy. 



132 THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. [CHAP. VI. 

and love. Stronger sexual desires and exhausting excesses are promp- 
ted by the lower part of the median cerebellum, the sacral region, and 
the sexual organs. The influence of the sexual organs and the inguinal 
region is more sensitive and relaxing than tonic ; illustrating the gen- 
eral law that anterior organs tend to debility and exhaustion. To dis- 
perse from the groin and energize the lumbo-sacral region is the general 
rule in disorders of the sexual organs, unless we wish to suspend all 
action in that region, in which case we also stimulate the cephalic 
regions on the spine, and region of chastity below the axilla, which is a 
proper treatment in hysteria — a treatment which is sedative and 
antaphrodisiac, producing the beneficial effects of the bromides. 

22. In the treatment of paralysis, we should recollect that the 
upper limbs are controlled from the fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth 
cervical and first dorsal vertebrae; consequently, this is the locality 
at which the arms are to be strengthened by stimulation with the 
hand, or by an electric current sent to this locality from the hypo- 
chondriac region, or by moderate faradic currents for a few minutes 
through this part of the spine, or between this part and the hands. 
Dry cupping on this part of the spine and a few inches lower gives 
relief to pains in the arms or convulsive affections. Irritated condi- 
tions of this part of the spine may be relieved by vigorous dispersive 
passes, by dry cupping, or by the positive pole sending a current 
toward the hands or the feet, or by currents of hot water and hot 
fomentations. 

23. Paralytic affections of the lower limbs involve the whole region 
from the dorsal vertebrae to the end of the spine, and require treat- 
ment by the hand and by primary and faradic currents on the entire 
space — on the lumbar region for the thighs and the sacral region 
for the legs. Moderate currents to the spine for five, ten, or fifteen 
minutes are beneficial generally in paralysis. Galvanism and the mag- 
neto-galvanic or primary current are the proper excitants for paralyzed 
nerves ; and the alternation of currents is beneficial. The negative 
pole too long applied has a congestive and solvent or softening 
influence, which may be counteracted by the positive. After the 
negative pole has stimulated the cord and its circulation sufficiently, 
the positive pole on the spine may be used to send some of the 
accumulated energy into the limbs. In stimulating the spine with the 
negative pole it is not necessary that the positive pole should be 
placed on the limbs ; on the contrary, a better effect may often be 
produced by placing the positive pole on the opposite anterior sur- 
faces of the body — as a backward-going current is always tonic and 
invigorating. The upward current develops the spinal cord at the 
expense of the limbs. As a general method, I would recommend a 



CHAP. VI.] THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. 1 33 

current from the frontal surfaces of the trunk to the spine, followed 
by reciprocal or alternating galvanic and primary currents between 
the spine and the limbs. If the operator has not a commutator, 
which is the best means of producing alternate currents, he can 
change the position of the electrodes, or shift their connections 
with the battery ; but the rapid reciprocal current automatically 
produced is the most efficient treatment. A moderate faradic 
current between the spine and the limbs is suitable for their 
invigoration, but not so appropriate while the paralytic condition 
continues, which is benefited chiefly by the galvanic or primary 
current. Local faradism upon the muscles helps to stimulate 
their growth and development. The reciprocating galvanic current 
automatically produced by a commutator is one of the most 
important applications of electricity, but one which has been greatly 
neglected. The commutator is the most efficient method of pro- 
ducing the uniform electric stimulation without different polarities, 
in the electrodes and without any of the corroding chemical action 
of the current ; hence more pleasant as well as more effectual. 

24. In treating the various portions of the spinal cord for their 
constitutional effects, there are six different methods. 

First. Vital manual treatment, by touch and gentle percussion to 
stimulate, and by dispersive passes with the hand, for removing mor- 
bid conditions. Moderate friction with the hand serves also for 
stimulation. Some sensitives are favorably affected by breathing 
upon the part to be treated. 

Second. Galvanic currents are stimulant by the negative, and 
sedative, but tonic, by the positive pole. 

Third. Faradic currents are strongly stimulant, and should be 
used with moderation either on the spine, or on the spine and the 
affected organ, or on the muscles, or, for local action, on the dry skin, 
which hinders the current from passing inwards. The current should 
be moderated by using large sponges or broad carbon plates as elec- 
trodes, and weak currents when the electrodes are near together. 
The carbon plate electrode, with a wet cloth on its surface, ought to 
supersede the metallic electrodes in common use. 

Fourth. Mechanical treatment may be used by dry cupping to 
remove irritation and pain ; by hot water for a very short time, for 
its sedative and soothing effects ; by cold water or ice for a similar 
purpose, which must be continued for a longer time to prevent reac- 
tion, and which requires more caution in its use. The rubber bag 
of hot water or of ice is a very valuable application. 

Fifth. Stimulant and tonic plasters are a valuable adjunct in 
spinal treatment, and may be made more efficient by combining them 



134 THERAPEUTIC SPINAL TREATMENT. [CHAP. VI. 

with suitable remedies or by applying the remedies on the spine and 
covering them with the plaster. The California Laurel, a new 
remedy, the value of which is not known to the profession, is one of 
the most efficient of all agents for restoring spinal energy, especially 
in paralytic conditions. Scutellaria combines with its soothing 
properties a restorative influence on the lower half of the spine. 
Almost any medicine may be applied on the spine in the form of an 
embrocation or an ointment. 

Sixth. Counter-irritation on the spine, when obstinate chronic 
difficulties resist all other measures, is effected by mustard plasters, 
cantharides, ammonia, and concentrated acetic acid — also by moxa 
and the momentary application of the hot metallic button, heated to 
the temperature of boiling water, for the removal of pain. One of 
the most powerful of all counter-irritants, for the removal of morbid 
conditions, is the compound tar-plaster, or irritating plaster of the 
Eclectic Dispensatory ; its effect is slow and very unpleasant, but 
efficient. Conditions less chronic are met by dry cupping. 

25. Paralysis due to the brain affects that side of the body which is 
opposite the cerebral hemisphere that is affected. Hence it requires 
treatment on the brain where the cause (softening or hemorrhage) 
is located. Treated by the hand it requires a strong operator, and 
he should stimulate the cephalic regions on the spine and under the 
axilla, also the superior posterior or hygienic region of the head, 
using at the same time dispersive upward passes from the cheeks 
and under jaw to the crown of the head. Downward manipulations 
on the back of the neck and along the jugular veins will be very 
beneficial. The site of the hemorrhage will probably be at the base 
of the middle lobe, near the upper frontal line of the ear. Hence 
dispersive downward passes on that region will tend to promote 
absorption and check any irritation or inflammation. Manual treat- 
ment is safe, and after a week from the attack a mild galvanic 
current through large carbon electrodes or sponges might be passed 
through the affected hemisphere to the opposite hand or shoulder 
blade, or the cephalic region of the spine, to disperse morbid con- 
ditions. Faradism should not be used in such cases. The hand 
should be applied to the occipital base, where it covers the cere- 
bellum, and to the hygienic region at the same time, but we should 
avoid exciting any part of the regions anterior to the ears. Treat- 
ment of the spine in these cases, by manipulation and percussion, is 
a beneficial auxiliary to the brain treatment. Nervauric and electric 
treatment are appropriate in all cases of paralysis, and the best 
results are produced when the operator administers the positive 
current through his own hands, thus combining the nervauric and 
electric powers. 



CHAPTER VII. 

RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY IN ITS 
DIFFERENT REGIONS. 

Division of the brain by the vertical and horizontal lines — Rational illustration — 
Plan of the human constitution, front and back, above and below the ventricles — 
Fundamental law of direction — Action of basilar organs — Their effect on the body 
— Coronal organs antagonistic to the basilar — Effects of each — How the paralysis 
of either becomes fatal — Superior vitality of the upper surface of the brain — Ante- 
rior and posterior basilar organs — Seats of vital force at the base of the brain — The 
anterior basilar region and its subdivisions — The gastric region — Seat of appetite — 
The love of stimulus, effect of its development — How to control intemperance — 
Medical remedies — The moral and religious cure — Effects of malaria and of ani- 
mal food — Treatment of the digestive organs through the brain — General character 
of the antero-basilar region — Calorification, how to excite it; how to protect it — 
Effect of its overaction — The respiratory region— Signs of pulmonic disease in the 
mouth — Region of Sensibility — Its confirmation by Ferrier — The organ of Lan- 
guage — Heating and cooling the temples — Region of Somnolence and its mental 
phenomena — Anterior coronal region — Temporal region. 



The brain may be divided by a vertical line through the ear and a 
horizontal line running back from the middle of the forehead. 

The vertical line separates the occipital from the frontal half, 
leaving the impelling forces in the occipital half, which constitute 
physical and moral power, by which we succeed and conquer, while 
the frontal half contains the physical, moral, and intellectual sensibil- 
ities, which yield to the mental influence of others and the influence 
of physical objects, obstacles, and injuries. Thz predominance of the 
frontal results in physical and moral weakness, amiability, and refine- 
ment, without power to resist disease, exposure, or hostility. The 
occipital makes the positive, and the frontal the negative character — 
one the leader, the other the follower. The occipital character was 
illustrated in the crania and martial career of the New Zealanders 
(an equal match for European troops) and the frontal in the gentle, 
harmless Peruvians — victims of Spanish slaughter. The New Zea- 
land crania are as remarkable for occipital development as the Peru- 
vians are for occipital deficiency and frontal predominance. 

The general plan of the human constitution places power in the 
rear and sensibility in front. The senses are exercised in front, and 
the maximum degree of sensibility is at the epigastrium, where a 
severe blow may give a fatal shock. The skin in front is more sensi- 
tive than at the back, and the muscles in front respond more readily 



136 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. [CHAP. VII. 

to electrical excitement. The muscles of the face and front of the 
neck are very sensitive to electric excitement ; the muscles of the 
back are relatively much less sensitive, and the muscles of the pos- 
terior aspect of the upper and lower limbs are less sensitive than 
those of the anterior and inner aspect. Beard and Rockwell say of 
the head : " In health the head is very sensitive both to galvanization 
and to faradization, in all parts except the posterior. In health the 
spine is but little sensitive to the current." 

The horizontal line divides the regions of the brain (below the 
great ventricles) which are in close communication with the body (by 
the ramifications of the ascending fibres of the spinal cord, outspread 
in the crura, thalami, striata and cerebellum) from the regions above 
the ventricles, which are not in close communication with the body, 
but are directly connected with each other, and unitized by the great 
commissure, the corpus callosum, which connects the right and left 
halves or hemispheres. 

The fundamental law of cerebral action (which will be fully devel- 
oped in the volume devoted to Pathognomy) is that all organs act in 
accordance with their line of direction. The basilar organs (below 
the ventricles) act upon the body, impelling all its vital energies and 
voluntary actions, and by this action they expend the cerebral ener- 
gies, producing exhausting and destructive effects. Hence their 
tendency per se is not healthy and beneficial in a physiological sense, 
while morally they produce the unbridled sensuality, selfishness, and 
restless violence which, in predominance, are criminal and degrading. 
Their influence is beneficial only when acting harmoniously in con- 
junction with the higher powers. The passions and appetites are 
essential in their subordinate places, but fatal as rulers, being alike 
ruinous by their exhaustive violence, their sensual excess, their 
incessant agitation, and their hostile relations to our fellow-beings 
and to all supernal influences. 

Nevertheless, the basilar organs have been regarded as the seat of 
animal life, and surgeons have found injuries of the brain more fatal 
in proportion as they are located further back from the forehead to 
the base of the occiput. The reason of this is that the basilar organs 
are the organs of manifestation of soul life in the body, without 
which all power of manifesting life and volition would be lost. The 
muscles would cease to contract, the heart to beat, the lungs to 
respire. The tendency of the coronal organs perse is to withdraw 
life from the body to the spirit, the immediate effect being self-con- 
trol and tranquillity, and ultimate effect, in abnormal excess, trance 
and death of the body, but their normal action sustains the activity 
of the brain and the power of vitality. 



CHAP. VII.] RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. I37 

Injuries to the basilar organs are fatal because they sever the con- 
nection of soul and body by depriving the body of that influx of 
energy which comes from the brain, thus suspending every physio- 
logical process. The suspension of digestion terminates life in a few 
weeks by taking away the material necessary to the blood and the 
structure of the organs; the suspension of circulation terminates it 
in a few hours, or perhaps in a few minutes, by suspending the influ- 
ence of oxygenated blood ; and the suspension of respiration termin- 
ates life in a few minutes. 

The isolation, paralysis, or destruction of the basilar forces suspends 
all these processes, and thus arrests life in the body, but leaves it 
perfect in the soul as it separates from the body. For the same 
reasons injuries to the base of the skull are peculiarly dangerous. 
Dr. T. H. Manly, an experienced New York surgeon, says of fractures 
of the skull : " When we are reasonably assured that the base of the 
skull is involved, death is inevitable, and treatment is out of the 
question." "Next to the base of the skull, probably a fracture 
through the temporal bone is the most fatal." — [Dr. T. H. Manly, 
surgeon to Harlem Hospital. 

Thus the action of either the coronal or the basilar region of the 
brain alone, while the opposite region is more or less paralyzed, is 
fatal. The impairment of the upper region of the brain leaves the 
animal forces, passions, and sensibilities in riotous excess, without 
sustaining power, resulting in disease, exhaustion, insanity, and death. 
Disease or softening of the superior organs of the brain is fatal in 
another way which has been amply illustrated by the records of path- 
ology : it impairs the vitality of the brain and thus tends to paralysis, 
disease, and death. The cephalic or superior region sustains the brain 
and thereby sustains life. 

As the superior region of the brain is the source of beneficent 
influences that elevate the character and sustain the nervous system, 
its emanations are therefore the most beneficent that proceed from 
any portion of the body, and the upper surface of the head is far 
more effective than the hand in conveying hygienic benefits to others 
by direct application. Its influence is always soothing and delightful. 
That influence is consequently realized by the scalp, which is natur- 
ally a healthy region, and rapidly recovers from injuries. Dr. T. H. 
Manly, surgeon at Harlem Hospital, N. Y., says that "scalp tissue is 
very prone to heal ; when there is no septic infection, more quickly 
than any other in the body. I once saw this well illustrated in a luna- 
tic, who, when alone, first by pounding his forehead against the edge 
of an iron sink, detached the scalp anteriorly from ear to ear, and 
then tore the whole down over the back of his neck, before discov- 



133 RELATION OF THE BRATN TO VITALITY. [CHAP. VII. 

ered, when he was very faint from loss of blood. The parts were 
promptly replaced, and he made a good recovery." Though the head 
contains organs vital to life, it will stand battering and bruising with 
greater Impunity than any other part of the body." 

The loss* or exhaustion of the basilar region while the upper region 
is active, leaves the soul in full development, but unable to act upon 
and vitalize the body, the death of which must follow, the brain being 
impaired by the lack of healthy blood. 

The cultivation of both coronal and basilar regions is therefore 
necessary, and as the physician is mainly occupied in restoring the 
bodily organs which have lost their vigor or their texture, he is 
required to sustain the higher organs, which are the source of brain 
power, and also to invigorate the basilar organs. The latter is a 
large part of the duty of the nervauric healer, and he is frequently 
required to place his hands on base of the brain behind the ears, to 
supply the amount of vital power which the enfeebled brain has 
ceased to yield. In doing this a correct knowledge of cerebral organ- 
ology is highly important. 

The basilar region, like the coronal, is divided by the vertical line 
through the ears into anterior and posterior regions — the posterior 
being the region of vigor and the anterior of sensitive impressibility.* 
Hence the application of the hands to the base is chiefly made on 
the posterior region. This produces an increase of life, strength, 
circulation, and nutrition throughout the person. The comfortable 
warmth, the increased strength, and the gradual improvement of 
every function make this a very agreeable operation to the patient- 
In those who are extremely impressible, the basilar excitement may 
go too far and stimulate restlessness, or the violent passions, but this 
seldom occurs with patients, and is counteracted by the operator's 
presence and the diffusive influence of his vitality. The posterior 
basilar co-operate with the posterior superior organs, and the anterior 
basilar with the anterior superior organs of the amiable sentiments. 
Hence the amiable sentiments tend to sensitive weakness and the 
heroic impulses to violence. 

The vital force sustaining the muscular system is specifically 
reached at the organ of Vital Force, at the base of the skull, half-way 
between the mastoid processes (just behind the ears) and the median 
line. On the median line, in the depression extending two inches 
below the occipital knob, we stimulate a vitality which has more 
influence on the nervous than the muscular system, which invigorates 

* To this remark there is an exception at the lower part of the face, from the nose 
to the bottom of the chin — the regions of Respiration and Calorification, — the 
prominence of which is an indication of a vigorous temperament. The organ* 
which this region represents are rather behind than before the middle of the base. 



CHAP. VII.] RELATION OF THE BRALN TO VITALITY. 1 39 

the senses and the sexual system, and is especially beneficial to the 
eyes. To apply the fingers of one hand at this spot, and the fingers 
of the other across the brow immediately over the eyes, overcomes 
weakness of the eyes and resists their diseases. (The reader will 
understand, of course, that such remarks apply to the impressible 
temperament.) 

I do not propose tc give a full statement of the physiological organ- 
ology of the brain at present, but merely to give certain localities 
easily learned, and often used in nervauric treatment, through the 
head. 

The anterior basilar region (antagonistic to the upper occipital) has 
many localities that should be understood. Immediately before the 
cavity of the ear is the region of the gastric appetites (marked on the 
phrenological busts as the organ of Alimentiveness, and erroneously 
extended above the zygoma or cheek-bone), corresponding to the 
place where the upper end of the jawbone works in its glenoid cavity. 
The stimulation of this locality excites a feeling of hunger, which 
becomes at length debilitating if not satisfied, but its stimulation, 
when the stomach is occupied by undigested food, relieves the oppres- 
sion more than a dose of pepsin, and even relieves flatulence. We 
sometimes hear the effect in a few moments. In my early experi- 
ments in 1841, the subject, Mr. V., was made hungry enough to begin 
eating a tallow candle. 

The intensity of hunger, however, is not always proportional to the 
desire or demand for food. The demand is sometimes eager when 
the depressing effect of hunger is not felt, and the depressing effect 
is sometimes great when the attraction or impulse to take food is 
small. Hence if we would invigorate the stomach most effectively, 
it may be necessary to stimulate the posterior basilar region also, 
which gives the impulses and desires. What I have been teaching 
in this respect has been strongly corroborated by the experiments of 
Ferrier on the brains of monkeys. " After removal or disorganiza- 
tion of the occipital lobes, the appetite for food is abolished " (says 
Ferrier), " the animals refusing that which they formerly exhibited a 
great liking for. This I have tested in various animals and various 
ways." 

The posterior portion of the Gastric or Alimentive organ, immedi- 
ately at the cavity of the ear, is the portion which makes the drunkard 
when it controls, and which originates the craving for stimulants in 
common use, such as tea and coffee, mustard, spices, etc. When I 
stimulate my patients in this region they desire a stimulus stronger 
in proportion to the excitement, until even a delicate lady of temper- 
ate habits will delight in the strongest brandy or whiskey. The 



140 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. [CHAP. VII. 

depressing influence of this organ is counterbalanced by the 
stimulus taken, which restores equilibrium and does not intoxicate 
unless it exceeds the natural demand. Hence old topers show no 
intoxication after taking their half-pint of alcoholic liquids, for the 
same reason that the man depressed by the bite of a rattlesnake 
shows no stimulation after taking a pint of whiskey. But persons in 
whom this organ is small, or who are ruled by a great preponderance 
of the coronal region, are easily intoxicated, and this class are most 
rapidly destroyed by intemperance. When one is already under the 
influence of alcoholic liquids, the organ of Love of Stimulus should 
be excited to promote sobriety, by counteracting the intoxication, for 
the same reason that we excite the gastric organ when overloaded 
with food. 

To counteract the habit of intemperance, the opposite region of 
the brain, which is a region of temperance, cheerfulness, and forti- 
tude, should be stimulated. In the impressible subject this may be 
done by the hand, and the stimulus of this region destroys the appe- 
tite for alcoholic stimulation. If this be done by any method which 
effectually rouses the higher moral sentiments, intemperance will be 
conquered ; and this has been done extensively in the inebriate 
asylums of New York and Philadelphia, which rely upon religious 
influence. 

Tonic medicines necessarily overcome this depression and rouse 
the moral and physical energies, taking away the appetite which 
originates the desire. Hydrastis is one of the most efficient and 
wholesome tonics for this purpose, and when I recommended it 
forty years ago I heard favorable reports of its effects from my 
pupils. Quassia has also been successfully used ; so have the 
sulphate of cinchona, strychnia, and some preparations of gold, all of 
which are powerful tonics. Berberis vulgaris (the barberry) is also 
an excellent tonic for this purpose, and very wholesome: Balmony 
and cypripedium may also be used with benefit, and coca is also useful 
in sustaining the nervous system. 

As the drunkard's thirst is dependent on the basilar region, and 
controlled by the coronal, it seldom appears among women, and it is 
very effectively resisted by religious influence. The restoration of 
drunkards in religious asylums in New York and Philadelphia has 
been marvellous, and as intemperance is associated with the basilar 
organs, its effective conquest can be made only by cultivating the 
moral nature. As long as men indulge the violent and selfish 
passions they will have the corresponding appetites. Moral educa- 
tion alone can abolish intemperance. A healthful atmosphere con- 
tributes to temperance as a malarious one contributes to intemper- 



CHAP. VII.] RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. I4I 

ance. Animal food, which stimulates the base of the brain, favors 
intemperance, while a vegetarian diet, and especially the use of fruit, 
has the opposite effect. 

The stomach and bowels may be treated through the brain, the 
gastric and abdominal tract being located along the course of the 
lower jaw, i. e., we reach the organs through this external locality. 
But in overcoming dyspepsia, constipation, etc., I prefer the treat- 
ment on the body according to the principles of Sarcognomy, al- 
though the head treatment is highly beneficial when the impressi-* 
bility is marked. 

The general character of the antero-basilar region, as already 
stated, is sensibility to impressions or experiments, and a tendency 
to nervous expenditure of vital force. This sensitive excitability is 
antagonistic to the vital power, and renders us so susceptible of 
painful, exhausting, overpowering impressions as to become the great 
inlet of disease. Extreme sensibility cannot exist without extreme 
liability to injury. Hence the anterior inferior region is the region 
of morbid capacities, and requires to be overbalanced by the occipital 
half of the brain to make a strong and hardy constitution. 

But this region is not necessarily morbid. It gives immense capa- 
city for enjoyment by the physical and mental sensibilities, and if 
no injurious impression is made its action is healthful, though sen- 
sual and relaxing ; but no one can pass through life without encoun- 
tering many injurious influences, physical and moral, and realizing 
his capacities for disorder of body and mind. Irregularities of cli- 
mate, exposure, malaria, unsuitable food, excess or privation, anxiety, 
anger, disappointment, etc., are inevitable, and can be overcome only 
by the occipital energies. Hence we perceive that the habitual 
indulgence in luxury and sensual pleasure undermines the constitu- 
tion and lays the foundation of disease. 

The morbid tendency of the antero-basilar region culminates at 
the anterior end of the middle lobe — against the sphenoid bone, 
behind the malar bone, which gives prominence to the cheeks below 
and behind the eyes. This is the locality of that irritable sensibility 
which is easily injured, and gives the greatest liability to disease ; 
and as its excessive action results in disease, it is marked " Disease," 
and its stimulation to any great extent is debilitating and injurious. 
Hence the bracing effect of the cool breeze striking the face, and of 
manipulations in which the fingers pass rapidly and lightly backward 
and upward over this region toward the crown of the head — the 
method generally adopted in relieving debilitated and oppressed con- 
ditions. Passes made in the opposite direction are quieting, relax- 
ing, debilitating, and somewhat soporific ; sponging the cheeks and 



142 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. [CHAP. VIL 

temples with warm or hot water has a beneficial effect in feverish, 
excitable, nervous, or depressed conditions. 

There is a lower grade of vitality in structures adjacent to the 
sensitive anterior base of the middle lobe and the corresponding 
location of the body, the hypochondria especially. Hence the dia- 
phragm and the tongue are the first muscles after death to lose their 
electric contractility, and next come the muscles of the face. For 
the same reason diseases in the throat, such as diphtheria, have a 
very prostrating influence over the whole constitution. 

The region of the anterior base, which we reach below the jaws, 
has the same relation to the mental as that at the cheek-bones to the 
physical health. It gives that degree of excitability which is easily 
exhausted and easily excited to frenzy. 

Hence it produces liabilities to melancholy, idiocy, and mania, 
the excitement running beyond the control of the will, and becoming 
injurious to the brain and the mind. The idiotic tendency is located 
anteriorly, the violent posteriorly, and the melancholic superiorly 
and on the jaw. The position of the insane region is in the interior 
portion of the base of the brain, near the median line. 

The location of the insane and morbid tendencies at the base of 
the middle lobe is probably the reason that the morbid conditions of 
the brain substance are more frequently found there than in any 
other part. 

A temporary dementia or mania is easily produced in impressible 
subjects by stimulating the insane region. Conditions of mental 
depression and disorder are relieved by dispersive manipulations, 
upward and backward, over this region, or downward to the shoul- 
ders. The downward manipulation is effective in clearing the frontal 
brain. The brain being supplied by two great arteries and veins, the 
carotids and jugulars, at the side of the neck, and the vertebral arteries 
and veins at the back, its circulation is promptly affected by down- 
ward manipulations on the side and back of the neck, which tend to 
carry off venous and introduce arterial blood. 

Hence I usually begin the treatment of headache by downward 
manipulations on the back of the neck, followed by similar manipula- 
tions on the side, and by dispersive passes, generally backward, on 
the spot where the pain is located. 

The upper posterior region, including the crown of the head, extend- 
ing from right to the left posterior angle of the parietal bone (marked 
on the old phrenological busts as Cautiousness), is the region antagonis- 
tic to disease and insanity, where the application of the hand produces 
the most beneficial and restorative effects on body and mind. 

Through the chin we operate on the medulla oblongata and stimulate 
the production of heat. Hence this locality is marked Calorification. 



CHAP. VII.] RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. I43 

We know by Chossat's experiments in vivisection that the pro- 
duction of heat in the body depends upon the transmission of innerva- 
tion, downwards from the brain, through the spinal cord to the gan- 
glionic nerves of the abdomen. 

When we place one hand around the chin, and the other around 
the occipital base, the circulation and evolution of heat are at once 
increased and directed downwards. Thus we warm the lower limbs 
and break up chills. 

The calorific power being thus located, enables us to understand 
why a little woollen clothing around the chin and neck is more pro- 
tective to our warmth than five times the amount elsewhere. When 
this region is left unprotected, and cold penetrates the base of the 
brain, the power of resistance is thus overcome, and sleep follows which 
ends in death. Calorification is one of the exciting and wakeful 
faculties. Hence the cold weather which stimulates our heat-forming 
power gives greater clearness and wakeful energy to the mind, and hot 
weather, which diminishes calorification, promotes drowsiness. The 
hottest part of the day is given to the siesta in warm climates. For 
the same reason, whenever intense cold penetrates the base of the 
brain and diminihess calorification, the drowsy influence is felt, which 
is a dangerous condition, as it shows that the power of resistance to 
cold is disappearing. 

The overaction of Calorification in mental ardor, excitement, and 
fever is exhausting, like that of all other antero-basilar organs, when- 
ever it is more than sufficient to counteract the effects of external 
cold and exalts the temperature of the body. For the same reason 
hot climates produce a more excitable and less energetic or enduring 
constitution, the effect of heat being to stimulate the anterior sensi- 
tive region of the brain, developing more delicacy and refinement than 
strength. 

If the hand, in covering the chin, extends up and around the mouth 
the effect is seen in increased respiration. 

The external indications of the respiratory tract are around the 
mouth and nose, through which respiration occurs. Prominence of 
this region is a sign of greater respiratory power. The portion just 
below the mouth is indicative of deep respiration, and is associated 
with greater force of impulse and violence in coughing. The sym- 
pathy of the lungs with this region is shown by many facts — such as 
the brick-red line along the front teeth and gums which is developed 
in pneumonia, and the facility with which some persons catch cold 
after shaving around the mouth. I have been told by some that they 
wear their beards rather than shave, for the sake of this protection. 

The application of the hands on the respiratory region stimulates 



^44 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. [CHAP. VII. 

the lungs and the respiratory processes. Applied just below the 
mouth they excite depth of respiration. The depth of respiration is 
usually increased in exciting Calorification. 

The antero-basilar region also contains, just above Disease, the 
organ of Sensibility, which gives power of sensation to the opposite 
side of the body, according to the law of decussation which governs 
the brain in its connection with the body. 

The region of Sensibility connects anteriorly with the organ of 
Language, discovered by Dr. Gall and confirmed by the observations 
of pathologists, who neglected his discovery until confirmed by 
numerous dissections of morbid brains. 

My own discovery of the organ of Sensibility fifty years ago has 
been confirmed by the cruel experiment of Dr. Ferrier upon a 
monkey, in which, by injuring the base of the middle lobe, he de- 
stroyed the sense of feeling on the opposite side. The location in 
the monkey, however, appeared to be a little farther back than in 
man. 

The close connection of Sensibility and Language in the brain 
with the source of voluntary muscular action in the corpoi'a sti'iata 
explains the association of the paralyses of motion, sensibility, and 
language — paralytics often losing the power of speech or command 
of language. 

Dispersive passes upward and backward over the temples not only 
relieve morbid conditions, but diminish sensitiveness and tend to 
remove pain. They are especially beneficial in morbid conditions of 
the eyes and intolerance of light. Heat and excitement accu- 
mulated in this region produce a great increase of sensibility and 
impressibility, and sometimes develop the mesmeric somnambulism. 

The tendency to dreamy, somnolent conditions, somnambulism, 
somniloquence, and clairvoyant trance is connected with the locality 
about an inch behind the brow, marked Somnolence, by touching 
which a few minutes in the impressible we cause the quivering and 
closing of the eyelids which precedes a dreamy sleep or clairvoyant 
trance. This is a good method of inviting the approach of sleep or 
of making intellectual experiments on the intellectual powers and 
sympathies developed in that condition, in which psychometric per- 
ception and intuition, trance, and even clairvoyance may occur. 

In the upper half of the brain, the anterior portion antagonizes the 
occipito-basilar region, producing a gentle, harmless, unselfish nature, 
and moderating the violence of the passions and vehemence of the 
desires. In nervauric treatment, this region is chiefly useful for 
soothing purposes, brightening the intellect, elevating the sentiments, 
and promoting contentment, or improving the moral nature and 
friendly sentiments. 



CHAP. VII.] RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. I45 

The lateral portion, along the temporal arch, is the proper location 
for placing the hands to subdue restlessness, loquacity, and sexual im- 
pulses. The most posterior portion of the arch, vertically above the 
ear, is the location for resisting insane and hysterical conditions — 
the region marked Sanity. 

There is a remarkable coincidence and similarity between the 
organs on the median line and those located on a parallel line, 
beginning at the external angle of the brow, and running along the 
ridge between the lateral and superior surfaces of the cranium. 
Hence breadth of the upper surface of the brain compensates for the 
lack of height. 

The lateral aspect of each hemisphere corresponds in character 
and coincides in action with the lateral aspect of the other hemi- 
sphere, which looks in the same direction — the right coinciding with 
the right and the left with the left. Thus the interior or median 
aspect of one hemisphere coincides with the exterior aspect of the 
other, and this parallelism or similarity assists us in the study of the 
median convolutions. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ZONAL ARRANGEMENT AND THERAPEUTIC TREAT- 
MENT OF THE BRAIN. 

Explanation of Zonal Arrangement, with illustrations — Its indications of consti- 
tutional development — General law of functions — Vertical Zone of Excitability — 
Treatment on the cephalic region — Treatment of the heart — Of the thoracic 
region and of the liver — The Gastric and Abdominal region, and the Crural — The 
Morbid Zone explained — Hygienic caution, and curious illustrations — Relation of 
disease to the brain — Treatment of the Crural region — The Sexual region — Treat- 
ment of special functions — Health and disease — Sleep and wakefulness — The 
ideal powers — General vigor — Feverish conditions — Mental soundness — Warmth 
— Mental discipline — Nature of nervauric treatment. 



The zonal arrangement of the brain is a necessary consequence of 
the laws of Pathognomy. Our review of the spinal system shows 
that as the organs of the body occupy successive zones, their control- 
ling centres in the spinal system are necessarily in similar successive 
order, viz., the cephalic, pulmonic, cardiac, hepatic, gastric, abdomi- 
nal, pelvic, and crural — the lumbar and sacral regions being at the 
same time abdominal, pelvic, and crural, as the superior region is at 
the same time cephalic, brachial, and thoracic — the internal visceral 
organs being associated with the external muscular, in the spinal 
functions, and a similar arrangement being apparent in the brain — 
the visceral and the energetic faculties being on the same plane or in 
the same zone — as in the spinal column they occupy the same 
segments. 

The arrangement is so clearly exhibited on the map that we need 
only to grow familiar with the locations to understand their treat- 
ment, guided by certain general principles. 

Each cerebral zone indicated on the map tends to direct the vital 
forces according to its name, and gives prominence to the region it 
represents. This is its direct physiological influence on the constitu- 
tion. 

But aside from this direct physiological influence, each cerebral 
locality has its psychic function, and this psychic function compels 
the same physiological action which is promoted by its direct influ- 
ence ; and this wonderful combination of psychic and physiological 
influences, by a perfect but simple and intelligible law, is one of the 
grandest illustrations of divine wisdom. 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. I47 

To illustrate this remark, all the functions of the organs in the 
cephalic zone are of a cephalic tendency. They increase the vitality 
and power of the brain by the exercise of their functions (such as 
Spirituality, Religion, Integrity, Love, Hope, Serenity, Fortitude, 
Energy, Health, Sublimity, Tranquillity, Sanity, Heroism, Dignity, 
Firmness, and Moral Ambition) and consequently produce a more 
perfect and active life. In the Gastric and A bdominal zones we have 
the selfish, restless, violent, and gloomy passions, which stimulate the 
appetites and promote intemperate indulgence, while they rouse all 
the muscular energy of the lower limbs. Thus do the psychic facul- 
ties concur with the physiological organs they stimulate through the 
brain. The unity and harmony of the human constitution are no- 
where more clearly perceived than when we study the psychic powers 
in all their phenomena, and trace their effects on the constitution. 
But this is a vast study, which can be illustrated only in the volume 
of Anthropology. 

To comprehend the zonal arrangements for therapeutic purposes, 
we need only apply the general laws of cerebral science — under- 
standing that each zone uses and stimulates its own region of the 
body. We may examine the development of the head, to see what 
organs predominate in the constitution or which are deficient. Thus 
if the head be very broad and high at the cephalic zone and very 
small in the crural, we know that animal life and muscular energies 
are below par, and that the predominant action of the brain in its 
upper and anterior regions may diminish still more the basilar 
energy. Hence, there is probably a failure in the muscular energy 
and in the nutrition. The body is apt to be imperfectly developed 
or lean, and the muscular powers weak, though the nervous energies 
may be strong. On the contrary, when the crural region is large we 
have a robust physical development, muscular energy, and in some 
cases stoutness or corpulence. If the cephalic region be proportion- 
ally small or imperfectly developed — there is less mental and moral 
control, and a greater tendency to exhaustion of the nervous system 
and all forms of nervous disorder, as well as moral irregularities. 

If the Gastric and Abdominal zones are defective in development, 
there will probably be great feebleness or inactivity in the digestive 
organs — with appetites feeble and easily controlled, and constitu- 
tional temperance. 

If there be great narrowness or lack of development at the Hepatic 
zone, the liver will be found inactive, and torpor of the liver is a 
probable consequence. 

If the Cardiac zone be largely developed we shall have a strong cir- 
culation with the consequent excitability and energy of temperament, 



14^ ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VIII. 

and a greater passional energy than is desirable, which will be absent 
when the Cardiac zone is moderate. 

If the Thoracic zone be large, it will give the temperament a bright- 
ness and activity, less restless and turbulent than that which comes 
from the lower organs, but less calm and self-controlled than the 
cephalic temperament. A deep cerebellum and full development at 
the cephalic region of the spine or across the shoulders, would indi- 
cate great and sustained muscular strength. 

These remarks are not sufficient to guide one in a physiological 
examination which requires a knowledge of all the organs, but will 
serve to explain the significance of the zones. The subject is so 
complicated as to require a complete exposition of the brain for its 
proper understanding, but an approximate conception may be realized 
by dividing the occiput into three regions, corresponding to the upper 
dorsal, the lower dorsal, and the lumbar and sacral regions of the 
spinal column. Each of these regions has its correlative and co- 
operative region before it, which it sustains in action. (See pages 76 
and 159.) 

The general law of the brain is that organs have a more refined, 
delicate, intellectual character as they approach the front, and a more 
energetic, reactive character toward the back ; also that they have a 
more refined, lovely, pleasing, spiritual character as they ascend, and 
a more gross, selfish, repulsive, and violent character as they descend. 

Hence, when we look at the zones, we find the energy of each 
organ indicated by the posterior, and the delicacy by the anterior 
part of the zone ; while on the side of the head, between the front 
and back, there is an excitability which gives activity without perma- 
nent power, and in front there is a capacity for manifestation that 
only exhausts, and requires to be compensated by the repose of sleep. 

Looking along the side head, from the ear up, we easily recognize 
the excitable activity of each organ, but we must look further back 
for its vital force. Thus along the whole side of the head and body 
we have a longitudinal and vertical segment of excitability for all the 
organs, intermediate between the exhaustive delicacy of the front 
and the enduring power of the back, upon which latter, as already 
stated, the curative processes of nervauric healing are chiefly effec- 
tive, and to which galvanic currents carry the energy that develops 
life and strength ; as has been shown by Onimus and Legros. 

There is so little physiological utility for the healer in the anterior 
regions, that I generally present the zonal arrangement of the head 
only to the line of activity or excitability, without carrying forward 
the zones to the regions of exhaustion, of which the most complete 
and pernicious is at the anterior end of the middle lobe, at which we 
locate the organ of Disease. 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. I49 

When the nervauric physician would treat the brain he applies his 
hands upon each of these zones to invigorate corresponding organs, 
as he might, if he had control of circumstances, invigorate them by 
the exercise of the organs in the natural way; for example, he might 
invigorate the heart, not by stimulating with the hands the cardiac 
regions of physical courage, but by placing the patient in a position 
which would require the exercise of physical courage. He might 
invigorate the refined action of the brain, not by placing his hands- 
on the region of Reverence and Sublimity, but by placing him in 
grand scenery or cathedral scenes which would rouse those faculties.. 

I present the zonal treatment of the constitution through the brain 
as an important adjunct to healing on the body, but not as a complete 
statement of cephalic healing, which requires minute knowledge of 
the cerebral organs, nor as an exact exposition of Anthropology. 

Proceeding upon the proposition that energy is a posterior quality 
— a quality of the occiput, — the healer would place his hands on the 
anterior part of the cephalic zone, above and a trifle in front of the 
ear, when he wishes to give a stimulus to cerebral activity without 
calling forth its strongest capacity. The calm, emotional thought 
thus elicited at Reverence, Sublimity, and Tranquillity is a pleasant 
condition, but is not the strongest display of brain power. Moving 
his hands further back, he elicits the influence of Sanity, which is 
closely analogous to that of Firmness. This faculty gives a strength 
of mind and stability of brain, tenacity of will and power of concen- 
tration which resist all the exciting, depressing, and deranging influ- 
ences from which insanity comes. Magnanimity, a little further 
back, gives still greater positive strength of mind, and from these 
two organs across to the median line we find still more active sources 
of cerebral power in Cheerfulness, Energy, Heroism, Firmness, 
Sense of Honor, Approbativeness, Oratory, Ambition, Self-Suffi- 
ciency, Dignity, and Self-Reliance or Self-Confidence. 

Under the influence of these organs he is not a passive, calm 
thinker or listener, but feels a disposition and has the power to 
impress others with his own thoughts, and thinks with an energy 
and brilliance which is impressive. 

As in the cephalic zone, so in each zone activity is frontal and 
power occipital. Each organ of the body may be roused by its cere- 
bral zone ; and hence the entire occipital region furnishes a rousing 
energy for the whole person, whether stimulated by the nervauric 
hand or by the natural circumstances that rouse our energy, ambi- 
tion, courage, passions, and appetites. 

When the healer is familiar with the zones, he has a simple task in 
cerebral treatment to give the organs excitement or stimulation, if 



I50 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VI J I. 

torpid, through the lateral section, the vertical zone of excitability, 
and to reinforce them, if lacking in power, by the occipital portion of 
their zone. 

The heart, for example, may be roused by the excitability in the 
vertical zone, just in front of the ear (Cardiac zone); but it is very 
seldom indeed that any such excitement is desirable. The increased 
rapidity and force of its action produced in that way is like that pro- 
duced by alarming or exciting scenes or dangers, and would, as a 
general rule, be quite exhausting if carried far. But the increased 
vigor of action produced in the occipital part of the zone by Business 
Energy, Adhesiveness, Aggressiveness, Combativeness, and Love of 
Power, is not of that exhausting character, and, if not carried to 
excess, would be very beneficial in a debilitated state of the heart, 
which is very common — a state of dilation in which it is expanded 
and its muscular coat thinned (especially on the right side), — a con- 
dition especially frequent among females, and recognized by the 
sonorous action of the heart, its beats being heard throughout the 
chest and distinctly recognized at the back. 

The best locality for cardiac stimulation is not Combativeness, 
which is too exciting or forcible, and extends below the cardiac zone 
proper, but posterior to Adhesiveness in the organs of Business 
Energy and Oratory. This corresponds with the cardiac location on 
the spinal column, and if the two localities were simultaneously 
excited the effect would be enhanced.* 

The region of cardiac excitability sometimes needs tranquillizing, 
and its antagonist is the region of Firmness, which gives stability 
and tranquil regularity. The organ of Health gives the same stabil- 
ity, with a little more of agreeable activity. These localities should 
be firmly fixed in the mind of the physician — Firmness on the 
median line vertically above the cavity of the ear, and running back 
about two inches to the organ of Dignity ; Health, parallel to Dig- 
nity, midway between the median line and temporal arch (which 
forms the ridge between the lateral and superior surfaces of the 
head). 

The organ of Calorification, reached through the chin, co-operates 
with that of cardiac excitability, and adds to the rapidity of the 
heart's action (which is illustrated in fever), and consequently the 
organ of Coolness, in the thoracic zone (on the middle of the side head 
immediately behind a vertical line from the posterior portion of 
the ear) is one of sustaining and strengthening influences for the 

* It was by these and the anterior organs that I controlled the pulse of Dr. Lane 
before a committee of Boston physicians in 1S43, anc * produced an enfeebled action 
of the heart similar to a low stage of fever, as described by Dr. Flint and reported by 
Dr. Bowditch, when I excited organs anterior to the ear. 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. • 1 5 I 

heart. In a case of pericarditis, or any inflammatory affection of the 
heart, we need the influences of Firmness, Health, and Coolness, 
with dispersive passes by the hands or the sponge of warmj*vater (or 
hot water) on the cheek and temples, passing over Disease and 
Cardiac Excitability backward and upward.* In angina pectoris we 
should place our hand on the middle of the dorsal region, and with 
the other make dispersive passes upward and backward over the 
heart, and especially over the region of Cardiac Excitability on the 
body, below and behind the nipple. 

The Thoracic region at the temples produces a nervous and 
sanguineous determination to the lungs, prompting expansion by the 
ribs, or costal inspiration. This inspiration, as a physical act, 
promotes spiritual inspiration, which will be found in those who have 
a full development along the line from pulmonic excitability to the 
external angle of the brow. 

In dry, asthmatic, or constricted conditions of the lungs this pul- 
monic excitement may be beneficial, but it would be objectionable in 
pneumonia, or any inflammatory irritation in the chest, in which we 
need the invigorating influence of the pulmonic energy at the back 
part of the pulmonic zone of the brain, one and a half inches from the 
median line, where we find the same influence as on the back 
between the shoulders for four or five inches below the neck, the 
best locality for the invigoration of the lungs. But all severe irrita- 
tions or inflammations of the lungs are best treated by tranquillizing 
derivation — by stimulating the anterior tibial surface of the leg. 

The Thoracic region on the side head assumes a more exciting 
character as it descends, and rouses the heart and lower portion of 
the lungs ; passing then into the Phrenic zone it rouses the dia- 
phragm and developes a more extensive and exciting respiration. 
Hence we may say that the entire side head below the Cephalic zone 
tends to increase the activity of respiration — the lower portion 
increasing its depth by action of the diaphragm. 

The liver may be stimulated by applying the fingers on the hepatic 
region, adjacent to the meatus auditorius (cavity of the ear) ; but in 
proportion as we extend our application backward on the same level, 
we give it a greater amount of vital energy. 

The fact that the cerebral organs are the organs of psychic im- 
pulses does not modify the truth of this doctrine of therapeutic treat- 

*The first important application of my discoveries to the treatment of a serious 
case of disease, in 1841, was in the case of a young man at Louisville, dangerously 
ill of pericarditis, in whom I had perfect control of the heart, through the brain, 
and taught his attendants to soothe the action of the heart by sponging with warm 
water the cardiac region on the side head, which was more effective than any 
medical treatment that he had received. On his recovery he ascribed his cure to 
the treatment I administered and directed, which was entirely through the brain. 



I52 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VIII. 

merit, for the psychic impulses in each zone are precisely those which 
affect the physiological organs to which they correspond, and with 
which they effect their purposes. When we study their functions 
we perceive that each organ in the Cephalic zone requires the use 
of the brain ; that each in the Pulmonic gives greater energy 
and activity to normal respiration ; that each in the Cardiac zone is 
associated in its action with greater activity of the heart ; that each 
in the Hepatic zone tends to increase the energy of the liver ; and 
that all below the Hepatic zone promote the energy of digestion and 
consumption of food by their restless impulses and animal force. 

The Gastric and Abdominal region, lying in front of the ear, along 
the jawbone, is the cerebral source of that activity in the stomach 
and alimentary canal which creates the exhaustion of hunger, and is 
therefore an important region to treat in cases of inactivity or disease 
of the stomach. A predominant action in this locality would not be 
the best thing for gastric health, but in touching this region the 
vital ' influence of the operator adds an element of health, and I 
frequently place the thumbs on Health, while the fingers stimulate 
the Gastric organ. 

The most effective energy for the Gastric-abdominal region in 
treating the brain will be given by placing both hands on the occiput, 
covering the base of the cranium, while the fingers rest upon the 
Gastric organ just before the ear, or if standing before the patient, 
to place the thumbs on the Gastric organ, and the hands around the 
base of the cranium. 

Immediately below the Gastric and Abdominal zone comes the 
Crural, which we cover with the hands on the neck. In the psychic 
sense it is a region of turbulence and restless animality ; in a 
physiological sense the stimulation of the lower limbs to action and 
development. The demand for food, and the ability to dispose of it 
when swallowed, depend mainly upon the lateral portion of the 
occiput, and we have an interesting confirmation of this in an experi- 
ment of Dr. Ferrier, in which the desire for food in a monkey was 
destroyed by an injury of the posterior part of the brain. 

The depressing influence of hunger and of gastric irritations may 
be diminished by the antagonists of the Gastric organ, which pro- 
duce a feeling of buoyant energy and fortitude, which destroys the 
feeling of hunger. The South American medicine Erythroxylon Coca 
produces a similar effect. The organ of Fortitude, which resists the 
weakness and depression of hunger and other gloomy influences, is 
in front of the organ of Health, and exterior to the organ of Firm- 
ness. This does not produce entire indifference to food or incapacity 
to enjoy it, but relieves the gnawing and depressing feeling of 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 1 53 

hunger. To produce entire indifference to food, it would be neces- 
sary to rouse the emotions of the upper surface of the brain, which 
lies in front of the vertical line. It is quite a familiar fact that love 
produces indifference to food. The greater activity of the superior 
conditions in women is the cause of their moderate appetites, which 
do not run into intemperance and gluttony. 

K morbid ox irritable zone may be recognized at the junction of 
the Hepatic and Gastric zones, each of which partakes largely of 
morbific capacities. Anteriorly, on the body, the morbific zone pre- ? 
sents the epigastric and hypochondriac regions. The hypochondriac 
is so sensitive to all injurious influences as to become the chief inlet 
of disease, and is therefore marked as the region of Disease, while 
the epigastric is a region of extreme sensibility. The morbid zone 
of the body contains the most degenerate blood, the maximum con- 
gestive tendency, and the greatest sensibility to injury. A blow on 
this region anteriorly is the most prostrating and fatal that can be 
inflicted, and irritations in this region have the most depressing 
effect on the vital and moral energies. In Claude Bernard's experi- 
ments on the stomach of living dogs it was found that the introduc- 
tion of a little boiling water threw the animal at once into a kind of 
adynamic state, which was followed by death in three or four hours. 
The mucous membrane of the stomach was found red and swollen, 
whilst an abundant exudation of blackish blood had taken place into 
the cavity of the organ. Like injurious effects, to a greater or less 
degree, followed an introduction of other irritants, such as nitrate 
of silver or ammonia. There is no other portion of the body where 
such prostrating effects could be produced by so small an amount of 
injury. Entire limbs may be destroyed by inflammation or suppur- 
ation, and large portions of the lungs may be destroyed by ulceration, 
without fatal consequences. The destruction of life by hot water in 
the stomach should warn us against the dangerous effects of con- 
tinual drugging by harsh remedies, against which nature revolts. 
Medicines should be made so agreeable in their taste and other pro- 
perties that they could not offend the stomach or the senses. It is 
difficult to accept the man as a friend, who insults us at his first 
approach, or who gives us a painful blow; and it may be as difficult 
to reconcile the stomach to the offensive agents that we thrust upon 
it, while it readily yields to the beneficent influence of mineral waters 
and of homoeopathic medicines which are inoffensive. 

Warm clothing around the waist, especially in front, is very debili- 
tating and even prostrating, especially in warm weather, and the cool- 
ing of the waist by a wet cloth, or, as it is sometimes called, a wet pack, 
is often very wholesome and bracing. The anterior half of the morbid 



154 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VIII. 

zone is a region from which dispersive passes are very often required, 
and upon which we may often with great benefit apply the positive pole 
for currents to any part of the posterior surfaces of the body. 

A curious illustration of the character of the morbid zone was fur- 
nished in the experiments of Brown-Sequard, who found that in divid- 
ing one half of the spinal cord, between the seventh dorsal and third 
lumbar nerves in the guinea pig, the animal in from three to five 
weeks became epileptic ; also, that on the injured side there was a 
space one and one half inches long by one inch wide, just below the 
ear, where irritations or pinching would produce the epileptic fit. This 
cerebral influence corresponds to the principles of Sarcognomy. 

The experiment of cauterizing the lower lobe of the ear for sciatica, 
which is said to have been successfully performed in France, is another 
illustration of the same principle, as it acts through the crural region. 

A citizen of a Massachusetts village was lately arrested for boring, 
his children's ears with a red-hot iron. He said that he did it to cure 
the toothache, and that he had often treated toothache in that 
manner. 

Another illustration of the morbid zone was furnished in vivisec- 
tions to destroy the supra-renal capsules, an operation of no formid- 
able character, but in which the animals would die from injury of the 
solar plexus, unless great skill were exercised. 

Morbidness or tendency to disease consists in an extreme capacity 
for feeling and being affected by injurious influences. Hence it can 
be developed fully only in the frontal regions. Farther back, as 
reactive energy appears, it assumes the character of irritability and 
quarrelsome or domineering aggressiveness — a condition morally 
morbid, which propagates moral and physical disease among its- 
victims. This zone extends along the base of the brain, just over the 
meatus auditorius (cavity of the ear), and embraces a group of impulses 
which are discordant and wretched when they predominate, leading to 
a miserable life. 

The reader will bear in mind that we do not regard disease as the 
primitive or normal function of any organ, but as the result of malign 
impressions on the sensitive and irritable condition which belongs to 
certain organs. The morbific faculties are those which are most easily 
disturbed and which have the least reactive power, and the morbid 
results occur when their irritation overpowers the sustaining vital 
energies which belong to the opposite class of faculties. Hence if the 
morbific faculties predominate in the constitution, morbid effects 
inevitably occur under the ordinary circumstances of home life. 

As the Crural region (the source of the energy of the lower limbs) 
is located in the spinal cord and in the brain near the Gastro-abdom- 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 1 55 

inal, it follows that active locomotion is an efficient invigorator for the 
digestive organs, and that the exercise of the cephalic zone- giving 
predominance to the higher organs of the brain would diminish the 
activity of stomach and bowels, which is usually the effect of sedentary 
intellectual pursuits. The organs below the diaphragm all require an 
active life to give them energy, and in nervauric treatment they 
require the hands to be placed around the basis of the cranium. 

In addition to the Morbid zone at the waist, which affects the phy- 
siological functions directly, there is another at the base of the pelvis 
which tends strongly to the disorder and prostration of the nervous 
system in mania, idiocy, and paralysis. It corresponds to a cephalic 
region at the base of the cranium, the anterior portion of which is the 
region of insanity. Even when the morbid region of the pelvis does 
not fully develop its sympathetic effects on the brain, it shows a sim- 
ilar deranging effect on the nervous system of the body, producing 
many derangements and diseases which are curable only when the 
pelvic irritation is removed, as has been fully demonstrated in Dr. 
Pratt's Treatise on Orificial Surgery. 

When the hands are applied around the neck they are on the crural 
region, and send a stimulation into the lower limbs, giving them 
warmth and strength, and reinforcing animal life generally. 

Although strictly speaking the organs developing through the neck 
(or reached through the neck) are those that correspond with the lower 
limbs and rouse their muscular energy, they are associated with organs 
a little higher, as the lower limbs are associated with the lumbar and 
sacral regions of the spine, the source of their impulses. Hence the 
base of the occiput, including Combativeness, should be impressed 
as well as the cervical region, when we would make the strongest im- 
pression on the lower limbs. 

On the median line, on the level of the crural region, just below 
the occipital knob, corresponding to the middle region of the cere- 
bellum and posterior to the medulla oblongata, is the region of Sex- 
ual Energy, corresponding with the lumbo-sacral junction of the 
spinal column, which vitalizes the sexual organs, adds much to the 
general vigor of the constitution, and gives a great stimulus to the 
nervous system, corresponding to the normal effects of sexual 
development, and therefore highly important in reanimating impaired 
constitutions. I have been especially struck with its value in reno- 
vating feeble or diseased eyes. The fingers of one hand being placed 
in the median fossa just mentioned, and the other in front, on the 
central organ of vision, just above the centre of the eyeball, gives a 
restorative, brightening influence to the eyes, more effective than any 
other mode of cerebral treatment. In giving this treatment the optic 



I56 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VIII. 

nerves and their origin in the tubercula quadrigemina (optic lobes) 
are between the two localities treated. 

The Sexual functions respond to two localities, the cerebellic fossa, 
already mentioned, a seat of physical energy, and the prominence of 
the larynx on the front of the neck, which coincides with the an- 
terior surface of the spinal cord, near the foramen magnum. The 
doctrines of Gall, in reference to the cerebellum, were an approxi- 
mation to the truth, as its sexual functions occupy a small portion on 
the median line. 

Finally, while I regard the zonal arrangement as valuable, both in 
a philosophic sense and for therapeutic uses, I do not regard it as at 
all exempt from the intricate blending and co-operation which we find 
in the spinal region. Each organ has secondary relations or co-opera- 
tions above and below its own zone, especially when influenced by 
the action of others. 

Thus Alimentiveness, in its common action developing hunger, 
excites the reckless, combative, domineering energies of its own zone, 
which demand " bread or blood," and which in carnivorous animals 
drive them to attack their prey. But when fully satisfied it co- 
operates with the Cheerfulness and Serenity of the moral region, 
and then stimulates Adhesiveness, desiring society, the physical in- 
fluence of which promotes nourishment and assimilation. Hence 
the pleasures of the table are best enjoyed socially, and few would 
desire to be solitary at their meals. 

The region of Adhesiveness on the body is on the line of the in- 
tercostal nerves that surround the stomach, and the line of the 
splanchnic nerves that supply the stomach through the ganglia of the 
solar plexus. Hence we should expect it to co-operate as it does with 
the digestive functions. 

Similar remarks may be made of the other zones, but they are not 
necessary in this brief exposition. 

Special Functions for Cerebral Treatment. 

Health and Disease. — When the fingers are placed on Health 
it gives a delightful recuperative influence to the whole system, and 
when passes or gentle frictions are made, upward and backward 
toward Health, from the region of Disease (at the cheek-bone, occupy- 
ing the anterior end of the middle lobe, just behind the eyes) it adds 
materially to the effect. The influence of the organ of Health is 
heightened by placing the entire hand across the superior posterior 
region, covering Health and its neighbors. The hygienic region is 
the posterior part of the cerebral zone of the brain and a part of 
the cephalic zone of the body, which illustrates the proposition that 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN- 1 57 

health is a high spiritual function depending mainly on the soul and 
brain. 

Sleep and Wakefulness. — The wakeful faculties are the in- 
tellectual, energetic, and restless. The centre of wakefulness is the 
intellectual organ of Consciousness, located in the centre of the fore- 
head. Its antagonist is located on a line running back from it hori- 
zontally, about three fourths of an inch behind a vertical line corre- 
sponding to the back of the ear. This may be called the organ of 
Repose, and it is only when excited into absolute predominance oven 
the frontal organ that it manifests the sleepy influence. Its normal 
influence when we are awake is to invigorate the automatic life of 
the body, and counteract the exhaustive influence of the intellect ; 
also, to restrain its discursiveness and confine its action to objects 
nearer, more easily understood, and of more practical value ; and, 
when the intellectual organs are fatigued, to bring on sleep and sustain 
the unconscious processes of interior life. 

I have often produced sleep by this organ, and I find it best to use 
the organ of Somnolence, an inch behind the brow, to facilitate the 
process. The region of Somnolence greatly increases the impressi- 
bility; after the fingers rest upon it a few minutes, a calm, dreamy 
feeling is developed and the eyes wink or close. A dreamy sleep is 
produced in the very impressible, and sometimes runs into completely 
unconscious sleep. When the two organs are touched at once, a 
sound sleep is the usual result, which may be assisted or retarded by 
other influences. The amiable organs of the upper surface of the 
brain produce a contented quietness which favors sleep. Patience 
and Tranquillity (see map) assist, as Irritability and Turbulence hinder. 
The most efficient co-operation is the organ of Lethargy, which we 
reach just above the larynx (see map), which promotes a dull drowsi- 
ness. In removing sleep we disperse from Somnolence, Lethargy, 
and Sleep, upward and backward, touch the organ of Consciousness, 
the organ of Light (or vision), and any of the energetic organs, such 
as Health, Energy, Ambition, and Turbulence. 

The Ideal Powers. — For the display of intellectual and spiritual 
phenomena, we may excite the Somnolent region to increase im- 
pressibility and intuition. By the organ of Spirituality (see map) we 
may excite the capacity for feeling and perceiving spiritual influences, 
which may be brought to the mind by holding on the forehead a 
letter of some deceased friend, or a picture— the psychometric im- 
pression from which may bring a consciousness of the present condi- 
tion of the departed. To give more varied perceptions we may touch 
the region of Clairvoyance, lying at the root of the nose (occupying 
the internal base of the front lobe). 



1 5S ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. [CHAP. VIII. 

General Vigor may be promoted by placing one hand across the 
region surrounding Healtn — the superior posterior part of the occi- 
put, — and the other around the lower part of the occiput, or by plac- 
ing the fingers upon Health, Vital Force, and the sexual region in 
the fossa below the occipital knob. 

Feverish Conditions may best be treated on the body, but may 
be assisted by treatment on the head, making dispersive passes from 
Calorification and Disease to Health, and stimulating the organ of 
Coolness, which lies on a vertical line corresponding with the poste- 
rior margin of the ear, extending two or three inches upward from the 
level of the top of the ear. 

Mental Soundness. — The region of Sanity is the seat of those 
energies which resist every form of mental disorder, whether In- 
sanity, Dementia, Melancholia, Monomania, Lethargy, Idiocy, Child 
ishness, Hysteria, Delirium Tremens, Rage, Homicidal Mania, Sui- 
cide, or Kleptomania. The insane tendencies are reached under the 
jaw ; hence passes from the junction of the neck and the jaw toward 
Sanity would have a good effect. Melancholy has a somewhat higher 
location (on the lower angle of the jaw), and the special antagonist of 
Melancholy — the region of Cheerfulness — is situated just above 
Sanity, being above the parietal ridge and on the superior aspect of 
the head. The excitement of the organ of Cheerfulness produces a 
delightfully cheering effect, removing all mental depression. The 
special locations of Idiocy, Childishness, Hysteria, Melancholy, and 
Lethargy are shown on the map. 

Warmth. — The region of warmth in the head is the anterior 
aspect of the medulla oblongata, and its external surface is at the 
chin. The hand placed around the chin stimulates Calorification,, 
and the effect is enhanced by placing the other hand on the occipital, 
base, which is a co-operative region. If the hand also extends down 
the neck in the crural region it tends to throw the warmth to the 
lower limbs. There is a secondary region of warmth in the centre 
of the temples, which operates more interiorly and has more of a 
psychic character. 

Mental Discipline and Concentration are best promoted by 
the region of Sanity, especially its anterior portion, in which we find 
that power of quiet concentration, as well as the disposition to local 
attachment and fixedness of residence which phrenologists have 
ascribed to the space just behind Dignity or Self-Esteem on the 
median line — a location which I find entirely erroneous. It is the 
regions of Insanity and Turbulence which destroy mental concen- 
tration. 

Nature of Nervauric Treatment. — The reader understands 



CHAP. VIII.] ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 1 59 

that the application of the fingers or hands to any part of the head 
or body of an impressible individual stimulates the functions of that 
locality. But much depends upon the character of the hand that is 
applied. If it belongs to a person of feeble vitality, far inferior to 
the person touched, it will not have a stimulating effect. The con- 
tact of a very inferior constitution is of no benefit to the superior 
person ; and on the other hand a person of very superior vital endow- 
ments imparts a stimulating effect to every one that he touches, 
bringing out strong local manifestations. In addition to this the 
diffusive influence of his own constitution is imparted to the subject, 
so that there will be health and restoration in every touch, and a 
strong healing power exerted whenever he approaches the patient. 
Persons of such. endowments are capable of making cures by merely 
coming into the presence of the patient, and may cure great numbers 
with extreme rapidity. 

Again, there are those whose psychic power occupies so large a 
sphere that they sympathize with patients at a distance, and by 
means of this rapport are able to relieve or cure them as if personally 
present. I know physicians who have this sympathy with distant 
patients, and I have even sometimes felt the influence of a morbid 
condition in friends at a distance, so as to know the exact time of 
their suffering and its termination. There are many well-attested 
cases in which patients at a distance were healed by the late Dr. J. 
R. Newton. 

The psychic power that goes' with fixed attention or with the touch 
of the hand may be conveyed to those of psy- 
chometric sensitiveness by a letter or by a piece 
of paper which has received the nervaura of the 
operator. The healing of patients by what is 
called magnetized paper has been carried on 
extensively, and is abundantly attested by the 
patients. 

The correspondence of the occiput with the 
spinal cplumn is shown in this engraving ; and 
the correlation of the occipito-spinal region 
with the anterior organs of the brain is shown on page j6. 




CHAPTER. IX. 

HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 

Definition of Health as an organ and faculty — Why that name is used — Effects 
of the organ of Health — Animation — Health associated with happiness, virtue, 
and activity — Position and influence of the organ — Its ethical and spiritual rela- 
tions — Vital power and animation, disease and death — Function of the shoulders 
and crown of the head — Relations of Health to ethics and religion — Its position in 
the brain between the moral and physical — The spiritual as the support of physical 
health — Deficiency of Language for nomenclature — Bia, Zoe, Anima, Animus, 
Psyche, Psychobiosis, and Psychodynamia as names — Animation and Health — 
Difficulty of expressing psychic and physical life in conjunction — Their combina- 
tion in the superior posterior region of the brain and body — Healthful physical 
and moral exercises — Cultivation of the sentiments qualifies for healing — Love 
and Health correlative — Experience of Dr. Jennings — Personal healing by Newton 
and others — The religious and spiritual elements — Necessity of scientific prepara- 
tion for healing. 

Psychic Treatment. — Permanent or constitutional health should be estab- 
lished — This requires moral power, not passive or negative, but active virtues — 
Power the element of success — Pursuit of duty the only satisfactory success — The 
higher virtues, heroic — Happiness may be brought to families and a perfect 
education to youth — Psychic treatment an indispensable part of education — 
Health and Virtue twin brothers — Special directions for treatment by the hand 
and the battery. 

The object of all treatment is the restoration of health, and it is 
necessary to understand in what that consists. ' Health, in the 
negative sense, is freedom from all disturbing injurious influence, 
leaving us to enjoy all the pleasures of life as we obtain them. 

In this sense health is obtained by removing from the blood all 
noxious or imperfectly vitalized elements, and promoting the absorp- 
tion and removal of all objectionable structures, such as the tubercle 
of consumption or the cells of cancerous matter, leaving the vital 
force to act unincumbered. 

To effect this, we must rouse all the secreting organs to the full 
performance of their duty; for the purity of the blood depends on 
the perfection of the secretions. This must be done either by 
medical or nervauric treatment. We must find the organ, or organs, 
which are diseased or sluggish, and rouse them into proper action, 
at the same time strengthening the vital force to assist. 

But health in the positive sense means much more than this. It 
means a healthy or disease-resisting constitution — the predominance 
of vital power, resisting injuries, over Sensibility and Excitability 
which succumb. Hence, after the restoration of morbid organs and 
relief from morbid conditions, we should energize the faculties and 
onrans which give the highest conditions of health. 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. l6l 

Perfect health is a condition in which there is a large amount of 
physical and moral energy, and in which the sensibility, excitability, 
and irritability, though sufficient for all necessary purposes, are small 
in comparison with the vital forces, which endure and resist the 
attacks upon our sensibility. 

The revolutionary discovery of the new Anthropology is, that all 
forces and faculties belonging to man have their special seats in the 
brain, and corresponding positions in the body. Every elementary 
power or tendency culminates to a certain locality. Health culmin- 
ates to its locality in the brain, on each side of Self-Respect or 
Dignity, and in the body to the middle of each shoulder blade. The 
development of these two localities insures a healthy constitution. 
But I must protest in the beginning against the phraseology which 
I am compelled to use by the poverty of the English language. The 
word Health does not adequately represent the function of the 
cephalic and corporeal organs to which I have applied it, for the 
word has merely a negative meaning, signifying an agreeable 
freedom from the influences which cause disease, and their results. 
No cerebral organ can give us freedom from the causes of disease, 
and thus compel health, but as the organ in question gives us the 
vital force which resists disease, and thereby sustains a vigorous 
health, I have hence been induced to use the word health to express 
its function, as it generally produces health when sufficiently- 
developed, as the opposite sensitive region is sure to result in disease 
if sufficiently predominant. The word health, therefore, as it ex- 
presses the tendency of the organ, has been used for physiological 
and hygienic instruction. It is not deceptive, for the influence of 
the region of Health, either in the brain or in the body, whenever 
excited, is to produce an immediate improvement of the physical and 
mental condition. The lungs expand more freely and pleasantly, the 
brain becomes clearer and more active, the emotions more vivid, the 
impulses stronger, the muscles more ready for action, the counte- 
nance more inclined to smile, and all the viscera, lungs, stomach, liver, 
kidneys, etc , begin to feel better, and, if troubled with any disorder, 
to diminish or remove it. It is the general renovator of disturbed 
functions, and the power that resists the encroachment of all malign 
influences on either mind or body. But health is only one aspect 
of its effects — the negative aspect. Its positive character is vital 
power and harmony — normal life. It animates alike the physical 
and the moral constitution. It is cheerful, energetic, strong, pleas- 
ing, attractive. It gives perfect and exuberant activity to the entire 
physical, social, moral, and intellectual faculties. It animates every 
nerve, function, and faculty to normal action, and if required to 



1 62 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

select the word which comes nearest to expressing its efficient and 
ubiquitous influence, as I have habitually witnessed it in the impres- 
sible and felt it in myself, I should select the word animation. But 
the word animation must be understood in its largest sense, as anima- 
tion of the entire being in its perfect action and sustained power 
and virtue. Indeed the word virtue is almost as good a name as 
animation. 

" Happiness is health," said Dr. Geo. Moore in his essay on the 
Body and Mind, and this is near the truth. Happiness, which is 
synonymous with the best activity of the coronal region of the brain 
(and the summit of the chest), in which the faculties of love and hope 
reside, may be regarded as spiritual health, for it is a condition of 
harmonious activity of our higher powers — the whole upper half of 
the brain. 

But while this admirably adapts man to the celestial life in which 
just such a character is found, it is not so well adapted to the strug- 
gling, warring condition of life on earth, as a faculty of more physical 
energy. This faculty we may find in the region to which I have 
given the name of ' Health,' which is associated with the upper pos- 
terior region of the brain and the posterior surface of the shoulder. 

Health as thus located is between the amiable spiritual energies of 
the upper surface of the brain and the more physical energies of the 
occiput, which location enables it to combine them happily, produc- 
ing a vigorous combination of spiritual and physical energies, and 
restraining more effectively than Hope that extreme sensibility 
which produces liability to disease, and that extreme sympathy with 
others which is not expedient in earth life. 

Health in this vigorous form may be called happiness, but it is not 
that intense or ecstatic happiness which belongs to the celestial 
region of the brain. 

The faculty of the organ of Health leads to a constant activity of 
mind and body and to all things that promote health. This activity 
is the indispensable condition of health, and it was well expressed 
by the elder Cato : " Let a man be but constantly exercised in labors 
like these, and he will not so soon find the breaches of age. Years 
will steal upon him insensibly ; he will grow old without feeling it ; 
nay, when he comes to break at last, the house will crumble gently 
and fall down so slowly as not to give him any pain." 

It is an obvious truth in reference to all human faculties that they 
are developed to their highest power by regular vigorous exercise 
and by enjoying that which is congenial to their nature — avoiding 
what is depressing. The exercise and culture of any faculty is found 
in that which it spontaneously does— as the faculty of love is culti- 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 163 

vat eel by loving, and the propensity to murder by committing murder. 
The faculty of Health prompts to an active, gay, and cheerful life, 
industrious, social, friendly, graceful, courteous, and interesting in 
manners — a life of useful activity, not much affected or hindered by 
any little discomforts or social discords — a life which diffuses a 
pleasant influence. This is quite different from the life of the 
solitary student and the solitary workman or the ascetic religious 
recluse. It is realized only in social and conjugal life. Hence 
friendly social intercourse is essential to health, as well as cheerful 
employment ; and the social amusements which a false and gloomy 
theology has discouraged are of great importance to health and 
virtue ; and of all social amusements I know of none entitled to rank 
higher than dancing, associated as it is with that other inspiring in- 
fluence — music. Hence I insist that the cultivation of congenial 
society and amusements should be a part of the regimen prescribed 
for health, and that with these should be associated active industry. 

Animation, as developed by this organ, vitalizes and perfects the 
entire being ; and its antagonist in the region of disease, uncontrolled, 
reduces both soul and body to worthlessness — the body going into 
the decomposition of death, and the soul being often reduced also to 
helplessness until released from the body ; for the capacity to suffer 
and not to act is a fatal condition. 

Perfect health, that is, abundant vital power capable of resisting 
all causes of disease or depression, and sustaining by sympathy and 
nervauric action the health, energy, and spirits of others — depends 
upon the large development and cultivation of this region of Health 
and Animation ; it requires a large development of the shoulders and 
the crown of the head, and the position of this function in the con- 
stitution is such as to give by its connections (being in the upper 
half of the brain) a decided predominance of the coronal or moral 
elements, while by its posterior location it gives all the necessary 
energy to' the occipito-basilar organs, in which we have a vital force, 
unregulated by the moral, needing the control of the intermediate 
organ of Health, which sustains both. 

The organ of Health, by sustaining the higher faculties, not only 
controls the excesses of the lower, but places man in harmony with 
the supernal powers, and the influx which is the interior of his 
life. Thus the true science of health is connected with ethical or 
religious science and the performance of duties ; and all hygienic 
science which rests in the physical alone will fall short of human 
needs. The emotional or spiritual part of man's nature is as im- 
portant as the physical, and this is being continually demonstrated 
by the vast number of cures made by spiritual and religious methods, 
without any drug agency. 



164 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

The fact that the organ of Health stands intermediate between the 
moral and physical agencies of the constitution, so as to give to each 
its own just proportional activity, explains the great necessity for 
both soul culture and physical culture in any proper system of 
hygiene and education, and gives us an entirely new view of the 
philosophy of human development and of the intimate relations of 
health with virtue and religion, whereby we learn the importance of 
the cultivation and exaltation of health as a religious duty, and the 
criminality of its neglect or abuse. True and complete Godliness 
brings with it physical perfection and power — power to encounter 
exposure, danger, and toil, triumphantly, as did the Apostles. But 
the purblind theologies, which have been in fashion, take little ac- 
count of the body, though saintly and apostolic history shows how 
gloriously the body has been sustained by the spirit, not only in such 
as Joan of Arc, but in many thousand earnest seekers of divine life. 

We cannot say too much of this philosophy of man's nobler life, 
which has been so little understood ; we have not even language 
fitting for its expression. Language must advance, both in its 
concepts and its combinations, to keep pace with science and 
philosophy. 

The Bia and Bios of the Greeks, whence our Biology, belongs to 
material life alone. They express only the lower life, that which lies 
behind the mastoid process, which occupies the cerebellum and med- 
ulla oblongata, which ceases with their decomposition, and which is not 
true life, the characteristic of which is its indestructible permanence. 

Psyche, the soul, comes nearer to our conception of the central 
power, but it has been used in a mental and spiritual sense, which iso- 
lates it from the bodily life and would carry us into the high realms of 
spirit life. But the unspiritual genius of European races continually 
tends to the degeneration of language. It has degraded Biology into 
a purely physical science, and it has nearly expurgated the soul essence 
of Psychology, reducing it to a little more than a speculation on mun- 
dane mentality — confounding Psyche and Mens — Psychology and a 
barren Metaphysics. 

We might be tempted to unite the spiritual and physical in such a 
compound as Psycho-biosis, but that would be a clumsy patchwork of 
elements, each of which is withered and degenerated in literature. 

We need a single word containing in itself the ideas partially rep- 
resented by the words Manhood, Life, Health, Virtue, and Animation, 
with an intimation of the exuberance of a happy nature, but there is 
no such word to express a happy and efficient Psycho-zoic existence. 

Our verbal difficulty arises from the fact that soul and body, object- 
ively (and not subjectively) considered, are so far apart and distinct 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 165 

in the common mind, which dwells on material things, that they are 
seldom unitized in thought. A different set of words applies to each, 
yet such is their parallelism that a single word is often applicable to 
them both — as, for example, Firmness, Energy, Excitement, Rest- 
lessness, Tranquillity, Languor, Depression, Weakness, etc. 

Psycho-dynamia, or psycho-dynamy, expresses much of the compound 
idea, but conveys more of the power and less of the happy, normal com- 
pleteness of life than belongs to the health region of the brain. It 
expresses mainly the firmness and dignity which are found at the pos- 
terior part of the sagittal suture and at the summit of the dorsal region 
of the spinal column. 

The Greek Pneuma is closely analogous to Psyche and has not been 
desecrated by metaphysical speculation. P neonatology has been left 
to represent the real and substantial science of the soul, apart from 
the body, but as it represents the separated soul, it cannot represent 
the embodied soul, with its armament of physical power. Pneuma 
represents, by its double sense, the air or breath which is the influx 
of the body and the analogous aura or soul which is the influx of the 
brain. Hence, Pneumatics is the science of the atmosphere, and 
Pneumatology the science of the ethereal realm of the soul. 

Nearly equivalent for the Biological is the Zoic group of words — 
Zoon, a living creature (whence Zoology, the science of animals); 
Zoos, living ; Zoe, life ; Zoeros, vivacious or full of life ; and Zootes, 
the animal nature as opposed to the divine nature. The life thus 
expressed is like the biological, and lacks the psychic or pneumatic 
element. 

In the Latin, too, we find that words representing air or breath rep- 
resent also the spiritual element, as if it had been intuitively perceived 
that our spiritual life is like our breath, an influx of the invisible. 

Anima signifies alike the air or breeze, the breath, and the vital prin- 
ciple or life. Thus it represents animal life, though sometimes poeti- 
cally extended to the departed spirit. Animus is a word of more vital 
and energetic meaning; it suggests the thinking, feeling, willing, 
emotional soul. It suggests all the strong emotions, impulses, and 
determinations of the departed spirit, and is not void of courage, hope, 
and pleasure. It is, therefore, the most expressive word for the full 
normal life which comes from the superior posterior region of the 
brain. Anglicised in Animation, k expresses better than any other 
term the central element of life and character, which I find the su- 
premely beneficent and dominant quality of perfect life. Possibly some 
other ancient language may have a better expression, but the Romans, 
whose powerful animus ruled the world, have given us the best word 
extant in our language for our present purposes; but even this has not 



l66 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

as much of the pleasing, attractive, persuasive, charming, ethical ele- 
ment as nature has given us in the supreme faculty which wins as well 
as commands, which gives to life its best enjoyment and highest suc- 
cess. We need four words, such as health, energy, happiness, and 
cheerfulness, to express its full influence and power ; though anima- 
tion may correctly express its influence when the moral element is not 
prominent, and therefore may often be an adequate expression. It 
gives animation alike to the intellectual, moral, and animal faculties, 
and tends to give them a symmetrical development — making a char- 
acter decidedly attractive. 

Speaking of this supreme faculty, as I have done, for therapeutic 
effects, I have called it Health, because perfect, active health is the 
condition which it produces ; when in predominance it develops act- 
ive, exuberant, attractive, and pleasing animation ; it gives a feeling 
of purity and brightness in the entire person, and a glow of kindly, 
social feeling, with a desire to be loved, fitting one for every social 
duty. I am almost induced to coin a word to express this admirable 
faculty, but for the present let the word Health answer, with a rich 
and abundant significance, including animation. 

Understanding, then, that the superior posterior region of the brain 
and the superior posterior region of the body are the harmonic cen- 
tres of perfect life, whatever they may be called (this perfect life 
being concentred at the location provisionally named Health) to give 
this nobler portion of the constitution absolute predominance in our- 
selves and in our patients is what we should seek as healers, and any 
system of bodily exercises which strongly develops the shoulders, 
especially such as the health-lift and rowing, will be an important ad- 
dition to curative resources, not only for the patient but for the healer 
himself, who should frequently use such exercises, and will find them 
beneficial, especially just before going to heal his patients. 

In addition to these physical exercises there are certain moral 
exercises by which the healer sustains himself in his duties. These 
moral exercises consist chiefly in making friends and followers, by 
attractive and impressive manners, in associating with friends and 
gaining the strength which comes from their admiration, love, and 
sympathy. He should, therefore, as a truly religious man, cultivate 
the most affectionate and hospitable sentiments towards all, and should 
endeavor, not rudely or boldly, but in the most pleasing manner, to 
take the lead in society and make himself an object of interest. If 
he can take the position of a public teacher or lecturer it will make 
an important addition to his moral force, and if he can so cultivate 
his nobler nature as to become the centre, the reservoir, or the chan- 
nel of that purest health, life, and love which belong to the spirit world, 
he is then admirably equipped for his mission. 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION l6/ 

The sustained strength of his own perfect life enables him to dif- 
fuse a similar sustaining energy, while his love gives him a pleasure 
in uplifting others, and a power to benefit them by his mere presence 
and everything that emanates from him. 

Love and life are correlative. Love is that which energizes and 
sustains life. Love in each member of a family sustains life in all 
the others. Wives pine in health when the husband's love declines ; 
men decline in their whole nature when not sustained by love at 
home. The patients of a loving physician delight in his presence 
and live upon his influence, sometimes regardless of his drugs, as was 
shown in the somewhat famous case of the honest Dr. Jennings, of 
Derby, Conn., who, over forty years ago, becoming convinced that 
his medicines produced little good effect, gradually reduced his doses, 
and finally gave them up entirely, substituting bread pills and colored 
powders and liquids, and continued a practice so successful that after 
he had publicly confessed that he used no medicine the people adhered 
to him and could not be persuaded to patronize another physician, 
even when recommended by Dr. J. himself. 

To what extent the mere presence of the healer may be a substitute 
for all other healing agencies depends upon his personal endowments. 
Dr. J. R. Newton, Dr. G. Swan, and many others, have cured success- 
fully without contact, and at a distance, and it is presumable (but not 
inevitably necessary) that these remarkable cures were made with 
the co-operation of attendant spirits. Prayer, which brings in spiritual 
co-operation, has cured so many hundreds in a public and very mar- 
vellous manner that no candid student acquainted with the facts can 
doubt that the religious element is a large part of the healing power 
— operating not only by the loving and curative energy developed in 
the constitution of the healer, but by the abundant spiritual influence 
which he attracts to himself spontaneously, as well as by prayers. 

Armed with health, vigor, buoyant energy, and love, guarded by 
the precautions I have fully explained, and reinforced by the invisible 
power which aids the spiritual-minded man, the healer must be suc- 
cessful, and in proportion to his power may achieve those results 
which the world calls miraculous. 

But to achieve any results wisely and well he must thoroughly 
understand that in which he is engaged. He must thoroughly 
understand the human constitution, and the laws of its operation 
which are developed by Sarcognomy. Even when he acts as the 
passive instrument of spirit power, the same knowledge is important, 
for the ability of the spirit to produce results depends largely upon 
the character, the natural capacities, and acquired skill and knowl- 
edge of the medium. The highest manifestation that spirits can 



l68 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

make of artistic, musical, literary, or philosophic power depends 
upon the natural capacity and acquired skill of the medium. Through 
a medium of artistic ability fine works of art are produced which 
would be impossible under other conditions ; wise utterances come 
through mediums of superior intuitive intellectual power ; and the 
very best medical results will be produced only through mediums of 
good intellectual power, well educated in the sciences of life, disease, 
and therapeutics. 

It is evident that a spirit operating through any medium must be 
hampered by the limited powers and ideas of the medium's brain, 
even if the mediumship be complete and passive. The wisdom and 
moral power of a man cannot come through the brain of a child or 
a horse. An ignorant an unscientific medium cannot do full justice 
to the healing art. Moreover, the spirits who come to aid in treat- 
ment are in many cases themselves too ignorant and unscientific to 
compensate for the deficiencies of the medium. 

The healer who is neither gifted with psychometric intuition, nor 
sustained by spirit power, nor instructed in Sarcognomy, must oper- 
ate in a blind and often erroneous manner in nervauric and electric 
treatment. 

The noblest embodiment of the healing art, the most worthy 
of public esteem, is the physician who has been drawn into the pro- 
fession by his active benevolence and psychometric skill in under- 
standing diseases, who after going through the usual studies of the 
colleges has perceived the inadequacy of their remedies, and devoted 
himself to the investigation of the materia medica ; who has felt the 
inadequacy of their physiology and philosophy, made himself ac- 
quainted with the power of what is called animal magnetism, and then, 
recognizing its destitution of a scientific basis, has found in Sarcog- 
nomy the laws of nervauric and electric healing which he applies 
under the guidance of his intuitions, while using remedies selected 
with similar skill adapted to the varying conditions of patients, in- 
stead of the mere names of diseases. 

Psycho-Hygienic Treatment. 

The enlightened healer will not limit himself to treating the de- 
rangements of the body ; for so close is the parallelism of physiologi- 
cal and psychological processes that one cannot be treated without 
producing an influence upon the other. When we restore the body 
to health we improve the functions of the brain and assist the moral 
nature. 

But actual health, or relief from the conditions of disease produced 
by injurious causes, is merely a state, and is not fundamental or con- 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 169 

stitutional health — the possession of a health power to resist dis- 
ease and to sustain every function of life. One may be relieved from 
disease and yet be extremely liable to falling again into depraved 
conditions. Hence the permanent improvement of the constitution 
is more important than the immediate relief of morbid conditions, 
and it is a characteristic doctrine of the new physiology that this im- 
provement and elevation of the type of the constitution requires an 
increase of the moral power — an increase of those calm energies 
which belong to the soul and to the superior regions of the brain and 
the body ; hence all hygienic treatment should be ethical in tendency, 
and the healer should aim to leave his patient, if possible, with an 
exalted energy in his higher nature, which would tend to lead him 
into a better and healthier life. 

But in cultivating this noble manhood and womanhood it is impor- 
tant not to mistake the passive negative virtues for the divinely sus- 
taining elements of life. All conceptions of duty are relatively 
worthless which do not lead to action. 

The amiable sentiments must exist in sufficient force to control 
all selfish and misanthropic feelings ; but mere amiability with un- 
selfishness is not the condition or character to which the laws of the 
universe accord success and the happiness of robust health ; and 
thousands of good people with this false ideal in their minds have 
met with misfortunes, both physical and spiritual, from acting on this 
erroneous view, and have found fault with the world and its Creator 
because they have been unfortunate when they have not conformed 
to the conditions of success, which demand active power as well as 
unselfishness. 

The survey of the world in any department, with a spirit of candid 
search for truth, will teach us that power is the chief element of 
success, but that the only satisfactory and happy success is that 
which is attained by noble means. The success of the carnivorous 
animal, the despot, the soldier, the miser, or the knave is a physical 
success in which there is very little happiness and often very little 
health. But that success which is gained by heroic energy in the 
pursuit of noble aims, with pleasing manners that win the love of all, 
is the only true and satisfactory success. This comes from the upper 
occipital region in which the higher energies reside, and which is 
associated with the upper posterior portion of the trunk. 

Our conception of virtue should be that of a positive power, acting 
with that broad sympathy and intuitive understanding which realize 
that happiness cannot be an isolated condition, and that he who 
would enter the sphere of true happiness must make a sphere of 
happiness around him in human beings, and should never relax in the 



I/O HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

pursuit of the noble aims to which his life is devoted. Firmness and 
energy are the virtues that command success, and he who fails to 
exercise them should blame himself and not the world for his failure. 
Godliness, a God-likeness which brings success, is not the sentimen- 
tal and egotistic quality cultivated by the Pharisee, but that nobler 
quality which achieves grand results in thought, in action, in society, 
in government, and in the triumphs of civilization — a quality which 
in Patrick Henry moved multitudes, in Washington ruled a nation, in 
Jefferson led the progress of liberal thought, a quality that insures 
noble aims and noble action. 

To cultivate these virtues as accessory to health, the healer should 
keep his patient under the influence of the upper zone of the body 
and of the brain, in a cheerful, energetic mental condition. The 
tranquil amiability of the upper frontal surface of the chest should 
be combined with the amiable but positive energy of the summit of 
the back, on and between the shoulders, and of the arms. The 
gentler virtues should never be separated from the energies. 

By these manipulations discontented and discordant husbands and 
wives might sometimes be restored to harmony, as the causes of 
quarrels which seemed so important while they were under the influ- 
ence of irritation and gloom would appear very unimportant when 
good-humor was restored. The restoration of harmony would con- 
tribute greatly to the restoration of health, for there are thousands 
whose health is depressed by domestic inharmony. 

In the management of children psychic manipulation is very im- 
portant, for there are few that might not be favorably affected. The 
more impressible class are creatures of circumstances. In a turbulent 
school they speedily absorb all the depravity they mingle with ; but 
the gentle manipulation of parents may remove many evil influences, 
conquer ill-temper and confirm habits of application. This treatment 
will hereafter claim an important part in systems of education, and 
no one will be considered qualified as a teacher who cannot with his 
hands exert a soothing and refining influence. 

» The evil tendencies of the animal nature will be subdued in body 
and in brain by dispersive passes and by electric currents, while the 
virtues will be energized at their source in the upper regions of the 
brain and body, as indicated by Anthropology. 

Psychic or moral treatment is not within the scope of this volume, 
but it becomes incidentally a part of the therapeutic treatment, and 
it certainly comes within the duties of the true physician, the com- 
petent healer, for health and virtue are twin brothers. 

To carry out the doctrines of this chapter, the physician should 
aim to establish the predominance of the shoulders and the upper 
occipital region of the brain. 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. IJl 

1. First, he should use the refreshing' dispersive passes from the 
lower margin of the abdomen toward the shoulders. This disperses 
morbid and debilitating nervous conditions. A similar influence 
may be produced on the head by brisk dispersive passes from the 
cheek-bones toward the crown of the head — the centre of the scalp, 
which is near the posterior end of the sagittal suture. 

2. He should stimulate the shoulders and the whole upper dorsal 
region, for a space of six by twelve or fifteen inches across the back, 
by the application of his hands and by a gentle percussion, using 
vigor in his muscles but gentleness of touch in contact, unless in a 
robust person. 

3. When the hands are resting on the back they snould be in the 
centre of each shoulder blade. If the operator is a sensitive percip- 
ient he will recognize, while his hands are in this position, the 
increasing comfort and brightness in the patient's condition, and if 
he is left in that condition, its beneficial influences will in many cases 
continue for hours. 

4. The effect may be enhanced by placing one hand across the 
upper occiput from right to left, covering the region of Health, while 
the other is on the Health region of the shoulder. 

5. If the patient is nervous, restless, or melancholic, one hand may 
be placed in the armpit at the region of Cheerfulness, while the other 
is on Health, or both may be applied at Cheerfulness. 

6. If the patient has any selfish, morose, or gloomy qualities, or is 
lacking in the enjoyment of kindly emotions and elevated views of 
duty, the hands should be applied on the upper surface of the shoul- 
der and the chest as far down as the nipple, the effect of which will 
be soothing and pleasant as well as beneficial to his moral nature, 
and will assist in the restoration of health. This is the remedy for 
bad temper, selfishness, gloom, and domestic discord. 

7. While the hand is kept on the shoulder or the healthful region 
of the head, special treatment may be given with the other hand in 
application to the various localities that need attention, the effect 
being greatly enhanced by the hand on the shoulder. 

8. If treatment be administered by the battery, the hygienic cur- 
rent should be administered by applying the positive pole with a 
broad electrode (a carbon plate or large sponge wet with warm salt 
water) at the hypochondria, the spot marked as the region of disease, 
and the negative with a large electrode on the health region of the 
shoulder. For the best effect there should be two electrodes or 
rather rheophores to each pole, that the right and left sides may be 
treated simultaneously. The current may be given from five, ten, or 
twenty cells, according to the sensibility of the patient, and continued 



\J2 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. [CHAP. IX. 

from five to twenty minutes. If small rheophores are applied to the 
skin they should be moved about. This is less important with large 
rheophores. 

With the common portable battery the primary or magneto-gal- 
vanic current is generally appropriate. 

In using static electricity the application of the negative elec- 
trodes near the shoulders and the spinal column generally, drawing a 
gentle current or sparks, is the most valuable method. 

9. If the patient needs the influence of any special medicine, it 
may be administered by dipping the positive sponges in a solution so 
as to have the current pass through it, or a slighter influence may be 
imparted by applying a strong solution on the skin and passing the 
current through it. The epigastrium is the most effective place for 
medical application. In using the faradic current the medical appli- 
cations may be made at each pole. 

10. If the faradic current be used, it may be applied as a local 
stimulus by applying one pole on each shoulder at the site of Health, 
or by applying two poles near each other at any position needing 
stimulus. In doing this, however, a broad carbon rheophore is best, 
covered with wet cloth or leather; a broad sponge will answer the 
same purpose. A broad soothing rheophore is necessary when the 
poles are near each other ; the best material for which is carbon. 
The alternating galvanic currents may be used in the same way as a 
local stimulus by applying them near together with frequent inter- 
ruptions. One of the rheophores may be used for this purpose by 
a rapid tapping or a gliding over the surface which produces the 
broken current that stimulates. 

11. There is no current in electro-therapeutics at all comparable 
to the hygienic current from the hypochondria to the shoulder, and 
in applying this current the negative pole may be applied not only 
to the site of Health, but over the entire upper half of the surface of 
the back, thus producing a great variety of tonic and restorative 
effects, as shown by the map of Sarcognomy. Thus we may invigorate 
the brain, lungs, heart, liver, and stomach, or administer general 
tonics, as will be explained. 

12. The hygienic region or upper portion of the back and of the 
occiput will generally restore pleasant and amiable feelings, especially 
in conjunction with the cheerfulness of the axilla, but whenever a 
positively amiable influence is needed we should treat the whole 
upper frontal surface of the chest, on which we develop the warmest 
sentiments of affection, duty, and religion. 

13. The reader will bear in mind that the effect of nervauric opera 
tions is materially enhanced by previously exciting impressibility at 



CHAP. IX.] HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 1 73 

the lower end of the sternum, or in the temples an inch behind the 
brow. 

14. Alternating galvanic currents through the upper portion of the 
chest, antero-posteriorly, rouse the best elements of the physical and 
moral constitution. The anterior organs being correlative (or frater- 
nally associated) with the posterior, their simultaneous stimulation 
corresponds with normal life. Hence, we may establish rules for the 
conjoint stimulation of the correlative anterior and posterior organs 
throughout the body. The treatment of consumptive patients by , 
currents through the chest was an approximation to this principle 
made by a Belgian physician, whose reports of his success were so 
extraordinary as to be considered incredible by Dr. Beard, the author 
of a standard work on electro-therapeutics. 

For a fuller exposition of electric treatment, I must refer the 
reader to the chapter on electro-therapeutics. 



CHAPTER X. 

OPERATIVE METHODS. 

Transmission of vital power — Proof by experiments on frogs and by anatomy — 
Failure of electrical experiments by eminent physiologists — Functions of the con- 
volutions which they could not reach — My reasons for neglecting galvanism — 
Medical opposition — Psycho-vital influences most appropriate to the brain — Dis- 
cussion of the experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig — How to begin experiments — 
Use of plasters and other agents — Familiar illustrations of Sarcognomy — Patho- 
logical illustrations — Initiating experiments — Vital emanations — Positive and 
negative poles — Evils and dangers of electricity — Relations of operator and patient 
— Necessary influences for the operator — Spiritual inspiration ; its philosophy and 
power — Power of diagnosis — Prof. Draper's testimony as to the spirit — Conduct 
in the sick chamber; hygienic precautions — Dispersive manipulations- — Non-con- 
ductors — Effect of passes — Quackery of massage — Activity in healing — Precau- 
tions for maintenance of health — Dangers of contagion. 



In nervauric therapeutics we use every region of the brain and 
body for the production of physiological and therapeutic effects, and 
we rouse these regions by the application of the hand, which is their 
proper and congenial stimulus in the impressible constitution. 

That the vital force and vital processes of one constitution should 
rouse similar processes in another is a proposition strongly resisted 
by most physiologists, notwithstanding their familiar knowledge of 
the transmission of pathological processes which reproduce exactly 
the same disease by their emanations. 

There is an experiment on the limbs of frogs which might assist 
these sceptics to realize such transmission. If the frog galvanoscope 
is used by placing the nerve of the leg across the muscles of another 
frog's leg and then passing a feeble electric current through the 
nerves of the latter, sufficient to convulse its muscles, the convulsive 
movement will also appear in the leg which has its nerve resting 
upon the convulsed muscle. This is not simply due to a passage of 
electricity, for if a non-conductor, such as a thin plate of mica, be 
interposed between the second nerve and the first muscle, it does 
not prevent the convulsion, which shows that a convulsion in one 
muscle may transmit an influence which will convulse another mus- 
cle — an influence which is distinct from electricity, as it is not hin- 
dered by electric non-conductors (see Philos. Transactions, 1847, 

P- 231). 

But it is not necessary to employ electricity at all ; the muscles of 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 75 

a frog, a dog, or a rabbit may be convulsed by irritating the spinal 
cord mechanically, and the frog nerve, if in contact with the con- 
vulsed muscle, will transfer -the convulsive action to its own muscle, 
and it may be transmitted still further, so that a series of five or six 
nerves may be started into action by the first. 

The same principle may be illustrated in man. If we contract 
firmly the flexor muscles which close the hand and bring our muscles 
into contact with those of a sensitive or impressible person who is 
passive, the emanating influence will gradually cause a contraction in 
the same muscles, which, not being voluntary, will not obey the will, 
but will pass off gradually. 

This experiment illustrates the general law which has long been 
applied to healing, and which I have applied to experimental investi- 
gation — that all vital and psychic processes are transferable, as well 
as the pathological and the muscular. 

That there are nervauric currents in the body would seem self- 
evident when we know that compression of a motor nerve paralyzes 
its muscle. Evidently something passes which pressure interrupts. 
Moreover, how can we conceive voluntary muscular action without 
believing that the current which is allowed to pass down the un- 
impeded nerve passes from the nerve to the muscular fibre. The 
picture of nerve filaments passing among the muscular fibres of the 
Hyla (green tree frog), given by that admirable microscopist, Dr. 
Lionel Beale, shows the nervous and muscular filaments entirely 
distinct. (See plate of Bioplasm and Nerves, fig. 9, page 62.) We 
cannot understand how the nerve filaments put the muscular into 
action unless something passes between them. 

It would seem a necessary consequence that any agents passing 
from the brain and spinal cord to the muscles or any other struc- 
tures might pass into any other structures that were in contact or 
proximity. 

In the European experiments on the brain, with electricity, the 
results have been extremely barren, not only because electricity is 
not the proper stimulant for psychic functions, but because the inves- 
tigation was not conducted in a psychic spirit. As Althaus says, 
"Although the induced current may penetrate to the brain, it seems to 
exert only little influence on it, just as on the retina and other organs 
of special sense." 

Longet entirely failed to produce muscular action by operating on 
either the white or the gray substance of the cerebral hemispheres by 
galvanism or by mechanical and chemical irritation. 

Weber, Majendie, Budge, Schiff, Matteucci, and Van Deen all 
failed to produce any physical results in the body by galvanic and 



l?6 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

farad ic electricity applied to the hemispheres of the cerebrum and 
the cerebellum in an enormous number of experiments and the 
sacrifice of a vast number of animals. The muscular system was 
reached in such experiments only by the motor nerves, the spinal 
cord and its commanding summit in the brain before its expansion is 
lost in the hemispheres, that is to say, in the medulla oblongata, the 
crura cerebri, and the tubercula quadrigemina, which in animals are 
called the optic lobes, and which thus appear to be the summit of 
the muscular tract that responds by electricity ; although we know 
that in vital action the volitionary power that commands the muscles 
proceeds from the corpora striata, and that these are controlled by 
the higher organs of the brain. But electricity is so ill-adapted to 
the higher processes of life that it produced no muscular response to 
these laborious and skilful experimenters above the tubercula quadri- 
gemina. 

What then were the functions in the hemispheres which would not 
respond to electricity? To this the answer of vivisection was by 
ablation. Flourens, in an extensive series of operations on birds as 
well as mammalia, found that the functions in the hemispheres were 
those of psychic life — consciousness and volition; for consciousness, 
volition, and all psychic operations whatever were completely abolished 
after ablation of the hemispheres, while animal life remained com- 
plete, and the animals remained in a state of unconsciousness as if 
asleep, although capable of swallowing food by reflex action through 
the nerves, when food was put in their mouths. 

In these functions of conscious psychic life which modern physiolo- 
gists with their rude mechanical conceptions have been unable to 
reach or evolve, lie the great majority of the operations which are 
interesting to humanity as the source of our weal or woe, and not 
only the source of joy or misery, but the source of physiological and 
pathological changes by an indirect influence on the body. 

It is pitiable to see all the talent and learning of the present cen- 
tury failing, after labors so prolonged and costly, and often cruel, to 
tell us much that is important of the functions of the convoluted 
brain, in which lies the science of man — a vast magazine of knowl- 
edge, destined hereafter to fill libraries with elaborate illustrations of 
that which collegiate science cannot even approach, because it dis- 
dains all psychic methods of investigation. 

The failure of all investigations by electricity was due to the false 
philosophy which disqualified the inquirers. I have not found it im- 
possible to excite and to reveal the functions of the brain by electri- 
cal methods. My first thought in this matter was to demonstrate 
the functions of the brain by galvanism, but after a few such expert- 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. I 77 

ments I found the psychic and nervauric influences of the human 
hand so far superior that, looking only to truth and to science, I 
hastily laid aside the electric method as inferior (a mistaken policy) 
and never returned to its use until recently, presuming in my 
optimism that intelligent men would not fail to appreciate nervauric 
experiments with the hand. But a gross mind does not appreciate 
simple, unpretending truth. My experiments before committees 
were entirely successful, but no sympathetic chord responded in the 
minds of spectators. A materialistic age demands materialistic 
methods, and if I had appealed, not to the reason but to the senses, 
by an array of galvanic batteries and harsh experiments on hospital 
patients, the demonstrations would have resounded through the 
literature of the world, instead of meeting with immediate suppres- 
sion. When the learned Dr. Samuel L. Forry announced at New 
York that my experiments were in their importance vastly superior 
to all that had been achieved by the most eminent physiologists, and 
the " New York Medical and Surgical Journal " which he established 
was ready to do justice to the subject, the peremptory threats of emi- 
nent physicians forbade its mention, and the death soon after of Dr. 
Forry deprived the truth of a champion — a position which Prof. 
Mitchell, after repeating my experiments successfully, was not dis- 
posed to assume. 

I declined the use of the electric method, because that method is 
liable to evils and dangers from which the nervauric method is free, 
and because electricity is not commensurate with the psychic func- 
tions of life, although like other gross stimulants it may affect them, 
since it acts on the vasomotor nerves and secretions, and by chang- 
ing the blood-supply affects the organs of the brain and is still better 
calculated to affect the brain, when in application to the body it 
stimulates regions to which the brain responds in sympathy. 

The higher functions of the brain, which are not in direct correla- 
tion with electricity, are yet in close correlation with spiritual or ideal 
influences. A thought, or an external object which rouses a thought, 
will produce intense emotional action, which may produce violent 
excitement of the heart and muscles, and either greatly exalt or 
greatly depress the powers of life, or originate various forms .of 
disease. 

Psycho-vital power must be influenced by psycho-vital causes, and 
these are found in human beings whose psycho-vital force emanates 
from contact of the hand and from their entire personality. Hence 
the nervauric and psychic power must occupy a higher position in 
our therapeutics than the electric, and the scientific manual or 
psychic healer will occupy a more and more honorable position as 
society advances. 



I78 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

The psycho-physiological influence of the hand is of universal 
application, and the hand is therefore the chief agent in Therapeutic 
Sarcognomy, although in many cases the psychic energy of the oper- 
ator may reach and powerfully affect the patient with therapeutic in- 
fluences, independent of physical contact. 

I do not deny that delicate electric influences may safely modify 
the action of the organs of the brain, for these influences, like 
caloric, affect the circulation and nervauric conditions, and through 
these means the organic action may be modified, but not in the 
prompt, wholesome, and natural manner which belongs to the hand, 
and which would authorize the general use or substitution of elec- 
tricity in cerebral therapeutics. 

The nervauric operator who aims to be a well-qualified, scientific 
practitioner should understand well the use of electricity as an im- 
portant adjunct; and when in addition to this he understands the use 
of the materia medica, he may take rank as a complete physician and 
something more than a specialist. 

Before proceeding further, I would ask, Is there any doubt thrown 
over my discoveries, of over forty years' standing, by the more recent 
experiments of European vivisectors, of whose immense labors it 
would not be improper to say that as to psychological discoveries the 
mountain in labor has brought forth a mouse ? 

I refer more especially to the experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig, 
who suppose they have discovered in the front lobes of dogs, mus- 
cular functions, although those functions are not in any degree 
affected by the loss of the front lobe. 

Such investigations must be accepted in subordination to the well- 
established and undeniable truth that the functions of the hemi- 
spheres are psychic, and that muscular excitability cannot be com- 
manded above the tubercula quadrigemina. Fritzch and Hitzig's 
experiments are supposed to show that muscular powers are associ- 
ated with the frontal portion of the brain, as they claim to have 
excited certain muscles of the neck and limbs by applying the 
electrodes at certain positions of the frontal convolutions — the 
details of which need not be discussed at present. Taking the ex- 
periments as stated by them, they do not imply that any muscular 
power exists in the frontal convolutions, for all direct nerve motors 
are capable of rousing the muscles under galvanism after death, but 
the influence of the frontal convolutions ceased at death in their 
experiments. 

As the frontal convolutions are known to be entirely psychic, and 
their excision does not in the slightest degree impair the muscular 
power, nor do their injuries affect it, it is evident that Fritzch and 



CHAP. X.J OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 79 

Hitzig only stimulated certain psychic functions, which are associated 
with the control of the muscular system. But we knew before that 
volitionary impulses to certain muscles oi-igi?iate in the frontal or 
intellectual portion of the brain, and pass by the corpora striata to 
their destination. It is probable that the electric currents in their 
experiments affected the corpora striata by impinging upon the 
anterior expansion of the fibres of the striata, which would explain 
the different muscular effects they produced at different points, 
while the animal was alive, and their failure to produce any effects 
when they operated on posterior portions of the brain, not belonging 
to the radical expansion of the corpora striata. Their experiments 
are curious, but they do not disturb anything that we have hereto- 
fore known of the physiological and psychological functions of the 
brain. 

I see nothing in the modern experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig, 
Ferrier and others, which is at all contradictory to my own experi- 
ments. On the contrary, I shall quote them as illustrative confir- 
mations of my own experiments and discoveries. The movements 
produced by Dr. Ferrier were little else but the gestures of natural 
expression of the psychic faculties, easily explained by the laws of 
Pathognomy. These movements were easily produced, as all psychic 
action in animal brains is associated with muscular action much 
more closely than in man. For muscular effects the brains of 
animals are suitable, but for psychic effects we need the brain of 
man. 

The nervauric healer should study very carefully his map of Sar- 
cognomy, becoming familiar with the various localities, and should 
take every opportunity to verify them in the treatment of patients 
and in experiments on the well. A single person of highly impres- 
sible constitution would enable him to verify every locality and 
derive a large amount of instruction and entertainment from his 
experiments. 

A faithful inquirer will have no difficulty in finding all I have 
found, and much more than has been stated in this volume. 

To conduct the experiments properly, he should not select one 
accustomed to act as a passive mesmeric subject or capable of being 
controlled by an assertion so as to believe himself whatever he is told. 
The subject of experiment for scientific investigation should be in 
the best mental condition of clearness of perception, correctness of 
judgment, and independence of mind. 

A very satisfactory mode of experimenting is to develop the local 
results independent of the personality of the operator, which may be 
done by heat and cold, by electricity, or by stimulating plasters. 



ISO OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

Mild, gently stimulating capsicum plasters may be used — two inches 
by four, or three by six, or varied according to the object — and 
applied to the localities on each side of the body correspondingly. 
The effects may appear in five, ten, or twenty minutes, and the 
application may be continued for an hour or hours, which will make 
the results more distinct and positive. A valuable method of apply- 
ing galvanism is by what has been called a Humboldt battery — two 
plates, such as silver and zinc, applied upon two localities of the skin 
and connected by a wire. 

The continuous application of moderate warmth or of warm cloth- 
ing upon any locality develops the local function, as the continuous 
application of cold depresses it. 

All the effects which I thus produce by the hand, by local stimula- 
tion, by heat, or by electricity, have been experienced millions of 
times by intelligent people without attempting to look into their 
causation. They have been produced, also, millions of times in the 
practice of medicine without prompting physicians to look into the 
law of their occurrence, and every intelligent physician who reads 
these pages will find upon reflection that he has encountered many 
facts which illustrate the principles of Sarcognomy. 

For example, who has not observed that antagonism between the 
head and feet which Sarcognomy explains — how coldness of the feet 
increases the determination to the brain, and excites wakefulness at 
night ; how the warm bath to the feet relieves the brain and moder- 
ates fever ; and how the heat and fatigue of the feet from overwork or 
prolonged walking deadens the action of the brain and reduces the 
mental power? 

Who has not observed the dangerous effects of drafts of cold air 
striking the upper part of the back, depressing all the powers of life 
and endangering pneumonia or fever? 

What physician is not familiar with the association between 
tenderness or pain at the lower end of the spinal vertebrae and the 
pelvic diseases of women ; or the prostrating influence of abdominal 
affections ; and the hopeful influence of affections in the upper part of 
the chest, and the alarming anxiety and fear caused by affections of 
the heart ? 

The stimulation of the brain by a slight hyperemia of the lungs, or 
of the bronchial region, which I have often experienced, was utilized 
by a British member of Parliament (Mr. Dunscomb), by putting a 
stimulating plaster on his chest when he had to address the House. 

Who has not observed the substantial energy of the whole con- 
stitution produced by warmly covering the lower limbs, and the 
debilitating, injurious effects of allowing them to be chilled ? 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. l8l 

What woman does not know how closely her bosom is associated 
with her affections, so as to compel her to exclude from familiarity 
therewith all but her child, her lover, and husband ? and what 
physician does not know the very intimate sympathy between the 
womb and the female breast ? 

All these sympathies and associations, as well as others less 
familiarly known, are explained by Sarcognomy as illustrations of a 
general law which applies to every part of the body, and shows 
exactly the psychic and physiological association of every organ and. 
every portion of the surface. 

The full, exposition of this subject is not designed in this manual* 
as it would require an investigation of the history of all diseases,, 
showing the parallelism between the phenomena or symptoms of all 
diseases and the laws of Sarcognomy — such as we see illustrated in 
affections of the brain produced by pelvic disorders, and in the 
peculiar hopefulness of consumptive patients, while the disease is 
doing its fatal work in the upper portion of the lungs. But an out- 
line of the leading pathological illustrations of Sarcognomy will be 
given in the latter portion of this volume. 

Nervauric treatment by the hand proceeds upon the principle that 
the hand whenever applied has an adhesive or attractive and stim- 
ulating influence upon the spot, developing and exalting its vital 
powers. Thus the constitution of the patient is roused to effect its 
own renovation instead of passively receiving the vital force im- 
parted by the healer, as in the ordinary treatment, in which the 
patient merely receives what the operator gives, and the latter is 
often exhausted. 

The hand of the operator has an attractive power, which is both 
psychic and physiological, and consequently attracts to the spot 
where it is applied the vital forces of the patient. 

The psychic attraction of the hand is easily ascertained upon 
sensitives. If the sensitive subject stands before you erect and at 
ease, the application of the hands for a moment on the forehead, 
followed by gently withdrawing them, will produce a tendency in the 
head to follow the retiring hand. I do not consider it any objection 
to such facts that imagination may produce similar effects. The 
potentiality of tartar emetic is not refuted when we produce a similar 
nausea by imagination. In the majority of persons this would be 
imperceptible, but in the sensitives it is marked, and some will be so 
strongly attracted as to be unable to hold their place and compelled 
to advance. The most passive subjects will be entirely controlled, 
and may be drawn down upon the floor. 

The psychic attraction of the hand is also realized in our friendly 



l $ 2 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

salutations — the grasp of the hand being the expression of personal 
attraction or friendship. Mechanically the hand is also the instru- 
ment of adhesion, retention, or holding- 

At the foundation of such phenomena lies the fact that the vital 
forces, emanating from the brain and chest in voluntary actions and 
unconscious influences, both physiological and psychic, must emanate 
from the surface of the body, if like caloric and electricity they have 
a real existence. Of these emanations all can recognize caloric, and 
sensitive persons recognize electricity and psychic influences. For 
these psychic influences we have at present no instrument of detec- 
tion but the nerves of the sensitive, and for electric emanations of a 
delicate character there was formerly no test but the nerves and 
muscles of the galvanoscopic frog. But the skill of Dubois Reymond 
and others has furnished instruments of sufficient delicacy to detect 
the delicate electric currents of living beings and ascertain that there 
are not only electric currents in motor nerves and muscles, but cer- 
tain permanent currents in the body proceeding from its superior 
portions downwards, as they do in great quantity and power in the 
Gymnotus or electric eel, and Malapterurus or electric shad. These 
currents are the product of vitality, changing according to the degree 
of health and vigor, and cease at death. 

These " strong and constant currents," as they are called, are not 
thermo-electric but vital, proceeding from the positive head and chest 
to the negative extremities — the palms of the hand and the soles of 
the feet. 

The negative character of the palms of the hands qualifies them to 
perform the part which they have always performed in my experi- 
ments — that of attracting and concentrating the vital forces and 
emanations of the subject, in which they coincide with the negative 
pole of the galvanic battery. Wherever I direct the hands to be 
applied for any purpose upon the body, the sponge of the negative 
pole of a weak galvanic or magneto-galvanic current may be applied 
with similar results — in some respects coarser and more powerful 
and dangerous* as a concentrative stimulus, but substantially similar. 

* The powerful and even dangerous character of electric treatment, unskilfully 
applied, may be inferred from its effects as stated by the best authors. Althaus 
says : ''The sparks from the common electrical machine, applied to the skin of any 
part of the body, produce a sensation of pricking and pain; if they are large the 
skin becomes red and a papular eruption, resembling lichen urticatus, is produced. 
If a continuous current be made to act upon the skin, a sensation of pricking and 
heat, redness, inflammation, and sloughing of the skin and subjacent structures 
may be caused, provided the current be powerful and the application prolonged. A 
volta-faradic current may produce sensations varying, according to its intensity, 
from a slight pricking to an acute burning pain; but although the tension of the 
current maybe very high, it will not cause nutritive disturbances like the continuous 
current." 

" If a continuous current of moderate power be directed to the skin for a short 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 83 

In vital treatment there is more than the mere concentration of func- 
tions produced by negative electricity. There are emanations from 
the operator and absorptions of influence or general sympathy as in 
the old practice of animal magnetism. 

It is true that in treating under the guidance of Sarcognomy the 
operator must part with a portion of his vital force to a constitution 
which is in a morbid state, but as he stimulates the healthy energies 
of the patient, the latter co-operates in the cure, and his co-operation 
relieves the operator. Thus if one by his combativeness rouses the 
hostility of one assailed, their mutual violence stimulates each to the 
highest energy ; or if one diffuses humor and boisterous mirth in a 
company, the mirthful response assists his own gayety, and he feels 
very differently from what he should if he addressed a solemn group 
without a smile in response. 

To pour forth hope, joy, love, or zeal to cold, unresponsive souls 
is an exhausting experiment, and to sit sympathetically in company 
with them produces more depression in ourselves than exaltation in 
them. The only way in which we can affect them beneficially with- 
out being injured is to go as a teacher or healer in the utmost ten- 
sion of our powers, suppressing our impressible sympathy, while they 
are kept in a passive, receptive condition. 

The patient, to be passive, should be in a sitting or lying position, 

time, it dilates the blood-vessels and promotes circulation, but if it be applied for 
several hours successively (as is often done with Pulvermacher's chains and gal- 
vanic belt), the blood-vessels become paralyzed, and sloughs are produced. An in- 
duced current conveyed for a short time to the motor nerves and muscles rouses 
their vital energy; but, if its action be prolonged for an hour or more, the motor 
power of those organs becomes exhausted, and temporary paralysis may be the 
result/' 

" Static electricity, electro-magnetism, and magneto-electricity only affect that 
organ if applied so powerfully as to interfere with health and perhaps life: but a 
gentle, continuous current, directed to the face, scalp, or neck, and which causes no 
or scarcely any sensation of pain, is readily transmitted from those parts to the 
cerebral substance. . . . Sensations are caused by an application of the cur- 
rent to the head, which can only be owing t) a direct action of it on the cerebral 
matter, viz., dizziness, giddiness, sleepiness, sickness, faintness, vomiting, and even 
convulsions. The latter phenomena are only noticed if the current be one of con- 
siderable power; but giddiness and faintness are often felt, even when a gentle cur- 
rent is used." 

That electricity may be used in a safer and more congenial manner I do not 
doubt; but it needs important changes, both in electrical instruments and in the 
knowledge of the application of currents, to render it entirely satisfactory. 

Unfavorable experience in the use of electricity from imperfect apparatus unskil- 
fully applied, has led to such cautions as the following, given in Lincoln's '• Electro- 
therapeutics :" "The duration of a single application should be rather carefully 
restricted, when one is using batteries of the usual strength. As a general rule, 
three minutes is long enough for application to a nerve, from three to five minutes 
to the spinal cord, from one to three minutes to the organs of sight and hearing. 
When muscles are to be stimulated, the time allotted to each will, of course, varv; 
if, for example, a whole limb has to be worked upon, it is necessary to shorten the 
time for each muscle, but for a single large muscle two minutes should be the 
utmost allowed; and for a group of muscles five minutes should suffice." 

On the other hand, with the new apparatus and methods given to my pupils, 
no such limitations of time are required. Treatment may be continued for an hour 
or more, with effects entirely beneficial and unobjectionable. 



I $4 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

the latter being better, and in the respectful, friendly, confiding state 
of mind which is necessary to his passive receptivity. The greater 
his reverence, love, and faith toward his operator the better the 
result. 

The operator should be in the full tension of his powers — in high 
health, full of courage, hope, zeal, and joy. But he cannot main- 
tain this state of mind, which develops his highest powers, under the 
most prevalent earthly influences. There is too much of difficulty, 
anxiety, and doubt ; too much of jealousy, selfishness, and conten- 
tion ; too much of gloom, and moral as well as physical malaria, in 
the common experience of life to sustain the bright, joyous energy 
which should belong to the healer and the teacher. 

True, he may go forth on some beautiful day when the atmosphere 
woos him with the bland warmth of its zephyrs and its well-vitalized 
purity ; when the flying clouds, the waving trees, and the rich-tinted 
flowers pour into his soul a sense of the Divine beneficence flowing 
around him, and thus feel his better nature inspired and strengthened 
by an influx of joy; and hence I think the best triumphs of nervauric 
healing are in warm climates or in summer weather, and in pure, 
well-warmed apartments, where the moral warmth of the society is 
equal to the physical warmth of the atmosphere. 

But the limited amount of such inspiring environment, and the 
large amount of gloom and of cold, moral apathy, as well as malari- 
ous and negative* atmosphere, in many places, render it necessary to 
have some other source of supply than the prevalent physical and 
moral conditions in which civilized society exists to-day. 

We need a grand and continuous inspiration ; and although I am 
speaking now of the healer, what I say is equally applicable to every 
reader, for all need to be sustained in health and moral power for the 
performance of duty and enjoyment of life. 

We need an unfailing, ever-present inspiration. 

WHENCE CAN IT COME? 

and from what can it come ? It must come from something which 

* The atmosphere has positive inspiring conditions which vitalize the nervous 
system and invigorate all the secretions, and negative conditions which exhau:-t 
and depress vitality, injure the nervous system, check the secretions, and aggravate 
every disease Electricity and actinism are concerned in these conditions, but 
scientists have not investigated this subject. They have not been studied in their 
atmospheric relations to the human constitution, and my own duties have not 
allowed me time to give this subject a proper investigation. The healing and re- 
storative influences come from the sun. Hence they are more abundant in southern 
breezes, but are also found in the north winds which blow over a dry and frozen 
but sunshiny region. They are deficient wherever the solar emanations are 
absorbed by thawing or by evaporation, and abundant when restored to the atmos- 
phere by freezing or precipitation. The deadliest conditions exist in the absence 
of sunshine and in prolonged evaporation and thawing. These varying atmos- 
pheric conditions affect not only the human constitution but the action of electric 
and telegraphic apparatus, the manufacture of sulphuric acid, the oxidation of 
phosphorus, and the decay of organic substances. 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. l8$ 

can inspire our hope, love, courage, and heroism. That which is to 
inspire our love must be supremely lovely and 'noble — that which is 
to inspire hope must be the landscape of futurity, bright with the 
sunshine of joy — that which is to inspire courage is the certainty of 
ultimate conquest over all evils and opposition. Where can all this 
be found but in heaven ? In the boundless spirit world we have an 
eternity of life triumphant over all evil conditions — not a far-off 
realm, dimly perceived by a hoodwinked faith, hoped for against 
doubt, grasped at with the energy of dying despair, or enjoyed in 
passive melancholy, in the spirit of the poet who sings that 

" Love and hope and beauty's bloom 
Are blossoms gathered for the tomb." 

The heaven to which we look for inspiration is neither remote nor 
shadowy nor doubtful. Our friends and relatives and ancestors are 
there ; he who is now writing these lines may be there in less than 
a score of years, and some that read them will be there still sooner, 
and if you would look upon life, dear reader, with a large conception 
of its realities, you would realize how short, how very short, the dis- 
tance between your present condition and the immortal hosts of 
higher spheres, who are soon to be your companions and who are your 
companions now when your finer, interior senses can feel and realize 
their presence. 

The healer should be inspired — as Jesus was inspired, and prom- 
ised his followers they should attain a similar inspiration and do similar 
works. Anthropology shows that they who live the heavenly life on 
earth do become inspired, and become healers, teachers, reformers, 
uplifters for humanity, by their moral power and enthusiasm. 

How does this inspiration reach us ? The method is simple and 
intelligible. The object that is capable of inspiring our love, uplifts, 
energizes, and beautifies our whole nature. 

Men and women are never so happy, so bright, so generous, so 
heroic as when inspired by mutual love, and happy are they who can 
find an enduring, faultless earthly love to be an inspiration through 
life. The bright and faultless objects of perfect love are to most of 
us discoverable only beyond the river. If we look among the angels 
we find a perfect love — either some one whom we loved on earth, or 
some one who has risen to the sublime heights of love and wisdom 
by centuries of progress. Christendom finds its saints for love and 
adoration in the Bible, and some are well worthy of Divine love. But 
whether our love, or our adoration, which is the intensity of love, be 
given to Jesus, or St. John, or Mary the mother, or any of the army of 
saints from Moses to Joan of Arc, or from Joan of Arc to Washington, 
the profound conviction of the nobility and loveliness of that which we 



1 86 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

adore is wliat calls out our love and gives us inspiration. Even if Jesus 
and Mary had been myths, the faith in their reality would have made 
them the inspiring power of Christendom ; but, being realities, there 
was not only this inspiring power, but the inspiring influence of their 
actual spiritual existence. He whose best conceptions and spiritual 
capacities have been depressed by the physical wants and struggles 
of human life to a stern materialism, below the plane of being on 
which we can realize the supernal, should endeavor to substitute for 
confiding faith the power of a vivid imagination, forming grand ideals 
in his own mind, or allowing them to be evolved by romantic fic- 
tion and poetry, or by history and biography. 

The worship of Jesus was not absurd ; it was an adoring love for 
the qualities represented by him. The worship of Mary and of all the 
true saints was not absurd ; it was a wholesome and inspiring love 
of virtues idealized in them. Worship often begins for men with the 
adoration of some true, noble, and gifted woman, whose worship 
deepens as she rises in the spheres, and this was the worship enjoyed 
by Auguste Comte after he had lost sight of supernal truth. Wor- 
ship is but the most exalted love. 

Beyond all these is the love and worship of the ineffable Divine, 
which no more interferes with or affects other loves than the love for 
the mother forbids love for her child. On the contrary, saintly love 
is the complement of Divine love, and both are the inspiration of that 
earthly love which extends to every brother, however unworthy he 
may be. Love on the earth plane is too often an unsatisfactory and 
thankless love, and is in danger of perishing in the cold, unless sus- 
tained by the warmth of Divine and saintly love, in which we approach 
something higher than self and are strengthened and ennobled thereby. 
For want of this how many a soul of noble powers, blind to the eternal 
beauty, has sunk into bitter misanthropy and scorn of all mankind. 

It is evident then that the supernal world calls forth our love by its 

loveliness, our reverence by its grandeur, our hope by its assurance of 

happy immortality, and our courage by the assurance that we are not 

. perishing worms of the dust, but partakers of a Divine immortal nature 

which cannot be crushed. 

Inspired thus with the nobler emotions, the healer is brought into 
sympathy with the supernal love, and as identity of condition implies 
sympathetic zmion, he becomes actually inspired by the grand spiritual 
presence which from higher spheres flows into all who ascend to 
meet it. It may not be consciously, it may be simply an unconscious 
portion of his spiritual life, as all inspired sentiments are — as Ole 
Bull said that his music was inspired by the mountains of Norway, 
and Byron said " high mountains are to me a feeling." 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. 187 

But when the nervous temperament is favorable, when certain an- 
terior interior parts of the brain are well developed, the spiritual power 
is not merely an unperceived support, but becomes an actual 
presence, and the attending-, inspiring, or controlling spirit adds his 
power to that of a healing medium so generously as to relieve the 
latter of the burden, to give the intuitive diagnosis of disease, and to 
perform the healing work in giving spiritual vitality, which is so 
much more perfect, enduring, and inexhaustible in the spiritual 
spheres — the infinite sea of life. 

Aided in this manner, the healer does marvellous works both in 
diagnosis and in healing ; and the advent of this form of practice now, 
when materialistic philosophy has built up a mass of physical science 
concerning living bodies which rises like a Tower of Babel vainly 
seeking the skies, but which ever fails in exact diagnosis * and truth- 
ful prognosis in difficult cases and fails so often in therapeutic 
practice, — the advent, I say, of a higher form of practice in which 
spiritual power is concerned, demonstrates the blundering folly and 
laborious disappointment of human life in the scientific as well as the 
practical, when alienated from the supernal and spiritual, and the 
glorious elevation of every department of life when man is brought 
into nearer relations to the Divine. 

The learned and eloquent Prof. Draper was the only physiologist of 
eminence who realized the necessity of rising above physical science 
into the spiritual sphere for that of which the colleges know nothing, 
which he expressed as follows, in his able text-book of human 
physiology: "We have precisely the same reason for believing the 
existence of the immortal spirit that we have for knowing that there 
is an external world. The two facts are of the same order. Of the 
future continuance of that external world irrespective of ourselves we 
entertain no doubt ; indeed, in certain cases, as in those presented by 
astronomy, we are able to tell its state a thousand years hence. So 
long as our attention was confined to statical pliysiology everything 
connected with the subject now under consideration was enveloped 
in darkness, but it will be very different when dynamical physiology 
begins to be cultivated — dynamical physiology which speaks of the 
course of life, of organs, individuals, and races, . . . and 
then it will appear that the universal opinion of the ages and nations 
is not a vulgar illusion, but a solemn philosophical fact." It is to 
this dynamical physiology that I have given my life, and in which I 

*Dr. Taft, who recently died at Hartford, Conn., was pronounced at the begin- 
ning of his professional life, by Dr. Willard Parker, incapable of living over six 
months, because one of his lungs was about gone; which opinion, being confirmed 
by a leading Boston physician, was universally accepted. Nevertheless, he lived to 
the age of sixty-four, and the autopsy astonished the doctors by revealing a pair of 
sound lungs. 



l88 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

have found the philosophy of the healing art. In a coming century 
the colleges will begin to learn its importance and know that the ex- 
istence and operation of the soul are "not a vulgar illusion." 

Hoping that the healer has attained the plane of true life and over- 
flowing health which is beneficial to all who approach him, I would 
then caution him so to maintain his powers as to preserve his own 
health and efficiency. 

In the first place, he should never enter the sick chamber in a 
hungry, thirsty, or enfeebled condition, or when exhausted by treat- 
ing patients or the cares of business, for in such conditions he is pre- 
disposed to absorb the malaria of the sick chamber and the nervauric 
emanations of the patient, and has less power a;s a healer. 

He should not expose himself to the physical emanations of the 
patient, no matter what his condition, for it will require all his 
energy to resist the vital pathological emanations that impress his 
sympathetic faculties. He should not breathe the air charged with 
the respiration and cutaneous emanations of the sick, but should 
have the chamber thoroughly ventilated before he enters it or have 
the patient brought into another apartment, and, if there is a current 
of air, should be on the windward side of the patient. 

The best precaution for both patient and healer is to destroy the 
malaria of human transpiration and household emanations of various 
kinds by ozone. No costly apparatus is necessary. A small piece 
of phosphorus placed in a soup plate or saucer of water will slowly 
generate ozone enough to purify the air of an apartment. When we 
wish to increase the amount of ozone, we expose the phosphorus by 
tilting the plate or diminishing the amount of water, and when we 
wish to diminish the ozone we cover the phosphorus with water. 
The emanations of mint, thyme, cedar, and pine, and most of the 
odorous oils, have in some degree a similar purifying influence upon 
the air — none perhaps better than thymol. When a very impure 
condition is present, the diffusion of sulphurous acid gas by burning- 
sulphur is an efficient disinfectant. Condy's fluid has been highly 
recommended by the medical profession as a purifying disinfectant. 

In malarious localities, or in houses of imperfect plumbing and 
drainage, these precautions are very important. The best labors of 
the healer may be defeated by the insidious influence of impure air. 
Iron and its salts are the best convenient and harmless antiseptics to 
check the development of malaria, by sprinkling on the ground or in 
places where decaying substances are present. Sulphate of iron, 
chloride of iron, and iron rust are ail valuable for this purpose. 

Ozone is the natural purifier of the atmosphere, to which it owes 
its freshness in the forest and mountain heights. It is generated by 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 89 

atmospheric electricity, and may be produced in our apartments by 
machines for frictional electricity. It may also be generated exten- 
sively by a mixture of three parts of sulphuric acid and two of the 
permanganate of potash. 

A plethoric condition of blood-vessels is one of the essential con- 
ditions of health for all human beings and for animals. The less 
blood we have the more easily is our vital power exhausted, the 
more feeble and irritable are the nerves, and the more liable are we 
to inflammations, colds, fevers, and every other form of disease. | 

Abundant nourishment is especially necessary to the healer, and 
when attending feeble, emaciated patients he finds it necessary to 
eat much more than his ordinary allowance to generate vital con- 
ditions for his patients as well as himself. It would seem myste- 
rious or incredible to the disciples of the materialistic physiology 
which prevails to-day, that without muscular fatigue or any special 
evacuation, the mere contact of the hands of the healer with his 
patient sometimes produces an exhaustion which requires to be sup- 
plied with food, and enables him to eat and drink more freely, as if 
he had been engaged in severe labor. But such is the fact, as I 
have personally experienced ; and it proves that food is the means of 
supplying something more than mere organized matter — something 
which may be lost by vital transmission and radiation. 

In the hungry condition, just before meals, the healer should 
abstain from treating his patients. His diet should be liberal and 
nourishing (adapted to his own constitution), and a cup of tea or 
coffee will often add much to his operative power and resistance to 
disease. In any difficult case he should use some congenial stimulus 
to exalt his powers and resist contagion. Absorption does not occur 
to any material extent when the blood-vessels are very plethoric ; 
hence the free use of liquids, especially such as are of stimulating 
and tonic qualities, gives great protection against morbid contagions. 

When any particular form of disease is prevalent, the healer would 
find it beneficial to use for himself as a prophylactic the remedies 
which that disease requires. In a malarious atmosphere, for example, 
two or three grains of dextro- quinine taken daily would give him a 
protection. In some cases he would even find it expedient to take 
himself the remedy the patient needs, for his own protection, or 
even to take enough to charge his constitution with its influence and 
give the influence to the patient by contact.* 

Patients may be treated to any extent by external application on 
the skin of the remedies which they require, and if the operator 

♦There is nothing more efficient as a general antagonist to morbid atmospheric 
influences and contagions than the cimicifuga or Macrotys racemosa (common 
name Black Cohosh). It has been found efficient in resisting variolous infection. 



I9O OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

should apply the required remedies on his hands, he would also find 
that a pleasant mode of making the required medical impression. 
The advantages of this course, in swallowing the remedies or using 
them on the hands, is the protection it gives the healer and its genial 
influence on the patient. 

The healer should avoid the atmosphere of disease. His office 
should be very freely ventilated, and in visiting the sick chamber he 
should have it ventilated before he enters, and should not remain too 
long; but, above all, he sJiould not remain in a passive condition, but 
should remain on his feet, either engaged in conversation and giving 
directions or in active manipulations upon the patient. 

The first thing to be done in almost all cases is to make dispersive 
manipulations on the seat of pain or disease. The nervaura of the 
human body is not an imaginary thing ; it is radiated and conducted 
in every direction ; and when the clothing and atmosphere are in a 
very conductive condition, exhaustion is produced as in a moist 
atmosphere. The bracing effect of a dry, non-conductive atmosphere 
is well known. Metals are good conductors, and many a poor 
sewing woman has had her health seriously impaired by the metallic 
foot-piece with which she works her machine ; many a writer has 
had his fingers and writing capacity impaired by the metal instru- 
ment used in writing, which would not have occurred if he had used 
the goose-quill, or a rubber, gutta percha, cork, or wooden pen- 
holder. 

Non-conductors are necessary for our protection. Woollen and silk 
garments retain the vital conditions and produce a happy effect, dif- 
ferent from that of cotton. Linen, as the best conductor, is objec- 
tionable in personal clothing on account of its conductivity. 

The retention of nervaura in the brain by a silk cap has proved 
very beneficial in impairment of brain power, and the use of silk and 
woollen clothing is very beneficial to the nervauric healer. 

That the nervaura may be beneficially retained or wastefully lost by 
our clothing is an evidence of its substantial reality, and every sensi- 
tive can feel its emanation from the hands and the various emanations 
from different parts of the body, or from the clothing. 

In disease and pain we may proceed upon the theory that the nerv- 
aura of the morbid part is morbid, and should be removed. We 
frequently find that in manipulating upon the seat of pain, the pain 
seems to be propelled in the direction of our passes, and if not dis- 
persed or scattered, moves along the limb, until at the extremity it 
departs. The first thing to be done, then, is to make dispersive 
passes lightly and rapidly to remove the morbid aura, after which the 
application of the hand produces a wholesome effect. 



CHAP. X.] OPERATIVE METHODS. igi 

The nervaura of the operator's hand applied to the passive patient, 
all over the person, by gentle passes, or by gentle percussion, is a 
soothing, restorative influence, tending to resist the waste of tissues 
and vital forces, to diminish fever and excitement, and to promote 
nutrition and sleep. 

In addition to these effects, it imparts the vital qualities of the 
operator's constitution, and, if he be well supplied with health, benev- 
olence, and vital force, gives an increment of these to the patient. 
Hence a great deal of good has been done in this way in the practice 
of what is called animal magnetism, and the perception of the bene- 
fits produced by magnetizers has led the materialistic medical profes- 
sion to attempt an imitation in their own clumsy, mechanical way, 
which they call massage. 

If the blundering and ignorant practice of any art in disregard of 
accumulated knowledge is entitled to be called quackery, massage is 
a conspicuous example of quackery, or half-developed knowledge. 

Ignoring all the wonderful cures made by magnetic healers ; ignor- 
ing their experimental knowledge and practical directions, which 
have been so long published and so successfully acted on ; ignoring 
the very existence of psycho-nervous influences and emanations, physi- 
cians demand a class of ignorant subordinates, mechanical rubbers, 
who operate blindly and often injuriously as well as inefficiently, 
Ignorance in the massage is not compensated by intelligence in the 
physician, for the latter, if faithful to the dicta and prejudices of his 
college and clique, has kept himself in wilful ignorance. Neverthe- 
less the rubber, if intelligent, will soon find that he produces effects 
which physicians do not understand, and if honest in attempting to 
comprehend the treatment, he will learn something of what has been 
known as animal magnetism, and borrow from that something to 
render massage more beneficial. His healing skill will then be 
acceptable, cloaked under the name of massage. But I should be 
sorry to see any magnetic healer, for the sake of physicians' patronage, 
concealing his artistic skill under the delusive and vulgar title of 
massage. 

Manual treatment consists in, first, dispersive passes on morbid 
parts ; second, charging the system with the nervaura of the opera- 
tor ; third, stimulating organs by contact and percussion; fourth, 
changing the vitaL balance of functions by dispersing from one spot 
to accumulate at another. 

Excitement accumulated at one spot maybe dispersed by dispersive 
passes with the hand, by positive currents of electricity, and by spong- 
ing the surface with warm_orJiot water. 

Excitement may be concentrated to any spot by the application of 



192 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

the hands, by the negative pole of the battery, by the application of 
dry heat, and by stimulating plasters. 

By these simple measures we call forth and regulate all the vital 
forces, rousing lungs, liver, stomach, bowels, kidneys, and the mus- 
cular system, and producing all the mental conditions necessary to 
co-operate in the treatment, when we understand the locations pre. 
sented by Sarcognomy. 

The advantage of treating the constitution locally according to 
Sarcognomy is that by this method the energies of the patient are 
specifically roused to aid in the treatment. There are certain con- 
trolling forces which when roused improve the condition of the entire 
constitution and respond to the purpose of the healer. 

Thus as the operator stimulates each organ he rouses a beneficial 
response, and is not exhausted. If he stimulates the region of Health, 
he finds a healthful influence returning, which he enjoys and per- 
ceives in most cases by his sympathy. 

To call out this reaction and stimulate the constitution of the 
patient to recovery, as it is stimulated by appropriate medicines, with- 
out exhausting the operator, he should not only know exactly what 
faculties and organs to rouse, but should rouse them actively, instead 
of passively. If he places himself in an entirely passive and sym- 
pathetic condition, with his hands resting on his patient, he absorbs 
the emanations of the latter, and becomes to some extent the victim 
of the contagion, so that his health is gradually undermined. Instead 
of the operator diffusing health, it is sometimes the patient diffusing 
disease. 

By the active methods which I have recommended the operator 
repels the influence of disease, and by the knowledge of Sarcognomy 
he is enabled to produce the exact effect that is desired, which might 
be utterly impossible by any general operation, as when, for example, 
in a patient suffering from melancholy and hysteric conditions, cheer- 
fulness and tranquillity are restored by placing the hands immediately 
under the arms. 

But with all these precautions a sensitive healer will gradually 
absorb morbific influences from contact, sympathy, emanations, and 
the breath of his patient, and needs to be continually guarded. The 
experiments of Dr. B. W. Richardson and Brown-Sequard show that 
air which has been breathed is deprived of something necessary to 
life, and supplied with an unwholesome substance that is poisonous 
to animals when injected in their blood-vessels. I hope. these warn- 
ings will not be neglected, but I know that physicians and healers 
habitually neglect themselves, and the approach of morbid conditions 
is so gentle and insidious that they take no alarm and find themselves 



CHAP. X.J OPERATIVE METHODS. 193 

ill unawares. The only safe rule is to demand for ourselves complete, 
exuberant health at all times, and if there is any decline from that, to 
look into the cause at once, and remove it. 

The precaution of washing the hands immediately after a treat- 
ment is a great safeguard, but where there is not much of the mor- 
bid influence each hand may be rapidly brushed by the other. If any 
medical or morbific influence enters by the arms, passes down the 
arms and hands may remove it, and after treating a patient a friend 
may remove from our constitution the deleterious influence by such 
passes, or we may make them ourselves. The devotees of rigid 
materialism may think this fanciful, but ample personal experience is 
a better guide than theoretic dogmatism. 

A still more complete method is, after brushing the hands that 
have been on the sick, to place them on the well. Select some 
vigorous, healthy person, and place the hands for a few minutes on 
his shoulders, about the middle of the shoulder blade. This is the 
centre of health, and, if such a precaution were regularly observed, 
the healer, instead of losing health by treatment, might actually gain. 
This is the method which should be adopted in the prolonged treat- 
ment of a difficult case. The operator should have magazines of 
health at hand, and draw upon them freely. We may derive a still 
better influence from the top of the head or from the upper part of 
the chest from the neck to the mammae. But there are some born 
healers who for many hours increase in power as they relieve the sick, 
developing their own vitality or drawing from their inspiration. If 
society were ruled by providential wisdom, such individuals would be 
consecrated to the healinsr art. 

Another method which may be adopted in treating difficult cases is 
to have a healthful and vigorous person co-operate by placing his 
hands on our shoulders on the region of Health, and thus giving a 
sustaining power to resist and conquer morbid conditions. 

I cannot impress too strongly on persons of a sensitive tempera- 
ment the necessity of protecting themselves from morbid emanations. 
True, there are some whose vital energy and will enable them to repel 
morbid influences, but there are millions who are unconsciously 
injured; and the medical profession has greatly increased the disease 
and mortality from such causes by its stolid materialism, and unwill- 
ingness to recognize contagion through the nervous system. My 
own experience has been quite decisive, as my most serious distur- 
bances of health have come from contact with the sick, and I have 
on that account never been able to devote much time to the practice 
of medicine. In Italy contagion is so fully realized by the people 
that it is not uncommon to destroy everything in the room in which 



194 OPERATIVE METHODS. [CHAP. X. 

a consumptive has died. In England and America contagion is not 
understood. A family in Ohio, twenty-five years ago, were impor- 
tuned by a consumptive in the last stages of life to take him into 
their house to die, and complied with his wishes, unconscious of 
danger. Their daughter waited on him until she became so sick she 
was forced to go away, and became a patient with similar symptoms. 
She had a strong constitution, but gradually emaciated, losing nearly 
forty pounds, under the consumptive cough, which has continued 
twenty-five years in spite of all that could be done, until in despair 
she called upon me, emaciated and feeble, for medical treatment. 
Had the family known the transmissibility of disease this misfortune 
might have been avoided. 

The most permanent morbid impression on my own constitution 
was produced by attending, over thirty years ago, a severe case of 
fever and hepatic disease. 



CHAPTER XI. 

NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 

Impressibility the first question; its various external indications and causes — 
Influence of love — Improvement at the critical period of life — Test by the hand — 
Test by the eye — The receptive or impressible condition — The use of medicines — 
Impressible region of body — Passive and active methods — Influence of warmth, 
food, and medicine — Virtue the best foundation — Four conti-olling powers: health, 
brain power, vital force, sexual development — The shoulder — Plan of the human 
constitution — Parallelism of the spiritual faculties operating through the brain, and 
the physical powers displayed in the body — The psycho-dynamic health power; 
why at the shoulder; its proximity to the life centres; its connection with the 
spinal centre of power and ethical region of chest; its approbative character; rela- 
tion to intercostal nerves — The foundation of Sarcognomy — Importance of shoul- 
der exercises — The shoulder as a regulating region and centre — Treatment on the 
back — Narrow and exclusive views deprecated — Back to back practice — Fantastic 
theories and unscientific methods — Narrowness and prejudice — Importance of 
protecting the shoulders and back — Nature protects the vital regions of head and 
body. 

In approaching a new patient the first question is whether his 
impressibility is sufficient to give a satisfactory response to our 
efforts, or whether he has the coarse, immovable temperament on 
which refined influences are wasted, and which we should willingly 
resign to the heroic treatment of cathartics, emetics, stimulants, nar- 
cotics, epispastics, and sudorifics. 

The general appearance will usually be sufficient for those who 
have intuitive perceptions, but there are distinct indications in the 
delicacy of the skin, and the general refinement and softness of the 
person, no less than in the cranial configuration. The predominance 
of the brain in front of the ear assures us that its faculties are better 
adapted to receiving and appreciating impressions than to reaction 
and resistance. 

All the anterior organs promote impressibility, as all the posterior 
resist it, but we are specially interested now in only one kind of 
impressibility, not the impressibility of the intellectual organs of the 
forehead, which receive knowledge through the senses and are there- 
fore influenced by ideas, nor that of the genial and benevolent 
sentiments which respond to human worth and energy, but the 
impressibility which yields to subtle influences, to the subtle emana- 
tions of the nervous system. 

This impressibility is associated with the breadth of the head at 
the temples, especially at the anterior part of that region of sensi- 



I96 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XI. 

bility which I discovered in 1837-38, and which has been forcibly 
illustrated by Prof. Ferrier in the cruel experiment on the brain of a 
monkey. 

This region of Sensibility, at the basis of the middle lobe (now 
called the temporo-sphenoidal), extends from the back of -.the eye 
sockets along and above the cheek-bone to about an inch in front of 
the cavity of the ear. Its large development gives us acute sensi- 
bility to everything that can affect our senses, and the more anterior 
portion of the organ, possessing the more delicate and refined sensi- 
bilities, feels the influences that emanate from vital processes, and 
therefore is affected by them ; hence it may be properly called the 
organ of impressibility, above and anterior to which is the region of 
Dreaming and Somnambulism, an inch behind the external angle of 
the brow. 

Breadth of this region is the best indication of impressibility, but 
delicate impressibility may exist without the breadth, for the organs 
which give breadth to the temples are concurrents or coincidents of 
analogous organs at the median line, on the same level, adjacent to 
the falx (separating the hemispheres), which may produce delicate 
forms of impressibility and intuition without giving breadth. 

Moreover, impressibility may arise from a frontal temperament, 
produced, not by large frontal organs, but by the predominance of the 
front over a feeble occiput, and by a frontal life. As the predom- 
inance of the animal impulses in the mind and temperament may be 
produced by living a turbulent animal life among coarse associates, 
so a predominance of frontal qualities and frontal temperament may 
be produced by living according to the inclinations of the frontal 
organs — a quiet, amiable, indolent, but unselfish life, a sedentary 
life of delicacy, refinement, and social harmony- — the effect of which 
we recognize in the general appearance. 

The proud, heroic, and combative elements of character are antag- 
onistic to this impressibility and tend to destroy it. Hence we do 
not find a great deal of it among the avaricious and jealous competi- 
tors for the highest rank and power. There is far more among the 
humbler classes, whose selfish passions have not grown strong by 
indulgence, and whose self-esteem does not interfere with a reveren- 
tial esteem for superiority. It is far more abundant, too, among 
women, in whom the hostile, combative elements are generally kept 
in check, and who live generally under the refining (frontal) influ- 
ences of home. 

Moreover, Impressibility is especially favored by love, the exalted 
emotion which dominates over the life of woman as it does not over 
the life of man ; for love tends strongly to that intimate sympathy, 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAUR1C THERAPEUTICS. I97 

unity, and responsiveness which occur through Impressibility. (The 
modus operandi of this belongs to the psychic study of the organs of 
the brain.) 

Hence the most perfect and interesting exhibitions of Impressi- 
bility occur among the most lovely and charming people. It is per- 
haps never absent when the sexual development first matures in 
young women. The period of refinement, romance, beauty, and 
poetic sentiment, when girlhood verges into womanhood, is the period 
of great impressibility, during which the magnetic touch of a mother 
or friend is competent to regulate all the delicate machinery of life, 
to ward off incipient disease, and guide the normal development of 
body and soul. But, alas, it is too often a period of mismanagement 
by the ignorance of the family and sometimes by the coarse blunder- 
ing of drug practitioners, ignorant alike of the soul and the law T s of 
its tenement — knowing only a scanty number of coarse medicaments, 
and reluctant to increase their number. 

It is here that Therapeutic Sarcognomy will show its vast and 
beneficent power by making this transitional period not one of ner- 
vous disorder, habitual languor, and general inefficiency, or the initial 
period of grave and life -long diseases, but a period of mental bright- 
ness, for activity and development into permanent health and useful- 
ness, whence a long line of noble posterity. 

It must not be supposed that the strong and hardy elements of 
character are incompatible with impressibility because they antag- 
onize it. The first individual in whom I discovered the extreme 
range of the sensitive faculties, Bishop Polk, was a man of strong 
character, and became a general in the Confederate army, in which 
he lost his life. 

In addition to the indications of impressibility in temperament, 
sex, habits, education, and cranial development, we may observe in- 
dications in the face. A large eye with a large pupil, and a fulness 
or prominence of the cheeks around the eyes, with a rosy tint, are 
valuable indications, to which we may add a fulness of the upper 
chest, of the female bosom, and of the region at the lower end of the 
sternum. 

But we may easily make a satisfactory test with the hands. Let 
the patient extend his hand horizontally, with the palm up, while we 
make a pass over it, the tips of our fingers coming within an inch of 
the surface of his hand. If merely sensitive, he will recognize the 
warmth of our hands and possibly a slight, very slight tingling or 
pricking effect. But if impressible, the nervauric emanation from 
the fingers will produce a slightly cooling sensation, similar to that 
from a very gentle breeze. 



I98 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XI. 

The individual in whom this occurs will prove impressible to the 
influence of the hand, and in many cases will yield so readily to 
nervauric treatment as to make the cure of his diseases a pleasure. 

To illustrate further the degree of impressibility, we may touch the 
locality in the temples an inch behind the external angle of the brow, 
where we find Impressibility and Somnolence. While touching this 
locality on each side, a calm, dreamy feeling is produced in the sub- 
ject, making him indifferent to surrounding objects, and presently 
producing a disposition to close the eyes. The upper eyelids droop, 
quiver, and wink, and gradually incline to remain closed. In the 
extremely impressible they will be closed so firmly as to resist the 
effort to open them. 

The whole constitution is now in its most ductile or receptive con- 
dition, and nervauric treatment is sufficient for all its diseases. Yet 
the scientific operator who is familiar with the real value of medicines 
will still find it expedient to employ their assistance in accelerating 
and perfecting the cure, for medicines wisely adapted to the case are 
as congenial and wholesome as our common food. There is, indeed, 
no dividing line between food and medicine. What is commonly 
called food is the medicine for the hunger, thirst, and exhaustion 
caused by exertion and exposure. What is called medicine is the 
food for constitutions more than exhausted by adverse influences. 
Ferruginous and phosphoric preparations are the food for organs 
affected by degenerate or deglobulized blood. The coffee and wine 
which rouse from the prostration by heat and unwholesome air are as 
medical, only in a milder degree, as the quinine that resists malaria 
and the whiskey which saves the prostrated victim from the effect of 
the rattlesnake's venom. 

As the object of the healer is success in controlling the consti- 
tution of his patient to remove his diseases, it is proper that he 
should aim to increase and maintain the impressibility upon which 
his success depends. Hence, if he initiates his operations by touch- 
ing the temples until the eyes display the effect, he facilitates his 
subsequent labors. 

I think it preferable, however, to produce the impressible con- 
dition on the corresponding sensitive and somnolent region of the 
body by placing the hand on the lower part of the chest, just below 
the sternum (breast-bone). 

This operation, though not invigorating, is very valuable, as it pro- 
duces a rather pleasant, passive tranquillity, especially as the patient 
should be lying down when it is attempted, which is indeed the best 
position for all therapeutic operations. 

In consequence of the susceptibility thus established, the patient 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. I99 

feels the entire influence of his healer by coming into complete 
sympathy with him. The hand conveys his entire personality, and 
this operation alone would in many cases work curative results by 
subordinating the morbid constitution of the patient to the healthy 
constitution of the healer — producing by this simple operation 
results which the practitioners of animal magnetism aim to attain by 
a great variety of passes. 

While I would recommend this initial process for the subdual of 
the patient, I must qualify the recommendation by the suggestion 
that it may sometimes be objectionable; for while it increases the 
susceptibility of the subject it tends also to increase that of the 
operator, and by his passive condition to make him receptive of 
the morbid influences of the patient. When these influences from a 
strong or extremely morbid constitution are too strong, the operator 
should not assume this passive condition. He may conduct the 
operation more actively, as by a gentle patting or tapping operation,* 
and produce the same effect as by the mere application of the hand. 

What other influences, it may be asked, will increase the suscepti- 
bility. Warmth will contribute much ; it draws the circulation to 
the surface, increases the susceptibility, and, if carried far, diminishes 
the muscular energy (which belongs to the occipital or resisting 
region and antagonizes the amiable elements). Hence warm clim- 
ates have more than twice the susceptibility of the cold, and the 
nervauric healer who would win the greatest and most pleasant 
triumphs should visit the tropical regions, in which he will find 
almost the entire population subject to his power. In Mexico and 
South America the results will be far more brilliant than in the 
United States, and in India he will find the maximum impressibilitv, 
which was thoroughly demonstrated in the experience of Dr. 
Esdaile. 

For this reason impressibility is greater in summer than in winter, 
and in warm apartments than in cold ones. 

But the moral warmth is as necessary as the physical, and families 
ruled by love and harmony will not fail to develop susceptibility. 
Music also greatly promotes it, especially vocal music — so does the 
contemplation of beauty in nature or art, and habits of contemplation. 
There is a great deal of difference between the fashionable music, 
which is a mere combination of force and skill, and the music of feel- 
ing, like that of the Scotch, which has the best influence. 

* The late Dr. W. McDowell (the first writer upon consumption who developed 
its philosophy and rational treatment, as far back as 1840) told me that an overseer 
in Virginia was accustomed to make a wager that he could put any one to sleep by 
force. To do this he would have the man seized by assistants and thrown upon 
his back on the barn floor, where he was held while the operator, by a steady and 
gentle patting on the epigastric region, would put him to sleep. 



200 NERVAUR1C THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XI. 

Diseases of an acute, active character generally promote sus- 
ceptibility, and increase the sensitiveness to remedies, which explains 
the success of the infinitesimal homoeopathic remedies, nicely 
adapted to the disordered organ. Yet many chronic diseases in 
which the nervous system is impaired rather diminish the suscepti- 
bility. 

The influence of food and medicine upon susceptibility is worthy 
of attention. The sensitiveness and irritability of the nerves is in- 
creased by a low diet. Animal food tends to muscular development, 
which is antagonistic to the refining elements ; vegetable food and 
fruits are more appropriate for the frontal and superior regions of the 
brain. Flesh diet and articles difficult of digestion antagonize im- 
pressibility, but articles which gently stimulate the frontal organs 
favor it. 

Coffee, tea, and tobacco promote susceptibility, although their ex- 
cessive use impairs the health, and medicines of the anodyne or 
nervine class have a tendency to promote it. There are many 
articles, such as coca, lavender, valerian, cypripedium, vanilla, etc., 
which, by their tonic and restorative influence, are beneficial to the 
nervous system, and thus indirectly promote a healthy susceptibility. 

I think it will ultimately be realized that the predominance of 
virtue and refinement is the best foundation for impressibility, and 
I doubt not that in " the good time coming," when humanity shall 
have attained a nobler development, our entire population, even in 
cold climates, will become amenable to nervauric healing, and the 
aggregate vital power of society will sustain each individual against 
infirmity and disease by an all-embracing sympathy and friendship. 

Four Controlling Powers. — The perfect development of the 
constitution into health and efficiency depends mainly upon four 
localities, in which the vital forces are concentred, which may be called 
the regions of 

PERFECT HEALTH, 
BRAIN POWER, 
• VITAL FORCE, AND 
SEXUAL DEVELOPMENT. 

The region of perfect health or normal perfection is at the shoulder 
blades, or superior posterior region of the chest. 

This discovery carries us far away from all the crude philosophies 
and speculations of biologists. It is so great a departure from all 
pre-existing conceptions as to require some explanation to make it 
clearly intelligible to a philosophic inquirer. 

Through long familiarity, the new philosophy has become to me a 
familiar and simple view of life, but in sympathizing with one who 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 201 

dwells in the old forms of scientific thought, I perceive the necessity 
of giving an explanation of this new view of the constitution of 
man. I do not wish the therapeutic practitioner to know only the 
manual of treatment and the localities he must rouse, without under- 
standing as well as practicable the plan and philosophy of the human 
constitution, which control his operations. 

The fundamental plan is this, that every function of human life 
has a distinct local apparatus. There is no organ without a function, 
and no function without an organ. If we could determine a priori 
the functions of life, we should know what organs must exist. But 
the a priori method has always been a failure and delusion. We 
know nothing without observation and experiment. The existence 
of such a science as Sarcognomy has never been realized or ever 
imagined in human speculation, and the speculations of meta- 
physicians have only intensified ignorance of the constitution of 
man. 

But this statement of functions and organs gives only a very 
limited glimpse of the truth ; we find in the body a great many 
structures for the special purposes of physical existence, and in the 
brain a great many structures for the purposes of our spiritual exis- 
tence. The brain powers are omni-relative — they face all possible 
aspects or relations of life, and qualify for all possible duties. They 
have no mechanical or limited character, and do not resemble the 
mechanical and limited functions of the body. Nevertheless, they 
control and inspire the body, wielding all its powers for their own 
purposes, and although there is so wide a difference between the 
genial and spiritual powers connected with the brain, and the special 
physical powers of the body, there is yet established by Infinite 
Wisdom a wonderful parallelism, unity, consociation, and co-operation, 
as if one were the echo of the other — not by any arbitrary decree 
and inscrutable fixedness of order, but by a marvellous unity of 
purpose and practical co-operation which enables us to find for every 
part of the brain a corresponding part of the body with which it 
sympathizes and co-operates in health and in sickness, the details of 
which co-operation are revealed in Sarcognomy, the science which 
shows the marvellous adaptation of all physical structures (apparently 
only for physical purposes) to sustain, obey, and unitize with the 
grand spiritual powers which in man typify the Supreme Creator. 

The spiritual or psycho-dynamic power or faculty which we do not 
define but only suggest when we use the word Health is in the psychic 
sense the centre of our impulses, energies, and affections, so related 
that in its action it calls forth a harmonious combination of sustaining, 
impelling, and regulating powers, as has been already explained in the 
chapters on health and the spinal system. 



202 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XI. 

Why is this power manifested in the shoulder, and why is the 
shoulder a suitable location for a response to the spiritual faculty of 
Healthy Animation? 

The middle of the shoulder is adjacent to the great life centre in 
the chest, where the influx that sustains physical life by oxygen is in 
continual progress, and the efflux that bears vital conditions and 
nourishment to every organ of the body from the heart is also in con- 
tinual progress, and the extent of these two processes is nearly a 
correct measure of the amount of physiological life evolved in the 
body. The large development of that region, and consequently of 
the posterior part of the chest, necessarily implies an abui dance of 
vital action. Moreover, the shoulder, as distinguished from the chests 
is an appanage of the cephalic region of. the spinal cord, in which, as 
heretofore explained, is found the maximum vital power, and it covers 
the distribution of nerves from the cephalic region of the cord, which 
forms the brachial plexus, and gives the arms all their power. The 
shoulder stands between the spinal origin and the muscular and cuta- 
neous distribution of these nerves, and the posterior or scapular 
region of the shoulder receives its (sub- and supra-scapular) nerves 
from the brachial plexus. 

Thus the scapular region is associated with the highest vital ele- 
ments of lungs, heart, spine and arms, and its development must in- 
dicate both power and activity. But in addition to this, the shoulder 
has an ethical character, derived from its proximity to and connection 
with the summit of the lungs and the corresponding portion of the 
spine. The summit of the lungs is an ethical region, the region 
that sympathizes with the superior aspect of the brain, the region of 
the virtues, and gives the upward determination to the vital forces. 
It is well known and often expressed in emotional language that the 
bosom responds to or is agitated by the higher emotions. 

Thus the shoulder, in addition to its energies, is associated, by the 
law of correlation explained in the System of Anthropology, with the 
kindly emotions, and responsive to the love which belongs to the 
-mammary region of the chest. The faculty of healthy animation, 
in the brain region to which the shoulder region corresponds, is the 
faculty which attracts affection by its abundant and harmonious ex- 
uberance of life, and which craves and wins love, which it seeks with 
approbative zeal. The word approbativeness is indeed almost an 
appropriate name for it, for it desires to be loved and continually 
seeks friendship and affection. 

The adjacent organ, however, is called Approbativeness, because it 
especially seeks approval, sympathy, and admiration. 

This health region on the scapula is on the line of the intercostal 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 2C>5 

nerves which from the upper dorsal region (its first five vertebrae) 
extend around the summit of the chest, supplying' its integuments 
and the intercostal muscles — the integuments of the amiable region 
and the muscles of inspiration for the expansion of the upper part of 
the chest. As the anterior part of the trunk, like the anterior part 
of the brain, is distinguished by impressional sensibility, while the 
spine represents reactive energy, the middle of the scapula represents 
rather more of the impressional capability (which is necessary to the 
amiable character) than the spinal region, while it also represents the 
general benevolent or virtuous influence of the summit of the chest 
and brain. 

Let us return now to practical Therapeutic Sarcognomy ; for a 
complete demonstration of the rationale and modus operandi of ':he 
functions of life is not designed in this volume, and this partial illus- 
tration of one function is designed only to show the reader that Sar- 
cognomy stands upon solid scientific foundations in anatomy as well 
as psychology, and is neither a matter of analogy and correspondence 
suggested by ingenious speculation, nor a crude result of careless ex- 
periments, but has been evolved by careful experiments guided by 
philosophic principles, and has been confirmed still farther during the 
last forty years by the test of its practical success in guiding the 
treatment of the sick. 

As we find the centre of normal life or healthy energy in the 
shoulder — the centre which happily combines the pleasing, honorable, 
and attractive elements with physical efficiency, longevity, and con- 
quest of disease, it follows that shoulder development should be a 
part of our hygiene, and that lifting, rowing, fencing, handling 
weights, swinging on the arms and other suitable exercises should be 
prescribed as an aid to our treatment, and that in the treatment the 
leading prominence should be given to shoulder methods. 

Thus, in treating the various organs, we may keep one hand on 
Health while stimulating any other region, which will give a normal 
direction to each excitement and prevent it from going to excess. 
Under this influence from Health, medical treatment will have a 
genial effect, which otherwise might prove disturbing and irritating, 
and the little disturbing influences from lack of sympathy or congen- 
iality or other petty annoyances will be overlooked or unfelt. 

The same precaution should be observed in operations upon the 
head. One hand extended upon the superior posterior region which 
embraces Health will continually do good and regulate all other 
operations. 

It may also be observed that manipulations or passes toward thr 
region of Health will have a better effect than those in opposite or dii- 



204 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XL 

ferent directions, unless there be some special reason for the latter, as 
when downward manipulations are used to accelerate the action of the 
bowels, or disperse morbid conditions. 

Invigorating passes should be made backward ; soothing and regu- 
lative, upwards ; stimulating or exciting may sometimes be made down- 
wards, but these if continued long become exhausting and injurious. 
Such injurious effects frequently occur in electrical treatment. The 
tendency most favorable generally is backward and upward. 

If the healer would approach a number of his patients, either stand- 
ing erect or lying down, and administer vigorous passes from the 
hypochondriac or from the hypogastric region upwards and back- 
wards, he would find that they all feel refreshed and invigorated, and 
like the operation. 

I do not perceive any possible harm to arise from the continued and 
vigorous exertion of the health region. Yet in its highest energy it 
creates an abundance of vital and moral power which must crave a 
field of exertion and would rebel against the cramped situations in 
which many are found. It is here to be observed that as we descend 
the back the influence becomes more active, at the lower margin of 
the scapula assuming the character of Playfulness, and further down 
the self-reliant and gregarious impulses which would not be content 
with a quiet life. A more quiet influence is found higher up — a 
healthful serenity and fortitude being found at the top of the shoulder, 
as we find it at the summit of the head, vertically above the cavity of 
the ear, adjacent to the median line. 

The sensitive, depressing, hypochondriac influences which are asso- 
ciated with the anterior margin of the liver and its vicinity, and which 
in diseases of this region display themselves in gloomy sensitiveness, 
are antagonized by the region of buoyant Fortitude, which lies between 
the side of the neck and the exterior aspect of the shoulder. Hence 
this region is disturbed by all affections or irritations of the liver, but 
not by its inactivity, And as this is the locality at which the supra- 
scapular nerve proceeds from the superior portion of the brachial 
plexus (the portion which has the closest sympathy with the brain), 
this fact explains the pathological mystery that affections of the liver 
indicate their existence in many cases by a pain in the shoulder in the 
region supplied by the suprascapular nerve. The phrenic nerve, which 
communicates with the liver as well as the diaphragm, has commis- 
sural branches which connect with one of the nerves to the shoulder. 

If the region of health be so important, the suggestion might arise 
that treatment through this region alone would be all-sufficient, and 
no doubt a successful practice might be conducted in that way, for 
the public, accustomed to the delays and failures of old medical sys- 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 205 

terns, does not know enough to understand how much ought to be 
expected from a course of treatment, or how to distinguish rational 
treatment from that of pedantic ignorance. 

The greater importance of the shoulder region, the spinal column, 
and the entire back should not lead us to neglect other regions. We 
should carefully avoid that common fault of narrow minds — concentra" 
tion upon one idea or one method to the neglect of everything else. 
A successful practice might be conducted solely by treating the back 
of the trunk and the head, or applying tonic plasters upon these pos- 
terior regions, or even tonic metals. 

In Boston some psychological healers have attempted to cure their 
patients by sitting back to back with the patient — a method which 
might have some effect in imparting vitality and health directly from 
one spinal column to the other. This method was associated with 
the theory of the nonexistence of matter, and of diseases being 
entirely imaginary. The absurdity of the theory is its greatest fascin- 
ation. As there are persons who, when on the brink of a great preci- 
pice, are strongly impelled to throw themselves off, so there are many 
who, in the presence of a great mystery, or what seems to be such, are 
tempted to plunge into the deepest gulf of absurdity that is visible, 
as we see in some of the intensely absurd theological dogmas that 
have ruled the civilized world. 

The upper posterior portion of the trunk — the shoulders and the 
space between them — being the tonic region of the constitution, all 
processes are invigorating which concentrate the vital forces to that 
part. Stimulating and tonic plasters are therefore beneficial on this 
region, and warm clothing has a tonic effect. The capes of the over- 
coat formerly in fashion were really useful ; and the shawl is one of 
the most valuable of female garments, the use of which has been of 
great benefit to health and life. On the other hand, the chilling of the 
shoulder region is peculiarly prostrating to all the powers of life, and 
it has been maintained by some intelligent physicians that the chills 
ascribed to malaria were more properly attributable to the depressing 
influence of nocturnal cold operating on the shoulders. 

When riding or walking on a clear night with a cloudless sky, the 
shoulders are exposed to the intense cold of the planetary interspaces 
(perhaps 400 below zero), to which they are giving radiation. Unless 
protected by an umbrella or heavy shoulder clothing, this is a danger- 
ous exposure to delicate persons. Still more dangerous is it to sit at 
night beyond the shelter of the house or porch. But the injury is far 
less when the sky is covered with clouds, which reflect the warmth 
of the earth and shelter from the stellar region of cold, so that the 
earth surface is less cooled and there is less dew. 



206 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. 



XI- 



In accordance with these principles mankind generally understand 
that the back must be well clothed, and we are accustomed to speak 
of clothing as for the back, while we are accustomed to leave the 
coat open in front. A similar exposure of the back would be so 
injurious it is never attempted. The opening of the vest at the mid- 
dle of the breast, even when facing the cold wind, is harmless, while 
the very same exposure between the shoulders would be dangerous 
— for the back is the tonic and the front the atonic region. The 
front receives impressions, and the back reacts and resists by its 
own spontaneity, sustaining a vital force which the front tends to 
expend. 

Nature has carefully guarded the seats of vital force. It is the 
front of the head, as well as the front of the body, that faces the cool 
breeze without injury. The top, the side, and the back of the head, 
which are the seats of our vital forces, are well protected by hair. 
The front, the forehead, the seat of unvital and devitalizing intellect, 
is bare. So are the anterior parts of the temples and the upper part 
of the face, in which all the functions are non-vital or exhausting. 
The chilling of these regions may retard intelligence and pliability, 
but never injures health or life;, even the loss of a considerable 
amount of brain in these anterior regions is not a serious affair for 
health or vitality. While the passive, sensitive, and yielding func- 
tions of organs behind the upper part of the face render them so 
unnecessary to vital power as not to require much protection, the 
organs covered by the lower part of the face are highly necessary to 
life, embracing, as they do, calorific, respiratory muscular, and diges- 
tive capacities, and hence the beard thickly covers precisely the 
regions which need protection ; and when an intensely cold wind ren- 
ders the warmest clothing necessary, a woollen wrapping around the 
lower part of the face and neck, where nature has placed the beard 
and hair, is worth more than five times the amount of clothing 
applied anywhere else. 

Returning to our subject : the posterior regions of body and 
brain are protected by being in the rear and thus escaping collisions. 
Their life power, residing in the brain and spinal cord, is protected by 
the very strong bones of the skull and the spinal column. Hence 
the position instinctively assumed by the sick and infirm, lying 
horizontally on the back, gives great preservative and recuperative 
power by the warmth which it gives the spinal column, and the pre- 
dominance it gives the brain, which is relieved from the tax of 
muscular effort, and has a better blood-supply in the horizontal than 
in the erect position. The advantage of the horizontal position is 
sometimes lost by those who, after lying on the back, turn on the/ 



CHAP. XI.] NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 2C»7 

side without bringing warm clothing against the back to maintain its 
warmth. The importance of the spinal column is illustrated both by 
heat and cold. Very injurious and debilitating effects are experi- 
enced by those who stand in such a position that the back is con- 
tinually exposed to the he^at of a fire or stove. The cold shower bath 
and the ice bag on the spinal column are among the most powerful 
agenceis known in therapeutics. 

The shoulder being the tonic and hygienic region, its extension in 
the arm necessarily partakes of that character; and the exercise and 
development of the arms must rank among the leading measures of 
hygienic culture, — a truth which is only recently beginning to be 
appreciated. The entire arm has a tonic correlation with the viscera 
of the trunk, the humeral region gives a fortifying energy to the 
viscera of the thorax, and the forearm to those of the abdomen. 
Hence arm exercises strengthen the visceral functions better than 
locomotion, and diseases of the viscera are effectively treated by 
warming and stimulating applications to the arm or by haemostasis 
or haemospasia on the arms, which is of marvellous efficiency ; for 
haemospasia, while relieving internal congestions, gives such a 
development to the vital force of the arms as energizes all the viscera. 
The organs in the brain which sympathize with the arms are tonic 
correlations of those which sympathize with the viscera, — a proposi- 
tion, however, which is intelligible only after the study of Anthro- 
pology. 

As we know the nervous system to be the seat of life and the 
measure of its development, we next proceed to consider the brain 
power. 



CHAPTER XII. 

THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 

Brain power and its location — Prior development of the brain — False doctrines 
corrected — Superior organs necessary to vital power in man — Brain power com- 
pared to Health power — Connection of the latter with Moral Power and conduct 
— Local treatment — Vital Force and sexual vitality — Locations of Vital Force — 
Its distinction from Health — Influence of Vital Force when roused — Its connection 
with Nutrition — Location of the latter — Its influence on the constitution — Impor- 
tance to invalids — Treatment through brain — Digestion — Its connection with the 
spine and with the gastric region — Organ of Alimentiveness — Its depressing influ- 
ence — Buoyant Fortitude —Its moral association — Fasting — Influence of Firm- 
ness pathognomically explained — Hunger and appetite — Best method of treating 
stomach — Physiological influences of Firmness and the shoulder — Gastric irrita- 
tions and emesis — Gastric medicines — Proper manipulations — Region of assim- 
ilative absorption — Moral forces concerned — How to promote assimilation — 
Spiritual relations of this region — Intellectual and occipital influences — Retentive 
power of the latter — Relaxing power of the former — Contrast of the Adhesive and 
intellectual regions --Adhesiveness on the occiput and on the back — Combative- 
ness, its location and influence — Importance of Adhesiveness to patients — Impor- 
tance in society and business — Retentive influence of the back — Its explanation — 
Region of Business Energy — Effect of spinal injuries — Of repletion — Co-opera- 
tion of the energies — Conservative and destructive agencies — Upper and lower 
part of the abdomen — Restorative influence of Adhesive region; its connection 
with Coolness and Sleep — Philosophy of the production of sleep, and the organs 
concerned in sleep and wakefulness. 



Brain Power in Sarcognomy (co-operation of the body with the 
brain) belongs to the cephalic region of the cord. Why it is located 
there and how it operates were fully illustrated in the chapter on the 
Spinal Region. 

The recognition of the brain and its co-operative corporeal region 
as the seat of life is a great step in the transition from the old to the 
new physiology. It is sustained, not only by the clear demonstration 
that life is an influx, which was referred to in the second chapter, but 
also by the priority of the formation of the brain in the earliest em- 
bryonic condition of vertebrate animals. In the earliest changes of 
the vitelline substance of the chick, the blastoderm exhibits a mucous 
and a serous stratum, or hypoblast and epiblast ; from this latter are 
evolved the cerebro-spinal system and the cutaneous surface. Ori- 
ginating thus together they preserve a parallelism and sympathy 
which are illustrated in Sarcognomy. In the development of the 
cerebro-spinal system two dorsal lamina? rise up on each side of the 
primitive groove of the blastoderm and unite so as to enclose a chan- 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 2O9 

nel for the cerebro-spinal system in which the brain and spinal cord 
are developed. In this development the cephalic end takes prece- 
dence in time, and is much the largest part, which shows the priority 
of the brain in development in connection with its primitive centres, 
the pituitary and pineal bodies. 

When life is regarded as the product of chemical operations taking 
place all over the body, and the brain as merely an intellectual, con- 
scious, and volitional centre, it appears rather as an organ of vital 
expenditure and source of weakness than as the seat and source of 
vital power. Hence we have been abundantly warned against ex- 
treme culture and mental precocity as endangering or consuming 
vitality, and illustrative examples have not been lacking. Education 
was thus made to appear a burdensome if not a dangerous affair for 
delicate constitutions. 

Yet these notions were all scientific errors and practical mistakes- 
The proper cultivation of the brain is the most efficient method of 
developing true life, health, and longevity, and by acting upon this 
principle I am enabled now in my 76th year to enjoy in buoyant health, 
vigor, and happiness the maximum capacity of my life. 

The great mistake of most biological theorists has arisen from their 
ignorance of the true character of the brain, in which they recognize 
only what they are compelled to admit — intellection and the volitionary 
guidance of muscular motion, both of which are exhaustive operations 
expending vitality, while they perceive nothing of the great energiz- 
ing powers of the superior and posterior regions. The mental devel- 
opment and excitement which are injurious to the young are solely 
intellectual, and when education is confined to forcing or training: 
the intellectual faculties it is necessarily exhausting and injurious in 
its tendencies, of which all academic colleges and universities are to- 
day examples. 

But the early development and power of the brain in its higher 
vitalizing regions, so far from being exhaustive or injurious, is the pre- 
cursor of a noble and powerful manhood, and the evils just mentioned 
result, not from the normal, but from the abnormal, one-sided growth 
or culture, the premature development of the sensitive and debilitat- 
ing faculties at the expense of the vital forces. The boy whose manly 
courage enabled him to play the part of a man in assisting his family, 
taking care of his brothers, managing the live stock on a farm or 
transacting business for his father, is really and substantially preco- 
cious by a normal development of the brain, and hence displays a 
manly vigor beyond his fellows, ending in an energetic and able man- 
hood. 

Brain power, the power that vitalizes and sustains everything, be- 



\ 

\ 



?IO THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

longs to the region protected by the hair, and centralizes to the cen- 
tre of the scalp, from which the hair radiates. It manifests itself in 
the strength of the voice, the power of the eye, the energy and im- 
pressiveness of the bearing, the vigor with which every faculty acts, 
and the power of endurance. 

The action of the spinal cephalic region is somewhat more powerful 
but less harmonious than that of the Health region, and commands 
more respect than love or admiration. The Health region wins by a 
greater degree of sweetness, grace, and superiority to injury. How 
pleasing the thought that the most perfect enjoyment of life and 
efficiency are associated with the most attractive manners and the 
most faithful attention to our social duties. 

It is one of the most interesting and instructive revelations of An- 
thropology that every departure from the proper line of conduct is a 
departure from perfect health and enjoyment, and therefore the more 
Godlike the life, the greater its internal rewards, although there may 
be suffering inflicted by those who, living on a lower plane, are a 
cause of unhappiness both to themselves and to others. 

The virtue which is thus rewarded, and which is associated with the 
superior and upper posterior region of the head and trunk, is not the 
passive virtue which does no wrong act and cultivates unselfishness 
as the supreme purpose, but the active virtue which is ever energetic 
in discharging duties, in giving pleasure to all around, and exerting a 
wholesome, attractive, uplifting, and beneficent influence in all inter- 
course, while devoted and zealous in industry. 

There have been many false and unnatural ideas of virtue derived 
from ancient superstition, such as the doctrines of Buddhism and the 
monastic Christianity of the dark ages, which have misled and are 
still misleading many good people into an unnatural and inefficient 
life, in which neither the practical energies nor the gay and cheerful 
social sentiments are developed. Such a life is not virtuous, but 
feeble and morbid. 

The stimulation of the Cephalic and Hygienic regions would be 
enough but for the reason that the departures from health, being 
located in different parts of the body, need the direct assistance of 
the operator's vitality at each location in addition to the influence 
transmitted from controlling centres. Still it is a well-established 
though marvellous fact that influences may be transmitted from the 
soul and brain, which with supreme power dissipate the most calam- 
itous and long-standing chronic diseases. 

Two of the most important inferior regions for local treatment are 
those of vital force and sexual vitality. 

Vital Force, situated on the summit of the posterior aspect of the 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. ^2 11 

thigh, is not the perfect and satisfactory vital power which is found 
in the shoulder, but a similar power on a lower plane — a power dis- 
played in the muscular system and shown by indomitable energy and 
restless activity, yet not so restless as the influence of the lower part 
of the thigh and the knee. 

We find this vital force on the head, about an inch behind and in- 
terior to the lower end of the mastoid process (behind the ear), and its 
influence gives us a consciousness of physical power. I recollect how 
distinctly I felt it sympathetically about forty-six years ago, from 
contact with the organ in the head of an impressible subject who 
was a good walker — a feeling as if a walk of ten miles would be a 
pleasure. 

The difference between the organs of Vitality, or Vital Force, and 
Health is, that the latter gives a full, harmonious development of 
character or personality, including physical capacity and endurance; 
while the former gives physical power alone, without sustaining health 
or firmness, and without moral government or character. Acting in 
predominance, it would give the desperate and hostile energy of the 
outlaw, whose crimes have arrayed the world against him. In this 
predominance it destroys the moral sense, and concentrates all the 
power of the brain and soul in the impulsion of the muscular system. 
Yet in the normal course of life the basilar forces of the brain do not 
run into such evils. On the contrary, each basilar organ seems to 
act as a radical power, sustaining the action of a higher faculty, as 
will be explained in my System of Anthropology. This vital force is 
antagonistic to the humane and tender sentiment which is most deeply 
interested in the condition of others, and which causes some persons 
to faint at the sight of great suffering or bloodshed. 

In the invalid this power needs rousing, unless his condition be one 
of violence and passion, tending to insanity. The body being in an 
enfeebled condition, the spinal cord is not acting with proper vigor, 
and needs an influence descending from the brain, which is elicited 
by the organ of Vitality, for its line of action is directly downward. 
Under this influence the deadly languor of disease gives place to more 
natural feelings ; debility is diminished ; all the organs begin to act in 
a more normal way, as if they had received their appropriate medi- 
cine. The process of decay and dissolution is checked, and healthy 
nutrition is revived ; for the region of nutrition is adjacent to that of 
Vital Force, and goes with it by proximity. In applying the hand 
upon Vitality it should be extended so as to cover the region of Nu- 
trition or growth, which is situated a little more anteriorly, just below 
the head of the thigh-bone. 

As one stands erect with his arms hanging by his side the wrist 



212^ THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

falls upon the head of the thigh-bone (femur) ; if then the wrist be 
moved backward just behind the femur the palm of the hand would 
fall upon the region of Nutrition, the influence of which produces 
growth and improves the capillary circulation. This region being 
usually more developed in women than in men enables them to main- 
tain their proper development and plumpness with a smaller amount 
of food, and to nourish without injury or loss the children whom they 
sustain during gestation and suckling. 

A deficient development of Nutrition produces a tendency to 
emaciation, no matter how ravenous the appetite. Persons inclined 
to corpulence or embonpoint are often small eaters (especially females), 
their power of nutrition being so great that little food is needed. 

A large development of the thigh (including the regions of Vital 
Force and Nutrition) serves to fortify against pulmonary consumption 
and nervous debility, and is usually associated with large development 
of the corresponding regions in the brain. Deficient development of 
this region produces delicacy of constitution. 

The stimulation of the organ of Nutrition is very important in all 
nervous constitutions. The direct influence of the organ is soothing 
and comfortable; its ultimate effect overcomes the nervous condi- 
tion which is mainly due to a deficient supply of blood, a deficiency 
which may be overcome by the organ of Nutrition, with the aid of 
good food, to which phosphates, hypophosphites, and a very small 
quantity of iron make an important addition, effecting the develop- 
ment of blood. 

In the majority of invalids both Nutrition and Vitality need stimu- 
lation, and the hand can easily be applied so as to cover both. One 
may stimulate himself in these regions by applying the hands, and 
this application upon retiring at night or before rising in the morn- 
ing will have an appreciable effect, as I have verified in my own per- 
son, although one is too much accustomed to his own personal aura 
to be as strongly affected by it as by the influence of another. 

These localities on the body explain the very injurious effects of sit- 
ting on a cold stone or the cold, wet ground ; they also explain the 
sedative effects of a very warm sitz bath and the energizing effects 
of a cold sitz bath so conducted as to promote reaction. 

The effects produced at the summit of the thigh are satisfactorily 
produced also at the basis of the brain. Thus when the hand grasps 
the junction of the head and neck, covering the base of the cerebel- 
lum, a most beneficial, vitalizing, and restorative influence is diffused 
through the person, which is increased by placing the hand at the 
summit of the thigh. 

The region of Nutrition does not embrace all the nutrient func- 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 213 

tions of the constitution. There are three other influences to be con- 
sidered — those of digestion, absorption, and tonic retention or resis- 
tance to dissolution. 

Digestion depends upon the energy of the stomach, which is sus- 
tained by the lower half of the dorsal region of the spine, upon which 
the hand should be placed for its invigoration. In accordance with 
the general principle that power is located posteriorly, but excite- 
ment farther forward, midway to the front we shall find the hungry 
or digestive influence at the margin of the ribs on the side, a little in 
front of the middle line, and nearly on the level of the stomach. This, 
corresponds with the gastric region on the head, in front of the cav- 
ity of the ear, which is really the organ of Alimentiveness, located 
by phrenologists heretofore higher than it should be. In stimulating 
this locality we assist and accelerate digestion, producing, if contin- 
ued sufficiently long, a feeling of hunger. This feeling, the product 
of the Alimentive organ, is more depressing than stimulating, if pro- 
longed, and tends to produce gloomy, selfish, and irritable feelings. 
Hence every one knows that it is not judicious to seek favors from any 
one when he is hungry. The explanation is that the Alimentive organ 
is in the midst of the group of selfish, gloomy, and indolent feelings. 
Hence, whenever it is overactive, whether from hunger, dyspepsia, 
gluttony, drunkenness, or noxious, nauseous, or poisonous ingesta, it 
greatly lowers the vital forces and moral energies. One attains his 
maximum energy only after the irritation of hunger is relieved by food, 
and the gastric action roused by the food has subsided, from its diges- 
tion, when the buoyant energy caused by the addition of nourish- 
ment to the blood antagonizes gastric action and the stomach ceases 
to disturb us. 

Buoyant Fortitude is the character of the region which antagonizes 
Alimentiveness. This is developed by a state of repletion which 
gives nourishment to the brain, as we find after the enjoyment of 
good food and drink. But it is developed also by the moral causes 
which energize the upper region of the brain. The resolute pur- 
poses of heroism in war or struggle of any kind, and the lofty en- 
thusiasm generated by religious, philanthropic, patriotic, loving, and 
conscientious emotions, or even the earnest application of study, will 
so energize the firm and buoyant regions of the brain, as to arrest 
gastric action and destroy entirely the desire for food. Thus many 
persons in the zeal of study or labor reduce the stomach to such in- 
activity as to lay the foundation for dyspepsia. 

Under great moral or religious excitement fasting is natural ; but 
the attempt to enforce fasting as a ceremony, when it is not prompted 
or sustained by any religious or earnest emotion, is only another mode 



214 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

of irritating the stomach and increasing the amount of demoralizing 
animality. Such fasting, however, harmonizes well with the gloomy 
theology which dwells upon the prospect of eternal misery for our 
fellow-beings. 

The influence of the higher emotions in controlling the hungry 
gloom of the stomach and sustaining our buoyant vigor is explained 
by Pathognomy, which is the mathematical key to Anthropology^ 
and will require a special volume for its elucidation. 

Pathognomy illustrates the law of linear direction which governs all 
life in all worlds. 

The pathognomic direction of the region of Firmness, in which it 
nearly coincides with the whole moral region, is upwards, drawing 
vitality and circulation toward the brain and the shoulders. 

In accordance with this influence the red blood ascends by the 
aorta, the carotid and vertebral arteries, to the brain, developing its 
maximum power and the power of the spinal cord ; and the thoracic 
duct, starting from the level of the second lumbar vertebra, comes 
upward for about twenty inches, carrying nearly ripe blood, the chyle, 
to the subclavian vein, and thus removing the depression which is 
the cause of hunger. The chyle is thus carried up to the corporeal 
region of Firmness and Fortitude. 

This strong volitionary influence is absolutely essential to health. 
Whenever, through the opposite elements, fear and despair, this 
upward influence is checked, the countenance becomes pallid, the 
brain has less circulation and loses power, the features droop, the 
person is impoverished in spite of food, the thoracic duct carries up 
little nourishment, life withers away, and sometimes even the scalp is 
so paralyzed and changed that the hair turns gray or white from a 
night of terror. Life declines whenever Firmness and Hope are 
diminished. 

The hunger which belongs to the organ of Alimentiveness is not 
an invigorating impulse per se, being distinct from the eager desire 
and impulse to take food which belongs to the posterior portion of 
the brain on the same level, and above and on the body is found far- 
ther back and higher up. Hence in treating the affections of the 
stomach, the hand should be extended upward and backward in the 
direction of the ribs to the lower dorsal region — the Alimentive 
location being used more to rouse from inactivity than to give vital 
power. We may have from the posterior influence a vigorous 
appetite without any of the depressing feelings of hunger, or we may 
have from Alimentiveness the depression of hunger without much 
appetite or efficient digestive capacity. We are far below the 
standard of health when such a condition can arise, or when any loss 
of a meal or irregularity of diet can produce much depression. 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 215 

This vigorous desire or impulse to take food, which our cerebral 
science locates on the occiput, corresponding with the dorsal region, 
was detected by Ferrier in experimenting on the monkey and finding 
that the ablation of the occipital region left the animal indifferent to 
food. 

The depression from hunger is resisted in the region of Firmness 
and Health, which should ever predominate over the sensibilities and 
appetites. The portion of the firm region which is on the median 
line (or sagittal suture), vertically above the ear, and on the shoulder 
adjoining the neck, is antagonistic to the excitability of the heart and 
gives a feeling of fearlessness. The portion about an inch from the 
median line is antagonistic to the excitability of the liver and 
stomach, and hence resists the hypochondriac gloom of the hepatic 
region and the debilitating gloom of hunger. This buoyant influence 
we find on the shoulder, behind the middle of the upper surface, 
between the neck and the acromion process or prominent angle of 
the shoulder. Hence this is the region to antagonize hunger and the 
gastric irritation of dyspepsia, which produce the selfish and boorish 
ill-humor so conspicuous in Carlyle, the famous representative of the 
moral tendency of gastric irritability. But Carlyle is not the only 
conspicuous example of literature empoisoned by the unhealthy in- 
fluences of a diseased or depraved body. 

If we stimulate the region of buoyant Fortitude by the hand or by 
a plaster, we relieve the gastric irritation, but there may be materials 
— vitiated secretions or undigested food — which maintain the irrita- 
tion, and which, to facilitate our success, should be overcome medi- 
cally, as by an emetic or a peptic anodyne. A simple emetic of 
warm water, which may be made more effectual by adding one or two 
teaspoonfuls of the tincture of lobelia, or ipecac, and at the same 
time more soothing by stirring in enough of slippery elm to make 
it mucilaginous, will unload the stomach in a healthy manner. Milk 
will answer for the same purpose. An extemporaneous emetic is 
frequently prepared by adding mustard and salt to a glass of warm 
water. 

Soothing and antiseptic agencies may be used to control the con- 
tents of the alimentary canal, or to soothe and protect the stomach 
after they are ejected. For the soothing and removal of irritation* 
one of the best articles is the Scrophularia nodosa, or fig-wort —an 
article the U. S. Dispensatory says is ''very little used," and the 
gastric virtue of which seems to be entirely unknown to the medical 
profession. Half a teaspoonful of the fluid extract may be repeated 
hourly until relief is given. Ten or twenty grains of the bisulphite of 
lime or bisulphite of soda in a cup of water will counteract decompos- 
ing or fermenting conditions. 



2l6 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

If acid be present, ten or twenty grains of calcined magnesia, bi- 
carbonate of potassa, or bicarbonate of soda in solution will serve to 
neutralize it, or it may be neutralized by milk. 

It will be expedient to accelerate the restoration of a feeble stom- 
ach by twenty-drop doses of the fluid extract of Alnus rubra (or tag 
alder) with which the scrophularia would favorably co-operate in con- 
trolling irritations. Ten or fifteen drops of the tincture of angelica, 
repeated if necessary, will make an efficient gastric stimulant. I have 
made a preparation of the flowers of the dandelion {Leoutodon tarax- 
acuni) which I find an admirable assistant to digestion. The very 
pleasant liquid preparations of Lactopeptin by the New York Pharma- 
cal Company make an admirable assistant to feeble digestive powers. 
Medical treatment is not within the scope of this volume, but I think 
that an enlightened healer should beware of the narrowness of mind 
which confines itself to a favorite class of agencies, and should master 
as far as practicable the vast and powerful resources of the materia 
medica, with which be can expedite and complete his cures, and do 
justice to a class of patients who cannot afford to pay for protracted 
nervauric treatment. Hence I make a few suggestions of medical 
remedies. 

Gastric troubles may be truly dyspeptic from the irritation of the 
nerves and concentration of excitement at the stomach, or they may 
be apeptic from the lack of action in the stomach. In the latter case 
the Alimentive region may be excited on the body and on the 
head ; but in the former case some dispersive passes are necessary to 
remove irritation, and the regions of Fortitude and Health should be 
excited to suppress the gastric trouble, while the lower dorsal region 
is used to give gastric vitality. 

In addition to the regions of nutrition and gastric energy, a proper 
nourishment requires the process of assimilative absorption, for want 
of which digestion fails in its purpose and Nutrition has but an im- 
perfect supply of material. The region of Assimilative Absorption 
on the body is immediately around and above the umbilicus. The 
application of the hand at this locality produces the tranquil feeling, 
favorable to rest and sleep, which belongs to assimilation. In apply- 
in " the hand here we cover the absorbent region or mesenterv and 
the course of the absorbents to the origin of the thoracic duct, the 
common receptacle of chyle at the second lumbar vertebra ; also the 
jejunum, the chief source of the digestive supply of chyle, the duode- 
num, pancreas, colon, and lower portion of the stomach. The energy 
of this region, with its hundred and fifty mesenteric or absorbent 
glands, effects the final preparation of the chyle and its propulsion on 
its upward course to join the mass of our blood through the subcla- 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 217 

vian veins which convey it to the right side of the heart to pass 
through the lungs before it mingles in the general circulation. 

It is obvious therefore that a failure in assimilative absorption 
would interfere with the results of digestion and nutrition. In 
many cases, no doubt, this failure of assimilation is due to the failure 
in the moral forces, or mental depression. There is a tendency 
to emaciation and degeneracy in inferior characters. Criminals are 
generally of an inferior physique. Dramatists contrast the lean and 
hungry conspirator with the good-natured, plump, and contented 
citizen, x^miability promotes nutrition by assimilation. " Laugh 
and grow fat " is an old saying. Amiable and contented animals 
fatten easily, and give milk abundantly, while the fierce carnivora are 
remarkably lean. 

Thus we see there is a close association between the amiable 
elements which cause us to love and assimilate with all nature, and 
the physiological powers which assimilate and accept the material 
that is brought us. The assimilative is in fact an amiable region, and 
has an amiable influence upon the character while it is operative. 
The upper half of the abdomen is an amiable region, for the entire 
abdominal surface corresponds with that of the face — the region of 
expression. The upper half corresponds with the upper portion of 
the face, lying above the angles of the mouth, and the lower half 
corresponding with the lower half of the face, which expresses the 
lower half of the brain, associated with lower impulses. The region 
immediately adjacent to and above Assimilation is one of amiable im- 
pressibility and yielding sympathy,* which as we pass upward merges 
into that of somnolent, somnambulic, sympathetic, psychometric, and 
clairvoyant conditions, of which there is abundant evidence in the 
records of animal magnetism, which prove the possibility of clairvoy- 
ance from the epigastric region. 

The region of Assimilation therefore must not be overlooked in 
treating the general constitution and the digestive functions. It pro- 
motes impressibility, amiability, and healthful repose, bringing the 
subject more fully under control, into sympathy with the operator, 
and promoting restoration by nourishment, for which purpose the 
patient should be in the horizontal position, lying on his back, when 
this region is exerted, to facilitate the progress of the chyle in the 
thoracic duct by a horizontal instead of a vertical course. The appli- 
cation of the hand from the end of the sternum to the umbilicus is 
one of our most soothing and beneficial operations. 

* This is, no doubt, the foundation of the old scriptural expression, "bowels of 
compassion." The seers intuitively felt that there were tender feelings in the 
gastro umbilical region. 



2l8 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

The assimilative tract is one of healthful tendencies. The ilium 
with its Peyer's glands is frequently involved in disease, not only in 
fevers but in consumption and in cholera. Disease is less frequent 
in the duodenum and jejunum. Brunner's glands in the jejunum are 
remarkably free from disease. 

Hence the absorbent region is very appropriate for stimulation, and 
does not so frequently require dispersive manipulation as the region 
below the umbilicus. 

It is probable that the assimilative or umbilical region has more 
extensive relations to psychic life than those involved in the absorp- 
tion of chyle. The umbilical region is the seat of the original mys- 
terious influx of life through the womb, which is the connection with 
our ancestry. This changes after birth into absorption from nature, 
instead of absorption from the maternal constitution. It is along the 
umbilical chain that we trace the continuity of the human race back 
into the darkness of the uncounted ages, in which by influx and evo- 
lution man has been brought to his present condition, — the process 
of gestation being probably a surviving type or analogue of the crea- 
tive evolutionary process of the over soul of the universe. 

I regard the umbilical or assimilative region as having in the brain 
and soul important spiritual functions and relations, especially as 
to personal sympathy, attachment, and spiritual influences, but at 
present we are considering merely its relations to nutrition, develop- 
ment, and health. The associative faculties which establish the most 
intimate sympathy and union between any two persons lie along the 
median line. 

The mouth, which corresponds to the umbilicus, is, like the latter, a 
channel for the influx of developing nourishment and also of oxygen, 
and as the umbilicus is the link of intimate union between mother 
and child, the channel of absolute sympathy and love, the strongest 
love that is known, so is the mouth the organ that expresses our 
attachment in the kiss. The kiss is the full expression of conjugal 
love, and may be a very efficient means in nervauric healing. Some 
are accustomed to impart their healing power by breathing upon the 
affected part. I believe they are not mistaken, as the breath comes 
from a beneficent region of the body, notwithstanding the assertion 
of Brown-Sequard that it conveys an element which is toxic in 
hypodermic injection. The contact of the lips is a healing agency. 
The dog for a similar purpose uses his tongue ; but no such measures 
can be compared for beneficent effect to the influence which pro- 
ceeds from the top of the head. 

Besides Nutrition, Digestion, and Assimilation, there is yet another 
important influence on human development — that which consolidates 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 219 

and holds together the materials gathered in by digestion and assimi- 
lation, and precipitated by Nutrition. That influence we find in the 
back — in the region antagonistic to the intellect. 

To understand this philosophically we must know that the intel- 
lectual faculties tend to carry man out of himself and destroy his in- 
dividuality by merging his consciousness in his environment, or in 
the thoughts of others. When they plunge his mind into his physi- 
cal environment by perception and sensation, they lower his nature 
more effectually than when they carry him into the sphere of spirit- 
ual truth and philosophy. But they necessarily impair his physical 
energy, weaken his desires, unfit him for achievement, and relax both 
physical and mental fibre, in proportion to their predominance, which 
has very different effects from mere activity.* 

The impairment of vital force by intellectual predominance renders 
the tissues softer and less compact, more inclined to disintegration, 
and less capable of sustaining a robust manhood : such is the effect of 
excessive schooling. 

We must, then, rely upon the influences antagonistic to intellect 
for the preservation of vital force and compactness. The discovery 
of these influences v. as a revolution in Psychology. They belong to 
that portion of the or :iput which antagonizes the organs of the fore- 
head, and, as to the body, they are found upon the middle of the 
back, below the shoulder blades. They may be distinguished as the 
Adhesive Group — the group of organs of which Adhesiveness is the 
centre — organs which desire to keep everything fixed, as the intel- 
lect desires change or progress. 

The Adhesive region, a region of desire and impulse, is interested 
in that which is personal to ourselves, local and limited — the intel- 
lectual in that which is impersonal and unlimited. The intellectual 
region is interested in all humanity alike — the Adhesive region in 
our friends alone. The intellectual region avoids action, enterprise, 
and responsibility, it is at home in solitude — the Adhesive region 
seeks to be actively engaged in the midst of society and exerting an 
influence. The intellectual region produces delicacy, sensibility, and 
inactivity — the Adhesive region produces impulsive energy and 
ability to interest others. The one is passionless and feeble — the 
other highly emotional and strong. One is exhausted and broken 
down by social responsibility — the other is spontaneously energetic, 
will not endure solitude, and continually gains power or influence in 

# * Some of my reflective readers may doubt whether the intellectual organs have 
this debilitating effect, because they associate intellectual action with the energies 
of character that impel it, but mere intellectual action is of a passive nature, as 
when we are listening to a teacher. 



220 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

society. One develops in solitude, the other in stirring life. One 
exhausts and emaciates in action, the other grows and strengthens. 

The latter is the tonic and vitalizing element which resists the dis- 
integration of the body by exertion and by fever. It is the element 
to which quinine and other cinchona preparations appeal, in opposing 
the decomposition of fever, in doing which they resist the intellec- 
tual element so effectually as sometimes to impair the hearing, the 
memory, and the vision. 

This stirring, active power holds every faculty ready for social 
relations and thus gives an attractive vitality to the whole person — 
a tonicity which resists exhaustive and malign impressions. The 
word adhesiveness expresses the physical as well as spiritual char- 
acter of the faculty. It resists the waste of our physiological and 
spiritual elements, as Acquisitiveness resists the waste of our prop- 
erty. Hence it gives compactness to the person, and, by retaining 
the organized elements longer in the body, brings them to a higher 
vitality and perfection. Thus it becomes the tonic supporter of the 
physical development, giving to the character and the person the 
qualities that are interesting or attractive. 

Hence we find it desirable to stimulate the Adhesive region to 
perfect the nutrient processes and enhance vitality. This region we 
find on the lateral part of the occiput, above and behind the ear, and 
on the body below the shoulder blades, occupying nearly two hand's 
breadths downward. Adhesiveness is the social or gregarious faculty, 
and social gatherings prompt to feasting and drinking. 

Lower upon the occiput and upon the back we find the still more 
energetic and tonic element of Combativeness, which gives great 
energy to the muscular system, but which tends to give the muscular 
system a predominance over the cerebral, and the evil passions over 
the friendly emotions. From Adhesiveness upward on the shoulder 
the influence becomes more pleasant, tending to give the brain and 
moral nature a predominance over muscular growth and physical 
force. 

Adhesiveness, lying between the two, assists both the moral and 
physical forces, as we see it in women sustaining the family relations 
and in men sustaining personal attachments, gregarious life, national 
unity, and co-operation in war, as well as sectarian and partisan co- 
operation in peace. 

The many important influences of the Adhesive region should 
teach us the importance of rousing it in our patients, not only by 
nervauric treatment but by social enjoyment. The loss of society 
greatly impairs the vigor of the constitution, especially in those who 
are very adhesive. Solitary confinement is a cruel and depressing 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 221 

punishment, and an enforced solitary life, or life without friends, 
impairs the general energy and even the vigor of the digestive 
organs. The indulgence of the social impulses, whether in amuse- 
ments or otherwise, is the restorative power which many need to 
revive their health ; and it is the rupture of the social attachments 
which so often breaks down the vigor and usefulness of young sol- 
diers, bringing on what is called nostalgia or homesickness. Disap- 
pointments in love leave similar effects on women, lowering vitality 
and impairing the action of the heart. Grief for the loss of friends 
and members of the family circle often breaks down the health of 
mothers. When health is thus impaired we should offer the balm of 
our sympathetic interest and seek to interest the sufferer in new 
social attractions. All the excitements of active life — business, 
travel, and social pleasure — address Adhesiveness : hence their restor- 
ative power. The relation of Adhesiveness to society and business is 
that of a steady motor power and tonic, preventing us from being 
discouraged or indifferent, and contributing material assistance to 
the unconscious processes of organic life. It is a great fountain of 
spontaneous impulse. 

The fulness and rotundity of the back are important to the strength 
and retentiveness of the constitution. The rounded back, which is 
more conspicuous in the hog than the ox, and which reaches its 
maximum in the camel and dromedary, is associated with greater 
retentiveness and ability to sustain life upon smaller quantities of 
food. 

The location of Adhesiveness on the back is on the lines of 
nerve distribution from the lower dorsal region, which, as already 
explained, controls the digestion and assimilation of food internally 
by the ganglionic nerves, while it braces the abdomen by the 
abdominal muscles, and thus not only assists by mechanical pro- 
pulsion the processes of digestion and assimilation, but braces the 
trunk by the action of these muscles, as it must be braced for any 
vigorous exertion. The compression of the abdominal viscera and 
expulsion of the dark venous blood contained greatly increase the 
general energy. 

Thus does the Adhesive region carry out its energizing influ- 
ence and its attractive and assimilative nature, which gives to the 
adhesive the power of attracting and interesting friends — the 
quality which is called magnetism from its analogy to the action of 
the magnet. 

We now perceive that the Adhesive region or middle of the back 
should not be overlooked in nervauric treatment. It extends across 
the back behind the arms on the level of the lower half of the 



222 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

humerus (upper arm), or in other words below the shoulder blade. 
Its middle portion, along the spinal column, has a more positively 
energetic and muscular influence, sustaining general activity, and 
may be properly called the region of Business Energy, which sustains 
an active life. These explanations make it apparent that affections 
of the lower dorsal region must impair the digestive powers and 
the general energy — the blind energies of the animal nature opposed 
to the intellectual. Hence injuries impairing the spinal power, which 
disqualify for active life, are frequently accompanied by a predominance 
of the intellectual faculties — by wakefulness, clairvoyance, somnam- 
bulism, and spiritual phenomena, as in the famous case of Mollie 
Fancher, of Brooklyn ; while on the other hand an overload of food, 
which taxes the dorsal region, interferes very seriously with intellec- 
tual action and energy, and the soundest sleep is obtained by resting 
on the back so as to keep the Adhesive region warm. 

It is now apparent that the Vital Force and Nutrition at the 
posterior summit of the thigh co-operate with Business Energy, Ad- 
hesiveness, Alimentiveness, and Assimilation in the middle of the 
trunk, and that all are needed in restoring the invalid. 

The tonic character of Adhesiveness as a conservative and retentive 
power, alike in physiology and psychology, is illustrated by its imme- 
diate proximity to the region of Coolness, just behind the arm on the 
side of the chest. Coolness is pre-eminently the conservative influence 
which forbids decomposition and combustion. Cold is antiseptic as 
heat is putrefactive in tendency. Coolness produces muscular firm- 
ness, as heat produces muscular relaxation. The calorific region of 
the body is that of dead, decomposed matter — the hypogastric 
region. 

The Adhesive, associated with the lower dorsal region, presides 
over the inception and preservation of dead substance, for vital pur- 
poses, by the stomach and absorbents. The secretion of the stomach 
is acid and pre-eminently antiseptic, while the lower intestines have 
the alkaline condition which is favorable to decomposition. Their 
inflammation produces the maximum of fever, but the inflammation 
of the stomach has so little febrile intensity that the pulse is very 
feeble and the limbs dry and husky. Thus the stomach is associated 
with the superior half of the brain, which is cool and conservative, 
and it manifests this conservative character chiefly when Adhesive- 
ness is well developed. 

The Adhesive region (at the waist), which we have considered in 
its conservative, tonic, and anti-intellectual character, attains its maxi- 
mum antagonism to the intellect adjacent to Coolness, behind the 
arm, where it antagonizes Consciousness, the vital centre of intelli- 



CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 223 

gence (in the centre of the forehead), and thus suppresses all in- 
tellectual action and enables us to recover from the exhaustive 
influence of continued consciousness or intense thought. 

This is a restorative influence needed for about one third of every 
twenty-four hours, and is therefore of the highest importance to 
health and the vigor of the nervous system. Hence the production of 
sleep is a very important part of nervauric treatment. 

To produce sleep by operations upon the brain and body we should 
be guided by a correct organology. Sleep is a condition of diminished 
circulation and activity in the brain. The greater portion of the 
cerebral organs and faculties tend to develop increased activity, while 
other organs associated with animal life tend to diminish mental 
activity and sustain quiet physiological processes The superior- 
organs give predominance to the action of the brain, and the basilar 
give an energy to the body which causes a very active circulation by 
increased energy of the heart and the respiration But there are 
special functions, not related to the active muscular system, which 
moderate all these activities, and it is as necessary that we should 
have the power of arresting our activities, which would exhaust and 
destroy, as to have the power of using them. This is effected by the 
visceral and nutritive system of the body and its controlling organs 
in the brain. 

The regions of Patience and Tranquillity tend to arrest all active 
basilar excitement, producing quietness in the muscular system, cir- 
culation, and respiration, and a serene but not somnolent condition of 
the mind. Hence, to touch these regions on the head or body is an 
excellent preparation for inducing sleep, as it quiets the muscular 
system. On the body, Patience is found at the upper surface of the 
shoulders, at their junction with the neck, and Tranquillity on the chest, 
a little below the axilla. The comfortable repose produced by these 
faculties is not sleep, though favorable to rest and restoration. The 
activity of the brain needs to be still more lowered, and this is accom- 
plished by the tibial region and the foot — the former, which reduces 
respiration, reducing mentality to its lowest grade, and the latter to 
entire extinction. The tibial influence (corresponding to the life of 
the cold-blooded animal) is favorable to nutrition and animal life and 
unfavorable to fever and inflammation. Hence it is peculiarly valu- 
able when feverish or inflammatory conditions exist. The cerebral 
activity is reduced lower by the upper surface of the foot, and to 
its lowest or comatose condition by the bottom of the foot. Hence the 
foot is very effective in overcoming the most excited conditions of 
the brain, and the warm foot-bath is a great relief to the head in 
fever. 



224 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. [CHAP. XII. 

But the hygienic purpose of sleep is not fully accomplished by 
these measures. Its beneficial effects come not only from repose and 
cessation of waste, but from assimilation and excretion. Hence we 
need for perfect sleep a faculty that will sustain the assimilation and 
excretion. The organ for this is the true central organ of Sleep, 
lying in the brain above and behind the ear, in antagonism to Con- 
sciousness or intellectual wakefulness, which it tends to suppress, and 
on the chest behind the middle of the arm, a little lower than the tips 
of the shoulder blades. Its action in the brain is intelligible, as it 
tends to restrain and suspend intellectual action (the entire suspen- 
sion of which is sleep) and to diminish Calorification and Respira- 
tion, being adjacent to Coolness. Its close connection with Adhe- 
siveness and proximity to the cautious region indicate quietness 
and assimilation, for Adhesiveness is an assimilative faculty. Its 
occipital position also gives it a moderately tonic character. 

On the body this is more clearly illustrated, as it is located on the 
space between the lower dorsal ganglia, which supply by their 
branches the abdominal system, and the great solar and semilunar 
plexus or general controller of the abdominal functions. Hence it 
tends to give them a predominance in their vital character of absolute 
indolence, in which the visceral system is opposed to the muscular. 
In this condition, the muscular system of animal life being relaxed, 
the action of the heart would be materially reduced and the circulation 
moderated. Hence digestion and assimilation would be more active 
than other functions, but would proceed slowly, yet in the absence of 
wasteful activities would restore and nourish the organs, and remove 
the accumulation of waste material, thus producing the sound, normal 
condition of the organs, and the pure, fresh condition of the blood, 
which give us the buoyant condition of the first hours of the morning. 
The absorption of oxygen during sleep being greater than its con- 
sumption by vital action brings the blood to its best condition. 

These are the essential conditions of restorative sleep produced by 
the organ of Repose and assisted by Patience and Tranquillity, which 
serve to remove all excitement, and by the leg and foot, which lower 
cerebral activity and counteract feverish or inflammatory conditions 
even more effectively than Repose. Warmth and circulation in the 
lower limbs are necessary to Sleep. 

As the region of Repose produces its effects through the solar 
plexus and abdominal action, it is assisted by the regions of Somno- 
lence and Assimilation, which extend on the abdomen below the 
sternum and thus correspond with the plexus. Hence the application 
of a hand on the abdomen, extending -jpward from the umbilicus, is 
valuable as an adjunct to Repose, especially to precede it. On the 




CHAP. XII.] THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 225 

head we may easily apply the thumb on Repose and the fingers on 
Somnolence. 

Sleep also depends upon the relative activity of Energy and Relaxa- 
tion. The former rouses the whole brain to an activity incompatible 
with sleep, and those in whom it predominates greatly are naturally 
wakeful and require less sleep than others. Relaxation, the source of 
indolence, makes us desire rest and take pleasure in the couch. Relax- 
ation is a central abdominal locality, and all strong abdominal action 
such as follows gluttonous indulgence produces indolent relaxation. 
Hence a substantial supper with liberal use of fluids promotes sleep. 
For the opposite reason a dry, cold, bracing atmosphere makes the 
nervous system too active for sleep, which a warm, humid atmosphere 
promotes. 

Finally, the functions promotive of sleep are Somnolence, Repose, r 
Relaxation, Lethargy, Nutrition, the aquatic influence of the tibia, and 
the vegetal and mineral influences of the foot (the cephalic control of 
which is reached through the neck) — all of which may be requisite 
in cases of insomnia, and all of which assist the predominance of vis- 
ceral organic life over active animal life. 

These soporific influences are happily imitated by the new remedy 
sulfonal, the least objectionable of all soporific medicines. When 
sleep is hindered by over-excitement or excitability, the most efficient 
sedative is the Xanthiiun spinosum, a remedy highly successful in 
hydrophobia. Cochineal and the extract of lettuce, lactucariam, are 
also valuable as mild hypnotics. 

There is a restless excitability at the knee which often interferes 
with sleep, which should be allayed by dispersive passes toward the 
foot. A similar effect may be attained by a net pack around the 
knee or including the leg and foot, not allowed to evaporate, 



/0 



CHAPTER XIII. 

THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 

The Gastro-enteric region, its locations and treatment — The anti-abdominal or 
tonic (and the atonic) region — Its accurate demonstration and location by Euro- 
pean physiologists subsequent to my discoveries — The brain convolutions that it 
occupies shown in engraving — Its psychic functions — Debilitating influences of 
abdominal region — Philosophy of Intemperance — Its medical and electric 
treatment — Illustrative experiments — Organ of intoxication discovered — Remedies 
for gastric derangements — Philosophy of absorbent and repellent functions — 
Modes of treatment. 

Abdominal Locations — i, Epigastric region — 2, Assimilation — 3, Respira- 
tion— 4, Calorification — 5, Excitability — 6, Lethargy — 7, Sexuality— 8. Melan- 
choly— 9, Selfishness — 10, Irritability" — 11, Abdominal functions from digestion 
to defecation— 12, Disease— 13, Expression— Philosophy of Calorification and Cool- 
ness—The lower limbs— The thigh, Locomotion. Nutrition, Turbulence — The leg, 
its relation to evolution — Fanciful notions of a microcosm — Range of forces in the 
genesis of man, mineral, vegetal, animal, radiata, mollusca, vertebrata, aquatic, 
aerial, mammalian — Locations of animal life on leg, its application to physiologv 
and therapeutics — Suppression of inflammation, pneumonia, and fever, and" control 
of all vital functions by Hsemospasia. 



The Gastro-enteric region, controlling the alimentary canal, is 
located in the brain at the base of the middle lobe, running inward 
along the base of the petrous ridge of the temporal bone, and is 
reached from the surface along the course of the lower jaw, from its 
insertion in the glenoid cavity downward to about midway between 
its posterior angle and the centre of the chin. 

The corresponding tract on the body extends downward and for- 
ward from the margin of the ribs to a point midway between the 
umbilicus and the inguinal depression or angle between the thigh 
and the abdomen. Along this tract the alimentary canal may be 
controlled. At its upper end w r e rouse the activity of the stomach, 
and as we descend we act upon lower portions, the lowest being effi- 
cient in promoting evacuation of the bowels. Constipation is over- 
come on this tract by downward manipulation and vigorous action at 
its lower extremity. Hence a great deal of the massage blindly 
applied upon the bowels has been successful. The most effective 
manipulation follows the course of the colon, ascending on the right 
side, crossing, and descending on the left. 

In irritations, such as those of diarrhoea, cholera, dysentery, and 
colic, dispersive passes backward and upward should be made with 
energy, and a general stimulation along the spine. The complete 




CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 227 

control over such conditions is effected on the top of the shoulder, 
and on its upper posterior aspect. The anti-abdominal region, which 
tends most strongly to suspend all abdominal action, lies on the upper 
surface of the head immediately behind, adjacent, and parallel to the 
organ of Integrity, in a line from the anterior part of Firmness, ter- 
minating at the posterior part of Sanity, a region marked on the 
psychic bust as Fortitude, Energy, and Cheerfulness, terminating at 
the prominent centre of the parietal bone. 

The tonic or anti-abdominal region of the brain, which rouses the 
muscular energies, is not strictly confined to the space just mentioned, 
but on a well-developed head occupies a 
territory about two inches wide on the 
temporal arch, running to the median line, 
where it occupies about three inches an- 
tero-posteriorly. In the engraving this is 
marked T, and the opposite atonic or 
abdominal region is marked A. Thus we 
understand how the constitution is bal- 
anced between the tonic power, of which 
the will is the centre, which rouses the 
brain and muscles, and the relaxing influence associated with the 
abdomen (belonging to the base of the middle lobe) which relaxes 
all our energies for rest and sleep. This tonic region, which com 
mands the muscular energies, though not the direct organ of muscu. 
larity, has been fully demonstrated in accordance with my principles 
by French, German, and English physiologists as the region involved 
in muscular paralysis. My discovery, however, has many years' 
priority, dating from 1841, but for its exact relation to the convolu- 
tions I am indebted to the foreign physiologists who have shown that 
our command of the muscles in voluntary action depends on the con- 
volutions which occupy the space I have described, viz. (in the 
following map of the brain referred to by Prof. Charcot), the ascend- 
ing frontal and ascending parietal convolutions and superior parietal 
lobule. The inter-parietal fissure being the boundary of this energetic 
region, the reader will perceive its breadth increases as it approaches 
the median line. The volitionary muscular energy of this region 
depends upon the development of the coarser elements of the nervous 
system, which give motor power. Charcot says : " According to the 
researches of Retz, the great pyramidal cells exist but in'small number 
with very young infants ; it is only later that their number increases, 
and that increase is effected, according to all appearances, under the 
influence of functional exercise." 

The anterior superior portion of this region has been shown to 



228 



THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 



sustain the movements of the head and arms, while the more ener- 
getic posterior portion governs the movements of locomotion by the 
lower limbs. 

But this entire region has its psychic as well as its muscular func- 
tions, which increase our energy, and these have not been sought by 

Sup. pnctl lobule. 



Fislof/Rolando. 
/ 



parietal E 
fissure^ *« 

P4 




Fissure ofjyivi 



TaralkVfissufe. 



Convex surface of a hemisphere of the human brain (parietal lobe partly schematic). After Charcot. 

European physiologists, and will not be recognized as long as con- 
servative opposition can defy a positive science. The habit of ignor- 
ing the psychic has become chronic and hereditary. But as all know 
the brain has psychic functions, the knowledge of their location must 
be of great value in diagnosis. 

In the above engravings the reader will observe the remarkable 
coincidence between my experiments and discoveries (of 1841-42) 
and the results of human pathology and vivisection on animals of the 
last twenty years which have confirmed them. He will also observe 
another corroboration. The convolutions labelled Gyrus angularis 
occupy the exact position which I give to the occipital organs that 
co-operate with vision and give power to the eye ; and this is the 
location to which Dr. Ferrier ascribes the visual power, by destroying 
which in the pigeon he produced blindness of the opposite eye. A 
thorough examination of the results of pathology and vivisection 
will show how remarkably, as far as they go, they have corroborated 
my discoveries made thirty years earlier. 

The abdominal region in predominance has a relaxing, debilitating 
character, whether that predominance be produced by excessive food 
and drink, by oppressive undigested materials, or by irritations and 
inflammations. The utter prostration of ail physical and mental en- 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 229 

ergy which occurs in dysenteries, fevers, and other abdominal irrita- 
tions attests the character of that region.* Its antagonist in the 
shoulder is the region of Energy, which brings all the vital forces 
into active play, and makes us intolerant of idleness. This region of 
Energy, corresponding with the top of the shoulder, on which we 
bear our burdens, directs the vital forces, according to the pathog- 
nomic law, to the brain and from the abdomen, producing thereby the 
indifference to food which we feel when our interest and energy are 
roused. The same indifference to food and drink is produced by the 
tonics and nervines which rouse our energies, whether they be drugs 
or moral influences, and it is by the use of nervine tonics that we 
increase the moral energies and subdue the urgency of appetite, so as 
to enable one who wishes to reform to overcome the propensity for 
intoxicating drinks. 

Temperance societies have relied too much upon an energetic war- 
fare against alcohol, but intemperance does not depend entirely upon 
the temptation offered by the free sale of alcoholic drinks, and can- 
not be entirely controlled by limiting the sale. It depends upon a 
natural appetite which exists in the base of the brain in the posterior 
part of the organ of Alimentiveness, which comes into play under 
circumstances of nervous depression or exhaustion, just as thirst 
appears when there has been an exhaustion of fluids. Hence a 
demand for stimulation of some sort is almost as universal as a 
demand for food and drink. 

This nervous depression, or lack of cheerfulness and buoyancy, 
arises not only from depressing causes but from the predominance 
of the base of the brain, influenced by the discordant condition of 
society — the predominance of the animal over the moral, which is 
a condition more or less gloomy and eager for enlivening influences. 
Hence the present development of the human race has the conditions 
in which intemperance must flourish, and all savage races become 
drunkards when they have the opportunity. But women, who have a 
decided predominance of the moral over the basilar region, are very 
seldom addicted to intemperance, and when men are equally devel- 
oped they will become equally temperate. 

This development is often effected by powerful religious impres- 
sions, and the greatest success in the treatment of intemperance has 
been in the inebriate homes in New York and Philadelphia, in which 
religious influence is relied upon. 

There is not sufficient moral energy in most persons to resist the 

* This prostration of strength is not by a normal concentration upon the abdo- 
men, but by intense abnormal irritation, which, attracting the nervous energies, 
paralyzes the antagonist region. Any intense action in the abdomen has that 
effect, as every organ in the human constitution under intense excitement paralyzes 
its opposite. 



23° THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

discouraging and depressing influence of the struggles for a livelihood, 
the competition of rivals, the hostility of enemies, the uncertainty 
of business, the lack of reliable love and friendship, and the moods 
of ill-health. From such depression we may be relieved by cheer- 
ful society and friendship, by the moral enthusiasm of any great and 
worthy purpose, or by fervent religious sentiments ; or we may be 
placed permanently above the gloomy level of intemperance by such 
a moral education as will give the higher sentiments an unchangeable 
control. 

I see no hope for the eradication of intemperance by law until 
moral education shall have done its work. But in the meantime every 
beneficent influence, every happy social influence, everything which 
diminishes the burdens and calamities of human life, everything which 
increases the influence of women, everything which gives cheerful 
and innocent amusement, contributes to diminish the demand for 
alcoholic stimulants. It is diminished too by substituting vegetable 
food and fruits for animal food. 

The purification of the atmosphere, the removal of the sources of 
malaria, and all that improves health, contribute to temperance, while 
malaria and misery work in the opposite direction. 

I think it not impossible to prepare medicines which will so effec- 
tually sustain the energies of the nervous system as to check intem- 
perance and reduce its ravages to a small amount, and I do not 
hesitate to prescribe such remedies in any case, modified to suit the 
temperament or condition of each individual. Intemperance may be 
based upon conditions of the nervous system, the liver, or the diges- 
tive organs, which must be controlled by the remedy. I have long 
taught my students the value of the tonic hydrastis to fortify the 
stomach against the alcoholic appetite, and have had some favorable 
reports of its success. Quassia has also shown great efficiency in the 
same way. I have successfully recommended a combination of equal 
parts of tinctures or fluid extracts of hydrastis, quassia, cypripedium, 
and Erythroxylon Coca, the latter two producing a sustaining and 
tranquillizing influence. 

A diet should be adopted in which fruits, cereals, and vegetables 
are most prominent, the greatest benefit being derived from fruit, and 
the stimulation desired should be sought in tea and coffee. Under 
such regulations the alcoholic appetite is much more easily subdued. 
The treatment should be dispersive from the gastric region, and gen- 
erally upward over the abdomen, and should stimulate the entire 
upper region of the trunk, front and back, above the mammae, to pro- 
duce that elevated, happy, amiable, and firm condition in which ardent 
spirits are repulsive. 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 23I 

They are extremely repulsive to refined women, on account of the 
influence of their moral nature, which pervades every fibre and repels 
all gross and debasing influence. But in proportion as the basilar 
forces are roused, coarse stimulants and gross food become accep- 
table. I have found in my experiments that when the organ of Love 
of Stimulus is gently roused it requires mild stimulants, such as tea, 
coffee, and condiments, ardent spirits being disliked ; but as it is 
further excited, malt liquors and wines are desired, first diluted, then 
pure ; and a delicate female whom a spoonful of brandy would almost 
intoxicate may be made under this basilar influence to seek the 
strongest liquors and drink them like an old toper without becoming 
intoxicated, just as one exhausted by hemorrhage or prostrated by 
serpent bites may take a pint of brandy without intoxication. This 
impunity depends upon the depressant influence cf the Love of Stim- 
ulus, and if that should cease to act extreme intoxication would appear 
at once. Thus when the very impressible Mr. Inman had taken a 
drink of brandy under the influence of Love of Stimulus without show- 
ing any effect, I supposed the impunity would continue, but when I 
continued my experiments, exciting the upper region of the brain y 
diverting the activity from the Love of Stimulus and thus destroy- 
ing his capacity for enduring it, he suddenly sunk to the floor dead 
drunk, to my astonishment, and could be relieved only by re-exciting 
the Love of Stimulus and base of the brain. For a similar reason, in 
convivial assemblies we see intoxication much sooner reached under 
the influence of social pleasure than when men are sipping their 
liquor alone or taking it as a stimulus under the pressure of business. 
Men of a coarse and morose nature drink large quantities with impun- 
ity, while the more amiable class speedily succumb in intoxication, 
and are more rapidly destroyed, as women would be if forced into 
drinking. Hence the most signal examples of alcoholic ruin occur in 
the brightest members of society, who are seduced by the influence 
of bad examples and local fashion from their natural temperance, or 
who yield in moments of temporary depression. 

The appetites for food, drink, and stimulation being at the base of 
the brain are necessarily roused by basilar action — by a stirring, 
active life, especially when such a life is associated with no cheerful, 
pleasant influences, but is in the sphere of selfishness and rivalry. 
The hunger of active labor is much more urgent than that of seden- 
tary pursuits and lequires a freer supply of nitrogenous or animal 
food. Its nervous depression (for basilar action or muscular exer- 
tion consumes the vitality of the brain) creates the demand for stimu- 
lation which leads laborers by millions to the shops that supply them 
beer, gin, and whiskey. The demand for these will not cease until 



232 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

labor can be made less depressing. When the circumstances of labor 
are more pleasant and social, when its monotony is relieved by song, 
music, and conversation, when the atmosphere of the shop is made 
pure, its society refined and polite and all its features agreeable, the 
laborer will be relieved from the intense craving for stimulus. 

The man who resolutely desires to reform may find it a desperate 
struggle to resist the unbalanced action of his brain, producing a pas- 
sionate craving, but if assisted by nervine tonics he will certainly be 
able to conquer, and if of the impressible temperament, a little nerv- 
auric treatment will completely banish the evil influence. In ten 
minutes the appetite of the sensitive may be extinguished and alco- 
holic drinks made loathsome, and if this process is repeated, as often 
necessary to make the temperate inclination habitual, all danger will 
be banished. 

In my early experiments upon the brain I discovered in 
the region marked Relaxation that peculiar disorderly form of 
relaxation which belongs to the intoxicated, occupying a very small 
space. As conditions, impulses, and faculties are developed by en- 
vironments, I regarded this as a modification of the relaxed condition 
due to alcoholic influence, simple relaxation being due to the impres- 
sion of a very large quantity of food — a relaxation of the mental as 
well as physical powers. This relaxation may be due to irritations 
of the abdominal region (which are very debilitating) as well as to 
oppression by food. The alcoholic relaxation is accompanied by a 
certain disorderly stimulation as well as debility which is well known 
as a state of intoxication. When this locality is well developed there 
is a great facility in assuming the intoxicated condition. 

The researches of Dr. T. D. Crothers have thrown additional light 
on this subject, by showing that certain persons possess this intoxi- 
cating faculty in a high degree, and may even exercise it and thus 
fall into intoxication without the use of any alcoholic stimulant, from 
the influence of example or even from strong mental excitement — 
thus placing beyond doubt the existence of this faculty, the discovery 
of which surprised me. 

The healer will most readily relieve abdominal irritations and dis- 
eases by dispersive passes upwards with one hand while the other is 
on the top of the shoulder, treating each side alternately ; but I 
should mention for his benefit some simple remedies which he will 
find very serviceable, either by external application or by internal ad- 
ministration. There are more than a hundred remedies in our mate- 
ria medica which I have found of marked value in their direct action 
on the stomach, to soothe, invigorate, or relieve it. In flatulent con- 
ditions angelica and celery seed are the most useful, but when the 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 233 

disturbance amounts to a colic, Dioscorea villosa is a sure reliance. 
In gastric weakness mild tonics such as camomile, columba, and 
coptis (gold-thread) are very beneficial, but a more efficient tonic re- 
storative influence, extending to all the viscera, is found in the balm- 
ony (Chelone o-labrd), barberry (Baberis vulgaris) and the Ptelea 
trifoliata ; the balmony, barberry, Hydrastis, and mountain ash (Sor- 
bus aucuparia are all efficient in resisting the alcoholic appetite and 
repairing its ravages. The flow of gastric juice may be promoted by 
Alnus rubra (tag alder), assisted by a little capsicum and inula (ele- . 
campane). A fluid extract of the flowers of dandelion appears more 
beneficial to the stomach than anything else that I have used. 

The deranged conditions of the stomach from irritations and im- 
proper contents are generally relieved by charcoal and the presence 
of acid by calcined magnesia. If this is not sufficient, the following 
prescription may be relied on : — 

Fluid Extract of Scrophularia nodosa, 
" Cochineal, 

" Triosteum perfoliatum, 

" Sambucus Canadensis, 

each one ounce — mix. Dose, a teaspoonf ul every two hours until 
relief. In most cases, however, the scrophularia alone is sufficient. 
I do not object, however, to the fashionable subnitrate of bismuth. 

The use of pepsin or.lactopeptin as an assistant to the powers of 
an enfeebled stomach will overcome many difficulties. Pancrobilin 
appears to be a valuable aid when the liver and pancreas are at 
fault, assisting duodenal action and digestion of fatty foods. 

In treating the abdominal functions the hands should be applied 
on the lumbar as well as the lower dorsal region — the dorsal region 
having more to do with the digestive and assimilative functions, and 
the lumbar region with the expulsive functions of the lower intestines. 

Psychologically speaking, the tendency of the upper half of the 
body is attractive and retentive — the lower half hostile, degrading, 
and repellent. Physiologically, the character is the same : the 
upper half of the body tends to vitalize and retain the nutritive ele- 
ments — the lower half to degrade and expel them ; fecal material 
is expelled by the ileum, nutrient material is carried up by the 
thoracic duct. The exercise of the lower limbs rouses the lumbar 
portion of the cord, strengthens the expellent functions and over- 
comes constipation. The lower half of the alimentary canal, which 
sympathizes with the violent passions, is always more developed in 
the carnivora than in the herbivora. 

The treatment of the abdominal functions through the brain in- 
volves their stimulation through the lower jaw, and their control 



234 TH E ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

through the region behind Integrity, which extends from Firmness, 
(behind Integrity and Cheerfulness) over the temporal arch, just 
behind Sanity. The hand upon this region checks the abdominal 
irritation like an anodyne tonic. Upon the jaw before the ear, the 
fmgers produce the same effect as applications upon the alimentary 
tract on the abdomen. If we place the middle finger upon Alimen- 
tiveness before the ear and the thumb upon the organ of Health, the 
effect upon the sensitive is a gradual restoration of healthy action to 
the stomach. In like manner we may rouse the healthy action of 
any organ by placing one hand upon the region of Health in the 
body or the head, and the other where we would direct the healthy 
action. 

The Love of Stimulus, occupying the posterior portion of Alimen- 
tiveness, immediately at the cavity of the ear, I have found no diffi- 
culty in exciting separately so as to produce a desire for alcoholic 
stimulants and ability to bear them. 

In stimulating the digestive organs through the brain, we should 
recollect that the whole posterior basilar region contributes to their 
energy, and therefore we may reinforce them by applying the hands 
around the base of the brain on the level of the ear. 

Let us now briefly review the functions accessible through the 
abdominal surface, to imprint them on the memory. 

1. At and below the lower end of the sternum, which would be 
called the epigastric region, we have Sensibility, Somnolence, and the 
region of Impressibility, through which we exert a tranquillizing, 
soporific influence, during which we may elicit the intellectual phe- 
nomena of trance, psychometric perception, clairvoyance, sympathy, 
and develop the curability of diseases by nervauric and spiritual 
influences. This region brings the patient completely under the 
influence of the operator. The corresponding cerebral region extends 
from the root of the nose to an inch behind the brow. The word 
Sympathy conveys a correct idea of the general tendency of this 
region. The sympathy is intellectual, emotional, and physical, and 
may amount to an entire surrender to the control of the operator. 
Those who are largely developed in this region easily become mes- 
meric subjects or fall into the class that are controlled by a word. 

2. Just below the epigastric location, extending to the umbilicus 
and about two inches below, we find the region of assimilation and 
absorption, the influence of which is pleasant and soothing, harmon- 
izing well with the soporific influence above, while promoting nourish- 
ment and digestion. 

The influence of these two regions, especially the upper, is 
extremely amiable. The spiritual, psychometric, and clairvoyant 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 235 

faculties are closely associated in the brain with the intellectual, 
amiable, and sympathetic faculties. Hence there is generally a 
remarkable degree of refinement, beauty of sentiment and language, 
and kindly, benevolent, and ethical teaching in connection with 
trance speaking and psychometry. 

3. Below and around the umbilicus, exterior to the region of 
Assimilative Absorption, is the region of Respiration, corresponding 
with the respiratory organs around the mouth and nose, of which I 
shall speak in connection with the thoracic organs. 

4. Below the umbilicus, half-way to the pelvis, is the region of 
Calorification by which we develop heat — which is actively con- 
cerned in all fevers, and which produces an ardent temperament. 

5. Below Calorification comes the uterine region, which might in a 
psychic sense be called the region of excitability. This gives the 
tendency to hysteria. 

6. Below the uterine region is the mons veneris or pubic region, 
which is associated with a tendency to lethargy and sleep and corre- 
sponds with the position of the urinary bladder. 

7. On each side of the pubic region extends the groin or angle 
between the thigh and abdomen, which corresponds with the sexual 
evacuations, menstrual and seminal. It is the upper part of the 
Sexual region, which includes the sexual organs, which correspond 
to Amativeness, located on the bust at the larynx — a function just 
below the medulla oblongata. The lumbo-sacral is the region of 
virility, located on the head just below the occipital knob. 

8. ATtove the sexual region and in front of the hips (the anterior 
margin of the ilium) is the region of Melancholy. It antagonizes the 
region of Cheerfulness at the armpits. 

Melancholy is an abnormal or excessive manifestation. The nor- 
mal action produces a serious frame of mind which recognizes diffi- 
culties, obstacles, or hostility. 

9. Above Melancholy, on the side of the body, between the hip 
and ribs, is the region of absolute selfishness, which is antagonistic 
to every conception of duty to others and to all moral dignity. Its 
physiological influence is to reinforce the appetites and animal pas- 
sions, and in some persons it needs stimulation to revive animal life 
and physiological processes. In predominance it may be called 
Baseness. 

10. Just aoove the region of Selfishness, on the side, is the region 
of Irritability on the lower margin of the ribs, the effect of which if 
strongly excited is highly exciting and irritating. Dr. Beard, I be- 
lieve, is the only electrician who has discovered and mentioned the 
character of this region. He says (p. 343): "This sensitiveness is, of 



236 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

course, more in the thin and the nervous than in the corpulent and 
phlegmatic. It is usually most marked on the inferior ribs on the 
right and left side of the body, over the liver and spleen. The pecul- 
iar sensitiveness of the ribs at these points is sometimes erroneously 
supposed to indicate disease of the organs beneath them." It is a 
curious fact that Dr. Ferrier once struck upon the corresponding 
location in the brain without understanding it, when he enraged a 
cat by exciting the basis of the middle lobe. 

11. Anterior to Melancholy and Selfishness is the region of the 
abdominal functions, controlling the alimentary canal, running from 
the margin of the ribs to Defecation, half-way between umbilicus and 
groin. The upper end, relating to the stomach, corresponds to 
Alimentiveness. The lower location is marked on the large chart Def. 

12. Anterior to Alimentiveness is the region of Disease, located 
along the margins of the ribs. Scientifically speaking it might be 
called the centre of organic sensibility, but practically it may be 
properly called Disease, as the tendency or liability to disease is pro- 
portioned to its predominance over the health-sustaining power of 
the upper occiput and shoulders. It is the region of congestion of 
blood in the portal veins — the most degenerate blood in the body. 

On this zone of the trunk is found anteriorly the maximum sensi- 
tiveness and maximum liability to injury. Brown-Sequard found that 
animals killed by a shock through the diaphragm were killed more 
quickly and surely than when assailed through the head. In such 
cases the blood after death was fluid, the abdominal viscera con- 
gested, and the thoracic region nearly empty. 

13. The remaining space between the Alimentive, Morbid, Respi- 
ratory, and Sympathetic regions is a region of emotional impulse or 
excitability, corresponding to the cerebral region of Expression 
behind the face. It explains the sympathy of the brain with abdom- 
inal conditions. In the upper portion of this region of Expression, 
which is adjacent to the sympathetic region, the emotional influ- 
ence is of the amiable and soothing character. In the lower portion 
it is exciting and stimulating, partaking of the character of deep 
Respiration and Ardor. The therapeutic value of these organs con- 
sists in the soothing, yielding influence which is found on the sur- 
faces above the umbilicus, and the more exciting or stimulating 
influences which are found below the level of the umbilicus, produc- 
ing deeper respiration and greater warmth. The level of the umbili- 
cus may be taken as the division between the soothing and exciting- 
influences of the abdominal surface. 

Of the organs just enumerated, Calorification requires a full 
exposition, not only for therapeutic purposes, but as an illustration 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 2^J 

of physiology and pathology. For the present, however, I shall 
speak of it merely for therapeutic purposes. Briefly, the calorific 
function is located as to its origin in the brain, at the medulla oblon- 
gata, which we reach through the chin, and it is developed in the 
body by an influence passing down the cord and proceeding from the 
dorsal ganglia to the abdomen, in which it is developed through the 
ileum and is reached through the external location, between the os 
pubis and umbilicus. Hence warmth is developed and diffused by 
covering the chin with one hand and the occipital base with the 
other, or by placing one hand on the hypogastric location of Calori- 
fication, and the other at the lumbo-dorsal junction. The anterior 
locations develop caloric, but the posterior assist and give it a more 
healthy diffusion. 

The region of Coolness is on the side head, about the middle of the 
vertical line rising from the posterior region of the external ear, and 
on the body its location corresponds nearly with the middle of the 
posterior line of the arm. 

Hence in treating a chill by the battery we pass a current from 
Coolness to Calorification, and in treating a fever we reverse the cur- 
rent. 

Fevers may also be treated by a current of hot water poured on the 
lower abdomen, and typhoid fever is especially benefited by this, as 
it involves disease of the small intestines. The great benefit of 
plunging the feet in hot water at the beginning of a fever is due to 
the influence on the hypogastric region and the diversion from the 
brain, as well as the sedative influences of the hot water, and the seda- 
tive, cooling influence of the tibial region and the foot. 

The experiments of Brodie, of Chossat, and of Heidenhain have 
fully proved the dependence of calorification on the nervous system, 
the origin of the power in the brain, and the capacity of the nervous 
system either to develop or to depress the heat of any part of the 
body ; but no one has heretofore discovered this corporeal seat of cal- 
orification or understood its relations to the brain. The nearest ap- 
proach was in the much-neglected experiments of Chossat, who showed 
that calorification was interrupted by sections of the splanchnic nerves 
and also by tying the abdominal aorta. Thus he came near complet- 
ing the demonstration that calorification is chiefly dependent upon 
the ileum, in which fecalization is performed — the locality in which 
irritations and inflammations produce the most intense fevers. Fevers 
.associated with abdominal disease at other locations have a lower 
temperature and less continuous heat. At the spleen the intermis- 
sions are much longer than the fever. At the liver the fever is remit- 
tent ; at the stomach the temperature is lower (as in yellow fever) ; but 



238 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

when the hypogastric region is involved the fevers are severe and con- 
tinuous and the influence upon the brain greater. The ileum is as- 
osciated with Calorification consequentially, as the effect of Calorifi- 
cation is to leave the incombustible fecal matter for discharge by the 
ileum. Hence this discharge continues in fevers whether food is taken 
or not. 

In nervauric treatment, chills would be overcome by applying the 
bands on the chin and the occipital base, or on the hypogastric region 
and lumbo-dorsal junction, or by manipulations from Coolness on the 
side to the hypogastric region. 

Fevers should be overcome by dispersive passes from the hypogas- 
tric and hypochondriac locations, and stimulating the regions of Cool- 
ness and Health. Great assistance may be given by the aquatic region 
of the tibial surface, especially when there is any inflammation. I 
think the tibial surface will be quite a valuable resource in eruptive dis- 
eases when there is much heat of the skin. Erysipelas will be con- 
trolled by the tibial region as well as by jaborandi. . 

The lower limbs sustain important relations to the lungs, the 
brain, and the vital force and development. 

The thigh, depending on the lumbar region, is the seat of the 
strongest animal power, and is the region through which to reinforce 
the muscular system. The locomotion and labor sustained by the 
frontal surface of the thigh should be roused by vigorous percussion 
whenever we wish to increase the physical strength. The lateral and 
posterior surfaces of the thigh are also highly invigorating, but much 
more impulsive, bold, and restless in their moral influence. Hence 
they are specially beneficial to those who are quiet and timid. The 
region of Vital Force at the summit of the thigh is beneficial in all 
cases of weakness. Its best effect is produced in combination 
with the health region of the shoulders, or the region of Cheerfulness 
in the axilla. It also forms a happy combination with the region of 
Hope on the upper surface of the breast, above the nipple. 

As we approach the knees, the crural influence becomes more 
decidedly restless. Hence the dispersive manipulations from the 
knees to the feet have an especially soothing influence. The pos- 
terior aspect of the thigh has the general character expressed by the 
word Turbulence, and hence co-operates with the criminal impulses 
when very large. The internal aspect of the thighs need not be 
stimulated except in those addicted to a passive, ascetic, or care- 
worn life. Its tendency is toward dissipation, sensuality, and 
vagrancy. 

The upper posterior lateral surface of the thighs, the region of 
Nutrition, is almost always a necessary locality for the treatment of 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS, 239 

patients, for few are ever out of health without a deficient supply of 
red blood. Nutrition develops blood and flesh and moderates ner- 
vous excitability. It is quite convenient to excite Nutrition and 
Vital Force at the same time, by the hand or by the negative sponge. 
In standing erect with the arms hanging, the wrist comes upon the 
head of the thigh bone. Then moving the hand back the palm would 
come upon the region of Nutrition. One may practise upon himself 
by placing the hands thus upon Nutrition when he retires at night. 
I practised thus upon myself in 1871 with good effect until I thought 
it better to check than increase the effect. Mr. C, one of my most 
intelligent students, informed me that he had tried the experiment 
upon himself in 1888, and in a short time increased his weight twenty 
pounds. 

Below the knee we find in the leg one of the great wonders of 
Sarcognomy. The leg corresponds to the pre-natal embryonic de- 
velopment which illustrates the law of evolution and the microcosmal 
character of the human constitution. It corresponds to all below 
the grade of humanity — the animal, vegetable, and mineral king- 
doms. 

In the fanciful phraseology of imaginative writers we are often 
assured that man is a microcosm, without a single definite statement 
of the basis of this conjecture. He certainly does not contain in his 
constitution all the chemical elements, nor is his life governed like 
the solar system by gravitation and momentum. No resemblance to 
the universe has been pointed out, and his ability to comprehend im- 
perfectly the universe does not make his constitution a microcosm. 
The statement therefore is a baseless fancy or conjecture. 

But it was discovered by my experiments in 1842 that the elemen- 
tary forces of nature bear a wonderful relation to the genesis of man ; 
that he retains in his constitution a record of the creative or evolving 
power which advances to the height of humanity through all the 
prior steps of evolution, and thus gives man a microcosmal relation 
to evolutionary forces. 

Humanity proper begins at the knee ; all below corresponds to the 
animal, vegetable, and mineral kingdoms and reproduces their condi- 
tions in our experiments. The foot which stands upon the earth has 
a mineral character in the surface which touches the earth ; above 
the bottom of the foot the character is vegetable ; and above the 
ankle animal. 

It is easy to trace upon the leg the development of the higher 
kingdom, the Vertebrata, which occupy the space between the knee 
and the ankle, changing near the ankle to the mollusca, articulata, and 
radiata. Upon the upper surface of the foot we have the vegetable 



24O THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

kingdom; and on its lower surface the mineral kingdom, correspond- 
ing" to the entire globe. Each animal of the vertebrata may be rec- 
ognized at some portion of the vertebral region (from the knee to 
the foot), and we might locate upon the leg, if it were of any impor- 
tance, the dog, the horse, the shark, the whale, the eagle, the serpent^ 
etc., and in the vegetative region the trees and herbage. However 
wonderful or incredible this may seem it is but the statement of the 
results of scientific experiment, which any competent observer can 
verify for himself, if he follows my methods, avoiding mesmeric, 
hysteric, or imaginative subjects controllable by a word or by sym- 
pathy. I believe no one has ever adopted my methods of rational 
experiment without verifying my statements. But, laying aside the 
curious and wonderful, for practical utility, we find in this representa- 
tive microcosmal region some of the most important functions that 
modify life and control disease. 

The vertebrata, divided into fishes, reptiles, birds, and quadrupeds 
or mammalia, are represented in corresponding groups on the leg. 
The fishes and reptiles occupy the anterior or tibial surface exterior 
to the edge of the tibia ; the next vertical section of the leg, extend- 
ing just around the posterior exterior angle of the muscular promi- 
nence, is devoted to the birds, and the remainder, the body of the 
calf, is devoted to the mammalia. 

The consequences of this arrangement are very important. The 
anterior or aquatic surface corresponds to a lower grade of vitality 
and sensibility — a cold, unintellectual, unsensitive, uninflammable 
temperament. The aerial region of bird life is associated with a 
more active temperament, greater warmth and activity of respira- 
tion, while the mammalian region is associated with the greatest 
development of animal life and a temperament more like the human, 
excepting its intellectual inferiority. 

Hence, in stimulating the calf of the leg we reinforce animal life, 
very much as we do on the thighs. In stimulating the exterior 
aerial region we favor the activity and vivacity of the temperament ; 
but in stimulating the aquatic region of the front we make an entire 
change of temperament, carrying it below the level of inflammatory 
and febrile diseases. 

Below the vertebrate class of birds, there is not sufficient nervous 
development to be capable of inflammation. The reparative power 
increases as the inflammatory capacity declines, so that wounds are 
healed and parts reproduced without inflammation. 

In the vegetable kingdom, without a nervous system or intelli- 
gence, the reparative power is at its maximum, and inflammation and 
fever are impossible. Zoophytes are as free from inflammation as 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 24 I 

plants. Polypi may be cut to pieces and stuck together as success- 
fully as plants may be grafted. Worms, too, may be cut to pieces 
and left to grow as separate individuals or stuck together to grow as 
one. Among the Articulata and Mollusca the reparative power is 
immense, but the inflammatory tendency imperceptible. Crabs, 
lobsters, and young spiders reproduce their legs when torn off, with- 
out anything like inflammation. The snail reproduces its head if the 
upper ganglion has not been destroyed. In the oyster and mussel 
the death and putrefaction of a part of the body is not necessarily 
fatal to the animal. Fishes reproduce their lost fins and heal all 
their wounds without inflammation or suppuration. Lizards, serpents, 
salamanders, frogs, and toads have great reparative power without 
inflammation. The lizard even reproduces its tail. Prof. Macartney- 
removed part of the brain and skull of a toad, which was healed with- 
out inflammation. It is in birds that we first find the nervous system 
sufficiently developed to be capable of inflammation. Quadrupeds 
are still more liable to inflammation. The maximum inflammatory 
and febrile capacity, generally with the least restorative power, is 
found in man. 

But as man in his embryonic life passes through the lower forms of 
life, it is only after the second month that he attains the inflammable 
constitution, but the lower elements which existed in the embryo con- 
tinue to exist in the matured form, though overlaid and concealed by 
the higher powers, and the mature man retains in his constitution 
the elements which sympathize with all animal life, and which some- 
times come to the surface, as in the barking and biting of hydrophobia 
and the imitations of animals practised under a species of religious 
insanity at camp meetings in our early history. 

Sarcognomy has brought out these buried elements of embryonic 
life and given them a definite location on the legs, corresponding per- 
haps to the summit of the spinal column and portions of the base of 
the brain. 

#The utility of the discovery is this : If the impressible subject can 
be carried back to the aquatic form of cold-blooded life by exciting 
these organs on the body he may be carried below the stage of inflam- 
mation and fever. 

This, I believe, is one of the most important discoveries ever made 
in pathology and therapeutics, for in all very impressible persons the 
aquatic location may be excited until they feel the mental stupor or 
vacancy of mind, the blunted sensibility, and the inclination to an 
aquatic life. They say they feel like lying down or floating in the 
water. The respiration is greatly diminished as well as the mental 
action. The lungs not only become quiet, but lose their irritability, 



-4- THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. [CHAP. XIII. 

and all inflammatory or irritative conditions of the lungs arc sub- 
dued. 

The aquatic region of the leg, then, is the region to which we must 
look for the cure of pneumonia and bronchitis and the alleviation, if 
not cure, of consumption, by stimulating the tibial region or by gal- 
vanic currents with negative rheophores on the tibia, or by manipula- 
tion. 

The tibial surface of the legs, then, is the counter-agent of the lungs 
and to a considerable extent of the brain. As we go down the leg, 
the antagonism to the brain increases, and on the upper surface of the 
foot mentality is arrested and respiration also, in proportion to the 
strength of the local influence. Thus does the diseased organ secure 
a tranquil rest and freedom from inflammatory action. I would be 
much obliged to nervauric healers for exact accounts of cases of pneu- 
monia and bronchitis treated on these principles, as evidence of the 
extent to which they are applicable. The experience of my pupils 
already is sufficient to authorize me to speak with confidence. 

The aquatic influence may subdue the inflammatory condition in 
the lungs, but we need a more active process to disperse the conges- 
tion which is the most formidable difficulty, and this we have in Haemo- 
stasis. Ligatures around the thighs and shoulders, compelling the 
limbs to swell with accumulated blood, will infallibly deplete the con- 
gested lungs. 

On the other hand, when the lungs, instead of being oppressed with 
inflammatory congestion, are feeble, anemic, and lacking in depth of 
respiration, they are benefited by stimulating the thigh and calf of 
leg, as well as the pulmonic locality in the dorsal region, and the 
inspiratory region on the side of the chest, parallel to the front of the 
arm. The thigh is especially antagonistic to consumptive tendencies, 
the Inspiratory region to the asthmatic, and the tibial region to pneu- 
monia. 

The entire foot is the anti-cephalic region — the bottom of the foot 
corresponding with the mineral region and producing a feeling of dul- 
ness and extreme heaviness. Hence protracted Galvanic currents to 
the soles of the feet are liable to produce depressing and injurious 
influences. A current from the soles of the feet to the shoulders 
would be of much greater general utility. 

The haemostatic method, shamefully neglected by the medical pro- 
fession, may be practised by any one, but it is far inferior to the 
pneumatic treatment by diminishing atmospheric pressure and 
attracting the circulation to the regions treated, a method called by 
Dr. Junod H^emospasia, or attracting the blood {hamo, blood, spasm, 
from spao y drawing). This method, when the medical profession 



CHAP. XIII.] THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 243 

becomes liberal and medical practice scientific, will be the most con- 
spicuous feature of the practice. Its neglect by medical colleges 
after the absolute demonstration of its power is one of the most 
disgraceful facts of medical history. Its value and applicability, how. 
ever, can be fully understood only by those who have mastered Sar- 
cognomy. To them it is invaluable, and it is indispensable that I 
should devote a chapter to its exposition, after studying which the 
reader will find that it is an indispensable aid to a practice guided by 
Sarcognomy. 

P. S. — In the engraving on page 227 the tonic region T should 
have been made a little larger. The statement that the posterior por- 
tion or parietal lobule is devoted to the lower limbs and the anterior 
to the upper, has no foundation in my experiments, except that the 
posterior portion has a greater degree of energy and is consequently 
called upon in locomotion. There is no direct connection of these 
parts with special muscles, and Dr. Brown-Sequard refers to a case in 
which the paralysis according to the theory should have been in the 
lower limbs, but was really in the upper.* It is impossible to reduce 
the cerebrum in any upper portion to a set of motor functions, for the 
functions are emotional and volitionary — not muscular functions, but 
functions by which the muscular system is sustained, in sustaining 
the energy of the brain, which is more important than muscle to hu- 
man energy. 

* The language of Brown-S^quard in his lecture at the Bellevue College 1877 was 
as follows : 

" In the neighborhood of the median line and a little posterior is a center said to 
be that of movement of the leg. Now, Charcot himself published, in a French Jour- 
nal, with a number of admirable woodcuts, a case in which destruction of the whole 
of this latter portion produced paralysis of the arm instead of the leg, and conse- 
quently this would show that the center of movement for the arm was located 
farther backward than in other cases. In another place we find the report of a case 
in which there was disease of this region with destruction only of that portion in 
which was situated the center for the arm, but there was paralysis of both arm and 
leg of the opposite side. Everything behind the fissure of Rolando was destroyed, 
and in such a case we ought to have paralysis of the leg but not of the arm ; but 
there was complete hemiplegia." 

At a scientific congress held in Strasburg, Prof. Goltz exhibited a dog in which 
he had destroyed completely the so-called motor centers of the brain, without pro- 
ducing any paralysis, although the animal was in a demented condition. 



CHAPTER XIV. 
PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 

Exposition of Haemostasis and Dr. Bucklers experiments — Dr. Bevier's practice 

— Drs. Keltie and Robonan — Superiority of Haemospasia — Junod and Hahne- 
mann's case — Rationale of Haemospasia — Balloons and caissons — Effects of light 
and heavy pressure on muscular and nervous systems — Origin and reception of 
Junod's discoveries in Haemospasia — Effects of Haemospasia — Summary of 293 
cases — Professional neglect — Description of its success in thirty-three cases — 
Success of others — Its enlargement by Sarcognomy — Special treatment described 

— Treatment of spine — Aids to diagnosis — Various effects of pneumatic treat- 
ment — Description of pneumatic apparatus. 



Our marvellous revelation from the leg of man's relation to all 
below him in creation, and the possibility of his subsidence back 
toward aquatic, vegetative and mineral conditions, carried with it the 
possibility of thus escaping from some of the evils of his exalted sen- 
sibility, and suspending pathological processes — especially those of 
his most exalted organs, the lungs and brain — by sinking below the 
sphere of their activity, and even suspending all febrile and inflam- 
matory diseases by the same method — even aborting suddenly the 
fevers which are commonly supposed to have a predestined course 
admitting only of palliation. 

I have long been teaching that all this may be done by drawing 
the vital forces below the knee in impressible constitutions by the 
nervauric hand, the electric or magnetic current, and any efficient 
mechanical means. 

The most efficient mechanical means operate by controlling the 
circulation, withdrawing it from organs we would reduce to quiescence 
and taking it to those that should predominate. It is well known 
that this may be done by controlling and changing the atmospheric 
pressure ; consequently I may appeal to Aerotherapia for a corrobo- 
rating demonstration of what nervauric healers do by the hand, in 
dissipating fevers suddenly, controlling inflammations and relieving 
pneumonia, meningitis, and many cases of cerebral affections which 
medicines do not control. 

Over forty years ago I endeavored to call the attention of my 
pupils to the mechanical control of the circulation by ligatures and 
atmospheric agencies, but the very limited attention which this sub- 
ject has received in this country — its shameful neglect by the medi- 
cal profession for so many years, induces me to renew my appeal' in 
behalf of Haemostasis or Haemospasia, not only as an illustration of 
Therapeutic Sarcognomy but as an indispensable measure in scientific 
therapeutics, which I desire especially to see adopted by those whose 
progressive spirit leads them to the study of Sarcognomy, for these 
mechanical measures are a most natural adjunct to manual nervauric 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 245 

and electric treatment, and often accomplish quickly or even suddenly 
what no other agencies can do. 

For the most ample and scientific development of this subject we 
are indebted to Dr. V. T. Junod, of Paris, whose early and indefati- 
gable labors, dating back sixty years, have given to Haemospasia its 
general acceptance in France, and were crowned by the Academy 
with the Montyon prize in medicine and surgery in 1870. 

As my own attention to this subject was first attracted by the 
experiments of Dr. Buckler, of Baltimore, in producing Hasmostasis 
by the use of ligatures, I would offer the reader first my essay on 
Hasmostasis, a simple measure which can be practised by any one 
without apparatus. 

H^EMOSTASIS. 

As the object of manipulations, electric currents and massage is 
or should be to change the distribution of blood and nervous forces 
as well as to vitalize and stimulate the organs, it is proper that I 
should show how completely we may accomplish similar results by 
mechanical means, which have been greatly neglected by the medical 
profession. 

There are simple mechanical means (the use of ligatures and atmos- 
pheric pressure) which give us that positive control of the distribu- 
tion of the blood which no other means or measures can even approxi- 
mate. The control of the blood, holding it in one part of the body to 
divert it from other parts, has been called H^emostasis, and the pro- 
duction of such effects by atmospheric means, or Haemospasia, has 
been popularly called vacuum treatment. It has been neglected by 
the medical profession, which seems to be governed by varying fash- 
ions and the example of authority, and has been effectively practised 
in this country only by specialists. Being many years ago in consul- 
tation with two physicians upon a case of pneumonia, one of whom 
had been president of the National Medical Association and the other 
generally esteemed the leading physician of the city, I found them 
entirely unacquainted with H^emostasis ; and I believe it has not 
been formally taught in any medical college in this country. Cer- 
tainly it has been ignored in medical journals, though its efficient 
presentation was made over fifty years ago by M. Junod in Paris, and 
soon after by Dr. Buckler, of Baltimore, in this country. 

The utility and practicability of Hasmostasis by ligatures were 
first displayed in this country by Dr. T. H. Buckler, of Baltimore, in 
1843. His experiments demonstrated its entire sufficiency as a sub- 
stitute for blood-letting and as a method of producing results which 
nothing but Hasmostasis can accomplish. No physician is fully pre- 
pared to meet the difficulties of congestive and inflammatory dis- 
eases who does not understand Hasmostasis and Hasmospasia. 



246 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

Dr. Buckler's attention was attracted to this subject by the case 
of a man who had been superstitiously relieved from attacks of ague 
by tying eelskins round his arm just before the approach of the 
chill. Seeing that the man's arms were swelled in consequence of 
the eelskins being tight as ligatures — he drew the rational infer- 
ence that this withdrawal of blood from the central circulation might 
have been the means of cure by preventing congestion. Dr. Buckler 
deserves credit for thus looking at such a case as a philosopher, 
instead of treating it with the silent contempt with which physi- 
cians usually regard singular facts and extraordinary cures ; and 
although there is nothing in the results of Haemostasis but what 
a knowledge of hydraulics would indicate, it is an important service 
to mankind to demonstrate these results by experiment. 

When ligatures are applied round the limbs near the body with 
a pressure sufficient to check the return of venous blood, but not 
to prevent the entrance of arterial blood in the limb, the veins become 
greatly swollen, there is some tingling or unpleasant sensation from 
the distension, and the surface of the limb becomes finally of a livid 
red, as if it had been in an air-pump. 

When the limbs are all subjected to this process at once, the 
amount of blood detained in them, withdrawn from the general cir- 
culation, leaves a smaller supply for the heart, the head, and trunk, 
and the circulation is thus so greatly reduced in force, that the 
energy of the pulse is diminished, the head feels light from loss of 
blood, and not only general weakness (and sometimes sickness of 
stomach) result, but in the anemic it may even be carried to fainting. 
Perspiration generally breaks out and every internal or external 
congestion or inflammation is immediately relieved, as was formerly 
experienced when patients were bled to fainting, with the signal 
advantage that no blood is lost. 

The amount of blood that can be controlled in this way is differ- 
ent in different constitutions, but it is much more than would be 
controlled by any moderate bleeding, and produces a more bene- 
ficial impression on the disease. 

If we estimate the total amount of blood of an average adult at 
twenty pounds, and the proper share of the limbs at only three 
tenths of the whole (six pounds), which is a moderate estimate, a 
vigorous Haemostasis, by enlarging the average diameter of each blood- 
vessel four tenths, would about double their entire contents. This 
would withdraw from the fourteen pounds conceded to the head and 
trunk about six pounds, reducing the quantum of blood in circula- 
tion from fourteen pounds to eight, or from sixteen pounds to ten — 
thus taking away three sevenths. 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 247 

Even if we increase the blood in the limbs only fifty per cent, we 
should reduce the general circulation from fourteen pounds to eleven 
or from sixteen pounds to thirteen ; which is more than surgeons 
accomplish by bleeding and cupping. Dr. Junod, from his experi- 
ments, estimates the controllable amount at one hundred and thir- 
teen ounces. The experiments of Dr. Buckler fully proved the 
power of Haemostasis ; and some of them are worth narrating. 

A. M., a stout negro man aged twenty-eight, apparently in per- 
fect health, came into the doctor's office and wished to be bled. His 
pulse was 75 and soft. All the limbs being well and firmly liga- 
tured close to the body, the veins became distended, with tingling in 
the limbs, and in ten minutes a profuse diaphoresis was developed. 
The pulse was 85 and softer than previously, he felt giddy and light- 
headed. After twenty minutes he was in a profuse sweat, with 
slower respiration and occasionally a deep breath. 

He was then bled in the median basilic vein of the left arm. 
Three ounces ran out, and the ligatures, which were too tight, were 
loosened to let the blood flow, and after about five ounces altogether 
were lost, the man fainted. The ligatures were taken off and the 
man laid horizontally ; in about twenty minutes he recovered and 
sat up in a chair without the ligatures, when he was .bled ten or 
twelve ounces without fainting. The orifice was closed and the 
ligatures put on again and he quickly fainted. After the ligatures 
were taken off he recovered strength in a short time. This case 
proves that a loss of five ounces under ligatures may produce a 
much greater impression than the loss of fifteen or seventeen with- 
out Haemostasis. 

In the case of S. M., a negro man of thirty-five, of middle stature, 
accustomed to being bled, there was acute inflammation of the con- 
junctiva of the left eye. The conjunctiva was excessively injected 
and the eye closed, with pain in the temple, some photophobia, loss 
of appetite, and pulse 100. To see if Hsemostasis would blanch the 
inflamed eye, the ligatures were applied to the limbs. On the lower 
extremities handkerchiefs were used, tightened by twisting with a 
stick, as the thighs were very muscular. 

The ligatures made him sick and light-headed. He did not faint, 
but the conjunctiva was very considerably blanched. A free orifice 
was then made in one arm, and by the time three or four ounces had 
escaped the man fainted. The conjunctiva was greatly changed, 
but of course not as pale as the healthy eye. The bandages being 
removed and the man laid on his back, he recovered, and was then 
bled without ligatures — about twenty ounces, without syncope. Then 
the handkerchiefs were twisted tight on the thighs and he fainted 



2-j.S PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

again. His eye was greatly relieved, and with a mild collyrium was 
entirely well in a few days. This shows that a twenty-four ounce 
bleeding without ligatures is far inferior to a four-ounce bleeding 
with ligatures. 

E. Blake, a laborer twenty-four years of age, over six feet high 
and muscular, had a chill at work, and next day called for treatment 
with " headache, slight cough, pain in the back, a slight catarrh, 
white tongue, some heat of skin, pulse 90 full and hard." As he 
sat on the bed, the ligatures were applied and drawn tight. His 
veins were large, which made him a good subject. In three min- 
utes after the ligatures were fastened he had a slight hiccough, 
tried to vomit, fainted, and fell back in complete unconsciousness 
for fifteen minutes. The ligatures were loosened, he recovered 
with a slight convulsion, opened his eyes as if he had been asleep, 
and when fully restored said, " I'd rather be bled twenty times than 
have them things put on me again." 

He was then bled from the arm fifteen ounces without the liga- 
tures and. felt rather faint and lay down. When he felt recovered, 
the ligatures were tightened on his thighs as he lay, and in two 
minutes he fainted and was left for ten minutes unconscious. Then 
the ligatures were loosened and he recovered with a twitch and 
drank some water. 

This case shows that ligatures alone were far more powerful than 
a fifteen-ounce bleeding. 

The best illustration of the power of Haemostasis was in the case 
of C. P., a negro chambermaid, aged twenty-three, robust and tall, 
and always in good health until the present attack of pneumonia. 

Coming from a hot, crowded room through a cold damp atmos- 
phere, without sufficient clothing, she was taken with an icy cold- 
ness of the whole body through the most of the succeeding day, 
followed at night by " aching and soreness in all her limbs, violent 
pain in the back, and severe headache." Next day Dr. Buckler saw 
her with violent headache, soreness of limbs, great weakness and 
slight cough, but no expectoration. His treatment was by blood- 
letting and antimony, taking on the first day fifteen ounces, on the 
second twelve ounces, on the third ten ounces, with a little calomel 
and ipecac. 

The symptoms of pneumonia progressively developed and went 
right on toward a fatal result without the slightest benefit from his 
treatment. She had no sleep from the beginning, her tongue was 
white and dry, pulse 120 and corded, countenance exceedingly 
anxious, blood with inflammatory buff, bronchophony and bron- 
chial respiration marked, dulness over lower half of left lung 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY- 249 

behind and fine crepitation in other parts of it ; a coarse rhonchus 
is heard, and the vesicular murmur absent in lower half of left lung-. 

The patient being unable to sit up, and death apparently impending, 
the ligatures were then applied on the upper part of each thigh. 

As soon, as they were fastened, she complained of weakness and 
sick stomach. The pulse became softer and less frequent, the skin 
relaxed. 

She complained of numbness in the legs in an hour after the liga- 
tures were applied, and the limbs were much gorged. 

The medicine was stopped and the case left to the ligatures alone. 
They were kept on twelve hours, and during that time she got three 
hours' sleep, the first sleep since her attack. The pulse was 100 and 
soft, the skin soft and natural, tongue moist, countenance cheerful 
and bright, and she said she felt much better. The lungs gave better 
symptoms to auscultation. 

The ligatures were renewed, to be kept on until painful. Next 
day she was better, coughed and expectorated freely. The treatment 
by ligature was kept up, being once kept on fourteen hours at a time. 
They kept down the pulse and kept the skin in good condition. She 
steadily improved without medicine, using only barley water, and was 
well on the seventh day after medicine had been dropped to rely on 
ligatures alone. 

What, then, is the power of Haemostasis by ligature? I have no 
doubt there are a great many congestions and inflammations which 
Haemostasis alone will cure without medicine. It is properly applic- 
able to every case of inflammation and congestion which is not in the 
limbs, and pre-eminently useful in pneumonia, pleurisy, erysipelas, 
inflammation of the brain, meningitis, hepatitis, peritonitis, inflamma- 
tion of the bowels, cerebro-spinal meningitis, and other affections of 
the brain. 

In the practice of surgery, too, it is of immense value, for it enables 
us to hold the blood under control and reduce haemorrhage to a mere 
trifle. 

In the amputation of a limb it is the duty of the surgeon to drive 
out the blood that little or none may be lost by the amputation. A 
bandage firmly applied from the very extremity may so thoroughly 
expel the blood that we may almost say none is lost, and the consti- 
tution will therefore be more plethoric than before the amputation. 

But in operations which do not admit of this precaution, Haemosta- 
sis efficiently applied will so effectually reduce the force of the circu- 
lation as to prevent any serious haemorrhage — the vessels readily 
closing when the impulse of the blood is slight. In haemorrhage 
from wounds or rupture of blood-vessels, Haemostasis by ligature is a 
prompt and convenient remedy. 



25O PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

Uterine hemorrhage, it is well known, can be promptly controlled 
by compressing the abdominal aorta. Baudelocque was honored by 
the French Institute for the suggestion of compressing the abdominal 
aorta in cases of uterine hemorrhage, an operation which not only 
suspends the hemorrhage but rouses the patient by restoring blood to 
the general circulation. Uterine hemorrhage could also be dimin- 
ished or suppressed by Haemostasis on the limbs sufficient to reduce 
the force of the circulation. 

I do not know to what extent my pupils have practised Haemostasis, 
but the following statement from one of them is a good illustration of 
its value : — 

" Having heard from your lectures in the Institute an explanation 
of the principles and practice of Haemostasis, I have since endeavored 
in my practice to apply that measure to the relief of my patients, 
with remarkably satisfactory results. In epilepsy, puerperal and 
other convulsions, and especially such as seemed to require depletion 
and were not in a condition to receive anything into the stomach, I 
have found it most applicable. In such cases the ligatures appeared 
to make a greater impression than antispasmodics, depletion, or any 
other agency. I have applied the ligatures in a number of cases 
which I believe would have proved fatal if that measure had not been 
used. I have employed the ligatures until the convulsions were 
arrested, when I would loosen them, and if there were any symptoms 
of returning convulsions, would tighten them again. In this way I 
have sometimes retained the ligatures on the limbs for twelve or 
twenty-four hours without intermission. The continuance of their 
use for this length of time did not appear to produce any bad conse- 
quences whatever. The congestion in the limbs was soon relieved by 
the course of nature. At the same time that the ligatures were used 
I employed cathartic evacuants, footbaths, and antispasmodics, but 
found the ligatures of more value than all the other means. 

" After the convulsions were arrested by the ligatures I found the 
continued use of the antispasmodics, with some tonics, successful in 
* preventing their tendency to return. 

" In the case of a girl of eighteen with epileptic convulsions, I used 
as antispasmodics the sulphuric ether, valerian, castor, macrotys, 
asafcetida and lobelia, with cathartics, without any decided success in 
controlling the symptoms, and it appeared probable that the result 
would be fatal, when I resorted to the use of the ligatures, which 
arrested the convulsions at once. As soon as the ligatures were loos- 
ened the convulsions manifested a disposition to return, and they were 
therefore kept upon her limbs for about thirty-six hours, which com- 
pletely arrested the convulsions. After this, by the use of macrotys, 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 25 1 

valerian, and lobelia, together with some tonics, she was effectively- 
cured. 

" Since I have adopted the practice of Haemostasis I have resorted to 
its use in all convulsive cases that appeared to require it, and invari- 
ably with success. I have also used it with satisfactory results in 
some inflammatory cases, in which it evidently contributed to remove 
the congestion and lessen the determination of blood to the inflamed 
organ. William Bevier. 

"Salem, Steuben Co., Indiana, June 21, 185 1 ." 

There are other mechanical means of controlling the circulation. 
Undue determination to the brain may be easily controlled by com- 
pressing the carotids. When due to hypertrophied conditions of the 
heart, it may be controlled by quieting the heart through the brain or 
the shoulders, if sufficient impressibility exists, or by a sedative medi- 
cine such as cereus. 

Acting upon the jugular veins has a different effect. All com- 
pression of the jugulars is oppressive, producing congestion and 
inviting apoplexy by the congestion and the softening effect of 
venous blood. Hence the injurious effects of tight cravats and collars. 
Compressing one jugular vein is not so injurious, as it tends to in- 
crease the flow through the other. Rapid manipulation down the 
jugulars has a remarkably fine effect, relieving the brain of oppres- 
sion, clearing the mind, relieving mental oppression and headache. 

In the practice of Haemostasis it is essential that the blood-vessels 
should be in a distensible condition, and that the volume of blood should 
not be sufficient to distend the vessels ; for if the vessels are already 
tightly filled with blood, and their structure too firm to yield, but little 
change could be made by ligatures, and the operation would be inef- 
fectual. This is the case when the blood-vessels of the limbs are 
firmly contracted by cold, for the small blood-vessels require but little 
contractile energy to resist the whole force of the cardiac impulse. It 
is indispensable, therefore, that the limbs should be thoroughly warm; 
but even when warm, the constitutions of some subjects are so firm 
that the blood-vessels resist expansion more than is desirable, and 
sedative, relaxing treatment may be required. The warm bath will 
be valuable, and a nauseating dose of lobelia or ipecac will be a safe 
relaxant. 

The facility of controlling the blood is greater when the patient is 
anemic, and if he combines anemia with soft distensible tissues, it 
will not be difficult to cause him to faint by the ligatures. It will be 
desirable, if the patient is at all plethoric, to reduce the volume of 
his blood by diuretics and sudorifics or even hydragogue cathartics. 



252 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

When the volume of the blood is thus reduced and the patient in a 
warm, relaxed condition, Haemostasis is very potent, and I am confi- 
dent that if all other remedies had been abandoned in the treatment 
of pneumonia, relying upon Haemostasis alone, the mortality would 
have been less than it has been. 

The method of Dr. Buckler was the same as that recommended by 
Mr. Kellie,' a naval surgeon, at the close of the last century, as a pre- 
ventive of intermittent fever. In Duncan's " Medical Commentaries " 
for 1794 he published several instances in which he had used it with 
success. " He applied the instrument to the arm of one side and the 
thigh of the other." Experiments were made early in the 19th cen- 
tury by Dr. Robonam in the use of circular ligatures against inter- 
mittent fevers, with a favorable result. " The ligatures were applied to 
the arm, and made sufficiently tight to interrupt the superficial circu- 
lation and retard that of the more deep-seated vessels. As soon as 
the extremities began to redden, the patient felt easier and the symp- 
toms of the approaching paroxysm abated, the cold and trembling 
ceased, the pulse became more free, etc. Nearly in all the cases Dr. 
R. found two or three applications of the ligature were sufficient to 
suppress the fever." He considered the beginning of the cold stage 
the best time for the application, when they were nearly sure to sup- 
press the attack. In the middle of the paroxysm they had much less 
effect. It was sometimes necessary to loosen the ligatures in conse- 
quence of producing syncope. 

Notwithstanding the long-continued neglect of Haemostasis by the 
profession, Haemospasia was prominently introduced in Paris by M. 
Junod, beginning in 1833, who used the pneumatic method, and was 
twice favorably commended by the Academy and the Montyon prize 
awarded twice. 

PNEUMATIC HAEMOSPASIA. 

While mechanical Haemostasis is so convenient, prompt and effec- 
tive, it is far inferior in value to the Haemospasia by modifying 
atmospheric pressure. This has long been practised on a small scale 
by dry cupping, which has a marvellous efficiency in relieving circum- 
scribed neuralgia, pain, or inflammation, wherever there is a surface 
suitable for capping. 

The first application of the pneumatic method on a larger scale 
was by Dr. Junod, of Paris, who, a few years before the experiments of 
Dr. Buckler, constructed a metallic boot to take in the leg and draw 
the blood into it by the suction of an air-pump exhausting the air 
from the boot, an India-rubber band making a close fit between the 
top of the boot and the leg. 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGXOMY. 253 

The " British Journal of Homoeopathy " gave an account of Junod's 
operations and of a case attended by Hahnemann, who had tried 
homoeopathic treatment for nearly a year without success, and finally 
called in Dr. Junod with his pneumatic apparatus, of which he had a 
high opinion. 

The patient was a young English lady, daughter of an earl formerly 
an ambassador at a European court. The Journal says : — 

" This lady had long been affected with a most curious and sad 
disease. She had entirely lost the use of her limbs, and lay constantly! 
on a couch, her head generally supported by an attendant's arms. 
She seemed to be entirely destitute of any power of volition, never 
spoke except when roused, lay constantly in a half-comatose state, 
the face being very much flushed and the head very hot. Evidently she 
labored under severe congestion of the brain. She was under Hahne- 
mann's treatment ; he went to see her very frequently, in fact was in 
almost constant attendance upon her, but was unable to produce any 
favorable result ; and after nearly a year of ineffectual homoeopathic 
treatment, Hahnemann called in Dr. Junod to his assistance. When 
they met together beside the patient, Hahnemann said, " Now, Dr. 
Junod, you shall operate on the legs and I on the stomach." After 
the first application of the boot the patient roused up, addressed 
those around her, and chatted familiarly and quite sensibly with her 
friends ; her face assumed a natural color, and to the surprise of all 
she was able to walk about the room, a thing which she had not done 
for a very long time. After ten applications of the boot, in ten suc- 
cessive days, the patient was perfectly cured and was able to travel 
into the country, where she remained perfectly free from all symp- 
toms of her former complaint and was able to take a considerable 
amount of walking exercise." 

In my medical lectures at Cincinnati I continued to urge the 
importance and practicability of pneumatic Haemostasis on a large 
scale, and at length two physicians at Lexington commenced the 
construction and use of apparatus calculated to take in not only a 
single limb but the entire person, and every separate organ or por- 
tion of the surface. 

When the whole person is taken in, leaving out the head, it with- 
draws the circulation from the head and produces an invigorating 
influence on the constitution, which has been highly beneficial in 
paralytic conditions and in intermittent fever. The pneumatic 
treatment has been introduced successfully in several cities by phy- 
sicians who have made it a specialty, and its beneficial effects have 
surpassed all expectation. It is very successful in neuralgia or 
local pain, in tumors, and in paralytic affections. The diversity of 



254 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMV. [CHAP. XIV. 

its successful applications is so great that we are compelled to 
regard it as a general stimulant to vitality, operating by diminish- 
ing the resistance to the circulation and thus increasing the vital 
energy of every organ to which it is applied ; consequently restor- 
ing or developing organs that are impaired, and, if powerfully con- 
centrated on any region of the body, giving that region a 
predominance in the vital functions ; as, when applied upon the leg, 
developing functions which antagonize inflammation and active dis- 
eases. 

The rationale of pneumatic treatment, either for relieving conges- 
tion or for stimulation and invigoration, is not mysterious. By dim- 
inishing the atmospheric pressure we diminish the friction of the 
circulating blood, and thus promote the circulation through the part, 
while we also draw the blood from other parts. The cupping glass 
applied over any morbid part draws the blood from it to the surface, 
and thus diminishes the congestion of inflamed organs, enabling 
them to recover a normal condition. 

Diminishing the entire pressure of the atmosphere, as when we 
ascend a mountain, facilitates the circulation throughout the body, 
thus producing the feeling of exhilaration that most persons experi- 
ence on mountain heights and which we also experience in the dim- 
inished atmospheric pressure that precedes a storm ; an exhilaration 
that is shown in the sprightly movements of our domestic animals 
as a storm approaches. This is due to the stimulation of the ner- 
vous system, especially the brain. 

According to the laws' of Pathognomy there is a correspondence 
between the upper regions of the body and brain and the 
upper regions of the atmosphere. The same correspondence 
exists between the lower regions of the atmosphere and the 
lower regions of the brain and body. That is to say, the lighter 
condition of the higher atmosphere is congenial to the brain and 
lungs but not to the muscles. The lungs expand greatly, the car- 
bonic acid escapes more easily, and the brain has a clearer and brighter 
condition — a condition favorable to health and the nobler elements 
of character. The heavier pressure of the lower strata is favorable 
to the animal functions — to muscularity and digestion, but not so 
favorable to the brain. This effect becomes still more marked as 
the compression increases, and the opposite effect as it diminishes. 
Hence we may go so high in the air as to prostrate entirely the 
physical constitution or descend so low as to oppress the brain. At 
the height of three miles the atmosphere loses half its weight or 
pressure, and human beings lose nearly all their strength. A bal- 
loon may ascend so high as to be fatal to its passengers — which 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SAKCOGNOMY. 255 

was almost realized in a high ascent by Mr. Glaisher. He was in 
a state of paralytic helplessness at a height of 37,000 feet. 

On the other hand, by descending under the water in diving-bells 
or caissons men may work vigorously, but there is an oppression of 
the brain liable to result in paralysis, as was proved in the submar- 
ine work when the St. Louis bridge over the Mississippi was con- 
structed. The supervising physician himself had a brief attack of 
paralysis from entering the caisson.* We may therefore produce 
important effects by either condensed or rarefied air. 

The extensive submarine constructions in France, England and 
the United States have furnished abundant facts confirmatory of the 
principles of pathognomic science — the law that elevation in the 
atmosphere (with diminished pressure) corresponds to the nature of 
the brain and nervous system, depression (with increased pressure) 
to the nature of the muscular and abdominal functions. Thus the 
men in the caisson structures worked with ease, and could ascend 
the ladders or stairways with ease under the increased pressure, but, 
when the ascent was made, after they had gotten out of the con- 
densed air it was very fatiguing and injurious. 

The damaging effects upon the nervous system produced by exces- 
sive pressure may serve to indicate by antithesis the beneficial effects 
of a lighter atmosphere. These were oppressive congestions of the 
brain and spinal cord, paralysis of sensation and motion, and severe 
neuralgias, chiefly of the lower limbs and lower part of spine, but 
sometimes including the upper limbs, the nasal and maxillary regions. 
These are affections in which pneumatic treatment has proved 
especially beneficial. Mental dulness, incoherence of speech, stam- 
mering, a tottering gait, impairment of taste, smell, and touch, are 
among the symptoms reported in France ; fifteen per cent, of the 
patients at New York were paralyzed, and 61 per cent, under the 
heavier pressure at the St. Louis bridge. 

Whatever antagonizes the brain must also antagonize the surface, as 
I have shown in the pathological illustrations. Accordingly we find 
the enormous pressure of the caissons — thirty, forty, or more pounds 
to the inch — produces a pale, bloodless condition of the surface. The 
face shows its pallidness for at least fifteen minutes after coming out of 

♦The effects of heavy air pressure were tested at the construction of the St. Louis 
bridge, the caissons being sunk until a pressure of fifty pounds to the inch was pro- 
duced. Thirty out of 352 workmen were seriously affected. ;;nd twelve of these 
died. Half of these, however, were persons not fit to undergo the exposure. The 
effect of the pressure, when too long continued, was debility ending in paralysis. 
Paralysis of the lower limbs appeared in some on reaching a depth of sixty feet; 
the paralysis sometimes affected the arms also, and sometimes the bowels and 
sphincters. The superintending physician, Dr. Jaminet, descended over ninety 
feet, remaining two hours and three quarters, and was dangerously attacked soon 
after reaching home. Experience showed the necessity of reducing the time the 
men were under pressure, and it was finally reduced to one hour. 



256 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

the pressure. The hands have a shrivelled appearance, the veins dis- 
appearing. A very troublesome itching of the skin has been fre- 
quently mentioned as a common complaint. 

Young men of strong, compact constitutions have endured the 
heavy pressure of the caisson with very little injury, by going in 
and coming out slowly, but those more advanced in life have suffered 
much more, and those of a stout; corpulent habit have suffered far 
more than those of a spare habit, in whom the nervous system has a 
relatively greater control of the constitution. 

That the "caisson disease," as it has been called, was due to the 
injury of the nervous system by enormous pressure was shown not 
only by the cerebral and spinal congestions observed, in the autop- 
sies, but by the character of the remedies. Hot coffee and nourish- 
ing food were recommended to the laborers. Strong stimulants 
were used at St. Louis, and morphine was relied upon at New York, 
though ergot was also used on account of its power over the brain 
and spinal cord, to relieve their congestions. 

The moral to be derived from these observations is that while the 
low valleys and the seaside or sea-voyage may favor the digestive 
and muscular system, the highest tone of health and best condition 
of the nervous system and lungs will be attained on the highest 
inland elevations, and a plateau elevated from two to five thousand 
feet above the ocean will prove the most desirable residence. 

Those in whom the nervous system has been active, but the mus- 
cular and digestive at fault, may be benefited in lowland situations 
on the sea-shore and by sea-voyages ; but those in whom the nervous 
system alone is exhausted and oppressed, will find restoration in 
the mountains, which are generally beneficial to those in whom the 
upper portion of the brain is large. 

Working under the heavy pressure of thirty to sixty pounds to 
the inch, a great increase of appetite and digestion was experienced, 
and the urinary secretion was notably increased. Cases of dyspep- 
sia were benefited, and the pulse was made slower. But the ner- 
vous system suffered as much as the animal functions were 
stimulated. A pressure of about a hundred pounds to the inch 
proves fatal to small animals, and the pressure in the caissons at the 
St. Louis and New York bridges was fatal in a number of cases. 
The damaging effects were realized in the nervous system, in con- 
gestions of the brain and spinal cord, severe neuralgias, and paralysis. 
In some cases there was congestion of the lungs, one of which was 
suddenly fatal. 

The pulse, which corresponds with nervous excitability, is some- 
times checked by the pressure. M. Pol, in descending into a mine 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 257 

at Douchy, found his pulse sink from 70 to 55 per minute, and on 
coming out to rise again to 85. But as a general rule the increased 
resistance or friction of the circulation under a heavy pressure pro- 
duces an embarrassment which compels a more forcible action and 
a hardening of the pulse almost to a wiry character which corre- 
sponds to muscular action. Under the diminished pressure of higher 
altitudes, the pulse loses its muscular character and becomes softer 
and more frequent, while the heart freed from obstruction propels 
the blood with greater ease, animating each organ, until the pressure 
is reduced too low. 

That increased atmospheric pressure promotes the energy of the 
muscular system, but reduces that of its antagonist the nervous system 
is demonstrable in the ordinary phenomena of life. Intense muscu- 
lar action produces great pressure of blood and energy of cardiac action 
under which the brain receives an increased pressure, but is also ex- 
hausted by the muscular action. The best action of the brain is when 
it is relieved from this pressure by a state of tranquillity which suits 
its higher powers, while a state of pressure is suitable to the passions 
and to muscular exertion. Tiedemann made a very perfect demonstra- 
tion of this by experiment on the hearts of -frogs. He placed the 
heart of a frog, freshly cut out of the body, under the receiver of an 
air-pump, withdrawing the air ; the pulsations became weaker and 
slower, and in thirty seconds ceased. (For the same reason the 
vigor of the heart fails when we ascend two and a half or three miles.) 
Five minutes later, air being admitted, the pulsations were renewed. 
This experiment was several times repeated, with the same result. 
A heart suspended in the air continued in motion for an hour. 
Under pressure from the air-pump, the action of the heart became 
stronger and quicker. " Under three atmospheres it beat strongly 
for twenty mnutes, and continued to beat for more than an hour 
when removed from the air-pump." 

Since my attention has been given to the labors of Junod, whose 
apparatus for Haemospasia does not arrest the circulation, I find in his 
practice not only a grand therapeutic method, but a very successful 
demonstration of what I have claimed for the subhuman power of 
the extremities as a refuge from fever and inflammation — from 
cephalic and pulmonary diseases. His achievements certainly entitle 
him to rank among the greatest benefactors of therapeutic science, 
and they have been duly honored, his method having been recom- 
mended to all hospital establishments of France by a ministerial 
decree in 1843 — a fact which renders its neglect in the United States 
highly discreditable. His methods embraced not only Hrcmospasia, 
Vbnt baths of compressed and rarefied air. He began experiments 



258 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

in 1829 with a chamber for applying compressed and rarefied air. 
His experiments indicated that a rarefaction reducing the pressure 
of the air one fourth was generally the best application, as beyond 
this it produced the debility of high mountain locations. 

In treating a case of meningitis, considered hopeless, which had been 
sent to him by a physician, it occurred to him to try the reduced pres- 
sure locally on the leg. Two treatments wrought a cure, and thus he 
was introduced to the wonders of Haemospasia. With this new idea 
he visited many hospitals and colleges for its introduction, meeting 
with great success. His views were presented to the Academie des 
Sciences in six valuable papers, in which he showed the superiority of 
Haemospasia to bloodletting and some other fashionable measures. 
"Finally," he says, "I showed how to produce abundant perspiration by 
lowering the internal and external temperature of the body, instead 
of raising it — a resource hitherto unknown in therapeutics." In 1854 
a favorable report was made on the use of his method in cholera, and 
a gold medal awarded him. In 1851 he visited Great Britain and 
successfully introduced his methods in the hospitals. He was active 
at London and Constantinople in introducing his measures during 
the prevalence of cholera, and in 1870 his second Montyon Prize, the 
grand prize of medicine and surgery, was awarded. This imperfect 
statement of the recognition of his modest labors is sufficient to show 
that we may trust implicitly his reports of their success. He is the 
very opposite of a boastful pretender, and has received the most em- 
phatic commendation from the eminent members of the profession at 
Paris. We find among those who have given him their compli- 
mentary indorsement the names of Andral, Bouillaud, Velpeau, Nela- 
ton, Rostan, Ricord, Malgaigne, Royer, Louis, Bricheteau, Berard, 
Dubois, Baudelocque, Leuret, Cruveilhier, Trousseau, Piorry, Caze- 
nave, Boyer, Voisin, Solon, Baron, Girardin, Labrie, Piedagnel, Chas- 
saignac, Legroux, Gibert, Hortiloup, Honore*, Blandin, Gerdy,Guersant, 
Devergie, Sandras, Robert, Jobert de Lamballe, Blache, Richer, Rayer, 
Nonat, Briquet, Barth, Monod, and Fouquier. The majority of these 
names are familar to English as well as French physicians. 

We may therefore recognize the reports of the application of 
Hsemospasia as a matter of science which is no longer under any 
degree of doubt, and upon which we may act with the utmost confi- 
dence, and I take great pleasure in quoting this experience ; for what 
I have discovered and taught as Sarcognomy, though it may be demon- 
strated science, has not yet passed beyond the circle of my pupils 
to receive the indorsement of professional authority, because I have 
not engaged in its propagation ; hence the confirmation of my doc- 
trines by pneumo-therapia will be interesting to my readers. 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 259 

Sarcognomy affirms that below the knees we have a concentration 
of cooling, sedative, antiphlogistic and soporific power, calculated to 
diminish the activity of the brain and nervous system, the respira- 
tion, circulation, calorification, and all inflammatory or febrile pro- 
cesses, and that whenever the vital force or the circulation is drawn 
below the knee, all inflammatory or febrile conditions must be 
reduced and all active processes of brain, lungs or heart. The 
pulse must be reduced and the temperature of the skin ; and the 
relaxation of the brain must produce a relaxation of the skin, since 
it corresponds in its conditions with the brain. 

All this has been very thoroughly demonstrated by Junod with 
his haemospasic boot, which operates below the knee, concentrating 
an extreme hyperemia of normal blood in the leg and thus develop- 
ing its predominance in the functions of life. 

He claims to be able to introduce 113 ounces of additional blood 
in the legs by applying his boot on both, and describes an enormous 
increase in the size of the leg under the cupping process, though it 
is usually limited to reducing the pressure one fourth. What is the 
effect of this reduced pressure and hyperemia ? He thus describes the 
effect of the application of one boot on a healthy subject: "The 
face becomes pale, the temperature lower, especially in the upper parts 
of the body, the breath is cooler, the inspirations deeper, the voice 
weaker." Next "the volume of the pulse is diminished by one half." 
The leg is greatly swelled and red, with "a sensation of local heat 
and itching." The pulse becomes thready, the voice weaker, "the 
chest gives out a hollow sound on percussion," "constant yawning." 
There is a slight perspiration, the pupil is dilated, "the eyes dim, 
taste and smell nearly gone ; sense of touch dulled ; the hearing 
confused by ringing in the ears." The ears are extremely cold, 
"the tongue is colder and clammy," the axilla reduced two degrees 
in temperature. " He feels so feeble that he can scarcely raise his 
arm." At length the " pulse can no longer be felt, but the beating of 
the temporal artery is still to be distinguished." Then "the pulsa- 
tion of the temporal arteries has become imperceptible, and fainting 
ensues." But he is readily restored by allowing the return of the 
air. From the beginning to the fainting occupied an hour and forty 
minutes, the last twenty-five minutes both limbs being operated on. 
The swelling of the legs is accompanied by a sensible diminution in 
the upper part of the body measured at the waist. There was still 
some increase of the legs perceptible the next day. 

That in this case there was a development of vitality in connec- 
tion with the hyperemia of the legs, such as always goes with 
increased circulation, was distinctly stated thus : " There is a great 



260 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

increase of vitality in the extremities submitted to the action of 
Haemospasia. The skin reddens in the capillaries." The blood 
which accumulates in parts submitted to the action of Haemospasia 
is chiefly arterial. If rarefaction is carried to a high degree, the 
principal veins will gradually disappear and give place to the capil- 
laries, which press upon them on all sides." It is for this reason that 
Haemospasia has the remarkable property of acting favorably on vari- 
cose veins ! 

Thus does Haemospasia give for the time being to the vitality of 
the leg a control over the general vitality ; as any organ in the brain 
or elsewhere becomes, in a hyperemic condition, dominant over 
anemic organs. And as Haemostasis does this much less effectively, 
since it obstructs the circulation, it is evident that Haemospasia is 
greatly preferable, for it is not abnormal, but nourishes and 
strengthens the parts to which it is applied, and is consequently use- 
ful in producing a full development of organs that have declined or 
atrophied, though Junod does not refer to this important fact. 

He gives an ample statement of cases in practice, which is so 
important and interesting that I am almost tempted to copy the 
whole 293 cases, which occupy 160 pages of his book, as the most 
triumphant illustration of Sarcognomy which could be presented. 
But for want of space I shall confine myself to the descriptive titles 
and a few specimen cases as illustrations, hoping thereby to interest 
the students and practitioners of Sarcognomy in the practice of 
Haemospasia and perhaps in the reading of his book or calling for 
an American edition, as it was printed for private circulation. It 
was entitled " A Theoretical and Practical Treatise on Haemospasia, 
by V. T. Junod, Docteur en Medecine de la Faculte de Paris ; 
Deux fois Laureat de lTnstitut de France ; Premier prix Montyon 
en 1836; Grand prix de medecine et de chirurgie en 1870; Membre 
correspondant de la Societe medicale de Londres, etc. ; Prix Barbier 
1,500 francs en 1876. Translated from the French by Mrs. E. Harley 
Palmer. London : Printed for private circulation only, 1879." 

I trust the reader will not fail to read carefully this catalogue of 
cases successfully treated by the haemospasic method, which reduces 
the human constitution to its subhuman conditions, in which the 
capacity for active disease is lost, and in which a method is presented 
which Sarcognomv authorizes and will modify and enlarge in its 
application.* 

* GLOSSARY OF THE MEDICAL TERMS FOR THE BENEFIT OF 
NON-PROFESSIONAL READERS. 

Amaurosis. — Loss of vision from impairment Angina. — A disease with sore throat or sense 

of the optic nerves. of suffocation. 

Amblyopia. — Incomplete amaurosis. Angina pectoris. — Severe pain and suffoca- 

Amenorrhcea. — Deficiency of the menses. tive feeling in the region of the heart. 



chap. xiv.] pneumatic sarcognomy. 26l 

Catalogue of Successful HvEmospasic Practice. 

Maladies of the Cerebro-Spinal System. — 5 cases of apoplexy ; 17 of cere- 
bral congestion; 2 of aphasia; 7 of paralysis ; 2 of spinal disease; 5 of meningitis ; 
1 of softening of the brain; 1 of cephalalgia. 

Nervous and Neuralgic Affections. — Convulsions, 8 cases; hysteria, 3 
cases ; epilepsy, 4 cases ; loss of memory, 1 case ; hypochondriasis, 1 case ; mania, 
8 cases; sciaticas and neuralgias, 9 cases. 

Affections of Eyes and Ears. — Ophthalmia, 6 cases ; iritis, 1 ca6e ; keratitis, 
1 case; blepharitis, 1 case; falling of the right eyelid, 1 case; congestive ambly- 
opia, 1 case; amaurosis, 11 cases; otitis, 3 cases; deafness from fever, 2 cases; 
deafness of long standing treated by hasmospasia and baths of alternately com- 
pressed and rarefied air, 1 case. 

Affections of the Respiratory Organs. — Epistaxis, 2 cases; angina of the 
tonsils, 3 cases; oedema of the glottis, 1 case; diphtheria of the pharynx, 1 case; 
croup, 1 case; laryngitis and alteration of voice, 2 cases; bronchitis, 5 cases; acute 
catarrh and emphysema, 1 case; pleurodynia, 1 case; pleurisy, 7 cases; pneumonia, 
15 cases: pulmonary congestion, 3 cases; haemoptysis, 16 cases; consumption, 5, 
cases. 

Affections of the Heart. — Hypertrophy, 5 cases; heart disease and asthma,. 
5 cases; endocarditis and hydro-pericarditis, 4 cases; angina pectoris, 1 case; pal- 
pitation and nose-bleeding, 1 case. 

Affections of the Digestive Organs. — Gastralgia, 2 cases; hsematemesis, r 
case ; intestinal occlusion, 1 case ; peritonitis after confinement, 1 case. 

Uterine Affections. — Metrorrhagia, 2 cases; uterine hemorrhage, 1 case;: 
dysmenorrhea, 1 case; suppression of the menses, 2 cases; amenorrhoea, 2 cases. 

Urinary Affections. — Nephritis, 1 case; cystitis, 2 cases. 

Fevers and Cholera. — Cholera, incipient, 2 cases, advanced, 10 cases; typhoid 
fever, 11 cases; small-pox, 2 cases; scarlet, quotidian, and intermittent fevers, 4 
cases. 

Rheumatism and Gout. — Rheumatism, 8 cases; gout, 2 cases. 
Surgical and other Affections. — Severe falls, 5 cases. 

Head Injuries. — Kick on the head by a horse; gunshot wound; gunshot and 
meningitis; delirium from a burn ; erysipelas, 3 cases; brain affection from amputa- 
tion ; traumatic ophthalmia ; traumatic amaurosis ; cataract, 2 cases ; glaucoma ; 
caries of orbit and chorea; disease of the face ; asphyxia, 2 cases ; atropine poison- 
ing; wry neck; anthrax; pain in shoulder for two years; dislocation of arm 
(assisted by haemospasia) ; dislocation and sleeplessness; blood poisoning; 
phlebitis; whitlow; gunshot wound of right hand ; scirrhus of right breast; con- 
Aphasia. — Loss of speech. Inguinal. — Relating to the groin. 

Anthrax. — An inflamed tumor called a car- Keratitis. — Inflammation of the cornea of the 

buncle. eye. 

Arthritic. — Relating to gout or the joints. Laryngitis. — Inflammation of the larynx. 

Blepharitis. — Inflammation of the eyelids. Meningitis. — Inflammation of the membranes 

Bronchitis. — Inflammation of the bronchia, of the brain, 
the air-tubes that enter the lungs. Metrorrhagia. — Hemorrhage or flow from the 

Caries. — Decay of the bones. womb. 

Cephalalgia. — Pain in the head. Nephritis. — Inflammation of the kidneys. 

Chorea. — irregular movements; St. Vitus' dance. CEdema. — Swelling of the surface from dropsical 

Cystitis. — Inflammation of the bladder. effusion. 

Dysmenorrhea. — Difficult, disordered or pain- Pneumonia. — Inflammation of the lungs, 

ful menstruation. Paraplegia. — Paralysis of the lower portion 

Emphysema. — Collection of air in the chest of the body, 
or under the skin. Peritonitis. — Inflammation of the peritoneum, 

Endocarditis. — Inflammation of the walls of a membrane enveloping the viscera of the abdomen, 
the heart. Pharynx. —The passage at the back of the 

Epistaxis. — Bleeding at the nose. mouth and entrance of the throat. 

Gastralgia. — Pain in the stomach. Phlebitis. — Inflammation of the veins. 

Glaucoma. — Impaired vision from the vitreous Pleurodynia. — Pain in the walls of the chest. 

humor of the eye. Prostatitis. — Inflammation of the prostate 

Glottis.— The aperture of the larvnx. gland, below the urethra. 

Hsematemesis. — Vomiting blood. Quotidian.— Daily; a fever recurring every day. 

Hemiplegia. — Paralysis of one side. Scirrhus. — A hard tumor. 

Hamioptysis. — Spitting of blood from the Strangury. — An obstruction in urinating. 

lun £ s ', . .. x . , Traumatic. — Produced bv a wound. 

Hydro-pericarditis. — Dropsy and inflamma- Urethra. — The channel for the discharge of 

tion at the heart in the pericardium. urine. 

Hypertrophy. — Excessive growth. Varicocele Swelling of the veins of the 

Hypochondriasis. — Low spirits and great scrotum or spermatic cord, 
anxiety about health. Whitlow. - A painful abscess in a finger; a 

Icterus. — Jaundice. felon. 



262 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

gestion of the breasts ; contusion of thorax, 2 cases ; spinal affection with abscess ; 
gunshot wound in lumbar region and paraplegia; traumatic paraplegia; traumatic 
peritonitis; strangury from tumor; abdominal tumors, 2 cases ; chronic prostatic 
disease ; spasm of urethra ; irreducible crural hernia ; strangulated inguinal hernia ; 
varicocele; contusion of knee; traumatic arthritis; gunshot wound of leg; ulcer of 
leg; contusion of leg; sprained ankle ; frostbite of foot. 

It would be impossible to find in the annals of medical science 
from the earliest ages any single measure to compare for a moment 
with the vast variety and energy of therapeutic powers which have 
been developed by Haemospasia, even if we were confined to the 
above catalogue. But this remark applies only to the orthodox or 
fashionable science, which has been sanctioned by colleges. Vital 
nervauric treatment alone (commonly called magnetic) can show an 
equally diversified illustration of sovereign power over disease, reach- 
ing to many cases and to instantaneous results which are beyond 
the power of Haemospasia. But this has been resisted and walled 
out from the colleges by the invincible powers of mental inertia and 
professional jealousy ; and even Haemospasia meets the same opposi- 
tion of inertia, — neglected in America, and even in France, though 
sanctioned by authority, and collegiate jealousy pacified by the tact 
of the modest Junod. He has to complain of this neglect, and 
resorts to the subterfuge of printing his book "for private circula- 
tion only," to escape the hostility of professional jealousy, which, 
under the false pretence of professional ethics, forbids a physician to 
give his successful experience to the public. 

" How is it (says Junod in this book) that a method offering such 
advantages, which has fixed the attention of the learned profession, 
obtained for its author honorable approbation and reward, and has 
been made the subject of several important works, — how is it that this 
method, known for forty years, is not more generally adopted by the 
medical profession ? [To-day it is fifty-seven years since the formal 
presentation in Paris of Junod's discoveries.] 

"Such is unfortunately the tendency of the human race, which 
refuses to acknowledge the efficacy of a method which addresses 
itself to common sense alone, and is divested of all romance or 
imagination. It is sad. The method is praised and neglected. Its 
progressive action is acknowledged and it remains in a groove. It is 
considered desirable that science should move onwards and attain 
perfection, and yet every new experiment is received with suspicion, 
and every serious inquiry is rejected. Men prefer to remain station- 
ary, and follow in the old ruts traced by centuries, and from which 
they will not emancipate themselves. They will neither accept nor 
reject that which may change the ancient usage, or introduce a new 
element in therapeutics. It has been thus with other inventions. 
Valuable discoveries have been forgotten or indefinitely postponed. 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 263 

It is easier to make a discovery and to bring an apparatus to perfection 
than to get it adopted in a lifetime." 

Such language as this reminds us of the experience of Harvey and 
other great scientific benefactors ; but how much more valuable, 
practically, is Haemospasia than Harvey's discovery of the circula- 
tion ! 

As the foregoing catalogue, by name, of 293 cases is very unsatis- 
fying from the lack of minute description, justice requires that we 
should look at a few specimen cases to see what they teach. 

We observe there are 65 cases of relief to the cerebro-spinal system ;. 
9 of neuralgias ; 30 of affections of eyes and ears ; of respiratory 
organs, 58 cases ; of the heart, 16 cases ; digestive organs, 5 ; uter- 
ine, 8 ; urinary, 3 ; rheumatism and gout, 10 ; fevers and cholera, 
29 ; surgical and miscellaneous, 54. 

If this is a criterion of the availability of Haemospasia, it would 
seem that its power was greatest over affections of the head and 
nervous system, which were controlled in 104 cases, next of the 
thorax, which were controlled in 74 cases. Of fevers and inflamma- 
tions, — there were 17 fevers and inflammations (counting the rheu- 
matic, urinary, and surgical, which were nearly all strictly inflamma- 
tory) 67, — making 84 febrile and inflammatory. 

This sustains my claim that Haemospasia below the knee is the 
most powerful agent known for the control of active or inflammatory 
diseases of the head and chest, for no manual or electric treatment 
can produce so great a change in the balance of the circulation, nor 
can any combination of drugs approach it in effectiveness. Neither 
is there anything in common use that so promptly controls fever and 
inflammations wherever located, except where great nervauric power 
operates on impressible constitutions. 

Haemospasia accomplishes its results by controlling the distribution 
of the blood, — nervauric treatment by controlling that of the nervous 
forces. These two are the most successful agents known in thera- 
peutics, and he who handles both is a social benefactor. What the 
latter can do my pupils are demonstrating ; what the former has done 
may be learned by referring to a few of Junod's cases, which are here 
given. But Junod's cases fall far short of showing the power of 
Pneumatic Sarcognomy, for they illustrate chiefly derivation by 
Haemospasia to the sub-human region, while it is applicable to all 
parts of the body. 

" Apoplectic congestion. — A princess of the royal family in Italy, 
aged 60, was seized with apoplexy, accompanied by unconsciousness, 
loss of movement and sensation, dilated pupils and insensibility to 
light. For the first six days the doctors (amongst them Cabarrus) 



264 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

had recourse without success to the usual treatment — bleeding, purg- 
ing, and revulsives. Under this difficulty I was sent for. A single 
derivation brought back consciousness, sight, movement, and sensa- 
tion. Soon after this the Marquis de Brignolles, the Italian 
ambassador, paid me a visit to say that his Majesty, pleased with this 
unexpected result, desired to have four apparatuses made under my 
directions for use in the military hospitals. 

" Cerebral congestion. — Count , aged 34, receveur des finances, 

was affected with cerebral congestion in consequence of too close appli- 
cation to business. He had been unconscious for three days, when 
MM. Royer and Fauconneau-Dufresne decided to have recourse to 
Haemospasia. He regained consciousness under one derivation, and 
was able to return to his post. 

" Cerebral congestion in a new-born infant. — A child seized with 
this affection at its birth was submitted to the application in the 
presence of M. Monod, who sent for me. In 15 minutes the child 
recovered, and all danger disappeared. 

" Apoplectic congestion. — Mad. , aged 45, was seized with apo- 
plexy, with complete loss of power and consciousness. She was bled 
without result, and M. Thierry-Mieg decided to try Haemospasia. Sent 
for in the night, I reduced the pulse to a thread, which brought 
back consciousness and removed the paralysis. A second Haemospasia 
the following day completed the recovery. 

" Apoplectic congestion. — An old soldier, aged 76, was seized for the 
second time with apoplexy, and was brought home unconscious. A 
doctor at Vincennes, where he lived, prescribed blisters and purga- 
tives, which had no effect. M. Alphonse Sanson, who was called in 
for consultation, proposed Haemospasia. After a derivation which 
lasted half an hour, the pulse became small, the breathing labored,, 
and a sweat broke out on the forehead. I ceased to act, and allowed 
this semi-fainting condition to subside. He soon regained speech 
and consciousness. This one application sufficed for recovery. 

" Apoplectic congestion. — A doctor, aged 60, was suddenly seized 
with cerebral congestion, having been quite well on the morning of 
his seizure, Sept. 3d, 1859. He lost consciousness and movement. 
M. Valerand bled him, with no result. The following day, after a 
consultation with M. Sanson, I was called in. After a Haemospasia 
of 45 minutes he was able to walk into the next room. The paralysis 
was cured. 

" Cerebral congestion with delirium. — A young man of 25, of 
sanguine temperament and strong constitution, was admitted to the 
hospital at Nice for a cerebral congestion of six days' standing. 
Notwithstanding general and local bleeding, delirium had supervened 
for 48 hours. Called in by M. Deporta, I applied the apparatus so as 
to reduce the pulse to a thread. In fifty minutes consciousness 
returned, and in a few days the patient recovered. 

" Apoplectic congestion with paralysis of the optic nerve. — Mad. , 

aged 48, being quite well the previous day, was seized with conges- 
tion of the brain in the night. Loss of mental faculties, loss of sight, 
affection of the right eyelid, strabismus, and stupor. MM. Goupil and 
Dagama called me in. The stupor yielded to the first Haemospasia. 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 265 

A daily application re-established the sight in four days, the stupor 
and strabismus disappeared, the eyelids resumed their normal condi- 
tion, and the patient recovered. 

"Chronic cerebral congestion. — M. , aged 51, corrector of the 

Union Medicate press, was seized with apoplectic congestion. The 
hemiplegia only lasted a few hours, but he was unable to resume his 
occupation for a whole year, owing to the excessive congestion of the 
brain which supervened on the smallest intellectual exertion. 

"After undergoing various treatments without result, and trying 
even hydropathy, he consulted M. Monod, who sent him to me. 
After sixteen days of haemospasic treatment, equilibrium was re- 
established in the circulation and he resumed his work, and is now 
corrector in one of the principal printing-offices in Paris. He con- 
tinues in perfect health. 

"Aphasia. — A doctor, aged 58, had suffered for several years with 
valvular disease of the heart grafted upon an arthritic diathesis of 
a very pronounced kind. On the 3d of January, 1868, he was 
seized with giddiness, lancinating pain in the forehead and temples, 
and cephalalgia supervening upon the smallest mental exertion. On 
the 16th of February he was seized with aphasia, the recollection of 
words failing, without disturbance of any other function. He was 
bled without result, and his physician was recommended by M. 
Shuster to send for me. Ten haemospasic applications were crowned 
with perfect success, and this recovery has since proved lasting. 

" Apoplexy, loss of speech, mouth drawn to one side. — A soldier in 
the infantry, aged 34, was seized in the night with apoplexy and loss 
of speech, the mouth drawn to one side. He was removed to the 
military hospital at Chatham. The clinical professor, whose office 
it was to report upon Haemospasia to the War Office, profited by this 
occasion to study its. effects. The operation lasted half' an hour. 
The mouth could be seen minute by minute regaining its normal 
condition, and his speech was restored, to the great astonishment of 
the surrounding doctors and students. This recovery was main- 
tained. 

"Acute meningitis. — Chaix, a wood-carver, aged 36, of nervous 
temperament, had reached the eighth day of acute meningitis when I 
was called in. I found him in a state of coma, the head thrown back, 
pulse weak and quick, face animated, skin hot and dry. One Haemo- 
spasia brought back consciousness, the second sufficed to place him in 
the way of sure recovery. 

"Meningitis from sunstroke. — Mile. B., aged 15, after sunstroke 
from exposure of the head (Sept. 3, 1836), had fever, vomiting, and 
convulsions, for which her two physicians bled her twice. Getting 
worse for three days she was bled three times in the arm and once in 
the foot. Thirty leeches and two blisters were applied to the lower 
extremities and ice on the head. Five days from the beginning, there 
was great prostration and frequent convulsions, cold feet, and great 
heat at the occiput. On the 9th, Dr. Junod being called in reduced 
the atmospheric pressure at ten o'clock on the lower extremities a 
twelfth, and then a ninth. In eight minutes there was a slight con- 
vulsion of the upper extremities. At 10.15 the reduction of pressure 



266 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

was increased to a seventh. At 10.20 the ice was removed. The pain 
was nearly gone, and disappeared entirely at 10.25. The pressure 
was reduced a ninth. A faint and drowsy condition existed, and the 
Haemospasia was discontinued. The improved condition continued 
through the day and night, and next morning a few moments of 
Haemospasia prevented a return of the headache. Three days later 
she went to her sister's wedding in church, and continued well. 

" Epilepsy for ten years. — Clemence Caron, at the age of 12, was 
frightened into an attack of epilepsy, and for this was admitted to 
the Salpetriere, * where for ten years the fits returned every evening at 
the same time.' ' At the age of 22 she was seized with typhoid, for 
which she entered the Hotel Dieu. The epileptic fits, which ceased 
during the fever, returned upon her recovery. M. Sandras, learning 
that menstruation had never appeared with this patient, and remem- 
bering the special action of Haemospasia in this, sent for me. At 
four o'clock, with the double purpose of preventing the attack and 
establishing menstruation, I acted upon both lower extremities at 
once. This first derivation succeeded in preventing the fit. The 
following day, same result. The third was followed by the appear- 
ance of menstruation. From that moment the patient was delivered 
from the fits, and regained perfect health. Two years later, on receiv- 
ing intelligence of the death of her brother, the epilepsy returned with 
the same violence and the same periodical character. Clemence was 
received at the Hopital de la Charite, and I was called in by M. 
Fouquier. At four o'clock I reduced the pulse to a thread and main- 
tained it in that state till half-past six o'clock. No paroxysm. The 
following day, same derivation, same result. The next day an 
assistant who took my place did not act with sufficient energy, and 
allowed the attack to get ahead of him ; nevertheless a hyper- 
haemospasia assured the recovery. Clemence Caron was subse- 
quently employed for six months as an assistant nurse, which allowed 
the stability of her recovery to be attested. An epilepsy of ten 
years' standing, with daily attacks, is generally considered to be 
beyond the resources of medical art.' " 

In a case of epilepsy of four years' standing, in a girl of 18 at La 
Charite, accompanied by amenorrhcea, twenty-one applications of 
Haemospasia restored menstruation and cured the epilepsy. 

Pneumonia. — In four cases of pneumonia "no other means save 
Haemospasia were employed, and recovery took place in a few days." 
They were as follows : — 

" Cecile Benoit, aged 23, of sanguine temperament and good consti- 
tution, was admitted to the Hopital de la Charite. She presented 
the following symptoms : anxious respiration, frequent cough, rusty 
expectoration, dulness on percussion under the shoulder-blade, distinct 
crepitating sound at the point affected, hot skin, strong bounding 
pulse, 120. The superintendent having ordered Haemospasia before 
all other treatment, I brought on artificial anemia in fifty minutes. 
The skin, which had been burning and dry, became moist. On being 
questioned as to her sensations, the patient said, 'I feel my skin is 
stretching.' Perspiration was established, the breathing, completely 
freed, gave no pain, and the patient, who did not know how to express 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 26j 

the relief she experienced, shortly fell asleep. A second derivation 
was made the same evening, to induce sweating and for the comple- 
tion of the cure. In a few days this patient left the hospital com- 
pletely recovered, having had no other treatment. 

"Louis Corot, aged 25, of sanguine temperament, was seized with 
rigors, headache, difficulty of breathing and pain in the side, pulse 
120, skin burning, expectoration rusty and viscid. The first deriva- 
tion took place in the presence of [several distinguished physicians], 
and from the commencement the respiration became freer. In 50 
minutes the headache and pain in the side had yielded and the pulse 
became thready. Profuse perspiration set in, followed by deep sleep. 
The derivator having been removed, the patient was quite astonished, 
on awaking three hours later, at the amelioration that had taken 
place in his condition. Perspiration was kept up without interrup- 
tion, by derivations, which were renewed whenever the skin showed 
any tendency to dryness. In three days the patient was convalescent. 

" A man aged 31, in delicate health, was seized with pneumonia of 
the right lung. M. Godier called me in at once. Three derivations 
pushed to anemia, brought on a salutary crisis ; on the fifth day the 
patient was convalescent. 

" A man aged 54, was seized on the 17th day of December 1858, 
with pneumonia of the left side, incessant coughs, rusty colored 
expectoration, dyspnoea and delirium. MM. Despaulx Ader and 
Caffe decided in consultation to send for me. A first derivation pro- 
longed for 55 minutes calmed the delirium and the cough. After 
the third, the character of the expectoration improved, and on the 
fifth day the patient was out of danger. 

" Pneumonia in an aged person. — Anna Dupont, aged 74, was 
admitted to the hospital of Geneva on the fifth day of pneumonia, 
when M. Lombard, considering her case a grave one, and finding 
that it had not been relieved by other treatment, sent for me. M. 
Fauconnet was present during the derivation. The stitch in the 
side gave way in forty minutes. The pulse fell from 130 to 120. 
Profuse perspiration ensued. The following day a second Haemos- 
pasia was followed by convalescence." 

Hemoptysis. — Nothing is more promptly controlled than 
haemoptysis. Of fourteen cases of its successful treatment the fol- 
lowing is a fair sample : — 

" M. , aged 57, an ex-Minister for Foreign Affairs, was seized 

with haemoptysis which resisted all general and local bleedings, cup- 
pings and iced drinks, in fact all haemostatics. In a consultation 
between MM. Andral, Roan and Charran, Haemospasia was- pre- 
scribed. The hemorrhage yielded to the first derivation and the 
patient recovered." 

" M. , aged 18, had in three weeks 17 attacks of blood-spitting 

when M. Thierry Mieg prescribed Haemospasia. After the second 
derivation the bleeding which had brought the patient to death's 
door ceased, and he recovered." 

Cardiac diseases. — " Asthma with organic disease of the heart. — 
A well known doctor in London, a°;ed 60, was affected with asthma* 



268 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

connected with organic disease of the heart. The paroxysms suc- 
ceeding each other rapidly and resisting all remedies, he decided to 
try Haemospasia and summoned me by telegram. On my arrival I 
found him in an alarming state ; he had not been able to get into 
bed for a fortnight, and extreme lassitude was therefore added to 
his sufferings. From the beginning of the first Haemospasia the 
breathing became freer, and in 35 minutes he was sufficiently 
relieved to go to bed, though I had him carried there in order to 
save all exertion. The derivations were renewed for three days to 
prevent a return of the attacks, which they effectually dispersed." 

" Acute rheumatism and endocarditis. — A young man, aged 22, 
was affected with acute rheumatism, when suddenly symptoms of 
endocarditis supervened, characterized by great oppression and 
increase of the beating of the heart. Pulse small, rapid, irregular, 
with very little reaction. Other treatment having failed, Haemos- 
pasia was tried, without going so far as fainting. I made an ener- 
getic derivation which restored calm in 45 minutes. I renewed the 
derivation in the evening, so as to assure repose for the night, and 
to prevent a return of the complication. The next day a fresh deri- 
vation relieved the joints of the upper extremities, and the patient 
recovered." Speaking of rheumatism, Junod says: "I have seen 
rheumatism of the shoulder yield completely to a single Haemospasia 
on the affected part, though it had resisted all other treatment." 

"Hypertrophy of heart. — The preceding case decided M. Beau- 
grand to send a young man aged 21 to me, who was suffering from 
hypertrophy of the heart. He was a harness-maker by trade, which 
was greatly against him, owing to the strength of arm required. 
After 35 days of continued treatment he recovered. 

" Endocarditis. — A voung girl of 17, admitted to University Col- 
lege Hospital, London, had been suffering for some days from articu- 
lar rheumatism which involved the heart. Leeches had produced no 
effect. Dr. Walsh begged me to try Haemospasia in her case, which 
at once freed the heart and brought her recovery. Dr. Walsh was 
the means of introducing the apparatus into the London University 
College Hospital." 

Cholera. — "Cholera, cold stage. — Being on duty on the 12th 
June, 1848, at the cholera station belonging to the parish Rue de 
V Union, I was called in to a patient who had been seized in the street 
with giddiness. The next day after suffering from colic during the 
night, with liquid evacuations, she was attacked with the usual vomit- 
ing and the stools became white. The pulse was almost impercep- 
tible, pulsations 90, seltzer water given as a drink was almost imme- 
diately rejected, and the same thing happened with all the medicines 
given. The voice was becoming weak, the tongue cold, and the 
extremities were gradually taking a blue tinge. Shortly after, cramps 
set in, and the patient exclaimed, 'Take away this pain which is kill- 
ing me ! ' I made a derivation on the lower limbs. The pulse, 
already feeble, decreased. Notwithstanding this, I persisted with 
the derivation until calm was established. The derivation lasted 
two hours. The leg on which the boot was applied became nearly 
black. The sweat, at first cold, gradually became warm, and 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 269 

extended over the whole body. The patient recovered. At the 
beginning of the derivation I placed two hot bottles close to the 
recipient; there can be no doubt that caloric is of use in the treat- 
ment of cholera." 

[The leading feature of the Eclectic treatment of cholera in 1,500 
patients at Cincinnati in 1849, was wrapping the patient in blankets 
wrung out of water as hot as could be handled. The mortality was 
less than six per cent.] 

"Cholera, blue stage. — A woman, aged 44, seized with the epi- 
demic, was admitted on the 21st of August, 1854, to the hospital of 
St. Dizier. The pulse, 102, was scarcely to be felt. Evacuations 
characteristic and frequent. The whole body was blue, or rather of 
a coppery red, the eyes deeply sunken, and the voice feeble. The 
patient begged for air, Haemospasia was suggested by the head sur- 
geon and applied in his presence. The patient's countenance 
improved, the breathing became free, the headache and stupor dis- 
appeared, and perspiration being established, the derivation was 
completed in 45 minutes. On the 22nd the leg which had been sub- 
jected to derivation slowly returned to its natural condition, the per- 
spiration became established and the evacuations finally ceased." 

Fevers. — "A soldier, aged 27, had suffered from intermittent 
fever in Africa, with engorgement of the spleen. He was sent back 
to France and entered the hospital at Chaumont the 20th of Septem- 
ber, 1854, for typhoid accompanied by intense dyspnoea, strong reac- 
tion and brain affection. The head surgeon applied to me. A sin- 
gle Haemospasia sufficed to relieve the breathing and the brain 
symptoms, and to reduce the vertical diameter of the spleen by 
3. 14 inches, and the transverse diameter 1.57 inches. No fresh compli- 
cation rose. 

"Case 221. — A patient, aged 19, was affected with typhoid on 
the 3rd o£ May, 1857. At first it was slight, but at the end of a fort- 
night grave symptoms sat in. On the 17th the expression altered, 
the patient complained of suffocation ; respirations 34 ; cough dry 
and fatiguing; dulness on left side; pulse 125; temperature 105 
degrees. The tongue dry and bright red at the tip ; heavy sleep and 
delirium at night, picking of the bed-clothes. On the back of the 
legs were dangerous ulcers produced by mustard plasters. M. Monod 
being called in advised Haemospasia and I was sent for. I placed a 
band round the leg, so as not to hurt the sores, and applied the deri- 
vation on one of the lower extremities. After 45 minutes the res- 
pirations fell from 34 to 21 ; the oppression yielded; temperature 
102.2 degrees. In the evening at 8, fresh Haemospasia was made on 
the opposite leg. On the 18th, the breathing remained free and 
there was no return of delirium. Another Haemospasia that evening. 
On the 19th convalescence set in. 

"Case 212. — A young person in a school at Geneva was seized 
with typhoid, and was attended by M. Coindet. For eight days both 
cold affusions and other means had been employed to subdue the 
delirium, but in vain. My colleague hearing I was in town sent for 
me. The derivation removed the delirium in 50 minutes, and the 
patient was out of danger. M. Coindet being struck with the power- 



270 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

ful effects of this method, had an apparatus supplied to the asylum 
of which he had charge. 

"Case 213. — Typhoid fever. Mile. -, aged 15, was seized with 

delirium on the fifth day of fever when in a warm bath. M. Chomel 
being called in, proposed Haemospasia. A single derivation sufficed 
to restore consciousness, and the fever followed its regular course 
towards recovery. 

" Case 214. — While at Lausanne, I was consulted for a young 
school girl, aged 19, suffering from typhoid ; M. Delaharpe acted with 
me. Haemospasia was the foundation of our treatment. The first 
derivation dispersed the delirium, though we used others to prevent 
a return. On the 6th day all active measures were dispensed with 
and the patient became convalescent. 

" In intermittent fevers (says Junod) the return of an attack can 
often be prevented by a Haemospasia applied an hour before the 
attack." He observes that in all eruptive fevers, when the eruption 
fails to appear or having appeared disappears, the pulse becomes 
small and rapid, the skin dry and the nervous system greatly 
oppressed. " Such a state alarms even the cleverest doctors. They 
use emetics, sudorifics, or stimulating applications to draw the circula- 
tion back to the surface, some even resort to bleeding, and cold water 
douches or compresses, but all in vain. In such circumstances 
Haemospasia shows its efficacy. It frees the nervous centres, relieves 
the organic depression, causes a flow of blood through the tissues 
and brings back the rash with surprising facility. In erysipelas it is 
not necessary to wait until it has fully manifested itself, for it can be 
prevented from running its course by anticipatory applications of 
Haemospasia." 

We must pass by the numerous illustrations of the power of 
Haemospasia in surgical cases and various inflammations, for it is 
unnecessary to continue these quotations further to show the great 
power of Haemospasia. It is a magnificent illustration of the laws 
of Sarcognomy, and ought to be familiar to every student. 

Cases still more remarkable than those quoted from Junod can be 
furnished by other practitioners of the pneumatic treatment. Dr. C. 
M. Newell of 1074 Washington St., Boston, has been actively engaged 
for twenty years in this pneumatic practice and has performed more 
remarkable cures than any I have quoted from Junod, some of which 
are stated in his pamphlet on Pneumatic Therapia. But finding the 
medical profession indifferent to Pneumatic Therapia, he has not 
attempted to force his knowledge on those unwilling to learn., I 
have quoted from Junod because he has so stable a reputation, so 
ample an indorsement by the most conservative and distinguished 
physicians. But every energetic practitioner of pneumatic treatment 
in an enlightened manner will be able, like Dr. Newell, to surpass in 
some respects the record of Junod ; and the votary of Sarcognomy 
who applies its principles will show himself very inefficient if he 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 2*] \ 

does not in a few years accumulate a more brilliant record than that 
of the distinguished Frenchman, who knew not the whole power of 
pneumatic treatment. 

Sarcognomy shows that what has been done on the sub-human 
region of the human body can be done on all other parts with the 
same logical result — the development of the local function already 
determined by Sarcognomy. Consequently the pneumatic treatment 
can play upon every key of the human instrument through the circu- 
lation as it is played upon by electric and nervauric practice, though 
it is incapable of the same specific minuteness of application 
because it requires a larger space and is also resisted by the bones of 
the cranium. Had Junod understood the basic principle of Sarcog- 
nomy, he might have made a satisfactory demonstration of the 
science by pneumatic experiments to develop local functions. 

Whoever is determined to excel in the relief of disease should 
have at his command the nervauric, electric and pneumatic thera- 
peutics, each of which can accomplish something peculiar which the 
other methods cannot, and the whole of which guided by Sarcognomy 
may accomplish more than the therapeutics of the old colleges. Let 
us consider now the various applications of pneumatic Sarcognomy. 

Leaving the sub-human region below the knee, we shall find not 
a sedative but an invigorating region from the knee to the trunk, 
which is one of the most powerful tonic invigorators we can bring to 
bear to develop muscular energy and vital force. It is desirable that 
the cupping should be extended above the head of the thigh-bone, so 
as to fully include nutrition and vital force on the thigh, but it 
should keep a few inches above the knee to avoid its restless in- 
fluence unless we desire that peculiar stimulation. When the entire 
limb (thigh and leg) is included, we gain great vital force in combina- 
tion with the sedative anti-inflammatory character of the leg and foot 
by a moderate derivation : for the larger the territory included, the 
more moderate should be the suction. This whole limb treatment 
therefore is valuable in consumption, which needs both reaction and 
invigoration. But where there is little active disease, the thigh 
alone will give the needed invigoration. 

This crural stimulation has a wide range of application to all 
cases of reduced vitality and emaciation, consumption, anemia, 
paralysis, convalescence from severe disease, neurasthenia, etc., and 
co-operates admirably with spinal treatment. 

Having shown in the fifth chapter that the vital forces emanate from 
the spinal column, and having now shown the power of the pneumatic 
method to strengthen and develop any local function by producing 
hyperemia through atmospheric attraction, it is obvious that when 



272 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. j_CHAP. XIV - 

we treat the spinal column by Haemospasia, we may rouse and 
renovate every debilitated organ in the body by the attraction of a 
slightly diminished pressure on the different portions of the spine, 
which draws the circulation to the spinal column, forces the blood 
more freely through the spinal cord, its nerves and the adjacent 
ganglia, and thus removes spinal disease and debility, whether from 
softening caused by a deficient blood supply or from any species of 
irritation. 

It has long been known that cupping is of great value in spinal 
diseases, but it was not applied in the efficient manner of Haemos- 
pasia, and it has been shown that Haemospasia is a true vitalizer and 
not a mere derivative or cause of hyperaemic congestion like Haemos- 
tasis, for it overcomes tumors and varicose veins, which would be 
greatly aggravated if Haemospasia merely produced a blood conges- 
tion. 

Inflammation is a haemostatic condition, a blood congestion, from 
the exhaustion of the vital force in the parts, which maintains the 
circulation, hence Haemospasia relieves it by diminishing pressure, 
assisting the flow and vitalizing the surrounding tissues, the healthy 
expansion of which assists the relaxed capillaries in the inflamed 
portion. 

Thus does Haemospasia give us not only the power of quenching 
local disease by flooding it with good blood, but the power of sending 
the vital forces where we please, and also withdrawing congestion 
whenever it is oppressive, as when we relieve the congestion of 
cholera and the congestion of the chill of intermittent fever. These 
congestions are deadly because they are venous congestions, and 
venous congestion is an attack on life by diminishing the supply of 
arterial blood, while lowering the vitality and softening the structure 
of the congested organs. 

Haemospasia, by relieving atmospheric pressure to the amount of 
one or two thousand pounds (for the entire atmospheric pressure on 
an adult lias been computed at 30,000 pounds), greatly increases the 
facility of the circulation, and increases the rapidity of the pulse, 
making the blood more arterial and raising the temperature. Thus 
does it relieve pernicious congestion and exalt all the powers of life 
in proportion to its application, and as Sarcognomy shows where to 
apply it in a scientific manner, instead of relying on the empirical 
but fortunate methods heretofore in use, it would seem that Pneu- 
matic Sarcognomy should stand in the very front rank of thera- 
peutics, to exalt or depress the force and rate of the pulse. 

Its most obvious suggestion is that we should adapt our cups to 
the whole or any portion of the spinal column and administer our 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 273 

treatment with the pneumatic cup as we do with the hand or with 
the negative pole of an electric current for which I have given full 
directions. Upon many persons the hand is ineffective and electri- 
city very limited in its power, but no human being can resist the 
pneumatic power. 

What an enormous power we acquire by combining these three 
agencies to snatch the victim from the brink of the grave to which 
physicians and friends have resigned him ! After a few dispersive 
passes (and if there be a venous or inflammatory congestion, a deri- 
vation to the lower or upper limbs), nervauric treatment may be 
applied on the part of the spine most involved, to concentrate the 
nervous forces, followed by a gentle and prolonged Haemospasia at 
the same spot, to concentrate the circulation, and if necessary com- 
pleted by our electric current charged with magnetic or medical 
virtues or with the nervaura of the operator. No such concentration 
of therapeutic power has heretofore been possible, because unknown. 

Special Treatment. — A cup from three inches wide and six or 
eight inches long may be applied on the upper dorsal and three lower 
cervical vertebrae for the benefit of the thorax and head in all affections 
of those organs. It is one of the most effective tonics that we can 
use, and for simple invigoration may well be combined with the cru- 
ral treatment which has been described. But there is no necessity 
for narrowing the cup, unless for a special spinal diagnosis by its 
effects. Cups six inches wide may be recommended ; and a cup 
devised to cover the whole space from shoulder to shoulder, including 
as much of the shoulders as possible, would have so powerful a tonic 
and hygienic effect as to be justly considered a leading remedial 
agent. 

This is what was lacking in Junod's derivation by the boot on the 
leg, which reduced congestion by derivation, and lowered the capacity 
for inflammatory and nervous affections, but did not at the same 
time actively rouse the hygienic energies or "vis medicatrix natures" 
which is developed at the shoulder. 

In the treatment of fevers, the sub-human derivation should be 
used to overcome congestive febrile and inflammatory conditions, but 
it should be associated with antiphlogistic treatment on the side and 
the shoulder — on the shoulder to antagonize disease and on the body 
behind the humerus (region of Coolness) for a more perfect, cooling, 
soothing restorative and hypnotic influence than could be derived 
from the le^, for it better supports the energy of the brain. 

The treatment of fevers, then, is very simple. Cups across the 
shoulders, cups behind the arm and sub-human derivation, effusion of 



2/4 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

warm water or wet packs on the hypogastric region, and the medicine 
on which we should rely if there were no mechanical treatment 
(such, for example, as baptisia in typhoid fever, and quinine, salicin 
or syrup of phenic acid in other fevers); but the result of the latter 
will be found so satisfactory that many would become indifferent to 
the aid of medicine. 

The treatment of Pneumatic Sarcognomy requires that the practi- 
tioner should make himself, as soon as possible, thoroughly familiar 
with the chart of locations on the body. 

If already familiar with that, he will know that all affec- 
tions of the abdominal organs are to be treated by invigorating the 
lower dorsal region, all pelvic disorders, and all affections of the lower 
limbs on the lumbo-sacral region and a few inches above and below it. 

In short, there are not many diseases in which it is not important 
to go to the controlling center at the spine, which is often not only 
the controlling power but the seat of the disease. It must always 
be in a more or less morbid condition from its sympathy with the 
morbid organs. 

That which Sarcognomy shows to be the true practice has already 
been largely verified by Dr. Newell. This skilful homeopathic phy- 
sician in his extensive pneumatic practice has found himself com- 
pelled to treat the spine in all important cases. 

The old-fashioned dry cupping and bloody cupping never expanded 
into a philosophic practice, because it was based on an incorrect idea 
of relief by derivation, either by bleeding after scarification or by a 
congestion of blood at the surface. Hsemospasia, on the contrary, 
produces not congestion, but an active hyperemic circulation, a 
true vitalizing process, which also brings the blood to the surface 
where it is oxygenated and where it throws off with increased facility 
its perspirable impurities through the skin. 

This process also becomes an invaluable addition to our means of 
diagnosis, by showing the condition of the parts through the appear- 
ance of the blood brought to the surface. On healthy structures, 
Haemospasia brings out a fine, healthy, florid color, but on all morbid 
parts the color is unhealthy. It maybe pallid or dead-looking, or of 
various dark hues approaching absolute blackness. This tells where 
the disease is located, and often corrects the errors of medical diag- 
nosis, as in the case of Mr. S.,of Boston, treated by Dr. B., who was 
eminent* as to diseases of the chest, for dangerous disease of the 
lungs, without giving him any relief. The pneumatic test showed 
that his lungs expanded freely, thoroughly and pleasantly, but that 
on the right side of the walls of his chest there was evidence of 
severe pleurisy having existed, leaving adhesions, which was the fact, 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 275 

and the corrected diagnosis made the basis of a successful treatment. 

In the case of Judge S., pronounced by seven eminent physicians 
a paralysis from cerebral embolism, the pneumatic test showed, instead 
of almost hopeless cerebral embolism, definite spinal lesions, which 
were cured by pneumatic treatment. 

In the case of Mr. S„ the soundness of the lungs was shown by the 
pneumatic test, which will be explained when we consider the pneu- 
matic treatment of the entire surface. The soundness of the lungs 
is shown by their free expansion under pressure, and the soundness of 
all parts of the body is shown by the healthy florid color developed 
under Haemospasia. Guided by such a test, surgeons would not com- 
mit the mistake of cutting into the body to remove morbid organs, 
when they were in a sound condition, of which many horrid examples 
are recorded, the latest published being operations on two women 
for uterine tumors which proved to be nothing else but uterine 
expansions by pregnancy, one of five months, the other of seven 
months. Of course the operation was not completed, but both died in 
from one to three days, and it proved very unfortunate for the doctors 
who resided in Nebraska. (See Medical Bulletin) The pneumatic 
diagnosis is mentioned by Junod as follows : " The color of the sur- 
face which has been subjected to Haemospasia will serve as a diagno- 
sis. Thus in the commencement of typhoid, the surface would assume 
a bluish tint, while on the approach of convalescence, the derivation 
reddens the tint, according to physiological laws. The same results 
may be observed in the treatment of other adynamic affections. If 
the surface subjected to Haemospasia becomes firm, it may be sup- 
posed that the blood is fibrinous. Finally at the beginning of certain 
eruptive maladies, Haemospasia can throw light on diagnosis by accel- 
erating or quickening the exanthema on the part where it has been 
applied. The same means serve equally well in icterus." This treat- 
ment implies that his treatments were made chiefly on the limbs, but 
he seems to have no clear idea of the effects of different localities, 
or of the paramount importance of the spine which he appears to 
neglect. He describes his treatment simply as Haemospasia or deri- 
vation, not stating whether upper or lower limbs or any other part was 
the locality, as if the whole treatment was nothing but derivation, 
the false idea which guided the old method of cupping. This con- 
tracted view renders his success still more marvellous, but it falls far 
short of the success obtained by Dr. Newell in paying more atten- 
tion to the spine in all cases, and also in treating immediately over 
the morbid organs, as well as on the spine, thus accelerating the 
treatment and aiding the diagnosis. Junod's idea was derivation 
instead of bleeding, leeching and cupping, and he says by these 



276 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

derivations the physician " can divert the blood from the general 
system for a sufficient space of time — several days if necessary? 
This is its great advantage over Haemostasis by ligature which cannot 
be kept on many hours without some injury. But the leading benefit 
of Haemospasia, the increased vitality of the parts to which it is 
applied, and the consequent revolution in the balance of functions he 
seems not to have understood, nor could he have appreciated its im- 
portance, if he had studied it without the knowledge of Sarcognomy. 

If Haemospasia had no other utility than its power to aid diagnosis, 
it should rank high among the contributions to practical therapeu- 
tics. It is not to be understood, however, that discoloration of the 
skin always implies merely disease of the subjacent structures. The 
morbid blood is attracted to the surfaces under pneumatic treatment, 
and diseases in the abdomen may be indicated by discoloration of the 
legs. Junot mentions this in his experience. For example, in a case 
of cholera accompanied by cholic and pain, derivation was continued 
for two hours, and he says : " The leg on which the boot was applied 
became nearly black." In a case of painful cholera reported by Dr. 
A. Catel, he says: "The color of the leg was peculiar, and quite 
different from that which usually follows Haemospasia. It had the 
blueness peculiar to this malady, showing that even in convalescence 
the blood is slow to recover its normal color." The application was 
for 35 minutes. In a case of approaching small-pox he says: "The 
appearance of the limb acted upon showed by the characteristic dis- 
coloration the approach of an eruptive malady. On the following 
day the whole body was covered with small-pox ; the patient rapidly 
recovered." 

Junod, however, seems not to have appreciated the importance of 
the color of skin as an indication, and seldom mentions it in these 
reports. I would add that it does not require a powerful pneumatic 
derivation to bring a morbid color to the leg. One of my students, 
Mr. C, applied a cup on the leg in a case of peritonitis, and made an 
excellent illustration of the derivative power of cupping in relieving 
internal diseases. The cup was applied on the calf of the leg, not 
much over five minutes, and gave immediate relief to the pain of per- 
itonitis, appearing to subdue the inflammation, which it attracted into 
the leg — making the leg as painful and tender as if suffering from 
severe rheumatic inflammation, so that it was more than a week be- 
fore he could stand upon it, notwithstanding careful treatment. 
This was in accordance with a law of correlation, which may be pre- 
sented here, as it has been overlooked in preceding chapters. 

The law of correlation, which is similar to that between cerebral 
organs, operates between the limbs and the trunk. The upper and 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 277 

lower limbs are parallel and analogous, in higher and lower spheres. 
The humerus or arm above the elbow correlates with the thorax, and 
the forearm (below the elbow) with the abdomen. In like manner, 
the thigh correlates with the thorax, and the leg with the abdominal 
region — the lower part of the leg and foot correlating with the pel- 
vic region. Hence operations on the leg and foot, or the forearm and 
hand, affect the abdominal region, which operations on the upper arm. 
and thigh affect the thorax. The cupping of the calf was therefore- 
the proper thing in a case of peritonitis, as foot and leg baths are. 
appropriate in fever. 

We return to our special treatment. It may be stated broadly that: 
wherever disease exists the tendency of Haemospasia applied upon 
the morbid locality is to dispel the morbid blood, bring in a fresh: 
wholesome circulation, promote absorption of improper depositions, 
and restore all the conditions of health ; for I have shown that every 
part of the body lives only by influx — the influx of arterial blood 
and nervaura or nervous energy, and hence it must be that the 
adequate influx of these two will restore any morbid organs to a. 
sound condition. It is difficult to say how far any part must be. 
advanced in destruction to resist the combined power of nervauric 
and pneumatic treatment. There is nothing in pathology more 
formidable than cancers, yet they have often been conquered by 
nervauric treatment alone, though I have forgotten to record the 
cases reported. I do not know that pneumatic treatment has ever 
been applied to them, but Dr. Newell has often applied it successfully 
in Bright's Disease. 

It is therefore the physcian's duty to apply Haemospasia as a restora- 
tive agent over all sorts of disease as often as required, and to apply 
it chiefly to the spinal column as a center and source of vital action- 
Its application over the abdominal surfaces must be restrained by the 
laws already fully stated, which lead us to prefer the posterior sur- 
faces of the body. There is no objection to a moderate application 
of the nervauric hand, the negative pole or the pneumatic cup upon 
the abdomen to relieve morbid parts or assist enfeebled organs, if it 
be cautiously done ; but there must not be much vital concentration 
upon the abdomen, and when it is treated, the spine should generally 
be treated at the same time. Even Junod obtained a glimpse of this, 
and he says: "This method is not so available in maladies of the 
abdomen. It has been therefore less frequently used, and there are 
not many clinical observations to report with regard to it. This 
might be foreseen as reaction is generally less efficacious when 
applied to the abdomen than when acting upon regions above the 
diaphragm. It is not astonishing therefore that Haemospasia, the 



2?8 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

most powerful of all, should bow to the general law." Nevertheless, 
when we understand all the functions, we may produce very impor- 
tant results by treating the abdomen in connection with the posterior 
surfaces. 

The neck and basis of the brain behind the ear will occur to any 
one who understands locations as a seat of commanding power over 
the whole body. The neck in its relation to the brain at its basis is 
called the crural region, because it controls the lower limbs, and all 
the physiological and psychic energies with which they are associated. 
It offers us Vital Force at the basis of the cerebellum, and in the 
lower cervical region it gives control of the arms, while its three 
ganglia supply power to the heart. Hence it is that the most power- 
ful stimulus we can give with electricity is upon the neck and basis 
of the cranium. Haemospasia in this location, which is practicable 
with cups of the proper shape and size, will realize similar results to 
those which we produce by the hand and the battery. 

The tonic region (or shoulders) being specially antagonistic to the 
relaxing abdominal region, or we may say, to the viscera generally, is 
the proper place for antagonizing visceral diseases and irritations. 
The entire shoulder — by its inferior, exterior and posterior surfaces 
— antagonizes the hypochondriac and abdominal surfaces, the liver, 
stomach and bowels. Extending under the shoulder into the axilla, 
we find antagonism to the pelvic organs and lower bowels, also an- 
tagonism to melancholy, insanity and hysteria. 

Hence upon the shoulder region we tranquillize abdominal disorders, 
while we invigorate abdominal functions upon the lower dorsal spine 
and the abdominal surfaces. Mental disorders of every grade are 
relieved just under the arms, with the co-operation of the cephalic 
region or cervico-dorsal junction. Many insane patients might be 
relieved if this were acted on. 

The arms maintain a direct (not antagonistic) sympathy with the 
parallel region of the body as they hang. The influence of the hum- 
erus invigorates the thorax, and that of the forearm the abdominal 
organs. Hence treatment below the elbow is valuable in abdominal 
affections, and above the elbow in affections of the lungs and heart. 
Diseases of the heart sometimes prove this by the pain in the 
shoulder extending to the elbow. In a case reported a week ago of 
death from heart-disease, the first thing noticed was severe pain in 
the arm. Junod has observed some of these things ; he says: "The 
brachial derivation is very effective in affections of the heart and 
lungs ;" and again, "The double application to the arms offers in 
certain cases resources that one might look for in vain from other 
means, especially when it is a question of chronic or acute affections 



c;:ap. x:v.] pneumatic sarcognomy. 279 

of the abdomen." "In uterine hemorrhages it is best to confine 
oneself to a double application : on the arms." That is certainly a 
good application ; but it would be much better if extended to the 
shoulder and the surface of the chest below the arms, which is more 
tranquillizing. Of course, hemorrhages should also be treated by 
derivation to the lower limbs, which will greatly reduce the force of 
the circulation, and this he advises to the extent of " reducing the 
pulse to a thread." Though Junod did not understand the vital 
relation of the shoulder and the adjacent surfaces, he approximated 
the truth as near as he could in what he says of the arms — that 
Hasmospasia " is especially beneficial if applied to the arm when there 
are signs of miscarriage," and also that it should not be so applied 
when menstruation is approaching. 

In amenorrhcea he appears to have used, instead of a simple 
spinal treatment, an apparatus including the whole pelvis, and also 
Hasmospasia to the lower limbs, with which he says he was very 
successful. Such cases may be well treated by an 8-inch cup on the 
lum bo-sacral region, aided if necessary by a cup from groin to groin, 
or on the groins alone. A gentle treatment on the lower limbs will 
assist. In dysmenorrhcea and menorrhagia, as well as hysteria, the 
sedative treatment below the arms is important, covering the regions 
of Sanity, Tranquillity and Chastity. In parturition, the lumbar and 
lower dorsal regions will give material aid. 

The lower dorsal region should be invigorated by pneumatic treat- 
ment in all abdominal affections, and the lumbar region should be 
included in cases of constipation. The forearm yields assistance of 
great value in all dyspeptic affections. Of course, disorders which 
are congestive require the aid of Hasmospasic derivation, and the 
abdominal region is happily relieved on both upper and lower limbs. 
The former have less derivative power, but a more congenial in- 
fluence. 

In the less active conditions of disease, such as old tumors, 
deposits and dropsies, we should rely on spinal and local treatment, 
as the increased circulation produces great power of absorption. 
Junod and Newell have both recognized this, though the former has 
relied too much on general derivation and too little on spinal co-oper- 
ation. Junod says : — 

" In dropsies or collections of fluids it is most successful, as the 
vessels absorb the fluids in order to supply the vacuum caused by 
mechanical displacement of the blood in the system. This absorp- 
tion is so rapid that in many cases it astonishes even the operator. 
Dropsies of the pleura and of the pericardium diminish in a few 
hours, and the intestinal and renal secretions are increased, some- 
times as much as by the action of purgatives and diuretics. Where 



2S0 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMV. [CHAP. XIV. 

there is oedema, absorption is facilitated in the same manner by a 
direct application on the parts affected. . . . When sanguineous 
congestions have resolved themselves into parts disposed to hemorr- 
hage, Haemospasia not only favors the reabsorption of the effused 
blood in the same way that it acts on the liquids arrested in the 
serous cavities, but it can diminish the general disturbance and swell- 
ing around the parts subjected to the hemorrhage." He says further : 
° I have been successful in combating ascites when it proceeded from 
impeded circulation caused by an engorged state of the abdominal 
viscera. I have dispersed with one application the congestions and 
swellings caused by neuralgia, tooth-ache or cold. Sometimes I have 
been able to arrest ptyalism, watering of the eyes, coryza and 
excessive alvine secretions." 

It is obvious, therefore, that pneumatic treatment, which so power- 
fully promotes absorption, may excel all other means in cases of 
hemorrhage in the brain producing apoplexy and paralysis, in which 
it is important to control the cephalic circulation and to favor absorp- 
tion. Certainly its brilliant results in apoplexy, paralysis, cerebral 
congestion and epilepsy sustain this view. 

It is not necessary to write a volume of special directions : for I 
presume my reader to understand the principles and locations of 
Sarcognomy, and to realize that in Haemospasia he has another and 
very powerful agent to operate on these locations. 

I think he will find in lumbar and sacral or lumbo-spinal Haemos- 
pasia, a powerful control over the sexual region and all its diseases 
and infirmities. 

Haemospasia is not limited to diseases, but applies with equal 
success to all defective development, whether in the sexual system, 
the muscular system, the nervous system, or the viscera. By increas- 
ing the circulation of organs and of their control in the spine, it 
insures their growth and normal development, and it does not seem 
absurd to hope that we may thus remodel defective constitutions 
both pliysically and morally. 

A pneumatic jacket, which would attract the circulation into the 
upper part of the thorax, would not only produce important soothing, 
tonic and healthful effects ; but, from the sympathy of the upper 
thoracic region with the brain and the ethical sentiments, it might be 
a powerful aid in elevating the character and reforming the vicious. 
But for the elevation of the human race we need a more decisive 
measure, which has been kept out of sight by a morbid moralism. 
The criminal population should not be allowed to propagate. Castra- 
tion of criminals is the duty of society. 

It is highly probable that the pneumatic treatment by rarefied air 
(or air-bath) would assist in this object ; an ascent about three miles, 
which takes off half the atmospheric pressure, produces a great 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 28 1 

reduction of animal force, leaving the higher faculties in full activity. 
Penal institutions ought therefore to be located in high mountain 
localities for the sake of this refining influence, and it would be 
worth while to try the rarefied-air chamber upon criminals of great 
animal force, as the condensed-air chamber is used to strengthen the 
animal forces. De Saussure stated that when less than twelve 
thousand feet high (11,273) on the Col du Geant, he and his com- 
panions were in a feverish condition with great thirst and a horror 
of stimulants or food, showing that the appetites were suppressed. 
At the height of 13,124 feet on Mount Blanc he could not take a 
dozen steps without feeling a degree of faintness that forced him to 
sit down. Fatigue at that elevation was "completely exhausting," 
compelling one to stop. 

Thus elevated situations subdue the inferior, while they sustain the 
higher elements of humanity, and at a certain height the lungs are 
more developed and are protected from consumption. History shows 
the superiority of mountaineers, and cretinism is produced in the 
valleys of the Alps. A chamber to hold the patient in condensed or 
rarefied air must, according to the principles already stated, be 
valuable for stimulating the lower or the higher powers of the con- 
stitution. 

If the head of the patient be. exposed while his body is subjected 
to sKghtly diminished pressure, the effect must be the universal 
stimulation of the body and relief of any congestion of the head. 
On so large surface the change of pressure should be slight. The 
air that is breathed being of full pressure would be forced into the 
lungs and its absorption greatly accelerated — the expansion of the 
lungs being promoted and at the same time their condition tested, 
for the morbid part will reveal its location by the sensations of the 
patient. This measure however is of limited utility because depress- 
ing to the brain and lungs. Another method is better. 

In a taller chamber, the whole body may be taken in and the out- 
side air breathed from a tube. This has a more uniform effect and 
promotes the expansion of the lungs, the absorption of oxygen and 
its diffusion through the body, as well as mvigoration of the circula- 
tion and relief of congestions and deposits in the chest. 

Nothing has ever been discovered which has so vast and varied 
powers as pneumatic therapeia when guided by Sarcognomy. Even 
where none would suppose it beneficial in advance, as in direct appli- 
cation to tumors, varicose veins and oedema, its results are successful. 
The report of Junod's experiments in the military hospital at Chat- 
ham, England, published in the " Medical Times " and " Gazette " 
of Sept. 10, 1853, mentions a very remarkable case, — "an inter- 



2$2 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

mitten t cerebral neuralgia of several months' standing ; the patient 
aged 60. This affection, after having resisted all known measures, 
yielded to one application of Hczmospasia" 

"In the treatment of chronic maladies," says Junod, "the applica- 
tion of Hasmospasia is generally for one hour and once a day." In 
acute cases there is no uniform rule, as the state of the disease and 
strength of the patient must determine. In grave cases, he says, it is 
necessary "to reduce the pulse to a thread and to keep it in that state 
for some hours." When serious inflammation is to be arrested, or 
when it is necessary to bring' the patient near to fainting, stronger 
derivation must be made, and both lower limbs may be acted on at 
once. 

A reduction of one or two pounds is sufficient in most cases, but in 
some as much as five or six may be taken off. A soft, relaxed tem- 
perament yields readily ; but a dry, firm, tough constitution requires 
greater power and warmth or a warm bath to promote relaxation. 
This has already been explained in speaking of Haemostasis. 

Our final question is, By what apparatus shall we apply pneumatic 
treatment ? a very important question, as one of the hindrances to its 
general adoption by physicians has been the expensiveness of any 
apparatus and the difficulty of finding any already manufactured. 
Physicians have been told that the cost would be $300. This, with 
the silence of the colleges and the general unfamiliarity with the 
mechanical and physiological principles involved, has nearly prevented 
any thought of pneumatic treatment by gentlemen who prefer their 
literary and professional dignity as prescribers to troublesome mechan- 
ical operations. But the expense has been very much over-rated. 

We need first an air-pump, costing anywhere from five to twenty- 
five dollars, and a gauge connected with it, to show the reduction of 
pressure. The five-dollar pump, though slower in operation, will be 
sufficient if we do not attempt to treat the whole body in a pneu- 
matic chamber. Next we need three or four cups to apply to the 
whole spine, though we do not often need more than two. They 
may be four inches wide and eight inches long ; or four of six inches 
or three of seven, eight and nine inches long. They may be two or 
three inches deep : the shallower they are, the quicker they may be 
exhausted. They must have a stop-cock or a valve by which they 
communicate with the tube from the pump, and when exhaustion is 
produced, the valve or the cock may shut off the communication and 
the cup be left sticking on the surface with its rarefied air, until we 
open the valve and admit the atmosphere. Thus we have as many 
cups as we wish, drawing at once. These cups will of course be 
applicable on any other surfaces they will fit. A pair of round cups 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 283 

four or five inches in diameter would be of general utility. These 
cups should all have a layer of soft-gum elastic (India rubber) on the 
edges applied to the body to procure a more perfect fit and pleasant 
application. They may be made of glass or of metal. If of metal 
a glass plate may be inserted to give a view of the cupped surface. 

In addition to cups we need a pair of pneumatic boxes to receive 
the arms, a pair for the lower limbs reaching the summit of the 
thigh, and a pair for the legs reaching the knees. Junod used also a 
pelvic box, through which the lower limbs passed, which fastened 
around the body and the thighs, and a half-body box (hemi-somatic 
he called it) which took in the lower limbs and the body to above the 
hips. But there is no absolute necessity for these. I think a good 
outfit for practice might be obtained for ^50 if a competent me- 
chanic would undertake the manufacture. A very important part of 
the work is the construction of the rubber cups that fit the limbs 
tightly so as to exclude the air. I am at present devising an 
apparatus that may be furnished at a reasonable cost. 

To promote the introduction of the pneumatic apparatus, I present 
the desirable forms, including those that have been used by Junod, 
on which the reader will observe the tubes connecting the pneumatic 
boxes or recipients, with the air-pumps, which he represents as small 
affairs, not more than six to ten inches long, and therefore not expen- 
sive. Junod coins names from the Greek, calling treatment on the 
leg Scelic Haemospasia, and treatment including the thigh by a much 
longer word, meroscelic Haemospasia. We have no need for these 
terms. For the spine he constructed a series of small cups, a very 
inadequate method, and hence he accomplished no great results in 
spinal treatment, and had a very incorrect idea of it. His whole 
conception of pneumatic treatment was essentially incorrect; he 
regarded it as mere derivation, whereas its value lies in increased 
circulation and development of functions. This requires for the 
spine large cups, three or four of which would cover its whole length. 

Fig. 1 shows the glass box or recipient for the leg. Fig. 2 shows 
a metallic leg-box more generally used by Dr. Newell and others. 
Metallic boxes (generally made of tin) sometimes have one or more 
glass plates inserted to make the limb visible under treatment. Fig. 3 
shows the leg recipient in detached pieces, which may be telescoped 
together, making a convenient portable box, P B. Fig. 4 shows an 
arm-box of glass, and Fig. 5 a similar box of metal. iMg. 6 shows a 
glass box on the arm. Fig. 7 a metal box for the lower half of the 
body and limbs, very seldom used. Fig. 8 presents the pneumatic 
chamber or body-box as used by Dr. Newell, with the patient in it, 
and Fig. 9, Junod's application for the head and neck, which he calls 



CHAP. XIV.] PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 285 

a perideric derivator (perideric, around the neck). He does not 
clearly explain its structure, but it obviously requires an India-rubber 
exterior and a wire frame-work underneath it. I have seen no report 
of its use ; but properly constructed, it could be a powerful stimulant 
for the brain, which would be of great value for the insane and for 
impairment of the nervous system. I would however suggest a 
modification, leaving out the basilar region or neck, and simply in- 
closing the cranial surface as shown in this engraving. A sufficient 
amount of soft rubber, in a band at least half an inch thick, should 
be drawn around the head from forehead to the neck, and over this 
should be placed a cap of rubber or oiled silk, with a rubber band at 
its edge to clasp the soft mass in contact with the skin, the cap being 
sustained by a fabric of wire or elastic springs to prevent its pressure 
upon the head. This I believe would be sufficient generally, as all 
the surfaces concerned are normally 
convex ; but if, owing to irregular sur- 
faces, there is a lack of adaptation, 
the difficulty may be overcome by 
a leather strap buckled around it 
firmly, between which and the cap 
band any suitable wedges of wood or 
paper may be squeezed in to produce 
pressure at the proper spots. The 
exhausting tube connected with the 
air-pump may be attached at any 
convenient spot. 

This cranial cap would co-operate well with cupping on the cephalic 
region of the spine and on the shoulders. 

The somatic or whole-body treatment (soma, the body) by the 
pneumatic chamber is one of our most valuable resources, for it is a 
treatment of the entire person, addressed especially to the skin and 
therefore rousing by the law of sympathy the whole brain, and thus 
animating the whole constitution. In some respects it resembles the 
pneumatic treatment of the head, but it has this advantage that it 
includes the head and also covers the entire person, diffusing life 
everywhere. Hence I am sure that this will also be a measure of the 
highest rank of importance in lunatic asylums, while it has a vast 
range of power in the treatment of all diseases. 

The box for body treatment used by Dr. Newell is shown in Fig. 8. 
Junod's box is shown in Fig. 10 with the patient in it and the head 
included by a cap. The figure below shows another box for the 
whole person, to be used when the patient is lying in bed, which may 
also have a cap adjustment. There is but little occasion to use a 





2$6 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

box without including the head, and the attempt to include the head 
by means of a cap as proposed by Junod is evidently far inferior to 
the inclusion of the whole head in the box. These boxes separate 
at a joint in the upper part. 

A cheap and simple arrangement may be made by constructing a 
simple oblong box, large enough to 
hold the entire person. 

It should be pierced by a tube for 
respiration of the exterior air. This 
may be placed in any convenient 
slope for the comfort of the patient, 
and a glass plate fixed at the head 
for communication. The breathing-tube must be supplied with an 
interior cock to shut out the air, as without that the air would rush 
in whenever the patient takes his mouth from the tube to speak or 
relaxes his hold upon it. 

This method, the wmole body being included, has the merit of 
stimulating the head as well as the whole body, while the relatively 
greater pressure in the lungs promotes their expansion and forces 
the oxygen into the blood. 

It may be very advantageously combined with the use of oxygen or 
nitrous oxide gas. A compound gas one half atmospheric or ten 
parts, with four of oxygen and one of nitrous oxide, has a delightful 
restorative influence. Ozone also is valuable in many cases, and a 
variety of evaporating fluids for inhalation in this manner would give 
additional variety and power to the treatment. A coffin-shaped box, 
having less spare room in it would require less activity in the pumps. 
The reclining position of the patient would be comfortable for treat- 
ment. A simple oblong box (avoiding the coffin shape, with a flat 
lid) would be equally appropriate, but would require a little more 
exhaustion of air. Its cheapness and great practical value should 
recommend it to all. It may be made large enough to accommodate 
the corpulent and, partly filled by mattress and quilts when occupied 
by smaller persons, to diminish the amount of air to be handled, and 
a block of wood might be placed at the foot when persons of short 
statue were treated. The box might also be converted into a warm 
bath, salt bath or bath of medical vapors, and thus a great variety of 
treatment combined. 

Treatment by reduced pressure in the pneumatic box for the body 
produces a feeling of general glow and tendency to perspiration. 
The nervous system is exhilarated and all uncomfortable conditions 
of the brain are removed or greatly diminished. The pressure of air 
in the lungs expands the chest and promotes the absorption of mor- 



CHAP. XIV.] 



PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. 



287 



bid deposits, thereby giving great relief to pulmonary diseases. Thus 
it accomplishes an amount of general benefit to the patient which 
cannot be successfully imitated by any combination of medicines. 

The entire pneumatic treatment, whether by the large receivers 
or the cups, requires to be guided by observation of the changes of 
pressure. It is possible, but seldom advisable, to reduce the atmo- 
spheric pressure one half, which is the reduction of pressure that oc- 
curs at the height of about three and a half miles, and reduces greatly 
the strength of those who endure it. The difference of pressure is 
astonishing when we first learn its amount. Being nearly fifteen 
pounds to the square inch, a well-developed man is generally estimated 
to live unber a pressure of thirty thousand pounds. Hence every re- 
duction of pressure to the amount of one pound relieves him from a 
weight of two thousand pounds. In reducing pressure from one to 
five pounds, he is successively relieved of two, four, six, eight and ten 
thousand pounds of weight or pressure, and by this diminution of 
pressure the friction of the circulating blood is so greatly reduced 
as to make a hyperaemic circulation wherever we give this relief. 

The Manometer. — A pressure gauge (called a manometer) is 
necessary for scientific practice, and not knowing of any simple con- 
struction in use I have devised a manometer as follows : 

Many plans may be devised ; but I think a perpendicular or a hori- 
zontal manometer will be most convenient and satisfactory. The 
perpendicular manometer I would construct like a barometric tube — 
sufficiently long to mark, by the ascent of the mercury in it, the 
diminution of pressure. If the pressure were entirely removed by a 
vacuum, the mercury would ascend about thirty inches, varying a 
little with the weather. If half the pressure were removed, it would 
ascend about fifteen inches, and this would be sufficient as a measure 
for pneumatic practice. 

If the neck of the tube T be connected with the air- 
pump or cups by the rubber tube P and its lower end in- 
serted in a bottle or elongated tube B B with mercury at 
the bottom, the mercury will ascend in the tube about two 
inches for every pound of pressure removed by the air- 
pump from the tube, and if graded in inches it would be 
a sufficient exponent of the reduction of pressure. A 
length of fifteen to eighteen inches would be sufficient 
for utility. The whole might be fastened to a wooden 
bar and inserted in a block of wood as a base to stand on, 
or might be suspended by a hole in the top of the bar. 

On the horizontal plan we may have a manometer of great 
delicacy by the expansion of air in a long tube against a globule of 




288 PNEUMATIC SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIV. 

mercury as it is relieved from pressure. The horizontal tube may be 
three feet or longer, and capable of containing more than the bulb at 
its end. If of equal capacity, it would express a double expansion or 
loss of half the pressure ; safely fastened on a long bar of wood, it could 
be handled with facility. Each instrument would require to be 
graded upon trial, as the rate of expansion increases while the pres- 
sure is diminishing. 

P. S. — I am not able as yet, to announce any manufacture of the 
pneumatic apparatus, but will make <he announcement when a manu- 
facturer shall be found whom I can recommend. The selfish policy 
of Dr. N. and others, in endeavoring to hold a monopoly of pneu- 
matic treatment, to exaggerate its cost and conceal the manufacture 
of apparatus as something mysterious and difficult, has been an 
efficient cause in connection with the indolent illiberality of the 
colleges in depriving our country of this revolutionary benefaction. 
If those who wish the apparatus will send me their requests, it may 
help me to stimulate some manufacturer to supply the demand. My 
personal exertion and supervision will probably be necessary to the 
proper result. 



CHAPTER XV. 

PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 

Lumbo-sacral region — Importance of sexual development — Its effects — Injury 
by deficiency — Its influence for health and development — Conjugal relations — 
Centres of Love, spiritual and physical — Difference of the sexes — Sensibility 
of the womb — Pelvic disorders — Value of treatment on the back — Use of 
Helonias — Medical quackery — Inguinal region — Uterine region — Region of 
Sanity and Chastity — Sexual excitement, its control and its seat in the brain — 
Pathological cases illustrating its location — Influence of virility on Health and 
Vigor — Health as a co-operative — Centre of cerebellum as a reinforcement of 
Vitality — Treatment of the eyes — Anatomical references and correlative organs 
that sustain vision — Pathological relations to insanity and nausea — Morbid 
tendencies of the basilar and pelvic organs — The true nature of insanity — Its loca- 
tion in the brain and the body — How insanity is to be cured by treatment on the 
body and the brain — Counter-irritation on the back of the neck — The hypochon- 
driac region concerned — Location of nausea on the body — The colon, cholic, 
nausea, vomiting and diarrhoea — Nausea of pregnancy — Influence of nausea — 
Method of its treatment. 

Next to the region of Vital Force at the posterior summit of the 
thigh, we should consider the region of sexual life and development 
at the junction of the lumbar vertebrae with the pelvis in the portion 
called the sacrum — at the lower end of the backbone, to which the 
hips are united. 

Sexual development is essential to the completeness of every 
being. Sexual and parental relations require a higher development 
of the faculties, virtues and energies than a non-sexual existence. 
They require Adhesiveness, Familiarity, Love and delicate sympa- 
thies between two persons — consequently a higher development of 
refinement and virtue, to make the relation attractive, pleasant and 
permanent. The parental relation which follows sexual love demands 
an additional development of the virtues and energies to meet its 
requirements properly. Hence the mammalia or animals that 
nourish their young by the maternal milk and give them prolonged 
care stand at the head of the animal kingdom. 

It is, therefore, wisely ordered that sexual development in both 
man and woman, but more especially in woman, shall produce an 
increase of Vital Force, Adhesiveness, Love and Health according 
to pathognomic laws explained in my system of Anthropology. 

Such being the case, sexual development is one of the most impor- 
tant incidents of human life. It develops in both sexes refinement, 
poetic thought, imagination, amiability, social attraction, desire to 



29O PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. IV. 

please, health, animation and courage, which qualities produce a 
more perfect development of the person, a more vivid expression of 
the countenance, improvement in the voice, in the eye and in the 
manners. 

A retarded or unhealthy development of puberty is a great injury 
to the female constitution, and throughout life woman's health and 
happiness depend greatly on the sexual system. 

The sexual functions, therefore, cannot be neglected in nervauric 
treatment or in the conduct of life. The man or "woman who has 
not attained full sexual development is a barren object, like a plant 
which has never bloomed, which has neither the beauty and fragrance 
of flowers, nor the benevolence of fruit, nor the possibility of a new 
life springing from its own. It is a meagre and unripe condition of 
humanity in which the sexual evolution is hindered, as we see illus- 
trated in the difference between castrated and natural animals. 

Sexual development is the last and highest stage of growth, which 
helps to change the rude boy into the attractive and dignified gentle- 
man by perfecting the physical constitution and adding thereto the 
moral energy and warmth which fit him for society by attractive 
manners, and for the more important duties of life by an exaltation 
of the kindly emotions and the sense of duty and responsibility. It 
is true that mere sexuality as a controlling power becomes a vicious 
impulse in its abnormal action, but I speak of its normal action, 
according to the law by which the inferior sustain the higher faculties, 
as when Vital Force sustains Firmness and Heroism. 

In repressing sexual evolution, whether by castration or by rigid 
authority and ascetic manners, we exert a degrading influence, impair- 
ing social harmony and happiness, and bringing life nearer to a basis 
of absolute selfishness. We are marring the Divine image in man, 
and assuming superiority to the Divine wisdom, which has associated 
sexual attraction and pleasure with the most admirable sentiments of 
sympathy and love, so closely that when the former are suppressed 
the latter are greatly injured, as the sexual portion of the cerebellum 
and spinal cord exerts a powerful influence upon the circulation, 
growth and development of the brain, especially of its superior por- 
tion which contributes most to its activity and growth. Animals 
under the influence of sexual passion show great energy and courage 
(especially deer and horses). Human beings show not only energy 
and courage, but love, tenderness, refinement, imagination, intelli- 
gence, gaiety, grace, liberality, ambition and sense of honor. 

If the sexual element were expelled from the human constitution, 
society would lose its charm, and through selfishness and brutality 
would sink toward barbarism. Castration of animals produces a 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 20,1 

signal degeneration, as shown in the comparative measurement by 
Leuret and Lassaigne of the brains of stallions and geldings. The 
cerebrum which in ten stallions averaged 433 grammes measured 
only 419 grammes as the average of 21 geldings. The moral and 
physical inferiority of the human eunuch are well known. 

The superior development of the cerebrum and the superior evolu- 
tion of the higher sentiments are due to the superior and central por- 
tion of the cerebellum and upper portion of the spinal cord (the seats 
of the sexual faculty) ; and as the development of the sexual faculty 
has so happy an influence, it follows that its normal cultivation must 
increase the effect, while its abnormal repression must tend to pro- 
duce in some degree the effect of its destruction by castration. In 
the early portion of the century the vigorous ascetic superstition of 
Americans (under the name of Christianity) in New England had a 
very injurious effect upon the young in checking the normal develop- 
ment of their emotions and manners, impairing the health and beauty 
•of both sexes — while the rebound of nature in those who escaped 
from the tyranny led them into the most destructive excesses. 

The normal influence of sexuality is shown in the superior lon- 
gevity and virtue of the married over the unmarried classes. This, 
however, does not lead to the inference that unlimited or intemperate 
sexual indulgence is harmless far from it. The general law of the 
brain and body is that the lower faculties, which are the radicals or 
physical supports of the higher, though indispensable to normal 
development, require to be strictly governed by the higher. But they 
cannot be repressed with impunity. As the repression of the mus- 
cular system impairs the force of character, the repression of the 
sexual system impairs the cerebral development and the nobler 
elements of character ; for without the sexual system that vivid daily 
exchange of love which sustains both health and virtue would be 
much feebler. 

Love is the world's saving, uplifting and perpetuating power, and 
in the sexual plan of humanity the Divine wisdom has secured its 
permanent presence and power. All attempts to amend or control 
the Divine plan arise from a lack of true religion, — a lack of the 
reverence, love and faith which appreciate the Divine plan of nature, 
allowing the entrance of censorious disgust where admiration of the 
Divine plan should exist. Actuated by this disgust, religious sects 
have assumed to crush human sexuality as a noxious weed, and com- 
pensate for its absence by extra cultivation of religious sentiments. 
The sincerity and fervor of their efforts cannot be denied; but they 
have fallen short of the physical, social and moral development to 
which they aspire, for they are thwarting a plan that is wiser than 



292 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

human inventions. It is impossible that eunuchs or ascetic celibates 
should embody the highest type of humanity, either physically or 
morally, which is developed only through the predestined plan of love 
and parentage. 

These considerations are not foreign to the subject of nervauric 
treatment, for it includes the sexual functions, and they are a very 
important part of the vital forces that maintain health and happiness. 
Love is correlative with health and perfection ; it is attracted by 
physical and moral perfection in another, and it is the most powerful 
means of developing that perfection in its object. All the virtue of 
which man is capable is developed in the home in which he enjoys 
the sunshine of a woman's love ; and all the happy energies, virtues 
and health of which a woman is capable are developed in the warmth 
of a devoted husband's love. This love, like all that constitutes 
humanity, has both its physical and its spiritual operation, and is 
beneficial and necessary alike in both. Perfection is not attainable 
without the full development, and the normal life of the fully 
developed, in a perfectly harmonious conjugal relation. Such rela- 
tions as the world goes are seldom entirely harmonious, but a full 
development of the love nature in either party goes far to overcome 
all evils and secure contentment and health, where, otherwise, there 
might be gloom and misery. The refined and tender gallantry 
developed in man by sexual love is necessary to the happiness of 
woman, and the all-yielding, all-devoted sentiment which it develops in 
woman, not only gives to her husband the cheerful content which is 
necessary to perfect health, but develops in herself a happiness and 
a moral strength which sustain the physical constitution and resist 
the decay of age. 

Love is the cause of the conjugal union, and such unions are 
happy whenever a sufficient amount of love exists in the parties, 
even though they are not exactly adapted to each other. The adapta- 
tion which makes the union perfectly happy depends upon the law 
of correlation, which is explained in my system of Anthropology, 
especially by Pathognomy. The simplest statement of the law is 
that each faculty of one must find its gratification in the other. 
Pathognomy enables us to determine the adaptation with great 
accuracy. The fanciful doctrines of Dr. W. Byrd Powell on this 
subject had some foundation in fact, but were highly exaggerated and 
distorted views of the human constitution, like most of his specula- 
tions. They were based upon crude and unscientific conceptions of 
human temperaments. 

Sexual love has two controlling centres : the lumbo-sacral, which 
controls and sustains the sexual organs ; and the mammae, on the 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 293 

front of the chest, which correspond to the organ of Love in the 
brain (just behind the coronal suture). The lower organ inspires the 
energy of passion, the upper produces admiration, sympathy, tender- 
ness, devotion, service and fidelity, which in their highest degree 
might be called worship. The familiarity and the devotion are not 
exclusively sexual, but their chief manifestations are found between 
those of opposite sex. In parental love the difference in sex has less 
influence, though certainly not absent. 

The superior love has an animating, inspiring influence over the 
whole moral nature ; for love heightened to adoration is the essence 
of all religion, and the inferior faculty has a similar energizing in- 
fluence on the whole physical constitution, and these two elements. 
are so closely linked by the Creator as to make their joint develop- 
ment a necessity, for neither can attain its maximum power without 
the full development of both. 

The larger development of the mammae in women corresponds to 
their higher development in love and their consequent superior con- 
trol by the moral nature, which is too obvious to require illustration. 
It is so very marked that the same exterior configuration of the head 
will produce better results in women than in men, because in woman 
there is a greater activity in the coronal region of the brain than in 
man. The same external form of skull which in a male would 
authorize me to pronounce him most probably a criminal would not 
authorize such an opinion if it were that of a female. 

The sexual organs in a woman are very closely associated with the 
development of the mammae, and the loving emotions of which they 
are the corporeal seat. Pregnancy brings on the development of the 
mammae and the secretion of milk, and stimulation of the mammae 
promotes the development of menstruation. 

The sexual conformation is different in man, and it has a less inti- 
mate association with the higher love (which is explained by the laws 
of Pathognomy). Hence, in woman love is more spiritual and de- 
voted — in man more physical, passionate and impulsive. But in 
each sex its intimate relation to Vital Force is apparent, since the 
sexual apparatus is in various degrees associated by its nerves with 
the whole lumbar and sacral regions upon which the lower limbs 
depend. Hence in the sexual derangements of women (and such 
derangements are pretty sure to follow unnatural repression or inhar- 
monious life) great weakness of the limbs results, and sedentary 
habits (if not absolute repose) become necessary, while the entire 
nervous system is greatly deranged. 

Irritation, inflammation or any form of active disease develops the 
constitutional influence of the locality in which it occurs, drawing 



294 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

the vital forces in that direction and exhausting opposite regions. 
Pelvic diseases in women, affections of the womb, are accompanied 
by great impairment of the nervous system, producing a state of 
extreme excitability, impairment of memory, intellectual power, force 
of will and general brain power — thus increasing the tendency to 
melancholy and insanity. In this impaired state of the nervous sys- 
tem, slight causes produce great disturbances, and every function has 
more or less disturbance, producing apparent or quasi disease when 
there is really no organic affection, and the diseases often have sudden 
or magical cures. 

The lower limbs being dependent on the same portion of the 
spinal cord always show weakness, and severe exertion of the lower 
limbs especially in walking up stairs is seldom well borne by women. 
The calorific function, which is so near the womb, is disturbed in 
various ways, but especially in irregularity. Flashes of alternate 
heat and coldness are common, especially at the menopause (cessa- 
tion of menstruation). Respiration is also much affected, which is 
located next to Calorification, and pelvic excitability is shown in the 
young by laughter and screaming. Flashes of heat, difficulty of 
breathing and a frantic eagerness for fresh air are often seen. 

These phenomena are explained according to Sarcognomy by the 
location of the womb in the body, and by reference to the head we 
find the uterine region located near Ardor, Respiration, Childishness, 
Idiocy, Insanity, Amativeness and the tendency to dissipation. The 
medical antagonist that quiets the uterine region is the Bromide of 
Ammonium, which is # far superior to Bromide of Potassium. 

The womb is such a centre of excitability, sympathy and sensitive- 
ness that it is easily affected by a thousand physical and moral 
causes, and hence there are very few women who have positive 
sexual health. The great majority of females need treatment for 
some form of sexual derangement. Even many who think them- 
selves in health (because they do not know what perfect health is) 
need this nervauric treatment, which produces far better results than 
the common drug practice. The old style of drug practice on women 
was so crude, so barbarous and so wretchedly meagre in its resources 
as to be responsible for a vast amount of human suffering, and its 
consequences transmitted to this generation. 

In the majority of females, whether married or single, five or ten 
minutes of dispersive passes on the Jumbo-sacral. region will help to 
remove morbid conditions. Following this, the application of the 
hand to vitalize that region will have an admirable restorative effect. 
Nature has furnished us, in the Helontas dioica, a nearly specific 
tonic for this region, and the fluid extract if applied as an embroca- 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 295 

tion on the skin of the lumbosacral region or used as a vaginal in- 
jection diluted with thirty or forty parts of tepid water will power- 
fully aid the restoration of health to the sexual apparatus of woman. 
It has, moreover, a fine influence on the brain, the stomach and the 
entire constitution, and ten or twenty drop doses by the stomach will 
produce its constitutional effects on all parts if used from one to four 
times daily. A popular knowledge and a general use of this remedy 
would have clone more for the health of women than all that has been 

1 done by the medical profession, with the exception of the modern 
treatment of enlightened and liberal physicians. 

In addition to invigorating the lumbo-sacral region, it is almost 

s^ always quite necessary to use dispersive manipulations on the in- 
guinal region or seat of sexual profluvia. This is especially necessary 
in cases of menorrhagia and dysmenorrhcea ; and in males, in cases of 
spermatorrhoea or sexual weakness and relaxation. I know of no 
cases in which I have deemed the stimulation of the inguinal region 
\S necessary, exc ept in amenorrhcea, in which it might be roused with 
the lumbo-sacral region, but not alone. The trouble from clysmen- 
'*■ orrhoea_atj:he catamenial periods is in general easily relieved by one 
r more doses of Hayden's Viburnum Compound, which should be 
kept on hand by women who need it.* 

The uterine region above the pubes and below the umbilicus also 
needs stimulation only in cases of retarded development or amenor- 
rhoea. In the majority of cases it needs dispersive treatment to pro- 
cure nervous tranquillity — as it is the seat of that excitability which 
causes excessive emotional activity and at length appears as hysteria. 
Hysteria will be readily controlled by dispersive passes from the 
uterine region upward and backward, for it is a condition of Impressi- 
bility which readily responds to nervauric treatment. I do not deny 
however that the uterine region may receive an increment of health 
from the hand of a good healer, especially if the other hand be kept 
on the region of Health on the shoulder blade. 

In tranquillizing the sexual system the best treatment is by disper- 
sive passes over the uterine and inguinal regions upward and back- 
ward toward the armpits — then placing the hands just below the 
arms, on the side of the chest which covers the region of Mental 
Soundness and Tranquillity, which has been marked on the bust as the 
region of Sanity, — a region antagonistic to all abnormal excitement 
and nervous depression. The posterior part of this region running 
into Coolness may properly be called the region of Chastity, as it 

* In the same group with Helonias may be placed Caulophyllum, Cimicifuga^ 
or Macrotys, Aletris farinosa, Mitchella repens, and Viburnum prunifolium ( black \ 
haw), — all of which are valuable uterine tonics. 






296 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

antagonizes sexual excitement. In cases of inordinate sexual desire 
with nymphomania or priapism, the region of Chastity should be 
excited, and dispersive means used at the uterine inguinal and lumbo- 
sacral regions. The dispersive treatment may always be reinforced 
by bathing or sponging with hot water. This sexual excitement has 
its cerebral seat at and below the occipital knob, in the superior and 
central portions of the cerebellum, at which location the sexual 
power may be reinforced by stimulation, as the sexual excitement 
may be subdued by the application of hot water or by the pi'olonged 
application of ice or of ether, which produces great coldness by its 
evaporated. 

Sexual functions are certainly performed by the sexual organs, as 
forcible motion is effected by muscles, but in each case the controll- 
ing power is in the nervous system. The sexual parts depend upon 
their nerves, they upon the spinal cord, and the spinal cord upon the 
brain. Hence strong sexual excitement may be produced by a 
thought, but congested or hyperemic conditions of the sexual organs, 
even to priapism, may fail to excite any sexual passion, as its seat is 
really cephalic. On the other hand, the most morbid or destructive 
conditions of the sexual organs do not destroy the sexual inclinations. 
They have been manifested by women (according to Richerand and 
Gall) in whom the womb was entirely absent, and others in whom the 
womb and vagina were in the last stages of disease. Prof. Caillot 
relates one of these cases in which the womb was entirely absent.* 

* M. Serres reports a case of apoplexy with priapism, in which the autopsy 
revealed inflammation of the central superior portion of the cerebellum, extending 
along the connecting fibres to the quadrigeminal bodies. 

In another case (of a robust day-laborer) of apoplexy and satyriasis, with 
repeated emissions, the cerebrum was natural, but the cerebellum exhibited the 
most extreme inflammation in the central superior portion (looking as if it had been 
macerated in blood), and there was a small cavity in the right hemisphere. 

In a third case of apoplexy (of a man forty-six years of age), accompanied by 
convulsive movements and satyriasis, with heat and swelling of the genitals, the 
cerebellum was large and its upper surface of a lively red, indicating inflammation, 
which extended along the process to the quadrigeminal bodies, which were also 
inflamed. This inflammation of the upper surface of the cerebellum was highly- 
advanced along its superior central portion, in which cavities were just beginning 
to be formed. 

In the fourth case, of a man named Gambier, apoplectic and unconscious, the 
limbs of the right side were entirely paralyzed, and this was explained in the 
autopsy by the effusion three inches long and one inch wide in the left corpus 
striatum. The limbs of the right side presented spasmodic contractions, and 
priapism continued to death. The latter was explained by the condition of the 
cerebellum, "the cerebellum, and especially the superior vermicular process, pre- 
sented numerous little effusions of the size of a grain of hemp-seed." 

These and other similar cases show as clearly as Pathology can that the central 
and superior portions of the cerebellum are concerned in the sexual functions, and 
the seat of inflammation in priapism or satyriasis. Inflammation and destruction 
of other portions of the cerebellum proceed most commonly to paralysis, but with- 
out sexual disturbance. 

After I had located the sexual function by experiments below the occipital 
knob, it was very satisfactory to find that Pathology so clearly confirmed what I 
had discovered. 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 297 

It is not merely in reference to the sexual organs themselves that 
we are interested in the lumbo-sacral region of virility, but in refer- 
ence to general health and development also. 

When we are stimulating the region of Health on the shoulders or 
on the head, we add a large amount of physical power by acting on 
the region of Vital Force on the thigh, or on the base of the brain 
behind the mastoid process — an addition which may be very impor- 
tant to those exhausted by disease or those naturally deficient in vital 
force. 

In like manner the lumbo-sacral region may be used for the rein- 
forcement of vitality as a controlling centre for the pelvis and lower 
limbs. Its influence is not like the region of Vital Force, concentred 
on the muscular and locomotive energies, but extends to the entire 
nervous system, like the developing influence of puberty, which in 
man is probably effected through the seminal secretion. Sexually 
speaking, its influence develops not voluptuousness, but virility. 
Therapeutically, it is reanimating alike to the nervous and muscular 
systems. Hence the combination of lumbo-sacral virility with the 
animating Health of the shoulders — either on the body or on the 
head — is often the very best thing that can be done to develop 
normal and useful life. 

In rousing the various organs which need restoration, it is expe- 
dient to develop simultaneously the influence of Health which always 
makes a beneficial regulative influence. Thus in stimulating the 
gastric region with one hand, if the other be located on Health, the 
resulting effect on the stomach is very beneficial — the restorative 
influence of Health being sent to it as the soothing influence of 
morphine goes to the organ that is in pain. 

When organs are languid or lifeless from weakness or exhaustion, 
the lumbo-sacral or cerebellic influence may be used to assist in their 
restoration. Thus in almost all cases of weakness of the eyes they 
may be invigorated or reanimated by placing the fingers of one hand 
above and below the occipital knob, on the centre of the cerebellum, 
and the other across the brows. 

The precise central seat of the sense of vision is at the base of 
the front lobe just above the pupil of the eye, and if the fingers or 
thumb and fingers are applied to this spot it will stimulate the visual 
power, while the animation derived from the centre of the cerebellum 



In a case of extreme nymphomania in a woman, Josephine Dubourg, lasting 
through many years, and accompanied by insatiable excesses, the autopsy showed 
what might have been expected, — chronic induration of the central portion of the 
cerebellum, with some small incipient ulcerations; all around this central portion 
the cerebellum was inflamed and harder than natural, and the arteries of the 
cerebellum were unusually developed, as well as the arteries of the pelvis. 



298 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

will greatly increase the effect. But as all the convolutions of the 
brows contribute to aid the sense of vision, it is well to extend the 
outer margin of the hand across the brows. 

Perhaps the anatomical arrangement may help to illustrate this 
result. The sexual portion of the cerebellum is connected by con- 
tinuous fibres called the processus e cerebello with the quadrigeminal 
bodies which are the origin of the optic nerve, and are called the 
optic lobes, and in applying the fingers as above described this whole 
tract from the cerebellum to the retinas is included between them. 

The visual power is also directly aided by the correlative organs of 
the perceptive convolutions, which occupy a space at the junction of 
Adhesiveness and Combativeness, which I have marked Aggressive- 
ness. All anterior organs are dependent upon their correlative 
posterior organs for vigor, without which they are passive and defi- 
cient in strength. When Aggressiveness is excited, it produces a 
disposition to use the eyes, a curiosity to look and energy to stare, 
giving great power to impress and great vigor to the eyes. The 
region marked Aggressiveness on my bust is that portion of the 
brain called the gyrus angularis, which Ferrier claims to be the seat 
of vision as determined by experiments on birds. I cannot recognize 
it as the seat of vision in man, for I control vision by experiments on 
the brow and find it there psychometrically, in the only region of the 
brain which can be called intellectual ; but that the support of the 
visual power requires the co-operation of its correlative in the occiput, 
and that without this support the visual power might fail, in accord- 
ance with a general law, I believe true. The power of the eye has 
its highest development in adhesive or attractive persons, and the 
courageous or combative men, who with these powers may either 
attract or control and overawe by a glance ; and animals feel their 
power as well as human beings. A feeble and timid character can- 
not reciprocate an earnest gaze. A strong character enforces his 
personality by a look. When Col. H. attempted a slight familiarity 
with Gen. Washington, he was abashed by a look. 

To strengthen the eyes by the Aggressive region, we place the 
fingers on the occiput, on the level of the top of the ear about two 
inches behind it. The eyes may also be invigorated by the lower 
occipital region at the median line (the region of Arrogance) which 
coincides with Aggressiveness. Hence in treating the eyes from 
the occiput, the fingers should extend from the centre of the cere- 
bellum above the occipital knob. This portion of the lower occiput 
called the Cuneus has been claimed by some pathologists as more 
truly the seat of vision than the gyrus angularis. Both are right. 
These are coinciding convolutions as explained by Pathognomy, and 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 299 

both contribute to the strength of the eyes. The operator should 
give attention to both. But that they are the absolute and entire 
seat of vision was, I think, refuted by Goltz when he exhibited a dog 
in which these convolutions were destroyed, but the dog was not 
blind. 

Let us now consider the pelvic region in its pathological relations, 
which are of great importance. 

The lower margin of the pelvis has pathological tendencies as 
strongly marked as the hypochondriac regions — the hypochondriac 
influence being adverse to physical health and vigor, the pelvic to 
mental soundness and the strength of the nervous system. I must 
repeat again to avoid misconception that no organ is to be regarded 
as an unhealthy or injurious element of the constitution — all organs 
being constructed for necessary purposes. But such tendencies 
arise from negative causes — from the absence of the controlling 
forces which keep the organs in their proper sphere. The evil in- 
fluence connected with any organ is that which arises from its un- 
controlled predominance in the constitution, and they arise whenever 
its development is excessive or its antagonists are deficient. 

The sexual organs, for example, produce in their excesses an utter 
prostration of the nervous system, of which we may see a terrible 
picture in medical writings upon masturbation, licentiousness, sper- 
matorrhoea and sexual diseases. The mental and physical prostra- 
tion that arise from such causes are due partly to the intense sensi- 
bility in the pelvis and hypochondria, partly to the character of the 
secretions, which are extremely exhaustive, and partly to the in- 
fluence of the excretions of the rectum and bladder — partly, also, 
to the anti-cephalic character of the leg and foot in association with 
the sacral region of the spinal column. 

Mental derangement, shown as monomania, idiocy, melancholy, 
peevishness, ill temper, childishness, hallucination, etc., depends 
primarily upon the failure of blood supply and circulation in the 
brain, which becomes enfeebled like all other organs under such 
failure, and becomes softened in structure so as to be incapable of 
any vigorous action. The tendency of all the basilar organs in pre- 
dominance is in some degree insane, as they divert the circulation 
from the brain, and the majority of the human race are and ever 
have been very far from Sanity. It is but a few years since the most 
enlightened and advanced nation on earth was engaged in the horrible 
insanity of civil war, and this homicidal insanity still prevails among 
all the great nations. 

While all the basilar forces in predominance are insane in various 
degrees, the maximum insane tendency is in front of the vertical 



300 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

line between the front and back, where the sensitive excitability 
attains its maximum, and where we apply the term Insanity, because 
that is its effect in predominance. Stimulating the base of the tem- 
poro-sphenoidal region through this location under the jaw enables 
an impressible individual to realize the conditions of idiocy and 
insanity. 

The excessive excitability and irritability of this region, operating 
on an enfeebled circulation, causes the most extreme irregularities in 
different parts of the brain, — congestion, hyperemia, anemia, etc., — 
destroying the mental balance and soundness of judgment, as when 
one is under the influence of extreme despondency, hallucination or 
rage. The slightest influences overpower the mental energy of any 
organ in this condition, or excite other organs to wild excess, and 
under the influence of unbalanced feelings the judgment loses all 
correctness. 

The development from which this excitability comes is in the basis 
of the brain, at the entrance of the carotid arteries, and its external 
indication is under the jaw, where the carotids and jugulars pass, and 
where the superior cervical ganglion controls the anterior cerebral 
circulation. The corresponding location on the body is at the peri- 
neum between the thighs — a centre of depraving influences. Here 
we have the passional force and the turbulence of the thighs ; the 
hostile passions of the buttocks ; the stupefying influence of urine 
and faeces ; the brutality of the leg and the mental torpor of the foot, 
which belong to the sacral region, with the passional excitability of 
the sexual organs, which is most conspicuous in hysteria — all of 
which are intensified in effect by conditions a little higher up — the 
prostrating melancholy of the upper inguinal region, and the intense 
nausea of the sacro-iliac junction. Under these combined influences 
we have every degree of mental prostration, — dementia, gloom, rage, 
idiocy and incapacity to entertain a rational conception. 

The therapeutic consequences of this discovery are immense, and I 
earnestly entreat the superintendents of insane asylums to test the 
discovery in their treatment of the insane. 

The therapeutic indication is, that when we can transfer the vital 
action from the base of the pelvis, or insane region, to the region of 
sanity on the thorax under the arms, or on the spine at the dorsal 
summit, Insanity will be cured if the transfer is maintained, whether 
by nervauric, electric or pneumatic power. 

The cure may be effected by restoring the pelvic organs to health 
— securing free and healthy action of the bowels by soothing, altera- 
tive aperients ; restoring the womb chiefly by Helonias and Cimici- 
fuga, and the urinary organs by Hydrangea and Epigea (to which 



CHAP. XV.] PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 3OI 

flowers of Lavender make a good addition), and sending vitality 
from the perineum to the region of Sanity by electric currents, the 
patient sitting, as on a saddle, on the positive sponge, or a metallic 
tube or rod, or a seat with a metallic centre-piece like a saddle, while 
negative sponges of large" size are applied in the axilla, and occasion- 
ally on the summit of the dorsal region. Of course, no one would 
expect a chronic condition to be removed by a single application, or 
by anything less than a protracted treatment. In some few cases 
the effects would be prompt and marvellous — in the majority they 
would come slowly, at least as long as any organic derangement in 
the body remained. 

In giving the nervauric treatment, passes should be made from the 
coccyx to the summit of the spine, and from the groin and inside 
of the thighs to the axilla. At the same time the Hygienic current 
should be used, for general health is needed to sustain the health of 
the brain. That is given by a current from the hypochondria to the 
centre of the shoulder-blade, or by passes in that direction. The 
positive pole should be applied at and behind the location marked 
Disease. 

But may not Insanity be treated directly at the brain ? Assuredly 
it may. Gentle currents may be passed from the under-jaw space, 
just in front of the carotids and jugulars, to two corresponding points 
— one on the sagittal suture, where the organ of Firmness is located ; 
and the other parallel thereto, on the temporal arch in the middle of 
the parietal bone, its central point of ossification in the fetus and 
infant, marked on the bust as Sanity. To produce the best effect, the 
current should be passed through the hand of the operator. 

The current may be from a battery of five to ten cells, applied on 
both sides of the head simultaneously by large sponge rheophores, or 
may be the primary current of the common portable battery moder- 
ated by large sponges or by passing through a strip of wet cloth long 
enough to supply the electric resistance and moderate the current. 
The magnetic current from my new electro-magnetic apparatus will 
produce the most satisfactory effects. 

In nervauric treatment, passes from the region of Insanity to the 
crown of the head, and the application of the hand on the hygienic 
region would be proper. At the same time dispersive passes down- 
ward on the neck over the insane region along the jugular vein and 
similar downward passes on the back of the neck would be proper. 

There is an insane region, externally located on the back of the 
neck, on the median line just below the basis of the cranium, on 
which dispersive passes are beneficial, and on which physicians have 
often found counter-irritation very useful in cerebral disorders. 



3<D2 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

Setons. blisters and irritating plasters on this location withdraw 
diseased conditions from the brain. The brain may be greatly 
soothed and benefited in morbid conditions by applying the positive 
sponge on the insane location at the lower angle of the jaw just in 
front of the lower part of the ear, or on the cervical location just 
mentioned (which affects its posterior half), the negative being 
applied at the shoulder or axilla, or in the hand, or, if there is an 
inflammatory condition, on the tibial surface of the leg. I have 
observed in a recent book by Dr. Thos. Dowse of Edinburgh, that 
he has discovered the advantage of applying the positive sponge on 
the location mentioned on the back of the neck. 

The hypochondriac region co-operates efficiently with the lower 
pelvic in producing insane conditions. Hence it is highly important 
to rectify the conditions of the liver and stomach. The liver, espe- 
cially, has much to do with mental depression and mania. 

There is another pelvic influence or function which has been up to 
the present time almost as much of a mystery as Insanity. I refer 
to Nausea, — a condition which has never been located or explained. 
Sarcognomy shows its location at the sacro-iliac symphysis externally, 
which corresponds internally with the two ends of the colon, its 
origin from the ileum on the right side and its sigmoid flexure, con- 
necting with the rectum on the left. The colon is the chief seat of 
nausea. Its disorders, called colics, are characterized chiefly by 
nausea and vomiting, as well as great mental depression, which is 
explained by the location of melancholy just in front of the ileum. 

Lead cholic, which is accompanied by an irritated and contracted 
condition of the colon, develops the functions shown by Sarcognomy, 
melancholy and defecation, or desire to empty the bowels, being in 
front of the colon and nausea behind it. Hence the attack comes 
on with desponding wretchednesss and mental prostration, and a 
nausea which increases till it produces vomiting, while the desire to 
evacuate the bowels is tormenting. The nervous depression is so 
great as sometimes to result in paralysis of the upper or lower limbs 
or tongue, or of the forearm. The whole pelvic region has this 
paralyzing tendency, which is at its maximum in the anterior part of 
the insane region. The pain extends to the small of the back, and 
produces great restlessness. Vomiting gives only a momentary 
relief — -the depression and weakness continue. 

Bilious colic is also accompanied by nausea and vomiting. In 
both affections there is no elevation of temperature, but rather a 
coldness, as this irritation diverts from the calorific region, whereas 
the irritations of the ileum, which is in the calorific region, are 
accompanied by high fever. The existence of feverish heat and 



CHAP. XV. PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 303 

thirst distinguishes inflammations of the small intestines from colic 
or affection of the colon. Diarrhoea and cholera, which are affections 
chiefly of the colon, are also accompanied by nausea and vomiting — 
sometimes quite protracted. 

Nausea and vomiting arise from all severe affections of the colon, 
and may even be caused by harsh purgatives. Obstruction of the 
colon by irritating fecal matter or by strangulated hernia necessarily 
results in nausea and vomiting, and even an adjacent irritation may 
extend to the colon and produce nausea, as we observe in the early 
stages of pregnancy. The external location of Nausea, the sacro- 
iliac symphysis, corresponds to the internal iliac artery for the pelvic 
region, from which the pudic artery proceeds, supplying the repro- 
ductive organs, and establishing a vascular as well as nervous con- 
nection, and connection of proximity wich the colon and rectum. 

With this location of nausea, what are its physiological and thera- 
peutic bearings ? Physiologically, its influence is prostrating to the 
brain, but not to physical life. Emetics are depressing, but not 
dangerous. 

Animal life of a gloomy character is promoted by nausea, and as 
everything in the sacral region has a relation to the lower limbs, 
especially the legs, nausea is a powerful means of subduing inflam- 
matory and irritated conditions of the brain and chest, though not 
so comfortable as the tibial region of the leg. Hence it is that 
nausea is a familiar reliance in treating the lungs to take down in- 
flammatory conditions and promote expectoration: — most expector- 
ants are nauseants. 

Therapeutically, we learn that nausea is to be treated on the lower 
part of the back by vigorous dispersive passes which may be assisted 
by upward dispersive passes in front from the same level — from the 
hypogastric and hypochondriac regions. 

When this principle is understood, sea-sickness will be conquered 
by positive currents from the region of Nausea to Health — to the 
top of the shoulder and to the upper frontal surface of the chest as 
low as the nipple, if the immediate cause be removed. 

As the philosophy of Insanity and Nausea has never before been 
known or suspected, I would request those who verify these principles 
in treatment to send me a report of their results. 

The medical treatment of nausea should be by the sedative agents 
which diminish the sensibility of the lower abdominal region. This 
is the character of the bromides, which have been found most useful. 
The stimulation of the brain is also important, and belladonna has 
been made accessory. Champagne, coffee and tea are beneficial, and 
I have no doubt bromo-caffein would be serviceable. 



3O4 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. [CHAP. XV. 

In sea-sickness, or the nausea produced in a swing, we have the 
violent disturbance of the pelvic region by the momentum of the 
bowels continually changing as by a churning motion, which is of 
course diminished by lying flat on the back without elevating the 
head. It is this impact by a churning motion on the pelvic organs 
which I regard as the cause of sea-sickness. 

As the cerebral location of Nausea is at the upper part of the 
cerebellum on each side of Virility, I would recommend its treatment 
by dispersive passes from this location, or by cooling applications 
such as a current of hot water, which leaves coolness as a conse- 
quence, or evaporating ether, which is very efficient, or pounded ice, 
which is certainly effective. I have not tried the local applications, 
but from my knowledge of the functions I am quite sure they will 
be effectual. 

It may be that cooling applications to the back of the pelvis 
would be equally effective. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 

Deleuze and Esdaile's Works. 

Its marvellous phenomena — Opposition of materialism — Its unscientific character 

— Its neglect by the medical profession and cultivation by Egyptian priests — Sar- 
cognomy — Deleuze's "Practical Instruction" — His erroneous theories corrected — 
His formula for magnetizing — The scientific method of producing the results — The 
localities on the head and the body — The evil effects of the unscientific method — 
Effects of the downward passes — Superiority of the upward — Nature of the mag- 
netic seance — Blind empiricism — The improper method of removing pain or 
disease — Prevalence of contagion — Use of the breath and of water — Method of 
waking — Use of magnetized water — The baquet — Exalted powers of Somnam- 
bulism — Their source and philosophy — Explanation of the power of operators 
and best methods — Blind routine of magnetizers — Failure of the medical profes- 
sion — Hartshorn's translation, its valuable testimony — Mechanical ideas of the 
medical profession — How to produce insensibility — Testimony of Cuvier, La Place 
and Georget — Corroboration by Psychometry — Treatment of Dr. Elliotson in 
London — Cloquet's operation in the magnetic state — Clairvoyance of Miss 
Brackett — Duty of the disciples of truth. 

Value of Dr. Esdaile's "Mesmerism in India" — His numerous cases and liberal 
sentiments — Facility of the practice in India — A mesmeric magician — Testimony 
of the Catholic Church to the truth of animal magnetism and prohibition of its 
practice — Dr. Esdaile's first experiments on a criminal patient described — Great 
increase of impressibility — Therapeutic benefit of the trance — Description and 
explanation of the processes used in magnetizing — Of catalepsy and its removal — 
Intellectual and unintellectual methods — Demonstrations made upon a blind man. 

— Controlling his subjects in court — Practical value of Sarcognomy in India. 

The nervauric treatment of disease, heretofore practised under 
the name of Animal Magnetism, which was so famously illustrated 
by Mesmer as to cause many to give it the name of Mesmerism, has 
achieved a vast amount of curative results in disease, and marvellous 
phenomena in the development of human intuition through Clair- 
voyance and Somniloquence. The vast amount of its benevolence 
and the jealous hostility of the great mass of the medical profession, 
notwithstanding its well attested cures and the numerous learned 
and brilliant volumes in which its claims have been set forth, are a 
sad illustration of the moral condition of the present century. 

A great part of this opposition has been owing to the resolute, un- 
yielding spirit of materialism which has dominated in all scientific 
circles ; but a considerable part, also, has been due to the fact that 
Animal Magnetism, as taught and practised, has been purely empiri- 
cal and has never attained the status of a science or been cultivated 
in a thoroughly scientific manner. But the medical profession has 
done almost nothing to remedy the defect and trace the phenomena 



306 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

produced to their causes. They have shamefully neglected and dis- 
couraged therapeutic magnetism, because it could be practised by 
persons without a medical education, whom they regarded as ignoble 
rivals, and confined their attention to the easy and simple processes 
for producing somnambulism, carefully avoiding the production of 
clairvoyance and the wonderful cures that are effected with the 
operator's hand. Since the revival of hypnotism at Paris, their sole 
purpose appears to be, not to treat rational beings in a rational and 
benevolent manner, but to degrade their patients into the passive and 
credencive condition in which they are controlled by a word, — a 
process which I have never adopted because it destroys the scientific 
value of our experiments and degrades the subject, and certainly does 
not elevate the operator. 

The marvellous effects produced on the human constitution were 
never traced to their source in the brain and the body ; and as when 
the causes of the phenomena are unknown and unsought, science 
does not exist, the whole subject becomes puzzling, embarrassing 
and repellent to minds accustomed to the mastery of positive 
science. 

If the rationale of clairvoyance and somniloquence had been dis- 
covered, if the philosophy of magnetic cures had been made clear, 
and if the marvellous powers exercised over the magnetic subject 
had been used to unfold the mysteries and localities of the vital 
forces, so as to give command of all vital functions, — philosophic 
thinkers would have found in the science an irresistible attraction. 

To me it appears really a marvellous degree of thoughtlessness or 
stupidity that the cultivators of Animal Magnetism, having under 
their manipulation the most sensitive individuals in society, should 
never, even by accident, have found any difference in the vital 
functional relations of the different parts of the body. It is also 
marvellous that electro-therapeutists should have been equally dull. 
It is apparent in both cases that the average cultivator of science is 
entirely preoccupied with what he has been taught, and very rarely 
disposed to look for any new truth or even conscious of the vast 
extent of undeveloped science that demands our attention. 

Even the ancient Egyptians, encumbered as they were by supersti- 
tion, were more observant in this matter than the moderns encum- 
bered by college dogmas. 

A memorial tablet of stone (as stated by Franz Lambert) in the 
National Library at Paris tells in beautiful hieroglyphics the story of 
the healing of Bentrosch, the sister-in-law of Ramses XII, an 
Egyptian king. Being taken very ill in Buchtan, and the local 
physicians unable to relieve her, the king ordered his physicians to 



CHAP. 



XVI.] 



REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 



307 





send a man who was "master of his will and master of his fingers," 
a very good direction. Thotemhebi was sent, and when he arrived, 
pronounced Bentrosch obsessed, and endeavored to conquer the 
obsession but failed. After eleven years more without relief, a 
request was sent to Egypt for a god, and the king went to the 
temple of the deity, " Chonso-nofer-hotef," asking him to give his 
agent his blessing or power. This was done by the blessing passes 
in the following form, four times. The physician, thus prepared, 
went to Buchtan and healed the possessed Bentrosch by 
the blessing passes in the following form, called SA. The 
pass is made over the backhead tow- 
ards the shoulders, as shown by the 
lines, repeatedly with both hands. 
Li . rw In a work by Lepsius, Vol. Ill, it 
is shown that the female deity Muth says to 
Ramses III — "I hold out both of my arms to 
make the sa passes behind your head." The 
nodes indicated on the head and neck indicate no 
doubt the places where the hands are to rest on 
the spot with some pressure. 

Great importance seems to have been attached 
to the spot on the neck. The Hebrew Cabbalists 
taught that a small bone of the neck (one of the cervical vertebrae) 
which they called Luz was imperishable ; and this is no doubt 
identical with the Uls of the Egyptians, which lies where the spinal 
column makes a turn from the backhead towards the shoulders. The 
two words are considered synonymous. The language of statement 
implies that the intention of the sa pass was to wake the interior life. 
As there is a slight backward curvature where cervical and dorsal 
vertebrae join, this shows the location of Luz or Uls, and proves that 
the Egyptians had learned the commanding importance of that 
location as a head centre of the Vital Forces, which had not been 
suspected in modern times until the revelation of Sarcognomy which 
demonstrates its supreme power and gives the anatomical and psychic 
reasons. 

Sarcognomy is the result of the scientific method applied to this 
investigation, and enables us to review the operations and correct the 
errors of the cultivators of Animal Magnetism. To perform this 
task briefly and bring the chaos of benevolent empiricism under the 
jurisdiction of science, let us look at the instructions of Deleuze, the 
learned and benevolent expounder of Animal Magnetism. 

His volume of "Practical Instruction" opens with the statements 
of principles which he pronounces essential and invariable, viz. : that 



308 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

man exercises a salutary influence over his fellow-beings by his will, 
which is called magnetism ; that the first condition of the operation 
"is to exercise the will ;" that this will operates through something 
called the magnetic fluid ; and that " the direct action of magnetism 
ceases when the magnetizer ^ceases to will ; " and that "magnetism 
generally exercises no influence upon persons in health." 

This is but a collection of errors. The vital emanation or nerv- 
aura, which has been called Animal Magnetism, proceeds continually 
and unconsciously from every human being and tends to impress his 
influence, his mental and physical characteristics on all with whom 
he is in contact or approximation. We see this in the diffusion of 
smallpox and virulent fevers, in the contagious influences that rule 
public assemblies, and in the assimilation of those who associate 
together. We see it especially in the power of the healing presence 
of a benevolent physician, who cures without medicine and without 
contact, which has been the method of some of our best healers. 
It is realized whenever the hands are placed upon the patient, 
whether there be any purpose or not ; and in all my experiments for 
developing the faculties, passions and vital forces in which the nature 
of the sensitive is for the time being revolutionized or subjected to- 
the domination of various passions, such as pride, religion, sympathy, 
fear or anger, I have always carefully avoided any exercise of will 
or any desire to influence the results, and have instructed my pupils 
accordingly. The influence of the hand is sufficient apart from will. 
And yet a determined influence of the will must influence a passive 
sensitive, and therefore may add materially to the result. But that 
the nervaura exerts no influence on persons in health, is an astonish- 
ing statement to come from so intelligent and respectable a source. 
All mankind are susceptible in various degrees to the influence of 
the nervaura and the will ; and I have often found a higher suscep- 
tibility during health than in disease. Some diseases enhance and 
others diminish the susceptibility. 

Deleuze next describes his process of magnetizing, which is little 
more than the general or extensive application of the operator's 
hands to the person of the subject, by gentle touches and passes, 
while the patient sits in a passive condition with nothing to attract 
his attention but these manipulations, while he rests in the state of 
self-surrender which is enjoined. His first direction is quite trivial 
and unimportant : "Take his thumbs between your two fingers so that 
the inside of your thumbs may touch the inside of his. Remain in 
this situation from two to five minutes, or until you perceive there is 
an equal degree of heat between your thumbs and his." This is a 
puerile formula. The impression to be made by the operator's hands 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 3O9 

can be much better made by applying his whole hands to the^jnner 
surface of the patient's, the tendency of which would be to establish 
sympathetic connection and influence. But the whole magnetizing 
procedure, thumbing, passes, hand-shaking, etc., is a crude, partial, 
unscientific method. The application of the operator's hands upon 
any portion of the anterior surface of the chest would have a better 
effect. Still better would be the application of the hands on the top- 
of the head, anteriorly and laterally, which would -produce an amiable 
and submissive feeling. If magnetism were merely, as Deleuze says, 
producing an effect by the will, the whole process that he recommends 
would be useless and absurd. Operators who rely on the will alone. 
do not use it. 

The whole object of the magnetic seance of half an hour or an 
hour is to produce the passive, sensitive condition which yields to 
all influences, and may gradually pass into a state of somniloquent 
trance, and it is a practicable, though tedious way of effecting it. 
Deleuze recommends the first seance to be for an hour, and if no- 
effect is experienced, to continue treatment for a month. But the 
object desired may be attained frequently in a few minutes. It is 
the evolution of functions which belong to the region behind the 
eyes, where the frontal and middle lobes of the brain come 'together, 
— the regions of Sensibility, Impressibility and Somnolence. If the 
patient is sufficiently sensitive to be materially affected by the passes 
of the operator, he can certainly be affected by the direct application 
of the hands to the organs to be roused. The application of the 
fingers upon the temples, an inch behind the brow, will produce in a 
few minutes the same effects which the magnetizer seeks by the 
tedious formula of magnetic passes which Deleuze minutely de- 
scribes. If the fingers are accurately placed upon Somnolence, the 
effect is revealed in a few minutes by the winking of the eyes and 
disposition to close them. A thorough sensitive will in a few min- 
utes be brought into the somniloquent trance — others may only 
realize the soothing effect. If the fingers are placed a little further 
back, the effect will be a development of Sensibility and Impressi- 
bility which will render the subject more amenable to local treatment 
and to the action of delicate remedies. It will also bring him sym- 
pathetically under the influence of the operator's constitution or will 
if need be, as well as the tedious processes of Deleuze. \ Without 
touching the head, however, the whole results of the magnetic 
seance may be developed by placing the hand at the lower end of the 
sternum, extending down on the median line from four to five inches. 
The entire space between the umbilicus and sternum is a region of 
soothing, sympathetic, somnolent influences which the magnetizer 



310 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

endeavors to develop, not by operating directly upon their seat, but by 
applying a general treatment. He who would attempt to develop a 
particular note in the piano by pounding the framework instead of 
touching the proper key would commit a similar error. 

In the Deleuze process the hands are moved to the level of the 
head, placed on the shoulders about a minute and drawn lightly down 
to the tips of the fingers, " touching lightly ; " then placed on the 
head a moment, brought down before the face at a distance of one or 
two inches, as far as the pit of the stomach ; then slowly down to 
the ends of the feet. Then repeat without touching the head, but 
"shaking the fingers" at the end of each pass, and end by making 
transverse passes at a distance of three or four inches before the face 
and before the chest. Passes may also be made from the shoulders 
down the back, hips and thighs. 

Much of these directions is arbitrary and fanciful. Passes along 
the median line down to the epigastrium are, however, appropriate 
to the purpose, and in the most sensitive may be effective, but not so 
prompt and efficient as the direct application of the hands to the 
epigastrium. In these passes mistakes are frequently made by 
applying an influence to the hypochondria. Deleuze himself says : 
" Sometimes the patient experiences pain at the stomach and nausea 
which is even followed by vomiting ; at other times he experiences 
cholic pains, and sometimes desires the sitting suspended because he 
feels a species of irritation," — all of which shows the injurious effects 
of downward passes to the hypochondria and the abdomen generally, 
prompted by the mistaken dogma that the downward are the only 
magnetic passes. It is very remarkable that this was never dis- 
covered, and that neither electricians nor magnetizers had any con- 
ception of the pathological tendency of the hypochondria, although 
they often brought out its pathological influence ; and electricians, as 
Althaus and others, have been compelled to desist from operations 
in the hypochondriac region, yet there was never enough of the 
spirit of investigation to discover the local cause of the injurious 
results produced, — the fact that the hypochondria are the regions of 
morbid tendencies. 

Deleuze says that the patient must "not be in the least alarmed 
at any crisis or transient indisposition." Magnetism "frequently 
brings on very sharp pains. These pains prove that it acts power- 
fully ; they are necessary to subdue the disease. If, then, you expe- 
rience sufferings, you will have the fortitude to bear them without 
speaking of them to any one. You will not even ask your mag- 
netizer to cnlm them. If you have not beforehand taken the firm 
resolution of resisting the first pains that it causes you to feel ; if 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 31I 

your magnetizer has not confidence and force of character enough 
not to be alarmed about them, — it would be better for you not to 
commence. I acknowledge that magnetism has been known to excite 
a nervous irritation and an uneasiness which continue after the 
sittings without being followed by any crisis. " 

These frank admissions are just what we should expect from his 
adhering to the dogma that downward passes alone are beneficial 
(which is entirely false), and prosecuting blindly his regular routine 
without inquiring or wishing to inquire into the causes of the results. 
The notion that some injury to the patient is a necessary part of the 
curative process is parallel to a similar notion that has tacitly per- 
vaded the old harsh and heroic practice of medicine. It is utterly 
false. A beneficent agency never does harm, except by the blind 
ignorance of those who apply it. 

So far from downward passes being the only beneficial or magnetic 
ones, their gene7'al tendency is decidedly injurious when they carry 
the vital forces from the thorax to the abdomen ; pre-eminently 
injurious when they carry the influence no lower than the hypo- 
chondria ; relaxing, debilitating, depressing and nervous when they 
extend to the hypogastric region, where we find nervousness and 
melancholy, from which evil effects the magnetizer escapes only by 
continuing the passes down the limbs, producing physical vigor at 
the thighs and mental dulness or quietude upon the legs and feet. 
Onimus and Legros, in the practice of electro-therapeutics, acted 
upon a similar notion current among electricians, and in treating a 
case of chorea they passed the electric current from the hands to the 
feet, expecting to cure disease in the lower limbs by the descending 
current. They found to their surprise, however, that the arms in 
four seances were cured by the ascending current they received. 
They continued the downward current from the spine for six seances 
without any benefit to the lower limbs, and then tried an ascending 
current to the spine, which completed the cure in two seances. 

The result of the long passes is to diminish mentality and all the 
energetic impulses and emotions which sustain health, and to pro- 
mote a state of purely animal life, subject, however, to the danger of 
producing very morbid, irritating, sickening and depressing influences, 
unless the impression be thoroughly removed from the abdomen to 
the limbs. 

Upon the front of the body passes from the abdomen up the 
thorax are as beneficial as the reverse are injurious. Let any one 
who wishes to realize this try a number of individuals in succession 
with brisk and energetic passes, with a light friction on the clothing 
(or still lighter if on the skin), upward from the hypochondria to 



312 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAF. XVI. 

the shoulders or neck, or from the hypogastric region to the 
shoulders,, either above or below the arms. It will be found invari- 
ably that these passes and frictions are refreshing, energizing and 
delightful. They disperse all morbid, debilitating conditions, rouse 
the pleasant emotions and promote calmness and health. 

The passes down to the feet recommended by Deleuze are appro- 
priate for reducing the activity of the brain, and are thus favorable 
to sleep. 

Deleuze says : " It is proper, in finishing, to make several passes 
along the legs, from the knees to the end of the feet. These passes 
free the head." This is a correct observation, although the author 
had no conception of the reason involved. Dismissing the formula 
of passes, the application of the hands on the top of the feet is the 
best way of freeing the head, and the application on the front 
of the legs relieves both head and chest, as Sarcognomy explains. 

" The descending passes are magnetic. The ascending movements 
are not," says Deleuze. This is incorrect, all passes are about 
equally efficient at similar distances. The terminus of the pass 
determines its effect. Prolonged passes terminating at the hypo- 
chondria are quite injurious. Any function of life may be developed 
by passes towards its locality, whether upward or downward. Som- 
nolence may be promoted by passes to the epigastrium, whether 
downward, upward or lateral. The Sarcognomist makes passes 
from the function to be checked toward the function to be developed. 
The electric current in like manner develops the function of the 
part to which it is sent. 

Deleuze commends magnetizing by the long pass from the head 
to the feet without touching, and also with gentle friction, as bene- 
ficial, which is true in many cases ; but in general he prefers to keep 
the hand one or two inches from the body and sometimes at a 
distance of several feet. 

This is not idle mummery. An influence may be exerted upon 
sensitives without contact, and, moreover, passes without contact 
vividly excite the imagination and sensitiveness of the patient, and 
thus add to the effect. Neither are such passes inefficient with 
those in health. It is merely a question of impressibility and 
imagination. 

The true effect of the magnetic seance is the cultivation of sensi- 
bility by a passive condition with the attention fixed upon the faint 
impression from the operator's hands ; secondly, the surrender of 
soul and body to the influence of the active operator in close prox- 
imity, as an auditor surrenders to the influence of the speaker ; 
thirdly, the promotion of Somnolence by fixed attention to the oper- 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 313 

ator and his monotonous passes. The latter result, however, may be 
more simply attained by fixed attention to any other object held near 
the eyes, an expedient sometimes employed in public exhibitions for 
selecting impressible subjects, or by a steady gaze into the patient's 
eyes. Moreover, Somnolence is strongly promoted by the nervauric 
emanations in proportion as they are recognized and felt by the 
subject. The whole process therefore is designed to produce in- 
directly what we produce directly when we stimulate the region in 
the temples or on the epigastrium ; and the practicability of develop- 
ing the latter by a galvanic current renders such a process more in- 
telligible and satisfactory to a scientific mind. 

But Deleuze was ignorantly empirical. He gives his directions, 
predicts the results and then says : " It is tiseless to search out the 
causes of these facts ; it is sufficient that experience has established 
them ; " and this is a leading reason why scientists have manifested an 
aversion to the subject of Animal Magnetism. 

The term Animal Magnetism is perhaps allowable, though some- 
what fanciful. Magnetism is an attractive force inherent in min- 
erals. The human nervaura is not simply an attractive influence. It 
has every conceivable variety of influences, — attractive, repulsive, 
wholesome, injurious, intellectual, stupid, elevating, debasing, excit- 
ing, calming, — and Sarcognomy enables us to comprehend all these 
various influences and their local sources so as to evoke them when 
needed and to use them for good purposes. 

The attractive influences which have some analogy to Magnetism 
belong to the upper portion of the back and to the upper portion of 
the occiput. An operator in whom the occipital organs are large has 
a commanding force and is said to have a strong magnetism, meaning 
thereby attraction and controlling power. 

In his directions for the treatment of disease, Deleuze correctly 
states that pains are carried off by passes in the direction in which 
they are moved ; but some of his advice is not quite judicious. He 
directs the application of the hand for several minutes upon the seat 
of pain or disease, followed by a descending pass toward the ex- 
tremities. This may be well for the patient, but not for the operator. 
In placing his hands on the morbid part, the operator is making an 
exchange of vital influences, and if sensitive himself he receives the 
entire morbid emanation into his hands, and in a few such operations 
receives a very sensible injurious influence. We do not need to 
refer to very contagious diseases to understand this matter, — all 
conditions, whether pathological or physiological, are contagious to 
the sensitive, and this perpetual contagion is the chief objection to 
the nervauric practice. Hence I have always warned my pupils with 



314 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

great emphasis to protect themselves : not to remain passively in 
contact with any form of disease, but to maintain as active a condi- 
tion as possible, — not to rest in contact with morbid parts, but first 
energetically remove the morbid condition and aura by dispersive 
passes, carrying it out of the body before applying the sanative 
influence of the healthy hand, — not applying it then in a very 
passive manner, but holding the muscles firm and making as much 
active manipulation as possible. 

Deleuze recommends another process which is beneficial ; but 
instead of applying it at first, as he suggests, it should be applied 
after dispersive passes or frictions. He says : " Place a piece of linen 
several times folded, or a fragment of woollen or cotton cloth, upon 
the suffering part, apply the mouth above it, and breathe through 
it." This method applies a very general and wholesome influence 
from the interior of the chest and is not sufficiently appreciated. 

Deleuze also mentions a case in which water was used for carry- 
ing off disease : M. N. filled a glass with water and covered it with a 
linen cloth to prevent spilling, then applied it to the back of the 
head of a patient, making passes from the head to the tumbler, giv- 
ing decided relief. It is very true that water may carry off patho- 
logical influences, as all hydropathists know, and this is further illus- 
trated in the electric bath. Water flowing upon a diseased part 
becomes charged with a morbid aura and capable of conveying it. 

Deleuze directs the patient whose eyes are closed to be roused by 
" passes transversely across the eyes." It is far more effective to 
stand behind the patient and make passes, either from the outer 
angle of the eyes or from the inner angles, backward and upward 
towards the region of Firmness and Energy. 

Deleuze relates a case of hysteria with convulsions occurring in 
his practice, which alarmed and astonished him, but speedily passed 
off. If he had known the proper hypogastric treatment it would 
have been very easily controlled. 

The instructions of Deleuze in reference to the use of magnetized 
r~ water for healing need not be discussed farther than to say that 
psychometry fully establishes the potential influence over sensitives of 
any and every emanation from a human being and the objects to 
which that emanation may be attached. He recommends the use of 
magnetized objects to apply upon the seat of pain, such as tissues of 
cotton or silk, and plates of glass, gold or steel. Modern magne- 
tizers in the United States are using paper with success for sending 
out magnetic influences to patients. Of course, the success of such 
means depends on a high degree of susceptibility in the patient and 
a very potent vitality in the operator. 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 3 1 5. 

In the magnetic baquet, composed of bottles of magnetized water, 
communicating by wires with a central conductor as if they were 
Leyden jars charged with electricity, — Deleuze passes from the 
sphere of tangible science into that of imagination and ignorance ; 
for imagination skilfully impressed would produce far greater results 
than his baquet, on the model of Mesmer, the unscientific enthusiast. 

In the development of Somniloquence, no matter by what process 
or .by the course of nature, there is a great exaltation of the interior 
or intuitive faculties, and Deleuze speaks very correctly of the phe- 
nomena of somniloquence or somnambulism. He says : " In the state 
of somnambulism the moral sensibility is undeniably much more 
lively." The cause of this is developed by Sarcognomy. "There is 
in most somnambulists a development of sensibility of which we can 
have no conception. They are susceptible of receiving influence 
from everything that surrounds them, and principally from living 
beings. They are not only affected by physical emanations or the 
effluvia of living bodies, but also to a degree much more surprising 
by the thoughts and sentiments of those who surround them. If 
you are alone with a somnambulist and any one is permitted to enter, 
the somnambulist generally perceives it. Sometimes the person who 
enters is indifferent to him ; at other times he feels for him either a 
sympathy or an antipathy." If the stranger is incredulous and 
suspects the sincerity of the somnambulist, or makes a jest of what 
he sees, the somnambulist is troubled and loses his lucidity. ** If 
many witnesses surround and are occupied about him, the fluid of 
each of them acts upon his organization." 

This sensitive condition is merely an active state of the interior 
faculties, which exists normally in those who have a large develop- 
ment of the lateral and interior regions of the front lobe, and who 
by their psychometric perceptions are continually in rapport with 
those around them, or those at a distance to whom their minds are 
directed. 

The development of Intuition, the divinely intelligent element in 
man, under the name of Psychometry, will guide mankind hereafter 
into more profound science and philosophy than has ever before 
been conceived, — carrying us into all the mysteries of physiology, 
pneumatology, paleontology, astronomy, geology and antiquity. This 
interior faculty has been apparent in the somnambulism of magne- 
tizers, but has not been guided and used for the results of which it 
is capable. 

Deleuze describes the somnambulistic phenomena, which some- 
times appear as follows : "When the somnambulist has reached this 
degree of exaltation, his manner of speaking is almost always d if- 



3 16 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

ferent from that which he has in his ordinary state. His diction is 
pure and simple, elegant and precise ; his manner, unimpatient ; 
everything announces in him a state of tranquillity, a distinct view of 
that of which he speaks, and an entire conviction of its reality. 
You perceive in his discourse not the least of what is called excite- 
ment or enthusiasm. In this new situation the mind is filled with 
religious ideas with which perhaps it was never before occupied. 
. . . This life appears to him only a journey, during which we 
ought to collect what is necessary for us in our everlasting man- 
sions . . . Sometimes the prodigious difference he perceives 
between his new manner of viewing objects and that which he had 
in his ordinary state, the new lights which shine for him, the new 
faculties with which he finds himself endowed, the immensity of the 
horizon which is spread before his eyes — persuade him that he is 
inspired." 

In that mental condition supernal intelligences do communicate 
and influence the mind, or may even control the sensitive and make 
him their mouthpiece. When we know that these exalted powers 
may be cultivated by stimulating the organs behind the eyes and 
behind the root of the nose, with their corresponding locations at 
the lower end of the sternum and the epigastrium, we have added 
greatly to our power of seeking truth and wisdom, and advancing 
education. The boy, the girl, or the uneducated laborer, may become 
by the development of their interior faculties, teachers to those 
most advanced in education, as patients have often been enabled to 
instruct their physicians in diagnoses, prognoses and remedies. 

Of marvellous phenomena Deleuze is but a modest narrator, with- 
out the slightest effort at investigation. He says : "There exists with 
some individuals a magnetic power, truly prodigious, of which I do 
not pretend to know the cause. Many magnetizers induce som- 
nambulism with very great facility and do not hope for success 
except from this crisis, while others can scarcely effect it, yet do not 
do the less good. Some of them act only by the will, without any 
apparent magnetic process." 

The explanation of this, which will be given more fully in my 
Anthropology, is found in the occipital energy belonging to the 
region on the head just back of Combativeness, which gives this 
dominating, entrancing power. The coronal region of the amiable 
sentiments, the whole upper surface of the head, is the source of 
the benevolent healing power which does not aim or desire to subju- 
gate others. This benevolent power is nowhere so effective as at its 
origin in the brain, and the application of the upper surface of the 
head to the patient or to any painful or diseased part is the most 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 317 

soothing restorative treatment possible. It is remarkable that with 
all the vast amount of experience in Animal Magnetism nothing 
should have been known or suspected of this. The whole subject 
has been dominated by a spirit of blind routine, more monotonous 
than that of the medical profession. Deleuze himself says : " Mag- 
netism, if it has been practised empirically from a high antiquity, 
has not at least formed a particular science, except for a small 
number of years. Magnetism cannot take its rank among the 
sciences, and present a doctrine of which application may in all 
cases be made, until physicians take it up seriously." But the hard, 
mechanical character which the medical profession has assumed 
utterly disqualifies it for investigating so profound, so delicate, so 
psychic a subject. It has not even been able to develop the rational 
principles of electric practice. 

The remark that some magnetizers act by the will alone indicates 
that in them the region of Will is largely developed, — the region of 
Firmness, which is assisted by all the occipital organs, — and that 
they have the psychic temperament derived from the interior regions 
of the brain, which brings them into rapport with persons at a 
distance, or into intimate sympathy with those who are near. 

But little more need be said of Therapeutic Magnetism as presented 
by Deleuze. There is very little of it, beyond a limited formula, or 
rules of proceeding, which might be fully expressed in three or four 
pages, and which certainly has no claim to be considered a science or a 
scientific art. But the volume of his " Practical Instruction," repro- 
duced in this country by T. C. Hartshorn, of Providence, R.I., is 
filled with gossipy details, good advice to magnetizers, descriptions of 
cases and their treatment, which certainly show success in the prac- 
tice, and numerous illustrations of somnambulism and clairvoyance, 
mainly added by Mr. Hartshorn, with the testimony of physicians, 
making an aggregate of documentary evidence so weighty and con- 
vincing that it exhibits in a clear light the remarkable stolidity of 
medical colleges in continuing to treat facts so well established with 
silent scorn or open hostility, and at last endeavoring to reduce the 
whole subject to the coarse, mechanical proceeding which they call 
massage or rubbing. 

I have shown that the somnambulic, clairvoyant and entranced 
conditions which constitute the mass of the phenomena of Animal 
Magnetism are the results of the predominance of certain faculties 
with which all mankind are endowed in various degrees, and which 
may be elicited by direct stimulation of their organs by the fingers 
or hand, and by galvanic currents. 

To produce the sleep or trance of insensibility, the organ of Somno- 



3 18 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

lence in the temples may be excited, or it may be produced by placing 
one hand at the epigastrium on the median line, just below the sternum, 
and the other on the back just behind the middle of the humerus, 
and below the shoulder-blade, which tends to a deep sleep. The in- 
sensibility to pain may be promoted by placing the hand upon the 
shoulder, from the acromion process (the external and upper surface 
of the shoulder) extending three or four inches inward. 

Possibly this volume may do something to overcome medical preju- 
dice by showing the facility with which the neurological laws of the 
human constitution may be demonstrated by Galvanism. But scien- 
tific testimony seems to produce very little effect when it is resisted 
by materialistic dogmatism. In addition to the testimony of a very 
large number of physicians as to the reality of the magnetic phenom- 
ena, the two most eminent of all French scientists, Cuvier and La 
Place, have given attestation of their truth. 

Cuvier says in his Comparative Anatomy : " The effects produced 
upon persons who before the operation (of mesmerizing) was begun 
were in a state of insensibility ; those which have taken place upon 
other persons after the operation itself has reduced them to that 
state ; and also to the effects produced upon brutes, — no longer permit 
it to be doubted that the proximity of two animated bodies, in a cer- 
tain position and with the help of certain motions, do produce a real 
effect, wholly independent of the imagination of either. It is also evi- 
dent that these effects are owing to a communication which takes 
place between the nervous systems of the two parties." The testi- 
mony of La Place in his great Treatise on the Calculation of Proba- 
bilities is equally positive and explicit. 

The eminent physiologist Georget said : " I have seen, positively 
seen, a great many times, somnambulists announce several hours, 
seveial days, twenty days beforehand, the hour, the minute even, of the 
attack of epileptic and hysteric fits, and of the menstrual eruptions, 
and indicate the duration and the intensity of the attacks, — things 
which were actually verified." 

The existence of these intuitive and prophetic powers in man I 
have demonstrated in developing the science of Psychometry, and 
pointed out their location ; and in Sarcognomy I place the entire 
modus operandi in the possession of the public, of which for many 
years probably only the most enlightened will avail themselves. 

Let us not forget that Dr. Elliotson, at the head of the medical 
profession in London, was driven into retirement for attempting to 
introduce in England the magnetic anaesthesia in surgical operations, 
after the Committee of the Royal Academy of Medicine at Paris in 
1836 had made the following statement of the success of Cloquet in 



CHAP. XVI. J REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 319 

operating during the somnambulic trance, — a specimen of the large 
class of facts of which the present generation of physicians have been 
carefully kept in ignorance by their professors, — an ignorance which 
they are most faithfully transmitting to their successors. 

The report made in 183 1 — signed by Bourdois de la Motte, presi- 
dent ; Fouquier, Gueneau de Mussy, Guersent, Itard, J. J. Leroux, 
Marc, Thillaye and Husson — says : — 

" You have all heard of a fact which at the time fixed the atten- 
tion of the Chirurgical Section, and which was communicated to it at 
the session of April 16, 1829, by M. Jules Cloquet. The committee 
thought it their duty to embody it in this report, as one of the least 
equivocal proofs of the power of the magnetic sleep. It relates to 
Madame Plantin, aged sixty-four years, living at 1 5 1 Rue Saint-Denis, 
who consulted M. Cloquet, on the 8th of April, 1829, about an ulcer- 
ated cancer on her right breast, which she had had many years, and 
which was complicated with a considerable enlargement of the axillary 
ganglions. M. Chapelain, the physician of this woman, whom he had 
magnetized for some months, with the intention, as he said, of reduc- 
ing the enlargement of the breast, had been able to obtain no other 
result than a very profound sleep, during which her sensibility 
appeared annihilated, but the ideas preserved all their lucidity. He 
proposed to M. Cloquet that he should operate upon it while she was 
plunged into the magnetic sleep. M. Cloquet, considering the opera- 
tion indispensable, consented to do it ; and it was agreed that it 
should take place on the following Sunday, April 12. The two 
evenings previous, this woman was magnetized several times by M. 
Chapelain, who disposed her when in somnambulism to support the 
operation without fear, and even led her to speak of it with compo- 
sure, while as soon as she waked she repelled the idea with horror. 

" On the day appointed for the operation, M. Cloquet, on his arrival 
at half past ten o'clock in the morning, found the patient dressed, 
and seated in an arm-chair, in the position of a person peacefully 
wrapped in a natural sleep. It was nearly an hour since she had 
returned from mass, which she always attended at the same hour. 
M. Chapelain had put her into the magnetic sleep since she came 
back. The patient spoke with great calmness of the operation she 
was about to undergo. Every arrangement having been made for 
the operation, she undressed herself and sat down upon a chair. 

" M. Chapelain held the right arm, the left arm being suffered to 
hang by her side. M. Pailloux, a student of the Saint-Louis Hospital, 
was charged to hand the instruments and to make the ligatures. 
First an incision was made from the armpit, above the tumor, to the 
inner side of the breast. The second, commencing at the same 



320 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

point, separated the tumor below and passed round to meet the first. 
M. Cloquet dissected the enlarged ganglions with caution, on account 
of their proximity to the axillary artery, and took off the tumor. The 
time consumed in the operation was ten or twelve minutes. 

" During all this time the patient continued to converse tranquilly 
with the operator and did not exhibit the slightest sign of sensibility : 
no movement of the limbs or of the features, no change in the 
respiration, nor in the voice, no emotion, not even in the pulse, were 
manifested ; the patient did not cease to be in the state of self-forget- 
fulness and passive insensibility in which she was several minutes 
before the operation. They were not obliged to hold her ; they merely 
sustained her. A ligature was applied to the lateral thoracic artery, 
which was exposed during the extraction of the ganglions. The 
wound was closed with sticking plaster and dressed ; the patient was 
put on the bed, still in the state of somnambulism, and left there 
forty-eight hours. An hour after the operation a slight hemorrhage 
ensued, which did not continue. The first dressing was removed on 
the succeeding Tuesday, April 14. The wound was cleansed and 
dressed anew : the patient manifested no sensibility nor pain. The 
pulse reserved its natural beat. 

"After the dressing had been put on, M. Chapelain awoke the 
patient, whose somnambulic sleep had lasted ever since one hour be- 
fore the operation, that is to say, for two days. This woman did not 
appear to have any idea or any impression of what had passed ; but, 
on learning that she had been operated upon and seeing her children 
around her, she experienced a very lively emotion, which the magne- 
tizer terminated by putting her asleep immediately." 

The report of the commission fully confirmed the claims of the 
friends of Animal Magnetism, giving some interesting illustrations of 
clairvoyance and the power of somnambulists to prescribe successfully 
for the sick. Two centuries previously, in France, during the time 
of Richelieu, Grandier was condemned and burned alive for the exer- 
cise of the powers which this commission commended as a matter of 
science. Unfortunately the medical profession during the last half 
century has been retrograding in this matter towards seventeenth- 
century ignorance. 

Notwithstanding the vast number of public and private exhibitions 
of the power of clairvoyance, a brutal hostility to this faculty has been 
exhibited by many of the leaders of the medical profession, and I think 
it well to republish here one of the best illustrations of this power. 

Rev. E. B. Hall, of Providence (Dec. 1, 1837), stated in reference 
to Miss Brackett : " I have seen a sealed letter containing a passage 
inclosed in lead, which letter she held at the side of her head not 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 321 

more than a moment, all in sight, then gave it back to the writer, 
and afterward wrote what she had read in it. The letter was opened 
in my presence, and the two writings agreed in every word, there 
being two differences in spelling only." 

In another instance Mr. S. Covill of Troy, being skeptical, wrote a 
sentence on paper without any one's knowledge, inclosed it between 
two thick cards, folded the whole up in deep-blue paper, sealed it with 
his own seal and a number of wafers, and put it all into a larger sheet 
directed to Mr. Isaac Thorpe ; this sealed letter, as he received it, was 
presented by Mr. Thorpe to Miss Brackett in the presence of quite a 
number of gentlemen, requesting her to read it without breaking the 
seals. She took the letter with her on retiring for the night, and 
in the morning dictated the following as its contents, which was 
written down by Mr. H. Hopkins : — 

" No other than the eye of Omnipotence can read this in this 
envelopement. * * * * l %?>7" 

The stars represented a portion she could not read. The letter 
was returned with the seals undisturbed, and her reading was pub- 
lished before the answer was received. Mr. Covill stated that the 
reading was : " No other than the eye of Omnipotence can read this 
sentence in this envelope. Troy, New York, August, 1837." Thus 
the reading was correct in everything but the local date and the 
word "sentence," which was omitted. 

These marvellous powers of the soul and brain, which the cultiva- 
tors of Animal Magnetism have demonstrated so many thousand 
times without overcoming that hostility which springs from the 
coarser elements of human nature, are now clearly intelligible, since 
I have traced them to their location in the front lobe of the brain, 
and shown how they may be evoked. 

The vast number of illustrations of clairvoyance and of the power 
of the disembodied soul during the last thirty years, and the vast num- 
ber of cures effected by human vitality without medicine and without 
learning, would have wrought an entire revolution in philosophy and 
therapeutics if the educated classes had been taught to reason. 

The great need of the age is a true education, which will enable 
all classes to welcome and appreciate new truth. 

The progress of the higher departments of science and philosophy 

liot like the steady growth of physical science, but is rather a matter 
of accidental impulse, local fashion and prejudice. The systematic 
cultivation of Animal Magnetism has been neglected. The study 
of the brain by comparative developement has been almost forgotten, 
although it vastly exceeds in interest and value all other methods in 
natural history and ethnology. 



322 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

My own experimental investigation, which organizes a positive 
and complete Anthropology, has not been sufficiently urged to en- 
force its proper consideration. The marvellous facts of spiritualism, 
and the diagnostic and healing powers which it has developed, are 
now the chief objects of interest with progressive minds, and our 
therapeutic science is about to be enriched by the partisans of psychic 
methods, who discard all physical means, as the medical profession 
has discarded the psychic. Every step in that direction is an advance 
towards higher conditions. The marvellous cures, so numerous and 
well attested, achieved by prayer, faith, spirit agency and what has 
been called " mind cure," far transcend the achievements of medical 
therapeutics, and the question is being determined by experience, to 
what extent these psychic agencies can be substituted for the physi- 
cal means upon which the world has heretofore relied. 

The partisans of physical science have confined themselves 
rigorously to physical methods, forgetting that man is an eternal 
spiritual being, even while dwelling in a material form. If the par. 
tisans of psychic science, ignoring physical means, treat the soul 
alone, we may obtain comparative statistics of the two methods, and 
the true philosopher, comprehending each, will avail himself of both. 
The student of Sarcognomy should be prepared to avail himself of 
manual, psychic, electro-magnetic, pneumatic, medical, solar, hydro- 
therapic, auto-therapeutic and all other possible methods. By auto- 
therapeutics I refer to self-treatment by mental power and hygienic 
exercises which appear to be capable of remodelling the constitution. 
(See Chapter on Hygiene.) 

How widely different from the monotonous imbecility of Deleuze is 
the practical exposition by Dr. James Esdaile of his medical and 
surgical application of Animal Magnetism in India, in the volume 
"Mesmerism in India," published in 1846, — showing his observations 
during six years, — a work which no candid person can read without real- 
izing the guilty folly of the medical profession in ignoring and opposing 
so valuable a portion of therapeutics ! It was his intention at first to 
communicate his observations only to the medical profession, but he 
soon felt it his duty to give them to the public. 

Dr. Esdaile's report embraces seventy-three surgical operations and 
eighteen medical cases treated by Mesmerism with complete success, 
and shows how simple is the practice and how brilliant are its results 
in India. A student of Sarcognomy in that climate, even if he dis- 
pensed with medicine entirely, would have a brilliantly successful 
practice that might astonish the adherents of the old regime. Dr. 
Esdaile regrets that the public should w r ait for a professional sanction of 
Mesmerism ; for, says he, " medical men in general as yet know nothing 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 2> 2 3 

about it ; and there is nothing in their previous knowledge, however 
great and varied, that bears upon the subject." "I fear that not 
many of this generation will live to benefit by Mesmerism, if they 
wait till it is admitted into the Pharmacopoeia." He speaks of the 
opprobrious language applied to those who succeed in curing diseases 
without medicine, and adds " in my estimation the genuine medical 
quack is he, who professing to cure disease, yet allows his patients to 
suffer and perish by ignorantly or presumptuously despising any 
promising or possible means of which the Father of Medicine thought 
very differently from his degenerate sons." 

As to producing insensibility, he says: "In singularly sensitive per- 
sons, the extreme degree of coma, so intense as to permit the per- 
formance of surgical operations without awaking the patient, may 
sometimes be obtained in a few minutes, but in general it takes an 
hour or two, and the process often does not succeed till the second or 
even fourteenth time." Nevertheless in India the results were very 
promptly produced, and he says : " Finding it impossible after the first 
month to prosecute the subject in my own person, owing to the great 
bodily and mental fatigue it caused — for I had spared neither — 
I set to work my hospital attendants, young Hindoos and Mahome- 
dans, and such has been my success that every one I have taught 
lias become a skilful mesmerizer." 

Believing that Mesmerism as a natural mode of cure must have 
been known from the most ancient times, though disguised as magic 
or mystery, Dr. E. made the acquaintance of a famous magician of 
Bengal, and professing to be a brother magician succeeded in persuad- 
ing him to show his process for relieving pain. The magician " sent 
for a brass pot containing water, and a tray with two or three leaves 
upon it, and commenced muttering his charms at arm's length from 
the patient. In a short time he dipped his forefinger into the water, 
and with the help of his thumb, flirted it into the patient's face ; he 
then took the leaves, and commenced stroking the person from the 
crown of the head to the toes, with a slow, drawing motion. The 
knuckles almost touched the body, and he said that he could continue 
the process for an hour or longer if necessary, and it convinced me 
that if these charmers ever do good by such means, it is by the Mes- 
meric Jjifluence." Dr. E. then proposed to show his charm by oper- 
ating on the 

" After some difficulty we got him to lie down, and to give due 
solemnity to my proceedings, I chanted as an invocation the chorus 
of the " King of the Cannibal Islands." I desired him to shut his 
eyes, and he clenched his eyelids firmly that I might find no entrance 
to the brain by that inlet. In a quarter of an hour he jumped up and 



324 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

said he felt something disagreeable coming over him and wished to 
make his escape. He was over-persuaded to lie down again, however, 
and I soon saw the muscles around the eye begin to relax, and his 
face became perfectly smooth and calm. I was sure that I had caught 
my brother magician napping, but in a few minutes he bolted up sud- 
denly, clapped his hands to his head, cried he felt drunk, and nothing 
could induce him to lie down again." He quickly escaped and con- 
fessed next clay that he was overcome by the sleepy influence. 

The process of the magician as well as Dr. Esdaile was simply long 
passes from the head to the feet — a natural mode of producing sleep 
as has already been explained. 

Dr. Esdaile's attention had been directed to Animal Magnetism 
not only by the manly declarations of the famous Dr. John Elliotson 
of London, but by the admissions of its opponents — notably those 
of the Roman Catholic Church. The action of this body, as hostile 
to psychic science as it was once to astronomy, is worth reproducing 
here, as a statement and admission of facts which have long been 
familiar to the intelligent. 

In May, 1841, the Archbishop of Lausanne and Geneva addressed 
to the Sacred Penitentiary at Rome the following remarkable docu- 
ment. By a curious coincidence this was the very time at which I 
had discovered and announced the nervauric impressibility of the 
brain, the time at which Esdaile began his operations in India and Dr. 
Braid began his investigation of hypnotism in England : — 

" Most Eminent Lord, — Since that which has been hitherto 
answered respecting Animal Magnetism seems by no means to suffice, 
and it is much to be wished that cases not unfrequently occurring 
may be solved more and more uniformly, the undersigned humbly 
lays before your Eminence that which follows : 

" A magnetized person, who is generally of the female sex, enters 
into that state of sleep called Magnetic Somnambulism so deeply, 
that not even the greatest noise at her ears, nor any violence of iron 
or fire, is capable of raising her from it. She is brought into this 
kind of ecstasy by the magnetizer alone, to whom she has given con- 
sent (for consent is necessary), either by various touches or gesticu- 
lations, when he is present, or by a simple command, and that, too, 
an internal one, when he is at a distance of even several leagues. 

"Then, being interrogated, aloud or mentally, concerning her own 
disease, or those of absent persons entirely unknown to her, this per- 
son, who is evidently one unlearned, at once exhibits great superiority 
in science to medical men ; announces most accurately anatomical 
matters ; indicates the cause, seat, and nature of internal diseases in 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 325 

the human body, which, to the skilful, are most difficult of under- 
standing, and unravels their progress, variation and complications ; 
and this in the terms proper to them, and prescribes the most simple 
and efficacious remedies. 

" If the person concerning whom the magnetized woman is con- 
sulted is present, the magnetizer establishes the relation between 
them by means of contact. If, however, he be absent, a lock of his 
hair supplies his place, and suffices ; for, when this lock of hair is 
brought into the proximity only of the hand of the magnetized person, 
he declares what it is (without casting his eyes on it), whose hair it is 
where the person is actually sojourning, to whom the hair belongs, 
what he is doing, and affords the above-mentioned information respect- 
ing his disease not otherwise than if, after the manner of medicaL 
men, he were inspecting the interior of his body. 

M Lastly, the magnetized person does not see with the eye. The 
eyes being covered, though not knowing how to read, he will read off 
whatever is placed on his head or stomach, whether a book, or manu- 
script, open or shut. His words, too, seem to issue from this region : 
but when brought out of this state, either at the order, even internal, 
of the magnetizer, or, as it were, spontaneously at the moment previ- 
ously announced by himself, he appears to be not at all conscious of 
the things gone through by him in the paroxysm, how long soever it 
may have lasted : what may have been demanded of him ; what he 
may have answered ; what he may have undergone; all these things 
have left no idea in his understanding, nor the least vestige in his 
memory. 

" Therefore, the undersigned petitioner, seeing valid reasons for 
doubting whether such effects, the occasional cause of which is shown 
to be so little proportioned to them, be simply natural, earnestly and 
most fervently prays that your Eminence in your wisdom, for the 
greater glory of the Omnipotent, as well as the greater good of souls, 
which have been redeemed by the Lord at so great a price, may be 
pleased to decide, whether, admitting the truth of the premises, a con- 
fessor or curate may safely permit to his penitents or parishioners : 

" I. That they practise animal magnetism, endowed with such, or 
other like characteristics, as an art auxiliary and supplementary to 
medicine. 

" 2. That they consent to be thrown into such a state of magnetic 
somnambulism. 

"3. That they consult persons magnetized in such a manner either 
concerning themselves or concerning others. 

" 4. Or that they undertake one of these last-mentioned three 
things, having first taken the precaution of formally renouncing in 



326 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

their minds every diabolic compact, explicit or implicit, as well as all 
satanic interventions, since, notwithstanding such precautions, simi- 
lar effects or some such effects have been obtained by some persons. 
" Most Eminent Lord, by command of the Most Rev. the Arch- 
bishop of Lausanne and Geneva, your Eminence's most humble and 
most obedient servant, James Xavier Fontana, 

" Chancellor of the Episcopal Chancery. 
" Friburgh, in Switzerland, Episcopal Palace, 
the 19th of May, 1841." 

Response. 
"The Sacred Penitentiary, the premises having been maturely 
weighed, considers that these should be answered as it now answers : 
The use of Magnetism as set forth in the case is not permissible. 

"Given at Rome, in the Sacred Penitentiary, the 1st day of July, 
1841. 

"C. Card. Castracane, M. P. 

" Ph. Pomella, of the S. P. Sec y. 

" Certified as a copy conformable to the original. — Friburgh, the 
26th July, 1 841. 

" By order> — J. Perroulaz, Sec'y of the Bishopric." 

" It will be observed (says Dr. EsJaile) that though the subject is 
held in dread by the reporter, as probably of diabolical origin, yet it is 
treated as a ' great fact,' known to and believed in by a large com- 
munity, so that Catholics and Protestants are found alike professing a 
belief in Mesmerism. If the twentieth part of what was reported 
was true, it well deserved careful investigation ; and, as I had no dread 
of knowing anything that God has permitted to be known, I deter- 
mined to try to find out the truth for myself, on the first favorable 
opportunity. In choosing a proper subject to experiment upon, I 
should probably have selected some highly sensitivefemale of a ner- 
vous temperament and excitable imagination who desired to submit 
to the supposed influence. But, I beg it to be particularly remarked, 
my first essay was not guided by theory and was not made on a sub- 
ject supposed to be favorable. On the contrary, the very worst 
specimen of humanity, theoretically considered, was the person des- 
tined to be my first mesmeric victim : he being none other than a 
Hindoo felon of the hangman cast, condemned to labor on the roads 
in irons. Accident alone determined my choice and decided the 
matter for me, perhaps much better than theory would have done; 
for I should as soon have thought of commencing operations on the 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 327 

first dog or pig I met on the road, as of selecting this man for his 
good mesmeric 'materiel.' 

"First Experiment. — Madhab Kaura, a hog-dealer, condemned to 
seven years' imprisonment, with labor on roads, in irons, for wound- 
ing a man so as to endanger his life, has got a double Hydrocele. 
He was ordered to be taken from the jail to the Charity Hospital, to 
be operated upon. 

" April 4th. — The water was drawn off one side of the scrotum, and 
two drachms of the usual cor. sub. injection were thrown in. On 
feeling the pain from the injection, he threw his head over the 
back of the chair, and pressed his hands along the course of the 
spermatic cords, closing his eyelids firmly, and making the grimaces 
of a man in pain. Seeing him suffering in this way, I turned to the 
native sub-assistant surgeon, an eleve of the Medical College, and 
asked him if he had ever seen Mesmerism. He said that he had seen 
it tried at the Medical College, but without effect. Upon which I 
remarked, ' I have a great mind to try it on this man ; but as I never 
saw it practised, and know it only from reading, I shall probably not 
succeed.' — The man continuing in the position described, I placed 
his knees between mine, and began to pass my hands slowly over his 
face, at the distance of an inch, and carried them down to the pit of 
his stomach. This was continued for half an hour before he was 
spoken to, and when questioned at the end of this time his answers 
were quite sensible and coherent. 

" He was ordered to remain quiet, and the passes were continued for 
a quarter of an hour longer, — still no sensible effect. Being now 
tired (thermometer 85 ), I gave it up in despair and declared it to be 
a failure. While I rested myself, the man remained quiet and made 
fewer grimaces, and when ordered to open his eyes, he said there was 
a smoke in the room. This roused my attention and tempted me to 
persevere. I now breathed on his head, and carried my hands from 
the back of his head over his face and down to the epigastrium, where 
I pressed them united. The first time this was clone, he took his 
hands off his groins and pressed them both firmly down upon mine, 
drew a long breath, and said, ' I was his father and mother and had 
given him life again.' The same process was persevered in, and in 
about an hour he began to gape, said he must sleep, that his senses 
were gone ; and his replies became incoherent. He opened his eyes 
when ordered, but said he only saw smoke, and could distinguish no 
one : his eyes were quite lustreless and the lids were opened heavily. 
All appearance of pain now disappeared ; his hands were crossed on his 
breast, instead of being pressed on the groins, and his countenance 
showed the most perfect repose. He now took no notice of our ques- 



$2S ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

tions, and I called loudly on him by name without attracting any 
notice. 

" I now pinched him without disturbing him, and then asking for a 
pin in English, I desired my assistant to watch him narrowly, and 
drove it into the small of his back ; it produced no effect whatever ; 
and my assistant repeated it at intervals in different places as use- 
lessly. His back had continued to arch more backwards latterly, 
and he now was in a state of ' opisthotonos : ' the nape of his neck 
resting on the sharp back of the chair and his breech on the edge 
of it. Being now satisfied that we had got something extraordinary, 
I went over to the Kutcherry, and begged Mr. Russell, the judge, 
and Mr. Money, the collector, to come and see what had been done, 
as I wanted the presence of intelligent witnesses in what remained 
to do. We found him in the position I had left him in, and no 
hallooing in his ears could attract his attention. Fire was then 
applied to his knee without his shrinking in the least ; and liquor 
ammoniae, that brought tears into our eyes in a moment, was inhaled 
for some minutes without causing an eyelid to quiver. This seemed 
to have revived him a little, as he moved his head shortly afterwards, 
and I asked him if he wanted a drink ; he only gaped in reply, and 
I took the opportunity to give, slowly, a mixture of ammonia so 
strong that I could not bear to taste it ; this he drank like milk, and 
gaped for more. As the ' experimentum cruris,' I lifted his head, 
and placed his face, which was directed to the ceiling all this time, in 
front of a full light ; opened his eyes, one after the other, but with- 
out producing any effect upon the iris ; his eyes were exactly an 
amaurotic person's, and all noticed their lack-lustre appearance. We 
were all now convinced that total insensibility of all the senses 
existed, and I ordered him to be placed on a mattress on the floor, 
and not to be disturbed till I returned. It was now 1 o'clock, the 
process having commenced at 11 a.m." 

In the afternoon, Dr. E. being absent, the man was carried back to 
jail. He was visited and found to be in good condition. His 
diarrhoea was suspended, tee inflammation greatly reduced. He 
recollected nothing after being put to sleep, neither the pricking, 
the burning, nor the ammonia. 

" Second Experiment. — April 6th. — 1 1 o'clock a.m. The inflam- 
mation has become high during last night ; the part is hot, and 
excessively tender ; the lightest touch causes great pain. Skin hot ; 
pulse quick. I could not resist the temptation of satisfying myself 
still further and relieve him at the same time. So, turning to the 
native doctors, I said that I would again try the 'Belatee Muntur ' 
(the Europe charm), and began the process as before : he lying in 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 329 

bed. In ten minutes the mesmeric haze ( 'smoke' he always calls it) 
was produced. After half an hour he still complained of the pain in 
the inflamed part, and could not bear its being touched ; in three- 
quarters of an hour the coma was established, and I squeezed the 
inflamed part with no more effect than if it had been a bladder. 
Having business to attend to in Chandernagore, six miles off, I 
called, in passing, on the Rev. Mr. Fisher, and said that he might 
now satisfy himself by going to the hospital in my absence ; and 
that, except mesmeric means, he was at liberty to use every possible 
means to awake him or make him feel." 

Mr. Fisher and Mr. D. J. Money state that the patient was 
certainly entirely insensible, and they believe he could not have felt 
it if his leg had been cut off. At 3 p.m. Dr. E. returned, finding the 
patient as he left him, woke him up by reverse passes, blowing in his 
face and giving him water. He was free from pain and desired to 
sleep. On the 7th he complained for the first time of pain in the 
places where he had been burned and pricked. The statements of 
Dr. E are attested by the physicians and visitors. 

" Third Experiment. — April nth. — Took the sub-assistant sur- 
geon with me to-day to the jail hospital, and desired him to watch 
the time taken to produce the different effects. There is still con- 
siderable pain in the side operated upon. Pulse regular, 60 ; skin 
warm. At n o'clock a.m. I seated him on the floor with his back 
against the wall ; placed myself before him on a stool, and proceeded 
pretty much as before. The process, in one particular, was varied ; 
I leaned my elbows upon my knees, placed my mouth over the back 
of my joined hands, and breathed along their upper surface : the 
points of my fingers being pointed steadily at his eyes, nose and 
forehead, in succession. This seemed to be very effectual, and was 
done with the idea of concentrating the mesmeric influence of the 
whole body into one conductor. It was curious to observe that he 
had begun to think on the subject, and was observing the effects for 
himself, and testing his senses as we proceeded. After manipulating 
for a few minutes, he opened his eyes, looked sharply and minutely 
about him, and being asked if he saw quite well, he said, 'Oh, yes.' 
In a minute or two he repeated his inspection, and answered again 
that he saw quite distinctly ; in seven minutes he again looked about 
him, seemed surprised, and said he only saw ' smoke.' 

" In fifteen minutes he was pinched ; and when asked if any one 
was pinching him, he replied that he could not tell, as I might now 
cut a piece out of his body without his feeling it. I proceeded to 
induce the mesmeric coma as quickly as possible ; and succeeded in 
twenty minutes from the commencement. I then said to the sub- 



330 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

assistant surgeon that I would operate upon him in this state if I 
could find some of the European gentlemen to be witnesses. On 
going to Chinsurah, two miles off, I fortunately found a considerable 
party, consisting of the Baron Law de Clapernou, Governor of 
Chandernagore ; Mr. Russell, the judge; Mr. Wauchope, the magis- 
trate; J. St. Pourcain, Esq.; Mr. Clint, Principal of Hooghly Col- 
lege ; and Mr. Clermont, head-master of the Lower School : who all 
accompanied me back to the hospital. The man had fallen down 
and was lying on his back. The large gong of the jail was brought 
and struck violently within a few inches of his ear with no effect. I 
then pierced the scrotum, and threw in the injection, without any 
one being sensible of the smallest movement in his face or body. 
His limbs were quite flexible ; but on holding one of his legs in my 
hand for a few seconds, it gradually became quite rigid, and we could 
not bend it again ; the same occurred in the other leg. The arms 
were supple and lay in any position into which they were thrown ; 
and when the fore-arm was bent upon the humerus, and then let go, 
it fell upwards or downwards instantly. But on placing my united 
fingers over the ends of his, the arm remained fixed at a right angle 
in the air, and swayed to and fro, according to my movements. The 
insensibility of the iris was also tested and proved. 

"6 o'clock p.m. — Still sleeps ; most complete relaxation of all the 
limbs now exists. The legs and arms can be tossed about in every 
direction, and where they fall there they lie. Being curious to 
ascertain the effect of the artificial state on the natural process of 
inflammation, I did not awake him, but saw that the part was as 
flaccid as when the water was just withdrawn. 

"April 1 2th. — He awoke at 12 o'clock last night, spontaneously. 
Recollects nothing after going to sleep ; sees the water is gone, 
knows not how ; supposes the Dr. Sahib did it. The testicle is con- 
siderably enlarged to-day ; there is little pain, and it did not swell 
till after he awoke. He has had chronic diarrhoea for some time ; 
four and five motions a day, but has had none since yesterday fore- 
noon till this morning. Natural, artificial and diseased actions have 
therefore been all equally arrested for the last thirteen hours, — a 
practical fact of the utmost importance, which will not be lost sight 
of by myself or others, I hope. What a blessed prospect this opens 
to sufferers who may be sensible to the Mesmeric influence ! " 

I have given these statements fully, as they show how easily a 
neophyte may undertake experiments for trance and anaesthesia when 
a good subject is found. Dr. E.'s method was in accordance with 
the laws of Sarcognomy. The somnolent trance has its central 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 33 1 

locations in the temples just behind the eyes and at the epigastrium. 
The former is developed by passes from the occiput toward the eyes 
and nose — the latter by passes to the epigastrium, and holding the 
hands upon it. 

. By repeated exercise these faculties become more active, like all 
others. As, in the cultivation of psychometry, persons who were not 
aware of possessing the faculty learn in time to exercise it in a 
quick and penetrating manner, so in the cultivation of impressibility 
and somniloquence the power is increased. The subject of his first 
experiment — Madhab Kaura — became so sensitive in one month that 
Dr. E. says he " can be catalepsed in less than a minute, and the 
effects are passing strange. If, when he is standing, I point my 
fingers at him for a few seconds, his eyelids immediately droop, his 
arms fall by their mere weight to his sides, his whole body begins 
to tremble, owing to the incipient loss of command over the muscular 
system ; and if not supported he would fall down in a heap. But 
give him a moment's support, and he becomes as rigid as a statue, 
and if the centre of gravity is well poised, he will remain in any 
posture he is put into, and that for a longer time than I have waited 
to see. The muscles must be dragged out of the fixed position they 
have assumed, and allowed a moment to contract in a new attitude, 
out of the perpendicular ; for if suddenly pushed, he goes down head 
foremost like a statue from its pedestal, and his life is endangered. 
However inconvenient or grotesque the position may be, he is equally 
well satisfied, and continues to sleep quite comfortably, with his 
heels behind his neck ; and if his forehead is placed against the wall 
at an acute angle, he remains sticking out from it, like a buttress, 
longer than I have ascertained." 

This is an illustration like thousands of similar cases in the 
practice of animal magnetism of the condition of an individual in 
whom the organs of the temples (the anterior portion of the middle 
lobe) are brought into predominance, destroying the power of the 
will and making the body a plastic subject for any influence that may 
operate on the nervous system and assume its control. 

The great benefit of this condition lies in the fact that the whole 
constitution is thus brought under the control of the operator and 
in sympathy with his will and his whole condition. Hence miracu- 
lous cures are very common in patients who are placed in this state, 
and without any scientific attempt to cure, the absolute sympathy 
with a healthy and benevolent operator is itself curative, and the 
patient finds all his troubles relieved by the entranced condition. 

The reader, understanding that this condition belongs to the 
temples (above the cheekbone) and to the epigastric region, will 



332 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

perceive the necessity of concentrating the excitement from the 
opposite regions on these locations, when he wishes to make a 
passive subject, that is, from the upper occiput and the shoulders. 
There are persons in whom this anterior predominance is natural, 
and who are therefore ready-made subjects. Others more normally 
balanced may be subdued by the influence of a strong psychic 
energy, if they place themselves in a passive state, listening to 
soothing sounds or looking intently at some object near the eyes, 
which compels them to turn inward in the pathognomic line of Som- 
nolence.* 

With a natural sensitive but little effort is necessary, a steady 
gaze, a few passes, or merely placing the hand at the epigastrium or 
on the temples or front of the head is sufficient to subdue them. 
Dr. Esdaile's procedure is described by him as follows : 

" The routine followed is this. A person presents himself before 
me for the first time, and I see he has a disease requiring an opera- 
tion for its removal ; he is desired to go into another room (which is 
dark) and repose himself after his journey, not a word being said 
about an operation, as this would cause a mental excitement, destruc- 
tive to the mesmeric influence. One of my assistants follows him, 
seats himself (if unperceived, so much the better) at the head of the 
bed, and, by using the process to be hereafter described, often 
reduces the patient to a state of coma by the end of my visit ; I then 
do what is necessary, whether it be to take off or to straighten a 
limb, without his knowledge or consent." 

He gives many illustrations of their insensibility. A woman 
named Gendo was mesmerized, and muriatic acid was freely applied 
by Dr. Finch " to a sore covering all the right temple, without her 
showing the smallest degree of consciousness ; and it was with great 
difficulty that I woke her after he had failed to do so." While being 
cauterized her pulse sunk from 88 to 80. A few days afterwards, a 
sceptical Dr. Bedford touched the woman's sore on the temples, 
when she was awake, with the glass stopper of the muriatic acid, 
and as she did not immediately cry out he thought he had proved 
that her insensibility was natural and not mesmeric, but soon she 
said that her head was on fire and walked about distractedly, in great 
agony, until Dr. E. bathed her head, threw her into the trance and 
cut off the tubercles round the sore without her knowledge. Waked 
up after half an hour, she had even forgotten the burning. 

The labors of Dr. E. being directed entirely to overpowering his 

* I have not been disposed to practise such experiments, because they place 
the subject in a passive, controllable condition, and my scientific aim has been to 
practise investigations in which the phenomena would be unaffected by my own 
opinions. 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 2>35 

subjects, making them passive and unconscious or sometimes imita- 
tive, he never developed the psychometric, clairvoyant and prevoyant 
powers, but displayed the highest degree of controlling power. He 
considered his patients of too low a grade for intellectual phenomena. 
The process he used is worth quoting, as he found it successful and 
it accords with scientific principles : 

" Desire the patient to lie down and compose himself to sleep, 
taking care, if you wish to operate, that he does not know your inten- 
tion ; this object may be gained by saying that it is only a trial, for 
fear and expectation are destructive to the physical impression 
required. [They act on the base of the brain.] Bring the crown of 
the patient's head to the end of the bed, and seat yourself so as to 
be able to bring your face into contact with his, and extend your 
hands to the pit Of the stomach, when it is wished ; make the room 
dark, enjoin quiet, and then shutting your patient's eyes, begin to 
pass both your hands in the shape of claws, slowly within an inch of 
the surface, from the back of the head to the pit of the stomach 
[this is very appropriate] ; dwelling for several minutes over the eyes, 
nose and mouth, and then passing down each side of the neck, go 
downwards to the pit of the stomach, keeping your hands suspended 
there for some time. [This is proper : the region of the eyes, 
nose and upper part of the face is highly conducive to an amiable 
and intelligent somnolence ; but the impression should not extend 
below the upper lip, as the lower part of the face has an exciting 
influence. A strong impression at the epigastrium is proper to 
deepen the impression and procure a profound sleep. A more in- 
tellectual somnolence would have been procured if he had concen- 
trated the impression .a little higher, at the end of the sternum.] 
Repeat this process steadily for a quarter of an hour, breathing 
gently on the head and eyes all the time. [This is not really 
necessary, but aids the effect by imposing the nervaura of the 
operator on the subject. For the same reason, it is often sufficient 
merely to place the hand on the forehead. The nervaura of a strong 
brain overpowers a weak and passive one in contact or even without 
it. A strong operator controls the passive by mere presence and 
force of character. That incongruous medley of vague assertion 
called ' Christian Science ' was imposed upon a class of credulous 
persons by the great magnetic energy and dominating force of its 
first propagandist. The aura of a strong brain penetrating a passive 
one brings the latter not only into sympathy but under the control 
of the will, which extends its dominion beyond the nervous system 
to which it belongs into any nervous system which yields to it.] 
The longitudinal passes may then be advantageously terminated, by 



334 ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

placing both hands gently but firmly on the pit of the stomach and 
sides. The perspiration and saliva seem also to aid the effect on the 
system. [Whatever he may mean by ' sides,' it is not appropriate to 
place the hands on any part that could be called sides, unless it be 
the sides of the chest, in its upper part. On the sides of the 
abdomen distinctly below the ribs, the influence would be subduing 
and relaxing, and this influence appears in his reports.] 

" It is better not to test the patient's condition by speaking to 
him, but by gently trying if the cataleptic tendency exists in the 
arms. [This is giving up the intellectual for the passive phenomena. 
Somniloquence (sleep-talking) should be encouraged if we want 
intellectual phenomena, and the impression should be made at the 
lower end of the sternum, instead of the abdomen.] If the arms 
remain fixed in any position they are left in, and require some force 
to move them out of every new position, the process has been suc- 
cessful ; the patient may soon after be called upon by name, and 
pricked, and if he does not awake, the operation may be proceeded 
with. It is impossible to say to what precise extent the insensibility 
will befriend us. The trance is sometimes completely broken by the 
knife, but it can occasionally be reproduced by continuing the 
process, and then the sleeper remembers nothing ; he has only been 
disturbed by a nightmare, of which on waking he retains no recollec- 
tion." 

Catalepsy is an abnormal state in which I perceive no benefit and 
have avoided its production ; but it is a prominent matter among 
some of the medical dabblers in magnetism who are not seeking 
curative or beneficial effects. 

Dr. Esdaile had to seek efficient means for removing the profound 
cataleptic trances that he produced, and not understanding the prin- 
ciples of Sarcognomy, which would suggest passes from the abdomen 
to the shoulders and the crown of the head, he resorted to currents 
of air and water which have a cooling and dispersive effect. " Blow- 
ing in the eyes " and " pouring water from a height " were used to 
release the brain. One of his patients being helplessly cataleptic 
and rigid, " I then blew on his neck, thereby immediately releasing 
it." " One arm was freed in the same way ; then the other." "I 
also showed that my breath had no specific effect, by doing the same 
thing with a fan ; a current of air being all that was required to 
dissolve the rigidity of the muscles." Dispersive passes are the 
controlling agents ; and a breeze would not have had the same effect 
independent of the operator. 

Cold is also potent to resist the magnetic influence, being a tonic 
and an antagonist to impressibility and sensibility. This he 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 335 

observed, and states as follows : " On several occasions I have 
entranced persons standing, stripped them naked, and catalepsed them 
in the most painful postures imaginable, and in these they would 
remain an incredible length of time ; but let a little cold water be 
squirted from a distance on any member, and it became instantly 
relaxed. If both arms were fixed perpendicularly in the air, one 
after the other was shot down instantly by a slight stream of water ; 
and if it was directed to the calf of the leg, the person fell as if he 
had been hamstrung ; or if the body was catalepsed out of the per- 
pendicular, squirting water on the loins would send the patient head 
foremost against the ground. Blowing on or rubbing any part had 
the same effect ; but the general torpor is often too deep to exhibit 
those sensibilities, and such persons are awaked with great difficulty 
by the use of all the demesmerizing agents." 

If we would avoid this extreme mesmeric prostration, we should 
not suppress entirely the functions of the shoulders and upper 
occiput, but, by applying the hands there occasionally, sustain the 
vital stamina. 

Our knowledge of the effects of cold teaches us that for all 
nervauric and psychic experiments there should be a warm atmos- 
phere in the apartment, and I would add, there must be moral warmth 
as well as physical. 

The most remarkable claim for animal magnetism, the power of 
impregnating water with a vital influence, was verified by Dr. Esdaile 
with a female patient named Abunga, as follows: "In the presence 
of my hospital attendants, I to-day took an ounce of water from the 
common reservoir and mesmerized it, putting the like quantity of 
plain water into another glass. We then went into the woman's 
ward, and I gave the plain water, at first very slowly, asking her if it 
had any taste ? ' It was only plain water/ she said ; I then gave her 
the other ; after waiting some time, she said it was different from 
the first, that it was sharp to the tongue and created a warmth in 
the stomach. Almost immediately her countenance began to 
change ; she insisted upon getting up to walk, and I immediately 
saw that she was a somnambulist ; after taking a few staggering 
steps, she would have fallen, but was prevented and taken back to 
bed, where she instantly sank into the mesmeric coma, and remained 
so for hours." Next day he repeated the experiment with similar 
results, to gratify a clergyman, and on the following day varied it by 
sending a gentleman who knew nothing of mesmerism to give the 
woman a vial of mesmerized water and report the effects. In both 
cases she was thoroughly mesmerized by the water and had fantastic 
visions. He reports seven other similar experiments, those on 



33^ ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

patients proving very beneficial, and adds that it would be tedious to 
report his numerous other cases. Such experiments are very familar 
to magnetic practitioners, and in this country a great number of 
patients have been successfully treated by magnetized paper. 

Space forbids any extensive quotations from Dr. Esdaile's interest- 
ing work, which faithfully records his experience with 91 surgical 
and medical cases. 

To satisfy himself that there was a personal magnetic influence in 
his experiments, independent of imagination or the impression made 
by seeing him, he obtained a blind man for a subject, and operated 
upon him by passes, and also by a steady gaze at a distance of 
twenty yards, producing in each case the cataleptic unconsciousness. 
To complete the demonstration, he operated upon the man at the 
hospital while he was sitting, engaged in conversation, there being a 
wall between them. In seventeen minutes the man ceased to speak, 
" and burst into a fit of convulsive crying ; I now pulled him by the 
hair, and he fell back like a person just dead, and slept for three 
hours." 

This power of control was once displayed by Dr. E. in court, when 
a man was on trial at Hooghly, for kidnapping a boy by magnetic 
influence. To show the possibility of this, three subjects were 
brought into the court, and he showed that he could magnetize and 
lead them anywhere unconsciously, but when brought back they 
would deny that anything had occurred when he woke them. Of 
one of them he says : — 

" Madhab was put in the dark, and he did not see me in entering. 
The judge and Moularies engaged him in conversation, and while he 
was speaking with animation and intelligence, I catalepsed him from 
behind while in the usual praying attitude of a prisoner at the bar, 
and in a moment he ceased to speak or hear. I was told by those in 
front that his lips moved as if in the act of speaking after he ceased 
to be heard. He was so deeply affected that all motive power was 
nearly extinguished, and I had to push him from behind with my 
finger to make him walk ; he walked a few yards with difficulty, and 
then becoming suddenly rigid from head to foot, a slight push sent 
him headlong down upon the floor, in a most alarming manner ; the 
fit of rigidity was so instantaneous that I was not aware of it. He 
was revived with some difficulty and fortunately was not injured by 
his fall." 

This exposition of animal magnetism in India will be instructive 
to those who wish to experiment in abnormal phenomena ; but a" 
master of Sarcognomy will readily perceive how much more might 
have been accomplished by science in the treatment of diseases. 



CHAP. XVI.] REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 33/ 

There has been but little of the scientific spirit in the cultivation 
of animal magnetism ; and its cultivation by the Faculty under the 
name of hypnotism has not been in the scientific spirit of developing 
truth, but rather in the spirit of dogmatism, endeavoring to suppress 
all the facts outside of a rigid materialism, and thus ignoring its 
wonderful power in healing diseases that defy medicine, and develop- 
ing a wonderful intellectual power. 

The rationale of the mesmeric somnolence and the suggestible 
condition cultivated as hypnotism has not been developed either by 
the scientific or the unscientific students of this subject. 

Mesmeric somnolence is mainly produced by the faculty of Fasci- 
nation in the operator (which belongs to the lower occiput, in which 
all the dominating faculties are located), — a faculty manifested with 
great power by serpents. This faculty is correlative with that of 
Somnolence, upon which it operates to elicit its action as dignity 
elicits reverence. Those with a large occiput have great mesmeric 
power or capacity for control. 

The medical faculty, to avoid recognizing psychic powers, have 
confined themselves to operating through vision to break down the 
independent self-protective energies of the subject, without under- 
standing the philosophy of their method. The faculty of vision, 
exercised by the eyes and the perceptive convolutions of the brow, 
is correlative with the energetic faculties of the lower occiput, and 
so closely associated with them as to have led Ferrier to believe 
that vision was actually located in the lower occiput, in the gyrus 
angularis. Vision rouses our energies and vice versa, our energies 
give power and activity to vision. The law of vision is incessant 
change. The monotony of a fixed impression destroys the power of 
every sensitive and perceptive faculty. Hence the fixation of the 
eyes upon any object deadens the perceptive power and tends to 
suspend all intellectual action by paralyzing its basis, while at the 
same time it greatly enfeebles or nearly paralyzes the lower occipital 
region, of which the gyms angularis is a centre. This occipital 
paralysis makes a passive character unable to resist fascination, 
authority or command ; and when there is not much natural inde- 
pendence or force of character, the subject is reduced to entire 
passiveness. The credencive impressibility or credulity (accepting 
whatever is asserted) belongs to the ideal region extending from 
Sensibility to Imagination, Marvellousness and Spirituality. The 
antagonism to this, which protects from credulity, is in the skeptical 
region just posterior to Combativeness, and when the lower occiput 
is paralyzed there is no protection against an unlimited credulity. 
If the upper occiput is also paralyzed there is no protection against 
an unlimited impressibility. 



33$ ANIMAL MAGNETISM [CHAP. XVI. 

Thus we see the suggestive conditions of the fashionable hypno- 
tism are due to an impairment of the normal strength and dignity 
of character, — a demoralizing process, which is the very opposite of 
true education and moral improvement. Hence I have avoided the 
use of such processes. I do not deny, however, that the practitioner 
of Sarcognomy may be justified in using this paralyzing process as 
an accessory, in cases of disease, to bring the patient more com- 
pletely under his power. The fixed gaze at an object near his nose 
will greatly increase the passive impressibility of a patient. 

P. S. The history of Mesmerism is one of the saddest illustra- 
tions of the power of bigotry, aided by college authority, to interrupt, 
discourage and suppress the cultivation of Sciences which are not on 
the animal plane of strict materialism. No amount of scientific 
proof, of philosophic exposition, or of practical success can overcome 
this organized stolidity, the basis of which is the strength of the 
lower animal nature. The unfailing and benevolent demonstrations 
of animal magnetism from the early ages of Egypt and Greece to 
the present time have not induced the medical colleges to investi- 
gate its cures and seek their philosophy. German and French litera- 
ture give ample illustration of its merits, and in England we have 
the writings of Gregory, Elliotson, Esdaile, Colquhoun, Ashburner, 
Engledon, Townshend, Sandby and many others, with the moral 
support of such men as Sir Bulwer Lytton, Sir Wm. Hamilton, 
Archbishop Whateley, Miss Martineau, Sir Thos. Brisbane (President 
of the Royal Society of Edinburgh) and many others, but the attitude 
of the colleges has not been changed. It would seem as thousfh a 
college corporation is a remnant of the dark ages, impenetrable to 
modern civilization. 

Enlightened citizens, however, will see that, crude and unscientific 
as it is, the healing power of magnetic practitioners often transcends 
very far the power of collegiate medicine. The change from un- 
scientific magnetism to Scientific Sarcognomy will make a still 
greater contrast to the limited resources of the old colleges. Every 
practitioner of magnetic treatment can furnish a list of cures which 
could not be effected by the old faculty, and of lives saved which 
collegiate practice had abandoned in despair. 

In Davey's little manual, the " Practical Mesmerist," we find his 
authenticated cures of six cases of dumbness beyond the power of 
the faculty (one deaf and dumb), one of deafness of twelve years, 
one of painless amputation of the arm, seven of painless extraction 
of teeth, one of sciatica, two of rheumatism, one of neuralgia of the 
leg, and one of paralysis, — all of which the faculty had failed to re- 
lieve, — two of tic douleureux, one of epilepsy, one of nervous debility 
incurable by the faculty, one of hopeless insanity, one of a diseased 
knee pronounced incurable, one of locked jaw, one of rheumatism 
of twenty-five years (Sir T. M. Brisbane) incurable by the faculty, 
one of Archbishop Whateley (rheumatism) after the doctors had failed. 
A very large number of cures are reported by the Scottish Mesmeric 
Association, the Dublin Mesmeric Association and the London 
Mesmeric Infirmary. 



CHAPTER XVII. 

MECHANO-THERAPY — INCLUDING MASSAGE. 

Mechanotherapy a quackery — Works of Schreiber and Murrell — French 
names for massage — Pedantic trivialities — Superiority of methods of barbarians, 
Sandwich Islanders, Chinese, Egyptians — Painful processes of mechano-therapy — 
Superiority of those not taught by the colleges — Old practice of Drs. Balfour of 
Edinburgh, Grosvenor and Cleobury of Oxford — Greatrakes' cures in 1662 — 
Collegiate opposition — Liberal sentiments of Hoffmann — Professional prejudice — 
Mechanical benefits of massage — Pretentious pedantry of the books — Ignorance 
of Ling, the author of Swedish movement-cure — Practice recommended by 
Schreiber — Mechanical treatment of narcotic poisoning — Transfer of vital force 
— Treatment of sprains — Mechanical treatment of the tonsils, the womb, tumors, 
oedema and diseases of the eye — Miscellaneous imperfect treatment — Superiority 
of the nervauric — Professional treatment of sprains — Concussion with the hands 
— Japanese shampooing — Summary estimate of mechano-therapy. 



The treatment of disease by vital power applied with the hand 
appears to a mind afflicted with mental amaurosis a mere mechanical 
proceeding. Such is the condition of mind in the old medical colleges. 
That the patient is affected without contact does not enlighten them, 
for the patient may be controlled by imagination. That blind men 
are successfully treated without contact ; that patients are affected 
through walls by an unseen operator, or by an operator at a great 
distance ; and finally that the vital emanation (which they deny) will 
produce the same effects when lodged in water, so as to mesmerize 
the subject, — these decisive facts they simply evade, ignore, and refuse 
their publication, holding fast to their ignorance. The very decisive 
fact that a piece of writing will convey all the psychic, physiological and 
pathological conditions of the writer to one experienced in psychom- 
etry is also ignored, notwithstanding my extensive publication and its 
acceptance among the enlightened. 

A natural consequence of this mental amaurosis is that the gentle- 
men who see nothing but mechanical forces in manual treatment have 
made a. vigorous attempt, with no little industry, to show what mechan- 
ical treatment will do, and to impose their mechanical notions on the 
public as a complete development of science. 

Hence we have Meckano-Tkerapy, of which massage is nearly the 
sum total, and though comparatively a meagre affair, it deserves some 
attention, as it has been cultivated so vigorously and all its possibilities 
developed by about two hundred medical authors, — not one of whom 
I believe has had sufficient sagacity and independence to study nature 



340 INCLUDING MASSAGE. [CHAP. XVII. 

in a candid manner and get rid of the collegiate amaurosis, so as to 
recognize physiological effects produced without mechanical contact. 

The best and most original work that I have seen on Mechano- 
Therapy, that of Dr. Schreiber,* proprietor of a sanitarium at Alpen- 
heim, Austria, is worthy of a review to show the best results of med- 
ical experience in mechanical treatment in Europe. 

Massage, derived from the French masser, to knead, is not suffi- 
ciently comprehensive to include Mechanical Therapia in general, 
but is used as a popular expression for the manual treatment to which 
many physicians have endeavored to give an undue importance. Con- 
sidering-the false principle which pervades it, and its false assumption 
of being all that science can recognize in manual treatment, I think it 
not unjust to call it a system of Mechanical Quackery, well contrived 
to deceive the public and to hinder the progress of science. Quack- 
ery is a proper term for false principles, combined with pedantic tech- 
nicalities and a disregard of demonstrated science. The benefit of 
massage or rubbing was at least as well understood by Hippocrates as 
by the two hundred verbose recent writers on the subject. He says : 
" Rubbing can bind and loosen, can make flesh and cause parts to 
waste. Hard rubbing binds, soft rubbing loosens, much rubbing 
causes parts to waste, moderate rubbing makes them grow." 

Massage — according to Prof. Wm. Murrell, F.R.C.P. of London, 
who follows Prof. Von Mosengeil, and refers also to Mesger, Reibmayr, 
Estradere, Norstrom, Gopadge, Zabludowski, Lee and Graham — is 
a very scientific process, which requires two years to leant it well, and 
which, zmless controlled by the physicians, will degenerate into " arrant 
quackery" He is evidently utterly and wilfully ignorant of the bril- 
liant cures by hand-treatment, which occur without the aid of the 
regular physician ; and his assertion that two years' training is neces- 
sary is in ludicrous contrast to his own statement of what massage is, 
— viz. I. " Effleurage, — a stroking movement with the palm of the 
hand, passing with various degrees of force over the surface centrip- 
etally. It is of little value in itself, but produces good results when 
combined in various ways with other procedures." 

2. " Next comes petrissage, which is more important." "It consists 
essentially in picking up a portion of muscle or other tissue with both 
hands, or the fingers of one hand, and subjecting it to firm pressure, 
rolling it at the same time between the fingers and the subjacent 
tissues. The hands must move simultaneously and in opposite direc- 
tions. The thumb and fingers are wide apart, and the whole muscle 
is taken up between the fingers and firmly pressed and rolled. The 

*" A Manual of Treatment by Massage and Methodical Muscular Exercise, by 
Joseph Schreiber, M.D. [member of many societies omitted]. Translated by Walter 
Mendelson, M.D., of New York. Philadelphia: Lea Brothers & Co., 1S87." 



CHAP. XVII.] MECHANOTHERAPY 34 1 

movement is made from below upwards, and the parts are squeezed 
in much the same way that one would squeeze out the contents of a 
sausage. Prof. Von Mosengeil always impresses on his pupils the 
necessity for ' working upstairs,' that is, from the extremities towards 
the centre of the body. The skin must move with the hands, or the 
operation is a painful one for the patient. What one hand misses the 
other takes up, so that all the tissues are subjected to the influence. 
It is of importance to proceed uniformly and not to jump from spot 
to spot." 

3. "The next process \s friction or massage a frictions which is per- 
formed with the tips of the fingers, and is employed chiefly in the 
treatment of affections of the joints. It has nothing to do with what 
we ordinarily understand by friction. It is always associated with 
ejflenrage, and it must be performed quickly and with considerable 
facility or it is well-nigh useless. 

" Tapotement is a kind of percussion which may be made with the 
tips of the fingers, their palmar aspects, the palms of the hands, the 
back of the half-closed hand, the ulnar or radial border of the hand, 
or with the hand flexed, so as to contain, when brought into contact 
with the surface of the body, a cushion of air." 

In all this there is nothing that could not be imparted to an intelli- 
gent person in an hour. To demand two years' instruction for these 
simple operations is a piece of pompous assumption, and the whole 
statement aims at nothing but mechanical movement of the fluids, and 
shows a profound ignorance of the true principles and philosophy of 
manual treatment. In fact, most of the treatises on massage that I 
have seen seem to be a matter of technical pedantry, showing an 
utter ignorance of the best effects of manual treatment, the rapid re- 
lief of pain, the increase of vitality and the transfer of curative energy 
from the operator, — in comparison with which the multiplied insig- 
nificant petty details of modes of manipulation appear as childish as 
pedantic. One of our most sensible writers on massage, Rossbach, 
expresses his contempt for " all those ingenious inventions of trivial 
subdivisions," and Schreiber says : " Every one who has devoted any 
time to mechano-therapy will gladly subscribe to Rossbach's senti- 
ments." 

It must have been pedantic trivialities indeed which disgusted 
Schreiber and Rossbach : for Schreiber himself indulges habitually 
in the most trivial details, as if instructing a dull ignoramus. He 
begins his instruction thus : " Pressure may be performed in a variety 
of ways : one, two or three fingers being used, according to the size 
of the part to be treated and the force which it is intended to use. 
The participation of the little finger is only apparent: for, being two 



342 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

centimetres shorter than the ring finger, it cannot touch the part to be 
manipulated simultaneously with' the others ; its feebleness, too, would 
render it at least of little use. The index finger, to be sure, is also 
shorter than the middle finger, but only by one centimetre, and it 
therefore more readily adapts itself to the middle and ring fingers ; " 
and so on ad infinitum, — all illustrated by numerous engravings to show 
the pressing, tapping, thrusting, hacking, pinching, squeezing, rubbing, 
stroking, etc., etc., and at the end of his work, the bibliography refers 
to 187 works on this subject. Alas, we may say that, with one twen- 
tieth of all this industry, guided by original and rational thinking, 
we might have had splendid results. 

Very few lessons are necessary to show an intelligent person how 
to disperse pain and inflammation by nervauric passes and gentle 
manipulation, or to invigorate the languid circulation and enfeebled 
vitality of organs. In all of these processes the vitality imparted by 
the hand of the operator is vastly more important than the mechani- 
cal effects of pressure and motion. Under the best conditions of 
operation the most beneficent and brilliant effects are produced with- 
out any contact. Dr. Schreiber, a much more intelligent author, 
maintains that a person of good understanding can acquire massage 
by himself if he studies the physiological effects, while mere imita- 
tions of methods of procedure will never lead to success. He thinks 
therefore that every physician should be ready to practise massage, 
especially as " the mechanical treatment of acute muscular rheumatism 
or of a recent neuralgia takes decidedly less time than any otJiermetJiod ; 
for, while many days and even weeks are often consumed trying all 
sorts of medicines, a cure might have been effected in these cases by 
mechanical means at a single sitting." This is very true as to 
the results ; but it is not mechano-therapy which is so prompt, — it is 
the vital influence which is smuggled in under that name. The hand 
accomplishes what a block of leather-covered wood cannot, and this 
every intelligent friend of massage knows. Dr. Schreiber distinctly 
states it thus : " Many devices have been invented for saving the 
manipulator's strength, such as Klemm's muscle-beater, the elastic 
rods with rubber balls of Graham, and the machines run by steam of 
Zander. All these are well enough in their way for treating certain 
phases of disease, but in general they may be said to be wholly inade- 
quate to our needs, and are quite apt to degenerate into mere play- 
things." The hand, he says, " surpasses the best of instruments, and 
the skilled operator needs no other aid, no matter what kind of manip- 
ulations he may wish to perform." 

But, in their ignorance of vital laws, physicians endeavor to believe 
that the superiority of the hand in massage is due to mechanical 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 343 

reasons, and with equal blindness they think the superiority of the 
hand as an electrode is due to its mechanical structure. 

The processes recommended by Dr. Murrell as massage are far 
inferior in effect to those of barbarous races — the lomi-lomi of the 
Sandwich Islanders — which, as Nordhoff says, relieves all soreness and 
weariness, and produces a healthful, refreshing sleep. The untaught 
skill and vital sympathy of these people is vastly superior to the 
technical stupidities of European massage. The toogi-toogi and fota 
of the natives of the Island of Tonga are stated to produce the same 
pleasant effects as the Sandwich lomi-lomi. In fact, a sympathetic 
benevolent temperament in the operator, acting in accordance with 
benevolent common-sense or intuition, is far superior to the mechani- 
cal processes dictated by the dogmatism which is superciliously blind to 
the whole nature of the processes of healing and their vital philosophy. 

To relieve the suffering by kind manipulations is the instinctive 
impulse of benevolence, and has been practised by all nations. 
Chinese manuscripts near five thousand years ago contained direc- 
tions for manual treatment, and I do not believe that the profuse litera- 
ture of massage of the last twenty-five years has made any very im- 
portant advance beyond the knowledge of the old barbarians. What 
I have read on the subject has been in some cases so uniformly and 
pedantically stupid, that I have not felt that I could afford to spend 
much time on such literature. 

The delightful effects of manipulation in baths have been described 
by many writers in glowing colors. Nordhoff, describing the lomi-lomi, 
says : " To you thereupon comes a stout native with soft, fleshy hands, 
but a strong grip, and, beginning with your head and working down 
slowly over the whole body, seizes and squeezes with a quite peculiar art 
every tired muscle, working and kneading with indefatigable patience, 
until in half an hour, whereas you were weary and -worn out, you find 
yourself fresh, — all soreness and weariness absolutely gone, and mind 
and body soothed to a healthy and refreshing sleep." This, accord- 
ing to Murrell, has nothing in common with massage. So much the 
worse for the latter, if it is eclipsed by the methods of barbarian 
races ! 

Schreiber, too, confesses as follows, that massage is an unpleasant 
affair in comparison with Egyptian baths : — 

" Savary in his letters from Egypt, in describing a bath taken by 
him there, speaks of the delightful feelings produced by passing 
through a series of apartments of graded temperatures, of being sur- 
rounded by scented vapors, of having his body scoured, pressed and 
kneaded, and his limbs stretched and his joints cracked, of being 
enveloped in clean linen, laid upon a soft couch, and having all parts 



344 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

of his body dried by the tender hands of children. When finally he 
mentions the coffee and tobacco which contribute to the pleasure of 
the massage ; when he breaks forth in hymns of praise on the delicious 
feeling of sensuous ease produced by massage ; when he speaks of the 
ease with which the blood seems to circulate, of the feeling of refresh- 
ment that ensues, and of the sweet sensations and delightful ideas 
that arise in the mind ; and when finally he allows himself to declare 
that in fancy one overlooks the whole world, which seems to be at 
one's feet, and to grow more bright and refulgent under the observer's 
eye, and that everywhere only the laughing face of fortune is seen, — 
all I can say is, that unfortunately mechano-therapy has nothing in 
common with these beautiful impressions and delightful sensations. 
It usually causes a good deal of pain, and it is only in the popular ac- 
ceptation of the term that the patient 'sees stars.' After his daily 
manipulation the patient generally feels exhausted, often experiencing 
pain for twenty minutes or half an hour, which gradually disappears. 
The time for the repetition of his treatment is anticipated with fear 
and trembling, and only the conviction of its efficacy, or the fact that 
the cure has already begun and is visibly progressing, gives him cour- 
age and endurance to stand the torture imposed. In certain diseases, 
as constipation, neurasthenia and choera, it is true there is no pain, 
or none worth mentioning, connected with the cure ; in other cases, 
however, the patients cry out aloitd, shed tears and even vigorously 
resist the physician, with arms and legs, — a proceeding which must 
not, however, be considered as sufficient ground on which to base a 
charge of assault and battery." 

Is this benevolent and skilful treatment ? Is the painful nature of 
a process or the disgusting character of a medicine any proof of its 
superior merit ? Have the magnetic healers any such confessions to 
make ? On the contrary, it is the charming and prompt relief they 
give which has enabled them to overcome the consolidated mass of 
prejudice nourished by pedantic colleges, flourishing in the universal 
ignorance of psychic science and the higher departments of biology, 
and enforced by the jealous animosity of their medical competitors. 

That massage processes mechanically assist the circulation as effi- 
ciently as active exercise is quite apparent, and that improvement of 
local and general health should follow even if the operator had no 
superior endowments is obvious enough, and has been verified by 
careful experiments in massage. The investigators however, fail to 
see that there is any cause but the mechanical. They have shown 
that when a muscle has been exhausted of contractility by Faradic 
currents, a few minutes' massage restores its contractility, and Zablud- 
owski has proven this also. upon the muscles of a frog. The vigor of 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 345 

muscles which have not been exhausted is increased by massage, sur- 
passing in this respect the effect of electric currents, and hence pugi- 
lists in training undergo considerable rubbing ; and rubbing has been 
extensively associated with bathing, as an invigorating luxury. Man- 
kind for ages have extensively used this natural treatment while it 
has been neglected by the profession. 

In many cases in which electricity has failed to be of any value, 
massage is a most efficient agent, but the writers are not aware of the 
great value of the touch or mere contact independent of mechanical 
action. Those who understand the vital influence and know how to 
give it have not acquired such knowledge from the colleges, and are 
therefore jealously denounced as charlatans for performing cures 
where the faculty have failed. Dr. S. Weir Mitchell of Philadelphia 
says : " It is many years since I first saw in this city general massage 
used by a charlatan in a case of progressive paralysis. The tempo- 
rary results he obtained were so remarkable that I began soon after 
to employ it in locomotor ataxy, in which it sometimes proved of 
signal value, as in other forms of spinal and local disease." If Dr. 
Mitchell should become acquainted with Therapeutic Sarcognomy he 
would make a still greater gain. 

That massage of the abdomen should be beneficial, as claimed in 
constipation and dyspepsia, is reasonable, as such manipulations accord 
with Sarcognomy ; but in treatment guided by Sarcognomy the abdom- 
inal surface does not absorb all attention while the spinal region, the 
source of its power, is neglected. 

The annals of what is called Magnetic Treatment are full of the 
most marvellous cures of rheumatism, neuralgia and every variety of 
acute and of lingering diseases, which sometimes vanish in a few 
hours or a few minutes. All this experience has been contemp- 
tuously ignored by the old colleges, even when coming from such dis- 
tinguished physicians as Dr. Elliotson and Dr. Esdaile, because it was 
not in their curriculum, and they have brought forward in opposition 
their mechanical ideas of massage in which they unconsciously enjoy 
the benefit of vital forces and sympathies, and thus take to themselves 
more credit than mechanical action deserves. The persons whom 
they employ for massage are sometimes skilled in animal magnetism 
and accomplish much more than is expected ; but if they perform 
any marvellous cures they must conceal them from the faculty or be 
punished for their temerity. A patient in a Boston hospital, suffering 
from pneumonia with a very high temperature, fell under the care of 
an intelligent attendant who had attended a course of my lectures. 
Benevolence prompted him to do what he could, and he gave great 
relief, lowering the temperature remarkably. The next morning the 



346 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVIL 

physician was astonished and commented on the case emphatically to 
his pupils as presenting a most marvellous, unprecedented change, 
for which he could not account. The guilty healer was wise enough 
to conceal his agency. 

Dr. Wm. Balfour of Edinburgh, in 1 8 16, published " Observations 
with Cases illustrative of a New and Simple and Expeditious Mode 
of curing Rheumatism and Sprains without in the least debilitating 
the System : " which was really a very good treatise on what is now 
called Massage, but was neglected for half a century by the profes- 
sion. One of his cases is worth mentioning, though less remarkable 
than many contemporary cures made outside of professional ranks. 
It is the case of a French lady of Edinburgh, Madame Rey De La 
Ruaz, a hereditary sufferer from gout from her childhood. When 
first seen by Dr. Balfour, he says : " All her fingers were extremely 
weak, some of them swelled, others so exquisitely painful that she 
could not suffer them to be touched ; she could not lift a wine-glass 
with one hand, but she contrived to do it with both, by turning their 
backs to each other. Both wrist joints were stiff and painful, but 
the left could not be moved without the greatest suffering. Both 
elbow-joints were greatly affected ; the left did not possess half the 
natural range of flexion and extension. On each humerus above the 
inner condyle, a large tumor was situated, so painful that it could not 
be touched without making the patient cry out. All the muscles 
covering the humeri were, from origin to insertion, rigid, knotted, 
thickened. The deltoid muscle felt like two boards ; the connections 
of the clavicles with the shoulders, and the joints at their flexures, 
the patient could not suffer to be touched ; she could not lift her hand 
to her head Her head and a small part of the anterior por- 
tion of the trunk of her body were indeed the only parts free from 
disease, and she had not walked a step for eight years." 

Dr. Balfour restored her to health in five months by his processes 
of compression, percussion and friction, without using any medicine 
but a few laxative pills and "a saline julep when she was feverish." 
In his enthusiasm he said : " I congratulate all mankind that a cure 
is at last discovered for one of the most harassing and painful 
diseases to which human nature is liable, — a disease in its nature so 
obstinate as to have hitherto set at defiance the utmost efforts of the 
healing art." But Balfour's cures received no more attention than 
those of the magnetic healers ; yet now, after seventy years, rheu- 
matism, neuralgia, neurasthenia, hypochondria, hysteria, anaesthesia, 
hyperaesthesia, chorea, palsy, sprains, glandular enlargements, stiff 
joints, diseases of the eye, cerebral congestion, hemorrhoids, chlor- 
osis, mellituria, metritis, dyspepsia, constipation, phthisis and some 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 347 

forms of poisoning are claimed to be " suited to mechano-therapy " 
by Dr. Schreiber. Murrell claims for it immense value in spinal 
irritations, in relaxed corpulence, in anaemia, in convalescence gen- 
erally, and in certain stages of syphilis, especially in women who 
have been much reduced by the disease. In sciatica, Max Schuller 
of Berlin claims its superiority over all agents commonly employed, 
making cures in less than three weeks. Its great value in diseases 
of the joints has been illustrated by Prof. Von Mosengeil and others, 
and was forcibly illustrated in a work published, as far back as 1825, 
by Surgeons Grosvenor and Cleobury of Oxford, England, which at 
that time attracted many patients. 

After recommending massage for uterine diseases, Dr. Murrell 
concludes with a protest against any manual treatment not performed 
by an operator under the absolute control of a physician, ignoring 
entirely the fact that the most brilliant cures by manual treatment 
have been in cases in which physicians had nothing to do with the 
treatment, such as those of Greatrakes, published in 1666, which he 
Has read without apparently learning anything from a treatment more 
remarkable in its results than anything he refers to. To his mechanical 
modes of thought, the operations of Greatrakes were a mystery. 

Greatrakes, a Protestant gentleman holding official positions in 
Ireland, began in 1662 to cure cases of scrofula, which he continued 
for three years ; then began to cure agues, in which he was surprised 
at his own success, and afterward engaged in the treatment of all 
kinds of diseases, not only in Ireland, but in England, to which he 
was called by the Earl of Orrery. He simply placed his hands 
upon the patients, using prayer, and healed them rapidly, never 
receiving any compensation. Eminent persons of the nobility, 
divines, physicians and scientists attested his marvellous cures. The 
philosopher Robert Boyle, the astronomer Flamstead, bishops and 
mayors proclaimed his marvellous success. Among other instances, 
Dean Rust mentions that he had seen him cure " cases of scrofula 
which had for years set at defiance all the doctors ; cancerous swell- 
ings in women's breasts; disperse lumps and hard tumors at once; 
heal ulcerous sores of long standing ; cure deafness, lameness, dim- 
ness of sight ; banish epilepsy ; and cause scabs which covered the 
whole body, and which for many years had been counted incurable, 
to peel off and disappear, leaving the skin sound and healthy." 

Nothing to compare with this has ever been reported of the me- 
chano-therapy called Massage. Yet the colleges have never inves- 
tigated these unquestionable facts or brought them before their pupils, 
who have been kept in profound ignorance of what the colleges did 
not understand and could not teach because they proscribed it. 



34§ MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

Anthropology clears up the mystery of marvellous cures by ex- 
plaining the power of the vital nervaura and the psychic elements 
which medical scientists have ignored, — psychic faculties which in 
their full development surpass all other curative agencies. 

How different has been the spirit of the colleges generally from 
that of the most eminent physician of his day, F. Hoffmann, 
medical professor for 48 years at the end of the 17th and beginning 
of the 1 8th century, who said in his " System of Rational Medicine " : 
" An imponderable but material agent, aether (the active moving 
force), animates all tissues of the body and presides over physical 
phenomena in every domain of creation. . . . The living organism 
exercises the functions peculiar to itself in consequence of qualities 
inherent in all animal matter, which qualities are animated by a 
motive force emanating in the form of a certain peculiar material 
which is secreted by the brain and carried into the body, and is 
under the regulation of a complicated organic apparatus. This 
aether is the fundamental cause of all vital motion." This aether he 
regarded as the soul presiding over organic life and determining 
man's whole existence, and he further said : " Medicine will never 
progress until we closely examine the nature of this form of motion 
originating in the sentient soul, and until we apply to medicine the 
laws of mechanics and hydraulics." 

But what college or what scientific author has ever attempted to 
investigate these basic forces of life coming from the brain ? The 
only important effort in that direction is found in the much-neglected 
writings of Reichenbach. To attempt such an investigation has 
been to forfeit the sympathy and respect of the medical profession. 
The colleges defend their ignorance far more zealously than their 
knowledge, which instead of upholding they discredit. More than a 
score of the most eminent physicians and surgeons have denounced 
the therapeutics of the colleges in language so extravagant as to 
be slanderous, while at the same time the ignorance of the colleges 
is vigorously and almost unanimously upheld by denunciation and 
ridicule of those who present them important discoveries and un- 
questionable cures. The leaders of the profession have been 
pessimistic and faithless alike in what they teach and what they 
ignore.* 

So vigorously have they resisted the approaches of electricity and 
of animal magnetism that even simple mechano-therapy or massage 
has fallen under the ban of prejudice in France (according to 

* Among these may be named Sir Astley Cooper; Dr, James Johnson, editor 
of the leading " Medical Review of England ; " Dr. Forbes, editor of the " British 
and Foreign and Quarterly;" Majendie; Rush; and twenty others of the highest 
rank. 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 349 

Schreiber) because, it bears a resemblance to animal magnetism, 
against which they have warred so long. Its recent introduction 
under the name of hypnotism has carefully excluded all its therapeu- 
tic uses except by suggestion. 

The Faculty will not forgive Gassner, Greatrakes, Geo. Fox, 
Mesmer and his followers, Madame St. Armour, Newton and the 
Zouave Jacob, and many others, for showing that without the aid of 
medical science more wonderful cures can be made than all that 
colleges have accomplished, by using a power which they have, 
ignored. 

The most striking effect of massage or mechano-therapy is the 
promotion of absorption and assistance of the circulation by stroking 
in the direction of the veins and lymphatics. Health is greatly 
benefited by this removal of effete matter, absorption of effusion 
or deposits, and increase of circulation and consequent nutrition, 
warmth and vital energy. This cannot be done by the hand without 
at the same time imparting vitality by the nervaura. It requires no 
experiments to demonstrate such effects ; but it is interesting to 
know that Von Mosengeil injected a hypodermic syringe full of India 
ink four times into the leg of a rabbit during eleven hours, and by 
systematic manipulation so completely removed it that none was 
found in the lymphatic vessels or glands. In this respect rubbing 
bears some resemblance to pneumatic treatment, but does not draw 
in so large a supply of blood. 

The fact that while fluid materials are thus removed there is also 
a removal of pain and irritation more prompt than the removal of 
substance and not dependent upon pressure is of course ignored by 
mechano-therapists. Mechanical effects alone are thought of and 
mechanical procedures described in a way to tax the memory ; the 
massage too is combined with an equally pedantic movement-cure, 
of which Schreiber judiciously says : "Several authors have published 
bulky volumes on ' kinesipathy,' 'kinesiatrics,' 'cinesiologie,' which, 
notwithstanding their merits, have through size and prolixity deterred 
the busy practitioner from consulting them. In works on the 
Swedish movement-cure we encounter a most absurdly difficult and 
complicated nomenclature, often quite sufficient to deter the average 
physician from ever attempting to engage in this line of practice. 
.... It is my firm conviction that the general practitioner will be 
able to employ this or any other form of mechano-therapy with the 
best results, without a previous knowledge of even one of the jaw- 
breaking terms applied to many of the procedures used." 

As for the apparatus of mechano-therapy, Schreiber says: "A skil- 
ful operator can with his hands perform everything for which another 



350 MECHANOTHERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

will need apparatus," but that the resistance-movements of the 
Swedish system can be better realized by apparatus than without it. 

The Swedish movement-cure of Ling is a system of exercises, 
pedantically described, for the development of muscles, of which the 
translator of Schreiber says : " The Anglo-Saxon mind is happily 
unable to conceive the absurdities of Ling's nomenclature," and the 
English language is not "adapted for the expression of its terms." 

Dubois-Reymond says of Ling's writings on his movement- 
system : "His arbitrary constructions, his empty-sounding symbolism, 
his meaningless schematizations and pedantic terminology no doubt 
impose on such semi-educated minds which, unable to detect the 
nonsense, accept a few scraps of anatomy and physiology as evi- 
dences of profound learning. Nothing whatever in Ling's writings 
indicates a truly physiologically conceived explanation of the under- 
lying facts." He also compares the work of Rothstein, a pupil of 
Ling, to " a great, flowing, full-bottomed wig of a thousand ambrosial 
curls, placed upon a puppet's empty head." 

Schreiber says that the pompous claims made for the " Swedish 
gymnastics to be a universal remedy deserve the severest casti- 
gation ; " nevertheless he gives Ling great credit for directing the 
attention of physicians to gymnastics. " Ling's gymnastics," he 
says, " have an even greater and more certain effect upon innerva- 
tion and nutrition than the common form of gymnastic exercises." 

Surely it needed no ultra-enthusiast to enable the intelligent to 
understand that muscular exercise increases muscular strength, in- 
creases respiration, circulation, absorption, digestion and appetite ; 
diminishes fat and abnormal products, increases the energy of the 
entire constitution and develops the particular muscles that are used. 
What special effects this may have is shown by Sarcognomy. It \ 
shows that vital stamina and health are promoted mainly by shoulder 
exercise, and vital force by exercise of the thighs. 

For the effects of all habits and exercises we need only look to "-^ 
the map of Sarcognomy. It teaches us that whatever increases the 
action of the diaphragm, increases the animal energies ; but whatever 
increases the upward expansion of the chest ennobles the moral 
nature and establishes a firmer health. 

Active exertion generally, as it proceeds from the shoulders, back 
and thighs, develops force of character, and by muscular compression 
diminishes abdominal fulness, — thus overcoming the indolent, sensi- 
tive and morbid elements. 

The truth which mechano-therapists neglect is, — that physical 
power comes from nervous more than from the muscular system, and 
that consequently no exercise produces the best effect unless asso- 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 35 1 

ciated with pleasure or earnest interest that may call out the stronger 
faculties of the brain. Mere muscle-culture is not a culture of 
health, as has been proved by athletes of all sorts, prize-fighters, 
rowers, runners, lifters, etc., some of whom shorten their lives ; and 
it was proved by Ling himself, who died of consumption. 

Mechano-therapists not only take these narrow views of Physiology, 
but degrade the matter still farther into the prevalent chemico-me- 
chanical theory of vital processes. Even Schreiber says of the 
muscles : " Each fibre may be supposed to contain a substance ready to 
undergo combustion under the influence of a nerve impulse : that the 
heat so produced is in part used for the production of work" etc. This 
is the purely imaginary theory of the schools. Heat never produced 
muscular force, but always counteracts or diminishes it when beyond 
the normal standard. 

Schreiber, from the careful study of the results of experience, 
ascribes great value to " mechanotherapy, vulgo massage," in 
neuralgia and muscular rheumatism, in the absence of inflammation, 
which contra-indicates such treatment. In this it is decidedly 
inferior to the nervauric or psycho-manual treatment, the practi- 
tioners of which never regard inflammation as an obstacle, but treat 
it as something to be controlled. 

For severe sciaticas, Schreiber prescribes a course of exercise for 
the muscles around the hip joint, accompanied by manual treatment 
sometimes severe enough to produce ecchymosis from hacking and 
kneading the muscles of thighs and buttocks, and gives the details 
of such treatment for 32 days. It is six to twelve days before any 
amelioration is realized. The whole course is painful and laborious, 
and the cures (which he claims are sure) require from ten days to 
eight weeks. His reported cases demonstrate the cures in various 
lengths of treatment, but do not show how much is pue to the 
passive and active exercises, and how much to the vigorous handling 
of the parts. 

He claims, however, that lumbago and stiff neck may be cured in 
fifteen minutes, and that " all recent neuralgias are equally curable," 
if vigorous treatment is used, disregarding the patient's cries and 
resistance. " It should be our object to affect the muscles in their 
very deepest parts (always carefully regarding the bones), to stretch 
and concuss the nerves, and to cause an evolution of heat and to 
stimulate the circulation in the tissues involved." In all this his 
mind is concentrated upon the mechanical forces without a thought 
of the vital influences which often effect prompt cures without the 
use of any mechanical force ; and he acts on the theory that " neu- 
ralgia in general is to be cured by stretching the affected nerve." 



352 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

I lis manipulation is rational, beginning with gentle processes with 
the fingers and proceeding to firm pressure. 

In all human progress it seems to be necessary to have men of 
one idea neglecting everything else to develop the value of any 
method and call public attention to it by their fanatical zeal. 

Hacking the muscles, which is a favorite measure, is intended to 
penetrate the deep-lying parts by its force and is done by striking 
with the side of the hand, from the wrist to the end of the little 
finger, with considerable force, which sometimes produces ecchymosis. 
He describes in detail three weeks of daily treatment by exercises 
and manipulation for cervico-brachial neuralgia. He describes a 
patient cured by four weeks of treatment, who, whenever any 
symptoms returned, could cure himself by going through the pre- 
scribed exercises. 

But though neuralgias of nerves associated with muscles yield to 
such treatment, he confesses that his treatment of nerves " between 
the skin and an underlying bone " is inefficient ; trigeminal neuralgia 
was especially intractable. Hence his conclusion that "it is in the 
muscles that the true field of mechano-therapy lies." These cases, 
however, which he finds entirely intractable are not so to those who 
understand vital treatment. On the contrary, in the impressible 
temperament they yield most readily to manual treatment. But he 
seems not to have observed the vast differences of constitutions in 
the degree of obstinacy and intractability of their diseases. It is to 
be understood, too, that all diseases produce by their continuance 
organic tissue changes which destroy the recuperative power and 
thus in time make them incurable unless the nervous system has 
preserved its controlling power. He has also failed to understand 
the effects of different directions of gentle manipulation and strok- 
ing, and attached altogether too much importance to mechanical 
force exerted in a painful manner. The cases in which his very 
painful manipulations wrought cures might have been cured as well 
or better without inflicting any pain. He treated his colleague for 
spinal neuralgia in so violent and painful a manner that " he made a 
most lively resistance." All American experience, I believe, shows 
the impropriety of such painful operations. 

The value of mechanical treatment where the muscles are con- 
cerned is illustrated by the well known value of muscular exercise 
in conquering rheumatism. Men who feel utterly helpless may be 
frightened by a fire or by the guns of the enemy into sudden exertion 
and running, to the destruction of their rheumatism. Schreiber refers 
to a case reported by Busch in which a country doctor attacked with 
"intense muscular pain in all parts of his body " was advised by an 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 353 

old peasant to mount his horse, and being lifted to the saddle by 
several men rode off in great suffering. A thunder-storm made 
him ride at full speed, and he arrived at home in great perspiration 
entirely relieved. 

The co-existence of fever does not, according to Schreiber, contra- 
indicate the use of mechano-therapy which conquers such cases of 
myalgia and neuralgia in from 12 to 36 hours, with beneficial effects 
on the associate fever. 

" In both anaesthesia and hyperaesthesia (he says) the areas 
involved must be pressed, kneaded, pinched, and finally mildly 
hacked. Even where the trouble depends on some central disease, 
much good may still be obtained, as was shown by a case reported 
by me elsewhere." " Turck was the first to show that anaesthesia 
of a mild degree could be removed by the use of friction alone," — 
a truth, however, long known among magnetizers. 

In arthritic neurosis involving the knee and hip, which generally 
depends on a neurotic condition, no anatomical change has been 
found where the severity of pain has caused amputation to be used. 
Such suffering is rather accompanied by lack of circulation than by 
any hyperaemic state. Anaemia is often productive of neuralgia ; and 
"sudden embolism of the large arteries," says Billroth, "produces 
severe pain in the parts below the obstruction." He reports suc- 
cesses in such cases, but says that " a large amount of moral influence 
must be added to the mechanical treatment." He uses gentle mani- 
pulations, increasing their force, using passive and active motions of 
the limb and the corresponding members. But it is self-evident that 
all such measures are vastly inferior to pneumatic treatment, which 
produces a full circulation. 

In palsies amenable to treatment, — that is,, paresis, — Schreiber rec- 
ognizes mechano-therapy, electricity and hydro-therapy as the avail- 
able measures, conjoined with, passive and active movements of the 
limbs. Alas, half a century of successful demonstration of the power 
of pneumatic treatment seems not to have interested the medical 
profession. Schreiber makes no reference to it, and the fashionable 
authors are silent. 

In opium, morphine and chloral poisoning, he says, " we possess no 
readier or more efficient means than the mechanical, whether applied 
in the shape of beating, pinching or hacking of the muscles, over 
the whole body, or of repeated strokes on the palms and soles. We 
read of cases where these procedures have been kept up for many 
minutes and even for hours, resulting, in the end, in the resuscitation 
of the poisoned individual." 

Death occurs speedily in chloroform poisoning unless prompt 



354 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

relief is given, but in the poisoning of morphine and of carbonic 
acid gas there is much less danger. Mechano-therapy in these cases 
he considers much more valuable than electricity, ammonia and 
sinapisms. A young woman who seemed dying from the hypodermic 
injection of from a third to a half a grain of morphine was revived 
by severe flagellation with rods on the palms and soles of the feet. 
She sat up in bed and the flagellation being suspended the coma 
returned, but being flagellated again for an hour, she recovered and 
without any ecchymosis from the severe beating. Sarcognomy 
shows that the feet are the most efficient antagonists of the brain and 
consequently the best location for directing excitement from the head. 

The same immunity from the effects of beating was observed in 
the case of a Mr. Wright Harris, reported by Dr. Barrett of Middle- 
town, Conn., over sixty years ago, who had taken an ounce and a half 
of laudanum for suicide and was revived by switching the palms and 
soles with willow switches. After he woke and objected to the 
treatment he fell back into coma and had to be switched into con- 
sciousness several hours. It was eight hours before this treatment 
ended, but no ecchymoses were produced, which shows that insensi- 
bility prevents inflammatory irritation and congestion. There could 
be no better evidence of the value of anodynes in therapeutics. 

The merit of the treatment was not so much in the pain as in its 
location, which was most appropriate as an antagonist to cerebral 
oppression. 

" Dr. Bullar of Southampton claims to have saved every case in 
which there was suspension of respiration following chloroform 
narcosis, by himself and his assistants vigorously slapping the 
patient's body with the palms of their hands. This was kept up 
until pulse and respiration were again perceptible, which sometimes 
did not happen until as much as ten minutes had elapsed. In many 
cases the application proved to have been so vigorous that the lower 
extremities particularly were covered with ecchymoses. Bullar insists 
that no time should be lost in trying electricity and other useless 
measures, but that the mechanical treatment should be at once 
resorted to with full confidence as to its efficacy. He states that in 
several of his cases the action of the heart and lungs had ceased 
completely and beyond a doubt, but that by mechanical treatment 
life was once more recalled." 

This is a more efficient treatment than the switching, because it 
covers a larger surface and brings into play the vital forces of the 
operators. Such measures should also be used in cases of drowning. 
Physicians who are governed by the dominant materialism of the 
colleges keep themselves utterly blind to the transmission of vital 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 355 

force in the treatment of disease. Occasionally a physician has 
liberality of mind enough to break away from scholastic dogmatism, 
like Dr. A. Mueller of Victoria, Australia, who, in the "Australasian 
Medical Journal " (March, '89), speaking of this transferable vital 
force, as shown in a case in which the victim of deadly snake-bite 
was cured by a fakir, says : — 

" To the next question that suggests itself, whether there is at the 
disposal of these fakirs or of any human being a force or power 
capable of rousing the torpid nerve-cells into action, a decidedly 
affirmative answer may be given. So-called ' exact ' science has 
until very lately ignored the existence of this force, and I should 
not have ventured to mention it even in your columns if modern 
psychological research, both in Europe and America, had not at last 
enforced a tardy recognition of its existence, thus opening up vast 
fields of research hitherto not dreamt of in our materialistic philos- 
ophy. Thousands of years before our Christian era, it was known 
to our Aryan ancestors under the Sanskrit name of akasa, or the 
life-principle, — the life-giving fluid or medium; and early in this 
century Baron von Reichenbach demonstrated its existence by a 
series of most interesting experiments. In a room from which the 
faintest ray of light had been excluded, his sensitives or clairvoyants 
described it as issuing from the tips of his fingers and from his eyes 
in the form of bluish or yellowish flame-like emanations, and as 
enveloping his body in a cloud or aura of the same color. These 
emanations were further described as differing both in color and 
intensity with different individuals introduced into the room. Von 
Reichenbach also ascertained from these sensitives that emanations 
similar in appearance were issuing constantly from magnets he pre- 
sented before them ; hence the name of vital or animal magnetism 
has been given to this force, although Reichenbach himself proposed 
to call it ' Od,' a name occurring in ancient books of the Kabala. 
To this force, which numberless experiments have proven to be 
communicable without contact, the recovery in the case of snake- 
bite cited by Dr. Reid must be ascribed. [Such snake-bites were 
invariably fatal.] In paralysis not resulting from organic disease 
and structural change of the nerve-tissue, it is now, under the name 
of massage, a recognized and effective remedial agent ; but this 
coarse method of employing it is typical of the imperfect and 
merely rudimentary knowledge we possess of its vast potencies that 
will, no doubt, cause it hereafter to become one of the most powerful 
means of alleviating and curing disease in the hands of the skilful 
physician when he has become a true healer." * 

* That vitality is actually transferred from the operator to his patient, to the great 



35^ MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

The switching plan was successfully tried in the case of Dr. De 
Angelo, near Venice, who was poisoned by a dose supposed to 
contain strychnine. Nausea, vomiting, delirium, epileptic convvl- 
sions, unconsciousness and suspension of heart and lungs made 
death imminent. After trying " friction, strong sinapisms, douching 
with cold water, as well as the external and subcutaneous application 
of strong ammonia water," in vain, the four persons in attendance 
procured switches from a tree and switched the palms and soles, 
producing restoration in about half an hour, the first signs of move- 
ment appearing after fifteen minutes. 

The success of flagellation administered several hours after chloral 
poisoning was reported by Dr. Meyer in the " Chicago Medical Jour- 
nal" for November, 1876. But the speediest relief in chloroform 
poisoning is by the circulation, — restoring the blood to the bram by 
position, — placing the patient with his head downwards, or lifting him 
by the feet and legs. Junod found this the quickest method when 
his pneumatic treatment produced fainting, — raising the lower limbs 
higher than the head. 

Sprains, according to Schreiber, should be treated (if there is no 
serious laceration) by centripetal rubbing followed by a flannel 
bandage and exercise when the pain is relieved. A suitable position 
and apparatus are also necessary. " According to Phillippeaux, 
recent slight sprains are nearly always curable at a single sitting, 
and even in severer cases (provided, of course, there is no fracture) 
four to five sittings suffice to put the patient on his feet again. The 
sooner the treatment is begun the quicker will be the cure." " All 
authorities agree on one thing, and that is that the time consumed 
in treating a sprain mechanically is far less than by the old method 



benefit of the latter and loss of the former, is very familiar to all who engage in manual 
practice. Dr. M. of Washington City who attended my lectures, recently related his 
own experience as follows : He was called to attend Mrs. M. L. apparently in the 
last stage of consumption contracted from her husband who had died of it. Physi- 
cians said that her lungs were gone and beyond hope. She had been lying speech- 
less and unconscious for two weeks, taking no food at all and looking like an ema- 
ciated corpse. He went by urgent request, expecting only to soothe her dying 
moments. He placed his hands on the front and back of her chest for fifteen minutes 
and felt that his vital force suddenly went out to the patient. In about five minutes 
consciousness returned, and she opened her eyes and spoke to him by his name. He 
was so exhausted and oppressed that she perceived it and told him to discontinue 
his efforts as it was too much for him to bear. He feebly stepped to the bowl, 
bathed his forehead and returned in a state of great debility to his home, where he 
was kindly received, bathed and put to bed, rested twenty-four hours and was re- 
stored. 

The patient immediately called for food and ate heartily. She rose from the bed 
and sat up for a longer period each succeeding day, until, at the end of two weeks, 
she called on the doctor, expressing her unlimited" gratitude and readiness to go to 
work. She waited two weeks longer bv his advice, then engaged in active business, 
married and bore six healthy children, and continued in good health. Could there 
be a better illustration of the sudden and complete trausfer of a great amount of 
vitality ? 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 35/ 

of immobilization and cold applications," which is a very absurd 
treatment, and requires, on an average (according to statistics), over 
25 days, while 9 days were sufficient by massage. It is remarkable 
that nothing is said of treatment by hot water, which is always bene'- 
flcial. 

Dr. Hueter makes a naive confession, saying : " If, as often 
happens, the natural bone-setters meet with more success in the treat- 
ment of joint-troubles than regular practitioners, it is simply because 
the latter are ignorant of the rational means for curing these cases," — 
which is self- evidently true ! Their cold-water treatment is a good, 
illustration. 

Schreiber, in directing upward manipulation for sprains, admits 
that the direction is not important in neuralgia and myalgia, which 
is a virtual confession that the cure in such cases is not mechanical. 

Glandular swellings have been successfully treated by manipula- 
tion ; as indeed all deposits, accumulations or swellings may be thus 
mechanically relieved, as well as helped by the vital force employed. 
Schreiber, Bergham and Nichaus report success in this treatment of 
mastitis, the inflammation or swelling of the breast. 

Swelled tonsils are treated in the same way, as well as hypertrophy 
of the parotid and submaxillary glands, though with less certainty in 
the latter. " Ruinart directs that the finger previously dipped in 
powdered alum be pressed against the tonsils from the inside, at 
first gently and then with considerable force. This treatment is 
followed by an emollient gargle. The whole procedure is so simple 
that the patient can readily perform it upon himself after a few 
trials. 

. Even diseases and engorgements of the womb have been treated 
with considerable success by mechano-therapy — two fingers being 
inserted in its cavity while the other hand is applied externally, 
pressure and motion being gradually increased. It is claimed that 
adhesions have thus been broken up. We have the testimony on 
this subject of Cazeau, Norstrom, Asp (who treated 72 cases, em- 
bracing " chronic metritis, ulceration, ovaritis, chronic catarrhal 
troubles, perimetritis and displacements of various kinds), and A. R. 
Jackson of Chicago. In some cases the treatment is external. 

CEdema of the lower limbs is treated by upward manipulation 
Ovarian cysts and other abdominal tumors have been treated by 
abdominal manipulation with benefit. The fluids thus moved are 
discharged in the urine. 

" In manipulating the ©edematous abdominal walls (says Schreiber) 

the motions should be made from above and outward, in a 

direction downward and inward, toward the inguinal region, for 



358 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XVII. 

the lymphatics of the anterior and lateral portions of the skin of 
the abdomen empty into the plexus of lymph nodes lying within 
the pelvis and upon the internal iliac muscle. This plexus empties 
its contents into the superior lumbar nodes, and these again into the 
thoracic duct." 

For stiff joints, massage with movement is recommended as a 
very slow process, sometimes unsuccessful, and liable, if hurried too 
vigorously, to produce inflammation. 

For the eye. — " According to the unanimous opinion of the most 
eminent oculists, the application of mechano-therapy is suited to the 
following diseases of the eye : I, conjunctivitis pustulosa ; 2, conjunc- 
tivitis marginalis ; 3, episcleritis, subacute and chronic ; 4, all varieties 
of corneal opacities capable of being cleared, as those following 
pannus, and scrofulous and parenchymatous keratitis." "The rub- 
bing should not last longer than from one to five minutes, nor should 
it be performed oftener than once daily, except in such cases where 
rapidity of cure is specially called for." "The best results of 
ocular massage are obtained in cases of long-standing corneal 
opacities." " Pagenstecher asserts to have seen good results in old, 
long-standing cases, and records cures of opacities that had lasted 
for thirty years or more. He always uses an ointment of yellow 
oxide of mercury," but others practise without any ointment. 
" Latterly the mechanical treatment of glaucoma has been advocated." 

" Klein was the first to attempt the mechanical treatment of 
keratitis in its acute stage, and in one instance he succeeded in 
abating the inflammation after three days' treatment in a case in 
which the ether eye, similarly affected, had required six weeks' treat- 
ment by the old methods." Of course treatment of the eyes would 
be far more successful among those who understand vital science. 
Dr. Mack of Boston and London has been very successful in the 
treatment of the eyes in cases in which the medical profession had 
failed. 

In " chlorosis, § chronic catarrhal gastritis, pulmonary phthisis, 
hysteria, hypochondria and diabetes mellitus," Schreiber says, " the 
tiselessness of all mddication in these diseases has long been recog- 
nized," — a remark which shows the limited character of his own 
knowledge of therapeutics, and the generally skeptical character of 
the profession. Nevertheless he may be a competent witness as to 
the effects of mechanical 'therapy. He says that in neurasthenia, 
hysteria and hypochondria "sometimes a great deal may be accom- 
plished, in others very little." Yet in such cases magnetic healers 
produce wonderful results, especially in hysteria, which promptly 
yields to treatment. His confession of the failure of mechano- 



CHAP. XVII.] INCLUDING MASSAGE. 359 

therapy is instructive, showing, as it does, the effects of professional 
ignorance in relying entirely on mechanical force. What ne says 
upon the treatment of these cases is hardly worth mentioning. 

When we compare with the results of mechano-therapy or massage 
those of the vital treatment, in which the nervauric influence is the 
chief reliance, the contrast is as great as in passing from a desert to 
a tropical garden. We leave the slow, dull labors and the dreary 
delays and frequent failures, to find, in many cases, a restoration of 
health so speedy and surprising as sometimes to excite a suspicion 
that, after all, a disease so easily conquered was not as formidable 
as it seemed. The difficulty in many cases is to induce the members 
of a profession of which so many are stultified in their education 
by the dogmatic ignorance of the colleges to admit the possibility 
of marvellous cures when not witnessed by themselves. 

When the impressible temperament exists in the patient, and the 
operator, with high vitality, is guided by correct principles and 
psychometric intuition, the cures are so marvellous and speedy as 
to be really miraculous, in the proper sense of the word miracle, which 
means not as Hume defined it a violation of the laws of nature, 
which is of course an impossibility, but a very wonderful thing, 
transcending common experience. 

Having given so much space to the claims of massage, I think it 
necessary to state the results that may be expected from truly 
scientific treatment, and therefore introduce a few statements from 
my pupils, before presenting which I would mention that manipula- 
tion of morbid parts, if not controlled by the mechanical massage 
theories which attribute everything to physical force, will not fail, 
with intelligent and humane persons, to make many cures and give 
great relief by the vital power which inevitably operates when it has 
the opportunity. 

An excellent illustration is afforded by sprains, in the treatment of 
which the supercilious prejudices of the profession have, had very 
disastrous effects. The superiority of manipulation over all other 
measures in the treatment of sprains, though generally neglected by 
physicians, was well established by experience among the French. 
A work on manipulation published at Paris in 1863 saos : "Indeed, 
according to the opinion of MM. Bagin, Bonnet, Brulet, Elleaume, 
Girard, Labataud, Magne, Mery, Quesnoy and Ribes, who have recently 
published their observations upon sprains cured by manipulation, these 
affections should be treated from the commencement by this procedure. 
The pain, ecchymosis and swelling disappear as if by enchantment. " 
" As M. Bizet says in his monograph upon the treatment of recent 
sprains by manipulation, impressed by M. Baudin's remark at the 



360 MECHANO-THERAPY [CHAP. XV1L 

Academy of Sciences that in 78 amputations of the leg or foot per- 
formed by army surgeons sixty arose from sprains as their starting 
point, we ought to seize with eagerness each opportunity to try a 
means which will give an unlooked-for success." " The cure by manip- 
ulation (says M. Bizet) is more prompt and certain in proportion as the 
remedy follows, so to speak, upon the accident." " Of all means which 
are recommended for sprains, manipulation is the simplest, the easiest 
in application and the most efficacious, for it cures a simple sprain at 
the fist sitting, and seldom is its frequent repetition necessary." 

" Pouteau had already recognized this when he said : " Sprains may 
be instantaneously cured by this means (manipulation), and I cannot 
understand why our surgeons ordinarily are unsuccessful with this 
little procedure, which they give up to uneducated persons." 

" At the present day those physicians who have it in their power 
to bring this method into use are unwilling even to make a trial of it, 
or to do as much as those of Pouteau's time." "But we ought not,'' as 
M. Nelaton says, " systematically to reject a useful means because 
it lias been discovered and employed by men who are unskilled in medi- 
cal art." In this remark Nelaton alludes to a crime against humanity 
which would not be so common in the profession if it had any proper 
teaching of medical ethics. The professional warfare against vital 
treatment and psychic diagnosis, refusing to give them attention or 
justice, with the most calamitous results to patients, is one of the 
crimes concerning which we may well say : " Father, forgive them, — 
they know not what they do." How vastly superior is treatment 
which brings the vitality of the operator (sometimes a marvellous 
power indeed) into contact with the patient. 

Dr. H. Frank at a recent meeting of German Scientists claimed 
that for the revival of the apparently dead there were two effi- 
cient means, — electricity and manual concussion. His method was 
vigorous strokes with the hands on the ileo-caecal region in an upward 
direction, which affects the respiration and the heart. After fifteen 
or twenty such strokes, he strikes over the heart repeatedly with the 
palm of his hand. He keeps up such operations for an hour or more 
even after resuscitation and claims the recovery of life in fourteen cases 
— hanging, drowning and carbonic-oxide asphyxia, — and in one case 
of croup. One of the cases was of apparent death by chloroform. 
Aside from vital influence there is no doubt of the manipulations 
which force up the diaphragm and thus imitate respiration. 

All methods of treatment have value which bring a vigorous and 
benevolent operator into contact with the patient. Vigorous exercises, 
in which the operator holds the patient's hands while they struggle 
against each other, have been used with much benefit. 



CHAP. XVII.] INXLUDING MASSAGE. 361 

Among the Japanese manipulation is performed by a class of oper- 
ators called ammas. " His art (says W. J. Holland) consists in 
kneading all the muscles of the body and bringing them into play, 
and he is regarded as a useful functionary, second only in importance 
to the physician as a healer of physical disorders. The art is prac- 
tised not only by men, but also by women, and at almost every inn 
where I have stopped among the first persons to proffer their services 
have been the ammas. 

" In the operation of shampooing, as practised by the amma, the 
patient lies upon a futon, or rug, while the amma kneels beside him. 
The first act in the drama deals with the abdominal cavity. Placing 
the hand on either side of the abdomen, above the hips, the amma 
compresses the body laterally a number of times ; then drawing up 
the loose folds of the flesh, he kneads and pinches them, at the same 
time making passes which correspond in their direction with that of 
the colon. This portion of the treatment ended, each leg is attacked 
and vigorously rubbed and kneaded, the process terminating by a 
smart bastinado administered to the soles of the feet. 

" In rubbing and kneading the muscles use is made of a round ball 
of box-wood. The arms and chest are treated as the legs, and then 
the patient is turned over, face downward, and the shoulders and 
back are punched and kneaded until the breath almost forsakes the 
body. The entire performance ends with a vigorous rubbing of the 
neck, which, in my case, seemed to threaten the dislocation of the 
cervical vertebrae. The amount of strength in fingers and wrists dis- 
played by the amma is quite remarkable. " 

In this rude operation the benefit lies in forcing the circulation of 
manipulated parts, and in receiving the vital influence of the operator. 

In conclusion, what is the sum total of the mechano-therapy which 
has filled so large a space in professional literature and practice ? 

1. Mechanical pressure on the course of the bloodvessels and lym- 
phatics promotes circulation and nutrition, and causes absorption of 
effusions, deposits and morbid growths. 

This being nearly self-evident to any good phsyiologist, it may 
well be asked what has mechano-therapy added to our knowledge ? 
Its most distinct contribution is in showing the applicability of 
manual pressure to the tonsils and the womb, and to diseases of the 
eye. Its mechanical value, however, is indefinite, for in all cases it is 
associated with the vital influence. 

2. Active manipulation of muscles with active and passive move- 
ments are found to be efficient in the cure of neuralgia and rheuma- 
tism when there is no inflammation present. Dr. Schreiber deserves 
credit for showing the success of long-continued movements and 



362 INCLUDING MASSAGE. [CHAP. XVII. 

forcible manipulations in such cases. Still they are not as efficient as 
active movements performed under strong mental excitement. The 
painful severity of this treatment might have been entirely overcome 
by medical electricity. 

3. The importance of flagellation and blows in cases of narcotic 
poisoning and drowning has been fully shown. 

The sum total of mechano-therapy as a contribution to therapeutics 
and the range of its power is scarcely equal to that of any one leading 
drug. It is incomparably inferior to that of electricity and adds very 
little to the vast range of therapeutic power which belongs to the 
vital treatment guided by Sarcognomy. 

Moreover as a blind, unscientific treatment it is often injurious from 
itsinappropriatenessand from the coarse, uncongenial influence of the 
person employed as a rubber. Hence Dr. Landon Gray said at the 
Academy of Medicine (New York, October, 1888) that "massage was 
an uncertain remedy, often irritating to the patient, and was only to 
be used in connection with the treatment mentioned." 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

RATIONAL PRACTICE GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 

The proper philosophic view of medical science, sects and prejudices — False 
ideas of poisons — Rational practice — Statements of Dr. Grosvenor Swan, Dr. 
J. P. Chamberlin, Dr. Wm. E. Wheelock, Dr. A.J. Symes, Dr. Z. L. Baldwin, Dr. 
Orrin Robertson and L. A. Hulse, Esq., concerning their practice, guided by Sarcog- 
nomy and Psychometry. 

The introduction of a true therapeutic revolution should be 
guided, not by a destructive and intolerant iconoclasm, but by the 
genial conservatism which holds on to all the knowledge already 
attained, gives due credit to the pioneers of science (whose in- 
complete discoveries the multitude are blindly following), and har- 
moniously blends the old with the new. 

Far be it from the writer to discredit the vast attainments, the 
elaborate research, the minute knowledge, the pathological and 
physiological accumulations and triumphant achievements of the 
medical profession during the last three centuries, which are pre- 
served in medical literature (and much more imperfectly in medical 
colleges), because the profession generally, with the inherited instincts 
of warlike, barbarian ages (which it will require centuries to over- 
come), has been, and still is, gregariously devoted to authority and 
jealous against innovation and progress: still more lamentably it has 
been devoted to professional dignity, reputation and pedantic learn- 
ing, instead of looking solely to curative means and measures, from 
whatever source they come. 

The champions of medical orthodoxy might justly speak with 
eloquence of the progress of anatomy, surgery and pathology ; but 
when they look for therapeutic results, the confession must be made 
that comparatively little effort has been made to discover the innu- 
merable agencies in which nature offers an antidote for every possible 
disease, — a negligence which induced Prof. Stille of Philadelphia to 
confess in his " Materia Medica " that : " Truly, nearly every medicine 
has become a popular remedy before being adopted or even tried by 
physicians." Another author on the materia medica, Dr. Pereira, 
says, " Nux vomica is one of the few remedies the discovery of which 
is not the effect of mere chance." 



364 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

The last twenty years have done something to remove this oppro- 
brium, especially through the action of druggists whose mercantile 
enterprise has placed them in the front rank of progress. But still a 
profound and sullen lethargy exists in reference to the experience 
and discoveries of American physicians (classed as Eclectic) and the 
wonderful experience of the followers of Hahnemann. 

Narrow and dogmatic minds think there must be an irreconcilable 
antagonism between the contributions of Hahnemann and all prior 
therapeutic knowledge, requiring us, if we recognize the one, to treat 
the other with absolute contempt. Even many Homoeopaths share 
in the' bigotry and intolerance of their rivals. This incompatibility 
is entirely imaginary, and there is no reason why an enlightened 
physician, educated in either school, should not avail himself of the 
resources of both, with the eclectic liberality which demands that 
he should neglect no agency that can help his patient and disregard 
no experience of his intelligent brethren. 

Is it not obvious or self-evident that, if a remedy acts upon any 
organ stimulating or rousing its action for the time being, the 
same remedy used in excess or continued too long will overpower and 
destroy the organ which in judicious use it helps ? as cold, which, 
moderately administered, by a cold bath briefly given, or by a cold 
atmosphere, is a powerful and grateful tonic, but, in excess, over- 
powers all the functions of life, producing torpor and death. 

I believe there is no important exception to this law that the 
primary physiological effect of any remedy corresponds to its ulti- 
mate pathogenetic effect, operating on the same organ, building up 
health in one case and creating disease in the other. Hence there 
is no reason why we should not be equally instructed by the old- 
fashioned, simple method of observing the beneficial primary effects 
of a moderate dose of any remedy, and the Hahnemannian method 
of seeking its destructive or pathogenetic effects, — the two evi- 
dently coinciding, and both being necessary to a perfect under- 
standing and a practical guidance. I hope, therefore, that every 
reader of this volume will utterly ignore and discredit the old and 
stupid Homoeopathic and Allopathic contention and quarrel. 

I may suggest to both parties that the old method of studying the 
materia medica (so absurdly christened Allopathic) is just as rational 
as the new method, and consequently that it is not indispensable to 
study every remedy in its pathogenesis alone (a tedious and dis- 
agreeable method), for the speedy and delightful method of Psychom- 
etry enables us in a few minutes to ascertain the character of any 
remedy as truly as by tracing its pathogenesis ; and, consequently, if 
time permits, I may be able to give the world a psychometric 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 365 

materia medica, which will be far more accurate and comprehensive 
than the results of the old-fashioned clinical experience, though it 
may not overwhelm us with the bewildering details of pathogenesis 
and the contradictory results of clinical experience. 

Meantime I would urge every physician to cultivate his own 
psychometric capacity, and study the materia medica by experiments 
on himself, if possible ; but if, unfortunately, his psychometric power 
is limited, he may investigate through the numerous natural psy- 
chometers who may be found in any community. When by the 
psychometric method he obtains a sympathetic perception of the 
condition of his patient, the same psychometric perception will 
enable him to trace the relation between the pathological condition 
and the remedy. He may hold the remedy with one hand, and the 
patient with the other, and recognize their adaptation. This is 
rational practice, for it is eminently successful. 

The unfortunate narrowness of the human mind, and the ignorant 
credulity of many, which yields to the dictation of bigotry, are the 
source of the contentious dogmatism at present. The larger class 
look exclusively to drugs administered with very little scientific 
accuracy and a deplorable limitation in number, — not one-tenth of 
what every physician ought to know, — while minorities adhere to 
the exclusive use of infinitesimal preparations, the exclusive use of 
water, the exclusive use of vegetable remedies, the exclusive use of 
what they are pleased to call non-poisonous or hygienic agents, the 
exclusive use of mental influence, or the exclusive use of animal 
magnetism, all of which are valuable in their places, but the exclu- 
sive use of any one of these shows a lack of knowledge and lack of 
the disposition to investigate candidly ; and the gentleman who 
recommended the use of nothing but Brandreth's pills was but 
another example of the prevailing narrowness of mind. 

The prejudice against drugs as poisons results from a superficial 
mode of thought, influenced by the gross or poisonous use of medi- 
cines by narrow-minded or reckless physicians. Those who have 
fallen into this prejudice do not understand the action of medicine 
and the meaning of poison. The poison of their imagination does 
not exist in nature, for there is no distinct line of separation between 
food, medicine and poison. The same substance may be at once a 
food, a medicine or a poison, according to the method of its use. A 
food nourishes or sustains the body, a medicine makes a modifying 
impression on the vital functions, and a poison makes an impression 
so forcible as to be injurious. Salt as commonly used is a necessary 
food, more freely used it becomes a medicine, and in large quantity 
a poison. Coffee and tea are medical foods, which may be concen- 



366 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

trated until a moderate dose becomes poisonous, — as in caffeine and 
theine. Acids generally are medical foods, which become poisons 
in excess. Alkalies though necessary elements of our foods would 
be poisonous if used in large quantities. Oats though a good ex- 
ample of food contain elements which separately used are medicines 
or poisons according to the dose given. Lettuce though recognized 
as a food contains a valuable medicine. Vanilla, nutmeg and the 
peppers used as foods are actively medical. Dandelion, a common 
food, contains a valuable medicine ; so does asparagus ; and I am quite 
sure as valuable a medicine might be obtained from the turnip tops 
which are used similarly. All foods modify vital action in some 
degree and thus have a medical character, so that a profound study 
of dietetics would enable us to substitute foods very largely for medi- 
cines. Buttermilk is a good food, but its lactic acid is medical ; and 
peach leaves, which yield a decoction sometimes used harmlessly in 
domestic practice, contain prussic acid, one of the most powerful 
poisons known. Thus all foods are medical in various degrees, and 
a few are poisons if freely used ; while a few medicines — such as 
phosphates, iron, maltine and cod-liver oil — are decidedly foods. 

But whenever any substance by concentration becomes unsafe to 
use in doses above a few grains it is called poison, to signify the 
danger of using it. But how small a fatal or very injurious dose 
should be to deserve the name of poison no one can say, for the 
word poison is more an epithet of abhorrence than a scientific term. 
Whatever is medicinal may be used in a poisonous dose, and a few of 
our foods are active enough to become poisons in large doses. The 
word poison, therefore, simply means an article of great power which 
needs to be handled carefully. There is no such thing as a distinct 
class of poisons as vulgarly understood, — a class of substances in- 
imical to life, which have no other effect, even in small quantity, 
than to injure or poison. There is no substance in nature which may 
not be beneficial to man, rightly applied, or which is dangerous in an 
infinitesimal preparation, unless it be the morbid elements from the 
animal body in a state of disease. Yet even these, which come 
nearer to the definition of a poison, are shown by Homoeopathic 
research to be capable of a beneficial use. The word poison, there- 
fore, does not define any class of bodies, but means something which 
under the circumstances and mode of application is extremely injuri- 
ous to a human being. Hence no judicious application of any medi- 
cine whatever can be properly called a poison, no matter how potent 
it may be. The venom of the rattlesnake, in an infinitesimal prepara- 
tion called Lachesis, may be used as a valuable medicine. And the 
highly corrosive poison, muriatic acid, may be used in sufficient dilu- 



CHAP. XVII I.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. . 367 

tion as a medicinal food; and, indeed, combined with the corrosive 
caustic soda, it becomes a necessary food, — common salt. These re- 
marks are necessary to counteract the tendency of those who become 
acquainted with nervauric therapeutics to neglect and discard medi- 
cines, the cheapest and most convenient of all therapeutic measures. 
As well might we reject everything but bread from our daily food. 

My pupils are instructed not only to use their own vital power and 
electric currents guided by Sarcognomy, but to study remedies care- 
fully and use them as required, both medical and mechanical, under 
the guidance of Psychometry. Their practice in accordance with my 
directions is, therefore, the true type of the rational practice of the 
future. That they are very successful in doing this — curing cases 
abandoned as incurable under the old practice — is shown by their 
letters and statements, a few of which I here introduce, riot as 
examples of perfect therapeutics, but as illustrations of what may be 
realized by all well qualified students of Therapeutic Sarcognomy. In 
the following statements the full names of the patients were given, 
and they are at the service of any who wish to inquire, but I have 
preferred to follow the usual custom, giving only the initials, except 
in the report of Dr. Swan. 

Many of the cures performed by my students are of the class 
called marvellous, and generally considered incredible ; but similar 
cures by thousands have been made by those who have by accident 
or intuition followed the laws of Sarcognomy. It is nearly a century 
since an American physician, Dr. T. Gale of the State of New York, 
with a rude electrical instrument, was led by his benevolent spirit 
into the extensive application of electricity in all varieties of 
diseases. He followed the promptings of benevolent common- 
sense, and in doing so closely approximated the principles of Sar- 
cognomy. His results, published in a small volume in 1802 at Troy, 
far surpassed those of any medical practice then known, and in fact 
were far beyond the electro-therapeutic practice of to-day. But his 
book produced no impression on the dogmatism of the colleges. To 
me it was deeply interesting as a demonstration, a century in advance, 
of the truth of much that I am teaching. He proved by his practice 
that static electricity, applied according to correct principles, approxi- 
mated the character of a panacea, conquering fevers, inflammations 
and the entire range of diseases met in common practice, curing 
every case in epidemics of the most malignant character. 

STATEMENT OF DR. GROSVENOR SWAN OF HARTFORD, CONN., 
A GRADUATE OF 1 849. 

At the time of his graduation I taught Dr. Swan to exercise his 
psychometric powers, but it was not until after he had established a 



63 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 



solid professional reputation in medicine, surgery and obstetrics that 
he was induced to try his personal powers in healing, in which he 
has had very remarkable success. 

The following cases, stated at my request, are fair examples of his 
practice : — 

" Since you have so kindly urged me to give you some of my most 
remarkable cases, in which I have been aided by my knowledge of 
your Science of Sarcognomy, I give you — with some degree of 
reluctance, I must confess — the following. I have hesitated only for 
the reason that the cases are so wonderful, I fear that they may too 
seriously challenge the belief of the reader. 

" I do not send you any affidavits, or certificates of i remarkable 
cures,' for if I should you might conclude that I may have reasons 
for thinking that my own veracity might not be accepted as sufficient 
authority in the case of such extraordinary facts as I am about to 
communicate. 

" For my success in the cases that I shall now relate to you, I can- 
not say how much I am indebted to my knowledge of your Science 
of Therapeutic Sarcognomy, nor how much to what you were once 
pleased to term my 'personal potency! I can only say that in all 
these cases I have not failed to assert my confidence in the science, 
by applying its principles. Not with the thought and feeling of an 
investigator, but the feeling that it was my duty to make use of all 
the means within my knowledge by which I might hope to restore 
my patient." 

First Case: Hon. Thurlow Weed. — "In the spring of 1872 I was 
called to see the Hon. Thurlow Weed, who then resided on 12th 
Street in New York City. I found that he had been suffering for 
about four years from a paralysis that rendered him incapable of 
raising his chin from his chest. He had been to Europe in search 
of relief, but he had failed to obtain any benefit from the best medi- 
cal skill that he was there able to find, and he returned to his home, 
fully believing that during the rest of his life he was doomed to go 
about looking downward. From the time of my first treatment Mr. 
Weed was enabled to look up and rejoice. 

" When I was first called to Mr. Weed he was sick in bed and 
could only rest in one position. He was soon relieved, so that he 
could rest in any position, and in two or three clays his tall figure 
was again seen on the streets. Mr. Weed was cured and I returned 
to Chicago. 

" Soon after this Mr. Weed made a visit to Albany, where he had 
spent his best years in the most active struggles of his life. While 
on this visit he met Frederick Seward, who was greatly surprised at 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 369 

his appearance, and after learning all the particulars he returned to 
Auburn, N. Y., and informed his father, Ex-Go v. W. H. Seward. 
This information induced his father to send for me to see what I 
might be able to do in his case. He not only dictated a letter him- 
self, but had his physician write. When these letters reached me I 
was in Madison, Wis., where I had been called by Prof. Carpenter, a 
teacher in the Law Department of the Madison University." 

Hon. IV. H. Seward. — "I immediately responded to Mr. Seward's 
message, and when I arrived at his home I found him almost entirely 
helpless. He could not get out of his chair without assistance, and 
he had no more use of his arms than he could have had if they had 
been whittled out of wood and tied to his shoulders with strings. 
Here was a good opportunity for applying the principles of Sarcog- 
nomy. 

" In the first treatment I enabled him to rise from his chair un- 
assisted, and walk wherever he might choose, about the premises. 
After one more treatment I put life and action into his left arm, so 
that he was able to feed himself with it. I remained with Mr. 
Seward for two weeks ; his general health was improved, but I did 
not better the paralysis much after a few of my first treatments. 

" From Auburn I came to New York, where I remained until the 
1st of October, ,r j2\ and I then came to this city, and have made 
Hartford my home ever since." 

Samuel Rogers. — " Soon after I came here a young man was 
brought to me from Utica, N. Y., by the name of Rogers. (Well- 
known in Utica, by the name of Sam Rogers.) He was suffering 
from paraplegia. When sitting in a chair he could not raise a foot 
from the floor, nor could he scarcely move a toe. One evening I 
invited in, to see my patient, a couple of gentlemen who were 
supposed to possess rather strong magnetic powers, and I had them 
try the effect of their treatment in this case. They failed to pro- 
duce the least perceptible effect. It then came my turn to see what 
I could do. Instead of treating the limbs below the knees I gave 
my attention to the region of Muscularity > and treated along the line 
of Locomotion. The result was that he was instantly able to raise his 
feet from the floor. The people present thought that it was owing 
to the superior power of my magnetism, but I endeavored to explain 
to them that it might be, in a great measure, owing to my knowledge 
of a Science of which, I think, they had not then heard. Mr. 
Rogers had, in a few weeks, the use of his limbs restored to him, 
and it is not long since I heard of him as being engaged in editing 
and publishing a newspaper in some town in the western part of the 
State of New York." 



37° RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

Tumors : Mrs. Barnes. — " About this time I was called on by a 
Mrs. Loren W. Barnes, who was suffering from a well-defined 
scirrhous tumor, located in the left breast. She informed me that 
her physicians pronounced it cancerous, and that she had been under 
treatment for it for the past six months. She was perfectly cured, 
without medicine or any local application except my hands, in less 
than six weeks' time. She is now living at No. 18 Florence Street, 
in this city, and she has never had any trouble from it since. 

" Another remarkable case which occurred sometime after this was 
that of Miss Cora Parkhurst, No. 50 Summer Street, this city. She 
had been under treatment for about a year for an encysted tumor 
with a bony shell, which was attached to left side of the inferior 
maxillary, and near the root of the first molar, which I think had 
been extracted. I was two or three months in treating this case, 
during which time the ossific matter of the shell was completely 
absorbed, and the tumor entirely disappeared. This tumor was near 
the size of a hen's egg, and, as I was informed, was increasing rapidly 
in size at the time that I commenced treating it. In this case no 
medicine was given, and no external application was made use of 
except my hands. There is not a vestige of the tumor left, so that 
it would be impossible to tell which side of the face it had occupied 
by the most careful examination. 

" It has been said that there is ' nothing new under the sun ; ' so 
in these cases you must know that I am giving you nothing new, 
for in 1666 there was a man in London by the name of Greatrakes, 
who, according to the published Transactions of the Royal Society of 
London, when Sir Robert Boyle was president, cured cancers and 
tumors in the same way." 

Case of Mrs. Griffin of Granby, Conn. — "Some time in the month 
of July or August, in 1876 or 'jj, I was called into the town of 
Granby to see a Mrs. Griffin (I cannot give you the exact date, as I 
took no note of the case at the time), who had been prostrated, I 
think, with what the doctors called childbed fever. When I saw 
her she had been under the care of the doctor in town, and of a con- 
sulting physician, who had been brought from Granville, Mass., for 
about six weeks. For the past week she had not been expected to 
live from one day to another. Her physicians had declared her case 
hopeless. Her husband and friends were in despair. She had 
heard of me at some time, and feebly expressed the wish that I 
should be sent for, and with all possible despatch I was sent for. 
The messenger was the father of the young man, the husband of the 
sick woman. He said that he had not come for me expecting that I 
could cure her, as it was now past the time when anything could be 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 371 

done, and he did not think it at all likely that she would be living 
when we should get there. The husband, he told me, had no more 
hopes than he had, but he felt that he could not endure the thought, 
when she was gone, that he had not done everything in his power to 
gratify her in her last dying wish. 

"When I reached the place I found that several of the neighboring 
women had assembled, expecting, no doubt, that they would soon 
have to do for her and the family what our undertakers under such 
circumstances do for us here in the city. 

" When I was taken into the room where she lay (the square 
room of an old fashioned farm-house), she was perfectly helpless 
and appeared almost lifeless. She could not move her head on her 
pillow, and her husband had to move her into position so that I 
could get my hand to the upper dorsal region. I then stimulated the 
region of muscular power, and worked along the line of Locomotion. 
I soon discovered that I was producing some effect upon her. I 
then requested the husband (who was perfectly exhausted through 
his long and continued watching) to retire to another room, and to 
send in a lady whom I noticed, and described, as sitting in a corner 
of the room that I passed through when I came in where the sick 
woman lay. I then took my seat on the opposite side of the room 
from where my patient lay, and I requested the lady sent to me to 
take a seat on the same side of the room and not far from where I 
sat. (This lady was an entire stranger to me, and I had never before 
seen a person that was there.) I then said to my patient that if a 
feeling of strength should come to her, and she should feel that she 
could do so, she might raise herself up in bed. I can hardly imagine 
why such an announcement by me could be considered as anything 
but a mockery (as reasonably it would seem) of a poor dying woman. 
In less than three minutes she rose up in bed ; I then said, ' Put your 
feet out on the floor.' She did so, and I proposed having some stock- 
ings put on her feet ; but as the weather was very warm, and the 
floor was carpeted, she thought that she did not need them. I then 
said to her, ' Stand up on your feet,' and she immediately stood up. I 
then requested her to come to me, and she walked from her bed 
across the room to me and after remaining for a few moments I told 
her that she might return to her bed. She walked back and jumped 
into bed with the sprightliness of a little girl. 

" I then sent for Mr. Griffin, and had him come to the hall door. I 
did not admit him into the room, for I dare not risk my patient under 
the influence of his exhausted and negative condition. When Mr. 
Griffin came to the hall door I said to him, ' Perhaps it would be a 
gratification to you to know that your wife is so far restored that she 



372 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

can get off from that bed and walk across this room ? ' He ex- 
claimed in great astonishment, ' My wife has not borne a pound's 
weight on her feet in the last six weeks.' I then turned to her and 
said, ' He evidently does not believe that you can walk, will you show 
him that you can ? ' She arose from her bed and came to the door, 
and I introduced her to her husband, saying that I thought that she 
would hereafter get along without the aid of doctors. The last that 
I heard of her was that she is well, and able to attend to all her 
domestic duties." 

Mrs. O. D. Seymour. — " On the 13th of April, 1881 (I can give you 
dates now), I was summoned to the bedside of the wife of O. D. Sey- 
mour. Mrs. Seymour had been for several years an invalid, and for the 
last two or three years almost entirely helpless, and for the last year or 
two unable to be bolstered up so as to enjoy a sitting position in her 
bed. The moment such a thing was attempted, she would be taken 
with nervous rigors (she called them chills), and would have to 
assume at once a horizontal position in her bed. I made my usual 
examination, following down carefully the spinal column to see if I 
could detect any tenderness along the interosseous spaces, but all 
the while keeping one hand applied to the upper part of the dorsal 
region. I also gave proper attention to the region of Muscularity. 
After this examination I took my seat on the opposite side of the 
room, and in less than ten minutes she arose from her bed, without 
any apparent assistance, and walked across the room to where I was 
sitting. I then assisted her back to her bed, and she has been able 
to walk from that day to this." 

Mrs. F. L. Burr. — " On the 26th of July, 1881, I received a mes- 
sage from Mr. F. L. Burr of the ' Hartford Daily Times,' requesting 
me to return to Hartford on the first train. 

" I found Mrs. Burr to be in what the physician that was called in 
my absence ccnsidered a critical situation. 

" She had been taken with a violent attack of cholera morbus. She 
also had a chronic difficulty of the heart, and it seemed as though in 
her prostration there must be complete heart failure. I quieted the 
stomach with medicinal remedies, and I restored the heart's action 
through my personal potency, applied according to the rules of Sar- 
:ognomy. After she had revived sufficiently to begin to realize 
her situation, which was a few days after I was called, she thought 
that her lower extremities had been paralyzed, as she had not the 
strength to move them. I assured her that as soon as we could 
get her stomach in a condition to admit of her taking a little more 
nourishment I should be able to satisfy her that her limbs were all 
right. 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. U$ 

"A few mornings after this I told her that I was ready to convince 
her that she had not lost the use of her limbs, and in less than 
ten minutes she was enabled to rise from her bed and walk to where 
I was sitting in a chair, a distance of several feet from the foot of 
her bed ; and I may say that I have not known of any time since 
that she has not been able to walk." 

Mrs. Thomas. — "In February, 1874, I was called from Hartford 
to Chicago to see the wife of Gen. H. H. Thomas, who had been 
under the care of the first physicians in Chicago, including, I beiieve,, 
Prof. Byford of the Rush Medical College. The foundation of her 
sickness was a uterine trouble, that her physicians seemed to have 
no power or skill to relieve her of. She had become so prostrated 
that her head could not be raised from her pillow by placing the 
hands under her shoulders and raising her body up in her bed ; her 
head would fall back on her pillow. If you attempted to raise her up 
in bed you would have to put one hand under her head to support that. 

"The third day after I was called to her she walked with me on 
the street the distance of a block." 

Mrs. Holmes. — "After my return to Hartford, in the month of 
May, I was called to Gouverneur, St. Lawrence County, N. Y.,, 
where I had formerly practised, to see the wife of Charles P. 
Holmes, who had been given up by her physicians and was not 
expected to live from one day to another. She had been confined to 
her bed for six weeks with typhoid fever. The message from Mr. 
Holmes, and which I promptly obeyed, was, ' Take the first train and 
come : wife not expected to live.' In three days the friends became 
satisfied that she was out of danger, and I returned to Hartford. 

" This is what Mr. Holmes says, in a letter that he wrote me after 
my return : — 

" ' I do not believe in miracles It is owing to our 

ignorance of the working of natural laws, that govern and control 
all things, that causes us to call things enshrouded in mystery a 
miracle. Did I believe in miracles- I should say that this snatching 
my wife from the very jaws of death was a miracle of the highest 
order. You can scarcely imagine the change that we have experi- 
enced. A little over a week ago we were standing around what we 
then thought to be the dying bed of my wife, thinking that she 
could not survive but a few hours at most. Her physician had given 
her up, and so had all of our friends. Now she is sitting up and 
recovering rapidly her lost strength.' 

"Mrs. Holmes is living to-day, at Gouverneur." 
Mrs. Foster (of Rossie, St. Lawrence County, N. Y.). — "In the 
winter of '84 and '85 I was in Gouverneur, St. Lawrence Count", 



3/4 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

N. Y., and as remarkable a case as ever yet went cm record, in almost 
any period of the world's history, was that of a Mrs. Foster, at that 
time living in the town of Rossie, and a patient of Dr. G. E. Bald- 
win of Gouverneur. She had been prostrated with severe sickness, 
and had been under the care of several distinguished physicians, 
who had failed to benefit her and had given up the case as incurable. 
The friends, as a last resort, wished to try the effect of the homoeo- 
pathic treatment and Dr. Baldwin was reluctantly induced to give 
the case a trial, and he soon became convinced that there had not 
been vitality enough left in her system to respond to his remedies. 
As there were differences of opinion, and considerable doubt as to 
the cause of her sickness, Dr. B. took me on the morning of Feb- 
ruary ist to see his patient, being anxious to know what my opinion 
might be. We went by cars, and arrived at the house early in the 
morning. The house was a sad one when we arrived. We were 
told that she was still alive, and that was about all that could be said. 
When I was admitted to the bedside of the sick woman she 
appeared to be in a semi-comatose state, and seemed too far gone to 
recognize any one. Twelve days after this Dr. Baldwin wrote up the 
facts in this case with the intention of having them published in one 
of the papers in Gouverneur, but I induced him to let me have his 
letter to send to the 'Hartford Daily Times,' which I did, and Mr. 
Burr published it. I will here give you the concluding remarks of 
Dr. B.'s letter : ' As Dr. Swan approached the bed of the sick 
woman I stepped out of the room, after which the doctor requested 
all but the husband to leave the room. Not knowing this, within 
five or six minutes I returned, when to my surprise I saw my patient, 
who but a few moments before was thought to be dying, out of her 
bed and walking, without any apparent assistance, to the doctor, who 
was seated in a chair several feet from the foot of the bed. She 
stood for a few moments, and then the doctor arose and took her by 
the hand and walked back with her and placed her in her bed. The 
husband was all this time sitting in a remote corner of the room. 
How such a thing could be accomplished by any mortal means is a 
mystery to me. In an earlier period of the world's history it would 
be called a miracle. What shall we call it now ? I know that there 
is not the least exaggeration in this statement, and yet I confess that 
I could not have believed it, had I not seen it, if told me by my 
dearest friend. Instead of the patient being exhausted by the effort 
she appeared to rally, and after a refreshing sleep she called for 
refreshments.' 

" I would say that my success in manual healing I attributed, in a 
great measure, to my knowledge of your system of Sarcognomy." 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 375 

Mrs. Ward. — " When in Albany, a few years ago, I was called to 
see the wife of Deacon John Ward, whom I found suffering the most 
excruciating agony from what is known as dysmenorrhcea. 

"She had been to Philadelphia, and had been subjected to a very 
serious surgical operation, but with no relief ; she had also been 
under treatment by the most celebrated New York physicians, but 
had not been able to obtain the least relief from them, or anything 
that she had ever tried. Her agony was indescribable : no suffering 
that I had ever witnessed in the most fearful cases of parturition 
that I had ever known in an extensive practice could be considered 
as any comparison to it ; and she would always be confined to her 
bed for two weeks as the result of this sickness. No opiates, not 
even morphine or chloroform, appeared to have the least effect in 
relieving the pain. 

" In less than ten minutes after I laid my hands on her she was 
perfectly easy, and she has had no return of the suffering to this 
day. 

" In four weeks from that time I was in Rochester, and Mr. Ward 
brought his wife up there, and she remained during her period at the 
Osborn House, where I was stopping at the time ; but she had no 
symptom of the trouble with which she had been afflicted all her 
life, never before having passed that period without suffering pains 
that had so prostrated her that she was confined to her bed for the 
subsequent two weeks. According to my best information she has 
never had anything of the kind since. I could give you several 
cases of a similar character, but one is as good as more. 

"I have not deemed it necessary to ask permission of any of the 
parties above named, to publish the facts describing the surprising 
results that have occurred in my treatment. I have not considered 
myself under any particular obligation to do so. They are truths to 
which the world is entitled, and since you have kindly requested me 
to furnish you with them, you are at liberty to make such use of 
them as you may think proper, for the interest of your readers and 
the benefit of humanity. 

"G. Swan, M.D." 

CASES REPORTED BY DR. J. P. CHAMBERLIN, PRESIDENT OF BUCHANAN 
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY, BOSTON. 

In reply to your inquiries in the matter of my experience as to 
the advantages of Sarcognomy and the utility of Psychometry, I would 
say that it has been highly satisfactory to me, and my patients have 
been more than pleased with my success. Of the many hundreds of 
cases which I diagnosed and treated, I have not lost a single case ; 



37^ RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

nor has a death occurred save in two cases, and these were cases that 
had been treated (and in one case I believe maltreated) by the regulars 
and given up as hopeless. Although several cases had been pro- 
nounced by the regulars as incurable they are now in good health 
and attending to business. I also wish to add that in all my cases I 
have used the remedies recommended by you in the course of in- 
struction given at the College of Therapeutics. 

As you request me to give fuller details in relation to some cases 
of my experience in the practice of Therapeutic Sarcognomy, I may 
mention two in Buffalo, N.Y., out of the many successfully treated. 

Miss H. G., Franklin Street (about twenty years of age). — I found 
her in a prostrated condition, having been in bed about ten days, and 
no sleep the last three days. She had high fever and feebleness of 
limbs. Acute burning pains along the spine and very sensitive to 
pressure along the spinal column. Tetanic contraction of muscles of 
neck and back, the head drawn backward, with suffocating sensations. 
The symptoms showed clearly a case of Spinal Meningitis. 

IreatmenU — I seated myself in a chair by the bedside for about 
two minutes, then with my right took her left hand, placed my left 
hand on the anterior side of the head, the heel of the hand covering 
the region of sensibility, then moved it slowly backward to the region 
of Health. I then applied my right hand to the region of vital force 
and immediately the contracted muscles of the neck began to relax. 
I moved her head forward, then moved my hand slowly downward to 
the third or fourth dorsal vertebrae, and all her pains ceased immedi- 
ately. I said to her, " In the morning you may arise and dress as 
usual," — but as I looked she was asleep ; she had not heard what I 
said to her. I then left the room and beckoned her parents out of 
the room and forbade any one entering the room again that night unless 
she awoke. She slept till about eight o'clock the next morning, or 
about ten hours continuously. When she awoke she arose and dressed 
herself, sat down to a good breakfast, then went about her daily 
work as usual. She was cured ; I gave no medicine. 

Mrs. D. S. — I was requested by a friend of theirs to call with him to 
see if anything could be done for her, as she was very sick. We were 
met at the door by the nurse and doctor and told that Mrs. S. 
was dying and no one could be admitted. We asked to see Mr. 
S. and were told that he was at the bedside of his wife, who was 
already unconscious, and they did not like to speak to nor disturb him. 
The door was about closing on us, when Mr. S. came forward 
and bade us come in. In deep grief he told us we were too late. I 
said to him, " Go to her and she will open her eyes ; then tell her that 
I am in the house ; then come to me and tell me just what she says or 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 377 

does." He replied, "It is too late, but I will do as you desire," and as 
he approached her she opened her eyes and he said to her what I re- 
quested him to. She pointed to the door and said, " Come." He called 
me in, then retired himself, and I was alone with her and her doctor. 
As I approached her I placed my hand upon her cold, damp forehead. 
I took her by the hand, then placed the other on the region of vital 
force, holding it there for about two minutes, during which time I, too, 
was watched over by the " regular." Mrs. S. says, " How strange ! " 
The doctor leaves the room, seeks Mr. S., and protests against quackery 
and the cruel and wicked treatment and the suffering I was inflicting 
upon the poor dying woman. And just what else occurred outside for 
the next five minutes I never knew, but I was not interfered with ; I 
was doing my work, life was returning, her pain was ceasing, and 
she was thanking me with her whole soul as Mr. S. entered the 
room. I left Buffalo early next morning and returned the day follow- 
ing to hear of a " miracle" performed. I was told that Mrs. S. 
was a well woman, — I could not believe it. I called on her and found 
her in bed. In reply to my question she said she felt no pain ; felt as 
well as ever, but weak. In a short time she fully recovered her 
strength and was regularly attending to her household affairs. I 
gave her no medicine. 

Miss L. W., ii Nassau Street, Boston (diagnosis, without ques- 
tions, Bright's Disease inherited from father : was then told that her 
father had died of that disease). — The first two treatments con- 
sisted of dispersive passes on head from Disease to Health and stim- 
ulating from Health to Vital Force, then down the spinal column to 
the region of the kidneys, — then gave sulphate of soda and one 
grain phosphate of iron two or three times a day for one week, then 
changed medicine and gave lavender and hydrangea; also gave mag- 
netic treatments once a week. Cured in ten weeks. No pain or dis- 
tress in region of kidneys since. Cured two years ago. 

G. A. C, North Abington (case of inflammation of liver). — Pros- 
trated by pain and tenderness also fulness on the right side at margin 
of and little below the ribs, pain increased by pressure or deep breath- 
ing, unable to lie on left side, pains extending to right shoulder, 
feeling of heavy weight on liver. 

Treatment. — Gave him a head, neck and shoulder treatment, then 
put very hot water over region of liver. I then left. An hour later he 
sent for me to come again ; and as I entered his house, just two hours 
from the time I first entered it and found him in agony of pain, I 
now found him up and dressed, eating his broiled beefsteak. When 
he sent for me he wanted to know what he might eat, but as I de- 
layed coming he said he feared he might starve before I would come 



3/8 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

and so ordered his own meal. He was cured, and I scored one for 
hot water. 

E. C. W. (case of nervous prostration and peritonitis). — Found him 
in a very critical condition ; he had been sick six days, with some 
fever. Pain and extreme tenderness extending over the whole abdo- 
men and increased by the slightest pressure. Abdomen hot and 
motionless. His countenance showed great suffering and anxiety. 
Face dark and shrunken, particularly so about the eyes and nose, cold 
and clammy. Also acute pain in the left side just above the stomach. 

Treatment. — First on head, dispersed from Disease to Health, then 
stimulated Health and Vital Force, then downward to the back region 
of Health. Gave him a dose of lavender and Scutellaria and contin- 
ued magnetic treatment fifteen minutes to half an hour, then gave 
dose of salicylate of soda and bathed his bowels with same ; I then 
applied hot water to the bowels, as hot as he could possibly bear it (on 
a towel), then proceeded at once to dry-cupping the left leg from hip 
to knee, then on calf of leg. I did this very thoroughly, continuing 
it for over an hour. I did this to draw the pain from the body. It 
worked like a charm so far as the body was concerned ; all the pain 
left it and went to the leg. I left him fairly comfortable at 1 1 o'clock 
p.m., and marked him, — " one chance in four for recovery." The next 
morning found him better bodily, but his leg suffered severely ; it was 
in a high state of inflammation and the slightest movement or touch 
was torturing. I applied salicylate of soda to leg and gave magnetic 
treatment to the whole body, frequently during the day, — gave him 
but very little medicine. This treatment was continued seven days, 
and his pains were gone and I pronounced him entirely out of danger. 
He recovered. One other very important factor which I must men- 
tion is, I had the assistance of one of the best magnetists I ever met 
— Jonathan Arnold of North Abington. 

Mrs. A. O. W., the well-known clairvoyant and physician, Bryan t- 
ville, Mass. (case of severe shock to nervous system occasioned by a 
fall). — I was accompanied by Mr. Jonathan Arnold of North Abing- 
ton, who rendered most valuable assistance by his superior magnetic 
power. As we entered the sick-room it was so darkened we could 
not see where to go, and we were directed to the bedside where she 
lay. The least ray of light caused intense pain to her eyes. I placed 
fy right hand over her eyes and two fingers of my left immediately 
back of her left ear, letting them remain for about five minutes, then 
gave the back of the right ear the same treatment. I then said, 
" Now let the curtains be raised so that the sun may come in." They 
were raised to their full height, and the full light of day streamed into 
the room, causing not the slightest pain to her eyes, though they were 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 379 

quite red and inflamed. Her general appearance was somewhat 
startling. Below a line from nose to ear the face looked as though it 
had been in black dye, and appeared to be nearly paralyzed ; the whole 
body and limbs were badly bloated ; indeed, it seemed almost like try- 
ing to raise the dead to life, to attempt to restore her to health. Now 
I don't know whether we had faith or not. We went to work. Mr. 
Arnold placed his hands upon her feet ; my hands were upon her 
head. In a few minutes she said, " Oh, what a strange feeling ! " A 
peculiar sensation permeated her whole being, and then a profuse 
perspiration set in, great beads of sweat started from her forehead and 
over the face, and body, and within ten minutes her entire clothing 
was as wet as though it had been dipped in a tub of water. Her 
pains were gone. 

Three days later we found her in a comfortable condition, and al- 
most her first words were, " Look at my head back of the ears ; you 
raised two great blisters there." I looked and sure enough a blister 
over one inch in width and more than two inches long had been 
raised behind each ear. Nothing had been applied to raise those 
blisters and nothing was on my fingers. Moreover I had just washed 
my hands in hot water immediately before I applied them to her. 
The question now comes, Whence those blisters ? I don't know. 
Who does ? Three days later we gave her another treatment similar 
to the previous one, and with like results ; her eyes, however, were 
well and needed no further treatment. She recovered rapidly from 
this time until entirely cured. I gave her but little medicine. After 
the fourth treatment she measured eight inches less around the waist 
than she did at the first time we called and the bloat of the limbs had 
greatly subsided. 

These and similar cases lead me to more appreciate the great utility 
of Therapeutic Sarcognomy, for by following its simple teachings we 
make no mistakes, nor are we at a loss to know just where and how 
to apply treatments. 

I will now name several persons who may be referred to, who no 
doubt would respond to letters of inquiry, all of whom were treated 
and cured in strict accordance with .the laws of Sarcognomy. 

Mrs. J. D., Brockton, Mass. — A case of peritonitis. Was very 
much emaciated. Supposed to be an incurable case by her physi- 
cian. Gained strength the moment I entered the room, regained her 
health rapidly, and within three weeks was out of doors. 

Mr. J. P. B., Boston. — A case of distended stomach, accompanied 
with convulsions. A case of long standing. Cured in two weeks 
(little medicine used). 

Miss L. G. B., South Weymouth. — Severe case of neuralgia in 
face and head. Cured in three minutes. 



380 RATIONAL PRACTICE. [CHAP. XVIII. 

Mrs. C. H. K., Findley, Ohio. — A case of chronic neuralgia. 
Cured in one minute. 

Mrs. M. J., South Weymouth. — A case of chronic rheumatism. 
Cured in a few days (little medicine used). 

Miss B. of Bath, Me. — Inflammation of nerves of eyes. A case 
of eight years' standing. Had been treated several weeks at the 
Boston Eye and Ear Infirmary without any benefit. Cured by one 
treatment. 

I might give a large number of cases similar to the above, but 
these few cases show something of a range of diseases which yield 
readily under proper treatment as taught by you. 

I may add that, with me, rheumatism and diseases of the nervous 
system yield more readily than most other diseases. 

Yours truly, 

J. P. Chamberlin. 

statement of ebenezer day. 

Boston, Nov. 26, 1886. 
While in California from 1850 to 1876 by hardships and exposure 
I contracted a complication of diseases from which I have since 
remained a confirmed invalid. I have suffered exceedingly from 
insomnia; for many years I have not slept during any twenty-four 
hours above five minutes altogether. Early this season rheumatic 
pains together with my old complaints completely prostrated me, and 
although the best medical attendance which money could command 
was summoned, their skill was without any good results, as I grew 
worse and worse and was given up as incurable. About the first of 
September I was rapidly sinking, all my friends present supposing I 
was already struck with death. My limbs had become cold and 
damp ; I felt that my end had come. At this time, about 1 1 a.m., Mr. 
J. P. Chamberlin came with my attendant, who had told him of my 
case and asked him in to see me. He spoke to me several times and 
it was by the greatest effort that I could reply. He took me by the 
hand and asked my attendant to assist in raising me. I was raised to 
a sitting posture, when he applied his hand to the back of my head. 
Instantly the strangest sensation was experienced. I said to him, 
" What are you doing ? You are knocking all the teeth out of my 
head," — though the sensation was not at all painful or unpleasant. 
But at once all my pains ceased and I felt life returning ; a warm and 
peculiar thrill spread through my whole body, even to the ends of my 
fingers and toes. I was cured. He then ordered a good breakfast, 
of which I partook heartily. I felt well. I wanted to rise from my bed 
and dress myself, but was not allowed to attempt it then. The next 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 38 1 

morning, however, I dressed myself without assistance. I regained 
my strength rapidly, and up to this time that glow of warmth which 
he imparted to me has not for one moment left me, although pre- 
vious to his treatment I had not passed a day the past summer with- 
out suffering from being cold and chilly. I now sleep well; often 
five to six hours without once awaking. He gave me no medicine. 
By what means my life was saved I know not, but do know the fact. 
I cannot explain how I was cured, but am most profoundly thankful 
to Him from whom all blessings flow. Ebenezer Day. 

Boston, Sept. 10, 1887. 
J. P. Chamberlin : 

My Dear Sir, — It is now one year since you imparted to me 
wonderful vitality by placing your hands upon my head, and raised 
me from an extremely low physical condition to comparative health. 
It was then a question whether the effect would be permanent. I am 
able to answer that question in the affirmative. Though I am not in 
perfect health now, and never expect to be again, yet that life power 
which I then received from you has not yet left me, and I daily feel 
its glow and strength, not only in body, but my mental faculties were 
never before as good as to-day. And I take this opportunity to 
again thank you for the great benefit you so kindly bestowed upon 
me. Most gratefully yours, 

Ebenezer Day. 

cases reported by dr. wm. e. wheelock of boston. 

Case 1. — A young man of twenty came to our office at San Anto- 
nio very much emaciated ; was unable to get around very much ; said he 
had been troubled with chills and what the doctors called continued 
fever. This was November. During the summer he had spent four 
months in the hospital and received some benefit, but upon leaving 
there he had a relapse and was discouraged. Thinking there was no 
help for him, he came to our office seven times and we treated him 
according to the principles of Sarcognomy, but in addition to the 
nervauric treatments gave him three or four vapor baths. He never 
had a chill after the last treatment and within two months weighed 
160 pounds and was to all appearance a perfectly healthy man. 

Case 2. — A woman 40 years of age was diagnosed and treated by 
other physicians for dropsy. By placing the hand at one side of the 
abdomen and striking the other side with the ends of the fingers 
there was a sound and an action like water moving inwardly. I gave 
her a little medicine to regulate the system and nervauric treatments 
with electricity. I treated twice a week for a month and reduced her 



3$2 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVI II. 

in girth around the waist so that she had to take up her clothes in 
order to wear them. Her fears of dropsy were dispelled. Her means 
being limited she then stopped the treatments. 

Case 3. — A German 50 years of age, a tailor by trade, had been 
unable to follow his occupation for three months, was broken of his 
rest at nights and in fact was a continual sufferer from rheumatism. 
One treatment not to exceed twenty-five minutes completely cured 
him. This was quite a remarkable case, as he had been treated by 
quite eminent M.D.'s with no benefit. 

Case 4. — Weak eyes. A commission merchant 45 years of age 
had been unable to do any business for a number of years without 
spectacles, in fact wore them all the time. He had twenty-one treat- 
ments as taught in your classes for that trouble and he laid off his 
spectacles and can do his business without them. I saw him some 
time after, and he remarked to me that he would not be placed in the 
condition he was in again for one thousand dollars. 

Case 5. — Falling sickness or epilepsy, as I diagnosed it. A lady 
42 years of age, mother of a family, would drop down without any 
warning and lav apparently dead for twenty to thirty minutes. She 
was having the spells on an average of twice a week when I first met 
her. I treated her fifteen or twenty times and she wrote me three 
months after that she had but one bad spell since. 

Case 6. — I was called to the bedside of a lady suffering with neu- 
ralgia. An M.D. sat by the bed, holding her, as she was wild with 
pain, had been in that condition for eight hours, and he had exhausted 
his skill and the patient was getting worse. With dispersive passes 
I stopped the pain within less than five minutes after entering the 
house, and it never returned. 

Case 7. — A man of middle age called upon me but a few days 
since with an enlarged liver which was causing him some suffering 
and anxiety. I gave him a thorough treatment and entirely removed 
it, and he tells me that he has experienced no difficulty since. 

Case 8. — I was called a week ago to-day to a case of diphtheria. 
It was not of the worst type, but was fast tending that way. I had 
supplied myself with sulpho-calcine, as you had recommended it when 
I was with you. I diluted it one-half and ordered it applied with a 
camel's-hair brush every half hour. It worked like a charm and in 
twelve hours the danger was past. She is now up and about. 

I have thus given you a sample of the cases I have handled. 

CASES REPORTED BY DR. A. J. SYMES OF CLEVELAND. 

Case 1. — Sciatica of nine months' standing. Cured in twelve treat- 
ments ; treated according to Sarcognomy. This case was under the 
care of two homceopathists, but without results. 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 383 

Case 2. — Inflammatory rheumatism, two weeks' standing. Cured 
in eight treatments ; treated according to Sarcognomy. 

Case 3. — Asthma. This case was in charge of an ailopathist. I 
was called in by a friend of the sufferer. I found him unable to lie 
down ; was compelled to sit up all the time. One treatment enabled 
him to lie on his back, which position he was able to retain until he 
died two weeks later of heart disease so called. This also was treated 
according to Sarcognomy. 

Case 4. — Lumbago. Cured in five treatments. This case was very 
severe, but yielded after the fifth treatment, and has not returned as 
yet and it is now eleven months since the last treatment was admin- 
istered. This also was treated according to Sarcognomy. 

Case 5. — This case was a determination of blood to the head, which 
caused a great deal of suffering. On examination I found his legs 
and feet were cold. He told me that he had been troubled in this way 
for over twenty years ; there was no capillary action in the lower ex- 
tremities. Ten treatments restored the capillary action and the head 
was relieved. He claims to feel better now than for the past twenty- 
five years. This, too, was treated according to Sarcognomy. 

I could fill pages in describing cases similar to the above, but think 
these five cases will suffice. However, I will mention one more case 
that is under treatment. 

A Case of Insanity. — She has had fifteen treatments and has im- 
proved very much. I have a great deal to contend with in this case 
owing to brutal treatment from the husband ; but, notwithstanding, she 
has improved very much, and if I am allowed to keep on with the 
treatment have not the least doubt but that she will be restored to 
mental and physical health. This patient is being treated magnet* 
ically and electrically according to Sarcognomy. 

dr. z. l. Baldwin's experience. 

Dr. Z. L. Baldwin of Lawrence, Michigan, speaks as follows of his 
experience after finishing his college course : — 

" Regarding the value of Sarcognomy and Psychometry in this my 
first year's practice, — 

" Sarcognomy has aided me much in applying massage and electri- 
city successfully, as is attested by the number of chronic cases that 
come to me ; while Psychometry aids me in determining obscure 
pathological conditions that a physical or oral examination would not 
reveal, also it gives me a knowledge of the patient that enables me to 
inspire the needed hope and confidence." 



3^4 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

CASES REPORTED BY DR. ORRIN ROBERTSON OF TEXAS. 

Chronic Cough. — Mrs. E. G. of Athens, Tenn., came to me in 1888. 
She was 74 years old and had a cough ten years. She had tried vari- 
ous remedies but all failed. It was called asthma, whooping-cough, 
consumption, etc., before my diagnosis. I found the respiratory mus- 
cles were irritated. I placed one hand on the lower dorsal region and 
held it there fifteen minutes and then held both hands on Health 
fifteen minutes. Two treatments twenty-four hours apart, and the 
cough was no more. 

Mrs. O. C. L. of San Antonio, Texas, aged 47, had a very bad cough 
which had continued twenty-one years. She had doctored all the time 
but with no benefit. Doctors said there was incurable consumption. 
Expectoration was free ; some blood. The skin was dry, but with 
night sweats. I was led to believe the original cause was a fracture 
of the lower dorsal and perhaps softening of the cord at the eleventh 
dorsal vertebra, but now there was an irritation in the lungs and the 
stomach was involved ; consequently eating, breathing or moving 
made the cough worse. And as the lower dorsal region contains the 
ganglia which emit the splanchnic nerves that govern all the abdomi- 
nal viscera, and as the stomach was affected from so much medicine, 
constipation was also a trouble. The cough now starts in the lungs 
by irritation and is conveyed by the pneumogastric nerve to the me- 
dulla oblongata, and as the stomach and lung irritation is so great it is 
sent downwards to the lower dorsal region and the convulsive expira- 
tion is produced. The phrenic nerve, in the middle of the cervical 
region, is started and it produces an act of inspiration by the dia- 
phragm. The upper dorsal region starts the intercostal muscles 
lifting the ribs and the irritation passes down to the abdominal mus- 
cles. As the whole system was involved, both nerves and muscles, I 
gave hot-air baths — alcohol as the excitant, with California laurel 
(Umbellaria Cal.) and damiana in the alcohol, following up each bath 
with cold salt-water shower bath. Then as an embrocation I used 
the above medicines with helonias dioica, equal parts. I used this 
freely up and down the spine, holding one hand on the eleventh dor- 
sal vertebra fifteen minutes at a time. I held one hand on Absorp- 
tion and the other on Adhesiveness, to assist digestion. Made rapid 
manipulations downward from Defecation for constipation ; then 
passing galvanic currents from the lumbo-sacral junction to Health and 
from the stomach to Health, holding one hand on the cephalic region 
on the back and the other in front. This process was continued six 
times every other day, and after twelve days she was free from cough 
and was again a sound woman. I might cite other cases, but this will 
suffice. 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 385 

Uterine Cases. — Mrs. J. L., age 32, had for years inflammation of 
uterus and ovaries. She had spent one year at Hot Springs, Ark. 
Came home disgusted, as she was unable to work and not able to doc- 
tor, and saw no sign of improvement. I gave her the hot-air bath, 
following with cold water every day. Then I made rapid passes up 
and back from mons veneris toward the cilio-spinal centre, and held 
my hands on Sanity and Health. I passed light galvanic currents, 
with aconite and macrotys on the electrode, from the ovaries to Health. 
She used a wash of fluid extract helonias 1 part, warm water 40 parts, 
twice a day. Internally: tincture aconite 5 drops, macrotys 10 drops, 
Pulsatilla 20 drops, water, 2 oz., — one teaspoonful every three hours. 
And in thirteen days she was a sound woman, able to do all of her 
work — washing, ironing, etc. 

Mrs. L. R., age 37 years. Five children. Had shortness of breath, 
lower limbs weak, melancholy, muscular system weak, inflammation 
of ovaries, skin dry, pains in back at lumbo-sacral junction, pains in 
back top of head, eyes growing weaker and burning, prolapsus uteri, 
inflammation of stomach and hemorrhage from womb. Doctors said 
the womb was lacerated and the only remedy was an operation. She 
had for fourteen years been in this condition and gradually growing 
worse ; now pains in the chest with a dry, hacking cough, — melan- 
choly. I passed galvanic currents from Melancholy, in front of the 
anterior margin of the ilium, to Cheerfulness at the arm pits, also made 
passes with the hands. I gave tincture pulsatilla, twenty drops a day • 
hot sitz baths, twice a day ; and cold water, once a day ; with enemas 
of fluid extract helonias one part, water forty parts. 

The muscular system was weak ; therefore I stimulated Vital Force 
on the summit of the thighs and on the head, and Power on the top of 
the shoulders, also stimulated Locomotion by gentle percussions ; then 
holding the hands and also calf of the legs, and used on my hands as 
an embrocation damiana and laurel, equal parts. 

There was prolapsus uteri. For this I gave very light galvanic cur- 
rents for sixty minutes a day and dispersive passes from the mouth of 
the vagina to Health and Sanity, and vitalized by the lower dorsal and 
lumbar regions with fluid extract helonias on the hands. I also ap- 
plied the positive pole to the cervex and negative on lumbo-sacral 
junction to vitalize back. I gave hot-air baths at 13 5 every other 
day, finishing with cold water, leaving her to walk all she could. In- 
ternally she took fifteen drops of helonias three times a day. 

For shortness of breath, I held my hands on Inspiration on the ribs^ 
thoracic or pulmonic regions on head and body, and stimulated Health 
by gentle percussions and holding my hands on the same to give a 
healthy tone. I also stimulated Respiration on head and body to 
deepen breathing. 



386 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

The hemorrhage from womb I stopped by gentle percussions on 
palms of hands and bottom of feet, and on shoulders, to draw the blood 
from that centre. I also made passes from the lower limbs and from 
the womb up and back to the cilio-spinal centre. All these troubles 
gradually disappeared, and after one year she is a strong, healthy 
woman and can do all of her own work. 

Mrs. L. T., 26 years old ; had one child; an operation performed — 
uterus scraped — and had three regular M.D.'s ; and for three weeks 
was flat on her back,, and they said she would die from the hemor- 
rhage. I was called. I gave gentle percussions on palms of hands 
and feet and shoulders, made passes from the womb to the shoulders, 
gave her a cold salt-water bath, and the flow stopped. That day she 
walked the floor, and the fourth day was down in town and riding on 
street cars. This was one year ago and her health has been good all 
the time, and now the regulars say she only had the hysterics. 

The proper application of Therapeutic Sarcognomy will cure almost 
any female disease at once ; and as to hemorrhages, it will not fail. I 
believe I could stop the menstrual flow eight times in ten cases with 
the hands. 

Natural Sight Restored. — The employment of eyeglasses to im- 
prove the vision has long been practised, but the proper application 
of the finer forces will do away with glasses in a majority of cases. 
To prove this position I here cite two cases in San Antonio : — 

Mr. J. H., 82 years old, had worn glasses twenty-five years all the 
time, even in eating and walking about. His eyes were sound, but 
weak ; the pupil was contracted, the cornea and lens were flattened. 

Distant objects were distinctly seen ; while those near could not 
be distinguished, — presbyopia. His general health was fair. I used 
warm water on my hands and made passes with the finger tips from 
the nose outwardly over the lids thirty minutes, as the lids were dry 
and stiff or hard. I then placed one hand across the forehead, over 
the eyes and superciliary ridge, and the other on the second dorsal 
nerve, to expand the pupil of the eyes. Held my hand there fifteen 
minutes. I then placed one hand on the median fossa (below the 
occipital knob) and the other on the forehead, as above mentioned, 
to strengthen the optic nerves (as their origin is in the tubercula 
quadrigemina) which are between these localities, and in three days 
his eyes were perfect. He could read any kind of print at a distance 
of twelve inches. 

Mrs. M. C, 83 years of age, had not seen her children in three years 
to distinguish them apart. Had not seen the moon, stars, etc., and 
had long since quit glasses as they were of no benefit. Her eyes 
were good once, but now worn out. I treated the eyes as in the above 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 387 

case, and also held the tips of my fingers over the organs of Shade and 
Light, and in seven days, thirty minutes each day, she could see the 
stars and moon, and tell her children apart and read large print. Both 
of these persons lived twelve months after treatment and their eyes 
remained the same ; therefore is it not probably true that spectacles 
are unnecessary at any age, as we can have perfect sight without spec- 
tacles till death ? " Old eyes made new," not by massage, glasses, 
cutting or burning or drugs, but by the application of the principles 
of Therapeutic Sarcognomy. I will not cite other cases here, although 
I have made just as radical cures on those suffering many years with 
the same defects ; and I have cured cases of nyctalopia, hemeralopia, 
granulated lids, scrofulous inflammation, ophthalmia tarsi, conjunctiv- 
itis, astigmatism and myopia, and removed two cataracts, by this 
science. In view of the very rapid increase in optical defects in each 
succeeding generation the time is at hand when all should ignore the 
harsh material treatment and turn to this science as the only safe and 
sure means of correcting these evils. 

Deafness. — Mr. J. A. M., 62 years old, had been entirely deaf in one 
ear for twenty years. I made gentle passes up and back from Disease 
to Health and from Insanity to Sanity, on the head. Held my finger 
tips on the front part of Sensibility, on Sound, and also on Sense of 
Force, at the outer contours of the eyes. This was continued fifteen 
minutes at a time, and in three treatments he could hear a watch tick ; 
hearing was perfect. 

Mrs. E. S., 31 years old, became perfectly deaf from drinking blueing, 
trying to cure some blood disease. This was eight years ago and the 
ears remained the same. She could not hear thunder. I treated her 
ears as in the above case, and used a little almond oil, and she could 
hear ordinary conversation and hear a clock tick. 

Mrs. H. C. had not heard out of her right ear for seven or eight 
years, and only partially for twelve years. It gradually grew worse 
for four years, and for eight years she had kept it stopped, as she had 
given up all hope of its restoration. I treated her only three times 
with my hands, as in the above cases, and she could hear distinctly 
with that ear. 

Mr. C. H., 15 years of age, had trouble with his ears from birth. 
Could never hear distinctly, but had a roaring all the time. Colds 
made them so he could scarcely hear at all. There was great pain 
most of the time. I washed the ears out with water and held my fin- 
gers on Sound and Sense of Force, and made passes up and back 
from Disease to Health and from Insanity to Sanity, and in eight 
treatments, thirty minutes at a time, his ears were sound and hearing 
perfect, and have remained so, although fifteen months ago. 



388 RATIONAL PRACTICE [.CHAP. XVIil. 

Mr. J. G., age 47, had trouble with his ears when he was 15 years of 
age. Could not hear at all when he had colds. Had risings and 
roaring all the time. During the war he had camp fever, and doctors 
claimed it settled in his ears. He had taken a great deal of quinine. 
He had not heard out of his left ear for twenty years, and but little 
out of the right for eighteen years. His general health was fair. I 
treated him nineteen times as in the above cases, except dry cupping 
on the back of his neck, and he gradually improved. He got so he 
could hear ordinary conversation, dishes, knives and forks rattle, fire 
sparkle, shoes creaking, rap on door and chickens cackling, which 
he had not done for twenty years. His hearing remained the same 
until his death, some nine months later. 

Mrs. E. G., 74 years old, had been deaf fifty years, and in six treat- 
ments with my hands, as above, she could hear the clock tick, and 
knives, forks, etc., rattle. This was fifteen months ago, and hearing 
is yet perfect. With such evidence before me, and a number of others 
I could cite, I am led to say, in the light of Therapeutic Sarcognomy. 
"he that hath ears to hear let him hear." 



STATEMENT OF A MEMBER OF THE LEGAL PROFESSION, WHO HAD 
BEEN INSTRUCTED IN THERAPEUTIC SARCOGNOMY. 

In applying your instructions in Psychometry and Sarcognomy 
my success as an amateur has been very encouraging. I frequently 
succeed in getting impressions and describing cases on my first 
interview, before coming in contact with the patient, and whenever I 
apply the principles of Sarcognomy in treatment the patients are 
often surprised at the unexpectedly favorable results. 

In January, 1889, I was called on by my friend Dr. F. of Lowell, a 
regular M.D. and LL.D. (having practised law in his earlier years), 
to tell him truly his condition, as two or three physicians had said 
he could not live over six days, that he had a cancer on the left side 
of his face, and that his heart difficulty was alarming as he was 
liable to drop off instantly. He wanted to arrange his business so 
that his wife would have no need of an administration upon his 
decease. 

He was about fifty years of age, of a mental-motive and impres- 
sible temperament, so that I could remove the pain from his face 
instantly. 

His so-called cancer has been cured under my treatment, without 
medicine ; and I might claim it as a cancer cure according to medical 
opinions, but in fact I do not believe that it was a cancer, and found 
that it was better or worse as his general health was modified. 

I might also claim the cure of his heart disease ; but, from the ease 






CHAP. XVIII. J GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 

with which I controlled it, I am satisfied that it was a nervous 
affection. 

He had been suffering from malaria for twenty-seven years and his 
nervous system was thoroughly deranged. I was with him in some of 
his worst attacks, which I need not describe, and gave him prompt 
relief. He soon resumed his labors in comparative health, which 
was very gratifying, considering that he had been unsuccessfully 
treated with digitalis for his heart and cocaine for the pains of his 
face, and many other remedies, and enjoyed or endured the regular 
practice for twenty-seven years with no success. At present he is 
in improved health and entering active employment. 

In April I saw Mrs. M. of Lowell, aged 52, suffering from the 
removal of two cancers from her right breast by the knife, and then 
undergoing treatment by plasters. Her last regular physician gave 
her morphine, and she was obliged to continue it hypodermically 
several times a day. Her appetite was variable, her right arm was 
nearly useless, and she suffered mentally from the condition of her 
daughter, a teacher, who had a cancer on the right side of the body 
(so recognized by several experienced physicians) and under the 
treatment of three physicians had received no help. Her menstrua- 
tion was nearly suppressed for six months, and her right arm was so 
affected she could not use it in her school duties. 

I perceived on the first visit that the mother could not recover 
from the cancer, but told her she could be relieved from the necessity 
of using morphine (in which I succeeded) and that her daughter 
could be cured. I relieved the daughter's severe headaches and 
restored her menstruation in the first month, and in less than four 
months the cancer was dispersed and her school labors resumed. 
These results were effected by brief treatments, usually not exceed- 
ing three minutes each time, and without removing her clothing. 

In July, '89, I saw Mrs. Y. of Lowell, who was suffering from 
nervous prostration and general debility, and, though she had been 
under the care of three regular physicians, had received little or no 
benefit. 

I diagnosed her case, discovering symptoms quite common at her 
age, and informed her that in two weeks she could visit the beach, as 
she wished. I treated her according to Sarcognomy, corrected her 
diet and gave her the tea of red and white clover blossoms which 
you recommended, and in two weeks she was off visiting, fully 
restored. 

This patient was called upon by a Mrs. H., aged about thirty, 
fleshy and jolly in appearance, whom no one would suspect of much 
suffering, and I surprised myself with the correctness of my off- 



390 RATIONAL PRACTICE [CHAP. XVIII. 

hand diagnosis. She asked if I could tell her what ailed her, and 
without moving my chair, being about ten feet from her, I told her 
without asking a question that she had injured her spine and pro- 
duced a congestion in the cervical region ; that she was suffering 
much, that her lower limbs were weak and becoming paralyzed on 
her left side, that she suffered from constipation and uterine displace- 
ment and had some water about the heart, though not generally 
dropsical. "Who told you all this?" was her natural question. I 
replied that as I had never seen her before and did not know her 
name I discovered it only by psychometry. " Well (said she) I did 
hurt my spine, and I do suffer just as you describe. I am consti- 
pated and my left limb is numb up to my knee. I had three physi- 
cians for nearly three days before the delivery of my last child, and 
I do fear dropsy and my doctors have failed to relieve me." Her 
physician, however, ranks deservedly high in his profession. 

Mrs. H. E. M., aged 60 years, a resident of Boston, was suddenly 
attacked with rheumatism on the eve of February 9, proximo, and 
on the following morning her right shoulder, arm, wrist, little finger, 
hip, knee and foot were swollen with inflammation and very painful. 
She was helpless ; could not turn herself in bed without assistance. 
Her right shoulder, arm and wrist, hip, knee and foot (ankle) were 
stiff and useless. 

The writer being her agent in Lowell, she had her landlady write 
him to come to Boston at once. I saw her the following day, and 
found her sick in mind and body, with high fever, and under the 
medical care of Dr. H., Park Square, Boston. Still she desired me 
to diagnose her condition Psychometrically. I did so and found her 
impressional, and that Psychological treatment was the remedy and 
method for her recovery ; by using which in about two minutes she 
could use her right arm and hand so she could dress herself ; and the 
tenderness of head left her, so that she combed her hair ; and she 
could turn herself in bed without assistance. 

After receiving this relief she continued under treatment of Dr. 
H. until about March 20, when Dr. G. came, in consultation, and 
the writer is informed that they decided that her foot must be ampu- 
tated and advised that she be sent to the hospital immediately. 
Thereupon she wrote me again. I saw her about March 22 and 
found that her foot had been lanced on both sides and that her case 
was critical. I treated her then, relieving her pain and enabling her 
to sleep, but did not take full charge of her case, not being in Boston, 
and under the influence of her nurse and physician she was per- 
suaded to go to the hospital and was sent there about April 8, 
proximo, and remained there forty-four days, when she was dis- 



CHAP. XVIII.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 391 

charged as incurable, with a plaster cast about the ankle and foot, 
which had been there about two weeks. The pains were unbearable, 
allowing no sound sleep or rest in body or mind. I saw her in 
Boston about May 27 at the Hotel Johnson, 237 Shawmut Avenue, 
and found her in a sad condition. She couid not put her foot to the 
carpet without severe pains. I examined her condition and treated 
her again. I took her cane and bade her to rise and stand upon her 
feet and then walk about the room. She did so with astonishment, 
for she had ordered crutches. I told her " No ; " that I was sure that 
she could be cured, and that I would secure new lodgings. The next 
day I called for her and she walked three blocks and took cars for 
Allston, some four miles away, and before I could secure a carriage 
she walked some five blocks to 65 Braintree Street without assistance 
save her light cane. I treated her before leaving for Lowell and told 
her to use her cane as little as possible and in one month she would 
not need it. To the surprise of herself and her landlady, on the 10th 
of June (thirteen days) she was able to ride into Boston alone, make 
several visits, and walk from Shawmut Avenue and Dover Street to 
the Providence Depot and to the Public Garden, and, after resting, take 
the electric cars for Allston ; nevertheless she rested nicely that night, 
and at this writing she can walk a mile and return without resting, and 
intends to commence her usual avocations about the first of July, '90. 

[Mr. H. states that in this case he assisted his treatment by some 
medical agents, — a little cascara, clover and hydrastis and some 
small blisters applied twice on the foot.] 

I have not made use of electricity in my amateur practice, but 
have been familiar with electric treatment for twenty years, though 
not attracted to its use. I was much gratified by your discovery of 
uniting electricity and magnetism and your experiments on my- 
self. I think your electro-magnetic current far excels anything 
known in that line, and I observed that whereas the negative pole of 
the common current is most powerfully felt, your electro-magnetic 
current was far more powerful in the positive pole, because charged 
with magnetism from a strong magnet, and yet was far more agree- 
able than any electric current. It affected favorably the back brain 
and the kidneys, and I slept very soundly after the treatment in the 
evening, whereas heretofore the electric current alone has caused 
wakefulness and irritation. I would suppose that any one would 
enjoy the application of the electro-magnetic current, from its whole- 
some, soothing influence. Lester A. Hulse. 

The foregoing statements do not convey a complete idea of 
rational practice, as they do not develop the medical, pneumatic and 



39 2 RATIONAL PRACTICE. [CHAP. XVIII. 

electric methods, the results of which may be as marvellous when 
guided by Sarcognomy as those of the nervauric practice that has 
been described. 

The power of pneumatic treatment, as shown in the chapter on that 
subject, is far short of what it may be when guided by Sarcognomy. 

Medical treatment, when guided by psychometric exploration of 
diseases and remedies, has a marvellous power and is continually rein- 
forced by new discoveries of therapeutic potencies and the power of 
intuition to lead beyond the acquisitions of science. 

Electric treatment by the new methods combines with the nerv- 
aura and the medical potencies, and not only changes the balance of 
functions, guided by Sarcognomy, but disperses morbid conditions 
and fills the patient with a combination of healing influences, hereto- 
fore unknown. Moreover in the new combination of static electricity 
and magnetism demonstrated in 1890, it furnishes that desideratum, a 
reviving stimulus for the entire nervous system, and a soothing tonic 
for all the tissues which sustain organic life, thus building up the 
constitution in a genial manner, which has heretofore been possible 
only by means of that nervauric treatment which is far from being 
universal in its application and success, while the electro-magnetic 
treatment has a potency which none can resist. 

When asked for the proper name to designate the new system of 
practice, which introduces Sarcognomy, I speak of it as the anthro- 
pological system of practice, for it is based upon the entire 
science of anthropology — all the truths of which contribute to its 
completeness. This is its distinction from all other systems, which 
are based upon very limited conceptions of the constitution of man 
and the resources of therapeutics. The conception of the healing 
art has been so limited as to be expressed by the phrase, " the Science 
of Medicine^ instead of the proper word Therapeutics, as if the 
healing art consisted entirely of using medicines. The colleges of 
the Anthropological system will be known as colleges of Therapeutics. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 

Cultivation of the higher organs indispensable — The various methods illustrated 

— Effects of high altitudes on the lungs — Importance of costal respiration — Illus- 
tration of the subject by the Georgia Eclectic Medical Joijrnal — Relation of the 
upper thoracic region to the ethical — Exercises of the limbs — Influence of altitudes 

— Importance of nutrition to the brain — False theories of a medical author — The 
principles that should guide our exercises — Evil effects of excessive muscular 
culture and passional excitement — Plan of culture proposed — Cultivation of the 
soul and religious sentiments as the basis of health — Of social intercourse and 
smiles — Importance of activity, energy and sport — Causes of exhaustion — Of 
vocal culture and oratory — System of culture devised by Mr. Checkley — Treatment 
of the skin — Tight lacing — Thoracic hygiene and atmospheric conditions. 



There are certain obvious hygienic laws, indicated by the principles 
of Sarcognomy, which should be understood by all as well as by the 
medical profession. 

The most important principle is found in the superiority of the 
higher portions of the body, morally and intellectually, and their 
generation and conservation of vital force. This makes it absolutely 
necessary to our happiness and success to practise the superior cult- 
ure — the culture of all the higher powers, as illustrated in the 
chapter on Health. 

First and pre-eminently we should cultivate the brain, and espe- 
cially cultivate its higher powers, — love, hope, energy, duty and per- 
severing firmness, — for the higher the culture the nobler and longer 
will be the life. These qualities sustain all the powers of life and 
fill the body with healthy and joyous efficiency. They defy disease, 
despair and insanity. Consequently, the first lesson of true hygiene 
is love, the second is work or energy, and the third is aspiration 
or self-respecting ambition. (This is true brain culture. The 
common idea of brain culture is intellectual effort, either in connec- 
tion with sedentary life, which impairs all the energies, or with active 
employments, which fatigue. This is not brain culture but brain 
exhaustion. The intellect and the physical energies are both ex- 
haustive.) 

There is no permanent and solid foundation of health and success 
without these higher qualities. Hence, our hygienic law is : incessant 
industry in the society of our fellows and the continual making of 



394 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

friends, which is the test of our active virtues. If we do not win love 
and friendship our moral capital is not in active use, and if we have 
not accomplished anything of value we are moral paupers. A life with- 
out enthusiasm and energy is a poor affair. Greatness of soul is the 
only great success, and soul culture takes precedence of all other 
culture. The brain should be warm ; a cold-brained man is the one 
commonly called cold hearted. 

The glowing condition of the brain is accompanied by a similar 
glowing condition of the chest, and from these two comes the life 
that animates the entire person. 

Looking at the body we find the normal superiority of the chest, 
which in its upper portion corresponds to the upper half of the brain. 
From the thorax proceed the currents of richly vitalized blood, which 
supply all parts of the body with vitality. Hence, if we would 
increase the stock of vitality, we must increase the development and 
activity of the chest, which can be done only by a life of action. 
The idle man degenerates, the busy man develops. Degeneracy of 
the thorax implies degeneracy of the whole constitution. In the 
Prussian army narrow-chested recruits, whose chest circumference is 
less than half the length of the body, are dismissed as predisposed 
to consumption. 

The action should be symmetrically normal, not manual labor 
alone, — especially not manual labor performed as a repulsive and tire- 
some task, — but exertion in which we are interested, which calls forth 
our ambition, energy and enthusiasm. Some such exertion every 
day is essential to normal development, essential to the expansion of 
the lungs. 

The thoracic development which does so much for life, health and 
energy may be cultivated also by conversation, declamation and 
singing. By engaging in these daily we increase our stock of 
normal life and health. They expand as well as vitalize the chest. 
There is no labor performed so easily and with so little fatigue as 
that which is accompanied by singing. A citizen of New Orleans 
named McDonough many years before the war gave to his negroes 
an opportunity of emancipation by extra work to buy their time 
piecemeal. They would buy one hour a day to begin, and with that 
advantage buy the remaining hours with increasing rapidity. Ani- 
mated by such hopes, they astonished spectators by the zeal with 
which they worked, early and late, singing at their work. 

The practice of singing, it is well known, promotes the health and 
the development of the chest. 

The expansion of the chest indicates the expansion or develop- 
ment of the noblest elements of humanity, for the higher organs of 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 39$ 

the brain are in so close a relation to the chest that its development 
becomes to them an invigorating co-operation. 

Thoracic expansion should therefore be steadily sought by all, and 
when it is not obtained by active exertion, which is the normal 
method, it may be sought by the expansion of the chest in forced 
respiration. We should, five or ten times in the day, inflate the chest 
to its fullest capacity for several minutes, and in walking we should 
make it a practice to inflate the chest and firmly hold the breath for 
a fourth of a minute. ("A late account of the gypsies," says 
Dr. E. Cutter, " states that every morning they go out early and 
inhale full breaths, hold them, pound their chests hard in expiration, 
and then inhale deeply again, and so on.") 

The inflation of which I speak is by the ascent of the ribs instead 
of the descent of the diaphragm, and its tendency is to develop the 
thorax and diminish the prominence of the abdomen, thus giving a 
desirable form, promoting the growth of the lungs and improving 
the quality of the voice as well as the aeration of the blood. I regard 
these systematic exercises in full breathing as of great hygienic 
value and highly beneficial to the nervous system and the higher 
sentiments. In expanding the upper portion of the chest and 
restraining the lower, the abdomen being drawn in as the chest is 
elevated, we produce an amiable and womanly sentiment. One who 
wishes to imitate a woman would find this the most natural way to 
do it. 

The very great benefit of high altitudes and mountain ranges 
from two to four thousand feet high in developing higher health and 
a more spiritual temperament is produced chiefly through the expan- 
sion of the chest required by a rarer atmosphere and the more active 
exhalation of the lungs. This beneficent influence has been amply 
realized in the elevated portions of Colorado, California and Northern 
Georgia and the Carolinas. 

There is abundant evidence of the protective influence of high 
locations against consumption. According to Dr. Valenzuela of 
Madrid (in L' Union Medicate) the deaths from consumption in Spain 
corresponded inversely with the altitude, being twenty per cent, of 
the patients in locations less than a hundred metres above the sea 
level, ten to twelve per cent, at an elevation of from one hundred to 
five hundred metres, while above twelve hundred metres phthisis did 
not exist. Mr. Geo. Foy states in the Medical Press and Circular, 
of July 10, 1889, that he found phthisis entirely absent at an eleva- 
tion of two thousand metres. 

Dr. Valenzuela appears to have shown that the benefit of high 
locations in resisting consumption is due to increased respiration, by 



39^ THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

producing this increased respiration artifically, which he did by plac-"" 
ing the patients in pneumatic chambers, in which the air had less of 
oxygen and more of carbonic acid, so as to compel additional respira- 
tion. He reports the successful treatment of five hundred cases in 
the early stages. The patients increased in weight and in thoracic 
measurement. 

Patients have often cured themselves by an active out-door life 
which greatly increased the respiration. As Prof. Mays expresses it : 
" The question of curing the disease does not depend on the purity 
or freshness of the air, or upon the number of bacilli which the 
atmosphere may contain, or upon the amount of oxygen which may 
be introduced into the body, for these are all secondary considera- 
tions, but it is simply a mechanical question, a question as to the 
best mode of expanding the lungs, and especially the apices of our 
round-shouldered and flat-chested patients, of removing the infiltrated 
products already existing, and of enhancing the constitutional resist- 
ance." 

The elevated regions from the Rocky Mountains eastward to 
Kansas, with an elevation above the ocean from two to seven thou- 
sand feet, have a dry atmosphere, free from malaria, extreme varia- 
tions of temperature, and a low barometric pressure proportioned to 
the height. 

The whole region, extending into New Mexico, is marked by the 
superior health of the inhabitants and a general improvement of 
health in those who settle there. Fevers and consumption are ex- 
tremely rare, but owing to the greater activity of the lungs and skin, 
and the great variations of temperature, pneumonia and erysipelas 
are the most prominent diseases, next to which may be mentioned 
bronchitis, rheumatism and uterine hemorrhage. 

" Consumption," says Prof, F. Donaldson, "is most prevalent at 
the level of the sea, and seems to decrease with increase of elevation, 
according to Fuch, Von Tschudi and Mackey. At Marseilles, on 
the seaboard, the mortality from that cause was 25 per cent. ; at 
Hamburg, 48 feet above the sea, it is 23 per cent. ; while at Eschwege, 
496 feet above the sea, it is only 12 per cent. At Brotterdale, 1,800 
feet above the sea, the mortality is reduced to 0.9 per cent. Dr. 
Glutsman has published a number of interesting facts in regard to 
the immunity from consumption in very high localities, such as on 
the Andes of Peru, table-lands of the Rocky Mountains, in the towns 
of Santa Fe de Bogota, at an elevation of 8, 100 feet, Potosi, about 
12,000, and the Puna region of the Andes, at 11,000; in Europe, 
many places on the Alps, as in Styria, Carniola and on the western 
section of the Pyrenees. In Africa immunity is said to exist on the 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 397 

plateaus of Abyssinia. In Mexico, at 8,000 feet above the level'of the 
sea, it is but rarely met with ; and in Asia, on the high plateaus of 
Armenia and Persia. 

A retreat for consumptives has been established in the cool cli- 
mate of Davos in the Swiss Alps, a mile above the ocean level, and 
the experience of twenty years is highly favorable. 

As an exercise for the promotion of health I would recommend 
the exercise of lung expansion, to be continued until an expanded 
chest becomes habitual and permanent. 

An ingenious student of the principles of self-culture (Mr. 
Edward Checkley of Brooklyn, N. Y.), having developed a delicate 
constitution into extraordinary vigor, is very enthusiastic and con- 
fident as to the value of thoracic expansion, especially of the upper 
portion of the chest. Mr. C. says that he observed in mismanage- 
ment of respiration a principal cause of disease. One class, with 
round shoulders and a stooping gait, with drooping heads, having 
more of abdominal than costal respiration, he found inclined to con- 
sumption, heart disease, paralysis and dyspepsia. In another class, 
which used the base of the lungs to the neglect of the upper 
portion, throwing the body backwards and projecting the abdomen, 
he found tendencies to dropsy, rupture, apoplexy, paralysis and 
kidney diseases. When the body is held erect, the muscles of the 
abdomen well braced, and respiration effected chiefly by the upper 
portion of the lungs, he anticipates great increase of health and 
strength, with freedom alike from consumption and obesity. Hence 
he believes that for proper physical culture we should seek the 
development of the lungs, especially upwards, rather than develop- 
ment of muscles. Mere muscular exercise he considers of very 
little importance in physical culture, but exercise of the brain in 
prompt and accurate use of the muscles he considers important. 

He maintains that the sternum should be flexible (composed of 
three parts), and in breathing the upper part should be strongly pro- 
jected, rising and falling as in a woman. By teaching this method 
he claims to have greatly improved the health of many persons. 

The doctrines and observations of Mr. Checkley are a strong con- 
firmation of Sarcognomy, which shows that the upper half of the 
brain and upper half of the chest are the great sources of normal 
healthy life and development. 

Mr. C. deserves much credit for his original observations and 
hygienic suggestions, which are certainly of practical value, but we 
must not forget that, although the upper portion of the chest is the 
most important, the entire chest is necessary to the greatest vigor, 
and any mode of life which restricts the development of the lower 



39$ THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

portion impairs the vital force. Sedentary employment does this. 
For a full development of the chest we should have, every day, the 
exercise of running, or something equivalent, compelling the deepest 
respiration. 

The Georgia Eclectic Medical Journal has advocated full breathing 
as follows : — 

" Full breathing a therapeutic agent, restorative and curative. — 
Frequently has attention been called in these pages to the great 
value of cultivating the habit and practice of filling the lungs to 
their fullest capacity as a curative measure in all scrofulous and 
other constitutional diseases. Recently a case of confirmed sleep- 
lessness, that had existed for nearly a month, and had resisted the 
treatment of two judicious physicians, was rapidly cured by making 
the patient fill his lungs to their fullest capacity by forced and power- 
ful efforts, and to hold the lungs full for various lengths of time, — 
IO seconds up to 30 and finally up to 45 seconds, — then expel the air, 
and after a rest at tranquil breathing for five, return again to this 
forced effort at filling the lungs, which was repeated at intervals of 
an hour or two during the day. At first the effort was as exhausting 
and trying as any hard manual labor or violent exercise. After a 
few hours' practice, and screwing up a heavy force of courage and 
will-power, the patient could hold the lungs full for 20 seconds at a 
time the first day, and repeat the act several times during the wak- 
ing hours. At night his chest muscles felt sore, but he was much 
refreshed, felt tired and went to bed at 10 o'clock p.m., and soon fell 
into a refreshing and calm sleep, which lasted till 3 o'clock a.m., the 
first he had to call sleep for several weeks. 

" In constitutional diseases dependent on mal-nutrition, and asso- 
ciated with impaired assimilation of the kind that is belonging to the 
deeper tissue renovation and repair, this practice of breathing in 
oxygen to the fullest extent is of remarkable curative powers. At 
first the effort is very trying and exhausting, but, by plucky effort 
and a full use of will, all the other difficulties to its use can be over- 
come. Children can be taught the art as well as adults when proper 
care and attention is given to imparting instruction and superintend- 
ing these respiratory efforts. It requires patience, persistence, and 
a full measure of persuasive address to manage children and young 
people successfully. We have seen thin-chested children, seemingly 
as frail as a cracker, pale, emaciated, with deficient digestive powers, 
and physically like infants in strength and endurance, brought out 
and raised up to robustness of constitution in a few weeks' practice 
of this most valuable therapeutic measure. Teach people to fill the 
lungs completely, not half full ; they must draw in the breath to fill 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 399 

the whole of the lungs, from apex to base. This is hard work at 
first, but trial and stick will remove all the trouble in the way. 
Feeble people have not, perhaps, had the full physiological power of 
their thoracic muscles. The lungs have never been filled, and the 
quantity of oxygen necessary to vitalize the tissues and animate the 
nervous centres has not been provided ; hence, these people go on in 
life half dead and die early. A full-breathing pair of lungs are a full 
measure of life-giving and life-supporting organs. Endurance means 
the quantity of oxygen the lungs can take in and the quantity the 
tissues can store in their recesses. This storing of oxygen is a 
mystic force, and the one we are trying to know more of. The 
power to store is the energy of the system to take and use. All 
these functions can be cultivated and enlarged by proper practice. 

" There is a man here whose age is 86. He says he would have died 
50 years ago but for his practice of filling his lungs as full as he 
could three or more times a day. He has been a feeble man all his 
life ; was never stout — always dyspeptic. At one time he believes 
he had consumption, which he cured by this practice. 

" A number of scrofulous and feeble, puny, pale and cadaveric-ap- 
pearing children in this town, who have grown much more healthy 
and are now vigorous and rugged, were made so by nothing else 
than practising this lung-filling exercise. Prof. Goss says he is now 
50 per cent, better off, physically, since he commenced this practice. 

" The point is to teach people to fill the lungs and to cultivate the 
power to hold the lungs inflated as long as possible. This will 
strengthen the respiratory muscles and deepen the chest capacity. 
The nervous system will be strengthened and made firm ; the blood 
and tissues will be enriched and the liability to take cold or take 
disease very much diminished. Nothing restores a man after a hard 
day's work so much as to fill his lungs to their fullest capacity in the 
open air several times during an hour. 

"People in whom the respiratory murmur over the apex of the 
lungs is weak, often hardly perceptible, the upper portion of the chest 
walls on both sides flat, health and digestion feeble — such ones are 
frequently transformed into strong and rugged persons by practising 
lung-filling systematically, making daily exercises. Then the respir- 
atory murmur over the apex becomes loud, full, soft ; the chest wall 
expands in all directions and the vital capacity is considerably 
increased. 

" There is more in this practice than the average doctor is able to 
perceive ; but resort to it, using judgment in teaching it, and being 
persuasive and encouraging in your address. The confidence and 
courage of your patients will be enlarged, and success will attend 
your efforts." 



400 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

The higher emotions are known to be inspiring. Love produces 
that full inspiration which is called a sigh. " The emotions that 
swell my bosom " is a common oratorical expression. The depress- 
ing feelings lower the chest and mental agony or physical pain 
produce its compression, forcing out the air in a groan, a cry of pain 
or a scream. The violent passions are expressed by the diaphragm 
rather than the ribs. Expressions of disgust, scorn and hate are 
made with depressed ribs. 

The exhausting efforts of the student are accompanied by unex- 
panded lungs and consequently a great lowering of vital power, 
which unfits him for efficiency in society. All active pursuits give 
that expansion and consequently development of character and 
power, with this difference, that when the pursuits are those of the 
selfish forces they develop the lungs downward, which gives force 
and activity but not sustaining power ; but when the activity is less 
selfish, when it brings out the warm, friendly emotions combined 
with heroic firmness, then there is a harmonious expansion which 
tends away from fatigue and depression, giving to the brain and upper 
chest a fountain of power and delight in action, — a steady, calm, 
sustaining energy. 

This condition may not be readily forced by pulmonary exercises, 
but pulmonary elevation does greatly assist emotional elevation, and 
with a confirmed habit of such expansion it will be much easier to 
develop the faculties that make health and happiness. Hence I 
would urge upon all the practice of pulmonary expansion by eleva- 
tion as a powerful adjunct to moral culture and hygienic culture, to 
the resistance and conquest of disease. How much it will accom- 
plish I cannot say, but, having entire confidence in the laws of Sar- 
cognomy, I venture to assure my readers that they will be well 
repaid for such exercises in themselves, and physicians will find it 
profitable to prescribe them for their patients, especially if they are 
combined with rousing, spirit-stirring songs, such as the Marseilles 
Hymn, Star Spangled Banner, John Brown's Body, Nearer My God 
to Thee, Exile of Erin, and spirited hymns. 

Such songs, sung four or five times daily, make a great addition to 
the moral power, as they bring out the emotions. If we do not sing 
we may bring in the moral power, though perhaps less effectively, by 
direct evocation of the emotions. Let us think intensely, as we 
expand the chest, of the Divine power, to which we aspire with 
devotional feelings, or of the loved and lost, the dear beings whom 
we behold no longer, who are waiting our arrival in the better world. 
If we love them deeply, this loving thought will inspire us and make 
our pulmonary inspirations effective. 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 4OI 

That ethical culture is one of the most powerful means of main- 
taining superior health is one of the most important lessons of 
Anthropology. But what I mean is poorly represented by the words 
ethical culture, which generally suggest a meditation or a disquisition 
upon the proper rules of life. True ethical culture is the active 
exercise of the higher emotions, — the love of the mother for her 
child and her husband, and the active service that she gives; the 
happiness of a joyous family circle, where each contributes to its 
harmony and mirth ; the patient labor and watchful devotion which 
sustain the family; the struggle to perform every duty; and the 
charming, sympathetic manners, springing from an unselfish nature, 
which continually win friends. Indeed ethical culture might be 
defined as winning friends and making all happy around us, while not 
neglecting to defend the right and uphold the truth. 

As to physical exertion, Sarcognomy suggests that the lower limbs 
should have regular but not excessive exercise to sustain the activity 
of the lower half of the abdomen, with which they are associated by 
the spinal system, and to promote animal warmth, depth of respira- 
tion and active circulation. 

The basilar organs and passions, with which the lower limbs are 
associated, although they antagonize and in excessive action over- 
power all the higher qualities, do nevertheless in their normal action 
sustain the upper occipital region (as combativeness supports firmness 
or vitality supports love) and invigorate the whole brain by increas- 
ing the force of the circulation. 

The activity of the brain cannot be maintained in a one-sided 
manner, but requires the radiation of its energies to the body to 
maintain the blood-making and blood-circulating power. Hence, the 
exercise of the lower limbs, which is a basilar exercise, is necessary 
to increase the active manifestation of brain power, and thus give a 
more vigorous health. The stirring hunter or the man of any active 
pursuits has a much more active brain than the scholar who confines 
himself to a sedentary life ; but if this activity be carried too far, it 
greatly diminishes the capacity for calm and correct thinking and 
the control of the passions. 

The exercise of the upper limbs is associated with the energy of 
the upper half of the body and the superior posterior regions of the 
brain. Hence, exercises of the shoulders and arms are more tonic 
and less exciting than exercise of the lower limbs, and have more sus- 
taining, tranquil influence over the nervous system, — an effect which 
is said to have been recognized by the faculty of Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity. The health-lift has been highly appreciated by those who 
have used it, and rowing is a more beneficial exercise than running?. 



402 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

Systematic exercises which develop chiefly the shoulders are mani- 
festly, according to Sarcognomy, the most effective for strengthening 
the constitution and building up the health. While the arm above 
the elbow has the more tonic relation to the thorax, the arm below 
the elbow has a close relation with the upper abdomen, and its 
warmth materially assists digestion and assimilation. 

The exercises of the arms also have a tendency to develop a moral 
force of character of a higher grade than that which is promoted by 
the lower limbs, — an energetic ambition, free from violence. 

Sarcognomy also explains the influence of attitudes. The erect 
attitude gives the influence of the gravity of a column of blood about 
five feet high, exerting a pressure of rather more than two pounds 
to the square inch, withdrawing the blood from the head to the body, 
and from the upper- to the lower regions of the brain. The erect 
attitude is therefore the attitude of physical force and restlessness, of 
animal passion apd appetitite. 

A standing audience is in the proper condition for eloquent, inflam- 
matory harangues, but not for calm, philosophic thought and scientific 
understanding. These require a sedentary attitude in the listeners 
to be appreciated. The sedentary position is the necessary attitude 
for calm, well-governed or ethical thought, the quietude of the 
lower part of the body producing quietude of the lower part of the 
brain. 

The horizontal position removes the two-pound depressing or ani- 
malizing influence, and gives the superior regions of the brain and 
the trunk their proper ascendency. Hence, on the pillow men have 
their best thoughts, make the best resolutions, feel the most affection, 
and are more capable of regretting their errors. They have also 
more of calm enjoyment, and the brain in its higher powers regains 
its controlling influence and becomes capable of renovating the body. 
Whenever health fails entirely, we are compelled to keep the pros- 
trate attitude, in which the "vis medicatrix nature?" asserts its reno- 
vating power, especially when friendly and hopeful emotions are called 
out. Every effort to assume the erect position by the prostrate inva- 
lid endangers his recovery by diminishing the superior cerebral circu- 
lation, and taxing the brain for bodily exertion which it cannot sus- 
tain. 

In the horizontal position the heart acts more normally ; the pul- 
sation is less frequent and the circulation more efficient. Hence, 
horizontal repose for the restoration of and nourishment of the brain 
is very important to all who have exhausting labors. It should be 
taken whenever needed, and a prolonged rest after fatiguing labor. 
The brain requires abundant nourishment, and is greatly injured by 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 403 

any exhausting evacuations from skin, kidneys or bowels, or by the 
waste from excessive labor. Hence, athletes who train to reduce 
flesh often impair the nervous system. A condition of moderate 
embonpoint, such as we often see in handsome women, is the best con- 
dition for the brain,* and this is promoted by the free use of fluids, 
while abstinence from fluids reduces obesity. 

The most signal proof of the relation of nutrition to the integrity 
of the brain is the restorative effect of generous feeding of the insane 
in the Pennsylvania Hospital under Dr. John B. Chapin. Although 16 
to 20 ounces of solid food are said to sustain the health of a workman, 
Dr. C. administered in one case 137 ounces daily, making a gain of 
29 pounds weight ; in another, 172 ounces, making a gain of 58 pounds; 
in another, 154 ounces, with a gain of 42 pounds; and, in another, 
188 ounces, with a gain of 20 pounds. All made good recoveries. 

The ultra advocates of temperance and abstinence, who would 
restrict the pleasures of the table and make the diet monotonous and 
unattractive until the appetite fails, act on erroneous principles. A 
blood well enriched by good nourishment is essential to health ; or, in 
other words, it is essential to a vigorous brain. 

The growth of the brain when well nourished, and its decline and 
absorption when poorly nourished by the blood, are most fully shown 
by the observations of Malgaigne upon the serous condition of the 
brain in badly nourished rabbits. Kussmail and Tenner confirm his 
statement, and say that " in very thin rabbits, the exterior part of 
whose skull was opened during life, we found very great quantities of 
serum, and but little blood, whilst the opposite condition was ob- 
served to hold in well-fed animals." 

In the prostrate attitude on the back, the vital forces are also 
assisted by the warmth given to the spinal column. This is especially 
observable when we lie on the back after dinner to assist the process 
of digestion. Exposure of the back to be unduly cooled is very inju- 
rious, and this is apt to occur when patients turn upon the side, ex- 
posing the back, which has been accustomed to the great warmth of 
the bed. The back must be protected from cold winds and cold, wet 
conditions, and it is the region to which the vitalizing nervaura of 
another constitution is most efficiently applied. 

With a full knowledge of Sarcognomy a complete code of culture 
and development might be prepared, to guide in the attainment of 

* Dr. Meisner investigated the defective vision which occurred in a large body 
of Russian troops, and ascertained that it was due to defective nutrition, owing to 
the observance of a Greek fast, and passed away soon after the end of the fast, 
Nursing women, insufficiently fed, are oftentimes affected in the same way. In 
starvation the brain power is impaired before the emaciation of the body appears. 
The gayety of the active brain is most conspicuous in feasting, and social pleasures 
do not develop in company with hunger. 



404 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

health and virtue, for which this chapter merely gives the leading 
ideas. 

A French writer, Fernand Lagrange, has discussed the subject of 
bodily exercise from the common physiological data without arriving 
at the original views of Mr. Checkley. The writings of the medical 
profession upon such subjects are sometimes meagre and barren 
from their narrowness of view, which is only made more unsatisfactory 
by their pedantic technicality, of which the work of Lagrange is an 
example. By theoretical reasoning he reaches the conclusion that we 
should seek relief from mental fatigue only by exercises of an auto- 
matic character, which do not exercise the will, because the use of the 
will taxes the brain. 

This is entirely erroneous. Mental fatigue is not best relieved by 
mere muscular exercise, in which the brain is passive. Such exercise 
adds to the fatigue of both body and brain. Exercise is beneficial 
only when it is well sustained by the brain, and therefore pleasant. 
The exertion of a hunter in pursuit of his game is delightful to him, 
because sustained by his brain. All exercises sustained by strong 
impulses, that is, action of the brain, are pleasant and invigorating, 
but whatever is done without the co-operation of mental impulses 
becomes fatiguing and unpleasant. If the hunter were required to 
saw a load of wood or to walk on a treadmill, which would not require 
much mental action, he would be fatigued by less than half the effort 
which he would enjoy as a hunter. 

The relief of the mental fatigue of the student and business man 
is effected by bringing into action the portion of the brain opposite or 
antagonistic to that which has been fatigued. This is the social 
region. Pleasant, sportive, unintellectual company is just what he 
needs. If his occupation has been sedentary, active games, sports or 
dancing is what he requires, and the more his brain is roused by the 
excitement of his amusements, and the more vigorously he engages in 
them, the better the result. Hence it appears the doctrine to which 
Dr. Lagrange's book is devoted is absolutely false. 

Active exertion accompanied by vigorous exercise of the whole 
brain, as when the feelings and courage are intensely active, instead 
)f being debilitating, is the most efficient method of cultivating and 
leveloping all our powers, and the gymnasium in which there is the 
stimulus of social sentiment, rivalry and ambition to excel, is far more 
beneficial than one in which solitary exercises alone are practised. 

The essential principle for all exercises for the improvement of 
health and character is that they should be animating, and produce a 
cheerful, happy state of mind. Moreover, they should be sufficiently 
vigorous to compel active respiration and expansion of the chest. 






CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 405 

They should also bring a glow to the surface, and those who do not 
procure that by exercise should resort to friction with a crash towel 
or use an occasional Turkish bath. 

The principle that exercises for personal improvement must not be 
merely physical but must include symmetrical activity of the whole 
brain, especially of its upper posterior part, which is the true hygienic 
region, is absolutely imperative, and this necessarily includes the 
action of the upper portion of the chest, which Mr. Checkley has cul- 
tivated so successfully. For these reasons I am not partial to the 
gymnasium, or any arrangement formally designed for exercise on 
which mere muscular strength may be wasted. For youth the gym- 
nasium is far inferior to the playground, which develops the emo- 
tions. We live in a world which requires all the labor of all the 
people, at least eight hours a day, to make it prosperous ; and useful 
occupation is the normal method of cultivating muscle and brain, — 
useful occupation in company and for some important purpose, which 
is obedience to our higher nature, and gives us the interest and 
pleasure which belong to good acts. Normal industry is better than 
the gymnasium, and heroic exertion is still better. Many a rheu- 
matic has been suddenly cured by the approach of danger which 
compelled him to fly for his life. 

Heroic energy is superior far to all calm and passionless exercise. 
The performance of some highly important duty, such as the saving of 
life, elevates our own life. If we can find anything to call out our 
enthusiasm, that is the best thing to do. A great aim in life is a sus- 
taining power ; and, whatever our position, if we go into the battle of 
life with an earnest determination- to conquer difficulties and perform 
every duty, that determination will sustain us. We should learn to 
bring our full will power into whatever we do. By this, invalids have 
cured diseases that defied medicine, in themselves, and the contagion 
of a strong will has cured many an invalid. 

Excessive muscular culture is not hygienic. The trained athletes 
who prepare for boxing and running frequently exhaust the nervous 
system, for the brain and the muscles are antipodal. Impaired vital- 
ity and a shortened life are consequences that result from over-training 
the muscular system. The champion athlete, R. A. Pennell, who 
held out two hundred pounds with one arm, soon became a physical 
wreck, and died when he should have been in his prime. The exhaus- 
tion of the athlete appears in his brain and lungs — failure of vitality 
and pulmonary disease — and frequently in heart disease. 

The passional region of the base of the brain is especially unfavor- 
able to health and life, when it gets into predominance, — human 
beings have often died in fits of passion, and Dr. F. L. Oswald de- 



406 THE HYGIENE OF SARCUGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

scribes the death of a grizzly bear from rage. The bear was caught 
by Governor Pacheco of California in a hunting expedition. It was 
seized by the hunters, held by two lariats, and dragged by the horse- 
men, in spite of its resistance, to a barn, where, being bitten by a wolf- 
dog, it turned upon him in fury, but, finding himself checked by the 
double lariats around his body, immediately fell dead. 

Evidently the basilar organs and the muscular system are not the 
most essential to vitality, and women, who are inferior to men in 
muscle, are superior in longevity, because they maintain a more com- 
plete and symmetrical activity of the brain. 

Our colleges are beginning to recognize the importance of physical 
culture, but have scarcely attained the true philosophic conceptions. 
Neither laborious gymnastics nor trivial varieties of calisthenics are 
what human development requires. Our leading idea should be the 
culture of the brain, meaning thereby its upper region, which sus- 
tains the brain power and energy of the soul ; and, secondly, the cult- 
ure of the thorax, giving predominance to its upper half. From these 
regions life flows out to the entire body and perfects every organ. 

What exercises, then, will be most effective for this purpose ? Sing- 
ing emotional songs is, as I have shown in the " New Education," 
the most efficient of all means for ethical culture and thoracic as 
well as cerebral development, and hence this should occupy the first 
rank in a system of complete culture. It is the very opposite of 
the system of culture by mere muscular exertion practised by athletes 
and gymnasts, — a system which does not elevate the character or 
efficiently promote health and longevity. 

Muscular exertion which does not come from the spontaneous 
overflow of cerebral energy is a tax upon the brain and lowers rather 
than elevates the constitution. Brain and muscle should act in 
unison. 

As the exercise just mentioned — spirited song — gives the 
highest activity to the brain and upper thorax, it is manifest that it 
produces a surplus energy that would delight in physical exertion and 
therefore should be indulged in action. 

I would therefore prescribe for a school of thorough culture an 
exercise of ten or fifteen minutes, three times a day, consisting of 
spirited songs associated with spirited action. The arms should be 
thrown aloft in graceful gestures in various directions, but chiefly the 
arms and palms being held aloft and thrown up with energy ; then 
there should be movement of the lower limbs, marking time with 
the feet and shifting their positions ; then marching with varying 
rapidity, keeping up the song ; finally a systematic dance, song being- 
still maintained, ending with a dance to instrumental music. This 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 407 

wouid produce the most perfect and harmonious development of the 
entire constitution. The superiority of the results of harmonious and 
ethical culture over that of the merely muscular is illustrated in 
the advantage the ethical nature gives to women in making them 
superior fencers and dancers, though inferior to men in physical de- 
velopment. Mr. Checkley says that at the ballet school the girls 
were superior to the boys. Women who are trained to work instead 
of effeminacy are as efficient as men in labor and often superior in 
endurance. The King of Dahomey has shown that they may be 
made good soldiers. 

Arm gestures are prescribed in calisthenic training, and are made 
prominent in training cadets at West Point. They are all beneficial, 
but the gesture without the voice is comparatively a feeble, spiritless 
affair. All other gestures are unimportant, compared with the up- 
ward. This expands the chest, throwing the vital energies upward, 
and is therefore of a rousing, hygienic nature. 

In using the arms we should have a light weight in the hands, of 
two to four pounds, for brisk movements ; and should also have heavy 
weights, of from six to ten pounds, for the exercise of the shoulders. 

Fencing, boxing, rowing, leaping, running, swinging, and a great 
variety of exercises with ropes, ladders, bars, weights, leaping poles, 
roller skates, etc., all have their value ; but that value is greatly in- 
creased when associated with vocal exercises or with music. 

Walking with a proper attitude is a very important part of our 
self-culture. We are continually gaining when we walk with the ab- 
domen held in, the chest prominent, the head erect, and the back also 
erect, in a line nearly straight. 

Mr. Checkley has the utmost confidence in this, as sufficient for our 
development, without the need of gymnastic apparatus. 

To review the whole subject at the risk of repetition I would say 
that the fundamental principle of hygienic culture is the develop- 
ment of the symmetry of a normal constitution, or, in other words, 
the culture into activity and predominance of those portions of the 
constitution which are the source of happiness, health and vital 
power, and the restraint into subordination of those which tend to 
feebleness and disease when predominant ; in other words, to live in 
the summit of the brain and the summit of the body. 

The regions which thus need special cultivation are the upper 
half of the brain, the seat of happiness and moral excellence, the 
upper half of the body, the thorax — especially its upper portion 
— and the spinal column, the abdominal region being that which 
needs to be kept within bounds ; the muscular system also being 
cultivated within judicious limits and not allowed too great a develop- 



408 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

ment. If we seek muscular vigor it should be attained rather by 
developing the spinal cord or nervous energy than by increasing the 
size of muscles. A large thorax and strong spine produce the 
highest efficiency. 

The development to be sought is that which comes from functional 
activity, and the functional activity of the superior organs secures 
the healthful activity of the whole constitution. Thus we attain the 
cephalo-thoracic temperament, a development which the world 
admires; which was seen in Washington, Jackson and Clay, and im 
perfectly displayed in the Apollo Belvidere. 

Pre-eminent among the means of hygienic culture is the culture 
of the soul ; or, in other words, of the upper half of the brain — th^ 
culture of a noble character — of firmness, energy, industry and hope 
animated and directed by love, benevolence, devotion, faith and 
sympathy. Perfection of character develops perfection of constitu- 
tion, and hence the teacher of a true religion develops body as well 
as soul, and the two functions, religious and therapeutic, should be 
united in the same individual. The priest should be a physician, 
the physician should be as far as possible a priest. 

It is the characteristic doctrine of Sarcognomy that religious 
excelleiice of character is the best basis for health ; and I say religious, 
rather than moral, because the word moral has, from the ethical per- 
version of society, acquired so cold, cramped and petty a meaning as 
to be inadequate to the expression of a complete character. It is 
true the word religion has been equally perverted, so that it fails to 
express the fulness and completeness of the soul, and does not 
include some of the most important elements of character (being 
compatible with austerity, intolerance and asceticism), but it includes, 
or at least does not ignore, a lofty reverence, spirituality, faith and 
love, which morality overlooks. Hence I use the word religion as 
capable of being understood to mean a Divine perfection of char- 
acter, and I affirm that this Divine perfection is an inspiring force 
that tends to make the body perfect, fitting it for the residence of 
a perfect soul. Hence the great power of religious enthusiasm and 
faith in making marvellous cures of disease, and the power of 
mind-cure healers in improving health by keeping before the mind a 
grand ideal and thus bringing our spiritual nature into correlation 
with Divine perfection. 

All social exercises, and amusements in which the social affections 
are called out, contribute to health, and a life of active labor in 
the zealous performance of duties gives strength to the nobler 
qualities which sustain our health. At the same time it is important 
that in performing these laborious duties we should be surrounded 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 4O9 

by social harmony — should be associated with friends. The contin- 
ual presence of persons who are disagreeable, for whom we feel con- 
tempt or aversion, is a continually depressing influence to our higher 
nature and consequently to our health. Hence the great value of 
the association of the sexes for the promotion of health and virtue. 
The strict separation of the sexes produces a decline among men in 
refinement, virtue and health, as well as an enfeebling, demoralizing 
influence on the other sex ; coarseness on one side, feebleness and 
imbecility on the other. The conjugal union furnishes the essential 
condition of spiritual and physical health, in the serenity and love 
which it produces when it is a normal union. But in the abnormal 
union — the union of those who have little mutual respect or love — 
each becomes an injury to the other, and the injury is transmitted to 
offspring. The dissolution of such debasing unions is therefore 
essential to health and virtue. 

The mental condition which is truly ethical and which we should 
ever cultivate is that expressed by a smile. The smile (according to 
Pathognomy) is the expression of the superior regions of the brain, 
a manifestation of amiability and happiness which instantly rouses a 
corresponding feeling in the beholder. The smile illuminates the 
face and changes a repulsive to an attractive expression. The fre- 
quent smiles of women make their society attractive and win the 
love of men. Smiles have many varieties and degrees of merit, but 
all are attractive and healthful. 

As we are continually liable to encountering an unpleasant social 
as well as physical atmosphere, the cultivation of heroic hardihood 
should be a leading aim of hygienic culture. He who cannot en- 
counter the exposures incident to our irregular atmosphere without 
contracting colds, pulmonary inflammations, rheumatism, neuralgia 
and impaired health, is but poorly developed, and he who cannot 
meet the unsympathetic, coarse, selfish, half -developed humanity 
that abounds everywhere, without suffering in mind and realizing 
irritation, depression, melancholy or misanthropy, is poorly devoloped 
and needs to overcome his weakness and morbid sensibility. 

This heroic hardihood belongs to the shoulders, and is the product 
of an active life with exposure, — a life in which we must encounter 
difficulties and perhaps dangers. The lesson that nature teaches 
most impressively in " the survival of the fittest," is the importance 
of cultivating firmness and power. Weakness is everywhere victim- 
ized, and power everywhere triumphant. In meeting the unpleasant 
influences of society, the weak man is depressed, discouraged and 
defeated, the strong man is not affected, and by his superior moral 
force overcomes the unfriendly influence and makes it subservient. 



4IO THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

The saints and heroes that have won the world's admiration have 
possessed the highest moral strength.. 

Strength of all kinds comes from exertion of the faculties. Hence 
incessant activity in important undertakings should be the rule of 
those who seek full development, and this incessant energy coincides, 
both as cause and effect, with development of the shoulders and 
upper occiput, and their predominance over the abdominal region 
and the anterior base of the middle lobe of the brain. When that 
development is attained it gives the organic basis of a superior 
character, and until it is attained we should seek it by a life of 
honorable activity of soul and body. The upper region of the brain 
furnishes the desires or impelling motives to such a life, and will 
insure such a career, if sufficiently strong, unless thwarted and 
repressed in youth. Among the desires that it gives are those 
which seek honor, friendship, love and distinction, toward which 
they instinctively lead us, and in doing so develop our constitution 
to its highest conditions of health, happiness and power, if their im- 
pulses are not thwarted. The conjugal union is one of their aims, 
which is sometimes defeated, but in its absence the frequent associa- 
tion of the sexes under favorable circumstances of good society may 
become a partial substitute, and there is no form of association more 
favorable to cultivation of the refining and healthful sentiments than 
dancing, in which the charm of music is associated with that of 
grace and courtesy. 

The indoor and outdoor sports of boys and girls are of the 
highest importance to their health, happiness and development when 
they are guided and inspired by good humor, the malicious, quarrel- 
some or ill-disposed being excluded. A very simple rule determines 
their value, for that which promotes enjoyment at the time and 
furnishes pleasing memories is just what is required for health and 
virtue, as it develops the upper region of the brain. In youth these 
enjoyments are of a more playful character, and even mingled with 
rivalry ; but in mature life the consciousness of duties to be per- 
formed and of worthy objects being realized becomes the para- 
mount feeling, social pleasures, games and sports being too much 
neglected. Daily dancing should be the rule at health resorts. 

It is essential to health that life should not be a hopeless struggle, 
and that faithful exertion should be rewarded by security and com- 
fort, — that life should not be a matter of jealous and dangerous 
strife, tending to anxiety, despair and misanthropy. Brain and body 
give way under such conditions, which almost paralyze the upper 
region of the brain. Thackrak, in his work on the influence of trades 
and professions, refers to the anxiety and mental application of 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 41 I 

merchants, professional men, students, etc., as among the leading 
causes that shorten life, producing disease of the brain, liver, 
stomach and heart. 

The higher regions of the brain are exhausted and paralyzed by 
many causes, — ■ chiefly by gloom, by hate, by exhaustion and by toil. 
The lower class of European laborers in the past have had only 
about half the longevity of the more favored classes. Everywhere 
we see men and women prematurely old, worn out at fifty, forty or 
even thirty, from extreme toil of the muscular and intellectual 
powers, and extreme discouragement, continually exhausting the 
fountains of life without any proportional action of the upper regions 
of the brain to enable them to bear such toils, — women bearing the 
strain better than men because they have constitutionally more 
activity of the upper brain than men. 

The intellectual strain requires to be balanced by social enjoyment 
and sleep; the physical strain by the higher region of the brain, — the 
strong, delightful emotions and energies which sustain us in toil and 
give us prompt recuperation when it is over. These higher faculties 
give to the whole constitution an elastic energy and inspiration 
which constitute personal superiority and physiological perfection, 
the superiority of the men who lead in every department. I do not 
mean that the leaders of society are always the best men, for leader- 
ship is often a matter of wealth or accident or animal force; but that 
their superiority depends on that portion of the upper brain which 
corresponds with the shoulders and arms and upper portion of the 
chest. 

If, therefore, any system of exercises can be arranged which shall 
develop the brain, the shoulders and upper portion of the chest, such 
a system should be faithfully cultivated. 

Pre-eminent among these exercises is vocal culture. Even the 
use of the lungs in blowing musical instruments has proved very 
beneficial to health and pulmonary development, and the exercise of 
newsboys in crying their papers cultivates their manhood most effi- 
ciently. Singing ranks highest as a hygienic and ethical exercise, 
but declamation takes the lead of all set exercises for general in- 
vigoration and shows its happy effects in leading actors. Lecturing 
may be made a very superior exercise if rightly conducted, but if 
made a mere exercise of intellect and animal force it becomes 
fatiguing, like business affairs, as it uses the anterior and the basi- 
lar regions of the brain. But true oratory, which uses the whole 
brain, and especially its superior regions, to charm, to elevate and to 
win, is the noblest exercise possible, developing everything admirable 
in the orator, perfecting his manly power, health and happiness, and 



412 



THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 



[CHAP. XIX. 



leaving an ennobling influence upon his hearers. There, is however, 
an inferior style of oratory, based upon loquacity, animal force and 
animal magnetism, which is not ennobling either to speaker or 
hearer, as it does not use the higher powers. It may invigorate or 
stimulate the animal force of the speaker, but it does little good to 
the hearer. 

To attain the best results of oratory there must not be any in- 
tellectual toil, or an extreme intellectual profundity and discussion of 
abstract themes, which would give it the character of lecturing. The 
theme should be as familiar as possible, or else the language fully 
committed to memory, and the subjects of a strongly emotional 
character — themes that call forth deep feeling and a profound sense 
of duty. When the orator rises to heroism, as in the appeals of 
Patrick Henry or the discourse of a religious apostle willing to lose 
his life to save his fellow men, we have the noblest influence to which 
human nature can be subjected. 

A lecturer who understands these principles and applies them will 
continually improve himself by lecturing, while another may exhaust 
himself, impair his health, and find it necessary to suspend his duties. 

The same principles apply to the regulation of our conversation. 
It may be so conducted as to exhaust or to refresh our vital forces. 

The hygienic principles of Sarcognomy (especially the proper pre- 
dominance of thoracic over abdominal development) have been so 
forcibly and practically illustrated by Mr. E. Checkley, who has just 
published a work on the subject, that I addressed him the following 
note, to which his reply is quite instructive. 

6 James Street, Boston, March 20. 
Mr. Checkley : 

Dear Sir, — The matters on which I would like to hear from you 
are : — 

1. What evidence can you present of the inferiority and morbid 
tendencies of persons in whom the abdominal is developed more 
than the thoracic ? 

2. What are the morbid tendencies produced by drooping shoulders 
and narrow chest ? 

3. What evidence of the evil effects of too much diaphragmatic 
breathing in place of costal ? 

4. What improvement in the brain power, moral nature, health, 
muscular vigor, symmetry of person and longevity have been attained 
by cultivating the upper part of the thorax, and what change of 
conformation can be produced by one or two months of hygienic 
practice. Yours cordially, 

J. R. Buchanan. 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 413 

in Rutledge Street, Brooklyn, March, 1890. 
Dr. J. R. Buchanan : 

Dear Sir, — In answer to your questions of the 2d March, I can 
only give you my impressions gained from practieal experience and 
observations carried on for more than ten years. In relation to the 
abdominal versus the thoracic regions, my verdict must always be in 
favor of the thoracic. In my practice and teachings I repress the 
one and bring out the other ; but I will state that, in so far as I can 
at present prove, I find two extremes of abdominal culturists that 
present two totally different characteristics. The first are those 
who have large abdomens, with flat and usually hollow chests, and 
heads seeming to protrude outwards and forwards from the body 
instead of upwards ; muscles soft and small, with adipose tissue 
flabby ; and limbs thin in proportion to what one would expect to see 
in a person with such a large waist. 

The second have the adipose tissue firmer and more evenly distrib- 
uted, with, of course, a large abdomen ; thick, firm necks ; head seems 
to be thrown back as well as the body. While I am at present not 
well able to state certainties, my knowledge up to the present time 
points to the following characteristics as belonging to the different 
extremes of abdominal culturists. The former I find of sedentary 
habits, of a physically lazy disposition, philosophic ideas, morbid 
fancies that tend toward suicidal mania, and generally of weak and 
cowardly natures. The latter are generally of a strong animal 
nature, with all that that implies ; practical in the extreme (in fact, 
I have never seen what I would term an idealist in mind among 
them) ; of a firm, forceful will and dominant disposition ; and fond of 
the table. 

These are, of course, two extreme types ; but the many grades 
between them one can readily judge who has had any experience. 
This I can state of a certainty, that those whom I have met with 
who were possessed of a large costal development are proud, 
idealistic, brave, energetic, and of a high moral nature. 

The more I have seen that part developed, the more these charac- 
teristics are shown ; the very position and carriage of the body makes 
them so. 

Of the second question, I find they are what I call general hypochon- 
driacs, who always think they have some disease ; suspicious, irritable 
and cowardly, as well as physically weak. 

Of the third question, diaphragmatic breathing I believe to be one 
of the worst evils of so-called physical educators. It weakens the 
diaphragm instead of strengthening it, makes the muscles of the 
abdomen weak, and leaves the person liable to rupture. I call this 



4M THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

muscle the girder of the lower ribs. The evidence of those I have 
had under my care who previously had practised it proves that they 
were subject to constipation, and I noticed all who claim to have 
practised this method of breathing were physically weak, circulation 
poor, subject to giddiness, and in some cases to palpitation of the 
heart. 

The abdomen should never be expanded in any action, it should 
always contract. I do not believe it has anything directly to do with 
breathing, its movement is purely sympathetic. I never use it in 
any action, breathing or otherwise, only, of course, to contract it. 

The lower ribs should be the smallest diameter of the chest. I 
strongly condemn the practice of diaphragmatic breathing. 

Of question four. — In answer to the first part I cannot help but make 
this assertion about myself : I do not believe that I should ever 
have been even of ordinary intelligence only for my physical powers. 
And all of those who practise under my tuition say that they think 
clearer and feel more sure of themselves in what they undertake to 
do; and, as far as health is concerned, one patient, a gentleman 51 
years of age, after two months' treatment of one hour a week, said, 
in answer to a query as to how he felt about his work : " Work " 
(he made answer), " I don't do any work ; it's all pleasure." " Why, 
how is that ? " remarked his friend. " Well," he said, " I go and see 
Mr. Checkley every week, and this feeling is the result of his treat- 
ment." He was refused insurance on his life; they said he had 
Bright's disease of the kidneys. He has not got it now, I am 
positive, as his urine has been examined by the best expert in the 
country. He came to me only as a last resort, for he said he had 
tried everything. 

Muscular vigor and symmetry I shall write of in citing cases. 
Longevity I cannot speak of, as I have not either practised or lived 
long enough to know ; but, from the way I feel myself, at the age 
of 36 years, I feel as though I would live forever. I enjoy life ; 
I firmly believe, barring accidents, that I shall live till I reach 
100 years easily. Old Dr. Gross once examined me, and he said 
that if I kept on the way I was then I ought not to retire from work 
till I reached 90 years. The rest you must judge from measure- 
ments and cases cited below. The moral nature I cannot speak of, 
only in a general way. I believe it improves under true thoracic 
development. 

Case A. — Male, aged 54, American, height five feet five and a half 
inches, chest around line of nipples thirty-five inches, normal expan- 
sion of waist thirty-seven inches, no contraction, slight palsy of facial 
muscles, physically weak, palpitation of the heart, inclined to paralysis 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 415 

and suffering with chronic liver complaint and catarrh of stomach, 
could not ride in elevated train, subject to slight lateral curvature of 
spine, left shoulder an inch and a half higher than the right and 
curved forward, breath of foul odor. 

In two months : height five feet six inches, chest thirty-six inches, 
expansion to thirty-eight inches, abdomen thirty-four inches, con- 
tracted to thirty-one inches, no palpitation, no facial palsy, gave up 
medicine, shoulders nearly even, spine nearly straight, walked eight 
miles, breath greatly changed, no need of purgatives, strength more 
than doubled. 

This patient now is five feet six and a half inches high, chest 
thirty-eight inches, expansion forty-one inches, waist thirty-one 
inches, contracts to twenty-eight inches, rides in elevated cars with- 
out discomfort, can put hands on floor without bending legs, odor in 
breath all gone, flesh is fairly firm, can pull himself up on a bar to 
chin eight times. Mind, he does not practise these things, they are 
only a result of treatment. 

Case B. — Age 51, American, male; complaint, obesity and 
Bright's disease of kidneys ; height about five feet seven inches, 
chest forty-three and three-fourths inches, waist forty-four and a 
half inches, no contraction. 

In six weeks : chest forty-one inches, expansion to forty-three 
inches, waist thirty-nine inches, contracts to thirty-seven inches. 
Loss in hips and waist was nine inches. 

This case is noticeable in that the disease of the kidneys has 
entirely disappeared, and for the first time in three years he can put 
on his own shoes. His measurements after four months' practice are: 
chest forty inches, expansion forty-three inches, waist thirty-seven 
inches, contracts to thirty-one inches. And suffers with no constipa- 
tion ; was greatly troubled with that before. Occupation sedentary. 

Another case is that of a female aged 22; American; of a weak, 
nervous disposition; no physical strength whatever; in fact, had to 
give up occupation ; suffered with great lassitude ; no mammae ; chest 
flat and hollow. In two months she had increased the bust measure- 
ment five inches. I was astonished. The expansion is three and a 
half inches. The mammae grew rapidly. She took no exercise except 
the respiratory ones and carrying the body properly on the hips. The 
change was wonderful, both mentally and physically. She told me, 
the last time I saw her, that she had walked five miles the day before 
and did not feel the slightest fatigue. 

Another contrast is that the patients represented two extremes : 
one was stout, obese and heavy, and the other was emaciated, weak 
and thin. Both commenced treatment at the same time and took 



4*6 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

the same course. The thin man was a mechanic ; and the stout man 
a merchant, doing no laborious work. In three weeks the obese man 
lost six inches around the hips and waist, one inch around the chest, 
four inches around the waist, one inch around each thigh, two inches 
around the hips, and had lost five pounds in weight. The thin man 
gained an inch around the chest, one inch in neck, one inch around 
shoulders, one and a half inches around hips, half an inch around 
upper right arm, three-fourths of an inch around the upper left arm 
and gained seven pounds in weight. The color in his face had 
changed noticeably. 

I could send you many more of such cases, but I think that these 
will convince you that what I asserted to you when I last saw you, 
that physical ignorance is the cause of more disease, more crime, 
than even whiskey, rum, or, in fact, all of the vices human nature is 
prone to commit. Drunkenness and immorality, in my opinion, are 
not causes ; they are but effects. The cause lies principally in the 
want of an education that even children can learn as well as the 
most ignorant, — one which will teach us how to know ourselves in a 
simple practical way, so that the sense of smell becomes more acute 
as well as that of sight and hearing and the power to intuitively 
know what is good for us grows, the more we understand ourselves. 
In fact, a person physically perfect has no pernicious habit. To leave 
off smoking is no effort ; dram-drinking is the same. They feel no 
need for stimulants ; in fact, their life flows on like a calm. 

Edwin Checkley. 

To a reporter of the New Yo7'k World Mr. Checkley said : — 

" 'The great defect in modern physical training is that most of the 
effort is directed to growing large, hard muscles on a man. What 
good does that do him ? He can make a violent effort for a minute, 
say, but he can't sustain a long trial of strength. And why ? Be- 
cause his breathing powers have not been properly trained. That 
sounds revolutionary, but you'll find it's true. I claim that if a man 
ever masters thoroughly the art of breathing he can make himself 
wonderfully strong. To do this no apparatus is needed save that 
which nature has given to ail of us, and it can be practised at home, 
on the street, at your desk — anywhere. You have seen some 
hundreds of champion athletes. How many of them bear any 
resemblance to the Farnese Hercules ? Even the champion vaulters, 
weight-throwers, runners, swimmers and boxers fall far short of that 
standard of strength and grace.' 

" To show the reporter that the muscle was there for business and 
not for play, Mr. Checkley balanced and put up a club weighing one 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 417 

hundred pounds. He did this with his right hand. He lay on the 
floor and spread his arms so that the hands, palms upward, lay far 
behind and on each side of his head. The writer, who weighs one 
hundred and seventy pounds in his shirt-sleeves, stood with one foot 
in each of the outstretched hands, and Mr. Checkley lifted him high 
in the air and balanced him over his head. If anybody thinks this 
is easy let him try it with one-sixth as much weight, and he will soon 
change his mind. 

"'I weigh one hundred and twenty pounds,' he said, 'and I can 
get down to one hundred and sixteen. Just to demonstrate that my 
strength was not artificial but practical, I recently quit my studies in 
the Long Island College Hospital and went to work for eleven days 
as one of a gang of 'longshoremen. A friend got me a job among- 
a lot of big hustlers unloading ships. The work was chiefly drag- 
ging heavy bags of stuff out of a hot, foul-smelling ship's hold. I 
had done no especial training previous to taking hold of the work, 
but I found it didn't bother me. 

" 'In fact, just to test my staying powers, I kept at work eight 
hours a day, while the trained men around me worked only three 
hours at a time. It didn't bother me a bit. And yet I am only a 
sample of what an ordinary little man can do if he will follow my 
system. I do not believe in the old-fashioned dieting scheme as it 
used to be applied to pugilists, wrestlers and athletes generally. 
Any good, wholesome food, not fancifully cooked or gluttonously- 
eaten, will do. 

" ' I will guarantee that any young man in ordinary health can by 
practising my system of breathing for one hour a day increase his 
chest measurement at least an inch the first month and keep up a 
proportionate growth afterwards. By this system alone I have cured 
many elderly men of obesity, increased their breathing power and 
strengthened their muscular system generally, so that they are far 
better men physically than they ever were before. And all this 
without using a dumb-bell or any artificial apparatus.' " 

There is another important principle in Sarcognomy to guide our 
hygienic practice — the close sympathy of the entire surface of the 
body and entire surface of the brain, which makes the treatment of 
the skin a matter of importance. Warmth and circulation in the 
skin of any part of the surface promotes the action of the corre- 
sponding part of the brain. Hence by stimulating the skin to 
healthy action we promote the healthy action of the brain and 
improve our entire condition. 

What may be done by baths is too extensive a subject for discus- 
sion here, but friction is so easily applied and so very beneficial as to 



4l8 THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. [CHAP. XIX. 

require notice. With two yards of crash towel one may give himself 
a thorough friction over the whole body from two to six minutes 
when going to bed and repeat it in the morning when he rises. He 
may assist the process by going over the body with a wet crash towel 
or mitten, applying dry friction to each part immediately after the 
wet. The exercise involved will also be very beneficial. 

Next to this refreshing stimulus must be regarded the stimulus of 
clean, pure clothing to absorb the emanations of the skin. Cotton 
clothing retains too much of the exhalations, and ought to be 
changed daily. It need not be washed as often as changed, but 
daily change is a great promoter to health. If the bed sheets are 
not daily changed they should at least be exposed to the air all day 
instead of being kept on the bed. Cotton sheets saturated with 
human transpiration are very unwholesome. 

Woollen does not retain and accumulate transpiration like cotton 
and may therefore be used longer. It gently stimulates the skin, 
but to some persons the stimulation is too great. It gives free 
passage to the transpiration, and therefore I regard the German 
movement for woollen underclothing and bedding as an important 
hygienic improvement. 

Tight lacing to produce a narrow waist has been a subject of 
monotonous denunciation for a long time. The hygienic writers 
seem to ignore the difference of the male and female constitutions. 
The selfish and irritable elements of the brain are represented at the 
waist. These are so much larger in men, and the waist so much 
more conspicuous, that a circumference of waist belt which would be 
agreeable to a woman would be very oppressive to a man, being a 
great interference with his natural conformation. A masculine 
waist of thirty-six inches is not uncommon, but many women have 
waists of from twenty to sixteen inches, and some are even less. 
They are entirely comfortable in their corsets, with waists so slender 
that male observers suppose them to be greatly compressed. A lady 
correspondent of a medical journal speaks of wearing corsets very 
comfortably which measure fourteen inches round, while her bust 
measurement is thirty-seven inches. 

The region compressed in tight lacing is not like the upper part of 
the thorax, the seat of the most important vital powers ; on the 
contrary, its influence on temperament is rather lowering. Com- 
pression of any part of the abdomen is a bracing influence to the 
general constitution, and the strongest objection to tight lacing is 
that it substitutes a mechanical support for the natural action of the 
muscles that compress the abdomen, and thus debilitates the muscles, 
besides forcing the abdominal viscera downwards, which is certainly 



CHAP. XIX.] THE HYGIENE OF SARCOGNOMY. 419 

injurious. No doubt corset compression is injurious, but the magni- 
tude of the evil has been greatly exaggerated. In compressing the 
waist it exaggerates the peculiarity of the female constitution, which 
does not need exaggeration, and by forcing the viscera downward it 
oppresses the pelvis and thus greatly increases the depression and 
disease from which women suffer. 

Thoracic Hygiene. — Sarcognomy, by showing the importance of 
the lungs and thorax, enforces the importance of atmospheric condi- 
tions, not only as to proper lightness of the atmosphere but as to its 
purity and electric conditions, and teaches us to exercise the utmost 
vigilance in observing the condition of the air that we breathe- 
Terrible epidemics are continually spread by atmospheric conditions 
which mankind have not learned to observe and understand. In 
fashionable dwellings, as well as hospitals and malarious localities, I 
often observe conditions of the air which are highly objectionable 
but apparently unnoticed by residents. There is also a depressing 
negative condition, produced by the absence of sunshine, by evapora- 
tion from moist surfaces, and by the thawing of ice or snow, which is 
oppressive to the lungs. This is realized on the coast of New 
England, from the influence of Atlantic icebergs, and on the lake 
shores when the ice is beginning to disappear. 

The most striking illustration of the effect of cold evaporation 
from sunless surfaces of solids is in the fact that it is dangerous to 
sleep in an apartment which has recently been plastered and is not 
yet dry. Another danger to the lungs is from a heterogeneous condi- 
tion of the air, — streaks of cold air being mingled with the warm, as 
when cold air blows into a room through a crack or narrow space. 
This often results in what is called catching cold. 

The lungs have an important relation to the limbs. Cold applied 
to the limbs tends to congest and debilitate the lungs, for the limbs 
have a tonic and correlative relation with the lungs like that of the 
occipital to the frontal organs of the brain. It is easy to produce 
pulmonary disease by a current of cold air against the ankles and 
legs. The entire surfaces of the limbs therefore need protection to 
protect the lungs, and the same remark is applicable to the upper 
surface of the back. 

The stomach has heretofore been almost the sole channel for 
medication, but the lungs are equally available, not only by special 
inhalation of vapors and electrified air, but by remedies evaporated 
by heat and diffused in the air of apartments. 



CHAPTER XX. 

SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES FOR THERAPEUTIC 

TREATMENT. 

With supplementary suggestions as to the spinal column, ganglionic 
nerves, anatomy of the thorax, and relation of the limbs to the trunk. 



I now present, in very concise statement, the rules to be observed 
in nervauric and electric therapeutics, by showing what localities are 
to be stimulated or repressed for various purposes. The organs 
mentioned will be found on the charts of the head and body. The 
reader will understand that stimulation is effected by the application 
of the hands, by gentle percussion, by the negative pole of a primary, 
a Galvanic, or a Faradic current, by stimulating plasters or embroca- 
tions, by heat and in some cases by friction. 

Repression is effected by dispersive passes, by the positive pole, 
by cold steadily applied for a long 'time, by hot water briefly applied, 
by evaporating liquids and by medical sedatives. 

The localities referred to and the directions will serve to guide all 
external treatment, by clothing, by plasters, by baths and by the 
pneumatic or vacuum treatment. Warm _clothing applied on any 
part of the body develops the local influence according to Sarcog- 
nomy, and variations of the clothing produce important effects, as 
cold produces repression. 

The first rule of practice is to dissipate the existing morbid condi- 
tion before we do anything else. 

If this is done by the hands, the operator should be in a pleasant, 
healthy, vigorous condition, neither fatigued, hungry, thirsty, nor de- 
pressed in spirits. His blood should be in a plethoric condition. 
Drinking freely of nutritious and stimulating liquids assists him to 
operate vigorously and to repel rather than absorb disease. He should 
not be passive in his intercourse with a patient, which would render 
him impressible by morbid conditions, but should maintain inces- 
sant activity and a positive state of mind. 

The dispersion of morbid conditions is effected by rapid dispersive 
passes with the hands, as if we were brushing out a fluid. The fluid 
exists, which we call nervaura, which is morbid in morbid parts. It 



CHAP. XX.] RULES FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 421 

is moved in the direction of our manipulations. We may thus dis- 
perse a pain at one spot and find it reappear at the part to which we 
have moved it. Thus we may transfer morbid conditions from one 
part to another in contact, and from one patient to another, or to 
ourselves. The dispersive manipulation carries the morbid condi- 
tion, and an electric current does it still more effectively. 

Hence it is indispensable that the current of morbific influence 
should not be conducted into ourselves, and that it should be carried 
out of the body of the patient. The dispersive passes should drive 
it entirely out of the patient by his feet and hands, especially the 
former. It may pass into the atmosphere, but it will pass more 
readily into water, by placing the feet in water or on a wet sponge, 
or by manipulating with a wet sponge or cloth, or wet .hands. 

The relief by manipulation with the hands is generally prompt, 
constituting a large part of the cure, and sometimes completing it. 
It is also effectually given by an electric current applied by a large 
wet sponge on the morbid part and passed down to a similar sponge 
or basin of water under the feet. Yet even this should be preceded 
by a dispersive movement with the hands, the efficiency of which 
cannot be surpassed by anything else. 

The dispersive current may be either the galvanic, the primary or 
the static, the positive pole being on the morbid part. 

After the morbific influence has been dispersed, the morbid part is 
to be invigorated by the application of the hands on the spot, and on 
those parts of the spine and the head from which its vital energy 
proceeds. The application of the hands on the body is made more 
effective by a gentle percussion for a few minutes, which may be 
made vigorously upon robust persons. 

As the vital forces belong to the posterior half of the body and 
the brain, the greater portion of our treatment is applied on the pos- 
terior surfaces, and the currents from manipulation and electricity 
are generally directed backwards. As vitality proceeds from above 
downwards electric currents and manipulations should be upward 
rather than downward. The common notion about electro-therapeu- 
tics, that currents should be sent in the directions of the nerves to 
their extremities, would imply that we should stimulate the organs at 
the expense of the central nervous power, which would be reduced 
by centrifugal currents but stimulated by the centripetal. While 
moderate centripetal currents are more often beneficial than the oppo- 
site, reciprocating currents, which operate both centripetally and cen- 
trifugally, have perhaps a wider sphere of utility. Let us now con- 
sider the various methods of treatment to accomplish special purposes. 

I. To establish health. Stimulate Health, repress Disease on the 



422 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

body and the head. Disperse excitement from morbid organs, and 
reinforce them by the hands. Rouse all inactive functions and 
repress those in excess. 

2. To promote mental sozmdness. Stimulate Sanity and Cheerful- 
ness, and the entire summit of the trunk — the shoulders and upper 
surface of the chest. Repress Insanity, Melancholy, Disease, Irrita- 
bility and Excitability. 

3. To promote mental vigor. Stimulate the cephalic zone of head 
and body. For the psychometric clairvoyant and spiritual faculties, 
stimulate at the lower end of the sternum — for Oratory at the five 
upper dorsal vertebrae and the posterior surface of the shoulder joints, 
also the region of Inspiration on the lateral surface of the chest. 
On the head — Oratory is on the upper occiput, Clairvoyance at the 
root of the nose, Psychometry in the sensitive region of the temples 
and the intuitive region at the part of the front lobe which is behind 
the root of the nose. 

4. To produce sleep. Stimulate from the sternum to the umbilicus 
or on the cerebral organ of Somnolence — then on the organ of Sleep 
on the body and head, assisting if necessary by the front of the leg 
and foot/ which are very sedative. Somnolence and Sleep or Repose 
may be stimulated simultaneously on the body and on the head. 

5. To promote wakefulness. Stimulate the middle of the forehead, 
and the perceptive organs of the brow, especially Light — disperse 
upward and backward from the temples. Stimulate upper dorsal 
region, upper occiput, shoulders and thighs — disperse from the 
whole front of the abdomen, inguinal and pubic regions, and from 
the region under the jaw. 

6. To relieve headache. Brush rapidly downward along the jugular 
veins and the back of the neck ; brush upward and backward from 
the temples, and backward on the median line. Make dispersive 
passes at the seat of the pain. If the head is cool stimulate the 
cephalic zone — if hot, the front of the leg and top of the foot. Also 
apply hot water freely to the head. Manipulations on the neck alone 
usually relieve headache in five minutes or less. 

7. To invigorate the lower limbs. Stimulate occipital base of 
brain and neck, lumbar and sacral regions of back, entire thighs and 
calves of legs. 

8. To overcome pnezimonia and other conditions in which there is 
hyperemia, warmth, irritation or congestion in the chest. Stimulate 
pulmonic portion of dorsal region (between the shoulders) and tibial 
surface of the leg (aquatic region) including top of foot. Use dis- 
persive passes or electric currents from front of chest toward feet 
and hands. For prompt effects use hemastasis, by applying ligatures 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 423 

around the shoulders and thighs, which will be more effective if the 
legs and forearms are inserted in warm water or stimulated with 
mustard. Keep the limbs distended with blood several hours. Apply 
Haemospasia as directed in Chapter 14. 

9. To overcome asthmatic, or dry and constricted conditions of the 
lungs — stimulate inspiration on the chest and the pulmonic region 
on the back. 

10. To overcome excitability of the heart. Stimulate the entire 
shoulder and the middle of the dorsal region, also Firmness and the 
upper occipital region of the head, dispersing from the temples. 

11. To deepen respiration. Stimulate on the abdomen below the 
umbilicus, and on the face below the mouth. For expansion of the 
chest by costal respiration — stimulate Inspiration on the ribs, the 
upper dorsal region, and the thoracic or pulmonic region in the 
temples. Stimulate Health to co-operate. The most effective im- 
pression on the diaphragm is made by an electric current from the 
lower cervical vertebrae to the respiratory location, two inches below 
the umbilicus. 

12. To promote tlie healthy action of the stomac/:. Stimulate the 
lower dorsal region and the gastric location just below the ribs (Ali- 
mentiveness) in connection with Health. The region of Assimilation 
just above the umbilicus will assist. 

13. General invigoration is produced by stimulating the base of the 
brain through the neck, the summit of the dorsal region, the shoulders 
generally, and the upper occipital region. Stimulation upon the back 
of the neck not only rouses the base of the brain but reaches to the 
three cervical ganglia which stimulate the heart and the circulation 
of the brain and spinal cord. These ganglia are opposite the third, 
fifth, and seventh cervical vertebras. From the lower portion of the 
neck proceed the nerves that give power to the arms, and the arms 
sympathize with the invigorating regions of the occiput. The cen- 
tral location for producing the maximum vigor of the constitution is 
at the summit of the dorsal vertebrae, and the corresponding spot on 
the head is at the posterior margin of Firmness — a locality which 
recent vivisecting physiologists consider the source of vigor to the 
lower limbs and which they call the posterior parietal lobule, or 
superior parietal lobule. 

14. To overcome constipation. Stimulate the region of Defecation 
on the abdomen (lower end of Gastro-enteric region) and the entire 
lumbar region ; or pass mild Faradic currents between these two 
locations, or alternating primary currents. Currents passed through 
the lower lumbar vertebrae reach the aortic and hypogastric plexuses 
which send nerves to the descending colon, rectum, bladder and sex- 
ual organs. 



424 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

15. To overcome mcnorrliagia and dysmenorrhea. Make rapid dis- 
persive passes from the groin upward and backward, and downward 
if necessary ; stimulate the lumbo-sacral junction, and the location of 
Cheerfulness, Sanity and Chastity near the axilla, with the hand or 
the negative pole, the positive being on the groin. 

16. To overcome insanity, in any of its forms of mania, dementia, 
etc., the pelvic organs should be restored to health and all serious 
affections in the region of the liver and stomach relieved ; then 
primary or Galvanic currents for ten, twenty or in some cases even 
thirty minutes, should be passed from the perineum to the region of 
Sanity at the axillae, on each side — also to Health and the cephalic 
or upper dorsal region. Very gentle currents may also be passed 
from the under-jaw region of Insanity to the cerebral locations of 
Sanity and Firmness, or the latter may be stimulated by the hand, 
and the former subdued by dispersive passes on the side and back of 
the neck. When there is violent excitement and over-active circula- 
tion in the head, a stream of hot water applied to the disturbing 
regions on the side and back of the neck, along the carotid and ver- 
tebral arteries, will have a beneficial influence. Cerebral excitement 
may also be subdued by an electric current from the under-jaw region 
to the feet. 

17. To relieve hysteria. Use dispersive passes or electric currents, 
from the location of the womb to the region of Sanity at the axilla, 
and stimulate the region of Health at the top of the shoulder and the 
summit of the dorsal vertebrae. 

18. To treat organic diseases of the womb. Remove excitability as 
in hysteria; use suitable medical injections, such as Helonias, 
Hydrastis, White Pond Lily (Nymphcea odorata) and Bromide of 
Ammonium, and apply the positive pole to the cervex, sending a cur- 
rent to the lumbar region or to the axilla. In the first treatment a 
dispersive current may be sent from over the womb to the feet. 

19. To control nansea. Nauseating substances sometimes require 
to be removed by an emetic or by a gentle, soothing cathartic. Me- 
dicinally, nausea has been resisted by soothing aromatics such as pep- 
permint water and minute fractions of a grain of morphine, or by 
ingluvin and lactopeptin, which assist digestion, or by minute portions 
of lobelia or ipecac, which act homceopathically. To treat nausea and 
vomiting according to Sarcognomy, relief should be given bv disper- 
sion from the seats of Nausea and Disease on the body. In slight 
cases vigorous dispersive upward passes from Disease, and stimula- 
tion of Health and the lower dorsal region will restore the stomach 
to a comfortable condition. In such cases a primary current from 
Disease to Health is beneficial, and relief has sometimes been q;iven 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 425 

by a Galvanic current at the locality of the stomach from left to right, 
aided by the application of atropia or of belladonna on the surface. 
Dr. LeConiat claims to have relieved seasickness by applying the neg- 
ative pole near the pyloric end of the stomach, and passing the 
positive over the surface from the cardiac to the pyloric end after 
moistening the skin with a solution of sulphate of atropia, the active 
element of belladonna. But this treatment is rather palliative than 
radical. The radical treatment must reach the sacro-iliac region of 
Nausea or Disgust, though it may be assisted by hypochondriac and 
epigastric treatment. Thorough dispersive treatment should be 
applied at Nausea, and the electric current introduced at that location 
and conducted to the shoulder, where the negative pole may be applied 
on the top, back and front of that region, over the entire space between 
the lower angle of the scapula and the nipple. With the highly sen- 
sitive, the nervauric manipulation would be equally effective — stimu- 
lating the upper region just mentioned, and dispersing from the lower. 
The horizontal position of the body favors the predominance of the 
upper region, and it would even be advantageous if the head of the 
couch were a little lower than the foot, and if the shoulders and arms 
were kept especially warm. The application of hot water freely to 
the corporeal seat of nausea, or to its cephalic seat (the posterior sur- 
face of the cerebellum), is very beneficial, and a similar result may 
be attained by the application of ice or by the coolness resulting from 
the evaporation of ether. Whatever stimulates the upper region of 
the brain tends to overcome nausea ; hence champagne, coffee and 
caffeine (Bromo-caffeine) have been beneficially used. Whatever 
diminishes the excitability of the pelvic region is beneficial against 
nausea ; and it is for this reason that the bromides have been effectual. 
The neck of the womb appears to be a centre of nausea. The 
development of a uterine tumor has been known to produce nausea 
and vomiting. The nausea of early pregnancy, before the womb has 
developed sufficiently to rise above the region of nausea, is a familiar 
fact and is treated like the nausea of seasickness. It is developed 
by the downward pressure on rising in the morning (and hence called 
morning sickness) as seasickness is developed by the downward 
impulse of the abdominal viscera, and like that is relieved by remedies 
which send the vital forces upwards. Prof. E. D. Mayo found a cup 
of coffee or a glass of champagne taken before rising a relief to the 
morning nausea. Similar relief has been given by a cup of tea or a 
bitter infusion or effervescing drinks or a breakfast taken in bed a 
while before rising. Relief has also been given by a little cocaine, or 
by a little veratrum viride applied to the neck of the womb. Thus 
it is clear that a region opposite the sacro-iliac symphysis is the seat 



426 



SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES 



[CHAP. XX. 



of nausea, and that it must be treated by measures which divert from 
the pelvis toward the thorax. 

20. Phthisis pulmonalis, or tuberculous consumption, is a disease 
dependent on inferiority in the blood and the vital forces. When not 
too far advanced, it may be controlled and cured in the very impressi- 
ble with very little use of medicine ; but in all others medical treat- 
ment must be the chief reliance. The fundamental rules of all treat- 
ment are to diminish the irritation of the lungs, promote a healthy 
expectoration, increase the muscular energy, increase the digestive 
and assimilative power, and develop the largest possible, amount of 
healthy red blood. Hence, in the early stages an active, hardy, out- 
door life, developing a vigorous appetite and satisfying it with rich 
nitrogenous food (especially flesh) has often wrought a perfect cure. 

In the nervauric treatment, the irritation of the lungs must be 
relieved by dispersive passes to the hands and feet, and by stimula- 
ting the aquatic or tibial region, which overcomes pulmonary irritation. 
The lower dorsal region should be stimulated to promote digestion ; 
the shoulders or Health region, and the space between them, to 
invigorate the lungs ; Vital Force and Nutrition to resist debility and 
emaciation, and the upper and lower limbs should be stimulated to 
assist them in active daily exercise. Treatment should be given to 
the entire posterior surface of the body. An active life in the open air 
and sunshine and the most generous sustaining diet that can be 
digested are necessary. 

As animal food nourishes the blood more rapidly than anything else, 
cures have been made by dieting on beef largely consumed. A little 
iron especially (the phosphate of iron and phosphate of lime) assists in 
restoration of rich blood, which is indispensable to recovery. Exer- 
cise of the upper and lower limbs to promote expansion of the lungs is 
necessary. Electric currents through the lungs to the posterior sur- 
face of the chest are an essential part of the treatment. A gentle 
reciprocating current between the mammae and the region of Health 
will be of great benefit. 

21. Pericarditis and other inflammations of the heart require the 
tranquillizing and tonic influence of Firmness, Patience, Fortitude 
and Heroism, located at and near the sagittal suture or median line 
of the head, and on the body at the top of the shoulder. The exte 
rior and upper part of the shoulder gives Heroism or Hardihood and 
interiorly at the base of the neck we find Patience and Serenity which 
overcomes all excitability and irritation. We get additional vigor for 
the heart as we descend on the shoulder blade and also on the spinal 
column, between the shoulders. In addition to these quiet tonic 
influences, by which we produce a slower and steadier pulse, we need 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 42/ 

the antiphlogistic influence of the tibial or aquatic region, which is 
the proper reliance for resisting inflammatory diseases. Under these 
two influences the inflammation, pain, excitement and oppression are 
relieved, and nature displays its restorative power. As there is 
usually considerable heat or fever, this would require in addition to 
the aquatic influence that of coolness, on the side of the body and 
on the head, which directly resists the fever. 

We should not forget that the first thing to be done in this, as in 
other active local affections, is to disperse the local morbid influence. 
Dispersive passes upward and backward over the heart toward the 
shoulder and spine should be our first ministration and should be 
repeated as often as the symptoms indicate the need. Dispersive 
passes should be made from the cheek-bone and the temporal region 
near the ear toward Health and Firmness. By such passes alone 
I have completely relieved the heart in a case of pericarditis. 

22. Dilation of the heart — a condition of debility, recognized by 
the feeble circulation, oppression at the heart, weakness of its impulse 
and the increased extent of its sound in the chest — requires persever- 
ance in a tonic treatment through the shoulders, the upper dorsal 
region and the thighs to produce the same results attained in the 
medical treatment by the use of Cereus, Convallaria and Digitalis 
which are necessary in such cases. The Cereus Grandiflora or Bon- 
plandii and the Convallaria I should consider indispensable, but they 
do not supersede the necessity of nervauric treatment for the impres- 
sible. The whole posterior surface of the body and the head should 
be treated. 

23. Affections of the liver should be treated adjacent to its location, 
bearing in mind that we impart energy through the posterior surfaces. 
Hence when we apply the hand on the lower dorsal vertebrae we 
energize the liver. Passing forward on the side of the trunk, the in- 
fluence becomes more exciting and less tonic. In its congested and 
irritated conditions, dispersive passes from the front to the back are 
appropriate, together with the stimulation of the lower dorsal region 
and the shoulders. In inflammatory conditions, the region of Coolness 
and the tibial region have a good influence. We stimulate the liver 
on the hepatic zone of the brain, producing the most energetic effect 
about two inches behind the ear. 

24. Affections of the stomach are treated at the lower dorsal verte- 
brae and at the gastric location on the abdomen below the ribs 
— also on the assimilative region above the umbilicus — the shoulders 
being used to control the excitement and give it a healthy direction. 
From the lower six dorsal vertebrae, ganglionic nerves proceed to the 
solar plexus which supplies all the abdominal viscera. The solar 



428 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

plexus may be reached directly through the lower dorsal vertebrae. 
Dispersive currents from the front relieve morbid conditions, and 
reciprocating currents between the front and back give vigor to the 
stomach. 

25. All irritations of the abdominal organs are treated with disper- 
sive passes backwards and upwards — the lower dorsal and lumbar 
regions being used to vitalize, and the shoulders to control, regulate 
and moderate the action. They may also be relieved by dispersive 
passes downwards to the feet and electric currents in that direction. 

26. Fevers require efficient dispersion from the hypochondriac and 
hypogastric regions (Disease and Calorification) and the stimulation 
of Health and Coolness — and of the tibial region when the brain and 
nervous system are excited. Currents of warm or hot water upon the 
region of Calorification are an efficient febrifuge. The same end 
might be attained, but I think less beneficially, by currents of cold 
water upon the hypogastric region of Calorification. The practice 
has been successfully tried in Germany of reducing the temperature 
in typhoid fever by free and prolonged injections of water into the 
rectum, fully twenty or more degrees below the temperature of the 
patient. Water applied to the legs and the forearms would be very 
efficient in reducing the temperature, for these parts have a very close 
sympathy with the abdominal organs. This practice is much more 
easy and pleasant. 

27. Chills require the excitement of Calorification, Health, the 
lumbar region and the thighs. Reciprocal currents between the lum- 
bar and hypogastric regions efficiently raise the temperature. 

28. Inflammations or inflammatory diseases require the influence 
of Coolness, the tibial region and the top of the shoulder. The first 
counteracts inflammatory heat and fever, the second diminishes 
capacity for inflammation, and the third diminishes sensitive excita- 
bility and sustains the vital energy. They are also efficiently treated 
locally by dispersive passes or by currents of positive electricity sent 
through to some proper location, such as the tibial region or Coolness, 
or Health. Dr. Gale (1802), in treating the urinary organs by electric 
currents, was asked by his patients if they did not produce the inter- 
nal fever they felt. Such currents between the kidneys and bladder 
involve the region of Calorification. 

The hypogastric region, in which the calorific and sexual functions 
reside, is one of intense sensibility and great control over vitality. 
We have a case recorded of immediate death in a married woman 
produced by the shock of an injection of cold water against the mouth 
of the womb with the intention of producing abortion. 

Irritations of the urethra have very serious consequences. The 



CHAP. XX. J FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 429 

Weekly Medical Review says : " About middle life in men perfectly 
healthy, or with no discoverable evidence of disease, except perhaps, 
and even that not always, a low density of urine, the commencement 
of habitual use of the catheter is sometimes followed by fever of the 
remittent type, which often ends in death, and that for the fatal issue 
in such cases no adequate structural explanation can be found. It 
is important that such a fever, arising in the midst of apparent heaith 
from such a seemingly small cause, and leading so often (as it cer- 
tainly does) to a fatal issue, should be well and widely known, lest 
death should take the friends of the patient by surprise, and arrange- 
ments necessary to the welfare of a family be left unmade. Although 
it is well known that in persons affected with renal disease, or with 
chronic gout, or with grave disorders of the general health, the com- 
mencement of habitual catheterism is attended with peril to life from 
secondary fever, the fact that this fever may arise in what seems to 
be good health, and, without the mediation of any visible structural 
lesion, issue in death, is not well known — or at least well known only 
to a few — and has, I repeat, no adequate place in English surgical 
literature or in the English surgical teaching." 

29. Paralytic affections (if the brain is not involved) require treat- 
ment through the spine — - dispersive passes, followed by the vitaliz- 
ing application of the hand — or electric currents in alternating direc- 
tions through the spinal region affected to the muscles, for about ten 
minutes. Descending currents are commonly used from a point 
above the affected portion through the cord to the muscles. But 
ascending currents are necessary to sustain the vigor of the spine. 
Faradic currents may be applied directly to the muscles concerned, 
as well as to the spine and muscles. 

When the brain is involved, dispersive downward manipulations 
may be used over the affected part and very gentle Galvanic currents 
may be passed downward a week or two after the attack. Such 
currents are much more beneficial when given through the hand of 
the operator. 

30. Local affections require local treatment but may all be greatly 
aided by constitutional treatment according to Sarcognomy, to in- 
crease the vital power and modify the local condition. 

31. Kidney diseases require local treatment, their spinal control 
being just above the kidneys. The antagonistic functions which 
produce their quiescence being located around the shoulder and 
especially at its superior anterior aspect. 

32. Sexual Vitality. The sexual force which belongs to the region 
of virility, and according to pathognomic laws is associated with the 
upper surface of the brain, has very important relations to health 



430 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

and normal development which have not been properly realized by 
physiologists and hygienists. The fact that sexual development 
makes a great change in the constitution, and is essential to the 
normal development of every animal, should teach us that it is not a 
transitory adolescent influence, but an essential part of the perma- 
nent organization of life. Hence the maintenance of sexual vitality 
is essential to the full development of normal life and ethical senti- 
ments. 

To overcome the impairment of sexual vitality, reciprocal electric 
currents may be passed from the first lumbar to the lower sacral 
vertebras, and also between the lumbo-sacral junction and the 
mammas, also lumbo-sacral and genitals or inside of thigh. The 
current which embraces the mammae is the most beneficial and may 
be assisted by currents between the mammae and Health, also by 
primary currents from Melancholy or Disease to the summit of the 
brain in the region of Love. 

33. Antagonism. Antagonistic organs oppose each other, each 
tending in high excitement to suspend or suppress the action of the 
other, as courage suppresses fear, and benevolence suppresses 
selfishness. Hence we diminish the excitability and activity of any 
organ by exciting its antagonist. In a very impressible temperament 
of but little strength, antagonism by one organ highly excited will 
suppress its opposite, but in a strong temperament this will not 
occur ; organs will be restrained by antagonism but not suppressed. 
Hence in such persons extreme displays of organs such as Insanity 
or Disease will not be produced. When we wish to make an organ 
predominate entirely over its opposite, we stimulate it with the 
hand and make dispersive manipulations over the opposite ; or stimu- 
late by the negative pole and apply the positive to the opposite. 

The antagonism to excitability of the heart is on the upper aspect 
of the shoulder adjacent to the neck. The antagonism to excita- 
bility of the lungs occupies the arms from the shoulder to the elbow. 
This antagonism to their excitability is favorable to their strength. 
The more sedative antagonism to excitability of brain and lungs 
occupies the foot and the tibial surface of the leg. The antagonism 
to gastric and hepatic excitability is on the shoulder midway between 
the neck and the acromion prominence, extending backward on the 
upper part of the scapula. The excitability of the alimentary canal 
is antagonized from the top of the shoulder back and downwards to 
near the axilla. Uterine and sexual excitability are antagonized on 
the side of the head (marked Ch.) and below the axilla. Locomotive 
or restless excitability is antagonized on the side of the chest at the 
anterior line of the arm, and on the temporal arch at the organ of 
Tranquillity. 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 43 1 

34. Ethical improvement. To counteract and correct all moral 
defects or vices and elevate the character, our manipulations and 
electric currents should ascend. We should direct our action toward 
the summit of the chest and of the head and upon these we should 
place the hands lightly. Thus we may totally change the character 
in impressible youth, eradicating their evil inclinations by persever- 
ing treatment. Husband and wife in many cases could overcome 
their inharmony and renew their love by this method. With the 
hands upon the organ of Love or upon the mammae, sentiments of 
affection would revive. 

To overcome ill temper and moroseness the currents should be 
directed to the axilla, the mammae and the upper surface of the chest 
up to the base of the neck. The primary chemical current may be 
effective, but the static is superior for this purpose, and the combina- 
tion of the two gives great efficiency, the chemical current having 
greater penetrative power. The most desirable of all currents is the 
combination of static and magnetic produced by my recent invention. 

To overcome indolence and moral worthlessness, the currents 
should be directed to the entire upper surface of the shoulder and 
the upper margin of the back, from shoulder to shoulder — on the 
head to the organs of Firmness, Fortitude, Heroism, Integrity, 
Energy, Cheerfulness and Health. 

To overcome a gloomy tendency, direct the excitement to Forti- 
tude, Cheerfulness, Health and Playfulness, on the head and body. 

SUPPLEMENTARY SUGGESTIONS. 

In the treatment of constitutional disorders, especially those affect- 
ing the nervous system, much attention should be given to the 
hypochondriac region, and to the middle dorsal region of the spine, 
between its thoracic and abdominal portions, about the junction of 
the fourth, fifth and sixth dorsal vertebrae, a region of the spine 
often found sensitive and irritable, sympathizing as it does with the 
space that embraces the heart and solar plexus, and thus represent- 
ing a large amount of sensibility. Dispersive passes or dry cupping 
at this point will often have an important effect, especially on neu- 
ralgias. 

The fourth and fifth dorsal nerves supply each a branch to the 
mammae and a posterior branch which, crossing the latissimus dorsi, 
is distributed to the skin over the scapula. Thus the regions of 
Health and Love, which are correlative, are dependent on the same 
spinal nerves. Reciprocating currents through Health and Love are 
of unsurpassed value in the promotion of Health. 



432 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL KULES [CHAP. XX. 

Dry cupping on the spine at the origin of the nerves of a morbid 
part is generally beneficial, For the arms this would be at the lower 
cervical and upper dorsal vertebras. From the latter proceed not 
the muscular but the vaso-motor nerves of the arms. 

In the treatment of the head it will be important to notice the 
locations of spots of tenderness or other peculiar sensations which 
may indicate a morbid condition in the brain beneath. The veins of 
the brain and the scalp have a communication by anastomosis in the 
diploe between the outer and inner tables of the skull. I believe 
the conditions of the brain are also often indicated by the appear- 
ance of the surface of the face and neck. Flushed or pale condi- 
tions and appearance of slight tumors generally correspond with 
some condition of the subjacent brain. 

Ganglionic Nerves. In the manual and electric treatment of the 
spinal column I believe that the effects are largely produced through 
the adjacent sympathetic ganglia, which control the entire circula- 
tion of the viscera, and thus accelerate, retard or modify their action. 
All morbid states of the viscera must therefore be accompanied by 
corresponding morbidity in the ganglionic nerves. That they do 
change in visceral diseases, losing their pearly appearance and 
assuming the inflammatory condition like that of the diseased organs, 
was shown by the dissections of the anatomist, Joseph Swan, who 
found these ganglia natural in one who was suddenly put to death 
without disease, but much inflamed in cases of disease. In a case 
of tetanus nearly all the ganglia were inflamed, and in a rabbit 
destroyed by nux vomica all the ganglia of the sympathetic nerves 
displayed considerable redness. 

As the ganglionic nerves are more nearly vertical in their course 
than the spinal they produce their effect generally lower, and the in- 
fluences upon the viscera may be traced up to higher portions of the 
ganglionic system. 

Anatomical Suggestions. As anatomical works do not always 
present clearly the local relations of organs to each other, I would 
offer a few suggestions to assist the reader, in reference to the 
thorax. 

The sternum is the most convenient landmark for reference. 
The lower extremity of the sternum reaches nearly to the lower 
border of the right lung and lower edge of the heart. From the 
level of the extremity of the sternum a depression runs across the 
sixth and seventh ribs, which corresponds nearly to the lower border 
of the lungs. The cartilage of the left fourth rib corresponds to the 
upper portion of the uncovered heart above which the lung comes to 
the wall of the chest. 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 433 

Above the lower end of the sternum the heart extends on the left ; 
below, the liver extends on the right. The stomach is found two or 
three inches below the sternum, and its entrance or cardiac orifice 
extends to the left. The cartilages of the sixth, seventh and eighth 
ribs in front correspond with the level of the liver and stomach. 

The right and left lungs unite under the upper part of the ster- 
num, which is usually more prominent than the ribs, but may be 
flattened if the lungs at this spot are not much developed. 

The right ventricle corresponds immediately with the lower half 
of the sternum and cartilages of the fourth, fifth and sixth ribs 
of the left side. The right auricle extends a trifle to the right of 
the sternum. The left ventricle is lower than the right, corre- 
sponding to the fourth and fifth ribs. It is covered by the lung more 
than the right ventricle, which is mainly uncovered. 

The aorta rises opposite the junction of the cartilage of the fourth 
rib and sternum on the level of the sixth vertebra, lying behind the 
sternum and a portion of the lung. It leans slightly to the left, and 
arches to turn down at the level of the second costal cartilage and 
fourth dorsal vertebra. The pulmonary artery passes under the 
aorta, conveying the blood to the right and left lungs. The vena cava 
lies to the right of the aorta. 

The trachea lies in front of the right half of the spinal column 
and the aorta of the left half. The trachea bifurcates on the level 
of the fifth dorsal vertebra, and the large vessels rise from the aorta 
about an inch higher. The left ventricle extends to the diaphragm. 
As the ribs in front fall below their spinal attachments, we shall find 
that the heart, corresponding in front with the fourth, fifth and sixth 
ribs, corresponds posteriorly with the space from the sixth to the 
tenth vertebra. The whole space from the fourth to the tenth 
vertebra is opposite the heart and aorta. Examining on these localities 
we recognize the hypertrophied heart by its thumping violence of 
action, while the feeble, dilated heart is recognized by a weak impulse 
but a greatly increased amount of sound, which may sometimes be 
heard all over the chest. We find an equally important indication in 
the jugular vein, — a gentle murmur which we can interrupt by com- 
pressing the vein with the finger. When we hear this sound we 
know that the blood is impaired, that it has lost an important portion 
of the red corpuscles which are essential to health, and needs to be 
restored to a better condition to produce substantial health. Im- 
paired blood opens the door to all diseases. 

For disease of the valves of the heart we examine between the 
third and fourth ribs for the condition of the semilunar valves, at the 
entrance to the aorta. Morbid growth there may produce a blowing 



434 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

sound at the systole of the ventricles, and interfere with the sharp 
click of the valves, which follows the systole. 

The tricuspid and bicuspid valves between the auricles and ven- 
tricles give their morbid sounds at the base of the fourth rib just 
left of the sternum. When through disease they do not close firmly, 
there will be a regurgitant murmur at the systole of the ventricles 
from the blood being forced back into the auricles. These valves 
are near together, the tricuspid of the right ventricle being a quarter 
of an inch lower than the bicuspid or mitral valve of the left ven- 
tricle, and under the sternum. 

The various forms produced by disease of the valves produce 
many varieties of sound, which are minutely described by pathologists. 
Obstruction or disease of the valves tends to produce hypertrophy of 
the ventricles to overcome it, and thus increase the sound. This may 
just balance the valvular difficulty. Sounds which are scarcely 
perceptible when the patient is quiet become conspicuous from 
exertion or excitement. 

Obstructions in the aorta produce hypertrophy of the left ven- 
tricle, as obstructions in the lungs produce dilatation or hypertrophy 
of the right ventricle. Hypertrophy of the left ventricle is injurious 
to the brain by the violence of its action. Dilatation of the right 
ventricle is a condition producing great debility, and dropsical ten- 
dencies. 

The most important suggestion, however, from this anatomical 
description is the indication of impaired vitality from impoverished 
blood — an indication unknown until the time of Andral and too 
much neglected since — an indication which would have warned 
against bleeding and other debilitating treatment. I have mentioned 
the steady murmur of the internal jugular vein which we may hear 
near the trachea. There is another significant sound — bruit de souffle 
or bellows sound — heard along the space between the junctions of the 
second and third ribs with the sternum. This bellows sound coin- 
cides with the systole of the heart and is heard nowhere else. It is 
the infallible sign of impaired blood and demands restorative nourish- 
ing management, for while this condition exists there is a continual 
tendency to nervous disorders and impaired health which may end in 
consumption. Phosphate of iron, fluid extracts of white and red 
clover blossoms, buckeye, triosteum, saw palmetto, phosphates, hypo- 
phosphites and various tonics may be beneficially used. 

For the diseased conditions of the heart, convallaria (lily of the 
valley), cereus and evening primrose are the most valuable reme- 
dies. Digitalis is becoming obsolete. 




THORAX AND HEART. 

The engraving shows the positions 
perhaps a trifle too high. It shows the 
position of the heart (cor.) — the right 
auricle (auric, dext.) — above which is 
the Aorta — to the right is the left auri- 
cle (aur. sin.) — between them the pul- 
monary artery (A. pulm.). The large in- 
nominate veins are located above, V. 
I anon. sin. and V. anon, dext., covered by 
the clavicle (clavicula), which also cov- 
ers the subclavian artery (A. subclav.) 
and subclavian vein ( V. subclav.). 
Above is seen the common carotid artery 
(A. carol, comm.) and jugular vein ( V. 
jugul.). The Trachea is seen in the mid- 
dle. The right lung (Pulm. dext.) is 
seen on one side, and the left (Pulm. 
sin.) on the other. The outline of the 



LPcsftLMONARYVj 

Left Auricle 

O.CofcONARYV- 

End ofLAuricle 



L. Ventricle. 




Diaphragm 
^R • P©s. Pulmonary Ve i n 



a^cendinq 
Vena Cava 



R. Auricle 
BloodVessels 



R,Vec(tricle 



is shown, and the posi- 
tion of the liver (Hepar) 
and stomach ( Ventricu- 
lus). The superior vena 
cava ( V. cava super.) is 
shown, entering the right 
auricle. Reference is also 
made to the anterior medi- 
astinum (mediast. ant.), 
in which the folds of the 
pleura meet on the medi- 
an line. 

The second figure gives a 
posterior view of the heart 
in a vertical position, the 
left ventricle being most 
conspicuous. We see the 
ascending vena cava con- 
necting with the right au- 
ricle, while the left auricle 
receives the right and left 
posterior pulmonaryveins. 
The great coronary vein 
and other bloodvessels of 
the heart are shown. 

The third figure is an 
anterior view of the heart 
raised to a vertical posi- 
tion, in which the right 
ventricle and auricle 
appear most conspicuous. 
It receives the descending 
vena cava and sends out 
pulmonary arteries, as the 
eft ventricle sends out the aorta, subclavian and carotid arteries, and arteria innom- 
inata, which should be called the brachio-cephalic\ as it divides and supplies the 
arm and head on the right side. On the right side more circulation, comparatively, 
goes to the muscles, and on the left side to the brain — the left brain being generally 
stronger than the right. r ; : . • ; . < . -;■ (Opp. p- 434-) 



^VENTRICLE." 



pulmonary art. 
•Auricle 
Rjlmonary Artery 

Cardiac Blood 
Vessels 



L. Ventricle 



. TRIANSUUftRIS S7tK 

Jut aril til Hun: miry Wssels 



tijtFhrinie Kerra 



PI turn tiutmtmaUt 
ft caret CoAdliS 




■ _, ,.. \ Surrtpathetio Xrrve 

Nrtl.*tte,u:m \ J f 

I V/mrucie Ziucir 



The horizontal section through the fifth dorsal vertebra is intro- 
duced to show that on this level we find the pulmonary artery coming 
out of the right heart and the venous blood returning to it by the 
superior vena cava from the head — the aorta coming out from the 
left ventricle of the heart, behind the pulmonary artery — the right 
and left bronchi passing into the lungs — the oesophagus, which carries 
down the food, and the thoracic duct, which brings up nourishment, 
adjacent to the spinal column — the descending aorta, also adjacent 
to the spine, which supplies the lower part of the body — and the vena 
azygos, which goes to the superior vena cava. The left sympathetic 
and left phrenic nerve are shown, and the right pneumogastric. The 
phrenic nerves, which pass down on each side of the heart, are so 
closely associated with the pneumogastric in the neck, that there is 
danger of disturbing the heart by the pneumogastric, if we attempt 
to act on the diaphragm by exciting the phrenic in the neck. The 
pleura, which makes a double investment around the lungs, with an 
intervening cavity — the pericardium around the heart — and the 
middle position of the mediastinum membrane are shown. 

(Opp. p. 435-) 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 435 

RELATION OF THE LIMBS TO THE TRUNK. 

This subject has been neglected in the previous chapters. But it 
is an important philosophic discovery which it is necessary the reader 
should understand. 

The natural position of the arms gives us a hint of the relations 
of the limbs to the trunk, but such hints might not for a hundred 
thousand years lead to the discovery, unless the inquirer were explor- 
ing in the spirit of philosophic discovery, which has ever been very 
rare. It was developed to me by the study of the functions which 
Sarcognomic experiments reveal. I observed in my personal expe- 
rience the sympathy between the forearm and the digestive organs, 
especially in reference to assimilative absorption, which the warmth 
of the forearm promotes. I observed also the tendency of chilling 
the forearms by cold water to promote the access of a chill. Others 
had observed that a current of cold water on the wrists had a remark- 
ably cooling effect on the whole system, but this method has not 
been used by physicians to subdue fever. The initial treatment of 
fever by bathing the lower extremities has been a very successful 
method, though not appreciated by the medical profession. 

My attention being thus called to the relation of the trunk and 
limbs — their correlative relation was easily made out. Starting with 
the already familiar proposition that the upper and lower limbs were 
absolutely parallel and analogous in function, though in a higher and 
lower sphere, the ascertained parallelism of the arm with the 
trunk in a correlative way involved a similar parallelism of the lower 
limbs which it was necessary to demonstrate. 

The arm to the elbow, according to Sarcognomy, corresponds to 
the brain from Dignity and Ambition, inclusive, to the lower level of 
Arrogance, including the extension of the same within the median 
line. This occipital tract is correlative with the Modest, Ideal and 
Reverential range in the temples, from the temporal arch to the 
cheekbone, which is a pulmonic or thoracic region. The arm below 
the elbow corresponds with an occipital region, running in on the 
median line, which is correlative with the digestive tract at the basis 
of the terrrporo-sphenoidal lobe (marked on the jaws). The practical 
demonstration of this pathognomy is that warmth of the forearm 
promotes digestion and assimilation, which I believe are hindered by 
chilling it, and that temperature responds to impressions on the 
wrists, showing that they sympathize with Calorification on the lower 
bowels. The hands also have a close sympathy with the lower pelvic 
region. 

The therapeutic inference from this is that stimulant applications 
on the humerus (upper arm) will greatly invigorate or stimulate the 



436 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES [CHAP. XX. 

lungs, tending to relieve a cold or congestion, which may also be ac- 
complished pneumatically or by electricity, and that a severe chill at 
the humerus will be dangerous to the lungs, — a warning against the 
exposure of the arms. Pneumatic treatment of the arms should there- 
fore be considered valuable in diseases of the viscera. Medicated 
plasters for the arms will prove efficient. [At a meeting of the New 
York Clinical Society, May 25, 1883, Dr. E. G. Janeway related a 
case of cancer of the stomach, in which " the predominant symp- 
toms were neuralgic pains of the arms and legs."] 

In reference to the lower limbs, which are parallel in function to 
the upper, nothing can be more decisive than the act of running or 
walking up several flights of stairs. This exercise of the thighs 
compels the most violent respiration. Influences below the knee 
are responded to in the pelvic and abdominal regions. Foot baths 
have an important influence on the menstrual flux and a foot chill 
is dangerous, as many women have realized. The bowels in a sensi- 
tive condition are promptly affected by rising from the bed to stand 
on the feet, and absolute rest of the lower limbs is necessary in 
abdominal affections. The relief of a case of peritonitis (a patient 
of Mr. C.) by cupping on the leg and transferring the inflammation 
from the abdomen, was a good demonstration of this relation or 
sympathy. 

The abdomen, and especially its lower portion, being the organic 
seat of fever, treatment on the leg should be a most valuable 
febrifuge, and I predict that the pneumatic boot will prove one of our 
most decisive agents. Experience with foot and leg baths in fever 
proves their great value. 

If the limbs are thus parallel with the trunk, we are compelled to 
ask what is the parallel of that restless, irritative region which we 
find at the knee and at the elbow ? We find this on the side of the 
body adjacent to the elbow, which thus completes the demonstration. 
This is the region of Irritability, on which the application of stimu- 
lant electricity proves very disagreeable, so much as to have attracted 
the attention of Dr. Beard to the fact. This region corresponds with 
the liver and the diaphragm. The association of the liver with the 
irritative passions is well known. To provoke one's anger is some- 
times expressed as stirring up his bile. The exciting influence of 
this region over the whole system is illustrated by the action of the 
diaphragm, which produces deep respiration, increasing the animal 
force. It is kept in a tense condition in great muscular efforts. 

The intense and passionate restlessness at the knee is the outward 
expression of the correlative excitement at the waist, and in the 
basis of the brain just over the ear, which is responded to by the 



CHAP. XX.] FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. 437 

turbulent region of the middle of the neck which corresponds to 
the knee. The coincidence of these two regions in the brain proves 
a similar coincidence in the body. 

The great vital force and development produced by the upper end 
of the thigh corresponds with the energetic vitality of the shoulder, 
where Firmness and Health make a strong constitution, and the 
lively Playfulness at the lower part of the shoulder blade corresponds 
with the active vivacity of broad hips. 

The lower end of the limbs (feet and ankles), in their total unin- 
tellectuality and initial animalism, corresponds with the base of the 
pelvis which tends to dementia, and a little higher we find irrational 
animal impulses which correspond with the Insanity of the pelvic 
region. 

The relations just stated show how important to the lungs is the 
protection of the lower limbs. Cold applied to the legs and feet 
tends to produce a hyperaemic and inflammatory condition of the 
chest, and applied to the thigh it aggravates this condition by paralyz- 
ing the vital force of the chest. 

I do not rely upon anatomy for the demonstration of functions and 
sympathies, but it may help to illustrate the relations of the limbs 
and trunk to refer to the fact said to have been demonstrated by 
Claude Bernard that the vaso-motor nerves of the upper limbs arise 
from the dorsal spinal nerves, from the third to the seventh pair, 
which would indicate a sympathy of the arms with the thorax and 
upper abdomen, while the vaso-motor nerves of the lower limbs 
come from the lumbar and lower dorsal region, which would give the 
lower limbs more sympathy with the abdomen generally and with its 
respiratory and calorific relations. Certainly they are more effective 
in developing diaphragmatic respiration and Calorification than the 
upper limbs. 

The practical inference to which this leads is that in treating the 
thoracic region we may associate with it that of the upper arm and 
thigh, but in treating the abdominal region we should associate the 
leg and forearm. 

That the analogy of the upper and lower limbs may produce a 
sympathy between them is illustrated by a remark of Dr. Moritz 
Meyer, in his work on electricity, who says : " I use with advantage 
this method of irritation in apoplectic paralysis and contractions ; 
for instance, when both arm and leg are paralyzed, the former, however, 
more than the latter, I expect simply by electrizing the muscles of 
the arm that the paralyzed muscles of the leg will be reached." (P. 155.) 

An important practical consequence of this doctrine of the limbs 
is that our hygienic authors are seriously mistaken in their views of 



43$ RULES FOR THERAPEUTIC TREATMENT. [CHAP. XX. 

pulmonic development. I do not refer to the common error of 
dwelling entirely upon diaphragmatic or deep breathing to the 
neglect of costal or upward breathing, but the common error of 
giving nearly all the attention to exercises of the arms for chest 
development. The thighs greatly excel the arms in muscular 
development, and in their relation to vital force. Hence exercise of 
the thighs is far more efficient than any exercise of the arms in com- 
pelling chest expansion. In ascending a long flight of stairs we are 
compelled to use all our respiratory power, and in running we soon 
find that we cannot expand the lungs sufficiently to sustain our 
exertion. Hence, as a means of thoracic development, walking, 
running, leaping and mountain climbing take the precedence of all 
other exercises. 

The great vital muscular force of the thigh renders injuries of 
that region extremely prostrating and dangerous. Of the soldiers 
shot through the knee in our late civil war few if any recovered 
except through amputation. 

After a recent fall upon the knees, I found the vital force of the 
entire constitution greatly reduced. 



CHAPTER XXI. 
ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

GENERAL STATEMENT. 

Nine methods of electrical treatment: galvanism, primary, secondary, combined, 
static, unilateral, statico-chemical, magnetic and electro-medical — Use of the 
commutator — Simple stimulation — Rheostat — Use of the alternating current and 
its locations — Anterior and posterior, superior and inferior — Method of using the 
negative pole — Method of manual and of electro-medical treatment — Nature and 
use of the positive and negative in electricity — Static electricity and magnetism. 



In the treatment of the human constitution by electricity there are 
the following nine methods : — 

Chemical electricity generated by acids and metals. 

i. Galvanism produced by chemical action with two plates ; one 
easily corroded, which originates the current, and the other, more 
difficult to oxidate, which receives the current from the first and 
gives it off by a wire or other conductor which carries it back (ex. 
teriorly to the cell or the battery which contains the acid) to the first 
plate. The first is most commonly zinc ; the second, copper or carbon. 
The wire from the carbon conveys the current of positive electricity; 
the wire from the zinc produces a negative condition or current. 
The half of the wire next the carbon is in a positive condition, the 
half next the zinc is negative, and midway between the two the con- 
dition is neutral. The galvanic current from a single cell being very 
feeble, from five to fifty cells are used for a medical current. 
Chemical electricity modified by a current. 

2. The Primary or interrupted galvano-magnetic current produced 
by reinforcing the galvanic current with the magnetism of a rod of 
iron, magnetized by the current conducted in a spiral coil around the 
rod (which is called a helix) and rapidly interrupted by breaking the 
connection so as to produce a succession of fine shocks with great 
rapidity. The interruption, which renders the current very forcible, 
is produced by the magnetized iron attracting a spring out of its 
position so as to break the connection and interrupt the current. A 
good helix increases the power of the current, so that a single cell 
will give all the electric force a patient would endure. 

The primary or galvano-magnetic current is like the galvanic or one- 



44° ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

way current, which, applied to the human body, propels the fluids and 
nervous forces in the direction in which it moves and produces some 
chemical action. 

3. The Secondary or Faradic current (named after Faraday) 
which is produced by the primary (interrupted galvano-magnetic) act- 
ing upon a coil of wire exterior to the primary coil and not connected 
with it. An electric current in one wire produces an opposite current 
in a neighboring wire, and hence a current in the interior coil from 
left to right would produce a current in the exterior coil from right 
to left, and the moment this primary current is interrupted, the sec- 
ondary current reverses itself, flowing back in the same direction as 
that of the primary. This reversed action (coinciding with the pri- 
mary) is considered the stronger action of the two, and hence is called 
positive ; but, as the secondary is a two-way current, the distinction of 
its poles is not so great as in the primary. The positive and negative 
of the primary will decompose water into oxygen and hydrogen, but 
the double action of the secondary prevents this chemical action. 
The secondary current may be used as stimulus at both poles, but the 
primary stimulates at the negative and has a sedative influence at 
the positive. The stimulus is due to the attraction or propulsion of 
blood and nervous influence toward the negative electrode. The 
sedative influence of the primary is due to its dispersive effects and 
tonic character, by which it relieves inflammation and congestion. 

4. The Combined primary and secondary currents are stronger 
than either separately, and have a clear distinction of positive and 
negative poles. 

5. The current of Static or frictional electricity, usually produced 
from glass by motion or friction without chemical action, has a power- 
fully diffusive tendency, from its expansive self-repulsion, and hence 
forces its way with great facility, and tends to play upon the surface 
of bodies and to escape where it can find a conductor. Hence it acts 
chiefly upon the surface of the human body, stimulates the skin, and 
by this universal action stimulates the entire brain and nervous 
system. Passing with greater facility, it does not, like the chemical 
electricity, require contact of the electrodes with the body, and the 
use of fluids on the skin, to facilitate conduction, but may be applied 
freely through the clothing, if in sufficient force, and by conductors 
or electrodes, several inches from the surface of the body, negative 
electrodes drawing a current from the body, and positive electrodes 

giving it a current. 

The static electricity may also be administered by accumulating 
enough to give a shock, either from a Leyden jar or a well-charged 
electrode. Treatment by gentle shocks is not so pleasant or effective 






CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 441 

as by currents, but in the practice of Dr. Gale of New York at the 
close of the last century it was used with signal success, because he 
applied it skilfully to a great variety of diseases. 

The diffusiveness of static electricity is so great that the patient is 
commonly insulated upon a platform with glass legs ; but insulation 
is not absolutely necessary if we have a good machine. A piece of 
rubber cloth to insulate the feet and chair of the patient is usually 
sufficient. 

6. The unilateral method has been neglected by therapeutists. 
This method places the patient entirely under the influence of positive 
or of negative electricity. With the static machine he is insulated and 
fully charged with a positive or negative condition, so that sparks will 
pass between the patient and one who touches him — a method which 
has been advocated by Dr. Radclyffe of England. A full charge of 
positive electricity is a valuable and genial stimulus. 

I have however seen no mention or recommendation of the unilat- 
eral method in the application of chemical electricity by the galvanic 
and the primary current.* In the administration of such currents, as 
usually given, the positive influence predominates in that half of the 
current which is next the positive electrode, and the negative on the 
side of the negative electrode. Thus, in passing through the hands, 
they would meet at the spinal column, where the influence would be 
equipoised or neutral. The neutral point depends on the facility of 
conduction, and may easily be arranged so as to leave the entire course 
of the current in the body either positive or negative. If, for example, 
we apply the negative electrode to a part of the surface where the skin 
is absolutely dry, while the positive side has a good conductor and a 
moist surface, the negative electricity will be nearly excluded and the 
positive will occupy the entire route between the electrodes. Thus 
the patient may be placed under positive or negative influence by 
obstructing the access of one of the currents. If sponges are used as 
electrodes it will be sufficient to have one of them well charged with 
salt water and the other barely moist. With metal electrodes one 
maybe covered with cloth or leather almost dry, or may be connected 
with the body only by strips of wet cloth several inches long. It 

* Since the above was in type I have seen a book by a Western physician con- 
taining many good suggestions, and recommending strongly the use of the 
unilateral currents, but not proposing a proper method. His suggestion of using a 
longer conducting cord for the current to be partially excluded would be quite in- 
effective, as the difference of conductivity between three feet and six feet of copper 
wire could not be appreciated. A copper wire (1-20 of an inch) one hundred miles 
long would offer less resistance than that offered by the human body to a current 
from the right hand to the left. An iron wire of the same diameter would offer 
about five times the resistance of the copper, hence a small iron wire might be used 
efficiently. The resistance is easily established where the electrode touches the 
body by interposing a sponge or wet cloth. It may also be made with scientific 
accuracy by a rheostat of water or German silver. 



44 2 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

should be remembered, when we wish to send in any influence with 
the positive current, whether that of medicine or of the human aura, 
it must have free access, and the negative current should be 
obstructed. 

j. The statico-chemical combination. The static current is unequalled 
in pleasant and beneficial effects, but has not the penetrative power 
and chemical energy of galvanic and primary currents. Hence I 
recommend what authors have neglected as unknown, the combina- 
tion of the static with the primary and galvanic currents — their 
wires being brought together to the same electrode. The combina- 
tion of the static and primary may be recommended when we wish to 
make a strong as well as restorative impression, less harsh and more 
beneficial than the combination of primary and secondary. This 
combination may also be used in the unilateral manner, and the com- 
bination of the two positive electricities, thus applied, is a powerful 
tonic. 

8. The magnetic current is the complement of the static, and the 
combination of the two as statico-magnetic is the most perfect and 
hygienic current ever discovered. Its discovery and demonstration 
in 1888-89, should, I think, make a new era in electro-therapeutics. 
My prior discovery of the modifying power of medicines upon electric 
currents necessarily led to the inference that a current through a 
magnet would carry a magnetic influence. The well-established 
value of the magnet as a local application for disease and the fact 
that very few could feel any decided influence from the contact of 
the magnet, and consequently that its agency was rejected by the 
medical profession, made it very necessary that its magnetic energy 
should be conveyed by the electric current. 

The magnet is the opposite and therefore the complement of 
electricity. Electricity is repulsive, magnetism is attractive ; elec- 
tricity is heating, magnetism is cooling; electricity disorganizes and 
decomposes, magnetism is constructive, reparative, organizing. 
Static electricity goes to the surface and seeks to escape, magnetism 
reaches the interior and makes a less evanescent impression. Thus, 
while static electricity animates the nervous energies, magnetism sus- 
tains their organic basis, and promotes all reparative processes. 

Magnetism, therefore, has a wide application in fever, inflammation 
and all exhausted conditions, and becomes the proper companion of 
electricity in all its four forms — static, galvanic, primary and 
secondary. 

Magnetism has two conditions — analogous to the positive and 
negative. The magnetism of the north pole resembles slightly the 
influence of positive galvanism and imparts an infinitesimal taste of 



CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 443 

acidity to water, while the magnetism of the south pole is less tonic 
and imparts the alkaline taste. Hence, in treatment, we use the north 
pole as a tonic or positive, and expect a more gentle influence from 
the south — a distinction readily recognized by the sensitive. We 
shall have ample illustration of the therapeutic effects of magnetism 
in a great variety of diseases, and of the difference of the two poles, 
when electro-therapeutists shall have adopted this improvement ; and 
I would be grateful to those who first engage in this practice if they 
would send me the record of their experience in the combination of 
magnetism with static, primary, secondary and galvanic currents and 
medical potencies. 

9. The electro-medical current. For many years (over 45) I have 
been familiar with the fact that medical potencies proceed diffusively 
from medicines, without their being received into the body, and with- 
out their being even in contact with the surface. I have also for 
many years known that an electric current through the medicine 
would carry its influence into the constitution and even into that of 
another person through whom the current was made to pass. Thus, 
in a group of ten or a dozen persons who joined hands, the medicine 
through which a positive current was passed at one end of the group 
would be recognized by the whole group though which the current 
passed, with different degrees of distinctness according to their im- 
pressibility. Some would be incapable of feeling such currents as I 
used, but it was very seldom that any of my students would fail to 
recognize and feel them distinctly, so as to be able to state their 
character. Insensibility does not prove the absence of influence, as 
most persons are unconscious of the operation of medicines of which 
they have swallowed a moderate dose. 

The medical profession has believed that medical effects could be 
produced only when the substance of the medicine was carried into 
the body by the current, and the possibility of this was long denied. 
The possibility of carrying in the potency of a medicine without 
any of its substance by a current which traverses metallic con- 
ductors before entering the body would be universally and perhaps 
scornfully denied in medical colleges,* though I have for some years 
been demonstrating its practicability in my courses of lectures, and 
sensitive individuals have often detected the character and given the 
name of the medicine affecting the current, when it was one with the 
effect of which they were familiar. 

The reader will recognize the great advantage of thus saving the 
stomach from medical annoyance, applying the remedy just where it 

*A patent-office examiner refused to entertain an application for a patent em- 
bodying this principle, because he considered it a self-evident impossibility. 



444 ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

is needed and discontinuing the impression promptly when de- 
sired. 

In treatment by electricity we need to acquire a clear idea of the 
effects of positive and negative conditions, on the human body, and 
the effects of the electric currents. 

Heretofore positive and negative conditions have been studied as 
local influences, with little thought of the separate pervading in- 
fluence of each throughout the body. 

Nor has there been any thorough knowledge of the effects of 
electric currents on the body and mind, for which we are indebted to 
Sarcognomy. Every current goes from one locality to another ; 
hence, as a general rule, it diminishes the activity and influence of 
the part at which it enters (the anode) and increases the influence 
and activity of the part to which it goes, (the cathode) unless the 
cathode be too far from the neutral point between the poles. 

If it traverses in both directions alternately, it becomes a stimu- 
lus at each extremity, as when the current is reversed by commuta- 
tion. We approximate this condition of reciprocal stimulus in using 
the Faradic or secondary current. In the common battery there is 
no arrangement to produce a reciprocal current, and hence the com- 
mutator would require an additional operator, while the electrician 
is applying the electrodes. To overcome this difficulty I have in- 
vented a commutating electrode, by means of which the operator in 
handling: the electrodes can reverse the current as often as he wishes. 
This reversal not only renders the current a stimulus at each end, 
but increases its effect beyond that of mere interruption, by the 
extreme variation between plus and minus conditions, — the effect 
of electricity being proportional to the amount and frequency of the 
changes. A smooth-flowing current is unnoticed, an interrupted one 
is vividly felt, and a commuted one makes a still stronger impression. 

Simple Stimulation. — The simplest form of treatment is by 
equilateral stimulation with commuted or with secondary currents. 
The secondary currents may also be commuted so as to make them 
perfectly equilateral. In this method of treatment, we apply the 
electrodes on the corresponding spots on two sides of the body, to 
stimulate the right and left organs of any function, or we may apply 
on one organ on one side, and on another on the opposite side, if we 
wish to stimulate two at once (such as Health and Vital Force), 
changing each electrode soon to the opposite side, to equalize the 
effects. With bifurcated electrodes we may treat both sides equally 
at once. 

The result, simple stimulation, may be thus attained when we 
have free access to the person, by shifting (alternating) the elec- 



CHAP. XXI. J ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 445 

trodes, but it is not convenient to do this with the frequency required 
in such alternation ; and as in the great majority of cases it is not 
desirable to give the negative influence as much scope in the body as 
the positive, the preferable method is to use the commutating elec- 
trode, and to limit the accessibility of the negative influence, which 
may be done by using a copper wire for the positive current and a 
smaller iron or steel wire for the negative, in connection with the 
helix. By this method we insure the predominance of the positive 
current in the body, and without excluding the negative we reduce 
its influence on the patient as low as we may desire by the length 
and fineness of the iron wire. 

In those cases in which, from the torpor, inactivity and lack of cir- 
culation in any organ, the negative influence is more desirable to 
secure the afflux of increased circulation by relaxing the blood- 
vessels, we may use two equal copper wires for the positive and 
negative, but in all other cases an iron wire of small dimensions for 
the negative will be preferable, and will be a more exact method than 
relying upon sponges or any other indefinite mode of obstruction. 
Another method, better and more exact, and almost equally simple, is 
to use a water rheostat for negative obstruction, by inserting sharp 
pointed wires through the corks of a small glass tube, containing 

conductivity. As the wires J [ ~" " = == =rz^-J _ [| 

are inserted farther or with- ^ B -=^=— - ~ = B 

drawn in this simple rheostat, :- B = ~ : IS^ P 

the conductivity is increased or diminished, so as to give us a definite 

idea of its amount. 

The rheostat is especially necessary in using my medical electrode, 
to overbalance its resistance to the current and insure the entrance 
and diffusion of the positive medicated current, without yielding 
much space to the negative influence. 

I do not propose to exclude negative influences entirely, for each 
influence has its merit and these merits may be combined by alterna- 
tion in such proportions as each case seems to require. The negative 
condition by relaxing the vaso-motor nerves promotes an afflux of 
blood, and by attracting the positive promotes the afnux of both 
blood and nervous influence. At the same time the positive condi- 
tion, while moderating this influx, imparts a wholesome tonicity to the 
organs. This combined and equal influence is similar to the normal 
condition of organs under gentle stimulation. But some organs 
require more of the negative influence to rouse their stagnant vitality, 
and others require more of the positive to overcome their relaxed 
condition, and the vaso-motor debility, so as to relieve congestion, 
which must be ascertained by careful diagnosis. 



44-6 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

Hence the primary current may fill a large space in our practice 
by giving equilateral currents on the right and left sides, or by stim- 
ulating two different organs at once on the same side, or by treating 
two opposite antagonistic organs with the positive and the negative 
condition so as to secure the predominance of either. When 
this is done, the negative electrode in the great majority of cases 
will be applied on the posterior and superior surfaces, and the posi- 
tive on the anterior inferior, as when we make a current from 
Disease to Health, or from Melancholy to Cheerfulness, taking care 
in all cases that the access of the negative is obstructed. 

The alternating or commuted current may be thus beneficially 
applied between the anterior organs and their posterior spinal 
sources of power. As it is not beneficial to stimulate any anterior 
function greatly without its posterior support, the alternating 
current or the secondary current will be required in many cases, as 
when we stimulate any of the viscera of the trunk by alternating 
currents between the spine and a proper anterior location for each of 
the viscera. 

Thus for the abdominal functions we may cover the lower half of 
the dorsal region with a broad electrode (or moist sponge) and place 
the other on the gastro-enteric or abdominal tract (Abdo.), anywhere 
from the gastric location marked as Alimentiveness (Al.) to that of 
Defecation (De.). 

Immediately above the gastric location (corresponding to Alimen- 
tiveness) is the Hepatic location (H.) corresponding 
to the liver. These locations the reader will observe 
are nearer the side than the front. I do not recom- 
mend operations on the extreme frontal organs of 
either body or brain, which would concentrate excite- 
ment upon them ; for the tendency of the frontal 
organs is to sensibility, impressibility and exhaustion, 
while the lateral organs are exciting or stimulating, 
and produce generally only the moderate exhaustion 
of fatigue. The excitability of the heart is stimulated 
just above the hepatic location (Ca.), and as we go 
back along the ribs excitement is gradually modified 
into power, with less of excitability. Thus we find just 
behind the arms, below the middle of the humerus, 
the region of Force, which gives tonic strength to the 
* heart and the whole constitution. 

Above the cardiac region we find along the ribs, just in front of 
the arm, the pulmonic region of Inspiration (P.)> which gives activ- 
ity to the lungs in costal respiration. 




CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 447 

Above Inspiration the influence is cephalic (Ce.), giving activity 
to the brain, while at the summit of the back it gives power as well 
as activity. Passing back under the arms, we find mental strength 
as well as activity in the region of Sanity (S.). Thus from the 
summit of the chest to near the base of the abdomen, near the lateral 
surfaces, we have the tract of visceral excitement and activity, along 
which one of the electrodes should play while the other is on the 
spinal column or near it, with an obstructed negative influence. 

This tract of excitement is a little anterior to the median line on 
the side of the body. If we should take a similar or parallel column 
on the back behind the arm, from the shoulders to the hips, half 
way between the column of active excitement just described and the 
spinal column or seat of power, we would find it a region of active, 
sustained energy. Thus we find all the tonic influences on the back; 
and advancing to the front we find excitement, delicacy and exhaus- 
tion. Hence our electric currents should advance with positive force 
to the back, meeting the negative condition near the posterior sur- 
face, unless in cases of torpor in the posterior region we make the 
neutral meeting point an inch or more anterior to the spine, or even 
midway between the two electrodes, to secure a negative influence at 
the spine. Beyond this I would not go in any case, as the complete 
predominance of the negative would be quite objectionable. 

The tonic influences of the back may be developed by alternating 
currents on the same level of the back, or between higher and lower 
locations, as the case requires. The reader will of course bear in 
mind that, in these cross currents on the back, less electric energy is 
required as the electrodes approach each other, and the more as they 
are farther apart. The very normal activity on the level of the 
shoulders gives a harmonious combination of the brain and the 
muscular system, but as we descend, there is less of the brain and 
more of the muscular force, tending to exhaust the nervous system 
if prolonged. 

The pathognomic laws of life not only give the superior vital char- 
acter to that which is posterior over the anterior and that which is 
superior over the inferior, but give a higher vital character to muscles 
which act in such directions. Thus it was shown by the careful 
experiments of Onimus on the muscles after decapitation of animals 
that the first muscles to lose their contractility are the diaphragm 
which acts downwards and the tongue which acts forwards. The 
extensor muscles, which throw the limbs outward and downward, 
lose their contractility an hour sooner than the flexor muscles, 
which draw upward and backward. The muscles of the trunk retain 
contractility five or six hours, and the abdominal muscles, which act 



44-8 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 



[CHAP. XXI. 



backward and upward, retain their contractility longer than any 
others, — more than six hours after death. The same principles are 
illustrated in paralysis, the extensors suffering sooner and more 
severely than the flexors, and the abdominal muscles being the last 
to suffer. 

The superiority of the central regions over the peripheral, and con- 
sequently of ascending over descending currents, is shown by the 
statement of Althaus that a muscular contraction may be produced 
by a feebler current when the negative electrode is applied above 
than when the positive is above. The muscular contractility 
increases in such experiments, but does not increase under Faradism. 
For the same reason, less effect is produced by operating on the 
nerves of the lower limbs than when we include the lumbar region 
of the cord, and still greater effect occurs when one of the electrodes 
is carried up to the neck. Prof. Heidenhain has shown that in the 
muscles of a frog which had lost their excitability by fatigue or ill- 
usage a continuous current for half a minute, or more would restore 
them, and that the ascending or inverse current was more efficient or 
complete in effect than the descending or direct. 

The motor nerves in death, as shown by Bernard, lose their excita- 
bility from the periphery toward the centres, and when the nerves 
near a muscle have lost their excitability they are still excitable near 
the cord. When we operate on the muscles directly we require a 
stronger current than when operating through their nerves. 

In applying electrodes on the body for therapeutic treatment, 
there are important principles which have been overlooked, the 
neglect of which may cause a failure in the treatment. I have 
already endeavored to make it clearly intelligible, but it will bear 
further illustration, even if a repetition. 

The negative pole has been recommended in my writings as the 
stimulating pole for all organs, to produce the beneficial effects 
which are produced by the hand. But the negative pole is not a stimu- 
lus ; on the contrary, its influence is relaxing, tending to debility and 
congestion, or hemorrhage, while the positive is the strong current, 
overcoming congestion and hemorrhage. 

The beneficial effect of the negative pole consists largely in 
attracting the positive current to the spot where it is applied, thus 
producing a concentration of energy. This is clue to the positive 
current, though it may be assisted by the gentle relaxation produced 
by the negative condition. 

In the ordinary administration of the current under equal condi- 
tions, the negative and positive meet midway between the electrodes, 
one half of the channel in the body being in the positive and the 



CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 449 

other half in the negative condition. This is not desirable, for 
unless the positive current be very, strong there will not be enough 
of the positive influence in the negative half of the circuit to 
produce the amount of stimulation that is desirable, although the 
effect may be generally good. 

If the positive current be hindered by a rheostat or by dryness of 
the skin or any other cause, the neutral point will be near or at the 
positive electrode, and the negative influence will rule in the circuit. 
This will defeat our purpose of using the negative as a stimulant, 
and the stimulation will be chiefly at the positive electrode, reversing 
the result desired. Thus a current from Disease to Health, with the 
positive electrode partially shut off, would be depressing and debili- 
tating ; whereas, if the positive electrode be a good conductor (such 
as a broad metal surface) and the negative electrode be obstructed, 
the body will be occupied by the positive current on its way to the 
negative position on the shoulders, at which it concentrates, produc- 
ing a strong stimulation of that spot. 

Hence, if we propose to use the negative electrode as a stimulant, 
it must not, as already stated, have too free access to the person, and 
the positive must have much freer access. 

If I put a metallic electrode on the shoulder (the skin moist) for 
the negative pole and a slightly moist sponge at the hypochondria 
for the positive pole, which seriously obstructs the current, the 
entire tract in the body may be occupied by the negative condition, 
which meets the positive in the sponge or at the margin of the 
trunk near it, or perhaps in the liver ; and the effect, if continued^ 
will not be tonic or healthful ; whereas, if we place the metallic elec- 
trode below, with a positive current, and the sponge on the shoulder, 
the effect will be tonic and healthful, bringing out the true character 
of the shoulder, by its reception of the positive current from below. 

Hence we deduce the important rule of therapeutic treatment, 
that the negative electrode when used as a stimulant must always 
have its access to the body obstructed 'in comparison with the access of 
the positive. This may be effected by the dryness of the skin or by 
a certain thickness of the conducting sponge or cloth, or in a more 
exact method by using a water rheostat in which a certain length of 
the current shall pass through water, or by some other form of 
rheostat. These precautions are not so necessary with the secondary 
current as with the primary and galvanic, for it has not a thoroughly 
negative condition. 

In using static electricity, the same principle is carried out by 
treating the patient with a negative electrode held near the person 
or upon the clothing, the body being filled with the positive current. 



450 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

In treating with static electricity, the body may be filled with 
either condition from one pole, the other pole being allowed to 
communicate with the earth ; but in using the dynamic or chemical 
electricity, the saturating of the body with either kind of electricity 
depends on the partial exclusion of the other, while the current is 
uninterrupted. 

The partial exclusion of one current is effected by giving it a 
longer or more difficult route. This, I believe, is often done without 
reflecting on the consequences, as when the operator administers the 
positive current through himself. (He cannot afford to hold the 
negative electrode, as it would bring to him the influence of the 
patient.) 

If he treats with the right hand, holding the positive electrode in 
the left, he gives the positive current the obstruction of fully five 
feet of his own person, thus placing the patient under the influence 
of the negative condition entirely, if the negative electrode has free 
access, and even introducing the negative condition into his own arm. 
This is a serious and very injurious mistake for the patient. To 
operate in that way it would be necessary to place the negative 
current under still greater restriction than the positive, by an 
obstruction or rheostat, making greater resistance than his arms and 
body, and to increase the strength of the current to overcome the 
great resistance. The current strength should always be adjusted to 
the amount of resistance or the distance traversed. 

If the operator wishes to have the beneficial effect of his hand as 
an electrode, he can effect this by simply tying a good electrode on 
the wrist of the hand with which he treats the patient, the obstruc- 
tive influence of which may easily be counterbalanced on the nega- 
tive side. A bracelet or a rubber band with a piece of metal on its 
inside will answer for this purpose. 

In passing the positive current through a medicinal substance for 
the benefit of the patient, the same principle must be borne in mind, 
and an amply sufficient obstruction placed at the negative electrode 
to insure the positive current freer access. 

The possibility of using the dynamic or chemical electricity in the 
same manner as the static, by accumulating in the patient the influence 
of either pole, omitting the other, has not, so far as I am aware, been 
recognized by the profession.* It is clear, however, from what has 

* In a German publication of 1872, the unipolar method was presented, and I find 
the following statement in Lincoln's Electro-Therapeutics. " Clemens of Frankfort 
has a method called the ' unipolar, ' which he considers possesses a power to quiet 
spasm and allay pain, and in general to exert a soothing influence upon the system, 
which is desirable in the initial stages of diseases of the spinal cord. His patient's 
feet are placed on a thin bit of wood, resting on the metal plate already described, 
the plate being in connection with the negative pole of a powerful Faradic apparatus. 



CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 45 T 

already been stated, that the patient may easily be saturated with the 
influence of either pole, by partially excluding the other. It is also 
true that while the patient is under the influence of one pole exclu- 
sively, the other may be turned loose, like the pole of a static machine, 
to communicate with the earth, making what is called an earth circuit, 
instead of returning direct by wire to opposite pole. In this we have 
an apparent analogy to the unipolar use of the static, but the dynamic 
electricity depends for its action upon a definite channel, of which the 
earth maybe a portion, of any extent, but without a completion of the 
circuit there is no current or electric effect. There must be one wire 
going out with the current reaching the moist earth, and another return- 
ing from the earth, making the marvellous connection through a vast 
extent of earth. But the static has so great a diffusive power that it 
sustains the current of two polarities without any apparently satisfac- 
tory connection. It is customary to connect one pole with the earth, 
or with the iron pipes of the house, but the accumulation of the pos- 
itive will not be prevented if the negative wire has a very imperfect 
route for the circuit. 

THE NATURE OF POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE IN ELECTRICITY 

As relates to human life has not yet been explained, but I think I 
have found the explanation. 

As positive electricity causes the contraction of muscles and the 
contraction of vaso-motor nerves, while it diminishes nervous sensibil- 
ity, it is clear that its influence corresponds to that of the occipital half 
of the brain, and rather below than above the middle. The negative 
condition, which softens and relaxes, increasing nervous sensibility, 
corresponds in its influence with the anterior half of the brain, and 
especially the anterior superior region, in the neighborhood of the 
coronal suture and temporal arch. It is thus felt by sensitives. 

Hence it is by the positive current that we invigorate life in all 
parts of the constitution, without invigorating the more delicate func- 
tions of the nervous system, which are promoted by the negative. 

The combination of the two makes nearly a complete development 
of function, and to produce this complete development we should com- 
bine them in the proportions required by the condition of each organ, 
by admitting one with greater or less facility than the other. 

As the positive current is the great energizing power, like the oc- 
cipital brain and the posterior half of the body, it must be our chief 

while the positive is applied to the spine in the neck. He says that the whole body 
thus becomes charged with electricity of high tension." This statement, which the 
author tries to discredit, is a very rational one. The negative influence is largely 
excluded, and the spinal column placed under the influence of a strong positive de- 
scending current, which if continued would be a powerful sedative, appropriate, how- 
ever, only when spinal inflammation was present or threatened. 



452 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXI. 

reliance, and I have endeavored to show that the negative pole may 
be used upon posterior surfaces so as to attract to them the positive 
condition. 

I have also shown that the negative condition cannot be rejected, 
as it increases the nervous sensibility and the afflux of blood, soften- 
ing and opening the tissues, in which the circulation has been deficient. 

Of course, the positive condition is the antagonist of inflammation, 
in which the bloodvessels and tissues are relaxed; and also in fever, 
in which a similar relaxation exists, and a septic tendency, which the 
positive or acid condition counteracts, being not only antiseptic but 
destructive to morbid germs. 

The negative or alkaline condition should not predominate in fever, 
in which the tendency to dissolution and decomposition is already too 
active, which the alkaline condition promotes. Fever demands the 
antiseptic energy of the positive condition, but it demands still more 
the antiseptic, cooling and soothing influence of magnetism, which is 
so similar to that of the human nervaura. Hence the positive and 
magnetized current is its proper treatment. 

The negative condition is a grateful influence to check the effects 
of over-exertion and excitement, and hence is most agreeable to many. 
It tends also to promote secretion, as well as circulation, and thus to 
remove morbid deposits and promote absorption, revitalizing torpid 
and obstructed organs. Hence it is very important in defectivi 
development, atrophy, and paralysis. It is for this reason that, in 
cases of advanced paralysis, the galvanic current has been found so 
useful and the Faradicso ineffectual, for the latter has not the solvent 
and alterative power, and the capacity for reviving circulation and 
sensibility which belongs to the negative condition. These virtues 
have been attributed to the galvanic, in opposition to the Faradic cur- 
rent, but they belong to its negative portion, and if the patient were 
confined to the positive galvanic, it would not be found so widely 
different from the Faradic in effects. The chemical influence of the 
Faradic is neutralized by the fact that each pole becomes alternately 
positive with inconceivable rapidity. 

In treating thus with the negative to revive impaired organs, its 
operation must of course be judiciously limited, as a prolonged action 
would be injurious ; and as the organ recovers, the negative influence 
should be more and more obstructed. When circulation and nervous 
influence are restored, the alternate current of the commutator and 
the Faradic current become appropriate, and in using the Faradic 
current a frequent reversal is desirable, that the spinal column and the 
dependent organs may be treated equally. 

Although the negative condition is of little use in advanced fever, it 



CHAP. XXI.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 453 

is not so inappropriate in inflammation. Inflammation is counteracted 
by secretion which the negative state promotes, and by alkaline condi- 
tions which dissolve or suppress the fibrin of the blood, which is 
characteristic of inflammation. The negative influence corresponds, 
to the antiphlogistic solvent and sorbefacient influence of the alkalies, 
an influence which in excess may result in dissolution of the blood, 
hemorrhages and congestions, but which in judicious, moderate use 
checks inflammation and promotes the removal of all morbid growths 
and deposits. Thus alkalies (especially carbonate of ammonia) are 
very valuable in tuberculous consumption as sorbefacients, although 
their excessive use would be destructive. When combined with a 
tonic element, as in the muriate of soda and muriate of ammonia, they 
are very valuable preventives and curatives for the tuberculous consti- 
tution, the value of which has not been properly appreciated, though 
established by experience. In like manner the negative condition, 
properly limited and sustained by the positive, is of great value, and 
this combination is happily illustrated by the two muriates. 

The foregoing remarks do not apply to static electricity, for the 
static positive is not like the dynamic or chemical positive — it is not 
an occipital influence but an all-round brain power, promoting all the 
phenomena of active life in a harmonious manner, without the seda- 
tive, relaxing influence of the dynamic negative. It is the natural 
stimulus of animal and vegetative life supplied by the sun — an abso- 
lute necessity, the deficiency of which characterizes great epidemics. 

But in promoting active life it does not complete. the functions of 
life, which include the restoration that is accomplished chiefly in re- 
pose. We need another influence for this purpose, and that influence 
I have found in magnetism. But magnetism is not an aggressive, 
locomotive energy. It is a static condition, resting in the iron, and 
having little influence on the human constitution unless its nervous 
sensibilities are highly developed ; hence rejected by the medical pro- 
fession, which recognizes only gross powers and substances, though 
used among those who cultivate animal magnetism, and the makers of 
magnetic garments, which affect the sensitive. 

To make magnetism an important therapeutic agent, it must be 
carried into the human body by an electric current. And as the pos- 
sibility of carrying potencies by means of electricity is not yet known 
in medical schools, it is probable that it will be very positively denied, 
as there are many who feel that the title of professor or even doctor 
authorizes them to deny positively the existence of any very remarkable 
fact in science with which they are not acquainted. It is to be hoped, 
however, that in the progress of evolution the human brain will be 
sufficiently developed to suppress dogmatic education and dogmatic 



454 



ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 



[chap. 



XXI 



institutions, and to realize the incalculable magnitude of the unknown 
truths which are yet to be learned, and which it would be puerile 
folly to deny or ignore. The reader will pardon my frequent reference 
to these obstructions, for they are a mighty barrier to human prog- 
ress, and discouragement to original thought and investigation. 

Natural Influences. — In addition to these artificial agencies, 
we have a similar influx from Nature. The sun is a continual source 
of the varied potencies of electricity, light, color and warmth, while 
the earth is a vast magazine of magnetism destined to play an im- 
portant part hereafter in therapeutics, of which I may give an exposi- 
tion hereafter. These magnetic currents may be seized as they 
travel round the earth by tapping them with copper wires leading to 
our patient. My time is too thoroughly engrossed with other duties 
at present for the elaboration of the doctrines of terrestrial mag- 
netism and other applications of electricity which are possible and 
which I now have in view. 



CHAPTER XXII. 

REVIEW OF THE CURRENT DOCTRINES OF 
ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The galvanic current, the Faradic and their phenomena — their taste — their 
action on muscles. Negative and positive currents. Merits of galvanism, Faradism, 
and static electricity. Their reception by the profession. Electricity as a test of 
death. Heat developed by the current. Sensations from currents. Value of the 
Humboldt battery. Chemical effects and prolonged influences. Use of the two- 
plate battery. Action of galvanism on motor nerves and production of increased 
strength. Effects of direct, inverse and alternating currents. Character of the Fara- 
dic or induced current in comparison with the galvanic. Experiment on vibrating 
cilia. Refreshing and strengthening effects of galvanism. Exhaustive effects of 
Faradism. Anodyne effects of galvanism, and cases requiring Faradism — how its 
effects are produced. Cure of locomotor ataxy and neuralgia by galvanism — its 
catalytic effects. Cutaneous Faradization. Cure of contractions. Treatment of 
antagonistic muscles. Harsh effects of Faradism. Remarkable physiological errors 
of Prof. Claude Bernard. Antagonism of ihe sensitive and muscular systems. 
Relation of the nervous system to growth. Danger of Faradization on the front of 
the neck Cures by galvanism when Faradism had failed. Effect of the interruptions. 
Comparison continued. Direct action on the muscles. Penetrative power of cur- 
rents. Stimulant action of Faradism. Medication by electric currents. Removal 
of poisons by electricity. Injurious effects of the common batteries. Advantage of 
the muriate of ammonia. Action of galvanism on the ganglionic nerves. Its anti- 
spasmodic influence. Distinction of voluntary and involuntary strucures. Galvanic 
current down the bowels for constipation. Failure of Faradism. Differences of 
electrodes. Interruptions. Delicate currents. Practical value of the primary cur- 
rent, intermediate between the galvanic and Faradic. 



In the use of electricity the galvanic or continuous current 
develops two different conditions, the positive pole introducing an 
element which possesses a certain amount of energizing power, but 
which by passing in a current tends to create a similar current in the 
nerves and blood, so as to disperse excitement and congestion from 
the place where it enters, and to concentrate an excitement and 
hypersemia to the negative pole. 

While the current is passing there is at first a gentle stimulus, 
acting on the vaso-motor nerves, and propelling the blood and nervous 
energy, producing at length a diminution of excitement, tending to 
insensibility in its course, and a diminution of plethora in the blood- 
vessels, very beneficial in inflammation, while there is a corresponding 
increase near the negative pole in sensibility and vascular plethora, 
the space between the two poles being usually equally divided 
between the positive and negative conditions on each side of the 



45^ CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

neutral point or space. In the positive region an acid condition is 
developed, oxygen appears if water is decomposed, and the positive 
electrode may become oxidated, while in the negative region an 
alkaline condition appears and hydrogen is developed. Alkaline 
fluids favor solution and decomposition as well as sensibility. The 
leg of a frog is more sensitive after being dipped in an alkaline 
liquid. The electric organs of the living torpedo, being the source of 
positive currents, have been found in an acid condition. 

The Faradic or induction currents, being a rapid alternation, 
develop instantaneous positive and negative conditions at each pole, 
so that both oxygen and hydrogen are evolved, but as they are in a 
nascent state, together, they combine and this effect disappears. 
This alternate action, however, produces an effect on platinum plates, 
which show a black powder of finely divided platinum in conse- 
quence. 

The Faradic current has not the suppressing or the developing 
power of the galvanic, but simply gives us the stimulating power of 
electricity, which may be so great as to be painful, and which at 
length exhausts the excitability and paralyzes without producing the 
alterative, sedative and developing influences of the galvanic current 
and its chemical action. 

As this chemical action is so strong as to decompose water and 
other compounds, there is no animal tissue that can long withstand 
its influence. The sreater the strength of the current and the softer 
or more vascular the tissues, the greater is the effect, and it is more 
efficient in highly-organized, warm-blooded animals. The negative 
pole produces this decomposing effect, much like the action of 
caustic potash. But unless the current be very powerful or pro- 
longed, there is no scar left, and the parts return to their natural 
condition. 

The action upon the blood, whether in or out of the body, is to 
form a small, hard, dark clot at the positive pole from the action of 
acid, and a bulky, soft, red clot at the negative. Hence electric 
currents have been used for the relief of aneurisms by forming a 
clot in the distended artery — needles being inserted as electrodes. 

The positive pole is adapted to the transmission of soluble 
materials into the constitution, and it has been shown that metallic 
substances in the body may be carried out at the negative pole. 

Reuss discovered that liquids pass through porous diaphragms in 
the direction of the positive current. Where small particles have 
been observed in tubes, it was seen that a weak galvanic current 
carried the particles in the centre toward the negative end, the 
particles at the side being disposed at the same time to move back 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 457 

toward the positive, but that, as the intensity of the current increased, 
it by degrees carried all the particles to the negative pole. 

When we apply zinc and silver plates to the tongue, or any other 
metals distinctly positive and negative, there is an acid taste at the 
zinc and a weak alkaline taste at the silver, with a slight electric 
current. Such applications sometimes relieve toothache. 

Althaus speaks of sensitive patients recognizing a metallic taste 
from the galvanic current applied to various parts of the body, but 
he was not acquainted with the fact that sensitives can taste metals 
in the hands or on any part of the body, independent of electricity. 
The experience of Bishop Polk, when I met him in 1841, who tasted 
brass whenever he touched it, led me into the experiments which 
developed Psychometry. The strong metallic taste from electric 
treatment of which patients often complain is the effect of the 
metals through which the current has passed and is a serious objec- 
tion to the common apparatus. 

The acid taste of electricity is independent of any really acid 
condition, and is perceived even if the tongue and the conductor are 
covered by an alkaline fluid. It is perceived from frictional as well 
as galvanic electricity. Some one has compared the acid taste of 
frictional electricity to vinegar, and that of galvanism to dilute 
sulphuric acid. In the middle, where two conditions meet, the taste 
is metallic, — due to metals. 

The muscular system is very sensitive to galvanism applied either 
directly to the muscles or to their nerves, but a stronger current is 
required for acting on the muscles. Powerful currents, whether 
galvanic or Faradic, produce intense convulsive action and pain, and 
one who has hold of the conductors is sometimes for this reason 
entirely unable to let go. 

The action of galvanism upon the muscular system through the 
motor nerves is not caused by their conducting galvanism to the 
muscles, but by the excitation of the nerve itself by a current pass- 
ing along the nerve. Tying the nerve will not prevent the passage 
of electricity, but prevents the muscular contraction if it be tied 
below the electrodes. So does anything that benumbs the nerve 
between the galvanized point and the muscle, such as either chloro- 
form or poisons. A feeble current may maintain muscular contrac- 
tion, but the galvanic current is not a constant stimulus in proportion 
to its intensity to maintain the contractions of the muscles — the 
nerves become exhausted and a variation is required to make the 
current effective, as in changing the flow or opening or closing the 
circuit, as is rapidly done in the primary current. Hence the induc- 
tion currents of Faradic electricity are the most efficient agent for 



45$ CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

the muscles, and their rapid alternation maintains a continuous con- 
traction which may become painful. The vibrator may be arranged 
for slower interruptions, which are often preferable. 

The relation of electricity to muscular contraction is such that 
with very moderate continuous (galvanic) currents, appropriate for 
therapeutic use, the muscular contraction usually occurs only on clos- 
ing the direct circuit, and not in opening or breaking it. If this 
moderate current be inverse it accumulates excitability in the nerve, 
and hence less galvanic power is necessary in some instances to 
move a muscle by the inverse than by the direct current. The 
inverse current does not cause contraction by its passage, for it 
carries excitability up the nerve, but it occurs on the cessation, by 
the reaction from the excited portion of the nerve and spinal cord. 
This is not invariable, however, as in experiments on the legs of 
frogs, connected with the body only by the nerves, the direct current 
produces convulsive action and the inverse current produces no 
motion whatever, but a croak indicating pain. The nerve in this case 
is not in a normal condition. This local increase of excitability does 
not appear with induction currents, as they act in an alternating 
manner. 

As it appears to be the general law that more excitement accumu- 
lates at the negative than at the positive pole, the negative must 
therefore be applied to any region which we wish to preponderate, 
as we apply the positive to any region which needs to be diminished 
in action or accumulation. The patient recognizes a much more 
distinct sensation at the negative pole, and long continued or too 
strong a current will paralyze that portion of the nerve subjected to 
the negative pole, by chemical action. 

The direct current would soon exhaust the central excitability and 
cease to manifest any effect in the muscles, were it not that the 
muscles possess an intrinsic property of contractility independent 
of the nerves, upon which electricity acts. When the current is 
applied to the nerve the muscle acts in obedience to nervous influ- 
ence, but when applied directly to the muscular substance the con- 
traction occurs only where the current passes, or where it affects the 
nervous filaments. All electric action exhausts the nerves in time — 
a mild current as effectually as a stronger one, if continued long 
enough. 

Galvanization and Faradization have been placed in rivalry by 
partisans. Duchenne in France insisted on Faradization as the only 
valuable treatment, and Remak in Germany contended as exclusively 
for galvanization, which he ably illustrated. 

Experience shows the greater therapeutic value of mild galvanic 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 459 

currents of very moderate strength. Dr. Bird after eight years of 
extensive experience said, " I am fully convinced that a feeble current 
if kept up for a long time in certain forms of paralysis (care being 
taken that the positive fluid traverse the limb in the direction of the 
ramifications of the nerves) would prove the most important mode of 
applying this remedy with success." 

Althaus says that Faradization " has little or no therapeutic influ- 
ence in diseases of the nervous centres." Beard and Rockwell say, 
"for the average constitution and with the exceptions that come from 
certain idiosyncracies, and certain diseases, such as anaesthesia, the 
best results of electrical treatment are obtained by mild currents. 
The temptation to disregard this rule and use painful currents is 
even for the experienced electro-therapeutist very great and some- 
times irresistible. The dogma ' no smart, no cure/ which has 
wrought so much misery in the world, still lingers, even among the 
intelligent." 

Static or frictional electricity when passed through the human 
body shows similar effects to other currents. There is a paleness 
produced at the entrance of the positive current, followed by the 
redness and warmth resulting from reaction, and the chief effects 
are seen at the negative pole, where the sparks are drawn from the 
body. 

The rational practice, according to Sarcognomy, would consist 
chiefly in drawing sparks from the back, especially along the spine 
and on the shoulders. 

Frictional or static electricity has been too much neglected for the 
use of the Faradic form. Dr. Bird thinks the shocks from the 
Leyden jar just as valuable as Faradization. In amenorrhoea he 
passes the currents between the poles placed at the lumbo-sacral 
junction and just above the pubes — or passes electric shocks. He 
found the shocks very efficient in restoring menstruation when it was 
not due to the exhaustion of anaemia. 

Dr. Bird found static electricity very efficient in rousing the action 
of the skin, and even exciting diaphoresis, when the patient sits on 
the insulating stool, and is confident he has produced cholagogic 
effects by electric shocks through the liver. " I do not think I have 
ever known it to fail to excite menstruation where the uterus was 
capable of performing the function," but he is not positive as to 
any such effects on the kidneys. Sparks drawn from rheumatic 
joints with recent effusion, until the skin is reddened or papulated, 
generally effect a cure and absorption of the effusion. The same 
treatment by sparks from the throat will frequently effect a rapid 
cure of inflammation of the tonsils. Neuralgic rheumatic pains and 



460 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

pains in the side in hysterical or chlorotic females are successfully 
treated by drawing sparks from the affected locality. It has been 
found useful in muscular tremors, in facial spasm, facial paralysis, 
and hysterical aphonia and hyperesthesia. 

Frictional electricity has the additional merit of being a copious 
source of ozone, when the machine is operating, by which the air is 
purified. 

The tendency of static electricity is to operate chiefly on the 
surface, increasing the sensibility of the skin and the tendency to 
perspiration; hence it is important in using it to avoid exposure to 
cold after a treatment of any part, when the liability to catching cold 
is greatly increased. 

The medical use of electricity excited great interest in the middle 
of the last century, when static electricity alone was known. Quite 
a number of physicians advocated it and reported their success in 
curing many diseases. The commission of the Royal Medical 
Society in France even reported that it was generally successful in 
the cure of paralysis. Nevertheless it fell out of fashion, probably 
from universal skepticism, which characterizes the profession, and the 
lack of wisdom in its application. It is difficult to believe there was 
any reason for its general neglect and rejection, when its ability so 
strongly impressed the honest and practical mind of John Wesley, 
the founder of Methodism, that in 1759 he published a small treatise 
entitled, "The Desideratum; or Electricity Made Plain and Useful, 
by a Lover of Mankind and of Common Sense." Wesley's list of 
diseases in which frictional electricity was useful was as follows : 

"Agues; St. Anthony's fire; blindness, even from gutta serena; 
blood extravasated ; bronchocele ; chlorosis ; coldness in the feet ; 
consumption ; contraction of the limbs ; cramps ; deafness ; dropsy ; 
epilepsy; feet violently disordered ; felons ; fistula lachrymalis ; gout ; 
gravel; headache; hysterics; inflammations; king's evil; knots in 
the flesh ; lameness ; leprosy ; mortification ; pain in the back, in the 
stomach ; palpitations of the heart ; palsy ; pleurisy ; rheumatism ; 
ringworms; sciatica; shingles; sprain; sore feet; swellings of ail 
kinds ; throat sore ; toe hurt ; toothache ; wen." 

But it certainly did fall under the general scorn of the profession, 
as many other valuable discoveries have done, and those who toward 
the middle of the present century attempted to use it in their 
practice had to encounter this contemptuous opposition, as has been 
well described by Dr. Beard. Its revival in France was ascribed by 
Duchenne to Sarlandiere's introduction of electro-puncture in 1825, 
which as a method of practice is of less value than the static electricity 
which preceded it. Such is medical wisdom ! It is certainly inferior 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 461 

to the application of moist electrodes on the surface except in severe 
neuralgia, and is of little other use except in treating tumors and 
aneurisms. As late as 1847, Ranking's Abstract said of the thera- 
peutic use of galvanism: "The subject is manifestly in its infancy, it 
has met with comparatively little favor either in this country or in 
France or Germany. . . To the Italians we are mainly indebted 
for the more recent experiments." 

Muscular contractility ceases with death, beginning to decline as 
the heart ceases to beat, and finally disappearing entirely, always in 
less than three hours, sometimes in half an hour, so that Faradiza- 
tion of the muscles is a reliable test for death, and might prevent 
interment in cases of trance, or relieve all doubt in cases of uncer- 
tainty. If muscular contractility is entirely gone, death is certain. 
The experiments of Onimus on the bodies of executed criminals 
show that the muscles may respond to galvanism after Faradic con- 
tractility has been lost. 

Muscles put into action by Faradic currents have a sensible 
increase of heat. In one case an increase of over seven degrees was 
reported by Althaus. This may be owing to the same consumption 
of oxygen and destruction of tissue which takes place in ordinary 
voluntary action, or it may be also the effect of the resistance of 
imperfect conductors, which is heating. Frogs' muscles when Fara- 
clized consume more than twice as much oxygen as when not sub- 
jected to electricity. In electric practice general Faradization is 
very warming, and the action of electricity on the skin also elevates 
the temperature. 

In healthy structures, rather more heat is produced by the direct 
than by the inverse current. This evolution of heat is caused by both 
the electric currents and the nervous action, and is not mechanically 
caused by the friction or pressure or condensation in the muscle 
contracting. The heat developed is as great or greater when the 
muscle does not act. It is due to the stimulation of the nerves 
which control calorification. 

Faradizing the spinal cord in dogs so vigorously as to produce 
tetanic contractions of the muscles, produces a very high tempera- 
ture in the contracting muscles, and Leyden reports so great an 
increase in this way that the temperature of the blood was raised 
nearly nine degrees Fahrenheit. A strong current as from fifty to one 
hundred cells produces great heat of the skin when applied, and a 
burning sensation in the flesh, which is intolerable. There is a 
muscular shock at the moment of contact, and a much slighter effect 
as the galvanic current ceases. TL.ese strong currents produce a 
feeling of exhaustion and fatigue in the limbs through which they pass. 



462 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

The galvanic current produces stimulation which varies from a 
gentle, pleasant warmth to a severe, burning pain, especially when dry 
electrodes are used. The moderate, continuous current gradually 
diminishes the sensibility of nerves, and is therefore very beneficial 
in hyperaesthesia. 

The Faradic current may cause a slight pricking sensation or may 
be increased in effect to severe pain. The effect is increased by the 
velocity of the intermittence of the shocks. A moderate, rapidly 
interrupted Faradic current will usually produce in twenty minutes 
or less a decided benumbing effect. 

In applying zinc and silver plates (connected together) to the skin, 
it has been found that a negative or alkaline condition is produced 
under the silver plate, and soda is attracted to it, while at the zinc 
plate an acid condition arises, chlorine is attracted, chloride of zinc 
formed, and an escharotic action produced on the skin These results 
were first observed by Humboldt. The reapplication of the plates 
renewed the blister at the zinc plate, and the influence of the silver 
plate was uniformly healing. The subject was more fully illustrated 
by Drs. Golding Bird and Spencer Wells, showing the chemical 
action concerned, and the value of the galvanic current in cases of 
ulceration. 

When metallic conductors have a prolonged application to the skin, 
a small blister containing alkaline serum appears under the negative 
pole, with an inflammatory areola round it. At the positive pole we 
find a papula containing acid serum. 

The effect of conductors is felt in the skin more decidedly if it be 
lightly touched. When more firmly pressed the electricity passes 
into the deeper structures. Faradism acts like other causes of 
inflammation, in producing first a constriction of the bloodvessels of 
the skin through their vaso-motor ganglionic nerves, followed by 
expansion from the exhaustion of the contractile power; erythema- 
tous redness and wheals may be produced, and there is a decided 
increase of heat. 

The action of the currents between two plates throws much light 
on the therapeutic uses of electricity. Dr. Babington placed two 
slices of muscular flesh between plates of copper and zinc, which 
were bound together with wire. The weather was warm and another 
piece placed between glass plates underwent putrefaction while the 
piece between the metallic plates was preserved. In the course of 
a few days the decomposition of the salt in the flesh (chloride of 
sodium) produced a remarkable result. The soda went toward the 
copper plate and the chlorine or hydrochloric acid toward the zinc 
plate. The part next the zinc plate was completely hardened, as if 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 463 

it had been dried, and the part next the copper was almost dissolved 
by the alkaline action, and covered with a transparent, jelly-like 
substance. Such is the action of these substances in the body ; the 
chlorine or hydrochloric acid is a consolidating, antiseptic tonic and 
the alkalies are the solvent elements for promoting dissolution and 
absorption. The chlorine is developed in the sphere of positive 
electricity and the alkali in the negative, for the resistance of the 
nerves and flesh is such that there is no equilibrium produced, the 
portion adjacent to the positive pole being positive and that adjacent 
to the negative being negative. 

The healing of the blisters under the silver plate induced Mr. 
Hinton to try the effect on obstinate sores and ulcers, on which he 
found it had a healing influence, although in one case it caused too 
much congestion of blood. 

Surgeon Spencer Wells had very interesting results from applying 
oval plates of silver and zinc, from two to four inches long, which 
were connected by a silver wire soldered to the back of each plate. 
The experience of this application in seventy to a hundred cases led 
to these conclusions. 

The plates may be applied to the naked surface of the skin with- 
out blistering, if the skin be moistened with an acid liquid. But 
even the ordinary moisture of perspiration will insure a moderate 
effect. The plate of zinc was always placed above the silver plate 
as to its location on the body, so that the current passed in the 
natural, centrifugal direction. If the zinc is placed on an excoriated 
surface it will produce an eschar in two days, and in about six days 
it will penetrate through the skin, producing an appearance resem- 
bling a slough produced by caustic potash. But this may be avoided 
by placing the zinc on a sound surface. If the sloughing should be 
produced by the zinc plate, and its application continued, it will 
develop a dark, soft, spongy surface discharging a fetid serum. The 
application of the silver plate, however, produces a more rapid and 
satisfactory change than the usual methods of surgery. Healthy 
granulations are produced and simple. water dressing completes the 
cure. The most tedious and intractable ulcers have been speedily 
healed under the silver plate. But after healthy granulations have 
been established the silver plate should be removed, otherwise the 
granulations may become exuberant and flabby, or even fungou .. 
showing an undue determination to the spot. The beneficial influ- 
ence depends upon the actual passage of the current. For when the 
current passes down from the zinc to the silver location, through the 
flesh, it does not act upon a portion of the ulcer below the silver, 
which may even degenerate while the upper portion is healing. But 



464 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

if the silver be applied on the lower portion of the ulcer, so as to 
bring the current through the whole of it, the whole is improved ; 
and any ulcers situated between the plates, in the line of the current, 
will be healed, but not those outside of the line of the current. 

This mild application of electricity by plates was found beneficial 
by Mr. Wells in several cases of paralysis, and he commends this 
method decidedly as preferable to the use of batteries. I entertain a 
high opinion of the value of galvanic plates, and for several years 
have mentioned and explained this matter to my students, but have 
not taken time to construct and bring into use the combination of 
two plates, constituting what has been called the Humboldt battery,- — 
the application of which, guided by Sarcognomy, I consider of great 
value. 

The extreme delicacy of the human constitution shows the impor- 
tance of delicate currents for therapeutic effects, which will not de- 
compose the blood or promote ulceration. The example of the frog- 
should teach us a lesson. Mr. Wilkinson estimated that the nerves 
of the frog were more than fifty thousand times as delicate in their 
sensibility as the most delicate electrometer. Two pieces of silver 
and zinc with a surface each less than the hundredth of an inch pro- 
duced violent convulsions in the prepared leg of a frog. This 
enabled Matteucci to construct the most delicate galvanoscope by 
placing in a glass tube the skinned hind leg of a frog with a piece of 
the sciatic nerve attached hanging out, which, when touched with a 
current of the most delicate nature, such as that between the inside 
and outside of a muscle, will throw the limb into convulsions. 
Even the Leyden jar, after it has been discharged and repeatedly 
touched to remove all electricity, is capable of exciting convulsions 
in the frog galvanoscope, and Dr. Baconio of Milan made a curious 
experiment in combining alternate slices of beet root and walnut 
wood, and conducting a current from this combination by a leaf of 
scurvy grass to the muscles of a frog, which became convulsed by the 
contact. 

The facts here presented enable us to appreciate the value of the 
negative pole as a healing agency acting by concentration of circula- 
tion and nerve power so as to increase the vital force of the part to 
which it is applied, yielding an aid less genial than that of the human 
hand, but still capable of being a valuable therapeutic help in its 
gentle application, though liable to producing chemical changes in 
the blood and tissues which might be very injurious if carried far. 
These decompositions in the animal body are not like decompositions 
of mineral substance, which cease the moment the current ceases to 
pass, but continue for some hours after the current has ceased. The 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 465 

albumen of eggs, the structures of the eye and muscular flesh, when 
subjected to electric currents, undergo decomposition, more rapidly in 
dead than in living structures ; which develops oxygen gas and acids 
at the positive pole, hydrogen gas and alkalies at the negative, — caus- 
ing a froth in the egg and a simmering in muscular substance which 
destroys its texture. The effects upon the tissues are due largely 
but not entirely to the acids and alkalies developed ; hence they may 
be counteracted to a considerable extent by introducing carbonate of 
soda or potassa at the positive pole and tartaric acid at the negative 
to combine with its alkalies. 

The escharotic action at the zinc plate is mainly due to the forma- 
tion of chloride of zinc, which is a powerful escharotic, and would not 
occur with a different electrode, though the surface might be blistered. 

The reader will bear in mind that when zinc and silver or zinc and 
copper plates are applied to the human body and connected by a wire, 
the current flows through the flesh from the zinc to the silver or 
copper as it does in the cells of the battery. Thus in the flesh the 
zinc acts as the positive pole of the current, but in the wire connect- 
ing them the current flows back from the silver to the zinc. Thus the 
silver or copper is the positive pole as regards the connecting wires, 
and in the battery the wire connected with the copper furnishes the 
positive and that attached to the zinc the negative. In all cases the 
metal that oxidizes most readily becomes the negative pole of the 
conducting wires and the other the positive, but when the oxidizing 
metal is applied on the body it sends a positive current through the 
flesh. 

To apply these principles to the treatment of disease I take two 
plates of steel (or iron) instead of zinc, the positive, and connect each 
by a coiled steel insulated wire to a negative plate of the same size 
composed of aluminum, silver, platinum or gold — thus making two. 
pairs of galvanic plates, one for the right and one for the left side — and 
fasten them on the surface at the proper localities, moistening the 
skin if it be dry where they are fastened. They are of course to be 
applied to antagonistic organs, as we reinforce the organ under the 
negative pole by influence of the positive upon its antagonist. Thus 
we may apply the steel plate upon Disease, Melancholy and Sensi. 
bility, with the aluminum on Health, Cheerfulness and Hardihood or 
Heroism. Every physician should have a supply of these plates, 
especially for sensitive constitutions, and I believe they may occupy 
a large sphere in electric practice. They will control a great many 
derangements of the female constitution, and maybe used in all cases 
where such a galvanic current is indicated. 

That the galvanic current is a stimulant to motor nerves is 



466 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

easily shown by the fact that a current applied to the motor nerves 
of an animal just killed will produce contraction of the associate mus- 
cles whether the current be ascending or descending (inverse or 
direct). But when the vital energy of the nerves has been suspended 
by applying ether between the muscle and the galvanized portion, 
or by the influence of woorara poisoning, no muscular contraction is 
produced. 

Currents are produced both by making and breaking the connection, 
or in other words by the electric change, when the current has a cer- 
tain intensity. But a strong current flowing continuously will also 
maintain muscular contraction, though not with the energy of an 
alternating or interrupted current. 

But as the current is a stimulus, its power must have a just propor- 
tion to the nervous excitability. An excessive strength in the current 
will soon exhaust the excitability or paralyze the nerve. Hence the 
reports of observers have a confused and contradictory appearance, 
from the different energies and different directions of the currents, 
which may be stimulant or exhaustive, and which also, if sufficiently 
strong, concentrate excitability in the direction to which the positive 
current passes, and either exhaust it in the opposite direction or pro- 
duce a slight increase altogether when the current is delicate. We 
cannot specify what degree of electric energy will stimulate and what 
will exhaust any more than we can tell how much rum will stimulate 
and how much will stupefy, as the result depends on the individual. 
A current down the arm will greatly invigorate its muscles, but its 
increase may paralyze them. In an experiment of Dr. Poore, the man 
who could only hold up his arm with a weight 6 minutes could hold it 
1 3-J- minutes with the aid of a galvanic current down the arm. With 
a current of a certain strength, difficult to specify, decided exhaustion 
is produced at the cathode or negative pole, so that this portion of 
the nerve will not respond, though the nerve may still be active below 
the part stimulated. It is supposed that this exhaustion is partly 
caused by the negative development of an alkaline condition, but it is 
certainly due to a relaxing influence from negative predominance. 

The motor nerves of an animal just dead are able to excite the mus- 
cles under the influence of moderate currents, either direct or inverse, 
both at their closing and opening. When the excitability has had time 
to diminish the direct current produces contractions only on closing 
and the inverse only on opening. Where excitability is further dimin- 
ished, the inverse current produces no effect — and the direct only on 
closing. 

This is explained by the fact that inverse currents drive the nervous 
force from the muscle toward the spine, which reacts when they 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 467 

cease, and the direct currents send it toward the muscle, and hence 
are most effective where the excitability is feeble. Inverse currents 
of sufficient energy send a stimulus toward the spine which makes it 
more excitable, and direct currents of a certain energy exhaust the 
spinal power. In man movements are produced on closing the circuit 
— and if the current be sufficiently increased, movements also occur 
on opening, and with a greater increase a constant or tetanic con- 
traction is produced. 

Beyond these general principles, the details of experiments do not 
teach us much, as they are more numerous than lucid, and it is not very 
interesting to study the conflicting reports of Nobili, Pfluger, Volta, 
Ritter, Fick, Rosenthal, Dubois-Reymond, Eckhard, Heidenhain, 
Eulenberg, Von Bezold, Cyon, Rcmak, Ziemssen, Brenner and 
others, in which we observe the effects of currents of various inten- 
sity and duration and of the reaction following in various degrees of 
vital energy and sensibility. Althaus recognizes the irregularity 
and departure from general rules in human subjects, both in healthy 
and nervous conditions. 

It is obvious that a current toward a muscle must tend to keep up 
its activity, and that an opposite current must have an opposite effect, 
unless it is carried to the spinal cord with sufficient force to stimulate 
it, which a feeble current would not. 

It is true, however, that a weak inverse current generally increases 
the excitability of the parts above it. A strong current toward a 
muscle increases its power and endurance, and may prevent fatigue 
or overcome it when it has arisen, for the current carries blood and 
nervous energy to the muscle, but when the muscle is completely 
under a prolonged negative influence it loses its power. 

A strong inverse current, which would excite the spinal energy if 
the negative pole were somewhat obstructed in its access, would not 
have this effect if the negative pole had better access than the posi- 
tive, so as to establish an extreme negative condition. 

These principles explain many of the reports. Matteucci relieved 
frogs whentetanized by strychnia, by an inverse current ; for the neg- 
ative pole had free access to the spine. The direct current increased 
the tetanus because it brought the positive to the spine and stimu- 
lated the muscles, yet it would not have been impossible to give relief 
by a downward current confined to the spine, which should exhaust it. 
M. Farini relieved a patient from tetanus by a current from the 
sacrum to the nape of the neck. 

Where the sensibility of the nerve has been exhausted by a direct 
or inverse current it is more sensitive to the opposite. Hence the 
alternate currents produced by the commutator are of great value. 



468 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII, 

Flowing between the spinal cord and muscles it sustains both, while 
the direct current, might, if prolonged, exhaust the spine, and the in- 
verse might throw it into a state of excitement running into tetanus. 

The induced current has far greater energy than the galvanic. 
An induction current from a single cell would be a much more dis- 
turbing element than a galvanic current from ten or fifteen. More- 
over, being a reciprocating current, its energy as a stimulant is derived 
mainly from its sudden changes. An electric current makes its chief 
exciting impression at the opening and closing of the circuit, by the 
suddenness of the change. The impression at the interruption of the 
current is weaker than at the beginning. Duchenne estimates the 
interruption of the current from 120 cells about equal in effect to the 
beginning of a current from 20. If the galvanic current is designed 
to produce much effect in muscular contraction it should be frequently 
interrupted. Hence the Faradic current acts as a very powerful stim- 
ulus, which may over-excite and exhaust, unless applied with a mod- 
eration that is not always observed, but it has very little chemical and 
alterative action. The sedative influence of a mild continuous gal- 
vanic current (says Onimus) differs from the stimulating influence of 
the Faradic as much as a warm bath differs from a cold douche. 

The Faradic current applied to bloodvessels causes a prompt con- 
traction, diminishing the supply of blood and accelerating the flow, 
just like any other violent stimulus — or rather it excites the contrac- 
tility of the vessels so as to accelerate the circulation, but soon over- 
excites the contractile tissue so as to reduce the calibre of the arteries, 
and by over-exciting so exhausts their vital energy as to leave the 
blood vessels in the same paralytic state of expansion which follows 
the section of their nerves which belong to the ganglionic system. 
In this it entirely resembles other violent stimulants, such as ammonia 
and sulphuric acid, which act in the same manner when applied 
directly to the bloodvessels or to their nerves. 

Certain experimenters who did not appreciate the excessive energy 
of Faraclism, reported that its effect was simply the contraction and 
closing of bloodvessels, but more cautious investigation has shown 
that it has some power of accelerating the circulation, like the galvanic 
current, when gradually or gently applied. 

Rationally we may presume that a Faradic current being analogous 
to momentary and rapidly alternating galvanic currents, its influence 
might be analyzed and understood by studying the action of the gal- 
vanic and the effect of interruptions. 

As the Faradic is a current of infinitesimal duration, often repeated, 
its effect must be the same as that of a galvanic current of similar 
interruptions, if the duration of the galvanic could be made as brief 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 469 

by a suitable apparatus ; but as it is a current of continuity, with a few 
interruptions or more as we direct, it must produce those effects 
which belong to continued impression of one kind, while the Faradic 
produces only the impression of the shocks. Yet machinery might 
be devised which would prolong the Faradic currents to the galvanic 
character, or shorten the galvanic current to the Faradic character, 
with more of shock than continuity. Yet even then the alternating 
character of the Faradic currents would deprive them of the chemical 
or electrolytic character which belongs to the galvanic, and it would 
require a nice calculation or adjustment to reduce their electro-motive 
force to the standard of the continuous current. (Since writing this 
I find that Dr. Neumann has taken exactly the same view, and made 
the experiments with suitable apparatus, which give the most perfect 
demonstration possible, for which he is entitled to the honor of solv- 
ing a neglected problem.) 

Galvanic currents may be made to imitate the Faradic by what is 
called a commutator or current reverser, of which several forms have 
been manufactured. With the galvanic battery and a commutator we 
may readily change from the continuous to the interrupted and the 
alternating. The alternating current is often desirable. The feature 
of reciprocity or alternation which distinguishes the Faradic current 
is not entirely absent from the simple galvanic, for the passage of the 
galvanic current and its interruption produce a reversed current in 
the patient, which can be demonstrated by taking a galvanic current 
through the hands and then applying the hands to a galvanometer. 

The flow of galvanic and primary currents through the human body 
is never confined to a straight line. They affect parts far out of the 
direct line, — farther as they are stronger, — and produce another effect 
but little understood, by the law of induction, by which every current 
passing through conductors tends to produce a parallel and opposite 
current in its immediate vicinity. 

In speaking of Faradic currents, for comparison we refer to the 
pure induction current of the second coil, for the current of the first 
coil or primary current is not a pure induction current, but a com- 
pound of galvanic, magnetic, and inductive influences — that is to say, 
it is a galvanic current, but is modified by its position in a coil, and 
by the reaction of the magnet. Hence it differs materially from the 
current of the second helix, which is a pure induction current, with 
the intensity and the perfect alternation of movement which we asso- 
ciate with the idea of Faradism, while the current of the first helix, 
with less intensity, from its shorter, coarser wire, has also no recip- 
rocity of effect, being a one-way current. The primary o-alvanic cur- 
rent, upon which all depends, would be scarcely felt at all by the 



47° CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

patient, — it is only the magnetic energy and the breaking which 
impresses him. There is also an induced current in the primary wire, 
called the extra current, produced by the action of the primary coils 
on each other, and flowing in the direction opposite the primary cur- 
rent, but what part this bears in the general result has not been 
clearly explained. 

The difference in the currents is partly due to the first helix being 
composed of shorter and thicker wire, which gives it a greater power 
of transmission, while the second helix, of much longer and finer wire, 
transmits less electricity with greater tension. The difference 
between the first and second helix currents is, according to Duchenne, 
as great as that between warm and boiling water. Yet writers often 
neglect to mark this difference, and speak of Faradization without 
mentioning the very important point, whether they are using the 
primary or secondary helix current, — the primary being mild and 
analogous to the galvanic, while the secondary is the harsh and over- 
powering current which requires so much caution. This current 
makes a strong impression on the skin, which can be carried to the 
production of acute pain, but produces no other disturbance than a 
slight erythema. The second helix current is very powerful in this 
respect, and is very efficient in neuralgic affections and cutaneous 
anaesthesia. It has also greater power of penetrating the muscles 
than the first. The action is superficial when dry electrodes are 
applied on a dry skin, — more penetrating when broad, moist elec- 
trodes are applied firmly to the surface. 

The character of galvanic currents and their relation to the Faradic 
have been well illustrated by Onimus and Legros. They have shown 
by numerous experiments that a moderate galvanic current in the 
centrifugal direction, that is, in the direction of the flow of the arterial 
blood and the nerve forces, uniformly accelerates the flow of blood, 
and increases the action of the bloodvessels, so as to cause greater 
fulness of blood and greater blood pressure in the parts which the 
arteries supply, but that the reverse or centripetal current, against 
the flow of blood and nerve power, diminishes the flow of blood and 
the blood pressure, though not as much as the centrifugal current 
increases it. A current from the neck of a dog to the portion of the 
brain exposed by trephining the cranium, caused such an increased 
flow to the brain as to make it project beyond the limit of the open- 
ing. 

The galvanic currents are both more gentle and more permanent 
in their effects. That they are also more congenial to life is shown 
by their effect on the ciliary motions. Onimus and Legros placed 
on a glass plate the vibratile epitheliums of the frog and subjected them 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 471 

to galvanic currents. The ciliary movements were notably increased 
by the galvanic currents. When they had become slow, they were 
revived when the current started. Induction currents, however gen- 
tle, checked the movements and soon abolished them. They were, 
however, gradually revived by the galvanic, after the cessation. Sim- 
ilar experiments were made on the ciliary bodies from mammalian 
animals. Spermatozoid bodies subjected to the same experiment 
manifested the same difference of effect from galvanic and Faradic 
currents, but not to the same extent. 

In attempting to check the ciliary movements by a continuous cur- 
rent in the opposite direction to their waving motion (which might 
be called relatively an ascending current), they found that, instead 
of checking, it accelerated the motions. 

Gentle galvanic currents have the characteristic of a healthful stim- 
ulus, in the fact that they promote normal processes and make an 
impression which does not exhaust vitality and cause an immediate 
collapse, but continues for a time after the application. The increased 
salivation caused by a galvanic current applied to the salivary glands 
continues for twenty-four to forty-eight hours. Mantegazza observed 
great increase of digestion in the stomachs of frogs under the in- 
fluence of galvanism, and a similar observation was made by Onimus 
and Legros in the stomachs of dogs, which they inspected through a 
fistula. These effects are developed at the negative pole of the gal- 
vanic current, which attracts the sanguineous and nervous flow, while 
the positive pole diminishes the afflux and vital activity. 

"The influence of electricity on organic bodies is prolonged more 
or less beyond the direct action. It is not the electricity that cures, 
but the modifications it produces. When the nerve cells are excited, 
they become a centre of activity. It is an error to believe that con- 
tinued currents act only during their application." 

The genial influence of galvanic currents on the muscular system 
enables one to do more work, and when already fatigued it diminishes 
or removes the fatigue. 

The value of galvanism for the muscles was well illustrated by Dr. 
Poore in his text book of electricity. He says: " There is no more 
important effect of the constant current than what may be called its 
refreshing effect. Heidenhain succeeded in restoring the excitability 
of the muscles of an exhausted frog, bypassing a strong galvanic cur- 
rent through them. This fact has long remained without any practi- 
cal application of it." 

"The first patient in whom the author observed the refreshing 
effects of the current was one who suffered very acutely from this 
feeling of fatigue, and always expressed great satisfaction during the 



4/2 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

employment o«f the current, and frequently used the words ' comfort- 
able 1 and 'pleasant' to express his sensations. He also often said 
'that seems to give me strength, — to give me a sense of power in the 
arm.' The number of elements employed was sufficient to cause an 
appreciable but not painful sensation to the patient. This seemed to 
help the supinators over their difficulty, and the patient continued to 
pronate and supinate his hand, without the least trouble, saying at 
the time that 'he could do it much easier when the current: passed,' 
and also that it 'seemed to <rive him strength.' 

" The author found another (also suffering from winter's cramp) 
who said precisely the same thing, that he could accomplish repeated 
muscular acts with far greater ease during the passage of a current, 
and that after the employment of the current he had a feeling of 
strength and power in the arm. He was a medical man himself 
accustomed to the employment of electricity." 

To test this matter by experiment he asked a patient to hold a 
weight out horizontally with his left arm. In four minutes he had to 
complain on account of the fatigue and pain ; then, after applying 
the positive rheophore in the axilla and the negative on the painful 
muscles, he promptly said : "All the fatigue is gone; I feel just as 
though some one had given my hand a support." Subsequently the 
same patient supported a weight on his left hand, but could hold it 
only six minutes. The next day the arm was galvanized, and he was 
asked to repeat the experiment. While it was in progress, a galvanic 
current was occasionally passed down through the fatigued muscles, 
and he sustained the same weight thirteen minutes and a half. 

" Similar experiments to these (says Dr. P.) have been tried on 
several of the author's friends, and they all tend to show that the en- 
durance of voluntary muscular action is enormously increased by the 
passage of a continuous current, and that the feeling of fatigue both 
during and after the prolonged effort is mitigated or entirely obviated. 
Experiments have also been made, and with results which tend to 
show that the force as well as the endurance of voluntary muscular 
action is increased by employing a galvanic current." His experi- 
ments on himself in squeezing a dynamometer with the hand, with 
and without galvanism, showed an aggregate of 667 pounds of force 
without galvanism and 908 pounds with it. 

These effects are explained by the increased afflux of blood and 
nerve force caused by the galvanic current. 

The action of Faradism on the muscles is that of an exhaustive 
stimulus. Dr. Poore says : "Select a small muscle, * * Faradize it, 
using a current of sufficient strength to cause a contraction which is 
too forcible to be overcome by the will, and it will be found that after 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 473 

three or four minutes the contraction becomes less and less strong 
as the irritability diminishes, and that the will is soon able to over- 
come the artificial contraction, while the same current applied to the 
corresponding muscle in the opposite hand causes a contraction 
against which the will is absolutely powerless. Ultimately the Fara- 
dized muscle will refuse to respond either to mental stimulation or to 
Faradism." 

" M. Vulpian found that when a strong Faradic current was applied 
to the heart of a dog, rhythmic contraction at once ceased ; violent 
tremor of the cardiac walls occurred for three or four minutes, 
followed by a slight trembling for the same space of time, and then 
all movement ceased. The muscular substance became pale. When 
all movement, even fibrillary, had ceased, in the ventricles, their walls 
seemed to have lost almost entirely their contractility. When touched 
again with the rheophores, there was not the slightest contraction, nor 
did stimulation by rhythmical impression by the hand reproduce their 
movement." This result was entirely independent of the pneumo- 
gastric nerve, and when that nerve was paralyzed by atropine it made 
no difference. It would be well for every practitioner to realize the 
influence of each current on himself before applying it to a patient. 

The great dispersive power of electric currents where they enter 
the body necessarily renders it possible for them to be used to the 
extreme interference with, and suspension of, all vital processes. 
The continuous current passed for a sufficient time through the limbs 
of an animal, or through the nerves, produces even paralysis, and its 
action upon sensitive nerves is quite benumbing. 

An electric current carries osmosis with it so effectively that when 
two masses of liquid are separated by a porous membrane, an electric 
current will carry the fluids from the compartment which receives 
the positive pole to that which receives the negative, which will thus 
be raised above the level of the other. 

The action of the positive pole being dispersive as to fluids and 
nervaura, is at the same time consolidating or contractile to the tissue, 
hardening the substance as if by the influence of chlorine. The 
negative pole, on the other hand, has a solvent influence on solids, 
promoting dissolution by alkaline action. Hence the advantage 
which I believe electro-therapeutists have not sufficiently observed, 
of alternating currents in opposite directions. The negative pole, 
assisting in the dissolution of morbid structures, and bringing into 
play the alkaline action which is nature's great agent for absorption, 
while the positive pole applied to the collected fluids disperses them. 
The galvanic action is so powerful, chemically, that in an experi- 
ment of Sir H. Davy with 150 pairs for five days, upon muscular 



474 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

fibres, all the alkaline elements were carried over to the negative pole 
and all the acids to the positive. 

When the object is simply to restore a healthy action and disperse 
morbid conditions, as in treating tumors, the dispersive energy of 
the positive pole is more efficient than the vitalizing energy of the 
negative. Onimus passed a galvanic current through two tumors 
that were equal in size and large as an egg ; the one to which the 
positive pole was applied made greater progress in healing than the 
other, but both were cured. The dispersive action of the positive 
pole is very valuable in counteracting inflammation and pain. Dr. 
Reliquet describes a case in which a very painful and irritated 
bladder, containing a large calculus, was relieved of pain and spasm 
by a galvanic current, the positive pole being in the bladder and the 
negative on the abdomen. Electro-therapeutists have recorded a 
great number of similar facts. 

As to overcoming pain, Dr. Poore says : " It would almost seem to 
be one of the most powerful anodynes which we possess, and its 
power in this respect is hardly as yet fully appreciated by the pro- 
fession. In the out-patient room we have been accustomed for some 
time past to try the effect of the continuous current upon pain of all 
kinds, whether depending on some obvious organic cause or not. In 
many cases we have found that the pain has been alleviated, and in a 
large proportion of these it has been absolutely cured. 

"When one is using electricity for the treatment of pain and other 
subjective symptoms it is often a good plan to begin with a mock 
application of it, and in this way see how much of our result is due 
to the patient's imagination and how much to electricity. 

"All three forms of electricity are employed for the relief of pain, 
but the most generally useful for such purposes is undoubtedly 
galvanism." 

The positive pole is most generally applicable to the relief of pain, 
but there are also conditions which are benefited by the application 
of the negative, when there is no hyperemia or active irritation. 

Dr. Anstie, who considered Faradization useless in neuralgia, said : 
"The constant current is a remedy for neuralgia unapproached in 
power by any other save only blistering and hypodermic morphia, and 
even the latter is surpassed by it in permanence of effect." 

Evidently the enlightened physician who knows how to combine 
electric and medical influences, who can send in the influence or the 
substance of cocaine, theine or morphine in combination with the 
galvanic currrent, has a great advantage over those who know nothing 
of this combination. They can apply the remedy in their electrode 
by passing the current through it, or they can apply it on the sponge 



CHAP. XXII.] , ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 475 

through which the current is passing, with absolute certainty of 
relief. 

Dr. A. recommends applications of five to ten minutes, never 
beyond fifteen. He would include the morbid part between the 
poles or apply the negative nearer the spine. He does not find the 
electric treatment of much service in cervico-occipital neuralgia, yet 
some cures have been reported. 

On the other hand Dr. A. D. Rockwell says : " There can be no 
question that galvanism has a far wider range in this direction than 
Farad ism ; yet in consideration of the fact that the latter has been 
so much ignored, it seems necessary to say a word in its defence. 
My experience will not allow me to doubt that Faradism is not only 
invaluable in many forms of pain, but in certain conditions relieves 
where galvanism is not only useless but worse than useless, since it 
serves only to exaggerate the existing distress. True neuralgia as 
defined by Anstie is without doubt most successfully treated by 
galvanism, while hysterical neuralgia and the so-called pseudo- 
neuralgias which are simply forms of pain, occupying certain areas, 
and running seemingly in the direction of certain nerves, yield most 
readily to Faradism. ... In the great majority of cases of 
neuralgia, where firm pressure over the affected nerves aggravates 
the pain, the galvanic current is indicated, while the Faradic current 
has the greatest power to relieve, when such pressure does not cause 
an increase of pain." 

" General Faradization is to me absolutely indispensable in the 
practice of electro-therapeutics." He considers the constant current 
of more extensive application, but Faradization is used in one-third 
of all his practice. " There is no one tonic influence in medicine 
comparable with it in power, none to which can be accorded such a 
wide range of application." " In submitting a patient to general 
Faradization, . . the hair being thoroughly wet, the hand is 
passed with firm pressure over the entire surface of the head. In 
treating the forehead, which is far more sensitive to the current than 
any other portion of the body, the operator should first press his 
moistened hand firmly over the part, and then make the connection 
with his other hand on the sponge of the positive pole. The strength 
of the current can be sufficiently regulated by increasing or decreas- 
ing the grasp of the positive pole held in the right hand." 

[These are excellent suggestions, but Dr. R. seems quite uncon- 
scious that he was using as much animal magnetism or nervaura as 
electricity, and perhaps in some cases more. There are great 
numbers of rational practitioners who would relieve by such an 
application of the hands without using an electrode, and in using the 



4/6 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

electrode, Dr. R. pretty effectively limited the access of the positive 
current by obstructing it with over five feet from one hand to the 
other, thus placing the patient under control of the negative pole, 
and extending the negative influence into his right arm, while he 
supposed himself to be giving a positive current to the patient.] 

" An application of the Faradic current to the head in many forms 
of neuralgia, nervous headache and insomnia, if properly given, is 
capable of affording instant and most grateful relief. There are 
very few, however, who administer it with any degree of precision 
and skill, and as a consequence we witness aggravation instead of 
relief of pain. The slightest concentration of current in such situa- 
tions as the forehead is capable of exciting pain, even in the normal 
condition, while a proper diffusion over a broad surface, with equal 
and gentle pressure, affords a sensation as agreeable as it is curative." 

Dr. Rockwell attaches great value justly to the use of the hand 
as the electrode, but appreciates it only for mechanical reasons, not 
understanding its nervauric value. He has been fortunate in dis- 
covering the tonic regions indicated by Sarcognomy, as follows : — 

"The back part of the head and upper portion of the spine (cilio- 
spinal centre) will usually bear powerful applications, and it is an 
interesting and important fact, that applications to this centre will 
produce far greater tonic effects than when the pole is applied to any 
one other portion of the body. Care should be taken to avoid all 
bony prominences, since slight currents in these regions give great 
pain." " There is no remedy to the effects of which there is such a 
varying degree of susceptibility as to this. Not until the patient is 
submitted to a careful electrical test can we be sure that what we 
might consider a very gentle treatment will not be too severe for the 
case in land." 

Dr. Rockwell is almost as strong an advocate of Faradization as 
Duchenne. He says : " On the temperature, the effect of general 
Faradization is to lower it, when abnormally high. It also acts as an 
equalizer, and patients who suffer from cold feet and creeping chills 
over the body become sensible of a feeling of warmth even in the 
midst of a seance. General Faradization has very little influence on 
the normal pulse, but its power to reduce the frequency of the beats 
when it is abnormally high, in conditions of nervous exhaustion, is 
distinctly marked. In the treatment of such cases I. have, in a seance 
of five minutes, frequently tested a fall in the pulse beat varying 
from ten to thirty to the minute. At the same time the heart's 
action becomes more regular and stronger. An almost invariable 
accompaniment of general Faradization and central galvanization is 
an improvement in sleep. . . A better appetite and increased 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 477 

power of digestion, although not observed so early in the treatment, 
is a pretty constant symptom, while through the direct mechanical 
effects of the current on the intestines, and its influence over the 
secreting processes, more or less temporary and permanent relief is 
afforded in constipation. The influence of general Faradization over 
nutrition is perhaps in no way more marked than in the occasional 
increase in the size and weight of the body, so rapid and perceptible 
to the eye that it need not be confirmed by reference to the scales. 
Finally, through tendencies, both direct and indirect, to im prove t 
nutrition, we observe increased disposition and capacity for intellect- 
ual and physical labor." Of course these beneficial effects are due 
to moderate and prudent use of Faradism, especially when combined 
with the personal influence of the operator. 

But such treatment is a very blind and emphatically empirical 
business. The operator rambles all over the body without knowing 
just where the several effects are developed, — like a savage thump- 
ing the keys of a piano and developing accidental melody. The 
comfortable repose is developed just behind the arms ; the increased 
nutrition is developed at the upper exterior part of the thigh, and on 
the dorsal region ; the relief of constipation comes through the 
lower dorsal and lumbar regions ; the improved appetite through 
the lower dorsal and upper abdominal regions ; the relief of the 
heart through the shoulders and upper dorsal region ; the lowering 
of the pulse through the foot, tibial region, Relaxation and Tran- 
quillity. 

Duchenne says : " In progressive muscular atrophy, muscular Fara_ 
dization will sometimes arrest the progress of the wasting, and will 
even develop the muscles that are on the way to destruction. In glosso- 
labio-laryngeal paralysis it improves for a time the articulation of 
words and the deglutition. In locomotor ataxy, electro-cutaneous 
Faradization often cures local anaesthesia and consequently much 
diminishes the functional disorders that it occasions when seated in 
the extremities. It sometimes causes the disappearance of fixed 
cutaneous hyperaesthesia. Faradization of the eye may arrest atropliy 
of the papillae of the optic nerve ; and lastly, Faradization sometimes 
cures or removes paralysis of the motor muscles of the bladder, 
rectum and other viscera." 

Nevertheless he believes that in spite of the temporary relief 
locomotor ataxy and glosso-labio-laryngeal paralysis will not be 
permanently cured. Remak and other advocates of galvanism, how- 
ever, claim the absolute cure of locomotor ataxy by their methods. 
In writer's palsy he has had no success. In facial neuralgia he believes 
galvanization curative, but has not succeeded with Faradization. In 



47$ CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

rheumatic contractions continuous currents produced improvement 
only, and cures were completed by Faradizing the antagonists. 

Galvanization by permanent, continuous, uninterrupted currents for 
a period of half an hour to several hours he has found very valuable 
in promoting absorption, "in chronic articular affections with nodos- 
ities, ganglionic tumors, and in atrophy of the deltoid, produced by 
rheumatism." In such cases, he says, <l I have covered the greater 
part of the cutaneous surface corresponding to the diseased organ or 
region with a moist rheophore (a plate of platinized copper covered 
with wet leather), and I have placed a second moist rheophore higher 
up, at a point as near as possible to the former; then for half an 
hour or an hour, according to the tolerance of the individual, I 
caused the passage of a permanent continuous current from ten, 
fifteen or twenty elements. I have had no occasion but to praise, in 
their way, the catalytic effects of this mode of galvanization, and 
although they are usually very slowly produced I have obtained a 
complete cure on several occasions." 

This is a process "which Faradization is unable to replace." 

Cutaneous galvanization Duchenne pronounces very inefficient, but 
cutaneous Faradization highly effective, " when it is wished to pro- 
duce upon the skin, either for a moment or during several hours, a 
more or less powerful revulsion which may be graduated from a simple 
tingling to a sensation greater than that produced by fire without pro- 
ducing the least electrolytic or calorific alteration. I have seen it 
cure angina pectoris, and very painful sciatic neuralgia, which had 
resisted all medication ; while by lesser degrees I have successfully 
treated more or less grave neuroses and nervous maladies." This 
merely illustrates the effects of counter-irritation, by any strong 
application to the skin, in relieving subjacent organs. 

In overcoming contractions both galvanism and Faradism have 
succeeded. In the case of Mad. X., sixteen years of age, after an 
injury of the right hand producing severe pain in the wrist resulting 
in contraction of the muscles of the forearm, for which eminent 
physicians were unable to do any good, the pain at length extending 
to the shoulder and dorsal region and the contractions extending up 
the muscles of the arm, the pain producing loss of sleep, galvaniza- 
tion, extensively tried, enabled her to open and shut the hand, but 
could make no further improvement, when Duchenne applied local 
Faradization to the antagonists of the contracted muscles, with vigor- 
ous currents and rapid intermissions, and in half an hour all contrac- 
tions were gone and she could write and play the piano, which had 
been impossible for two years. Twelve seances quadrupled the 
strength of the flexors of the fingers. In a subsequent partial 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS,. 479 

attack, which all medical means failed to relieve, the same treatment 
overcame the contractions, and electro-cutaneous excitation over the 
seat of the spinal pains diminished them, but the spinal pains 
returned and electricity could not relieve them. This case illustrates 
the necessity of not relying solely on either current. Meyer reports 
that contractions are cured both by induction and by constant 
currents, "but they were generally removed surprisingly quickly by 
the latter, even after they had existed for years." 

There appears to be a sympathy between antagonistic muscles 
through their nerves, which made such a cure possible, and which 
Remak has illustrated by producing contractions of muscles when he 
galvanized their antagonists, which he called galvano-tonic contrac- 
tions. Duchenne recommends the alternate use of galvanism and 
Faradism in the contraction arising from cerebral causes. 

The harsher character of Faradic currents sometimes renders it 
impossible to employ them at all. Duchenne, the chief advocate of 
Faradism, says : " I could mention one of my confreres and friends, who 
cannot submit to electrization without experiencing vertigo, dazzling, 
etc., however feeble may be the electro-physiological effects produced 
in him." There must be something objectionable in its nature, when 
such a case could occur as appeared in the clinique of Andral, in 
which a girl of sixteen with a spinal disorder " was so sensible of the 
electric influence that she recognized the very faintest currents when 
applied to the diseased side ; although the phenomena occasioned by 
the same currents when applied to the sound side were scarcely 
appreciable. Every time that she was exposed to the Faradic current, 
however feeble, and for however short a time, she suffered for a long 
period afterwards from pains in the head, disturbance of vision, gene- 
ral malaise, a stitch in the side, and a redoubled occurrence of vom- 
iting, to which she had long been subject." After referring to this 
case, Duchenne says : " Faradization is a two-edged sword ; however, 
by proper circumspection we may always avoid danger." 

The harshness of its action is illustrated by his statement : " It is 
possible to apply Faradization at once to the upper and lower limbs, 
and in a more general manner, by placing both hands in a basin of 
water communicating with one of the poles, and both feet in another 
basin communicating with the other. This method excites the ner- 
vous centres, and especially the spinal cord, in a very general and ener. 
getic manner, even when the current is of small intensity. If the 
intermissions are rapid, all the muscles of the limbs are thrown into 
tetanic co7itraction, and the accompanying sensation, which is felt 
chiefly in the joints, is very painful. At this degree of inten- 
sity, this method of electrization is followed by severe lumbago." 



4SO CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

This suggests the question why M. Duchenne is so devoted to Fara- 
dism. 

Duchenne also relates the case of a medical student who attempted 
to follow the directions given in his writings, and Faradize himself to 
complete his restoration from an attack of apoplexy and hemiplegia, 
a year previous, as his movements were still irregular. " Having put 
in action an induction coil with intermittences (by a trembler) of great 
rapidity, he took one of the metallic cylinders in each hand, so that 
the current passed through his brachial nerves from end to end. 
At the moment when it began to pass, his hands closed with great 
force and he was unable to relinquish the cylinders. Feeling then 
that his paralyzed limb was contracting very painfully, he had the 
presence of mind to overturn the Bunsen's pile with his foot. The 
current was stopped instantly, but it was too late. Its action, though 
continued only for a few seconds, had already occasioned serious 
injury. The head was extremely painful, the contraction extended to 
the whole side, and the poor fellow, who was alone in his room, was 
found an hour later in convulsions upon the floor." He came very 
near dying in the hospital, and when he left was in much worse con- 
dition than before he tried this Faradic experiment on himself. 

Of this case Duchenne says : " I have come to the conclusion that 
localized applications are in such cases simply useless, but not danger- 
ous when made with circumspection. At the commencement of my 
researches I often Faradized by reflex action the antagonists to the 
contracted muscles of hemiplegic patients, and I sometimes had occa- 
sion to repent doing it, so that it is necessary to be cautious in the 
employment of a method that has proved to be so dangerous." 
" Electro-dynamic baths, given in a dose so feeble as not to provoke 
muscular contraction, produce an excitation that increases muscular 
force in certain forms of general paralysis." 

That such effects are best produced by the galvanic current has 
been shown by Onimus. In the discussion between them Duchenne 
says : " There is certainly no need of experimental medicine to inform 
us that, in its therapeutic aspect, localized Faradization is a two-edged 
weapon. Empirical clinical observations soon convinced me, at the 
beginning of my elect ro-therepeutical researches, that localized Fara- 
dization, if applied to a muscle or nerve in too full a dose or for too 
long a time, may increase or even produce paralysis or atrophy, instead 
of curing either." 

To vindicate his idea of the equal safety and benefit in the induced 
currents to which he is partial, Duchenne reports comparative exper- 
iments which he thinks satisfactory, but which really show the supe- 
rior mildness of the galvanic. 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 48 1 

His weakest possible Faradic current, after being reduced still fur- 
ther by passing through about eight inches of water, produced greater 
exhaustion of the nerves of a rabbit in half a min7tte than the strong 
galvanic current did "during the whole time of the experiment," which 
did not exhaust them at all. 

When the rabbit's nerves had been an hour previously exhausted by 
a strong induced current, but had recovered tone, and brought the 
vessels into a normal condition, the same extremely reduced Faradic 
current produced immediate exhaustion or paralysis of the nerves, and 
"dilatation of the vessels, which rendered their finest ramifications 
visible for three minutes." Hence we may say that debilitated nerves 
do not bear well the mildest possible Faradic currents. 

We need no better demonstration of the superior safety and health- 
fulness of the galvanic current than these facts from the champion of 
Faradization. The ganglionic nerves on which these experiments 
were tried run to the finest capillaries, as shown by Ordonez, Gim- 
bert and Schweigger, — consequently whatever affects them affects 
the entire circulation in every part of the body ; and it has been shown 
by Onimus and others that a mild galvanic current promotes the cir- 
culation in a normal manner when it follows the course of the vessels, 
and consequently has great restorative power. 

The effect of Faradization for paralysis, Duchenne says, is an in- 
crease of redness, warmth and sensibility, and gradually the enlarge- 
ment of the cutaneous veins, which often continues after Faradization, 
" and sometimes increases, so as to resemble an irritation, and to 
require the suspension of treatment and the use of emollients, baths, 
poultices and the like," which proves Faradization a powerful irrita- 
tive stimulant. 

This discussion leads into profound physiological questions as to 
the controlling forces of the circulation, in reference to which some 
very eminent physiologists, I think, have shown a lack of the defi- 
nite conceptions of physical science. 

It has been established that the action of the ganglionic nerves, 
when irritated, so contracts the bloodvessels as to diminish the circu- 
lation, and when their vital power is exhausted, the bloodvessels, una- 
ble to contract, yield to the pressure of blood which is always present 
and become greatly expanded, — also that the parts become warmer 
with this additional supply of blood, uncontrolled by their ganglionic 
nerves. 

In all this there is nothing to modify or confuse the simple physi- 
ological truth that the involuntary ganglionic system sustains and 
regulates the entire circulation. It maintains the contractions of the 
heart, and the contractions and peristaltic actions of bloodvessels, which 



482 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

as we descend in the animal scale become more and more capable of 
assisting the heart, or even dispensing entirely with its aid. Wken 
we feel the throbbing of bloodvessels distinctly localized under the in- 
fluence of emotion, or arising in very small arteries without apparent 
cause, we realize the absolute control by which the ganglionic system 
sends out and distributes the blood. 

There is nothing in these intelligible and simple facts to require or 
justify the hypothesis (or rather assertion) of Claude Bernard that 
there must be active dilation of vessels, as well as an active contraction. 
Active dilation or expansion of muscles and the vessels on which they 
operate is purely imaginary. No one has ever seen or measured an 
expansive force in muscles. We know of no such thing in physi- 
ology as an expansive energy, — all energy is contractile. The heart 
has an apparently active expansion of its ventricles, which might throw 
up a weight resting on them, but it is due entirely to the systolic 
contraction of the auricles, the ventricular muscle being entirely pas- 
sive in the diastole. There is as little reason for supposing an active 
dilation in the bloodvessels as in the heart, — the conditions are iden- 
tical. There is no dilation except where it is forced by the pressure 
of a fluid propelled by contraction. The climax of this absurdity is 
reached when Duchenne says that the normal calibre of the vessels 
depends "upon a certain equilibrium between the tonic force of the 
constrictors and that of the dilatators." The tonic force of dilation 
exists only in an unscientific imagination,* and the bastard word 
dilatator is appropriate to such a conception. 

But although there is no dilation by the energy of dilating or relax- 
ing fibres, there is a dilation by nervous influence, and when Bernard 
says " I have proved by direct experiment that there are two orders 
of vaso-motor nerves, acting in opposite directions, and that their prop- 
erties are in the majority of cases called into play by reflex influ- 
ence," he states his facts correctly but misunderstands their meaning. 
He says: "The great sympathetic has the function of a moderator 
of the vessels, — when irritated it produces a more or less consider- 
able contraction of them, a contraction which forms a certain degree 
of impediment to the circulation, and hence diminishes its speed." 
This is a very incomplete statement. Irritation of the ganglionic 
nerves to a moderate extent does not diminish but increases the cir- 
culation. They are not merely a " moderator of the vessels" but give 

* The small longitudinal and oblique fibres which M. Gimbert professes to have 
found in some arteries, and which Duchenne professes to regard as a confirmation of 
his theory, are quite irrelevant. Such fibres act like all other muscles by contraction, 
not by expansion, and while thev are well adapted to promote the peristaltic action 
and propulsion of blood, they can contribute nothing to dilation unless by holding 
the vessel in shape as the blood pressure dilates it. 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 483 

the impelling energy of the vessels, and all that sustains the circula- 
tion, which M. Bernard overlooks in this statement. "On the other 
hand (he continues) by exciting the filaments of the ccrebro-spinal 
system we produce a dilatation of the same vessels. Such is the 
whole mechanism of the nervous influence. With these two modes of 
action alone — contraction and dilatation of vessels — the nervous sys- 
tem governs all the chemical phenomena of the ogranism." ! ! ! 

It was said that sometimes even Jupiter nods, and surely in this 
case M. Bernard was a little oblivious. He overlooked the fact that 
besides simple contraction and expansion there is a peristaltic action 
propelling the fluids and producing an increase of blood pressure, 
well shown in the experiments of Onimus and Legros, and well known 
otherwise before their experiments. The active throbbing determina- 
tion of high inflammation is quite beyond M. Bernard's contracted 
theory. 

The assertion that by vaso-motor contraction and expansion "the 
nervous system governs all the cliemical phenomena of the organism " 
is too extragavant to be noticed if it did not come from so eminent a 
physiologist. Brown-Sequard adheres more faithfully to the facts 
when he puts aside this theory and says "the nervous system acts 
directly and originally upon the parenchyma of the tissues" instead of 
limiting its action to bloodvessels. He adds that when a nervous 
influence produces inflammation the principal agency is not the in- 
crease of blood but the influence on the tissues. (Lectures on Cen- 
tral Nervous System.) 

But that the cerebro-spinal system is concerned in dilation is 
entirely true. This is in consequence of the general law which places 
the motor and the sensitive systems in antagonism in function as they 
are in position. Sensitive nerves when strongly impressed overcome 
the motor energy. Pain to a sufficient extent prostrates every mus- 
cular power. The pneumogastric, being a sensitive nerve for the 
interior, shows the same influence upon the heart, not by any direct 
excitement sent to the heart, expanding its substance, according to the 
Bernard conception of active dilation, but by its central end, when 
disconnected with the heart by section, conveying a sensitive impres- 
sion to the medulla, which causes exhaustion, and if sufficiently potent 
may cause death. To carry out his hypothesis, for it is nothing more, 
Bernard maintains that certain small ganglia in the organs have the 
function of paralyzing or relaxing the vaso-motor nerves. If so, they 
must be sensitive ganglia, and sensitive structures may excite as well 
as relax. Nature is not so awkward as to construct one organ merely 
to oppose another. 

It is not because they are cerebro-spinal, but because they are sen- 



484 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

sitive nerves, that certain nerves cause relaxation of the bloodvessels, 
as when a slap reddens the surface. For the cerebro-spinal is the 
dominant system, in connection with the seat of life, and by its sensi- 
tive capacity receives impressions which it reflects on the bloodvessels 
to accelerate or retard the circulation, which fact was expressed in the 
old physiological principle " tibi irritatio, ibi afflnxus." The spinal 
cord is the centre from which every impression is reflected, and vital 
changes produced, not merely, as Bernard would have it, by active con- 
traction and active dilation (which is imaginary), but in addition by 
peristaltic propulsion, by calorific control, suddenly increasing or 
diminishing the heat at any point, and by other occult influences that 
increase, diminish or prevent nutrition and secretion, which will never 
be understood until medical science rises out of the low mechanical 
rut into which it has fallen, so that it can comprehend the influence 
by which the chorda tympani and trifacial excite the salivary secretion, 
and the lachrymal gland responds to a certain frontal convolution, as 
I have proved. 

The marvellous powers of the nervous system in controlling 
growth and changes are so far beyond anything that the bloodvessels 
could explain, as to prompt the theory that there are special trophic 
nerves which, though they have never been discovered, Duchenne, 
Samuel and a few others believe to exist. 

Upon this speculative question I would respectfully offer my own 
suggestions. The cerebellum is the especial organ of unconscious 
life, — the trophic centre of the whole person. It is also greatly con- 
cerned in muscular action. Hence the two functions are associated 
closely, and Sarcognomy shows us Vital Force, a very muscular 
energy, situated in close proximity to Nutrition on the body. We 
may therefore expect to find the trophic power associated closely 
with the muscular. 

Again, it is sensibility that makes the body liable to injury, waste, 
disease and death, which are resisted by hardihood and other occipital 
powers. The intellectual and sensitive powers are anti-trophic and 
wasteful of tissue. 

Again, growth is a vital process, not a passively receptive one. It 
belongs to the efferent, centrifugal energies, not the afferent centrip- 
etal. It must therefore affiliate with the muscular rather than the 
sensitive apparatus. It must associate with nerves that carry an 
influence from the centre to the organs, not with those which carry 
inward sensations. Hence, if we look for trophic nerves, we should 
look for them in connection with the motor nerves and in connection 
with those portions of the cord which are most closely connected 
with the cerebellum. 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 485 

This would explain the influence of muscular exercise on growth 
and the beneficial effects of muscular Faradization and galvanization. 
Future experiments in medical practice will show the power of 
growth developed by currents to the cerebellum and to the upper 
exterior part of the thigh. 

The calorific changes and the nutritive changes are not at all pro- 
portional to the changes in the bloodvessels, and M. Duchenne 
though a partisan of Bernard's most erroneous ideas, states some 
well-known facts which entirely refute them. He says that to accept 
a certain theory, "it would be necessary to forget the experiments 
which show that this kind of neuro-paralytic hyperemia is passive, 
and that in itself it is powerless to affect the nutrition; " which is very 
true, but totally refutes Bernard's idea that this hyperemia is what 
controls nutrition, and is the only way, as it increases or diminishes, 
by which the nervous system "governs all the chemical phenomena of 
the organism " ! ! What a passion our great mechanical physiologists 
have for reducing nature's most mysterious operations to some simple 
mechanical arrangement. Duchenne states some facts which show 
that mere hyperaemia does not produce inflammation. 

Faradization by strong currents on the neck is not free from danger, 
especially on account of the sensitive character of the pneumo- 
gastric nerve, which runs in company with the carotid arteries and 
jugular veins, and which, when excited centrally, tends to depress the 
action of the heart. Duchenne says : "The procedure is not always 
free from danger. Whilst moving a rheophore over the lateral and 
superior parts of the pharynx, with a current of rapid intermission 
but moderate intensity, the patient fell suddenly into syncope. 
When restored, he said that he had experienced a kind of suffoca- 
tion, and an indefinable sensation. Since then-, having Faradized 
the pneumogastric many times at the same height, with one inter- 
mission per second, and with a very moderate current, the same 
accident has not occurred, but the precordial sensation has been felt 
every time. I once saw the necessary caution neglected in Faradizing 
the pharynx of a young man, in whom that organ and the velum 
palati were paralyzed, consecutively to an angina. A profound 
syncope was immediately produced by the operation, and in this case 
I have no doubt that the pneumogastric had been irritated by the 
current. Faradization of the pneumogastric at the lower part of 
the oesophagus may be practised without inconvenience." It is 
farther from the region under the jaw which disturbs the brain. 

The location of the organs of the brain shows that there is some- 
thing more than pneumogastric excitation in such cases. The 
pharyngeal region cannot receive electric stimulation without affect- 



4§6 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

ing the brain unfavorably if prolonged, and the medulla oblongata, as 
well as the Pons Varolii, is too near this location to make strong 
currents judicious. The suffocative effect was produced through the 
pons, which controls respiration. The paralytic tendency of this 
region is shown in diphtheria. 

Experience has abundantly illustrated the comparative value of 
galvanizing and Faradizing in paralysis, quite differently from the 
doctrines of Duchenne. In a case reported by Baierlacher, a work- 
man in a factory, aged 28, had a paralysis of the face of eight weeks 
standing. He was treated with strong induction currents for three 
weeks without any change, when a galvanic current from fifteen 
elements was applied and " produced strong contractions in all the 
muscles." " After only three applications of the continuous current 
to the nerve trunk and muscles, considerable improvement was mani- 
fest, and after four more applications the paralysis had almost 
entirely disappeared." 

Dr. Neumann reports that in the case of a man of 60 years, with 
rheumatic facial paralysis, accompanied by severe pain, the induction 
currents were employed for six weeks every day for half an hour 
without any success. He then employed the continued currents and 
produced very great amelioration. 

When the muscular action was restored, the Faradic currents were 
capable of producing light contractions in the paralyzed muscles, but 
much more feeble than in the sound ones, while the galvanic currents 
produced much stronger contractions in the late paralyzed muscles 
than in the sound ones. 

Meyer relates the case of a woman of 48 years, the left side of 
whose face had been paralyzed fourteen days and was not affected in 
the slightest degree by induction currents, while a battery of six 
Bunsen cells produced strong contractions, — stronger than on the 
sound side. The excitability to electric currents diminished as the 
cure advanced, and when discharged cured, in the third month, " the 
excitability (of the left side of the face) for either induced or contin- 
uous currents was wholly wanting." Two years later the electric 
excitability was partially restored. 

Why is there so great a difference in the effects of the two cur- 
rents? The galvanic currents by their continuity produce an 
accumulated effect, due to quantity and duration. The Faradic 
currents are instantaneous and contradictory or alternating in course. 
Their intensity excites and disturbs, but their brevity forbids the 
production of effects that result from prolonged action, hence they 
fail to rouse the paralyzed muscles, which are slow to respond, and 
will not respond to the flash of an induction current. But nerves 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 487 

and muscles in a state of healthy excitability respond promptly to 
Faradism, which is a more muscular influence than galvanism. " On 
sound muscles in the normal state (say Onimus and Legros) the 
continued current, applied directly to the muscles, produces contrac- 
tions with great difficulty. When the electrodes are placed on the 
course of the motor nerves, the contractions are stronger, and pro- 
duced by a weaker current, but never as strong as with induction 
currents." 

It has been found by Neumann, Bezold, Bruckner and Fick, that a 
galvanic current, when frequently interrupted, produced less and less 
effect on the impaired muscles as the interruptions were more fre- 
quent. A feeble current, sufficiently prolonged, surpasses the effects 
of the strong interrupted current. Every interruption diminishes 
the effect. This shows that the galvanic cannot always be replaced 
by the primary which is an intermitted current, and hence I have 
modified the common portable battery to allow the primary to be 
changed into the galvanic. 

While the effect of interruptions is recognized unanimously as an 
impairment of the motor effect, in paralytic conditions, that does not 
appear to be the sole cause of the difference ; for galvanic currents, 
interrupted even more frequently than the Faradic, will produce con- 
tractions when the Faradic fail. When Faradic currents fail to 
produce any contraction in consequence of ten or twelve inter- 
ruptions per second, galvanic currents succeed in spite of twenty 
interruptions per second, for the galvanic currents occupy all the 
space of time between the interruptions, while the Faradic have only 
a momentary duration. 

In this respect, the Faradic current is far more objectionable than 
the magneto-electric, which approximates the interrupted galvanic in 
its duration, for the magneto-electric current is passing while the 
magnet is near the iron, and if the revolution be made very slowly 
the current is prolonged in proportion. 

In a case of paralysis of the facial nerve (reported by Onimus 
and Legros), the paralyzed muscles contracted under a current (from 
ten to sixteen elements Remak) which was not sufficient to produce 
any contraction in the sound masseter muscle. The effects were 
more apparent when applied to the muscles than when applied to the 
nerves. But the Faradic currents, as strong as they could be borne, 
producing very energetic contractions in the sound muscles, entirely 
failed to produce any effect on the paralyzed muscles. On the other 
hand, it required nearly twice as strong a galvanic current to affect 
the sound as the paralyzed muscles. The induction currents are 
therefore unfit for application to paralyzed muscles. But is this 



488 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

unfitness absolute and inherent ? Does it not arise from the small 
quantity and great intensity of the induction currents, as well as 
their brief duration ? An apparatus which gives a large quantity of 
electricity without sudden interruptions would approximate the 
galvanic in its influence. For this purpose, in a magneto-electric 
machine the wire should be thick and short, and the magnet should 
be strong and rotated very slowly. But even thus arranged such a 
current is of very little value for paralyzed muscles. 

Paralyzed muscles require a larger quantity of electricity, — a larger 
surface of the cells under chemical action ; sound muscles require 
intensity or number of plates rather than quantity of surface. As 
paralyzed muscles recover, the galvanic current has less effect, and 
the effect of the Faradic current increases. The contractility of 
paralyzed muscles under galvanism is much like that of the involun- 
tary fibres, slow and progressive, not ceasing quickly. The galvanic 
current produces additional contraction after the muscles have been 
fatigued by the Faradic current. 

The continuous current is efficient for paralyzed muscles, even when 
interrupted. Onimus and Legros, with fourteen elements of Remak, 
produced strong contractions in paralyzed muscles, and eighteen days 
after the attack even sixty interruptions to the second did not prevent 
them. On the sound side of the face, similar currents produced 
tetanic contractions of the muscles, which indicates that Faradic 
currents fail, not so much by the number of interruptions as by 
their lack of continuity, lack of quantity and antagonistic alterna- 
tion. 

In the above case a feeble galvanic current of four to six elements 
produced contraction of the paralyzed muscles, which were not 
affected by the interrupted current. The galvanic is especially 
adapted to exhausted excitability, and is more effective than the 
Faradic several hours after death, but not at first. It acts best where 
there is but slow contractility, as in paralyzed or dead muscles, or 
those of non-striated fibre, on which it acts efficiently, where the 
Faradic generally fails. In very young or embryonic animals, galvanic 
currents are efficient, but the Faradic soon lose their power. 

The galvanic currents act directly on the muscular fibre, the 
Faradic on the nerves. The action on the muscle is strongest at 
the negative pole, where alkalies are developed. When the nerves 
are paralyzed by poisons, the muscles do not respond to Faradism 
but do to continuous currents, and appear to respond more readily 
when isolated from the influence of the nerves. In fact, the 
muscular excitability and response to excitants is greater, indepen- 
dent of the nerves, than when associated with them. A muscle 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 489 

which contracts normally from the current proceeding from sixteen 
elements will (according to Onimus and Legros), when deprived of its 
nerves, contract from four. In a case reported by Zeimssen, in which 
the facial nerve had been completely divided, and the muscles con- 
sequently paralyzed, the nerve had entirely lost, after three weeks, 
its electric excitability, except that the galvanic excitability lingered 
in a small branch. The muscles responded to a continuous current 
with a slow contraction passing into a tetanic condition. 

Those cases in which the galvanic current alone can produce con- 
tractions are generally farther advanced and slower in recovery than 
when the induction current can produce contractions. 

Muscular irritibality, which may be considered a morbid condition, 
as seen in cramps, increases when the nerves are enfeebled or injured. 
Convulsions are a mark of weakness in the nervous system. In the 
sound nervous condition muscles do not contract when struck, but 
they do when their nerves are impaired and the fibres act indepen- 
dently. 

In regard to the questions we have just considered, Ziemssen says : 
" This difference between the action of induced and continuous 
currents, very generally stated by Remak, has since become the 
subject of numerous and searching inquiries. The great and general 
result of these inquiries is the following : in completely paralyzed 
muscles and nerves, the excitability for battery currents is sometimes 
retained or even increased, while the excitability for induced currents 
is completely lost. In such cases the curative action of the continu- 
ous current is superior to that of the induced. With the return of 
mobility the excitability for both kinds of currents commonly 
changes." 

The reason of this must be found in the superior vitality, delicacy 
and quickness of the nervous system, compared to the muscular. 
The instantaneous Faradic impression rouses the nerves, but the 
more prolonged galvanic is required by the muscles. The ten-thou- 
sandth part of a second is sufficient for a current to stimulate the 
muscular nerves of a frog, according to Matteucci. 

A very important difference between the galvanic and Faradic 
currents is found in the far greater penetrative power of the 
galvanic. 

Helmholtz says, in a lecture delivered at Heidelberg: "Recent 
experiments made in the physiological laboratory on the transmission 
of excitation in the nerves have called my attention to the fact that 
the intermittent currents of electric induction produce but little 
effect on nerves situated at a certain depth in the human body, 
although it is easy, with a battery of ten or twenty elements of zinc 



49° CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

and platina, to produce in the same nerves excitements even of a 
tetanic character." Experienced electricians find no difficulty in 
impressing the spinal cord by galvanic currents along the spine. 
Onimus and Legros say that they have obtained the same effects by 
exterior currents, as when the spinal cord was exposed in animals. 

The Faradic currents, with their greater intensity of contractile 
energy, do not promote the circulation either of blood or of nerve 
power as does the galvanic current, which has the advantage of 
flowing in one direction and, when centrifugally applied, assisting 
equally the flow of blood and of nervous force from the centres to 
the circumference. Hence it promotes many vital processes and 
increases the secretions when Faradism fails. Onimus and Legros 
caused a free salivary secretion by galvanism applied directly to the 
salivary glands, but the induction current had no such effect. 

The centripetal galvanic current, on the contrary, retards the flow 
of blood, counteracts the natural peristaltic action of the bloodvessels 
and diminishes the nerve energy of the periphery or destination of 
the nerve force and blood. 

The Faradic resembles a combination of the centrifugal and cen- 
tripetal galvanic currents, — a combination of stimulants and sedatives 
or rather accumulative and dispersive currents for the periphery, and 
also a combination of cumulative stimulants and dispersive sedatives 
for the central regions. Hence it neither propels the vital force out- 
wards to tranquillize the centres, nor concentrates the vital forces 
from periphery to centre, but leaves the balance undisturbed, and 
simply amounts to a general stimulus along the line of the current, 
which increases the contractile energy of the bloodvessels and in- 
creases the blood pressure until, in a few minutes, the exhaustion of 
contractility leaves the blood pressure to fall, as was shown in the 
forty-sixth experiment of Onimus and Legros on a dog. 

As a powerful stimulus wherever applied, when not carried too far, 
and when carefully adjusted to the conditions of the organs, Faradism 
is surely of great value. When applied from hand to hand, from 
hands to feet, from shoulder to calf or to thigh, it is a powerful 
renovator of energy, and when applied locally on muscles it stimulates 
and warms them and assists their development. When applied from 
the muscles to the spine or their spinal nerves, its frequent interrup- 
tions maintain contractions which become more sustained as the 
shocks are more frequent, allowing no relaxation until, if sufficiently 
frequent, the contractions become extremely painful and, as Duchenne 
says, may even produce shortening when the shocks are sufficiently 
rapid and often- repeated. The effects of the rapid Faradic shocks 
are very much like those of muscular exercise and contribute to the 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 49I 

growth of the muscles and to their habitual tonicity. The effects of 
cutaneous Faradization are also more intense upon the skin in pro- 
portion to the rapidity rather than the intensity, and such currents 
are the most efficient in cutaneous anaesthesia. There is also an 
anaesthesia in which the muscular sense'is lost, resistance cannot be 
felt, and it is difficult to regulate the movements except by eyesight. 
Duchenne speaks of a patient relieved by rapid Faradism, who could 
not feel the bed on which she was lying, and felt as if suspended in 
air unless she saw the bed. 

Our repeated cautions against heroic Faradism require that we 
should look on the other side of the question and remember that 
currents of great strength may be required, when masses of cellular 
and adipose tissue stand in the way of the current, or when vitality 
is at so low an ebb as to require the utmost power of stimulation. 
During the terrific cholera epidemic through which we passed at 
Cincinnati in 1849, the eclectic physicians saved many that seemed 
to be in a hopeless collapse by using the most concentrated and fiery 
stimulants known in the materia medica, which might have en- 
dangered the life of a man of health, but barely roused the sluggish 
and benumbed sensibilities of the moribund patients. In similar 
conditions a Faradic stimulus, dangerous under ordinary circum- 
tances, may become necessary. In extreme cases of paralysis, where 
sensibility, contractility and nutrition seem entirely gone, violent 
Faradization makes very little impression, because there is no sensi- 
bility to feel it ; and Duchenne properly says : " In such cases it has 
been necessary to have recourse to an apparatus of enormous 
intensity, and I have even had to regret the want of one still more 
powerful. It was only after I had recalled some life to the limbs 
that I was able to diminish the intensity of the current and that an 
apparatus of medium power became sufficient." 

Faradism being an exciting stimulus at the point of its application 
and on the line between the electrodes, this stimulation along the 
line of the current corroborates the impression at the site of the 
electrodes ; for if we examine the cerebral organology we shall find 
that organs lying intermediate between any two possess an inter- 
mediate character, arid resemble respectively the organs to which 
they lie nearest. Hence, in the organology of the body, the currents 
passing between the locations of any two Faradic electrodes contrib- 
ute to increase the effect which the locations of the electrodes 
would produce. 

The application of Faradism or induction currents to the human 
body is therefore a simple matter. It merely demands that the 
stimulating electrodes shall be placed wherever a stimulus is re- 



49 2 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXil. 

quired, and that it shall be so graduated by the gentleness of the 
current, by the breadth of the electrodes, and by the medical or 
carbonic character of the electrodes themselves, as to insure that 
gentle impression which will assist and not over-excite the vital 
Junctions. The simplest precaution which can be adopted against the 
energy of the current is the use of large sponge electrodes, well 
saturated with water or with salt water, when we would increase the 
freedom of the current. I would recommend, however, as better 
than salt for the medication of the water, the use of muriate of 
ammonia, which will answer the same purpose in increasing the con- 
ductivity, and which has in itself much virtue as a vital stimulant and 
general promoter of the secretions. Its influence is so wholesome 
that it would not in any case be objectionable. An additional means 
of moderating and refining the influence of Faradic currents will be 
found in the application of broad carbon plates on the surface under 
the electrodes, by which we may secure any degree of mildness. 

When the Faradic or galvanic poles are placed near together, the 
current flows with great energy through the short connecting space. 
Hence this method is highly available for strong localized excitement. 
When they are placed farther apart the diffusion of the currents is 
much greater and their density where they pass much less. But in 
all cases the effect of any current is determined according to Sarcog- 
nomy by the location of the electrodes. 

The medication of electric currents, which the medical profession 
generally have ignored or derided, is an important part of a rational 
practice, whether the medical substances can or cannot be carried into 
the body by electric currents. Whether metallic poisons can be re- 
moved from the body by a current that may be safely borne is a dif- 
ferent question. It is far more difficult to find and remove from the 
body the infinitesimal quantities of metal which may be in it than to 
carry in a portion of the substances in solution through which a cur- 
rent is sent, yet metallic substances have often been expelled. Oni- 
mus and Legros say that almost immediately after a few drops of 
a solution of iodide of potassium have been injected under the skin 
of a rat, iodine can be evolved at any part of the body by the applica- 
tion of the positive pole of a galvanic current. 

It is desirable that electric currents should resemble as much as 
possible, and assist, the natural influences of life. To do this they 
must be extremely gentle, for the more delicate galvanic currents pro- 
mote and assist peristaltic action in the bloodvessels and in the intes- 
tines, but the currents usually applied do not. Even Faradic currents 
(from the second helix) may be made sufficiently gentle by using a 
rheostat, a cylinder of water or a large carbon electrode or large sponge 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 493 

to moderate the current to prevent its interference with the peristaltic 
action. 

Electric currents altogether wholesome and congenial are a grand 
desideratum in electro-therapeutics. Moderate galvanic, primary and 
secondary currents through proper electrodes (large sponges or car- 
bons) are desirable ; but there is an irritating quality in the currents 
commonly used, which renders them after a time intolerable, and fills 
the patient with a metallic taste and feeling. This is due to the law 
— not yet recognized — that electricity carries with it the potentiality » 
of all the substances through which it passes, and when it passes 
through zinc and its compounds, sulphuric acid and bichromate of 
potassa, its influence cannot be genial. 

Hence I have been accustomed to prefer cells that rely upon 
muriate of ammonia, a thoroughly wholesome substance, and one 
which produces less active chemical influence and does not consume 
the zinc when not in use. The ideal cell, however, should substitute 
iron for zinc, though it may have less electro-motive force. It is an 
easy matter to give a larger surface, or use a larger cell, or increase 
the number of our cells. Iron does not appear to be available, as it 
corrodes too rapidly. 

Moreover, all the objectionable influences of a strong electric dy- 
namic current can be overcome by medical means. Water alone, liber- 
ally used in the sponges, has a happy effect. The fluid extract of 
Scutellaria on the electrodes will neutralize nearly all that is objection- 
able in a current from a sal-ammoniac cell, and for sensitive, irritable 
constitutions, the addition of a little hyoscyamus to the Scutellaria will 
make it pleasant. Medicines may be contained in a properly con- 
structed electrode or in the sponge, or may saturate a cloth upon 
the skin, under the electrode. The irritative effects are still further 
controlled by association with magnetism. 

Although the galvanic currents directly applied may suspend peri- 
staltic action, their application to the nervous system promotes it. 
Galvanism of the splanchnic nerves produces peristaltic action, but 
Faradism does not, — showing the former to be more genial. Faradism 
excites contractions of the stomach when applied through the pneu- 
mogastric nerve, and may be used to excite vomiting. Galvanism 
applied in the same way diminishes or suspends its contractions, 
opposes vomiting, and may be used against seasickness, as it has 
been, successfully, when applied on the epigastrium, by Dr. LeConiat. 

Galvanism has an antispasmodic influence. Though it disturbs at 
the beginning and at the end of a current, it promotes tranquillity 
while flowing ; but Faradism, being a rapid succession of beginnings 
and endings, is essentially disturbing. The chemical influence of the 



494 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

galvanic current is greater when it flows uninterruptedly ; the sensi- 
tive influence is greater when interrupted. The chemical and heat- 
ing effects are more conspicuous at the negative pole, which is gen- 
erally more distinctly felt. 

The superior value of galvanic currents is owing to their adaptation 
to controlling circulation, excitement and nutrition. As Onimus and 
Legros express it, "the interrupted currents and the static electricity 
are excitants, and never can be anything but excitants ; but the con- 
tinuous currents, according to the mode of application, may act as a 
powerful sedative and at the same time favor the interior nutrition. 
They are calming, as they maintain the nervous system in the same 
dynamic condition and favor the normal state of the circulation, and 
we know that the best calmant for the nervous system is a well-oxy- 
genated blood." 

This statement is too exclusive, as static electricity, in which they 
do not seem to have had much experience, is much more than a mere 
excitant, and has a great variety of effects, according to the mode of 
application. Farad ic electricity is more than a mere excitant, as it 
has shown the power of promoting growth in puppies, and invigorat- 
ing feeble constitutions. But we cannot repeat too often that the 
effect of every current is determined according to Sarcognomy by the 
location to which it is applied. 

Galvanism has a special relation to the most tenaciously vital struct- 
ures. In cold-blooded animals, especially frogs, we find the most 
tenacious vitality. They survive centuries of underground confine- 
ment in rocks, and their nerves and muscles furnish us the most 
perfect and delicate of galvanoscopes. The involuntary contractile 
tissues in man approximate the conditions of cold-blooded vitality, 
having a tenacity of life which is shown by action after the voluntary 
system is entirely lifeless. After death, when the voluntary muscles 
cannot respond, and even the intestines do not respond to direct gal- 
vanizing, they still respond to galvanism of the mesenteric nerves. 

The less any structure is under the influence of the will, the more 
capable it is of post-mortem action, and the more tenacious of its 
organization. The bones are the most durable part of the body, and 
the uterus outlasts all other soft parts under circumstances that favor 
decay. Atrophy from inaction is the characteristic of the voluntary- 
muscles. Voluntary structures rapidly decline and are very slow to 
regenerate or repair injuries, which the involuntary easily repair, as 
they have something of the qualities of cold-blooded animals, with an 
inferior nervous development. Voluntary structures are closely asso- 
ciated with the central nervous system, and respond more promptly 
to their nerves than to action on their substance. 



CHAP. XXII. J ELEClkU-illEKAl'iiU TICS. 495 

When the voluntary muscular system, by impairment of its nerves 
in paralysis, approximates the condition of the involuntary non-striated 
fibre, responding but slowly to its nerves, it is then peculiarly acces 
sible to the galvanic influence, and contracts in the slow and pro- 
longed manner characteristic of involuntary tissue. The galvanic 
current restores from paralytic conditions where the Faradic is useless. 

The peristaltic action of the unstriated fibre of the intestines is pro- 
moted by galvanizing the splanchnic nerves or the mesenteric plexus, 
but Faradization of the splanchnic nerves does not promote peristaltic 
action. The Faradic current when applied on the intestines does not 
produce any natural peristaltic action between the poles where the 
current is passing, nor even contraction, but simply produces, like any 
irritant, a sharp contraction at the points where the electrodes are 
applied. Hence, when applied to overcome constipation, the elec- 
trodes should glide over the surface in the direction of the natural 
movement, — especially on the descending colon. 

According to Onimus and Legros the galvanic current, in direct 
application to the intestines, promotes contraction or tension as it 
ascends, and relaxation as it descends. The relaxation, however, is 
favorable to evacuation. The best action of the galvanic current for 
constipation is on the spinal cord and splanchnic nerves. Its appli- 
cation between the mouth and rectum, in either direction, promotes 
peristaltic action, as it stimulates the ganglionic and spinal nerves. 
Constipation has been successfully treated by introducing one metal 
in the mouth and the other in the rectum, connecting them with a 
wire. Silver or copper may be used with zinc. The well-known ex- 
periment of moving the bowels by a galvanic current from the mouth 
to the anus is practicable only with galvanism. This experiment was 
successfully performed by M. Leroy d'Etiolles as well as by Aldini 
and others. With the Faradic current no such result occurs. 
Duchenne made the experiment on horses, with one electrode in the 
mouth and the other in the anus, and produced tetanic contraction in 
the limbs and the bowels, but no evacuation. In one case the body 
of the living horse was laid open for observation at Montfaucon, but 
he gained nothing by the cruel experiment. The Faradic current, 
applied as before, did not produce any appreciable contraction, no 
matter what its intensity, even when violent contractions, amounting 
to opisthotonos, were produced. The result was equally nugatory when 
the same experiment was tried by Duchenne upon a patient. It was 
certainly taking a great liberty with the patient to apply a method 
which had been proved fallacious. 

There is little harmony or clearness in much of the confused mass 
of experiments by electro-therapeutists, and our views become clear 



496 CURRENT DOCTRINES OF [CHAP. XXII. 

only by adopting the principles of Sarcognomy, which show that a 
galvanic current may be useful in constipation by alternate currents 
to the spine and the gastro-intestinal tract, and that when the nega- 
tive pole is on the spine it accumulates a vital force which overcomes 
any derangement, but when it is on the abdomen, along the gastro- 
intestinal tract, it produces a more active manifestation, which gradu- 
ally exhausts the vital power. 

Our comparison of galvanism and Faradism thus far develops the 
superior mildness of the former, and its more general harmony with 
vitality. The valid objections to therapeutic Faradism arise from its 
abrupt harshness and ability to injure, but these may be removed by 
diminishing the force and increasing the softening or checking influ- 
ences at the electrodes by water, by carbon or by medicines, and by 
giving them greater breadth of application to the body. There is a 
great difference between small metallic electrodes placed near together 
and large sponge or carbon electrodes placed far apart. Meyer regards 
the current as most curative which produces contractions with the 
least intensity. 

The carbon electrodes are much the best in common use. The 
greater their breadth of surface the less the intensity of the current. 
The dryness of the skin may be overcome by a strip of wet flannel or 
of wash-leather tied over the face of the carbon, which answers the 
purpose without the inconvenience of a wet sponge. When it is 
desired to concentrate the current upon a small space, as a nerve or 
a muscle, an olive-shaped electrode is used, — or even a smaller point, 
if necessary. For applications to the skin alone, dry electrodes are 
used, and a metallic brush or a roller is the most efficient channel. 
The roller covered with wet cloth or leather is useful for labile (mov- 
ing) currents. The interruption of galvanic currents may be made by 
an interrupting electrode, or a pedal interrupter worked with the foot, 
— or the operator may pass the current through his person and touch 
a suitable electrode with his finger or with a thimble worn on it. The 
interruption may be conveniently made by a loop of wire held in the 
hand and vibrated against the conductor of the battery, included in 
the loop. 

The very delicate electric practice which is appropriate to sensitives 
is not in fashion among electro-therapeutists — Onimus and Legros 
say : " Induction currents of extremely feeble intensity have a different 
influence on the tissues from what they have when of medium inten- 
sity. In employing an induction current which is barely perceived 
by the tongue, of the least intensity that we can produce with our 
ordinary apparatus, and which is transmitted through several inches 
of water, we attain different results. We can observe this difference 



CHAP. XXII.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 497 

in studying the movements of the heart ; but these are exceptional 
facts and this mode of employing electricity occurs only in laboratories, 
— never in the practice of medicine." 

Is it not obvious that we need a material change in our electrical 
appliances ? 

Having discussed the relative merits of galvanism and Faradism, or 
the current of induction, coming from the exterior coil, let us now 
consider the intermediate magneto-galvanic or primary current, which 
comes from the interior coil. The primary and secondary currents 
are frequently spoken of as being both Faradic, and their distinction 
overlooked, which is very important. 

The primary or magneto-galvanic current from the interior coil is 
intermediate in character between the galvanic and Faradic, and if I 
were confined to one current alone, I should select the primary. It 
has the galvanic character in being a one-way current, tending toward 
sedative effects at the positive and developing at the negative, while 
it has the stimulating influence of the Faradic from its rapid interrup- 
tions. It is usually given from a single cell, which has the force of 
one or two volts. The cell current alone would be of little value and 
almost imperceptible, but by creating magnetism as it flows in a coil 
round an iron rod, it receives the impulsive force of the magnetized 
rod (a magnet being competent to start an electric current), and by 
the rapid interruptions of the flow (as the magnetic attraction moves 
a spring and interrupts the current) it acquires the stimulating quality 
which the Faradic owes to its frequent interruptions, but still retains 
to a great extent the peculiar virtue of the galvanic current. Hence 
it has a more general availability than either of the other currents. 
By commutation, which is alternation, it becomes a double stimulus 
like the Faradic, with somewhat less irritability, and by slow interrup- 
tions it approaches more nearly the galvanic character. The rapidity 
of the vibrations is usually regulated by the screw, and the strength of 
the current by advancing or withdrawing the exterior coil, or by mov- 
ing the metallic cylinder which interrupts the inductive action of the 
interior on the exterior coil, or upon the magnet. 

When a strong resistance is to be overcome it is sometimes neces- 
sary to use more than one cell to supply the galvanic current, but one 
cell generally supplies all that is well borne in passing through the 
human body. An extra cell may be required when a rheostat is used, 
or when the current is used to convey medical potencies, or is sent 
through the entire length of the body, or through more than one 
person. 

The primary current carefully managed is available for the treat- 
ment of the brain as well as the body. It is an interesting and won- 



49$ DOCTRINES OF ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. [CHAP. XXII. 

derful course of experiments which I have been accustomed to make 
on impressible constitutions, and which most of my students have 
personally realized, by stimulating the brain with the negative elec- 
trode. Even while this page was being written I received a call from 
an intelligent gentleman (J. H.) of substantial but impressible con- 
stitution, and to show him the use of electricity stimulated five organs 
of his brain successively, the effects of which he described as satisfac- 
torily as if he had known their functions, in a very graphic manner. 

In the next chapter I shall show the extreme facility with which in 
impressible constitutions we may illustrate the laws of Sarcognomy 
by means of electric currents, which modify mind and body at the 
same time. There is every grade of impressibility, from such con- 
ditions to that of those in whom we produce physiological effects on 
the body, with very slight apparent effects on the mind. As there is 
no human being who can resist the power of electricity, there is no 
one on whom we cannot demonstrate Sarcognomy, and hence I think 
it very important that all students of Therapeutic Sarcognomy should 
be familiar with the power of electricity. 

But I find it will be impossible in this volume to give a full develop- 
ment of the subject, and will close this introductory view with the 
remark that the practitioner should have the galvanic, primary and 
secondary currents in use, — and our portable instruments are now 
supplied with another, the combined primary and secondary, which is 
the most powerful of all, and combines the influences of primary and 
secondary. Notwithstanding the singular assertions of Heidenhain 
as to the superior penetrative power of the galvanic, it is easy to 
demonstrate the superior penetrative power of the primary, secondary 
and combined currents, which (especially the latter) will play effi- 
ciently upon a group of persons who would not feel the galvanic 
current. Static electricity also occupies the entire field of practice 
with superior convenience and pleasantness, and it is sufficient to say, 
without enumerating the diseases, that there is nothing in the way 
of human disease and suffering to which electricity may not in some 
form be an important aid or cure. 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

THE EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND 
DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 

BY ILLUSTRATIVE EXPERIMENTS. 

In bringing before the reader the solid basis of the new Anthro- 
pology in the experimental method, which is destined to be the 
future basis of philosophy, it is proper to show its superiority over 
the methods of the myopic investigators whose vast and multi- 
tudinous labors heretofore have been so unsatisfactory and shown 
how unprofitable are the immense labors of those who reject 
enlightened methods and, with a jealousy appropriate only to 
mediaeval barbarism, reject the testimony of honest investigators too 
scornfully even to investigate a demonstrated success. 

Optimistic readers may think it wrong to comment on medical 
barbarism, but I do not wish to convey the idea that this medical 
barbarism is anything peculiar to the profession, or anything more 
than a special expression of the general inherited barbarism of the 
century, apparent alike in all classes, in governments, universities 
and churches, which require centuries to outgrow the psychic force 
of the dark past. 

The barbarian form of thought is scornfully jealous of human 
testimony when it urges any essential change or promises any 
brilliant progress, — especially when the methods are not physical 
but psychic. There is an irreconcilable hostility between barbarian 
and psychic thought. The barbarian mind enters the psychic field 
only to devastate it into the barren desolation of the hopeless meta- 
physics which has heretofore been called philosophy, as it enters the 
physiological field to cultivate the most obscure regions of pedantic 
research without regard to their real value, — preferring the dis- 
cussion of some unimportant appearance half revealed by the micro- 
scope to a discovery of the fundamental laws of life and principles 
of therapeutics. It prefers to use the animal intellect of the senses 
rather than the human intellect which develops philosophy, and, 
having no ethical inspiration, it is utterly reckless in the infliction of 
suffering. 

Hence, instead of experimenting upon well-developed man, in whom 



500 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

psycho-physiological life may be revealed, it prefers to torture animals, 
seeking pliysical phenomena alo7ie, and evolving from the laboratory 
full of howling animals an unprofitable record of half-understood, if 
not delusive, experiments. The world must decide between this 
barbarian method and that which is presented in my discoveries. 

Vivisection a failure. — The failure of barbarian vivisection 
was very easily and happily exposed by Caroline E. White in the 
Forum of March, 1890, from whose trenchant essay I make a few 
quotations as follows : — 

" When we began this controversy, some eight years ago, we were 
met by our opponents with an astonishing enumeration of immense 
benefits gained for the human race through experiments upon 
animals. 'How can you,' they said, 'object to vivisection, when to 
it we are indebted for the discovery of the circulation of the blood, 
of the double function of the spinal nerves, of the treatment of 
popliteal aneurism, of vaccination and of the anaesthetic properties 
of ether and chloroform.' When it was shown that not one of these 
discoveries was due to experiments upon animals, they were forced 
to quit the field for the nonce; but rallying under new banners, on 
which are inscribed Pasteurism, Listerism, ovariotomy, brain localiza- 
tion, microbe theory, etc., they seem prepared to do battle on new 
ground." 

But both Harvey and Sir Charles Bell denied that their dis- 
coveries were due to experiments on animals, and Bell says that he 
experimented on animals only to convince people when he could not 
convince them in any other way. The treatment of popliteal 
aneurism was known long before the experiments on animals by 
Hunter. Jenner discovered, vaccination, not by such experiments, 
but by the experience of milkmaids. Anaesthetics were discovered 
by American experiments on living human beings. Ovariotomy was 
shown by Sir Spencer Wells to have had nothing to do with experi- 
ments on animals, and in reference to brain localization — in which 
my experiments have the unanimous corroboration of all who are 
much acquainted with them — it is sufficient to say that the vivi- 
sectors have utterly failed to discover the chief functions of the 
brain, which are psychic, and have sought only the anatomical and 
physiological phenomena, with results which prove their fallacious 
method, for their inferences present a Babel of contradiction — in 
which Ferrier, Munk, Goltz, Scruff, Hitzig, Fritsch, Nothnagel, 
Sottman, Carville and Duret, etc., are in irreconcilable contradiction. 

As a specimen of the results of this blind and fallacious method, 
to which it may be said the entire medical profession is committed 
to-day by its colleges, let me quote what Prof. Munk says in "Die 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 501 

Functional der Grosshimrinde" in reference to Ferrier, who is really 
the ablest and most successful of modern vivisectors of the brain, 
viz. : — 

"All these statements and what depended on them as to the 
character of the disturbances induced by the operations, and recovery 
from them, were, as I said before, worthless, capricious interpreta- 
tions of the phenomena, for the animals were examined by Prof. 
Ferrier in a quite inadequate manner, and scarcely at all except at 
the time of general depression of the functions of the brain. If I 
had gone too far in making this declaration when I had only glanced 
through Ferrier's work, I should at once have repaired the wrong. 
But instead of that, as the experiments have turned out, I said rather 
too little to you then, for Ferrrier had not been lucky enough in his 
guesses to hit the mark even once, and all his statements have proved 
themselves false." 

I think this is unjust to Prof. Ferrier, but when two of the leading 
vivisectors find their experiments flatly contradictory what is such a 
method worth ? and what is the value of a method of exploring the 
psychic organ of the body by a method which ignores its chief 
functions and looks only to its subordinate functions, which are 
physiological, and in doing that falls into endless contradiction ? 

It claims success in locating cerebral diseases, but when Dr. 
Bennett stated, in 1884, that an epileptic patient had a tumor in the 
upper part of the fissure of Rolando, the surgical operation of Mr. 
Goodlee found it " under the gray matter of the ascending frontal 
convolution," which in a well-developed head would be three inches 
away from the supposed location. 

The veteran Brown-Sequard has shown, in his indefatigable 
researches, a host of facts which seem to contradict nearly everything 
that the whole corps of vivisectors profess to have discovered. The 
vast ocean of cerebral science, a larger area than all the old physiol- 
ogy, cannot be explored by using such a single plank for the voyage 
as vivisection. 

Here I might dismiss the claims of the colleges of the nineteenth 
century to reveal the mysteries of life by means of vivisection, but 
as the merits of this fallacious method are vigorously maintained by 
other false pretensions, to prevent the public indignation from closing 
the laboratories of torture and cruelty, it is worth while to show that 
vivisection has been one of those delusions which have so often 
misled the profession. 

Prof. Lawson Tait, F.R.C.S., of Edinburgh, the most eminent 
living ovariotomist and skilful surgeon, is in favor of the total 
abolition of vivisection, as a method of no value to the progress of 



502 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXI11. 

medical science. He said in a letter published Dec. 12, 1881 : 
" Like every member of my profession, I was brought up in the 
belief that by vivisection had been obtained almost every important 
fact in physiology, and that many of our most valued means of 
saving life and diminishing suffering had resulted from experiments 
on the lower animals. I now 'know that nothing; of the sort is true 
concerning the art of surgery ; and not only do I not believe that 
vivisection has helped the surgeon one bit, but I know that it has 
often led him astray." 

These are not the opinions of theoretical extremists, but of the 
soundest practical men. Sir Charles Bell ( C( On the Nervous System ") 
said: "The opening of living animals has done more to perpetuate 
error than to enforce the just views taken from anatomy and the 
natural sciences." 

Dr. Henry J. Bigelow, an eminent surgeon of Boston, said in a 
public address : " How few facts of considerable value to our race 
have of late years been extorted from the dreadful sufferings of dumb 
animals, the cold-blooded cruelties now more and more practised 
under the authority of science." 

Sir Wm. Fergusson, an eminent surgeon, in testifying before a 
Royal Commission, said : " I am not aware of any of these experi- 
ments on the lower animals having led to the mitigation of pain, or 
to improvement as regards surgical details." 

G. Macilwain, F.R.C.S., maintained that vivisection had hindered 
more rational methods of research, and produced great practical 
mischief in surgery, of which he gives an example in the experi- 
ments on dogs to determine the value of "acupressure" instead of 
the ligature for closing arteries. It was supposed to be successful, 
but proved a failure, and was abandoned for the reason that experi- 
ments on dogs do not illustrate the constitution of man ; and yet 
this miserable method, which cannot even illustrate the vital proc- 
esses of an artery, is the great reliance of the medical profession 
for illustrating the laws of the human brain, while ignoring its chief 
functions. 

It ought to be a final deathblow to this medical folly that the 
Royal College of Surgeons in London a few years ago decided not 
to allow experiments on animals in the new building about to be 
erected, and not to allow the funds to be used for any such experi- 
ments elsewhere. 

The failure of vivisection leaves nothing but the meagre results of 
pathology, the dissection of morbid brains, to elucidate the mysteries 
of life, and no one well acquainted with its progress would believe 
that pathological dissections could in a thousand years demonstrate 
the functions of the brain. 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 503 

The hopes of mankind must rest upon the revelations of Psychom- 
etry, which give us the function of every locality, and the con- 
firmation of these revelations in experiment upon the living man in 
his most rational normal condition. 

The following experiments are given as an illustration of the 
development of local functions in impressible constitutions. I do 
not affirm that such results are readily obtainable from all persons, 
but that a large portion of mankind — from one-fourth to one-half, and 
in hot climates nearly all, are capable of presenting these phe- 
nomena. 

MISCELLANEOUS EXPERIMENTS. 

It is easy for those who wish to realize the truth of Sarcognomy to 
do it by the use of electricity upon an impressible temperament. I 
will briefly describe some of the experiments with which I instructed 
my class, June 6, 1889, nearly all of whom realized similar psychic 
influences in experiments on the body. 

Dr. P., a very intelligent and well-educated practising physician 
having a well-developed and well-balanced head, consented to undergo 
the experiments, dressing in a suitable operating robe. 

The positive pole was first applied by himself to the hypochondria! 'WW 

I while I held the negative upon the healthy region of the shoulder. 

This he readily realized as an agreeable, bracing influence, beneficial 

V to the whole person, and somewhat alterative in the abdominal region. 

Then the positive was applied upon the intellectual region of the 
b sternum and the negative behind the middle of the arm on the trunk, 

Y producing, as he described it, a bracing and intellectual influence at 
first, with a gradual diminution of the intellectual activity after the 
first minute, as the influence of the current was established. 

The negative was now transferred to the lower tibial region, and 
the effect was a prompt diminution of intellectual action and a cool, 
sleepy feeling. 

The positive was next applied in front of the ileum (the melancholic 
region) and the negative in the axilla, with the production of a very 
pleasant, quiet, cheerful feeling, less vigorous than the influence of 
the shoulder. 

To show the effect of Faradic currents properly applied, the Fara- 
dic electrodes were applied upon the shoulders (the Health region), 
producing a very beneficial, bracing influence, with more quietness 
than when the hypochondrium was touched by the galvanic current. 
Applied next upon the lower margin of the ribs on each side (Region 
of Irritability), the effect was very disagreeable, disturbing and ner- 
vous. 



t 



504 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

They were then placed upon the shoulder to stimulate the region of 
Patience or Serenity, but proved to be decidedly stimulating and stir- 
ring, owing to being placed too near the base of the neck so as to 
reach the passional and turbulent region of the brain. Moving them 
about an inch farther out, the pleasant, tranquil influence of the region 
of Patience was promptly realized. The electrodes were then applied 
upon the deltoid muscle (the region of Energy), and its rousing effect 
was quickly felt and expressed, — the effect being more marked than 
in any previously tried. 

Applied next upon the mammae, the delightful and bright influence 
of Love was not only realized but was fully expressed in his counte- 
nance and manner. Next applied upon Love and Health (the mam- 
mae and centre of scapula), the effect was similar but much more 
substantial, — the emotion being associated with strength of character. 
Applied upon the back near the lower margin of the ribs on each side, 
he described the effect as producing a substantial business character, 
free from any elevated emotions. 

On the back of the pelvis near or upon the sacro-iliac symphisis, 
the effect was a very gloomy, unsocial, unfriendly disposition, unfitted 
for society. The entire experiments occupied not much over forty- 
five minutes. 

July 23, 1890, I began a course of illustrative experiments with Dr. 
W., a gentleman moderately impressible, of a calm, unexcitable, taci- 
turn temperament and sound judgment. The experiments were con- 
ducted to obtain a record of results that might confidently be expected 
by my readers in similar cases, but not such as arise in the higher 
degrees of impressibility, when the phenomena occur very promptly 
and the mental and physical phenomena are abundant. The experi- 
ments occupied each from three to ten minutes. 

1. The negative pole of the galvano-magnetic (primary) current 
on the shoulders (Health), the positive on the mammae (Love). 
The effect he pronounced " stimulating, refreshing, elevating." 

2. The poles reversed. The resulting condition was calm and 
amiable, less stimulating, — comparatively negative. 

3. The positive pole at hypochondria (Disease) and the negative 
on the shoulders (Health). The first impression was disturbing and 
unpleasant from local impression before the effect of the current was 
realized, but in one minute he felt that it w T as " beneficial and strength- 
ening," the " shoulders strong," the "head clear and bright," with a 
" disposition to be active" and increase of perspiration, — feeling as 
he does <: when at work." 

4. Poles reversed. He feels "less active, less warm," but nothing 
unpleasant, no impairment of strength. The tendency of the experi- 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 505 

ment is to diminish the energies and increase the nervous sensibility 
at first but ultimately produce great depression, which was not realized 
in him, as his firm, healthy temperament was not sufficiently affected 
through only one side of the body in so short a time. There are 
many in whom such an experiment would have produced very great 
prostration, as it would in him if I had applied a stronger current for 
a longer time. 

5. Positive on upper part of sternum (intellectual region), negative 
on lower half of tibia (aquatic). In one minute it is felt as very 
" depressing ; a general letting down, mentally and physically." " Could 
not be very active." " Temperature not cold." (The lack of cooling was 
due to a moderate current affecting only one side of the body. When 
the Faradic current was used on both sides on the tibia, the cooling 
was distinct.) After seven minutes he felt mentally dull ; disposed to 
be quiet and drowsy. Strength not affected. 

6. Poles reversed. In one minute a very perceptible difference. 
" This is more agreeable." In three minutes feels clearer and brighter 
all over. " General improvement of feelings." " An elevating influ- 
ence." 

7. Positive to tibia (aquatic), negative on shoulders (Health). 
"This is an improvement on the last." " An elevating influence." 
" Feel it mostly in the muscular system." 

8. Positive to middle of sternum (intellectual), negative on back 
behind arm just above its middle (Repose). "This is agreeable, — 
nothing depressing ; a quiet condition, nothing active ; very agreeable, 
— could rest with pleasure ; would enjoy repose, quiet or rest ; intellect 
dull." After five minutes the negative was moved anteriorly a little 
(upon Coolness). After two minutes feels much the same but a little 
cooler. 

9. Negative moved two inches lower, nearly as low as elbow (Region 
of Force). In two minutes, "not so dull or drowsy ; feels a bracing, 
active influence, like a tonic." I inform him of the value of combining 
Coolness and Force in treating fevers. 

10. Positive on Coolness, negative on hypogastric region (Calorifi- 
cation). This quickly produces a feeling of heat all over the body, 
with increase of perspiration. 

n. After four minutes poles reversed for a minute. It is "more 
agreeable and cooling, a better feeling," generally. 

12. Negative to lower end of sternum (Somnolent and Ideal), pos- 
itive to antagonistic region on dorsal spine. Agreeable ; stimulating 
and brightening to mind ; pleasant ; tends to quiet meditation ; 
brightens spiritual, intuitive faculties ; favors mediumship ; inclined to 
close the eyes." After eight minutes drowsiness begins. 



506 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

13. Faradic currents — poles on end of sternum (Somnolence) and 
back (Repose). In one minute a drowsy, sleepy condition. " Feels 
it more than the last." In three minutes increasing drowsiness. 

14. Faradic poles on both tibia (aquatic). Feels a "cold, apathetic 
condition ; " a "general feeling of coldness and dulness ; " breathing 
slower. 

15. Both Faradic poles on shoulders (Health). Feels it instantly ; 
"bracing, refreshing, and every way invigorating." 

16. Faradic poles on upper dorsal and middle lumbar region. Feels 
as good as before, but the effect is chiefly on the muscular system ; 
strengthening; "the other was more agreeable mentally." 

17. Faradic poles on Repose. A dull sleepy feeling : "I could go 
to sleep at once." 

18. Faradic poles on tibia and Repose on right side. Feels "much 
like the last;" "cooling and sleepy, more cooling;" " this is best for a 
cool, sleepy condition." 

19. Faradic poles on ribs, about four inches below mammae. 
Intending to reach gastric region, it proved too high, being on the 
ribs. Effect unpleasantly exciting, being Region of Excitability. Poles 
removed below ribs. " Nothing disagreeable ; " " stimulates abdominal 
organs agreeably." 

20. Faradic poles on each side below umbilicus. "Feel it in 
bowels ; promotes their action." A little lower, feels it in the urinary 
organs. One pole on lumbar region, one on Defecation, "makes a 
commotion in the bowels." 

21. Faradic poles on margin of ribs laterally (Irritability). "Affects 
respiration ; a stimulating condition ; stimulus rather agreeable." 
After three minutes : " Exciting ; begins to be irritating." (Asks to 
stop it as disagreeable. It would have been disagreeable at first in an 
irritable and impressible temperament.) 

22. Faradic poles near base of neck (Patience), on summit of 
shoulder. "A good influence; first-rate; a great improvement men- 
tally and physically ; as agreeable as anything." This was in har- 
mony with his predominant tendencies, and the result was imme- 
diate. 

23. Faradic poles to mammae (Love). " Very good ; first-rate ; a 
good pleasant condition, elevating, bracing to physical and mental, 
would make one social, happy, lively." 

24. Faradic poles to mammae and shoulder (Love and Health). 
"Equally good, but more bracing physically." 

25. Faradic poles to region under jaw (Insanity), a region very 
small and inactive in Mr. W. Effect " rousing, exciting, restless, 
depressing to mind." 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. $0? 

26. Faradic poles below axilla (Sanity). Feels " a great deal better; 
it brings to the mind a fine feeling.'' 

27. (Second day). Faradic poles to exterior quarter of calf (Aerial). 
" A good deal of force, but does not affect the mind ; all physical ; 
feels like travelling; stimulates muscles of legs; one could climb a 
mountain or a tree ; could not study or stay in house ; would seek the 
open fields." 

28. Lateral surface of the knee. " More restless, but not much 
force ; quite unpleasant." On the patella and on one side of it. " A 
restless, uneasy, mischievous feeling." On the tendons at the back 
of the knee. " An ugly condition," fit for violence and lawlessness, — 
41 ready to fight, lawless, reckless." 

29. On the trochanters, summit of femur. " Feel it in the limbs ; 
stimulating ; stimulates to action ; a feeling of boldness ; fit for 
battle." 

30. Posterior summit of thigh. "Gives force, more than the last; 
more strength ; less impulsive ; fit for any undertaking of great power." 
(This makes a powerful combination with the summit of the dorsal 
spine.) 

31. Middle posterior of thigh. " Muscular force, but rather lawless ; 
tends to rowdyism." 

32. Middle of inside of thigh. "Acts on muscular system ; more 
for frolic than for work ; tends to dissipation ; intemperance ; would 
seek low company ; would make a good tramp ; lascivious ; don't care 
for dress or decency." 

33. Middle of hips. " An active muscular condition ; mentally 
exciting ; couldn't study well ; want to be on the move ; would like 
to talk ; somewhat fidgety and excitable ; not really disagreeable." 

34. Between ribs and hips (Baseness). " Rather unpleasant; 
would like to be let alone and get away from everybody ; not in good 
condition for anything." [How would you make a living ?] " Think 
I would steal ; not energy enough to fight a man." 

34J. Just back of Baseness. " Not much energy, but better than the 
last ; too lazy to work ; would prefer robbery or burglary." 

35. Further back, on each side of spine. " Better energy ; would 
assist to be a pugilist, but not of a low order ; gives courage." On 
spine, same level, substantially the same. A little lower makes it a 
little stronger. 

36. On deltoid muscles. "Very good influence ; ready to take hold 
of anything useful ; rousing, elevating." 

370 On sacro-iliac symphisis. (Junction of sacrum and ilium.) 
" Rather disagreeable, both physically and mentally ; rather lawless ; 
disgusting ; disgusted with everything ; would find fault ; peevish ; 



50S INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

particular about food, not particular about dress ; disgusted with 
everything ; tends to nausea; couldn't stand a sea voyage." 

$8. Middle of buttocks, posterior aspect (Hatred). " Much like 
the last, but not so nauseating ; more force ; would not be agreeable ; 
prefer retirement ; don't care for company ; would be quick to resent 
and revengeful." 

39. One pole as the last and one on mammae. "A much more 
elevating influence ; makes things brighter, better, more agreeable." 

40. On back above 38 and behind middle of hips. " Disagreeable ; 
ready to fight anybody, and kill, too; fight with any weapons." 

41. Summit of arms, posterior aspect (Self-respect). " A cheer- 
ful, agreeable feeling ; qualifies for action in something useful ; would 
like to lead." 

42. On back just behind locations of Repose. " Social ; agreeable." 

43. At same level on spine. " Active in society or business." 

44. Two inches lower on spine. " Practical energy for a mechanic, 
to take hold and do work." 

45. Back of the elbows. "Very disagreeable ; ugly ; quarrelsome." 

46. Acromion process. " Something like self-esteem (41) ; agree- 
able, hardy, fearless, active, fit for any undertaking." 

47. Middle of humerus, posterior aspect. " Would help to carry 
on anything; bold and self-reliant." 

48. Near upper dorsal vertebrae, on each side. " Great energy ; 
hardens the muscles and fortifies the whole person for any under- 
taking, making fearless and heroic ; much the same as the acromion 
process." 

49. Poles on Health, for his benefit, to restore from the fatigue of 
experiment. Effects delightful and restorative. 

50. (July 26.) Poles on chest exterior to mammae ; circulation and 
respiration stimulated. The poles transferred to upper dorsal 
(Oratory). Breathing better ; influence more agreeable. 

51. Poles on inside forearms, two inches below elbow. "Avery 
pleasant, agreeable influence, elevating to sentiments ; makes a social 
condition ; bracing to whole system ; good influence on digestive 
system." On the wrist and in the hand. " Similar but not so strong ; 
suitable for social or business life." 

52. Anterior to elbow on tendons of flexor muscles. " Bracing, 
good, elevating ; assists a speaker or person of social influence." 

53. Outside of middle of humerus. " A good influence, more 
business-like than social ; rather showy ; attentive to dress ; would 
like to be conspicuous." 

54. Prominence of front of shoulder. Feels " decided, firm, not 
very active ; firm, solid, favorable to application, good for a student." 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SAKCOGNOMY. 5^9 

55. Top of shoulders. " Similar to last ; a firm, solid man ; loves to 
work, would not be idle." 

56. Below Adhesiveness. (Aggressive.) " Bracing, invigorating, 
energetic ; might act too quick sometimes." 

57. Each side of umbilicus. "Deepens respiration and affects 
bowels." Just below umbilicus. ''Affects the breathing much more; 
produces deep breathing." 

58. On groin and thigh. " Rather bold and fearless." On groin 
alone. "Stimulates sexual vigor." 

59. On instep. " Quiet, dull, sleepy." On upper surface over 
instep. " Not so dull ; agreeable ; cooling." 

November 5, 1889, I recorded the following experiments with 
Dr. J. P. C, a gentleman of clear intelligence and habits of inves- 
tigation. 

1st. The positive pole of a small Sampson battery (magneto- 
galvanic or primary current) was applied to the hypochondrium on 
the left side, and the negative to the middle of the shoulder-blades 
on the left. At first there was too much muscular disturbance, and 
the current was then moderated. He reports the negative electrode 
as quite warm and slightly painful. It was substituted by a broader 
electrode. Within four minutes he described the effect as being 
" stimulating, bracing, restorative, enlivening ; a good appetizer ; 
strengthening and quieting." 

2d. The positive was applied on the sternum, about the level of 
the third rib, and the negative below the shoulder-blade, correspond- 
ing to the location of Adhesiveness and Repose. For two or three 
minutes no distinct effect appeared ; the electrodes felt warm. Then 
the effect appeared rather pleasing, though not marked, and the 
breathing appeared deeper. It was continued fully eight minutes 
longer and felt rather quieting. " A satisfying sensation ; disposed to 
sit and enjoy myself, at peace with all mankind ; a friendly feeling ; 
very little mentality ; somewhat social ; it diminishes mental activity ; 
a healthy feeling ; disposed to take life easy and enjoy it ; a good 
moral influence ; a friendly feeling." 

3d. The negative was applied to the dorsal summit of the spine, 
and the positive below the left hypochondrium (Region of Relaxa- 
tion), and continued about eight minutes. He found it "stimulat- 
ing ; makes me more active ; would not sit down doing nothing ; it 
stimulates energy and courage and gives a sense of increased power." 

4th. The negative was then shifted to the deltoid muscle of the 
shoulder (Energy). It felt very warming ; the whole arm was 
warmed down to the elbow, and this attracted his attention chiefly. 
It felt as if a warm flannel had been applied. The mental condition 



5IO INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

he pronounced active, with "a more active condition of the nervous 
system." The feeling was "similar to the last, but slightly different, 
having less activity or activity only in one line ; more favorable to 
application, steady industry and concentration." This was continued 
about fifteen minutes, to procure a distinction from the previous 
very similar experiment, which roused the region of maximum force. 

5th. The positive was placed in front of the ilium (Melancholy), 
and the negative in the axilla, against the ribs, covering Tranquillity 
and Cheerfulness. The positive was not felt, but the negative 
disturbed the muscles actively until the current was moderated. He 
said : " I feel like letting the world wag ; a sort of relaxing feeling 
compared to the last ; I feel like taking things easy ; soothing, quiet- 
ing ; a state of passive enjoyment ; peaceful, with enjoyment of 
life ; cheerful, contented, satisfied with almost any condition of life." 
Time about twenty minutes. 

6th. Previous condition reversed. Negative in hypogastric region 
(Melancholy). No change perceived for two minutes, then: " I don't 
like this so well — it makes a feeling of unquietness. I feel as though 
this don't amount to anything." (Laughs at the idea.) " I shouldn't 
enjoy life well ; the feeling is depressing ; it makes me low-spirited, 
but I am not easily depressed ; don't often have the blues. It would 
make me distrustful and put a damper upon any business transaction, 
fearing it would not succeed ; would not be contented in any kind of 
business." 

7th. Both poles applied on the middle of shoulders (Health), with 
Faradic current. " It arouses the energies, clears the mentality, stim- 
ulates the business energies. This is the best of all. It stimulates 
the whole system, makes it active, as though I would like to be doing 
something actively, pushing ahead." 

8th. After ten minutes the positive current was received through 
the north pole of a magnet, when he said : " The whole action is 
toned down, softer, milder, more permeating and agreeable ; the local 
sensation is not like sharp pins, but gentler ; the general effect more 
comfortable, not so disturbing, but with greater power ; a better, 
stronger force ; more agreeable. I could bear this three times longer 
than the other ; that would in time become irritating, this would not ; 
it is decidedly better." 

Experiments with electricity, Nov. 2g, 1887. — Dr. A. H. F. ; very 
sensitive. 

1. Positive on Calorification ; negative on Coolness. Recognizes 
the effect as cooling ; felt a momentary perspiration, which promptly 
ceased ; hands feel very cold. 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SAKCOGNOMY. 5 I I 

2. Positive on Coolness ; negative on Calorification. In one minute 
feels increase of heat ; in two minutes, perspiration all over body. 

3. (8. 10 p. m.) Positive to Calorification ; negative electrodes on 
tibial regions. (8. II.) Feels cooler, but not as decidedly as when on 
Coolness. (8. 15.) Same result distinctly, but less refrigerative than 
Coolness. 

4. (8. 16.) Negative to Cooiness ; positive to Calorification. Cools 
more rapidly than last experiment and is soothing. (8. 18.) Pleas- 
ant, cooling effect and no perspiration. 

5. (8. 20.) Positive on middle of sternum ; negative to region of 
Repose. (8. 22.) Sedative to mental faculties ; begins to feel drowsy. 
(8.24.) Would go to sleep if in bed. (8.25.) Feels dull and sleepy. 

6. (8.28.) Positive above, on Coolness ; negative two inches below 
umbilicus. (8.30.) Heating ; lively feeling ; breathes very easily ; res- 
piration deeper ; feel that I need more breath ; a cheerful influence ; 
could laugh easily. 

7- (8-35-) Negative on thighs, one-third above the knee ; positive 
on the region of Tranquillity. Proves too exciting, and the operator 
applies his hand to conduct the current to Tranquillity. The current 
was slight, and the influence of the hand predominating changed the 
effect, which at first was exciting, and it became very quieting. See- 
ing this, I had the electrode replaced instead of the hand in contact, 
at 8.43. At 8.44 he felt very restless, as if he wanted to move around, 
from a stimulating influence. (8.45.) Reversed : positive electrode on 
left thigh ; negative electrodes on Tranquillity. In two minutes a 
very different feeling ; very quieting. It would be agreeable to go to 
sleep under such an influence. 

8. (8.50.) Positive on Coolness and Sleep ; negative between mam- 
mae and lower part of sternum. In a few minutes feels a drowsy, 
trance-like condition, as if becoming unconscious. Drops the elec- 
trodes, applies them again, and soon removes them, saying he feared 
he should tumble down. This produces the mesmeric condition. 

9. The Faradic poles applied to the front 6f each thigh roused him 
and removed all the last influences. 

10. Faradic poles on Health. Restorative ; very pleasant and invig- 
orating. Laughs. 

11. Faradic poles covered with Hydrangea extract. Applied one to 
kidneys and one to Health, at his request, as he had been affected in 
kidneys ; produced a very fine restorative effect. 

With H. M., a man of narrow head and un impressible tempera- 
ment, I tried several experiments with twelve zinc carbon cells, 
holding the positive in his left hand. The most distinct effect that 
he experienced was the warming effect when the negative pole was 



512 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

applied on Calorification below the umbilicus. At the epigastric 
region of Somnolence he felt the drowsy effect, which ceased when 
the electrode was moved higher or lower. 

On the thorax, behind and below the left nipple, he felt the exciting 
effect ; and a very soothing, quieting influence when the electrode was 
applied at the organ of Patience on the summit of the head, which 
was well developed. He also felt a moderate exciting or restless 
influence on the posterior quarter of the neck, and a very quieting 
influence at the organ of Tranquillity (parietal arch). On the brow, 
at the root of the nose, he felt a mental excitement and flashing in 
the eyes. On the opposite occipital region he recognized a dull 
influence. On the amiable region of the top head he felt a quiet 
influence, but on the combative region, which was small, he recognized 
nothing. It was quite apparent that he recognized influences in 
proportion to the development of the organs. The visceral region 
of the brain was small, and hence, though he recognized other 
influences in less than a minute, a ten minutes' current to the 
abdomen over the colon produced no internal effect that he could 
recognize. I tried the same upon myself and felt only the deeper 
respiration which belongs to the hypogastric region. 

I found the most responsive point in his system was the phrenic 
locality on the side, which stimulated the diaphragm vigorously. He 
felt not much influence at the hypogastric location of Respiration, but 
felt Calorification very readily. 

Upon Mr. K., the very vigorous, robust sensitive, I tested all the 
points connected with respiration. A current from side to side at 
the phrenic locality, on the lower ribs, affected him powerfully. 

A current from the hand to hypogastric Respiration produced an 
increase of deep breathing, but not equal to the currents through the 
side. 

The current from the phrenic location on the back, about the 7th 
dorsal vertebra, to hypogastric Respiration produced stronger res- 
piration, but not of so impulsive and involuntary a character as 
when applied on the side. It seemed to be of a more healthy and 
vigorous character. 

The current from the phrenic nerve downwards to hypogastric 
Respiration was the feeblest of all, nor was it near as vigorous 
when sent to the side as the horizontal currents. Evidently the 
lateral current would be the most powerful in rousing him from 
asphyxia. A similar influence was produced by applying the fingers 
on the head just over the cavity of the ear. In others in whom 
Irritability was less developed, however, I have found the current 
from the back of the neck to the hypogastric seat of Respiration 
most effective. 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 5 1 3 

To reach the heart I applied the poles on each side about four 
inches obliquely downward and backward from the nipple. The 
response was prompt ; it was both exciting and invigorating to the 
heart. This point had been felt quite distinctly also by H. M. Next 
applying the electrodes on each side, at and above the nipples and a 
little nearer the median line, the heart was excited also, but with a 
weak, fluttering feeling, which belongs to the emotions connected with 
that part of the chest. Love is always supposed to affect the heart. 
It is true in Sarcognomy, but it is a softening and enfeebling action. 
It is courage and the violent passions which give it strength. 

I made several experiments in applying the two electrodes near 
together on the body and on the head, with the galvanic and with the 
primary helix current, and the effects were similar to what I had 
been accustomed to produce by the hand. When I held the negative 
pole in my hand (he holding the positive), and applied my hands to 
his head or body, he recognized the effect as being greater than when 
I used the hand without electricity. 

As the hand resembles the negative pole in its effects and the 
negative pole reinforces the hand, the question arises how the posi- 
tive pole would influence the power of the hand. Reason would 
indicate that the hand would modify the positive influence, making it 
more general and less dispersive, — a beneficial stimulus, — which is 
the fact. 

My own electric impressibility is of quite a low grade, but in my 
personal experience of the hygienic current I have realized its 
character. I had been suffering from a disturbance of the liver, 
producing fever and oppression of the brain, which made literary 
labor irksome. I tried this current for twenty or thirty minutes, and 
realized greater freedom of respiration and greater activity of brain, 
especially of the upper region of the brain, producing a normal 
development of character and a general feeling of pleasure and 
comfort. The liver was not so much improved, for it was an old 
offender, but it troubled me much less and it had a healthier feeling 
next morning, while the happy normal condition of the general con- 
stitution remained, giving me a personal experience of the ethical 
power of the hygienic current. 

A partially insane patient to whom I applied the current passed a 
more quiet night than usual. I also gave her the cephalic current 
until it produced a strong impression upon the upper posterior part 
of the head. 

Having had an attack of irritation of the liver I ventured, as an 
experiment, to send a galvanic current from six cells through the liver 
from front to the spine (the posterior pole a little higher than the 



514 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

anterior). Under this influence, just before retiring, I found my 
temperature elevated and almost feverish, and a wakeful state of 
excitability established which made it necessary for me to rise very 
early to counteract it, which I did by currents to the region of Health 
and to the regions of Coolness and Sleep. This removed the fever 
and I slept very soundly until roused by the breakfast bell with an 
unfinished nap. During the whole forenoon I felt that it would be 
very easy and agreeable to renew my sleep. 

To test the electric transmission of medical influences, I con- 
structed a medical rheophore by inserting through a cork a stout 
wire in a tube of galvanized iron closed at the ends and filled with a 
solution of aloes. Through this I passed a current of six to twelve 
cells from one hand to the other of a sensitive and intelligent lady 
who was of constipated habit. She recognized the peculiar influence 
of aloes, not knowing the contents of the rheophore, and said that it 
would prove cathartic if continued. I tried the same with another 
patient equally sensitive and somewhat constipated, for a few minutes 
in the afternoon, until she recognized an influence on the bowels and 
a bitterness in the throat and nostrils. Next day' she complained 
that she had felt the disturbing influence all the evening. I tried the 
experiment with her again (substituting hydrastis for aloes), less 
than five minutes. She felt a strong tonic influence as she expressed 
it, as if she was being charged with power, which might be beneficial 
if she did not get an overdose, — taking her hands off alternately to 
moderate the tension. 

Using the same rheophore, on another occasion, I placed it in the 
hands of a gentleman whose psychometric capacity was sufficient to 
judge of anything held in his hands. In less than two minutes he 
recognized its tendency to act on the bowels. Then connecting it 
with a positive electrode from six cells, while he held the negative in 
his other hand, he recognized the influence much more promptly and 
completely, giving a good description of the action of aloes and 
saying that he felt the influence three times as forcibly as before the 
apolication of the current. 

ILLUSTRATIVE EXPERIMENTS. 

It is over forty-two years since I made the experiments which 
developed the principles of Sarcognomy. I kept no record of their 
details. My publications simply presented the results, and my 
lectures presented the verification in the experiments before auditors. 

It would have been interesting, no doubt, to many, if I had recorded 
all the steps of the investigation, — the experiments, the reasoning, 
the difficulties and the triumphs of the research in the first develop- 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 515 

merit of the Science of Sarcognomy, the revelation of mysteries, 
the illumination of medical philosophy. But I thought only of the 
grand results, and knew that whatever I discovered others would in 
time verify. Hence I attached no importance to my individual labors 
and the incidents of the investigation. 

There are many who treasure up and never forget the incidents of 
their personal experience and achievements, who are inexhaustible in 
the narration of what they have done or witnessed, but I have no 
such ability or inclination ; I would gather and carry with me the 
harvest of great truths which are to make the world wiser and 
better, but I leave behind all irrelevant and personal matter. Content 
to retain principles, I seldom revert to the experiments and incidents 
of their development ; and I have preserved no record of my early 
experiments even in memory. Nor was there any temptation or 
opportunity, at the time, to publish the incidents while they still had 
to me the interest of a marvellous novelty, which they have long 
lost. 

All that I did was in an intellectual solitude. There was no 
channel in current literature in which I might have floated the 
product of my labors. A cold inhospitality repels the new and the 
marvellous. As stranger is synonymous with enemy among bar- 
barian races ; so it is, in the present half-civilized age, a strangely 
new thought or discovery meets everywhere with indifference or 
aversion, and I soon learned to desist from any attempt to familiarize 
the readers of periodicals with that new world of science and 
philosophy in which I had entered, — for even when the prejudice of 
an editor has been overcome, the prejudice of his readers is equally 
formidable. 

Believing, however, that the present time affords a small audience 
for the honest and successful explorer of mysteries, who may listen 
to his narrative with interest, I shall introduce in this volume a 
statement of experiments which may give the reader a more vivid 
idea of the elementary facts of Sarcognomy and partially compensate 
for my failure originally to record such illustrations. 

To produce a good experimental illustration of anything we need 
the best materials. For experiments on the human constitution we 
require the highest sensibility, impressibility, and intuitive quickness 
of conception, by means of which we promptly attain results which 
would be unattainable under ordinary circumstances. 

The entire development of Anthropology was successful, because I 
availed myself of such methods, which others had neglected. 

The electrical experiments which I shall here record were made on 
one of the highest degree of sensitive impressibility and confirmed 



$l6 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

by repetition on others. They were not the experiments of discovery,, 
which were made without electricity, but were the illustration by the 
electric agency of what I had already established by the nervauric 
process, and therefore were more concise and clear than if they had 
been an attempt at discovery with no previous understanding of the 
subject. I had but to verify with galvanic plates and Faradic 
currents what the hand had already established. 

Wishing to demonstrate the effect of galvanic plates, I connected 
a plate of iron a little over two inches square with a silver coin about 
one inch in diameter by insulated copper wire, and selected for 
experiment Mr. K., a very sensitive yet very vigorous gentleman in 
the prime of life, from whose quick impressibility I could get better 
results in five minutes than others could yield in twenty, and from 
appliances that few could feel distinctly. 

I applied the iron plate to the forehead and the silver to the back 
of the neck. In less than a minute he began to feel dull and drowsy 
from the dispersing influence of the positive pole upon the intellect- 
ual faculties. 

Reversing the plates, he immediately felt wakeful and bright. 

Applying the iron on the adhesive unintellectual region and the 
silver at the root of the nose, he felt disposed to close his eyes and 
exercise the interior vision. " It comes nearer putting me to sleep 
than anything ever did before," was his remark. 

Applying the plates on each temple, an inch behind the brow, he 
said the effect was similar but greater, — an inclination to go into 
trance. I perceived that his mental condition was very bright. 

Applying the iron plate at the back of the neck and the silver at 
the chin, he felt a heating and exciting influence, saying, " I would 
soon be in a perspiration." 

Applying the iron on the spine near the kidneys and the silver 
about three or four inches below the umbilicus (Calorification), he 
felt a general stimulation and heat, similar to the effects at the chin. 

Reversing the plates, the effects were somewhat confused, as the 
: ron plate had 'left some irritation ; but placing the silver on the side 
behind the middle of the arm, he soon felt a soothing and cooling" 
influence. 

The iron at the lumbo-sacral region and silver at the perineum 
produced a decided erotic influence. 

The iron at the angle of the lower jaw and silver just above the 
parietal arch over the ear vertically — the surface being wet — (Region 
of Tranquillity and Cheerfulness), he felt disposed to study, and in a 
calm, cheerful state of mind. 

The iron plate, however, being disproportionally large, the peculiar 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 517 

irritative effect of the metal was felt at each location, and slightly 
disturbed the course of the experiment ; and when I applied it to the 
region of Disease on the cheek this effect was so strong that I dis- 
continued the experiments to procure a better apparatus. 

(Ap. 21.) I had prepared a silver plate four and three-fourths by 
three inches connected to a zinc (galvanized iron) plate three by two 
and a half, faced with a piece of cloth saturated with brine. 

Healtli and Disease. — The clothing being removed, I placed the 
zinc plate in the hypochondriac region (marked Disease on the map) 
and the silver on the shoulder (region marked Health). He said : 
" This stirs up the liver, — if the liver was torpid this would start it and 
make the bowels carry off the effect. The influence is very pleasant, 
— it would drive away the blues and make one look on the cheerful 
side of things. It is invigorating. If I were dull and moping, this 
would stir me up to go to work. It is invigorating, cheering and 
pleasant." 

After three or four minutes, I reversed the position of the plates. 
He began in less than a minute to express the effect: " I don't like 
this. It would put me in the dumps, — to feel like suicide. It's 
decidedly oppressive ; makes me feel a swelling and fulness in the 
region of the liver and stomach. I feel tight across the bowels. I 
feel as if I was poisoned. I feel as a poisoned puppy looks." 

The plates were then restored to the first position, the silver plate 
on Health, which elicited the remark : "This takes all the bad feeling 
away. I am growing more cheerful, bright and hopeful. I could bear 
trouble better under this influence. Under the other, everything 
would trouble me." 

Such is an example of the prompt and thorough effect which may 
be realized with the most impressible, — the class that yield readily to 
the nervaura of the hand. Others require a longer time and stronger 
current, but the best demonstration for the evolution of science is 
where we have the best material for experiment. Electric science 
has been much indebted to the delicacy of the frog galvanoscope, 
though its function has been limited to the discovery of delicate 
currents. The human galvanoscope is vastly superior in importance, 
because it can reveal the laws of physiology and psychology. 

This foregoing experiment teaches us that the current to the 
hypochondrium is injurious, dangerous and capable of doing a vast 
deal of mischief. Dr. Beard avoided this mischief by currents to 
the epigastrium, which may be beneficial if cautiously administered ) 
but which are liable to eliciting the morbid hypochondriac influence 
if continued or applied with vigor. Dr. Althaus found it necessary 
to discontinue currents to the epigastric region on account of their 



$ l8 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

injurious effects. It is presumable that he used a stronger or more 
prolonged current, and did not carefully avoid the hypochondria. 
The mesmerizers formerly did a great deal of mischief in producing 
the somniloquent and clairvoyant state, by prolonging their passes 
down the thorax as far as the margin of the ribs, the patients being 
sometimes sickened, nauseated or thrown into convulsions. Beard 
and Rockwell say : "A medical friend, who by our suggestion treated 
a case of ulcer of the stomach by the galvanic current, informed us 
that a very mild current from a few zinc carbon cells, which gave no 
sensation on the surface whatever, would, after the electrodes had 
been kept in position a few minutes, one on the epigastric and the 
other on the back, cause, all of a sudden and without any warning, a 
painful shock, as though a strong current had been suddenly inter- 
rupted in the metallic part of the circuit. This phenomenon occurred 
so often that he abandoned the treatment." 

It is remarkable that electricians have gathered so little knowledge 
of the effects of electric currents near the middle of the trunk. 
Passing backward they are apt to accumulate a morbid irritability, as 
in the above case, and passing forward they are liable to produce 
morbid and exhausting effects. 

The demonstration of the morbific and healthful regions of the 
body is not an isolated matter, but supplements my discovery of the 
same in the head, which constitutes a part of the systematic and 
philosophic science of Anthropology, which is also amply verified in 
the history of diseases. 

It teaches us the controlling principle of true electro-therapeutics, 
that currents should be as far as possible upward and backward, and 
only to a limited extent downward and forward, — a principle which 
blind empiricism failed to discover. 

Moreover, it teaches us that the best position for the negative pole 
is on the superior posterior surfaces, and the best position for the 
positive is on the anterior inferior. The abdominal surface generally 
is a good location for the positive, but the specially appropriate location 
for introducing the current is at the hypochondria. This is what 
electricians have entirely failed to discover. A current from the 
hypochondria to the shoulders, the thighs or any part of the spinal 
column is highly invigorating. To the region of Coolness it is highly 
beneficial in fever — to the anterior or tibial surface of the leg it is 
eminently beneficial in pneumonia — to the summit of the dorsal 
portion of the spine it invigorates the brain — to the middle dorsal 
region it invigorates the lungs and heart — to the lower dorsal region 
all the abdominal viscera : and in doing this it sustains the tone of 
the nervous system, overcoming all morbid irritability and depression 
of bodv or mind. 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMV. 519 

2d Experiment. — Abdominal region. The zinc was placed on 
the top of the shoulder, in the region of Energy, which is antago- 
nistic to the abdominal region, and the silver on the hypogastric 
region of Evacuation (Defecation). His expression was as follows : 

"I feel it in the lower bowels. It causes a trouble, a fulness, as if 
the bowels were out of order. I feel as if it would be difficult to 
retain the urine. It causes a tight, oppressed feeling of congestion 
in the bowels. It might cause an inflammation there." 

As this was evidently an unhealthy, prostrating influence, I changed 
the experiment by removing the zinc to the gastric region towards 
the side at the margin of the ribs, a region that affects the stomach 
and to some extent the liver and spleen. " That's better and more 
endurable," was his first remark; " a decided improvement. This 
would relieve constipation. With a stronger current it would open 
the bowels. I feel a pain in the region of the zinc ; it is going down 
the bowels, something like a drastic cathartic. It feels something 
like cathartic pills, — just after taking them." The plates were then 
removed. The effect was obviously that of a current through 
the alimentary canal similar to Aldini's experiment of a current from 
the tongue to the anus, with two plates such as I used. 

The analogy of this experiment to a cathartic pill was very exact. 
Pills which simply rouse and irritate the alimentary canal are not 
very wholesome in their effects, and many physicians have been 
strongly opposed to them, although there is ample evidence of the 
utility of cathartics. Certainly the abdominal region, if much excited 
or irritated, has a depressing and debilitating effect. But a proper 
energy in the abdominal functions, associated with the sustaining and 
regulating influence of the higher functions, or, in other words, of 
Health, must be beneficial. Hence aperient medicines which have a 
tonic and nervine character are quite wholesome and altogether to be 
commended, of which we have a fine example in the Chelone Glabra 
(Balmony) and the Berberis (Barberry). 

In electric practice this happy combination may be attained by 
passing the current from the hypochondria to the successive parts of 
the gastro-intestinal tract, or by passing the Faradic current between 
the centre of the shoulders and the gastro-intestinal tract, so as to 
bring the two into co-operation. A similar result may be produced 
in medical practice by associating cathartic remedies with Hyoscy- 
amus, Belladonna, Hydrastis and Quassia, which prevent them 
from being either irritating, depressing or debilitating. 

As a general rule, the abdomen should be associated with the 
spinal column, especially the lower dorsal region, in electric treat- 
ment. 



520 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

id Experiment. — The average time occupied in the preceding 
applications did not exceed ten minutes each. At 4.21 I applied the 
silver to the region of Calorification and the zinc to the region of 
Coldness. In its first application it extended an inch too far back, 
and his first remark was : " This produces a sleepy feeling." As this 
indicated an action on the region of Repose, I moved the zinc a 
iittle forward. His first remark was : " I'd like this in fever. It 
would have a fine effect in typhoid fever. I think it would break it 
up. If there was tightness and congestion in the bowels this would 
relieve it, cool the fever and promote sleep ; I did not think it would. 
It don't act as it did before, to make a congestion under the silver." 
(In 2d experiment.) 

4.29 — "The effect begins to change. I don't like it now. It's 
getting painful. The bowels begin to feel tight. The temperature 
is rising. The condition is altogether different. I believe this would 
produce fever. I am getting warm ; I feel it all over, as if the veins 
were swelling and the blood getting hot." 4.31 — "I feel as warm 
as if I had an overcoat on." (He was naked from the hips up.) 
4.32 — "I begin to feel nausea. In a short time, in this way, I 
would go to bed sick." 4.33 — "I'm dizzy-headed; my head is 
beginning to ache ; my head is heavy and tight. It is getting 
troublesome to look out ; the light is too strong ; I don't like that. 
If I had been feverish this would have made me sick. Look at my 
veins." 

4.35 — Plates reversed: silver to Coldness; zinc to Calorification. 
" I feel it in throat and lungs. The irritation is leaving below ; the 
feeling is passing up." 4.38 — "It's all gone except in my head." 
(Gapes and laughs.) "The dizziness is all- gone." 4.40 — "Nearly 
all gone, but a little feeling remaining in the eyes." 4.40! — " Guess 
I'm convalescent." (Gapes.) 4.43 — "As soon go to sleep an hour 
or two as not." 

Question : What is your temperature ? " It cooled down rapidly 
after the change, rather below the natural. I think now it's fully up 
to the natural, if not above. I feel very comfortable ; the best feeling 
I have had. I'd advise those who want to sleep to try this. I never 
have any trouble in sleeping." 4.47 — " In the former application I 
was entirely upset. Now I'm quite natural, comfortable and rather 
indolent and good-natured; disposed to sleep. A healthy but not a 
lively feeling ; a good, social feeling." 

This was a very instructive experiment, — in the beginning and 
throughout, the cooling associated with the sleepy and social region ; 
all being close together. The first effect of the positive current 
passing in at the cooling region was to stimulate it, electricity being 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 521 

a normal stimulus. It required several minutes for the dispersive 
and sedative influence of the positive current (called anelectrotonus 
by electricians) to be established. In eight minutes the stimulating 
effect gave way to anelectrotonus, suppressing the cool, sedative 
influence of the lateral aspect of the thorax and establishing catelec- 
trotonus in the calorific region, with its heat, oppression of the head, 
photophobia, fever and nausea, all of which were happily removed by 
reversing the plates, carrying the developing catelectrotonus of the 
negative pole to the cool, healthy, social region just behind the 
humerus, and dispersing the hypogastric excitement by the anelectro 
tonus of the zinc plate. From this we learn that fevers are to be 
combated by positive currents sent through the hypogastric region to 
the side of the thorax, and if any other sedative influence can 
produce the dispersive effects of the positive pole they should be 
applied in fever to the hypogastric region. This is true of the hot 
water douche, which is powerful in fever if applied to the hypogastric 
region. 

We may also learn from this experiment that the negative pole at 
Calorification will counteract the coldness of a chill, but if the 
positive pole be applied on the postero-lateral side of the chest its 
exhaustive influence there, impairing tone and nutrition, would 
endanger running into fever. Hence, in counteracting a chill, the 
more appropriate treatment would be a Faradic current between the 
lumbo-sacral or lumbo-dorsal and hypogastric regions, which would be 
invigorating as well as warming. 

qth Experiment. — The fourth experiment was instructive in both 
a psychic and a physiological sense. The silver was applied to the 
lumbo-sacral region of physical force and virility, the zinc to the 
region of Reverence on the side of the chest adjacent to the middle 
of the humerus, at 4.53. At 4.55 he says : "This acts on the whole 
system ; affects the muscles and viscera. I could do a good, hard 
day's work. I feel like handling the hammer and the axe. It is 
highly stimulating to the muscles. A very fine influence ; good for 
lazy people." 

Question : What effect has it on the temper ? " There is a 'don't- 
care ' feeling ; busy ; don't want any one to bother or meddle ; would 
be quiet if let alone, but quarrelsome if bothered. I perceive no sex- 
ual desire but there is sexual vigor. This is a fine tonic ; it creates 
great force, driving force, animal force, no thought. It is just like 
Damiana." 

This illustrates the muscular power of the lower part of the spine 
and its antagonism to the intellectual, inspirational character of the 
thorax. Damiana, to which he compared the influence excited in the 



522 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

lumbosacral region, has been classed by physicians as an aphrodisiac, 
but the expression is incorrect. It is simply a muscle invigorator, 
acting vigorously on the lower part of the spine, and the sexual 
impotence which it has relieved was probably simply a muscular 
impotence removable by muscular tonics. 

Experiments resumed. — 3.45 — Zinc on the sternum (intellect- 
ual region) ; silver on side of the back at Sleep and Coolness. 

3.47 — Seems slow to express himself. " I think it's sedative." 

3-48 — "It's decidedly sedative. I could go to sleep ; it's quieting. 
If one was restless, irritable and unable to sleep, this would quiet 
him." 

3.49 — "It brings a thoughtful as well as sleepy feeling; one 
would sleep and yet the spirit be awake. It would be a healthy, 
restorative sleep, and one would wake much refreshed after pleasant 
dreams. The spiritual influence issues from the front. There are 
two distinct feelings." 

In this case the zinc plate was not large enough to suppress 
intellectual action entirely. 

3.54 — Plates reversed. "This is stimulating. I feel like using 
my arms. It stimulates the intellect. I don't feel sleepy at all, — I'm 
completely waked up, mentally and physically. The other made me 
disposed to go to sleep and dream. With this I prefer anything else, — 
activity and study. I could not sleep at all under this influence." 

4. — Zinc on shoulder; silver above the umbilicus. "This causes 
pain and swelling ; a feeling like cramp. It creates nausea. It would 
give me cramp in the stomach. It goes down in the bowels ; it travels 
up and down ; it would bring on cramp and vomiting." 

In this we see the evil effect of downward and anterior currents 
from the shoulder, — a class especially to be avoided. 

4.04 — Zinc changed to the lower dorsal region. "This brings a 
different effect. The unpleasant feeling is all gone. It feels now 
strengthening to the stomach ; good for dyspepsia ; tonic and stimu- 
lant to the stomach ; very comfortable indeed." 

4.05 — " It begins to be sleepy ; like an after-dinner sleep, — an easy, 
good-natured sleep, very soothing to the stomach. It does not produce 
any hunger. It's a good influence to sleep with ; good for cramp in 
the stomach." 

The negative in this case was at the assimilative region, which has 
a soothing, semi-drowsy influence. 

4.10 — Zinc and silver on right and left side of back, about the 
middle of the posterior part of the ilium ; a region of hostile passions. 
"I'd get quarrelsome under this influence. I feel like saying 'I'll 
kick the devil out of you.' I'd fight my best friend. I feel it here, too, 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. $2$ 

in the hypogastric region ; it stimulates there ; it stimulates the pel- 
vic organs ; stimulating, tonic and upbuilding to the pelvic region." 

4.20 — Plates moved farther out and higher up; zinc on the right 
side. " This affects the groin on the right side, as if there was a 
swelling. On the whole, rather good-natured, and inclined to laugh 
and be social and gallant." (This was the posterior portion of the 
region of Vivacity.) 

4.25 — Plates a little lower. "Much like the last ; good-natured; 
rather dull, but strengthening ; favors the sexual." 

4.30 — Zinc to Chastity (on the ribs laterally) ; silver to sacrum. 
11 This gives erotic desires ; excitement and physical ability." 

4.39 — Reversed: silver to Chastity and Dignity; zinc to sacrum. 
"This is a nice influence ; healthy and strong, as if I could face the 
world. It's quieting, yet with strength. The passion and desire are 
taken away. It gives a healthy condition to the genitals, quelling all 
excitement. This would subdue any excitement in the genital organs 
and would be beneficial if inflammation or irritation existed." 

4.45 — Moved silver to Reverence. "This is more subduing; a 
gentle, lovable influence, very quiet ; would make me very good- 
natured and affectionate, but deferential. I'd fall in love easily. It 
would reduce the sexual power to nothing, like castration. I know 
some that ought to wear this." 

The influence of Reverence is antagonistic to the lumbo-sacral 
region, which supports virility. The influence of Chastity antagonizes 
the sexual organs. 

Wednesday. — 2.39 — Experiments on the Head. Zinc to Disease 
on the left side ; silver to Health on right side. " This gives a strange 
feeling in the throat ; nauseating ; this passes off ; now very agreeable." 
(The first effect was the local irritative effect of the zinc, the second 
the effect of the established current.) 

3 — " This is a very nice condition ; it feels strengthening, enlivening. 
Good, healthy, tonic." 

3.02 — Silver changed to region of Vital Force behind mastoid 
process. 

3.03 — " Rather sickening to stomach. It's annoying. Gives an irri- 
tating, impatient feeling; makes me feel ugly. I feel like fighting; 
impatient and quarrelsome with anybody ; a nasty feeling." 

3.07 — Silver to Religion ; zinc to Vitality and Muscularity. 
" That's nice. It clears all the trouble away ; makes the head clear 
and bright ; stimulates thought and helps one to carry it out." 

The religious region has a brightening influence on the intellect, 
especially on the intuitive portion, and an invigorating influence on the 
character, when not carried to excess. 



524 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

3.10 — Zinc to Firmness; silver to Somnolence and Meditation. 
" This will quiet a person. I would forget all trouble and care and 
be perfectly quiet and passive. I feel that my eyes are going to shut, 
and I could look away off, — not seeing, — but with a quiet, dreamy feel- 
ing. I would look into spiritual science deeply, and into the occult ; 
wouldn't think of anything but spiritual science." 

Experiments on the Body. 

3.48 — Zinc to the perineum ; silver to region of Sanity below the 
armpit. "Very quieting to the pelvic organs; quieting to the mind. 
Good for excitement or hysteria or anything exciting ; would take 
down sexual excitement. Very cooling, soothing and quieting to the 
head ; good for insanity. If one was in a towering rage this would 
control it." 

3.52 — Silver changed to Health (centre of shoulder-blade). " Not 
so soothing, but healthy and strong. It gives vigor and determina- 
tion ; strengthens genitals. A splendid tonic for one broken down ; 
increases the strength of the whole system." 

3.55 — Zinc to epigastrium ; silver to shoulder. " Good for inflam- 
mation of stomach. If anything was wrong it would scatter pain or 
cramp or take down inflammation. The effect is similar to opium. 
Morphine would be stronger and more deadening ; would soothe 
pain quicker, but deaden. This gives life and strength ; has a tonic, 
life-giving effect, while morphine deadens and does no good. The influ- 
ence is more soothing, outward, at the top of the shoulder; stronger 
near spine." (The silver was moved over the shoulder.) 

4.03 — Zinc to Disease (hypochondria) ; silver to aquatic region 
(front of the leg). " I'd like to go in swimming. Haven't had such 
a desire for a long time. I breathe very easily ; I could go to sleep. 
This is good for asthma or for pneumonia. There is a very strong 
feeling for the water; a desire to swim. I think it is cooling. It's 
cooling to the chest. It would reduce a fever ; it has a very sleepy 
feeling." 

4.20 — Faradic current from a very small battery to Health and 
Inspiration. " This is healthy, tonic and strengthening to the lungs ; 
good in consumption ; but the aquatic influence relieves congestion 
more quickly." In this we perceive that the Faradic current develops at 
both poles. This explains the marvellous success of Dr. Bastings and 
others in consumption by thoracic currents. 

4.26 — Zinc to Nutrition; silver to Hope and Mortality, above 
mammse and near the arm (a spiritual region antagonistic to Vital 
Force). " I like this very much ; it is strengthening, cheering, eleva- 
ting, quieting ; would be strong and refined. This would reduce cor- 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 525 

pulence. Too much would takedown the flesh ; would make one really 
lean, if persisted in. But I like it ; if sickly, it would build one up." 

In this experiment the first sensation was that which belongs to 
the pleasant and strong excitement of the higher emotions. The 
second expression shows the repressive effect of the positive pole on 
Nutrition, the only effective method of controlling obesity without 
injurious modification of diet and habits. 

4.30 — Silver changed to upper end of sternum. (This is an intel- 
lectual location and would tend to reduce the vital forces.) " I wouldn't * 
grow fat under this, but the other is most opposed to corpulence. 
This would develop spirituality and intellectuality ; but is rather 
debilitating, like study." 

4.37 — Zinc to Melancholy on the abdomen; silver in the axilla. 
" This is an agreeable feeling." (He seemed very meditative and disposed 
to be silent.) " I don't feel like speaking; feel quiet ; would like to sit 
down and sit still. It would make me think all my friends were dead." 

In this case the experiment miscarried. The silver was placed too 
low on the side, so as to cover the regions of Tranquillity, Concentra- 
tion and Cautiousness, — the region which develops the patient stu- 
dent, — and thus detracted from the influence of the neighboring region 
of Cheerfulness, which could not easily be reached by a flat plate. I 
therefore removed the plates, and restored his cheerfulness by placing 
the fingers on the organ, pressing upward in the axilla, which re_ 
stored his cheerful feelings. " Now I would put aside all troubles," 
was his concluding remark. 

May 3. Plates used 6 by 4 inches. 

1st. Broad plates being used, the zinc plate covered the epigas- 
tric and hypochondriac regions, coming up to about two inches below 
mammae; the silver was applied^on the left shoulder. "This makes 
an unpleasant feeling ; almost a cramp ; a drawing-up at the stomach." 

This indicated that the silver plate was inactive and the only influ- 
ence was the metallic effect of the zinc ; therefore I wet the shoulder 
under the silver plate and the natural result promptly appeared (3.10). 
"That's pleasant. This would be very wholesome and soothing to the 
stomach; it removes the cramp. It is strengthening, and I'm getting 
sleepy, too." This was because the limited space touched on the 
shoulder was not adequate to counteract the soothing or drowsy influ- 
ence of the epigastric region, which was stimulated by the first con- 
tact before the current was effective. As there is a more vigilant 
influence at the upper part of the dorsal region I placed the silver 
there, but found it still ineffective. He said : " I feel very lazy. I would 
hardly roll out of the way of a horse-car." This showed that the 
region of Indolence or Relaxation covered by the lower part of the 



526 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

plate was taking predominance, and therefore I removed the silver 
plate to the region of Energy (the middle of the superior aspect of 
the shoulder). He said : " Now I'm waking up. That's refreshing, 
strengthening ; gives a great deal of strength. It's bright and cheer- 
ful." 

2d. Zinc on mammae ; silver on back of hand : producing a current 
from Love to Hostility. " This makes me feel like striking out to 
throw it off. The arm feels swelled, as if the muscles were ^rowin<y 
It's an ugly, quarrelsome feeling. I'd be inclined to strike out. I'd 
like to strike something; I want to hit something. It's a peculiar 
feeling ; not so ugly, but a love of hitting. Boxing would satisfy it. 
I'd repel everybody. It throws great life and force into the arms. I 
want to box, but it's not really a devilish feeling. I would work off the 
extra force. My arms feel as they did when I was sparring." 

3d. Plates reversed : silver to the mammae; zinc to back of hand. 
He laughs heartily. "That knocks all the fight out of me ; I feel as if 
I'd turn and run away from a fight. I never felt anything so strong." 

4th. Zinc along lower part of sternum ; silver to back, a little above 
and exterior to lower angle of scapula (region of Playfulness and 
Dignity or Self-sufficiency). " I'd take things quietly, but it's a saucy, 
independent feeling. I feel as good a man as anybody ; not quarrel- 
some, but saucy ; quite capable of taking care of myself." Moving 
silver down to the region of Playfulness (top of the scapula). "That's 
nice ; much the same, but more congenial. If I saw anything funny I 
could laugh at it. I'd like to joke under this influence. I wouldn't 
argue ; I'd poke fun at them." 

5th. Current from hostile to friendly region, left side of body. Sits 
on zinc ; silver above mammae. " There's a feeling of disgust. I don't 
like it." As this indicated that the current was not flowing, I wet the 
space under the silver to establish the current. " There's an affection- 
ate feeling, as if I would put my arm around somebody. It sustains 
the strength. [The moderate stimulation of the higher sentiments is 
always invigorating.] It's quieting. [How does it affect the stomach ?] 
There's a sense of fulness. It would check the appetite. If there was 
hunger, I would forget the hunger. It is strengthening ; quieting to 
the heart, tonic to the bowels ; would overcome looseness and restore 
healthy action ; would tend to check seasickness. It works that way. 
One of the best general influences I have felt. It would diminish 
respiration." 

This illustrates the happy hygienic influence of the higher senti- 
ments and their quieting influence on animal life. 

Silver was removed from mammae to Health on the shoulder. "This 
gives me more vigor, health and activity ; the other was too yielding 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 527 

and spiritual. This is all activity and strength ; better, too, for lungs 
and head." 

6th. Current from Love to Hatred and Disgust : zinc above mam- 
mae ; silver on upper part of ilium and sacrum. " I feel a pain 
across the small of the back, lumbar and sacral region. I'd like 
to sit still. I wouldn't go into company ; I'd be all alone, discour- 
aged, disheartened, suspicious of humanity generally. I wouldn't 
love my neighbor. It would make me morbidly solitary. I wouldn't 
care about eating. I don't care about food. It destroys the ap- 
petite. I'd rather go off and think I was abused. It's weakening. 
A man's hair would turn gray early under this. I'd go out and 
lie down. It destroys all activity ; makes the world a house of 
mourning. It would drive one insane by gloom. This would be 
awful in seasickness; I'd want to die. If a boat should rock I'd be 
sick. Anything disgusting would cause nausea." To test this I told 
a little anecdote of sickness which brought in a disgusting circum- 
stance, and he rose and rushed to the basin, nauseated, but did not 
actually vomit. " That's pretty rough," he said. 

7th. Plates reversed. " This feels delightful. I'd rush into com- 
pany to enjoy it. [How is the stomach ?] I'd relish almost any 
kind of dinner." 

These experiments illustrate the influence of despair and disgust ; 
the region of Hope and Love being depressed by the upper plate, 
while disgust, aversion and gloom were developed by the lower. The 
reversal produced a delightful rush of affectionate and happy sentiment. 

8th. Degrading influences. Zinc below and behind armpit (region 
of Sanity and Dignity) ; silver at and near coccyx, on the borders of 
Insanity and Hate and at the spinal origin of Animality. " I'd 
be restless, roaming around, finding fault with everybody and 
everything, doing nothing, dissatisfied. [Could you study ?] I'd rather 
go fishing ; I would'nt like study. It makes me careless ; I'd neglect 
everything; my chief characteristic would be carelessness. [How 
much intelligence would you have?] I wouldn't study or read; I 
wouldn't have much intelligence. If anyone commenced talking 
above the most commonplace I'd be tired ; disgusted with anything 
above gossip. Horses and dogs would interest me ; I'd just be on their 
level. It's a light-hearted, careless, go-as-you-please feeling. It would 
impair the memory. That walking match would suit me. I'd enjoy 
merriment and company. It reminds me of the ignorant old English 
squires of the 14th and 15th centuries; jolly sportsmen. I'd be very 
fond of the women. There's no intellectuality in this, but the reverse." 

9th. Zinc as before; silver lower, extending below coccyx and above. 
" That would make me a libertine. It takes away all the good of 



5-28 INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXIII. 

the other ; makes the man more of a brute. This is selfish, brutal ; does 
mean, underhanded things ; watches opportunity to take advantage ; 
decidedly selfish. It takes away all the sunshine of the other ; makes 
one still more stupid; couldn't study. It befogs the front part of the 
head. It's mean, stupid, selfish, low. He'd be a brute ; very near a 
lunatic; every one would despise him ; something like Guiteau except 
as to intellect ; he wouldn't see any harm in anything he wanted to 
do." 

ioth. Silver placed underneath, corresponding to the perineum ; 
zinc as before. " When one gets this way they should be locked up ; 
not capable of taking care of themselves at all ; would hardly have 
sense enough to feed themselves. I'd soon lose all power of thinking • 
the mind seems a blank." 

nth. Silver removed to inner and uppermost part of the thigh. 
(Region of Temper or Rage.) " That's better ; under this one 
would take care of himself. It's strengthening to the muscles ; one 
would have strong muscles. It's not intellectual but strong and 
hearty ; would make a good day laborer ; more quiet than stirring, 
but would fight very quick. If started he'd get wild. He wouldn't 
have much self-control ; he might commit manslaughter. He'd 
fight like the devil ; not combative, but wild when started, and very 
easily started." 

• 12th. Zinc as before ; silver still lower on the back of the thigh. 
(Region of Turbulence.) "That's better; more intelligent and 
active. This would suit an athlete ; good for running and jump- 
ing ; not content in any quiet life ; impossible to be quiet ; if in a 
riot he'd fight to work off his superfluous strength. It's very excit- 
ing and stimulating to the muscles, but not very devilish ; must work 
off animal force." 

13th. Silver to side of hip ; zinc as before. " There is more sense 
and less force in this ; I like it better. I'd enjoy life well and listen 
more to reason ; would enjoy society very well ; would like to be in 
lots of amusement, chiefly in lively • society ; I'd laugh a good deal, 
very hearty, and take in all the funny ; laugh and talk, not stir about 
much." (This was the region of Vivacity.) 

Some experiments were made with the Faradic current, but his 
sensibility was too acute to bear it, though I procured a brief tolera- 
tion by using carbon electrodes. The current was more than he 
could endure, and after several trials he felt that the shock to his 
nervous system disqualified him for any of the usual experiments ; 
but this was overcome by rousing the serene and sensitive regions of 
the shoulder and sternum. The momentary trials, however, developed 
distinctly the compound energy of the spots reached by the two 



CHAP. XXIII.] DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 529 

poles; such as Health and Health, Health and Hope, Health and 
Vital Force. In each ease the force of both organs was distinctly 
realized as long as the current could be tolerated. 

Returning to the galvanic plates, I placed the silver at the lumbo- 
sacral region and the zinc at the mammae ; the response was not as 
prompt as usual, but he felt that the influence was a sexual invigora- 
tion. Reversing the plates, the silver above the mammae produced a 
quiet, yielding, non-resistant nature, according to the Christian pre- 
cepts, but so different from his usual mood that he called it pusil- 
lanimous. 

2. Zinc at the lower end of the dorsal vertebrae ; silver below 
umbilicus (at and below Calorification). " This is warming ; it would 
stimulate the pelvic organs generally." 

3. Zinc on thorax at Coolness ; silver at epigastric region. "This 
stimulates the stomach and increases digestion." Silver was then 
removed to the hypochondria, left side. " This produces nausea ; 
the stomach is deranged ; the temperature is higher. I feel feverish, 
with disgust for food ; it would give me chills and fever or bilious 
fever." Plates reversed. " That changes it ; I would hold on to this 
a while to get over the effects." 

4. Zinc at Chastity ; silver at lumbo-sacral region. " This is invig- 
orating ; one would move with considerable alacrity ; it is stimulant 
rather than tonic ; strengthens virility ; increases action generally." 

5 Zinc at Nutrition ; silver successively at Energy, at Mortality, 
and at Sublimity and Reverence. The influence dispersing nutrition 
and favoring the reduction of flesh appeared to be more completely 
reducing and debilitating with the negative at Mortality, more exhaus- 
tive by activity under the influence of Energy, and more healthily 
productive of reduction through the influence of the upper part of 
Sublimity (posterior to mammae.) 

6. The zinc being applied to the region of Irritability, which affects 
the liver, and the silver to that of Patience, the latter was too dry to 
start the current, and some irritability was felt from the sole influ- 
ence of the zinc. Moisture being supplied, the current was established, 
and a quieting influence was felt. The silver was then removed to 
the region of Health, and the effect felt was a wholesome stimulation 
of the liver. 

These experiments, which might be prolonged ad infinitum, are 
sufficient to show that the Faradic energizes at both poles when 
applied to the body, and consequently has a great range of beneficial 
application, while the galvanic current has great power to change the 
balance of functions, and is efficient for suppression as well as 
development. 



53° INVESTIGATION OF MAN AND [CHAP. XXI i I. 

May the reader expect to reproduce phenomena such as I have 
described? Not unless he selects constitutions of the highest grade 
of impressibility. Nevertheless, similar phenomena will occur with 
lower grades of impressibility, by longer continuance and stronger 
currents. But where there is less mental impressibility the effects 
on the mind will be less conspicuous, and the physical or physiological 
effects will be more prominent. 

It is difficult for anyone to realize these psychic transformations 
who has not become familiar with the higher forms of impressibility, 
and the reader may find it more instructive to read reports from lower 
grades of impressibility. 

The application of galvanic currents to the head would be justified 
by the experience of their superior utility in affections of the spinal cord, 
and this view is sustained by the experience of Onimus and Legros, who 
sa^ ; " We have many times passed currents through the head, more 
or less intense, but never in persons of any age have we had the least 
accident. Hence we are persuaded that in many cases of cerebral 
excitation and intra-cranial trouble in the circulation, perhaps even 
in certain cases of delirium, we might obtain great benefit from con- 
tinued currents, and facts that we have had occasion to observe con- 
firm us in this opinion." 

" In a number of cases in which we have had occasion to place the 
poles on the head the patients have manifested a tendency to sleep, 
and generally have had, the following night, a long and quiet sleep. 
This was especially marked in females with nervous affections." 

Of course it would be unsafe for physicians to apply electricity to 
the head without understanding the brain. They would learn, of course, 
but at the serious expense of the patient ; and it must be long before 
my discoveries can overcome the inertia of the colleges. The follow- 
ing experiments show the practicability of substituting electric cur- 
rents for the application of the fingers. 

A young friend, the very worthy and estimable Dr. Z., of a more 
impressible temperament than we often find, who had been practising 
a year or more in a New York hospital, sat with me to test the 
impressibility of the brain, and realized the results of every experi- 
ment nearly as well as Mr. K. but not quite as intensely. I tried 
seven different currents on the brain, with Galvanic currents of four 
to six cells. 

The current from the lateral occiput (Adhesiveness and Sleep) to 
the centre of the front lobe was very exciting ; when reversed it was 
recognized as dull and soothing. 

The current from the temples (Ideality, etc.) to the base of the occi- 
put, opposite side (Vital Force and Violence), was disturbing, giving 
a restless desire to be up and doing. 



CHAP. XXIII. j DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 531 

From the same occipital location to the region of Religion it was 
extremely pleasant and spiritual, giving the feelings that are produced 
in a grand temple or by sublime scenes. 

The current from the same spot to the coronal suture of opposite side 
gave an aspiration for philanthropic life (which was characteristic), 
and brought up, by association, all the feelings of doubt, apprehension 
and responsibility associated therewith. 

The current from the cheeks (Disease) to the organ of Health 
produced the best effects of all, — a feeling of enjoyment and energy; 
readiness for all the duties of life and desire to perform them. 

The current through the temples (the Ideal region) produced a 
feeling of mental expansion and calmness. 

The current from the lateral occiput to the lower part of the fore- 
head produced a desire for profound study and investigation. 

The intellectual and moral organs, being much the most active, 
responded more freely. The region of animal force and violence was 
less impressible, and the lower middle region of the occiput, which was 
small, yielded but very slight results. 

To one thoroughly miseducated in materialistic views of science, 
and kept ignorant of all psychic and mesmeric literature, ignorant of 
what is going on in psychometry, clairvoyance, mesmerism, and too 
thoroughly prejudiced to read such literature, the foregoing experi- 
ments must appear as incredible as the telephone would have seemed 
to an ignorant blacksmith of the last century, and the balloon to the 
French peasants. If any such should read this page I would ask 
him to reflect whether any scientist with an honorable reputation 
would be reckless enough to offer such statements without a basis of 
fact, or could possibly be successful in teaching others to repeat the 
experiments and in convincing all who listen to him. The reading of 
such works as Dr. Esdaile's " Mesmerism in India " and Prof. Greg- 
ory's " Letters on Animal Magnetism" would enable him to discover 
how much he had lost by a false education, and prepare him to appre- 
ciate Therapeutic Sarcognomy. 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 

Electric treatment — Electricity as a stimulant and in cholera — Batteries for elec- 
tro-therapeutics, the different cells in use, their penetrative power — Combination 
of cell and coil — The common portable battery — Electric currents and their modes 
of application — The Faradic current, its use in infantile marasmus — Qualities of 
the currents — Galvanic batteries — Current measurement — Connections — Mode 
of application — Important improvement — Electrodes — Electric measurements — 
The coil and the cell combined — Currents applied to the human body and their 
modification and combination — Movable coil — Standard coil — Electric baths — 
Static electricity in nature — Its rationale misunderstood — Wires and electrodes — 
Static treatment by currents and shocks, not Faradism — Proper construction for 
this — Method of using static electricity — Its combination with other currents and 
with magnetism — Use of the static currents. 



Not having found time to complete the treatise on electro-thera- 
peutics, which I had hoped to publish, the importance of the subject 
renders it necessary that I should give in this volnme a brief outline 
of the electric treatment of disease, as I am accustomed to present 
it to my pupils. 

When Sarcognomy becomes generally known, the electro-thera- 
peutic treatment we have had heretofore, guided only by anatomy, 
without respect to the vital forces and sympathies of the nervous 
system, will be considered a rude and barbarous method. 

The subject is greatly simplified by the general proposition that 
whenever we wish to concentrate and stimulate the vital forces the 
negative pole may be used, as we use the hand in manual treatment ; 
while the positive pole should be used to produce dispersive effects, 
as we use the hand in dispersive passes. 

The dispersive power of the positive pole, however, is not equal to 
that of the hand for dispersing morbid conditions, though it is 
capable of more exact and circumscribed application. Nor is the 
developing power of the negative pole equal to that of the hand, for 
it is simply a disturbing and stimulating influence and cannot impart 
the large amount of faultless vitalit}' which the hand of a successful 
healer can give. Nevertheless, the greater power of electricity, which 
no human being can resist, gives it a very large sphere of activity 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 533 

among those who are not sensitive to the hand. Galvanic and 
primary currents have a chemical effect, tending to accumulate acid 
elements at the positive pole and alkaline elements with hydrogen at 
the negative. Hence their use is to some extent irritating and 
requires to be handled with moderation. 

In consequence of this the best application that can be made of 
electric treatment is that which combines the electric and nervauric 
methods by passing the electricity through the person of the oper- 
ator, or at least through his hand. Any one who tries it will recog- 
nize the great superiority of the electro-nervauric method. 

Electricity as a Stimulant. — Electricity, like caloric, is a 
powerful stimulant, an unlimited power, capable of killing or reviv- 
ing, and therefore can be much more extensively applied than it has 
been in exhausted conditions as well as in narcotism and asphyxia, 
which it relieves when all else fails. Dr. Dewees said in the New 
York Journal of Medicine : "In cases of exceeding prostration, 
where the pulse was extinct, I have witnessed a return of impulse take 
place in a few minutes, and the sense of weakness fully as well over- 
come as by the administration of brandy or wine." Dr. Wilson 
Philip mentioned the suggestion of using electricity to recover from 
typhus, but Dr. Gale is the only physician who has extensively attacked 
fevers with electricity. 

Cholera was successfully treated with electricity by Dr. C. F. 
Favell of the Sheffield Cholera Hospital, but his success has not 
inspired the profession to bring electricity into use in such cases. 
In a case that seemed moribund in spite of medical treatment, he 
applied galvanism from the wrists to the ankles and from the neck to 
the pit of the stomach, improving the pulse and voice and giving a 
disposition to sleep, as Sarcognomy would indicate. The patient 
progressed to recovery, which was ascribed entirely to the galvanic 
treatment. 

In another case, with cold surface and pulse nearly gone, galvanism 
was repeatedly used and believed to have produced the cure. 

Dr. F. claimed that very decided and immediate benefit resulted in 
every cholera case in which galvanism was used. 

Dr. Vigouroux, in the " Progrcs Medical" maintains that daily 
static electrization is the best measure of prophylaxis against cholera. 
This is doubtless true, as electric conditions are greatly disturbed 
in cholera seasons. 

Chickens and pigeons subjected to etherization were found by 
M. Ducros to require seven or eight minutes for natural recovery, 
but were restored instantly by shocks of static or dynamic electricity. 
They recovered in about thirty seconds when charged with positive 



534 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

electricity on the insulating stool, but their recovery was only 
retarded when under the negative influence, which shows that posi- 
tive electricity is a real power, and the negative a mere negation, like 
cold, — not a different electricity, but a deficiency. And yet we find 
all through our scientific works a recognition of two electricities. 
We might as well recognize two forms of caloric — a positive hot 
and a negative coid. 

BATTERIES FOR ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The contamination of electricity by the substances through which 
it passes leads me to consider all cells objectionable which contain 
sulphate of zinc, sulphate of copper, sulphate of mercury, chloride 
of silver, sulphuric acid, bichromate of potash, mercury and zinc 
and other unwholesome elements. Such cells impregnate the system 
with harsh medical influences and leave it saturated with a metallic 
influence and taste. There is no necessity for using any of these 
except the zinc, since cells containing muriate of ammonia have 
proved efficient and satisfactory. 

The Leclanche cell has carbon and zinc elements, the carbon in a 
porous cell, surrounded by peroxide of manganese mixed with 
coarsely powdered carbon. This is placed in a jar containing a solu- 
tion of muriate of ammonia (sal ammoniac). The polarization of 
the cell is checked by the oxygen of the peroxide of manganese, 
which combines with the hydrogen set free. Chloride of zinc is 
formed in small quantity. 

In the chloride battery of Fitch, which relies also on muriate of 
ammonia, depolarization is assisted by the bichloride of mercury in 
very small quantity, which seizes the hydrogen and is converted into 
calomel. The Samson cell, which has become very popular, is also a 
muriate of ammonia cell, similar to the Leclanche. The Law cell is 
similar to the Samson, both being satisfactory. These are the four 
forms of cells which I have been accustomed to use and recommend 
as the least objectionable. We need only to substitute iron for zinc 
in these muriate of ammonia cells to have an entirely unobjectionable 
cell ; but this is impracticable, as it would reduce the electric energy 
very low, and the iron would not escape corrosion like the zinc. The 
Stohrer battery, of zinc and carbon, with sulphuric acid and bichro- 
mate, has a vigorous current with this objectionable character which 
I have mentioned, and Bartholow says it will " give rise to great 
irritation and burning," from the same number of cells which would 
be agreeable in the improved Daniell battery, which has no bichro- 
mate or free acid and has more resistance. Cells of a good size are 
necessary to furnish a ^ood volume of electricity, but as the electro- 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 535 

motive force depends on the number of cells, twenty small cells will 
send more through the human body than the same amount of plates 
arranged in three or four large cells, which would have less penetra- 
tive power. The lack of electro-motive force in the large cells may 
be compensated by the use of a coil which gives this force, as we 
see in the common portable battery, in which a single cell with a 
coil sends out strong currents. This principle I have adopted in my 
new battery to produce a galvanic current. 

The current from a single large cell would ignite and perhaps 
deflagrate a fine platinum wire by its volume, but twenty common 
cells would produce very little heating effect, though more efficient 
medically by their penetrative power. Even the current of a single 
common cell of 1.5 volts with the aid of a helix will produce as 
strong an impression through the human body as we wish to bear, 
because its power goes through us. It requires very little electricity 
to affect the human constitution ; there is very little in the most 
powerful Faradic current, and still less in the more powerful static, 
even when it shocks or kills ; but it requires some volume to produce 
chemical and alterative effects on the blood and tissues, though 
very little volume is requisite to produce revolutionary impressions 
on the nervous system. 

What can be done by my method of a few large cells combined 
with a coil has not yet been fully tested, but I am confident it will be 
one of the most powerful agencies of electro-therapeutics. The coil 
has heretofore been used only to reinforce the interrupted current, 
not the continuous galvanic. 

By this combination, which I may call an invention (simple as it is), 
for I have seen no mention of it in my reading on electricity, we 
realize the full power of a large galvanic battery, with a very few 
cells ; the efficiency of the current receiving something near a tenfold 
increase by the use of a magnetizing coil, so that a small portable 
battery of four cells may furnish all the galvanic power that a physi- 
cian is likely to require, besides sustaining primary and secondary 
currents of greater power than he is likely to need, by means of 
which electro-medical currents can be propelled through the body or 
sent any distance by wires. The patient in the fourth story may 
receive any anodyne, soporific, stimulant or alterative sent by wire 
from the first story. 

The immense power of electro-magnetism in reinforcing an elec- 
tric current relieves us from the necessity of using large galvanic 
batteries. The single cell of the common portable instrument is 
raised to a power as high as one can bear by the iron rods in the coil. 
The most splendid illustration of this law was exhibited in a Rhum- 



536 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

korff coil at the London Polytechnic Institution which was nine feet 
ten inches long and two feet in diameter. It had a soft iron core of 
one hundred and twenty-five pounds, five feet long and four inches in 
diameter, surrounded by a primary wire about two and a seventh 
miles long, around which was the coil of secondary wire one hundred 
and fifty miles long ! This coil, run by forty-eight cells, yielded a 
flash of electricity " twenty-nine inches long and capable of perforat- 
ing five inches of solid plate glass " ! 

On the other hand, a very feeble galvanic current steadily applied 
may produce the most important results ; as my experiments show 
that a very sensitive individual, even with a vigorous muscular consti- 
tution, may experience strong psychic and physical effects from two 
small plates. What is called sometimes the Humboldt battery con- 
sists of two plates (such as silver and zinc) which are applied on the 
body and connected by an insulated wire so that the current flows 
from the zinc to the silver through the body. Dr. Grapengeisser has 
reported a case of restoration of lost voice by applying a zinc plate as 
large as a shilling and a small silver plate to blistered surfaces, on 
each side of the larynx. It was first applied half an hour, producing 
convulsive movements of the larynx, and five days afterward applied 
again and kept on all night, making a cure. About thirty years ago, 
Dr. De la Rua of Cuba, who republished in Spanish my illustrations 
of Sarcognomy, informed me that he had small galvanic plates attached 
to his walking cane, which he used upon some of his patients. 

The common, cheap, portable battery is an arrangement by which 
one galvanic cell is used to produce a current from the positive car- 
bon or copper pole to the negative zinc pole, which current has so 
little electro-motive force it would be of no therapeutic value, not be- 
ing able to penetrate through more than fifteen or twenty inches of 
the body, so as to be recognized by any but the most sensitive. 

This feeble current, however, by being conducted around an iron rod 
or bundle of wires in a coil of many turns, creates in this iron core a 
strong magnetism which reacts upon the current, giving it great 
electro-motive force, so that it may be sent through the whole length 
of the body. 

But the efficiency of electricity depends more upon its impact than 
upon its current. A current which flowing steadily is scarcely recog- 
nized as it passes through the body, makes a strong impression or gives 
a shock when it strikes in successive blows. Hence the interruption 
of a current, so that its stroke or entrance is rapidly repeated, giving 
a vast number of shocks, makes a powerful impression. 

This end is attained in the portable electro-magnetic battery by a 
very ingenious invention. The current passes through a screw to a 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 537 

spring which is almost in contact with it, and as soon as it passes and 
develops magnetism in the iron core the attraction of the magnet on 
the spring pulls it farther from the screw, so as to stop the passage 
of the electricity, and by stopping the electricity it arrests the devel- 
opment of magnetism and leaves the spring free to fall back and 
receive the current. The wonderful rapidity of this operation pro- 
duces a buzzing sound. Its rapidity is due to the fact that copper is 
a perfect conductor, superior to everything but silver, and that elec- 
tricity has a speed which would rival that of light, if it were not 
retarded by the mediums through which it passes. Kirchoff decided, 
theoretically, that electricity without resistance would travel 192,924 
miles in a second. But it never approximates that. Professor Gould 
found a velocity of 12,000 miles in telegraph wires at a moderate height, 
but they may be raised high enough to give a speed of 24,000. Prof. 
O. M. Mitchell, in an experiment with the telegraph at Cincinnati, 
demonstrated a speed of over 30,000 miles in a second. But sub- 
marine cables transmit slowly. 

This rapidity explains the rapid buzz of the spring as the currents 
are broken, and the powerful impression this makes on the human 
constitution as the wires conduct this agitation to the patient. A 
careful study of the subject shows that the shocking impression on 
the patient is due to the discharge of the electricity in sparks at the 
moment of interruption. 

Equally wonderful is the action of the exterior coil, which is affected 
by induction, being entirely separate from the interior coil. That the 
interior or primary coil should start a powerful action in the exte- 
rior coil is due to the law developed and applied by Faraday, that a 
current in one wire starts an opposite current in an adjacent wire. 
The current in the primary wire starts an opposite current in the 
exterior coil when it begins to flow. Hence we would expect the 
poles of the exterior coil to be opposite to those of the interior, 
the current being in an opposite direction, but they are not ; for, when 
the interior current is interrupted, the exterior current flies back in the 
same direction as the interior, and this reactive current being stronger 
than its opposite, it follows that the Faradic current coincides with 
the primary, as to its positive and negative poles. But the difference 
in the two poles is not so great as in the primary, which is a one-way 
current, while the Faradic is a reciprocal or two-way impulse. 

Hence, while the primary current, though interrupted, is like the 
galvanic, emphatically positive and negative at its poles, and capable 
therefore of decomposing water or being used in electroplating, the 
Faradic, by its alternating action, counteracts itself as to decomposition 
and produces no perceptible chemical effect, and no opposite condi- 



538 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

tions at its poles, but simply serves as a vital stimulant to nerves, 
muscles and bloodvessels, but somewhat more effectively at its neg- 
ative pole. Hence the use of the Faradic current is very simple, and 
we ^pply the two poles on the right and left sides of the body to 
organs that we wish to stimulate. There is a very energetic force in 
its action, which is sometimes too harsh, and its best or most agreea- 
ble effects are produced when the coil is made of a great length of 
very fine wire. The Faradic coil recommended by the Electrical Con- 
gress at Paris was composed of wire one-hundredth of an inch in 
diameter and over three thousand feet in length. 

The strength of the currents is regulated by a brass or copper 
shield, a tube which fits around the iron core and, when it covers it, 
deprives the coil of its magnetic influence. The power of the coil is 
developed as the shield is pulled out. 

ELECTRIC CURRENTS. 

If the human body had the conductivity of copper or iron the 
contact of a single common galvanic cell would be fatal. But as it 
is, the contact of a one-volt cell sends through the body not more 
than a tenth or a fifth of a milliampere, and it would require ten 
such cells to produce one or two milliamperes through the trunk. 
Hence fifty cells would be required to produce an effective current, 
unless applied to a small portion of the body. But these numerous 
cells, it is said, produce only electro-motive force, as they furnish no 
more electricity than a single cell, and not as much as a single large 
cell or a pair of cells combined to act as one. Hence, if we unite 
two or three cells to act as one, and add to them a sufficient electro- 
motive coil force, we shall have a greater galvanic power than twenty- 
cell batteries afford, in a compact and portable shape. 

In applying the current our object is to produce beneficial and 
avoid injurious effects. Injurious or caustic effects are produced by 
concentration and avoided by diffusion. Broad electrodes are of 
course preferable to small ones. A broad wet sponge or wet piece 
of cloth gives the soothing influence of moisture ; a moist carbon 
electrode has a good influence, and the most objectionable electrodes 
are those of metal which are in common use, and which tend to 
burn the skin, but which may be made more agreeeable by a broad 
surface. 

When we wish to produce a caustic effect we use very small 
metallic surfaces ; that is, we insert needles in the parts to be de- 
stroyed, which operate either by burning, if a sufficient amount of 
electricity is furnished, or by chemical decomposition, or by both. 
The positive pole attracts oxygen and may become corroded, and the 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 539 

negative attracts hydrogen and alkalies caustic enough to dissolve 
the tissues, for pure alkalies are intensely caustic. Broad electrodes 
resist this caustic tendency, and we resist it still further by moving 
them about over the surface, especially the negative. 

When we wish to produce the sharpest effects of electricity we 
use metal electrodes. Thus a very small knob or nail pressing 
against the skin with a Faradic or a galvanic negative current pro- 
duces a burning sensation like hot iron. A wire brush with an 
electric current brushing over the skin also produces a burning sen- 
sation. Sometimes a tinsel brush is used to strike or brush the skin, 
which is also painful. If such applications are held on the skin they 
burn like a moxa, and are called an electric moxa. 

A wire heated by an electric current burns through the flesh, and 
this method of galvano-cautery appears to have great advantages over 
the knife, having been successfully applied to hemorrhoids and polypi. 
Dr. Carl Seiler has removed nasal polypi in this way, and thinks it 
the only way to prevent their return. 

Another metallic application is the use of needles in acupuncture. 
Needles two to four inches long, not insulated, are inserted into 
muscles. The static current was applied to them over fifty years 
ago by Sarlandiere at Paris, which struck the fancy of the profession 
immediately. Since their galvanic and Faradic currents have been 
used on the needles. The positive has some indifferent connection, 
and the negative is used to touch the needles and start muscular 
contraction. 

We aim to produce the effects of a current, but not the sudden 
impulse which makes a shock. Shocks are produced by interrup- 
tions. The interruption of the static current causes it to move in a 
spark, and shock when it has force enough to make its way. The 
spark between the conductor knobs is accompanied by a shock to the 
one who holds the electrodes connected with jars. 

When a galvanic current of any considerable strength, from a 
number of cells, or from a single cell reinforced by magnetism, is 
passing through conductors, and its passage is interrupted so as to 
force it to travel through electrodes held in the hands, its passage 
produces a decided shock. It is upon this principle that the common 
portable battery works. The primary galvanic current passes from 
the carbon to the zinc through the primary coil and is not felt in the 
electrodes until the current is broken by the magnet attracting the 
spring from its contact with the screw. This forces the current 
through the electrodes and the one who holds them. But this is 
momentary, as the contact is immediately renewed when magnet 
ceases to act (for want of a current), and the current again flows in 



540 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

its former route, without reaching the subject. Thus the primary 
battery current is a succession of fine shocks which all pass in one 
direction. Being a one-way current or shock, it retains the galvanic 
character, but has not the same chemical power as the- uninterrupted 
galvanic current. 

The Faradic current or shock, as a general stimulant, has a very 
extensive applicability to rousing impaired organs. It has even 
been applied to the kidneys in a case of diabetes, by Dr. Clubb of 
England, with the effect of reducing the urine to one-half its 
previous amount in the course of six weeks. 

Its applicability to stimulating the growth of young animals was 
demonstrated by Dr. Beard upon puppies, and its applicability to 
patients exhausted and moribund, especially when applied through 
the hand of the operator, conveying his vital force, is easily shown. 
I would recommend in all cases of impaired vitality, endangering 
life, the use of a Faradic or alternating galvanic current, combined 
with vital force and with the remedy that seems most necessary. 

Dr. H. T. Webster of California has fully realized the value of the 
Faradic current in infantile marasmus. He says : " An emaciated 
infant, which has become wan and haggard through imperfect 
assimilation of food, or the prostrating effects of cholera infantum or 
other depleting disease, and in which digestion is impaired, and the 
nervous system disturbed, in which there is almost constantly hectic 
fever present, with exhaustive alvine evacuations, in many cases 
passes in time beyond the boundary line where drugs are capable of 
exerting any beneficial influence." In such cases, he says : " Fara- 
dism here is capable of establishing for itself a reputation which will 
stand unrivalled." His method is " to apply in these cases the posi- 
tive pole at the feet and the negative pole at the nape of the neck, 
regulating the current to a mild force, and allow the poles to remain 
three or four minutes. Then place the positive pole at one foot, and 
hold the negative at the opposite hand, for the same length of time; 
then place the positive at the opposite foot and hand as long. A 
child that has not rested for weeks will, in a few nights after the 
beginning of this plan, rest quietly all night and begin to gain 
strength and flesh." 

This is indeed very good treatment, and yet it may be improved 
by adding currents from the abdomen to the shoulders and the area 
below the shoulder-blades, also alternating currents between the 
abdomen and lower dorsal region and between Nutrition and Health. 
The latter would be especially valuable. 

Dr. Webster very justly maintains that better effects may be pro- 
duced by giving the currents as described through a warm bath, 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 541 

which is true, as the water softens the electric action, sends its own 
soothing influence through the person and receives therefrom the 
morbid aura. In a strong salt-water bath the greater conductivity 
of the water would tend to diffuse the electric influence over the 
surface, while in pure water the current would be more confined to 
the person. 

Softness of Current is produced (i) by limiting the strength of 
the battery supply, (2) by limiting the influence of the core and of 
the primary coil by a shield, (3) by increasing the length of the wires? 
and diminishing their size. Each of these methods diminishes the 
quantity and force of the current, and may thus be equivalent, — 
except the method of diminishing the size of the wire ; this 
diminishes the quantity of the current, but increases its intensity or 
penetrative capacity. 

As the primary coil requires a good quantity for its galvanoid 
effects, it is proper that it should have as usual a coarser wire, which 
may vary between No. 20 and No. 18. The exterior secondary coil 
may vary between 25 and 32, as it is designed to act with force, 
but not to produce chemical and vital changes incident to galvanism. 
If the exterior coil has great length of fine wire, its action will be 
more gentle and penetrating. 

A single Samson (muriate of ammonia) cell is sufficient for 
medical practice with the helix, but two or three cells may be used 
when additional power is needed to overcome resistance. 

Experience, I believe, has shown the superiority of a helix contain- 
ing a great length of fine wire, which offers considerable resistance, 
supplied by a current from three or four cells ; the additional cells 
being needed on account of the resistance. A single cell would not 
be sufficient for a helix of very long and fine wires. 

The cylinder or shield of non-magnetic metal, which interrupts the 
magnetic influence of the core which it incloses, gives us great 
delicacy in adjusting the strength of the current. The current is 
also subdivided, with less delicacy but more definite measurement, by 
taking it from different parts of the exterior coil. One post is 
connected with one end of the coil and the other posts with different 
lengths of the coil. Any number of subdivisions may be made in 
this way. 

Another method is to add one or more induction coils, exterior to 
the first ; but all the variety required may be obtained by having two 
sliding coils of the same diameter, one of moderately coarse and the 
other of very fine wire. With these we may make any combination 
by a sliding coil with the primary currents, and the strength of the 
combination may be definitely modified by a shield graded in ten 



544 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

long, which can be inserted and applied'on almost any part of the 
body by loosening and opening the clothes, and can be applied easily 
by the patient. The best method, however, is to treat the patient in 
bed, or to substitute for the ordinary clothing a blue flannel gown 
with a number of vertical slits through which access can be had to 
any part of the body. It is a mistake to suppose that mere contact 
with the feet or hands can be a satisfactory method, or that it is a 
good treatment of all the parts on the route of the current. It is 
not the route of the current that is chiefly important, but the points 
of contact for electrodes. The advantages of the static in treat- 
ment over the clothing must give it pre-eminence in practice. 

An Important Improvement. — The essential change which I 
long since promised to make in electric apparatus consists in reject- 
ing the harsh elements through which the electricity passes and 
substituting those which are more wholesome. Sulphuric acid, 
bichromate of potassa, bisulphate of mercury, zinc and sulphate of 
zinc are not the elements with which one would like to be saturated. 
It is true they are not physically transferred to the patient and do 
not permanently lodge in his body, but, as their potentiality is con. 
veyed, the patient finds himself saturated with metallic and injurious 
influences, which compel him to suspend electric treatment with a 
metallic taste in his mouth which belongs not to the electricity but to 
the metals that convey it. 

We make a great change when we substitute for the battery fluid 
a solution of muriate of ammonia, one of the most wholesome sub- 
stances known — a gently tonic, antiseptic alterative, closely akin to 
that indispensable element of the blood, muriate of soda, but possess- 
ing more active stimulant and alterative properties. 

In the muriate of ammonia cell we have no offensive vapors, and it 
is not necessary to lift the plates out of the fluid as soon as we are 
done using them, to prevent their destruction. The battery stands 
unchanged from year to year, ever ready for use, and has great 
durability. 

The Rheotome or Vibrating Spring is the most delicate and 
important part of the common battery. If the spring be too weak 
it yields too promptly, before the full force of the current is developed. 
It should be strong enough or remote enough from the magnet to 
allow the full strength to be developed before it moves, in which 
case its movements are slower. By screwing up close to the magnet 
the interruptions are made more frequent and the current more 
delicate. I have endeavored to construct a rheotome that will be 
always reliable and also susceptible of considerable variation. In 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 545 

some batteries the rheotome admits of no variation, and unless very 
accurately adjusted will not operate at all. 

Electrodes. — The most common electrodes, an inch or inch and 
a half in diameter, are too small. Two and one-half or three inches is 
small enough. The purpose of the electrode should be to introduce 
as much electricity as practicable with the least irritation or disturb- 
ance. A large electrode greatly increases the facility of the intro- 
duction and diminishes the irritation at the contact with the body. 
A pair of specially large electrodes, five or six inches in diameter, 
would prove useful in cases requiring a good current but too sensitive 
to its application. 

The electrode should be covered with a cap of canton flannel, a 
strip eight or nine inches in diameter retained by a rubber band, wet 
with salt water (saturated), which will moisten the skin and conduct 
very freely. This is necessary, as a dry skin offers about as much 
resistance as the entire person. 

To administer a medical influence, a pledget of absorbent cotton, 
saturated with the medicine in a fluid form, may be placed under the 
cotton flannel, which should be wet only far enough to cover the 
medicated cotton. The best method, however, is to use the medical 
electrode, in which the medicine is concealed, is always ready for 
use, and leaves nothing on the skin. 

The best material by far for the electrodes is carbon, which should 
have a wooden backing and handle for strength, and a diameter of 
two and one-half or three inches. The carbon is free from oxidation, 
and imparts a soothing influence very different from that of metal. 
Small carbon electrodes may be used for limited applications. 

Next to the carbon and cotton, which are easily changed and kept 
clean, the wet sponge may be recommended, which is also a conven- 
ient channel for medical liquids, but is not so cleanly. 

The irritative effect of the positive pole may be diminished by in- 
creasing the size of the electrodes and the amount of water on their 
surface, as well as by various soothing medical liquids. Alkalies, 
soap, althea powder and hyoscyamus may be used. The irritant 
influence of the negative pole may be reduced by enlarging its sur- 
face, or the- obstruction by a rheostat. 

When the object is to irritate the skin, a metal brush is used. 
The interrupting electrode is used when we wish to break and renew 
the current, which is convenient for diagnosis. 

The commutating electrode, which produces what are called " vol- 
taic alternatives," is important when we wish to make a galvanic or 
a primary current equal at both poles, and thus make it a powerful 
and equable stimulus. 



54'6 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

A long-handled electrode is valuable for making applications under 
the clothing. The gliding treatment over the body is made more 
facile by a roller electrode, which makes diffusive stimulation easy. 

There is no electrode so beneficial and adaptable as the human 
hand, which may give strong currents without irritation and impart 
the vitality of the operator. A wet linen glove of crash material is 
sometimes a useful addition. 

For surgical use in galvano-cautery and for gynecological practice a 
variety of electrodes are used which I need not describe. 

Electric Measurements. — The operator whose nice sensibility 
and psychometric perception enables him to realize the true charac- 
ter of each current may not need the instruments of exact measure- 
ment, except in recording and describing his treatment in the use of 
galvanism, which alone is measurable. But for scientific accuracy he 
needs to understand electric measurement and description, which 
portrays the exact amount of galvanic electricity used upon a patient 
as nearly as instruments can record it, — the amount used being what 
the electric force is competent to carry through a certain amount of 
resistance. But I must confess it does not clearly appear that any 
measurement by instruments is an exact expression of the vital 
effect of a current. 

The electro-motive force is expressed in volts, the resistance in 
ohms, — names derived from Volta and Ohm. The volt signifies an 
electric power competent to produce a movement of one metre 
(39.37 inches) a second through one gramme (15 grains), and this force 
is about what we find in one Daniell's cell (such as is commonly 
used). The Daniell cell, lined with a sheet of copper, holds about a 
gallon, and about two-thirds of its content is occupied by a saturated 
solution of sulphate of copper ; and a porous cup, holding a fluid of 
which one-ninth is sulphuric acid, is placed in the centre of the jar, 
and a bar of zinc amalgamated with mercury inserted in the cup. 

This cell is passive when the current is not flowing, but yields a 
volt of force when its poles are connected. The most active cells 
(with sulphuric and bichromate fluids) yield about two volts. 

The ohm of resistance is what is offered to the current by two 
hundred and fifty feet of copper wire one-twentieth of an inch in diam- 
eter, hence a very minute amount. 

The wire of the primary coil of a portable battery sixty feet long 
and one-eighteenth of an inch in diameter would offer not quite one- 
fifth of an ohm of resistance, but an exterior Faradic coil wire one 
twenty-eighth of an inch in diameter and two hundred feet long would 
offer a resistance of nearly 1.6 ohms. A wire of one-thirtieth, four 
hundred feet long, would offer a resistance of 3.6 ohms. 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 547 

If the power of one volt operates through one ohm of resistance, 
it transmits a certain quantity of electricity per second, which quan- 
tity is called a coulomb, and an ampere is the current of one cou- 
lomb per second. The amperes are measured by a meter which is 
called a milliampere meter. The milliampere is not a thousand am- 
peres, but the thousanth part of an ampere. 

When we have galvanic batteries yielding from five to fifty volts of 
force we might expect a vast number of milliamperes to pass through 
the human body ; but as the resistance of the body is between two 
and three million times the resistance of a similar mass of copper, 
only a small amount of electricity passes through it without a strong 
voltage, such as is furnished by numerous cells or the motive force of 
a coil containing a magnet. 

The body and limbs together offering a resistance of about fifteen 
thousand ohms would require a battery of fifteen volts to produce a 
current of one milliampere. Hence batteries of fifty to a hundred cells 
are required to produce efficient currents between the hands and feet, 
though batteries of ten to twenty cells are sufficient for short cur- 
rents. A current of ten inches through the flesh from ten cells of 
1.5 volts each would be strong enough for general use, being about 
seven or eight milliamperes. 

Without pretending to any accuracy, which the nature of the 
subject does not permit, I would say that for galvanic currents in the 
human body of adequate strength we require one efficient galvanic 
cell, such as the Law or Samson, for every inch in the length of 
the current. 

But why do we require this multiplication of cells which adds 
nothing to the galvanism but electro-motive force to compel its cir- 
culation in the flesh ? A single cell of larger size would furnish a 
greater volume of galvanism than the largest battery, and if to this 
cell we add the electro-motive force of an adequate coil we produce 
a greater effect than the largest battery of cells would produce. 

Upon this principle I have constructed a small portable galvanic 
battery, which possesses all the power needed in galvanic treatment, 
yielding a current which easily flows through the length of the body, 
and which requires a rheostat to moderate its action. Such a 
rheostat I have constructed on a simple and convenient plan. 

The reader will perceive from these statements that the electro- 
magnetic and galvanic currents are different, the former having what 
the latter has not, great penetrative power or electro-magnetic force, 
making it more available in electro-therapeutics. When the two are 
combined, as by union of the coil and cell, the galvanic current is 
carried through the system by the electro-magnetic, as efficiently as it 



54§ ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

is in the common portable battery, and the power thus united with 
it is in some respects preferable to the galvanic. Those who feel the 
currents prefer the electro-magnetic. 

Currents applied to the human body. — Our text-books are 
not at all clear in reference to the relation between the human body 
and the electric currents. They tell of volts and ohms, but give 
little instruction as to the relation of one to the other in the human 
body. 

We know that the conductivity of the human body is similar to 
that of a weak solution of salt, and is chiefly developed in its fluids, 
being greatly less in the hard and solid parts and adipose materials. 
Parts well filled with blood, such as the viscera of the trunk and the 
brain, are good conductors, while bone, tendon, epidermis, nails and 
hair offer great resistance. Weber makes the curious statement that 
the resistance of the tongue is equal to that of the whole body. 
Nevertheless the current of a few cells, which would not pass or be 
recognized through the body, will produce an intolerable burning if 
passed through the tongue. The tests derived from passing currents 
through German-silver rheostats are not a correct criterion of the 
effects on the human body. A current with electro-motive force 
making it five times as efficient as another may show no appreciable 
difference when tested by such a rheostat. 

We are told by the measurements of Dr. Matthiesen that the con- 
ductivity of copper is more" than 2,900,000 times as great as that of 
salt water. Hence we learn that the length of a copper wire is of 
little importance if currents have any force. But as the conductivity 
of a wire is inversely as the square of its diameter, a copper wire may 
be fine enough to offer sensible resistance, and a fine wire of German 
silver offers resistance enough to be used as a rheostat or current 
obstructed 

The resistance of the human body is in proportion to the length 
of the current through it, and in inverse proportion to the thickness 
or diameter of the parts — in other words, it passes more readily 
through the trunk than through the limbs, when there is not an 
adipose obstruction. 

A current through the body may be from hand to hand or hand to 
root or foot to foot. The difference is said to be not very great, though 
the distance from hand to foot is greater, and I find the resistance 
fifty per cent, greater. The resistance offered by this tract has not 
been stated in the common text-books. Meyer quotes the very 
opposite opinions of Pouilliet and Lenz, without expressing any 
opinion himself. Pouilliet's incorrect estimate would make it nine 
hundred and sixty-one ohms. Of course this was only an estimate, 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 549 

not a measurement. The estimate of Lenz and Ptschelnikoff would 
make it about one thousand seven hundred and sixty ohms. These 
are strange statements to be found in a work by Meyer, translated by 
Hammond. I have found a resistance from hand to hand in myself to 
be about ten thousand ohms, and from hand to foot fifteen to seven- 
teen thousand ohms. 

But what relation this resistance bears to galvanic and primary 
currents our text-books do not explain. They leave us to find out 
what amount of current we are getting by a milliampere meter, 
which is applicable only to the galvanic battery. For the primary 
and secondary currents we have no test but the sensibility of the 
operator and subject, and I believe the sensibility of a psychometric 
operator is the very best test, for he can recognize qualities in the 
current which no instrument can express. The electro-motive force 
of primary, secondary and static currents is so great as to seem 
beyond computation. 

The primary current, having much of the virtue of the galvanic, 
has a propelling force which makes it efficient in currents through 
the body which would require a very large galvanic battery ; but in 
portable batteries, generally, the primary is made too feeble in com- 
parison with the secondary. Tested by its power of overcoming the 
resistance of a rheostat, the primary current does not equal the 
galvanic cell which originates it, while it permeates the human body 
with the force of fifty or a hundred cells. Our text-books speak of 
electro-motive force of currents, as if they were correctly measured 
by the number of ohms which they overcome in passing through 
German-silver wires. But that kind of electro-motive force which is 
efficient in the human body is something very different, and on that 
subject we have received no explanation. 

The failure of the primary current to overcome as many ohms of 
resistance as the cell which originates it may be due to the interrup- 
tions, for a separate coil added in a galvanic current increases its 
power of overcoming resistance, though not as much as it increases 
its vital effects. That vital effects are in some way different from, 
and not commensurate with, mechanical effects was illustrated also 
by the experience of Dr. Piffard, who found that a current from 
Edison's incandescent-light wires, though reduced by a rheostat to 
the proper number of milliamperes, was too painful in application, 
compelling him to substitute a similar amount from galvanic cells. 

A current from one battery may have irritating and convulsive 
effects, when another battery may give the same number of milliam- 
peres of current without any convulsive effects, as the current is 
changed. The cells containing muriate of ammonia have a much 



550 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

milder influence than those containing the common sulphuric acid 
and bichromate solution. 

When we apply ten cells with ten or fifteen volts of electro-motive 
force to the human body, with the electrodes but a few inches apart 
and the connections moist, we get an efficient portion of the motive 
force, but this declines as we separate the electrodes, and a current 
which is very strong on a short circuit becomes nearly insensible 
when it traverses the length of the body. This we may realize and 
estimate by introducing the galvanometer into the circuit. Ten cells 
would send but one or two milliamperes through the length of the 
body. 

The electro-motive force of the primary and secondary currents is 
so great that we have no difficulty on this question, and the sensa- 
tions of the operator are a sufficient guide. He should not adminis- 
ter any current which he has not tried on himself. 

The diffusive power of battery currents in carrying medical 
potencies throughout the system demands that the electrician should 
also be profoundly acquainted with the materia medica, and should 
apply the appropriate remedy wherever he applies the positive pole, 
unless the remedy be one which may be decomposed, so that the 
positive pole will attract it. When we apply a solution of iodide of 
potassium to the surface (say in a wad of cotton) under the negative 
pole, the iodine will make its way through the body to the positive 
pole. But this question does not arise in using my medical electrode, 
the potentiality of the remedy being conveyed without its substance. 

The strength of currents is regulated in portable batteries by a 
shield pulled out or pushed in, or by separating more or less the 
inner and outer coil. In the galvanic battery we regulate by the 
number of cells used, and a switch is arranged to take into the circuit 
any number from one upward. But we also regulate its strength by 
the resistance we interpose between the electrodes and the patient, 
or the resistance interposed by a rheostat between the battery and 
the electrodes. The method by resistance is better than by selecting 
cells, as it gives to all the cells the same amount of action and 
preserves their equality. An accurate knowledge of the resistance 
is obtained by using wire rheostats in which a certain length of 
German silver makes the hindrance. As German silver gives thirteen 
times the resistance of copper, a fine German silver wire is an 
efficient rheostat, and the best rheostat is arranged so that we easily 
change the resistance, as we wind the wires off the spool, and know 
how many coils we are using on the spool. This is the rheostat of 
Wheatstone. The rheostat or resistance coil gives us the number of 
ohms of resistance that we are using to check the current. Brenner's 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 55 T 

resistance coils are not so simple in plan as Whcatstone's, in which 
the wires are coiled around a spool. The best rheostat that I have 
seen is the Bailey current regulator, which operates admirably and 
has the additional merit that it conducts the current through carbon, 
which is a beneficial method for the patient. 

Cheap and simple rheostats may be made by using a glass tube 
filled with water, with corks in the end through which wires may be 
inserted, the distance between the ends of which determines the 
amount of resistance, — or by using an open channel or trough, half 
an inch to an inch wide, filled with water. The great facility of ad- 
justing the distance between the wires on this plan is its recommen- 
dation. This channel may be made of any non-conducting insulating 
substance, — -porcelain, plaster or painted wood. The conductivity of 
the water can easily be increased by adding- salt. 

When the helix is constructed so that the exterior coil slides over 
the interior or primary coil, we regulate the currents by sliding it. 
When the interior coil is entirely uncovered, we have the full force of 
the primary, with nothing of the secondary ; but as the outer coil, with 
its poles connected by a wire, slides over the inner, it gradually 
absorbs the force of the latter, until, when the inner coil is entirely 
covered, its whole force is absorbed by the exterior, which gives us a 
powerful Faradic or induction current and suppresses the primary 
current, for there is only a certain amount of force and whatever 
appears in one coil cannot appear in the other. Hence we may 
arrange it as we please, obtaining only primary or only secondary 
currents, or in any proportion we please ; for, when the inner coil is 
half covered by the outer, we have one-half the force in the primary 
current and one-half in the secondary, and we may administer these 
combinations of definite portions of each current to the patient, by 
having our wires or cords attached to the binding posts for each cur- 
rent. But if the poles of the exterior coil are not connected in any 
way it has no effect on the primary. It would seem that each elec- 
trode might have one wire or cord to carry both currents, — one elec- 
trode thus connecting with the positive primary and secondary, the 
other with the negative primary and secondary, — and that with this 
arrangement a skilful and experienced operator might produce very 
satisfactory results, with primary, secondary and combined currents 
in various proportions ; but when the student attempts to make this 
very convenient combination, he finds a difficulty not mentioned in 
any text -book. When the primary and secondary currents are brought 
together, with moderate ceil power, they antagonize. The wires con- 
necting the currents apparently into one bring them into conflict. 
The positive primary, instead of going to the subject, strikes back to 



55- ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

the positive secondary and destroys it, and the negative primary de- 
stroys the negative secondary, leaving the secondary entirely 
destroyed, although the outer coil is over the primary in the position 
to receive all its force. The primary current, by thus acting 
through the outer coil, destroys all inductive effects, and takes this 
route without touching the patient, who then feels nothing. 

Hence it is necessary (to combine the currents with moderate cell 
powers) that they should go to the subject through separate wires and 
electrodes, without any metallic contact on the route, and both cur- 
rents will then be realized, if the electrodes are prevented from touch- 
ing ; a strip of rubber or paper to keep them apart until delivered into 
the subject will prevent their mingling, for they will not react on each 
other through the subject, but each will produce its complete effect 
as if it were alone. With a doubled cell power the positive primary, 
in touching the positive secondary, suppresses it on that side and 
increases the negative secondary. So the negative primary, in touch- 
ing the negative secondary, suppresses it and reinforces the positive 
secondary. In other words, each primary current repels the secondary 
of the same side, driving it to the opposite side, and the two primary 
currents suppress the two secondary by touching them, but if the 
primary and secondary are kept apart until they reach the patient, 
each has its full effect. It is curious to observe how the primary 
electrode on each side nullifies the effect of the secondary, even though 
the secondary coil entirely covers the primary, and how quickly a 
powerful Faradic current is then released on one side, whenever the 
primary ceases to touch the secondary electrode. 

As batteries are commonly constructed, the first binding post gives 
the positive primary and the second the negative primary current. 
The second is also used to give the positive Faradic and the third the 
negative Faradic ; but the first and third — in other words, the positive 
primary and negative secondary post — are used to give the combined 
current, which is the most powerful that can be given, and which is 
increased, like the Faradic current, by pushing the exterior over the 
inner coil, and diminished by withdrawing it. 

When the two coils of the helix are not movable but fixed, we have 
a certain full amount of available force in each current, which we may 
reduce down to nothing, by the use of the sliding tubular shield, which 
reduces the entire force of both currents. Thus we may have any 
grade of intensity of either current, singly or combined, but we cannot 
vary the proportions of the two combinations as when the outer coil 
is movable, and if we combine the currents they combine on an equal 
footing. 

Hence I prefer the movable coil, as giving a far greater variety of 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 553 

desirable effects, and in preparing the coils I give the primary a much 
fuller development than usual, because I attach more importance to 
its use, and desire a more efficient magnet to operate the rheotome 
in slow or rapid vibrations, — the common helix being too feeble to con- 
trol the rheotome with facility and sustain the desirable variations. 

The standard apparatus, as proposed by the Electrical Congress at 
Paris in 1881, may serve as a standard for comparison merely, but I 
do not regard it as a satisfactory standard for an efficient induction 
apparatus. This proposed apparatus uses as a generator the Daniell's 
cell of one* volt ; the operator needs a cell or cells capable of giving 
more than one volt. The length of its primary coil is three and one- 
half inches ; of the secondary coil, two and three-fifths inches. The 
primary wire is one twenty-fifth of an inch in diameter ; the secondary, 
one hundredth. There are four layers of the primary wire and twenty- 
eight of the secondary. The primary current is thus hardly sufficient 
to generate the strength of magnetism necessary to give power at the 
rheotome, or to make a strong apparatus, the length of its wire being 
less than a hundred feet. The exterior coil gives a fine current, and 
contains about thirty times as great a length of wire as the interior 
coil. 

As the exterior coil covers but a trifle over half the length of the 
interior coil, the helix can give primary and secondary currents at the 
same time, in nearly equal proportions, the primary strength being 
doubled when it is used alone. Such an arrangement is appropriate 
when the exterior coil is not movable. 

ELECTRIC BATHS. 

The principles governing electric baths are not obscure. If the 
bath-tub is metallic, the patient should be separated from it by a 
wooden floor or lattice-work, to avoid contact. A current applied to 
the bath-tub brings a diffused influence over the entire surface of the 
patient, which flows readily if the water be well supplied with salt, 
and at the same time conveys the peculiar tonic, antiseptic influence 
of salt, which is beneficial in fevers. An unlimited variety of medical 
impressions may be made by introducing the remedies in the bath, 
and applying the positive pole to the metallic bath-tub. 

The negative pole may be held in the hand, out of the water, which 
will bring an abundant current to the arms. The tonic and cooling 
influence thus applied to the surface will be peculiarly beneficial in 
fever, and in cutaneous diseases of a relaxed and hyperaemic condition. 

If a negative pole, well insulated, is applied to the shoulders, a 
highly tonic and restorative impression will be made. 

In a bath-tub of soapstone, painted wood or japanned ware, glass 



554 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

or porcelain, the treatment consists in applying electrodes (which are 
insulated by varnish or rubber up to the point of contact with the 
body) to all points of the surface, on the same principles as when out 
of the bath, which need not be described at present. Water being 
described as a poor conductor, the currents given in a bath should 
not be much influenced by its presence if not made saline. But in 
fact warm water offers less resistance than the surface of the body. 
If sufficiently saline, currents may be passed without actual* contact 
which will tend to diffuse over the whole surface, which is an impor- 
tant feature of the saline bath. Positive currents may ♦ be diffused 
over large areas of the surface and attracted by the negative pole to 
the region of Health. This gives us the opportunity through the 
water of making a very extensive and diffusible electrode through 
water for either the positive or negative poles, and thus gives an 
important variety of treatment, in which very large electric currents 
may be passed through large areas without irritation. The liability 
to irritation will be still less when the current is from the magnetic 
battery. This transmission through water may be made when it is 
not salted, for in practice we do not find in water so great a resistance 
as we should expect from the statements in the books, and when salt 
or carbonate of soda is freely added the conductivity becomes much 
greater than that of the body, and currents may pass quite around 
the body for this reason, unless the electrodes are brought into con- 
tact with it. 

For galvanic currents, about sixty cells, giving one and one-half 
volts each, are sufficient for electric baths. Some patients will require 
the whole force of the battery and others will be as much affected by 
one-tenth of its power. The best way of regulating the power is by a 
rheostat or current regulator, which gives to all the cells an equal 
action, rather than by selecting a certain number of cells, which taxes 
them unequally. 

Galvanic and primary currents change the predominance of func- 
tions, but when we use a commutator their power is increased, and 
they manifest the stimulating power of the Faradic, and a strong 
current will produce an extensive contraction of muscles when sent 
through the length of the body. When electrodes are placed on the 
skin they make a strong impression, and when they are more remote 
the impression given through the water is of course more slight and 
diffused through a larger surface. The greater penetrating power of 
the Faradic enables it to be felt at a greater distance. 

When the medicines are not too expensive they may be administered 
through the bath, in which case the positive current may be given 
from a metallic bath-tub, or from a naked wire extending all around 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 555 

it under the water. Dr. Schweig, of New York, mentions his success 
in administering iron through the bath, which he used in the form of 
tartrate of iron and ammonia. He has also successfully used the 
extract of malt, and I have no doubt that nutritive substances may 
be effectively used when needed. Iodine he has found available in 
promoting absorption of morbid deposits, and iodide of potassium, 
one ounce to the bath, he found useful in removing lead from the 
system. 

Influence of Static (Positive) Electricity. 

It has been shown, in the chapter on Hygiene, that the higher regions 
of the atmosphere are more congenial to the brain and the higher 
elements of humanity and greatly promotive of the health of the lungs 
as well as the brain. 

These higher regions are largely supplied with positive electricity, 
the accumulations of which we observe in thunder-clouds. The evap- 
oration of water under almost all circumstances (and especially from 
the ocean) carries up a positive condition with the vapor, and of course 
leaves a more or less negative condition behind. Thus the surface of 
the earth, and the air in contact with it, is usually negative, except 
when dry and heated by sunshine ; and apartments at or below the 
surface of the earth are very unfavorable to health, compared with 
those in the upper stories of houses, or in dry, elevated locations, 
where positive conditions prevail. The positive condition of the 
atmosphere in dry, sunshiny weather, with a clear blue sky, is ex- 
tremely pleasant and healthful, while the negative conditions of damp 
weather, with deficient sunshine, or, still worse, the negative condition 
produced by thawing ice and snow in the slush of winter, or the east 
winds from Atlantic icebergs, are very depressing. It has been deter- 
mined by careful observations that the electricity of the atmosphere 
reaches a maximum about 10 a. m., which is the period most favor- 
able to human activity, and reaches a minimum after midnight, about 
2 a. m., a time which is most appropriate for rest and entirely unfit 
for labor. 

We thus learn that electricity, like caloric, is the natural stimulant 
of the nervous system, necessary to its activity ; and it is continually 
generated, with caloric, in a healthy constitution, and so freely in some 
few individuals as to be given off in sparks. The natural condition 
of the human constitution in health and vigor is positive, but the pos- 
itive electricity disappears when the nervous energies are reduced by 
over-exertion, fatigue and lassitude, or by rheumatism and some other 
diseases. This positive electricity, however, is not detected when it 
is carried off by perspiration. 



556 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

Being thus a necessary stimulant of life, the diminution of which 
depresses all vital processes, we evidently have in Franklinism the 
most valuable agent furnished by electric science, incapable, unless 
violently administered in shocks, of the injurious effects that have 
often followed the use of chemical electricity, and capable, by its cur- 
rents, of controlling physiological and pathological processes more 
satisfactorily and much more conveniently than it can be done by 
chemical electricity. 

The true explanation of the value of static electricity, the close 
correspondence and sympathy of all corporeal and all cerebral surfaces, 
being unknown to the prof ession, they have been puzzled to account for 
its superior value. Dr. W. J. Morton says : " How can simple electrifi- 
cation by insulation and the drawing of sparks, it is asked, produce the 
decided effects that are claimed for it ? Static electricity, it is said, 
owing to its high tension, accumulates merely on the surface of the 
body, and does not penetrate into the deeper organs, while the spark is 
merely the briefest kind of current." 

This ignorance of the rationale may have been one of the causes for 
its signal neglect for a whole century, while benevolent, practical men, 
like Rev. John Wesley and Dr. Gale of New York, went on in trium- 
phant cures. The same ignorance of the rationale of animal magnet- 
ism contributed to its neglect. Dogma is more important than facts 
to dogmatic minds. 

Dr. R. J. Curtis, in the American Medical Journal ', endeavors to ex- 
plain the effects of electricity as due to its mechanical forces. Medi- 
cal literature is emphatically " wandering in the dark" on this subject. 
The superficial notion expressed by a well-known writer that static 
electricity is a superficial affair, operating only on the skin, like baths 
and massage, is essentially untrue, for it penetrates the body in every 
direction as freely as it passes through water, and hence may act 
directly on the internal organs. Yet, even if it did not, Sarcognomy 
shows that in operating on the surface it affects every vital power. 
Hence it proves curative in many cases in which medical science has 
entirely failed and even galvanism is unsuccessful, for it produces 
effects that nothing else can produce. Dr. F. E. Caldwell mentions 
a case of muscular rheumatism of the deltoid muscle, in which galvan- 
ism entirely failed, which was cured by tri-weekly treatment with 
static electricity by insulation sparks and massage roller. 

Static or Franklinic electricity, which for near an entire century 
was neglected or contemptuously treated by the majority of the med- 
ical profession, is still but imperfectly presented by medical authors 
and its great capacities but little understood. 

Electrical machines are commonly supplied with brass chains or 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 557 

cords, with some textile covering, as the channel for conveying elec- 
tricity to patients, and long handles furnished to manipulate the chains 
and. keep them off the patient and operator, as it is said that the 
"electricity readily leaps off the conducting cord in a shower of fine 
sparks." There is no excuse for this folly, as wires covered with rub- 
ber or gutta percha are perfectly insulated and require no handles to 
manage them, nor any precautions to prevent their losing electricity 
by touching the table or any other object, so that "the electricity may 
be all drawn off and the patient will receve none." 

The exposed end of the covered wire is quite sufficient, when 
approximated to the patient, to give or receive that gentle, insensible 
current which produces a happy effect when it is applied for delicate 
treatment. 

Handles of rubber or well-varnished wood, six or eight inches long, 
are sufficient to protect the operator, and any electrodes used with the 
common battery, metal, carbon or sponge, may be used, being held in 
contact with the person or clothing, or held near the surface for insen- 
sible passage of currents. 

Gentle sparks may be drawn when a strong local impression is 
desired, but otherwise a gentle, barely perceptible current is the best, 
which is obtained by contact with the skin. 

Whether treating by one or by two electrodes, the principles guiding- 
application are the same as in the application of chemical electricity 
guided by Sarcognomy. 

The method of treating by Franklinism, however, differs materially 
from that of the electricity originated by galvanism. With the four 
forms of electricity from galvanism, the operator has nothing to do 
but to use two electrodes, bringing them into contact with the body 
— the proper localities being shown by Sarcognomy. A current from 
the positive to the negative electrode through the intervening body 
is the whole story. Such is the common practice. 

But in Franklinism we are not obliged 'to use two electrodes upon 
the patient. He may be fully charged with either a positive or a neg- 
ative condition from one electrode, and then treated with the opposite 
electrode alone. But in the process of charging him with, say, positive 
electricity we do not ignore the negative electrode ; we simply con- 
nect it in some way with the ground or floor. 

ACTION OF STATIC MACHINE IN CURRENTS AND SHOCKS. 

When the machine is arranged and operated as usual, the Leyden 
jars into which the brass rods are inserted become highly charged. 
The positive rod establishes a negative condition on the surface of the 
jar and the negative establishes a positive condition ; thus the outside 



55^ ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

of the jar is in a condition opposite to the inside, and the knobs con- 
nected therewith. So long as the brass rods and knobs are charged 
with positive electricity on one side and a negative condition on the 
other, the jars are compelled by induction to retain their electric con- 
ditions, and they cannot discharge or equalize themselves though 
connected by metal at the bottom ; but when the knobs of the rods are 
near enough to permit a spark or flash to pass, the moment it passes 
the electricity of the jar is freed from inductive restraint, and the 
positive electricity passes to the negative jar through their metallic 
connection, with the same force but in the opposite direction to the 
flash of the knobs. If, instead of the brass connection between the 
jars, the connection should be through wires held by the patient, the 
current would pass through him and give him a strong shock. If the 
knobs are less than an eighth of an inch apart, the rapid flow of sparks 
between them corresponds to the flow from the outsides of che jars, 
and if this is allowed to pass through a patient (who is in connection 
with the disconnected jars) it will give him vigorous shocks such as he 
would feel if the sparks touched him, which have some resemblance 
in feeling to a Faradic current. For my own comfort I would prefer 
to have the knobs not more than the sixteenth of an inch apart. 
Dr. Morton claims to call this a static induced current similar to the 
Faradic ; but this is purely fanciful. The Faradic is a to-and-fro cur- 
rent, but this is a one-way current like the primary, and it does not 
differ from a sparking current taken direct from the knobs, or the 
currents from the inside to the outside of a Leyden jar. It is simply 
a Leyden-jar current, kept up by a continued flow of electricity from 
the revolving plates. 

When the jars are disconnected we can take the sparking current 
from them, and when they are connected we can take the same current 
from the knobs above, which communicate with their interior, by bring- 
ing an electrode near the patient, who holds the other. The current is 
just the same, differing only in duration and in the fact that one comes 
from the tinfoil and the other from the brass rods or knobs. It adds 
nothing to our resources, and Dr. Morton's pretended discovery of a 
static induced current, with new properties, is simply a misunderstand- 
ing of very plain facts. 

We may take the static current with an even flow as insensible as the 
galvanic, by close contact with the sources or electrodes, or we may 
take it in an interrupted manner, so as to give delicate spark shocks 
or very violent ones. But the interrupted, shocking current is the 
same wherever we obtain it. We may obtain it from the knobs or 
from the jars. If the jars are separated and we connect ourselves to 
them, we get a shock for every spark passing between the knobs, for 
that compels a similar current between the jars. 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 559 

If the knobs arc separated widely and we .connect with them, while 
the jars are but slightly separated, the spark will pass between the 
jars, and we get a corresponding current as a shock from the knobs. 
It matters not whether we take our shocking current from the knobs 
or the jars, but it is important that the spark should be small to make 
the shock delicate. Hence the interrupting space between the knobs 
or between the jars, where the spark passes, must be very small if 
we would escape a painful shock. We approximate the knobs very 
close when we take a shock from the jars, and we approximate the jars 
very close, by proper connections, when w r e take a shock from the 
knobs. An eighth of an inch is a gap wide enough to give strong 
shocks, and the thickness of a sheet of paper is a sufficient separa- 
tion to produce a pleasant broken current. When either the upper 
(interior) or the lower (exterior) current is broken by a separation 
producing sparks, it causes a broken or shocking current in the other 
connection, which the patient will feel if the connection is through 
him. 

We may get our shocking current in another way ; each rod charged 
with a positive or a negative condition has the opposite condition on 
the outside of its jar. Hence we may get a Leyden-jar current simul- 
taneously on each jar between the jars and the knobs, and treat two 
patients at once with them. My new static apparatus is arranged 
to demonstrate and use these two currents at once, and also to com- 
bine them with magnetism. 

But it is possible also to duplicate in another manner — to treat 
one patient with the current of the jars in shocking fashion and at the 
same time treat another with gentle shocks from the sparks of the 
knobs, if we arrange rightly, which would be duplicating the jar current 
which Dr. Morton thinks so important. 

We could not, however, obtain the second shocking current direct 
from the knobs, as contact with them would cause a smooth flow. An 
interruption of the current would be necessary, which should be pro- 
cured at the contact with the patient, as when the negative electrode 
is approached to the positively charged subject or when the fingers 
approximate the positive and negative knobs. But it is obtained 
direct from the knobs in my new apparatus. 

Thus we understand the static machine may give two shocking 
currents simultaneously — either one from each jar in connection with 
its knob, or one from the jars and one from the knobs, and these 
shocking currents may be converted into smooth, continuous currents 
by firm contact. Thus two patients may be treated at once by either 
style of current, or with a machine of sufficient power several patients 
joining their hands may be treated as one. 



560 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

The explanation of these things has been either neglected or un- 
known by the authors of our text-books, and machines have been con- 
structed generally with the jars connected by brass and arranged with 
a view to one current only. 

METHODS OF USING STATIC ELECTRICITY. 

Treatment by static electricity is more simple than by other 
methods. Insulation and saturation is a leading measure. The 
patient is brought into connection with the positive or negative elec- 
trode (I prefer the positive), and the other electrode is used to com- 
plete the circuit, by holding it near enough to the body to procure 
a passage of the current. 

Without making a current, however, we get the benefit of static 
electricity from one pole, in contact with which the patient becomes 
charged — his surface fully covered, and his hair more or less erected, 
if the charge be sufficient. To produce this result readily the patient 
should be insulated, to prevent the escape of the electricity and per- 
mit its accumulation. He may have his chair or stool placed on 
rubber cloth, or on a varnished wooden platform, resting on glass legs, 
and the conducting cord may be attached to the platform or may be 
held in his hand. The absurdity of using a brass chain or a cord 
wrapped with textile material, neither of which is capable of holding 
the electricity, seems to be still in fashion (I suppose for want of 
thought), and these conductors require a long handle to manipulate 
them and keep them off the patient. An insulated copper or steel 
wire is the proper conductor, which may be freely handled without 
the least escape of electricity. The steel wire admits of the conven- 
ience of an elastic extensible coil. Insulation is favored by a dry 
atmosphere and a dry skin in the subject. We should avoid having 
anything pointed about the patient or his seat, as points discharge 
electricity with greater freedom than flat surfaces. Silk and woollen 
clothing assist the insulation. 

To insulate and charge the patient with positive electricity gives 
him a general stimulus, to promote the operations of life, as the entire 
surface of the body is under electric stimulation, and this produces by 
sympathy a general stimulation of the brain and exaltation of the 
vital powers, while it also stimulates the body directly, for we find on 
the surface of the body the corresponding seats of all the physiologi- 
cal and psychic powers, parallel with those of the brain. Such being 
the case, we naturally infer that universal superficial stimulation 
approximates the character of a panacea — a remedy of universal 
value. But its character as a panacea is not complete, because its 
action is superficial on brain and body. 



CHAP. XXIV.] ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. 56 1 

What, then, shall we add to complete its power by acting on the 
interior structure of body and brain ? Shall we use the galvanic or 
the Faradic current which penetrates deeply ? This would indeed be 
a valuable combination — either to use the currents simultaneously, 
by uniting the wires in an electrode, or to use one after the other. 

I would recommend the combination of static currents with either 
of the three dynamic currents, galvanic, primary and secondary, as the 
case may require, and I think I see in these combinations a new 
world of therapeutic utility. I refer not merely to insulation, but to 
the positive and negative currents of static electricity in combination 
with the three dynamic currents. I trust the medical profession will 
take this up, which I can only mention at present, and enjoy the 
benefit of these suggestions. 

My attention, however, has been more especially given to the im- 
portance of providing an interior tonic element — an element to sus- 
tain organic life, which, added to the stimulating power of the static 
current, makes a complete vital development. 

This tonic and soothing organic influence, which fortifies against 
the waste of high stimulation, I find in magnetism, an element some- 
what opposite to dynamic electricity — soothing instead of irritating, 
cooling rather than heating, and constructive instead of destructive. 
Magnetism and heat are antagonistic. Magnetism is entirely de- 
stroyed in a magnet at the temperature of 770 degrees, as stated in 
the French Academy. 

Its influence corresponds with that of the tonic and conservative 
region of the brain, above and behind the ears, while the influence of 
dynamic electricity is almost entirely basilar. 

By combining magnetism with static electricity, 1 propose to fortify 
as well as stimulate ; and by combining it with dynamic electricity, I 
propose to give the latter a more soothing and wholesome influence, 
greatly increasing its hygienic power and the tolerance of the consti- 
tution for its use. 

The static currents. — From each pole of the static machine a 
wire and a proper electrode give us a current which we may use in 
the same manner as the positive and negative electrodes of dynamic 
electricity, with this difference, that static electrodes do not require 
to touch the skin, but may be applied all over the body by holding one 
or more inches from the surface, or in contact with the clothing. 

If the electrodes are in contact with the skin, the currents pass 
almost insensibly, as from galvanism. If the patient is holding the 
positive electrode, the negative being approached to his person 
and presented as a point or small surface, it will draw a current from 
the part which it approaches, giving a slight and pleasant sensation ; 



562 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC APPARATUS. [CHAP. XXIV. 

but if the electrode be not pointed, it may draw a spark, whenever 
the electro-motive force is sufficient. Fine sparks drawn by contact 
with the clothing are not objectionable, but a spark of any length 
makes a sharper impression than is desirable. 

By this method we may give a stimulating impression to any or 
every region of the body, with a better effect than by the negative 
pole of galvanic or primary currents. With an adequate knowledge 
of Sarcognomy and the laws of therapautic treatment we have a sim- 
ple and satisfactory method in the use of the static negative pole. 

When I see how charmingly all the faculties of the sensitive con- 
stitution, including all the powers of the brain, respond to this treat- 
ment, I am ready to place it in the very front rank of therapeutic 
agencies. 

It is not indispensable that the electrode, which acts as a negative, 
should be connected to the negative pole of the machine, for if the 
patient is well charged his electricity will pass off to conductors 
which are not really negative. One electrode may be connected to 
the earth, and the most convenient method is to fasten it to the iron 
gas or water pipes — and even without such a connection the 
hand of the operator may withdraw a spark, when the patient is well 
charged. 

Dynamic electricity can sustain the action of two poles when not 
directly connected to each other, by connecting with the earth, through 
which they communicate as readily as if connected by a wire — a fact 
difficult to explain. But static electricity has so much more ener- 
getic diffusiveness that not even an earth connection is necessary ; 
the connection occurs through almost any surroundings. 

P. S. — In reviewing this chapter, I would refer again to the marked difference be- 
tween the measurable galvanism and the dynamism of induction which has not 
been measured, but which is realized in its effects on the human constitution. I 
have suggested the union of this dvnamism by a coil with galvanic currents, as pro- 
ducing a more pleasant and efficient continuous current, which I hope to introduce 
into general use. In urging its adoption I have admitted (through courtesy) the 
common theory that the multiplication of cells produces only an increase of electro- 
motive force, and no increase of galvanism; but- 1 must now state my individual opin- 
ion that an increased number of cells increases the volume of galvanism, as well as 
the electro-motive force, and that the gain of electro-motive force in using a coil is 
essentially different from the gain by multiplication of cells, and is for therapeutic 
purposes preferable — in other words, coil dynamism and galvanism are essentially 
distinct, and the physiological energy of coil dynamism has not been subjected to 
mechanical measurement. 

As to the efficiency of batteries or currents, some of my remarks might mislead 
the reader, unless he bears in mind that the efficiency of batteries or currents de- 
pends more on their connection with the body than their magnitude. A metallic elec- 
trode plate six inches square, with a saturated solution of salt or muriate of ammonia 
on the skin, will be a hundred times as efficient as a small electrode with merely a 
moist connection, and will therefore make a small battery efficient. It is especially 
important that the negative electrode should be large. 



CHAPTER XXV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 

Electric currents and batteries — Treatment of Head and nervous system, direc- 
tions of authors — Paralysis — Cerebral disorders and their treatment — Chorea and 
spasm — Neuralgia — Treatment of eyes — Diphtheria — Toothache — Hydropho- 
bia — Treatment of Thorax — Pneumonia — Asphyxia — Consumption — Pleu- 
risy — Diseases of the heart — Aneurism — The diaphragm — Hiccough — Treat- 
ment of the Abdominal Region — Fevers — The stomach — Nausea and vomiting 
— Cholera — Constipation and hernia — Dropsy — Rectal diseases — The liver- 
Electric development — Treatment of Pelvic Organs — amenorrhea, dysmenor- 
rhea, menorrhagia and parturition — Hemorrhoids — Stricture of the urethra — 
Impotence and spermatorrhoea — Diseases of the skin — Treatment of limbs — Use 
of apparatus — Batteries — Static apparatus — Electro-puncture — Cauterization. 



The object of this chapter will be to present in a condensed form 
the methods of treating diseases generally by electric agencies. The 
pathological record may not be complete, but the methods presented 
will probably be sufficient to guide the reader in the treatment of 
any other forms of disease. 

Before presenting the special treatments of organs, a few remarks 
are necessary to give clear ideas of currents and resistances in the 
human body, which are usually left in a vague condition in the mind 
of the student. This question refers entirely to galvanism, for static 
and electro-magnetic currents are not subject to milliampere meas- 
urement. 

The cursory and inaccurate remarks of the last chapter were based 
upon the ordinary incidents of electric application, in which every- 
thing depends upon the mode of application of the currents. 
A dry skin may make a resistance of 100,000 or 150,000 ohms, reduc- 
ing the current of a powerful battery to insignificance, while a moist 
connection with a saline solution may reduce it to one or two thousand 
ohms. Whether accidental contact with electric light or motor wires 
in the line of their connection shall be dangerous or not, depends 
much on the condition of the skin. The resistance of 17,000 ohms 
which I found between the hand and foot was obtained with the com- 
mon wet connection through the best apparatus of Sir W. Thompson, 
but in an experiment with metal electrodes, the hand and foot well 
wet with muriate of ammonia solution, the resistance indicated was 
but 6,000 ohms. With metal electrodes, a current from foot to foot, 



564 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

moist, indicated a resistance of 22,500 ohms, but when thoroughly 
soaked only 9,000, and with muriate of ammonia solution instead of 
water 4,800. With the same solution a current from summit of thigh 
to foot indicated but 2,621 ohms, and from hand to foot but 3,375. 

Water is necessary to soften the skin and permit the entrance of a 
current, but is not itself a good conductor. Indeed, pure water has 
been pronounced a non-conductor, but the water in common use has 
enough saline matter and impurities to make it a conductor, especially 
such as comes from the water-works of Boston, and the saline materials 
always present on the skin give a degree of conductivity. The resist- 
ance between the left foot and right hand, wet, I found equal to that 
of six inches of Boston water. A single inch of Boston water made 
as much resistance as appeared in a current between the foot and 
summit of thigh, well wet with muriate of ammonia. 

In administering currents we should keep a saturated solution of 
salt or muriate of ammonia to use in making them effective, and pure 
water and sponges to moderate their action. The estimate that one 
galvanic cell would be required for every inch of the circuit in the 
body, to make an effective current, is applicable only to the common, 
'mperfect connections. When we use saturated saline solutions the 
entire length from hand to foot may be estimated as offering a resist- 
ance of not more than 75 ohms to the inch, through which an efficient 
cell would send twenty milliamperes — much too large a current for 
ordinary practice ; hence one cell for every two inches of current 
would be ample, with saline connections, and forty cells would send a 
very efficient current from hand to foot, while twenty cells would be 
quite sufficient in ordinary practice. Larger batteries, however, are 
used, with a rheostat or current regulator, so that the full power of 
.he battery is never used, and consequently it is always in order and 
more durable. 

But I do not admit the necessity of these large batteries for the 
general practitioner, when a few cells reinforced by a coil will produce 
as atisfactory current of combined galvanic and electro-motive force, — 
the latter giving the penetrative power, which is sufficient to affect 
all parts of the body. This power, though not measurable by the 
metre, can be appreciated readily by its vital influence. 

TREATMENT OF THE HEAD AND NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

The treatment of the brain by electricity is necessarily a sort of 
terra incoguita> and authors have but little to say on the subject, as 
experience has shown that in applying galvanic currents to the head 
it is sometimes greatly disturbed, leaving feelings of oppression, dul- 
nesSj faintness, mental confusion, nausea, vomiting, convulsions and 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 56$ 

paralysis. Warned by this experience they avoid heroic treatment 
and proceed cautiously with one or two cells gradually increased. 

One of the most respectable works (Haynes) gives the present state 
of knowledge on this subject as follows : "There are several ways in 
which electrization of the brain may be performed, i. Place one 
pole on the forehead and the other on the back of the head (occiput). 



564 » 

Erratum. — On page 564 — 23d line from the top — for the word ''cell" sub- 
stitute — battery — to read : ' ; an efficient battery would send twenty milliamperes." 

That such a battery is not necessary I have shown by the successful use of a six- 
cell galvano-magnetic battery which is quite portable. 

I take this opportunity to reinforce my caution against the influence of the 
negative pole. To give the patient the benefit of electricity of any species, there 
should be a resistance on the negative side at least equal to the resistance of the 
current through his body, unless we desire the special effects of the negative pole. 
This resistance must be effectual. An electrode with 40 ohms resistance produced 
scarcely an appreciable difference. 

With static electricity, the proper condition is observed when the negative pole is 
held several inches from the body, but even then, if it presents many fine points, it 
would attract too rapidly, and extend an injurious influence. I have such an elec- 
trode which at the negative pole has a debilitating effect. 

The administration of the positive current through the body of the operator would 
be beneficial with a resistance at least equal on the negative side, but without that 
resistance would be injurious, as the patient would be kept in the negative condi- 
tion. These principles have been overlooked by authors, and it was for want of this 
knowledge that injurious effects were produced in pneumonia and that many 
electro-therapeutic treatments prove unsatisfactory or injurious. 



regulated by commutation. 

"The large electrode on the top of the head," if negative, may 
stimulate the brain — if positive, may relieve its congested and heated 
conditions by a downward current. But it is seldom that a positive 
pole on the top of the head is allowable, for it would not require long 
to depress our most sanative energies. Hyperaemia may be better 
relieved with the positive pole at the base of the brain, especially the 
under-jaw region, to send a downward current. The current to the 



564 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

moist, indicated a resistance of 22,500 ohms, but when thoroughly 
soaked only 9,000, and with muriate of ammonia solution instead of 
water 4,800. With the same solution a current from summit of thigh 
to foot indicated but 2,621 ohms, and from hand to foot but 3,375. 

Water is necessary to soften the skin and permit the entrance of a 
current, but is not itself a good conductor. Indeed, pure water has 
been pronounced a non-conductor, but the water in common use has 



TREATMENT OF THE HEAD AND NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

The treatment of the brain by electricity is necessarily a sort of 
terra incognita, and authors have but little to say on the subject, as 
experience has shown that in applying galvanic currents to the head 
it is sometimes greatly disturbed, leaving feelings of oppression, dul- 
ness, faintness, mental confusion, nausea, vomiting, convulsions and 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 565 

paralysis. Warned by this experience they avoid heroic treatment 
and proceed cautiously with one or two cells gradually increased. 

One of the most respectable works (Haynes) gives the present state 
of knowledge on this subject as follows : " There are several ways in 
which electrization of the brain may be performed. I. Place one 
pole on the forehead and the other on the back of the head (occiput). 
2. Place one pole over each temple. 3. Place one pole behind each 
ear (on mastoid process). 4. One very large electrode on the top of 
the head and another at the feet, in the hands, along the spine or 
under the chin. 5. To electrize one-half of the brain, place one pole 
on the eyebrows and the other on the mastoid process or in the hand 
of the same side. Less dizziness is caused when the current passes 
through one side of the head only, or from the forehead to the occi- 
put, than when sent from one side to the other through the temples 
or mastoid processes." 

This is a very meagre statement to one who knows that by proper 
currents through the head we may stimulate in detail every psychic 
faculty and every physiological power. But let us review it : Currents 
from the forehead to the occiput produce a great variety of tonic and 
stimulant effects — more healthful and harmonious as we approach 
the upper region, more hard and forcible as we descend. 

"One pole over each temple" is an objectionable proceeding with 
galvanic currents, but legitimate with Faradic or alternating treatment. 

The galvanic current should not be applied to the brain with- 
out understanding its organology and realizing what we are stimu- 
lating and what we are suppressing. The Faradic and alternating 
currents applied symmetrically on the right and left sides, or antero- 
posteriorly on correlative organs (as when we combine the lower occi- 
put {gyrus angularis) with the perceptive organs of the brow), give 
a proper normal stimulus if the currents are sufficiently gentle, which 
generally requires an effective rheostat. The static is the proper 
current for the head, with or without contact. 

To " place one pole behind each ear on the mastoid process," of 
the Faradic or static current, gives a general stimulation of the vital 
forces and muscular energies. The galvanic would be improper, unless 
regulated by commutation. 

"The large electrode on the top of the head," if negative, may 
stimulate the brain — if positive, may relieve its congested and heated 
conditions by a downward current. But it is seldom that a positive 
pole on the top of the head is allowable, for it would not require long 
to depress our most sanative energies. Hyperaemia may be better 
relieved with the positive pole at the base of the brain, especially the 
under-jaw region, to send a downward current. The current to the 



566 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

hands may relieve an oppressed brain — to the feet, it would be still 
more effective, if not carried too far. Applying- the negative pole 
under the chin would be heating — under the jaw, exciting and 
disturbing. That is a location for the positive instead of the negative 
pole. 

The current from the brow to the mastoid process is stimulating 
to the physical forces, but not so beneficial as when directed to the 
upper part of the occiput. 

The directions of authors as to cerebral treatment are vague and 
chaotic, from their entire ignorance of local functions, and it is unnec- 
essary to review them ; but I would mention that the dispersive 
power of galvanism applied to the base of the brain has been success- 
fully used to remove morbid conditions by Althaus of London and 
by Hughes of St. Louis. 

The profession has not entirely succeeded in ignoring the excite- 
ment of the cerebral organs in man by electricity. One solitary fact 
has been reported. It is stated by Haynes as follows : "Helmholtz 
made a real advance in electro-physiology. He observed that the 
descending current (the positive electrode on the forehead and the 
negative held in the hand) produces not only irritation, but alteration 
of excitability, external objects becoming less distinct. The effect of 
the ascending current (the positive electrode in the hand and the neg- 
ative to the forehead) is to render objects more distinct." This is a 
distinct discovery of the stimulation and suppression of the intellectual 
organs by negative and positive currents applied to them ; but, plain 
as the facts are, the medical man forgets that there are organs in the 
brain, and ascribes it all to the ascending and descending direction of 
the currents. Scientists are not always sufficiently vigilant to per- 
ceive phenomena for which they are not looking. 

A careful diagnosis should precede electric treatment. When the 
operator is not guided by Psychometry he should use electricity for 
exploration. The negative pole of a Faradic current should have its 
electrode fastened on the operator's wrist, while he goes over the 
entire person, pressing his finger upon every part to be explored. 
The patient may hold the positive pole in his hand or upon the hypo- 
chondria, or it may follow the negative, so as to send a current in a 
short course through the part to be explored, as the impression is 
stronger the nearer the electrodes approach. Every part in an inflam- 
matory or actively morbid and sensitive state will show by pain or sen- 
sitiveness that it is not normal, but parts in a very torpid, inactive 
state will show less than the normal sensibility. As we can pene- 
trate and reach all parts of the body in this way, it leads to a correct 
diagnosis. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 56/ 

In cases of paralysis we wish to learn if it belongs to the brain or 
to the spine and nerves. If the brain is the seat, it will probably 
appear as hemiplegia, being conspicuous only on one side, and the 
muscles of that side will be as excitable as ever by electricity — 
sometimes more so. If it be seated in the spine, also, muscular irrita- 
blity will continue ; but if in the nerves, there will be a great 
loss of excitability to Faradism, while the muscles may respond 
actively to the galvanic current and our prognosis will be more favor- 
able. In such cases a few months are generally required for recovery, 
but of course there are some speedy cures. 

In treating over the bodv it is convenient to compare any spot on 
one side with the corresponding spot on the other side. All changes 
in sensibility and contractility are important. When the swelled or 
congested condition has a basis of inflammation there is great tender, 
ness to the current. When it is the stagnant result of former 
disease, as in a congested spleen, there is great dulness or but little 
feeling. A similar condition may exist in the liver. 

When the spine is sensitive, the effect of its irritations is felt at a 
distance, and a metalic taste may be produced by the current, which 
is not usual when the part is below the head. 

Faradic electricity furnishes the best diagnosis of death. Rosen- 
thal reports the apparent death of a woman, pronounced dead by a 
country doctor, and lying in that condition, pulseless, for thirty-two 
hours, in whom he found the muscles of the face and limbs to 
respond to the Faradic current, and recommended resuscitation, which 
was successful in twelve hours. She was, though motionless, capable 
of hearing the talk of those around her. Some contractility sur- 
vives death, but it rapidly declines, never lasting longer than two or 
three hours. It persists longer in well-nourished bodies, and in 
those dying of acute disease, than in those exhausted by chronic 
diseases. 

Cerebral disorders are generally associated with the predominant 
influence of a position on the back of the neck (at the upper cervical 
vertebrae) related to the basis of the brain, and corresponding with the 
sacrum, feet and legs. Consequently a current from that locality to 
the middle of the shoulder is restorative in almost every case. If there 
are hyperemia and heat in the head a current to below the knee would 
be proper. The most soothing current in such a case is to the tibial 
region and top of the foot. 

If the brain be in a dull, depressed, inactive condition, the proper 
current should be directed to the part of the temporal arch marked 
Sanity and Cheerfulness, and extending through Health to the loca- 
tion of Power on the median line (posterior end of Firmness), any 



56S ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

portion of which tract will produce a renovating, invigorating effect. 
The positive in this case may be held in the hand, but it is better to 
apply it to the hypochondria or the groin, or, in cases of extreme dul- 
ness, to the foot. 

Very gentle currents by broad carbon or sponge electrodes or the 
point of a static electrode, from the front of the head to the upper 
occpiut, are generally beneficial, especially from the locations marked 
Disease and Insanity — also from the space in front of the upper half 
of the ear, which is analogous to the under-jaw region. 

With dynamic electricity, the scalp should be exposed as much as 
possible and the surface wet ; with static electricity, contact is not 
necessary, with a strong current. With a weak current (introduced 
by the positive as before) the negative may be applied upon the 
organs ; with a stronger current it may be held over the organs we 
would excite, and as the hair rises to meet it we are assured the cur- 
rent is passing. It is not desirable to draw sparks from the head or 
any sensitive locality. The steady, silent current is the most whole- 
some, and is best developed by an electrode with numerous fine 
points like a hairbrush, or by contact with the skin. 

The treatment of the head by static electricity may be made a very 
important adjunct to ethical culture, and education generally. It is 
beautiful to observe how the finer sentiments are developed and 
cultivated in the sensitive by the static negative pole held over the 
head. 

Next to the static I would recommend the galvanic current for 
the head, but that requires much greater caution in its use. One to 
five cells would be sufficient for its treatment, but each case must be 
a law for itself. Two cells are as much to the very sensitive as twenty 
to the insensible. In speaking of galvanic cells I refer to those con- 
taining muriate of ammonia. The sulphuric acid and bichromate 
cells are not commendable for head treatment. 

Insane and hysterical conditions require a gentle current from the 
under-jaw region to the shoulder and axilla, or to the region of Sanity. 
In hysteria, the current may be from the chin and below it to the 
spot just behind and below Sanity, and on the body from the region 
of the womb and groin to the axilla, and also to the lumbo-sacral 
region, for its tonic effect. 

Insanity of all grades requires the establishment of health in the 
pelvic organs, which sometimes requires orificial surgery. 

The insane condition requires currents from the base of the pelvis 
— perineum and sacrum — to the axilla and shoulder. Hence the 
patient .should sit on the positive electrode, a large sponge, which 
should be charged with the remedies appropriate to the case. Of 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 569 

course chronic cases require very prolonged treatment. A carbon 
electrode wrapped in moist cotton would also be appropriate. When 
the brain is lacking in vigor from the deficiency of spirit and animal 
force, currents may be passed from the side of the face to all parts of 
the occiput, as well as from the front of the body to the shoulders 
and thighs and entire posterior half of the body. 

In all unsound conditions of the brain great attention should be 
paid to restoring everything in the pelvic region, and also in the region 
of the liver and hypochondria, which has a coinciding relation with 
the pelvic organs, and is tributary to unsoundness by the gloomy, 
fretful and irritable character which it produces when irritated. 

This unsound tendency, belonging to the hepatic zone of the body, 
locates also in the anterior part of the third or basilar temporal con- 
volution, and its external development is above and around the cavity 
of the ear. The antagonism of this is in Firmness and Patience. 

Sound mental conditions are promoted by gentle currents to the 
superior posterior quarter of the head. 

In inflammation of the brain we may proceed as in other local in- 
flammations, with the dispersive power of the positive pole, passing 
currents to the feet and legs to give the brain 
absolute repose and relieve its congestion. 
These currents, as a general rule, should be 
from the anterior and basilar regions rather 
than the superior and posterior, but of course 
should be applied to the seat of inflammation. 
But, as the influences below the knee (sub- 
human) would tend to lower very greatly the 
normal condition and sustaining power of the 
brain, they should give way, as soon as the active inflammation is 
subdued, to the more tonic influences on the body at the locations of 
Repose, Coolness, Sanity and Health, — influences which promote 
soundness of brain and develop its recuperative power. 

The currents applied to the brain in this case will of course be 
greatly aided by combining with the proper medicine at the positive 
electrode, and by combining with the nervaura of the operator in 
passing through his person. This of course requires a stronger cur- 
rent, and it is modified to great gentleness in passing through the 
person. To balance this obstruction, the negative electrode, which 
may be a foot-plate, should present considerable obstruction in the 
way of wet cloth, sponges, or water ; the feet being in a tub of water. 
The negative influence will penetrate too far unless its obstruction 
equals the positive. 

We must not, however, confound with inflammation of the brain 




570 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

the wild excitability of delirium tremens, in which the cerebral circu- 
lation is weak, especially in its upper posterior region, and a current 
to the tonic region (from Sanity to Power inclusive) will be soothing 
and healthful. The currents in this case should be from the forehead, 
face, temples and under-jaw region, upward and backward, toward 
Patience, Tranquillity and Repose. 

Similar currents should be applied on the body, from the perineum, 
groin and hypochondria, upward. 

In this disease the morbid irritability of the nervous system is due 
to a lack of the soothing influence of rich blood ; for nervous irrita- 
bility increases as nourishment declines, and the globulous and albu- 
minous materials of the blood are diminished. It is essentially due to 
a failure of the digestive organs, as well as to the exhaustion of the 
energies of the brain by the mischievous over-stimulation of alcohol. 
Hence it is important to give the brain the restorative influence of 
sleep, and equally or more important to restore the digestive process 
by treatment of the stomach. This has been proved by the success 
of large doses of capsicum, which has been used in doses of twenty 
grains, repeated if necessary, with immediate curative effects, due to 
the stimulation of the alimentary canal. Chloral has been used to 
procure sleep more successfully than morphine, and sulfonal or coch- 
ineal would answer the same purpose well. Hence we see that re- 
ciprocal currents (preferably galvanic) between the lower dorsal 
region and the regions of Assimilation and Alimentiveness on the body 
would be appropriate, followed by the liberal use of milk and other 
easily digested food, aided by the best pepsin compounds to facilitate 
digestion, not forgetting the stimulant power of capsicum and the 
gastric influence of alnus rubra with a little angelica. 

Alternating currents between Assimilation and Repose would be 
specially appropriate, and currents from the hypochondria to Health. 

There are many fanciful, misguided, unpractical people who need 
invigorating currents from the temples and cheeks to the occiput. 
Under the influence of the occipital organs they would take different 
views of life. 

There are many whose languid and inefficient life requires the 
stimulation of the upper occiput, and many indeed whose morally cold 
and selfish nature requires a strong stimulation of the whole upper sur- 
face of the brain by static or galvanic electricity repeated daily for 
months, which would improve their health and longevity as well as 
their virtues. The new condition should be maintained by treatment 
until it becomes constitutional. These principles, I trust, will be 
amply illustrated hereafter in hospitals and reformatory institutions. 

Great improvement of brain conditions and consecyent elevation and 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 571 

prolongation of life may be produced by static electricity, accum- 
mulated on the surface, which increases the vitality of the brain ; and 
when this is combined, according to my new method, with mineral 
magnetism, it becomes one of the most powerful sanative agencies 
known. 

In the treatment of the brain, a gentle application of the negative 
pole, with very mild primary or galvanic currents, is a measure of 
immense value in the hands of a master of science. Still more valua- 
ble is the negative pole of static electricity, from its genial character 
and general safety. To rouse the brain to strong, healthy action is 
the best thing we can do for a patient, and this is to be done by a neg- 
ative pole somewhat restricted in its access, for when the positive pole 
is applied to the body and the negative pole has free access to the 
head, the entire head may fall under a too decidedly negative influ- 
ence, which should be quickly discontinued. 

The negative treatment of the upper occipital region of the brain 
and the upper posterior region of the body are very beneficial meas- 
ures. How much mischief might be done by too negative and too 
prolonged a treatment I cannot say, as I have always been cautious. 

The positive pole applied.to the head and the negative on the front 
of the body is not a safe measure, though it has been cried up under 
the name of central galvanization. Dr. Pitzer describes its effects cor- 
rectly when he says : " If it does no good it is likely to do harm. It 
lessens the quantity of blood in the brain, and if used too strong or 
continued too long dizziness is experienced, and if still further con- 
tinued the patient becomes unconscious and falls from the chair in 
a condition of syncope, and vigorous efforts, with the application of 
stimulants, may be required to bring about a reaction." "With the 
greatest care and the use of the rheostat some patients cannot bear cen- 
tral galvanization long at a time. We observe the face growing pale, 
and the patient sighs a time or two, or expresses feelings of weakness 
or depression, and we are forced to desist. One or two minutes is 
as long as we can use it in such cases ; in others it will be well borne 
for ten or fifteen minutes." This indicates that they have strong 
constitutions — no sensitive constitution could bear it well. This 
description shows just what Sarcognomy indicates. The method was 
very unsuccessful in the hands of Althaus. 

All treatments applied exclusively to the front of the body and face 
are objectionable; and the use of the negative pole in front requires 
to be guarded with caution. 

It is true that a gentle and brief positive influence on the brain may 
be beneficial when it is in a state of over-excitement and vascular 
relaxation, but it should not be by a downward current to the stomach. 



572 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

The currents most beneficial will be from the forehead and face to the 
occiput ; to the upper occiput generally, but to the lower occiput 
and base of cerebellum when we wish to stimulate the physical powers, 
and from the under-jaw region to the upper occiput to strengthen 
the nervous system. A great deal of good may be done by these pos- 
terior superior currents. But if currents are to be sent to the stom- 
ach, it is better to send them from the under-jaw region or from the 
lower part of the neck, before or behind, than from the upper surface 
of the brain, — a region which should never be under depressing- 
influences. 

On the other hand, it is not improper to apply the positive pole to 
the head, for the same reason that we might apply it to the spine, to 
relieve local irritation or hyperasmia. Hence there are cases in which, 
with caution, it would do good. One who understands the brain would 
realize the locality of a local excitement, needing the positive pole. 

Dr. Pitzer speaks of relieving cases of an obscure nature, with ner- 
vous distress, melancholy or wakefulness, by central galvanization. 
He would have been more successful by using upward and backward 
currents, from the forehead, the side of the face and the under-jaw 
region, toward the upper occiput, and a vigorous treatment across the 
shoulders or between the epigastrium and spine. 

I would not object in all cases to a moderate current to the epigas- 
trium, which would promote the action of the stomach, but such a 
current should not be from the top of the head. It would be much 
better from the lower dorsal region. 

The treatment of the brain in insanity by electricity is of course in 
a perfectly chaotic state in the medical profession, and must be so 
until its functions are understood. About half a century of medical 
experience has established nothing. Dr. Arndt of Griefs vvald thinks 
it of very great value. Williams in England and Bryce in Alabama 
speak favorably of it. Arndt recommends general Faradization, 
Beard and Rockwell central galvanization ; but the whole business 
is crudely empirical, — a mere fumbling in the dark. 

Let me state finally a few obvious principles derived from Sarcog- 
nomy. 

1. Insanity being a derangement owing to the predominance of the 
under-jaw region of insanity and essential deficiency in the upper pos- 
terior region, especially on the temporal arch, vertically above the 
ear, currents to the upper posterior region are evidently appropriate, 
while currents from the under-jaw region to the back of shoulder and 
axilla are equally proper. 

2. As insanity may assume either the arterial form of high excite- 
ment or the venous form of idiocy and dementia, the latter will requi: e 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 573 

stimulation of the upper posterior cerebral circulation by the negative 
pole, while the former will require the sedative tonic action of the 
positive pole, specially directed to the regions of hyperemia, the 
location of which may be understood from the phenomena, by those 
who understand the brain, and may also be inferred from the local 
heat. 

3. In the mixed cases of mania, neither decidedly arterial nor 
venous, the healthy action of the brain being impaired, we need in- 
vigoration by the negative pole of the upper posterior region, and* 
especially of that marked Sanity, as well as a general invigoration of 
the brain by the positive static electric, both on the insulated stool 
and by static currents from the sponge or plate on which the patient 
sits to the upper regions of the brain — especially the upper posterior. 
To this must be added special positive or negative treatment of the 
various organs as their condition requires. 

4. The law of sympathy between brain and body requires a careful 
removal of all derangements in the pelvic and hepatic regions, im- 
provement of general health, and concentration of power to the 
shoulder and axilla. 

Melancholy is a condition bordering on insanity and tending to 
suicide in persons who are in all other respects sound, and who believe 
themselves acting as rationally in surrendering a life which yields no 
pleasure as if they should die to escape intolerable pain. It is due to 
a failure in the upper posterior region of the brain, including Cheer- 
fulness and Health, leaving Melancholy (which we reach through the 
angle of the jaw) in predominance. Of course it requires gentle 
currents in the brain from Melancholy to Cheerfulness and Health, 
and in the body from Melancholy above the groin to Cheerfulness in 
the axilla. The relief of mental depression in this way by the hands 
is one of my most familiar experiments. A few days ago I was called 
to the wife of a physician, in whom it was quite apparent that the 
basis of her trouble was mental depression, making her voice extremely 
feeble. Before administering any remedies I relieved her with the 
hands upon the region of Cheerfulness and Energy, making her con- 
scious of the relief, which was expressed in her more cheerful voice. 

I earnestly hope that these suggestions may fall into the hands of 
physicians capable and willing to carry them out faithfully. But it is 
only a small minority of mankind who are sufficiently exempt from 
the control of habit to enter with facility into a new course of thought 
and investigation. 

The application of currents to the base of the brain is the most un- 
safe method of cerebral treatment. I have mentioned (page 485) the 
injurious effects on man. In some experiments on animals at the 



574 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

Central Park, New York (1890), with a galvanic battery, a savage 
baboon was subjected to galvanization, successively raised to forty 
cells, from a sponge in his mouth to one of his paws, when it was at 
length overcome, and " became lethargic and almost comatose, acting 
very much like a man overcome with drink." After being released 
;t became furious and attacked its keeper. The dog subjected to a 
current through the base of the brain " began to act queerly a few 
minutes after the experiments, and within half an hour showed symp- 
toms so like those of hydrophobia that the keepers killed him." 

This result shows that hydrophobia, which is located in the base of 
the brain, might be successfully treated by the rational application of 
electricity. 

Paralysis is a condition in which the circulation and nerve power 
of the affected nerves and muscles must be roused. The negative 
pole of the galvanic current is therefore the one thing needful. 
VWicn me circulation and life have been restored Faradism is appro- 
priate. At first the negative pole is our reliance, then we may use 
the alternate current, and finally the Faradic. 

In infantile paralysis, a result of fever affecting the spinal cord, 
prolonged and gentle galvanization, according to Dr. G. B. Massey, is 
indispensable. Faradization is entirely wrong. The mistake of using 
Faradization where galvanism is the proper remedy is very common, 
and the mistake of using strong currents for a short time when mild 
currents for a longer time would be better is also very common. 

When the brain is involved, gentle static currents directed to the 
superior and posterior regions will be of incalculable value, if it be 
due to softening or other impairment of the brain. Two daily treat- 
ments by that method will have a happy effect — the positive pole 
being applied between the thighs, which is the best location for 
cerebral treatment, or upon the abdomen at Melancholy and Relax- 
ation. I am very confident that static electricity, guided by Sarcog- 
nomy and associated w T ith the magnet, will have a grand career in the 
treatment of the br^n, not only in paralysis and insanity, but in 
many inferior conditions of the brain which would not be called 
disease. 

When paralysis is due to cerebral hemorrhage, a gentle static or 
galvanic current applied to the lower part of the affected hemisphere 
through the hand of the operator, and sent to the first dorsal verte- 
bra, centre of the scapula, or any part of the shoulder, will be 
beneficial. If there is much excitability of the brain or danger of re- 
newed hemorrhage (which the positive current would check) the 
current might ib~ ~ent to the top of the foot, or to the region of 
Repose, on the trunk. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 575 

Paralysis from the lower part of the spinal cord may appear as 
paraplegia, disease of the lower part of the body including the bladder 
and rectum. There is a complicated form of paralysis in which limbs 
on one side or the other and portions of the face are affected, which 
may involve the brain, its nerves or the spinal cord, and the diagnosis 
is difficult. Electrical excitability is sometimes greatly increased by 
irritation or inflammation in the nervous system* and it is not difficult 
to discover its source. Inflammations of the gray matter of the cord 
produce a great variety of effects which may be traced by electricity 
to the inflamed portion. The inability of muscles to respond to 
galvanism indicates impairment of their structure, and if far advanced 
the cure is hopeless. 

The peculiar value of the galvanic current in paralysis is due to the 
fact that it operates upon the muscles themselves rather than the 
nerves. Hence in paralysis we generally find the Faradic, which is a 
current for the nerves, of but little value, while the galvanic makes a 
very strong impression. The action of the nervous system is mar- 
vellously quick and that of the muscles comparatively slow ; hence the 
sudden and rapid alternations of Faradism stimulate it, while the 
slower galvanic current becomes insensible and acts upon the motor 
nerves only by its interruptions, its effect being increased by the 
rapidity of the interruptions. When the nerves fail, the galvanic 
current makes a stronger impression on the muscles than in the nor- 
mal state ; thus it seems a substitute for the nervous system, while 
Faradism is a nerve stimulant, and the two may be very advantageously 
combined. Thus the combination of primary and secondary currents 
introduces a small galvanic element from the cell which is beneficial ; 
but this galvanic element is more conspicuous when the primary 
current is used alone and when it is originated by two or more cells. 

The galvanic current is of a lower grade than the Faradic and static, 
and therefore appropriate to lower conditions — to the conditions in 
which the nervous system is of a low grade or greatly impaired — and 
it is generated in abundance only in fishes such as the electric eel. 
On the other hand the static, with its high electro-motive force, con- 
trasts with the slow and feeble galvanic, and is especially the current 
of the nervous system, — the only current well adapted to the brain. 

Chorea and Spasm. — Chorea has been successfully treated by Dr. 
Pitzer with galvanism — applying large sponge electrodes (with from 
two to eight cells) above the ear on the side of the head opposite 
the affection, the negative pole being in the hand of the affected side. 
From three to six minutes of daily application was sufficient. 

This treatment would reduce excitement and irritation in the brain, 
and if the current were carried to the feet it would be equally bene- 



576 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

facial. But two to eight cells, would not send a current of any force 
to the feet. In the above case the current was from one-half to two 
milliamperes, which shows how delicate a galvanic current is appro- 
priate, especially about the brain. A fraction of a milliampere is 
sufficient in any delicate constitution. Generally I would recommend 
an upward current on the limbs affected ; the negative electrode 
being placed on the summit of the shoulder at the location of 
Patience, on the centre of the scapula (Health), or on the first 
dorsal vertebra. If the restlessness is very great, the negative may 
be applied under the arm two inches below the centre of the axilla, 
or two inches further forward (Tranquillity). The quieting influences 
of Scutellaria, Leonurus and Xanthium are appropriate. 

Either of the forms of electricity may be used, but the static is 
upon the whole preferable. 

The treatment of chorea by sparks from the spine was very suc- 
cessful with Dr. G. Bird and Mr. Addison at Guy's Hospital. The 
cures were generally speedy, even in the worst cases. The sparks 
and current were beneficial, but shocks objectionable. 

Dr. Dewees (in the New York Journal of Medicine) says : " In the 
most frightful case of tonic spasm from utero-spinal causes the con- 
tinued current has in my hands proved a perfect charm. The inter- 
rupted current (in this case) proved highly injurious, causing 
convulsive actions, while by the simple galvanic current the spasms 
would be immediately broken." 

The continuous galvanic, being a one-way current, is truly valuable 
in dispersing irritability by the positive pole. The same power 
belongs to the continuous static current. The magnetic combination 
adds greatly to its soothing power. 

Neuralgia finds its best relief in electricity. Galvanism has been 
successful in the worst possible cases. In rheumatism, Dr. F. T- 
Payne of Texas reports that he has found, in every case of chronic 
rheumatism or neuralgia, " a dead or insensible nerve at or near the 
painful spot," which does not feel the electric current. He says that 
a steel electrode pressed along the course of the impaired nerve is 
curative. "The first sensations produced by a concentrated current 
are pleasant, then warmer on to burning, until the instrument must 
be removed on account of the intensity of heat or burning sensa- 
tion ; and the pain is banished at once, and the limb or joint is ready 
to move in any or all natural directions." 

In cases not inflammatory the Faradic current gives speedy relief. 
A French physician, Dr. Duval, tells of being confined to bed by a 
severe sciatica of the right leg, which was cured by a single Faradiza- 
tion. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 57? 

The Faradic current is especially adapted to impaired nervous 
action ; hence it relieves the excessive perspiration of the hands or 
feet, and general Faradization is appropriate to excessive perspiration. 

To produce relief by the Faradic current in neuralgia and rheuma- 
tism, the coil should be of a great length of very fine wire, and the 
interruption very frequent. 

Neuralgia is one of the most obstinate affections with which the 
electrician has to deal. Its therapeutics can be successfully managed 
only by adhering to clear general principles. 

The electric current carries with it the vital conditions of the parts 
through which it passes ; consequently, when, for example, we have a 
descending galvanic current through the sciatic nerve, by placing one 
electrode behind the head of the femur and the other at the foot, a 
gentle current, not strong enough to produce any irritation, gradually 
removes the irritation or pain. The positive electrode should be 
placed high enough, in any case, to include the whole morbid tract. 

Another method which has been neglected by electricians is to pass 
currents through the affected nerve at right angles to its course, as 
when we pass currents through the sciatic nerve from the outside to 
the inside of the thigh, carrying the electrodes downward from the 
origin of the nerve to its termination. In all cases the currents should 
be of that degree of gentleness which is not disturbing, for strong 
currents are followed by a reaction, in which the excitability and 
hyperaesthesia are increased and the result is injurious. 

The inverse or ascending current is also often beneficial ; but as this 
current simply carried to the spine might leave an abnormal excita- 
bility at the spot in the spinal cord, it is better to place the negative 
on the region of Health, making the first application a few inches 
from the positive, and convey it along the spine and up to the Health 
locality or to the dorsal summit of the cord. 

Much delicacy is required in the treatment of neuralgia, especially 
when the electrodes are near together, and the use of large sponges 
or carbon electrodes will enable us to make our applications delicate. 
I would especially commend the carbon electrodes as excellent chan- 
nels for soothing applications. 

While the foregoing is the general treatment of neuralgia, there are 
numerous cases in which there is an asthenic condition and a greater 
toleration for electricity, — cases in which an energetic stimulation is 
beneficial, and Faradic currents through the affected nerves and their 
spinal origins will be the best treatment. But in using the Faradic 
currents we should begin with the feeblest, guarding the patient by 
electrodes that mitigate the force, and gradually increasing the current 
in proportion to toleration. 



5/S ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

One who understands the carrying power of electricity will never 
neglect in neuralgia to combine the electric current with the proper 
anodynes, which may be contained in the sponge or cotton electrode 
or a strip of cloth laid on the suffering part. Cocaine, theine, 
hyoscyamus, belladonna, cannabis, morphine, svapnia, tonga, piscidia, 
chloroform, ether, menthol and salicylate of sodium. He will give, 
thus, relief to the affected spot without disturbing the rest of the con- 
stitution and without requiring the hypodermic syringe. There may 
be a slight absorption if the remedy is applied on the skin, but when 
we wish to avoid this, as in treating the eyes or any part on which 
we do not wish to leave a medical stain, a medical electrode makes it 
possible to convey the medical potency. 

The eyes are often marvellously relieved by electricity. Dr. F. T. 
Payne of Comanche, Texas, reports the case of a clergyman who was 
blind, having lost his right eye, and the left being in a high state of 
inflammation so that he " could scarcely discover anything but a mass 
resembling coagulum filling the orbit." He had been sleepless and 
suffering intensely, but thirty minutes' treatment gave great relief, 
and after the third treatment he slept soundly and dismissed his 
guide. The Faradic was used, and was also concentrated upon a spot 
which seemed deficient in sensibility, with good effects. 

In the case of another clergyman, P. W. Graves, with chronic sore 
eyes, granulated lids and ulcerated cornea, quite blind, the positive 
Faradic current was applied to the eye through an eye-cup of water, — 
an excellent method, — which gave great relief, although at first he did 
not feel it. The inflammation was rapidly dispersed without the aid 
of medicine. 

The great efficiency of electricity was illustrated in a case treated 
by Dr. Tipton of Topeka. Mr. G. presented a very severe case ; the 
destruction of the under part of the lids commenced in three days 
from the attack, which, "by the fifth day sloughed off. The destruc- 
tion of the cornea commenced, with increased pain and inflammation 
day and night, so that he could not rest a moment. He stated that he 
could only compare the corrosiveness of the disease to a consuming 
fire. On the afternoon of the eighth day of attack he was conducted 
to my office, blind and distracted with pain. Within an hour from 
the time I commenced treating him with electricity he went away 
from my office seeing, and was free from pain." His case was cured 
within three weeks, his eyes being in perfect condition. 

Dr. R. J. Curtis reports the cure of a case of amaurosis by a gal. 
vanic current from five or six cells — the positive pole being applied 
over the eye, and the negative over the mastoid process, moderated 
by a rheostat, but producing an appearance of faint flashes. The 
treatment was continued six months. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 579 

This treatment was not improper, but a better treatment would 
have been by very gentle Faradic or alternating galvanic currents 
between the eye and the gyrus angularis, which is at the junction of 
Adhesiveness and Combativeness. 

Opacity of the cornea was successfully treated by Dr. C. Usiglio 
of Corfu, in a woman of thirty-five, seated in the right eye. Six cells 
increased to sixty were employed, the positive pole on the eyelid, the 
negative on the tongue. The strong current was intermitted occa- 
sionally, the conjunctiva became reddened and tears flowed. The 
cure was completed in a month. Dr. Channing mentions a cure 
by drawing static electricity from the affected eye. 

Opacities of the eyes, in the vitreous body, generally yield to a pos- 
itive galvanic current. M. Teulon claims to have cured twenty-two 
out of twenty-four cases by this method, and Von Graef e even claimed 
the galvanic cure of cataract. One to four cells are sufficient for this 
galvanic treatment. 

I have avoided general practice,.. but in November, 1890, I was 
induced to undertake a case of congenital cataract and blindness, 
almost complete in one eye, in which I expect to effect a cure by 
statico-magnetic and nervauric treatment. 

All morbid growths yield to electrolysis, in which the negative pole 
is applied. Granulations of the conjunctiva have been successfully 
removed by European physicians. We have reports from Drs. 
Schivardi, Areola and Kohn, — the cures being made in a few applica- 
tions. 

The use of acupuncture of the eye for cataract has sometimes been 
successful and sometimes entirely failed, so that it could not be 
recommended. 

The rules for treatment of the eyes do not differ materially from 
those for the treatment of other delicate organs. Positive currents, to 
disperse inflammation and congestion, may be applied by static 
electricity, or primary or secondary or galvanic, if they are combined 
with magnetism or conducted through water. The negative pole is 
appropriate in amaurotic and enfeebled conditions. I expect more 
from the static-magnetic than from any other form. Dispersive posi- 
tive currents assist the eyes when inflamed and sensitive, by applica- 
tion below and behind the eye, at the cheekbone and just above the 
zygoma. 

The lower part of the occiput (junction of Adhesiveness and Com- 
bativeness) is the region that reinforces and sustains the eyes. This 
is the "gyrus angularis" upon which Ferrier supposes vision to 
depend. To stimulate this region by the negative pole is important 
in all affections of the eyes. 



5S0 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

There are probably many chronic cases in which galvanism is the 
most efficient treatment. Dr. E. C. Mann reports the entire cure of 
a case of blindness in a girl, caused by meningitis, which oculists 
had pronounced incurable. He administered the galvanic current 
4< several times a day, at first for a few moments each time." Vision 
began to develop in eight weeks and was completely restored in six 
months. Other treatment was used for her health, but the galvanic 
current cured the blindness. He recommends long-continued treat- 
ment with very gentle currents, and very judiciously adds : "There 
are also chronic congestive states of the brain, which tend to mental 
disorder if not checked, where, in my opinion, we have in the constant 
current of electricity the very best therapeutical means of cure." 

I would add that the eye is very sensitive to nervauric impressions, 
and that good magnetic healers sometimes relieve cases in which all 
other treatment has failed. Dr. MacGeary, now of London, has 
made some remarkable cures in this way. 

The eye may be conveniently treated with a sponge impregnated 
with water or medicinal solutions. An effective application is a glass 
or wooden eye-cup for electric treatment, which may contain medi- 
cated solutions on sponges, with a conducting wire in its stem. I 
would recommend the use of the new Pyoktanin in all severe affec- 
tions of the eyes. It is a wonderful remedy for local application. 

Treatment of Ears. — Deafness has often been cured by cur- 
rents through the ears, carefully applied, though it has often failed. 

Dr. Fenella of Italy succeeded by applying the galvanic positive 
pole to the ear and the negative to the tongue. He reported four 
successful cases. The application should be made every other day. 
Jobert de Lamballe cured' several by galvanic currents between the 
Eustachian tube and ear. 

Ringing in the ears was cured by Dr. Hoering by currents in the 
jar given twenty-two times. Dr. Wright of London reported a 
number of cases. The treatment is strictly local and according to 
general principles — negative for dull, inactive conditions, positive for 
rritations and tendency to inflammation. When suppuration exists, 
jither in the ear or elsewhere, pyoktanin and peroxide of hydrogen 
ire the best remedies. 

There is such a thing as " hysterical deafness," a nervous condition 
which is promptly dispelled by electric treatment. 

Diphtheria. — Electricity combined with local treatment is 
entirely reliable in diphtheria. Dr. G. K. Smith, who has been quite 
successful, uses it as follows. His method is so good that I quote 
his whole description. 

"I place the feet of patient in water as hot as can be borne with 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 5 I 

comfort, and put in that water one, two, or three spoonfuls of sale- 
ratus. Then take a glass of cold water and put some saleratus in it, 
and with this solution wet the electrode which is to be applied to the 
throat. The negative pole of the battery is put into the bath in 
which the feet are placed. The positive is to be covered with cotton 
and used in the throat, on the tongue, and in the nose if needed. 
The sponge handles or ordinary electrodes cannot be used in these 
localities; but a very convenient one for the mouth and throat is 
made by covering the blade of a dinner knife with a thin layer of 
cotton, soaked with the solution of saleratus. The cotton also serves 
to keep the soft parts of mouth and throat from direct contact with 
the metal, which otherwise would cause pain. Mouth should be kept 
open, so that teeth will not touch the electrode. A convenient elec- 
trode for the nose is made by winding a thin layer of cotton on a 
wire. Thus prepared, the patient is seated in a chair, if able to sit 
up. Feet are placed in the bath, and patient holds in his lap a basin 
to catch the saliva as it flows or as he has occasion to spit it out. 
The physician should not sit in front for fear the patient will cough 
and blow his poisonous secretions in his face. Sitting near the right 
side, he dips the electrode into the saleratus water to wet the cotton ; 
then placing it on the tongue, he holds the knife by its metallic 
handle in the left hand, while he lays the right hand very gently on 
the sponge of the positive electrode. The current will now pass 
through the operator, and he can regulate the power of the current to 
the ability of the patient to bear it without pain. If he wants a 
stronger current he can grasp the sponge a little tighter. As soon 
as patient becomes accustomed to the current on the tongue, the 
operator may pass the electrode gently up* to the side of either tonsil. 
Watching a good opportunity, he can now pass it back to the pos- 
terior wall of the pharynx, and even down to the epiglottis. This last 
position is likely to make the patient cough, and in some instances 
vomit. In either case mucus in large quantities will be thrown out, 
and it will become necessary to remove the electrode ; but before this 
is done the current should be broken by raising the right hand from 
the sponge electrode. The cotton on the electrode should be secured 
by winding a little thread around it, and the operator should be care- 
ful not to let the electrode touch the teeth, as that will cause pain. If 
the current passing through the operator be too weak, he may bring 
the positive sponge up and touch the handle of the knife. Electrode 
must be removed occasionally, to give patient a chance to breathe, 
etc. Not necessary to use a strong current. Electrode for the nose 
can often be passed back as far as posterior wall of pharynx. 

" Was called to see a gentleman who was suffering very much. 



582 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

Had very intense thirst, throat so swollen he could scarcely talk ; 
suggested electricity in the throat ; and in a few minutes' time after 
its use, the man, who was powerful before he was taken sick, said : 
' I feel almost as strong as I ever did.' 

"The current should be just strong enough to be comfortable, and 
so that it will not make the patient fear it. Can use it with children, 
and have done so with marked effect for good." 

The use of saleratus is very proper to control inflammation and 
promote secretion. Passing the current through the operator adds 
greatly to its value. There are many diphtheria remedies which 
might be used on the electrode. Sulpho-calcine, the latest, is unques- 
tionably valuable. Pinus Canadensis has long maintained its reputa- 
tion. Orchis mascula, a remedy very little known, is regarded by 
Dr. E. H. Holbrook of Baltimore as superior to all other remedies. 
Turpentine in substance and in vapor, vinegar, carbolic acid, muriatic 
acid, subsulphate of iron, baptisia, trypsin, nitrate of sanguinaria, 
muriate of iron, muriate of pilocarpine and hyposulphite of soda have 
all great value. The latter is considered a preventive. 

Aphonia was cured by Dr. Torrance {London Lancet) by Faradiza- 
tion of the vocal chords after all medical treatment had failed. The 
patient, a woman, lost her voice after having an ulcerated sore throat, 
and the loss had continued after the throat was healed. The voice 
was thoroughly restored. 

The Faradic is certainly appropriate, and may be assisted by the 
local application of Jaborandi. The alternated galvanic, primary or 
static would be equally proper. Currents between the larynx and 
the fossa below the occipital knob would be better than if confined 
to the larynx. 

Toothache has been relieved both by galvanism and Franklinism. 
Generally the positive current relieves in five or ten minutes. When 
there is much swelling or inflammation the negative pole has been 
used, as it produces the alkaline condition, which is antiphlogistic and 
solvent. The Faradic current has also been used with success, as it 
gives tone to the bloodvessels of the affected part ; and in the extrac- 
tion of teeth it has been used by attaching one pole to the forceps, 
the other being held by the patient. This may modify the pain and 
also check the hemorrhage. The latter object would be promoted by 
the positive galvanic current. Relief is sometimes given by applying 
a plate of silver and another of zinc against the base of the affected 
tooth. 

Hydrophobia is a disease of inflammatory irritation in the central 
base of the brain. It therefore requires a sedative, anti-inflammatory 
treatment and free circulation by the skin and kidneys to assist in 
the removal of a morbific element. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 583 

The most powerful sedative, and one which is reported to have been 
successful in many cases, is the Xanthium Spinosum. Over sixty 
years ago many cures were reported by the use of Scutellaria (skull- 
cap), which is not only a pleasant sedative, but a tonic to the spinal 
cord. Inula helenium (elecampane) has cured many cases un- 
doubtedly hydrophobic, which was due not only to its impression 
on the nervous system, but to its power of promoting the secretions. 
The vapor bath is also reported to have been successfully used, and 
its success would justify the use, for its diaphoretic effect, of 
Jaborandi, which is said to have proved successful against snake bites. 

The elecampane was used by boiling an ounce of the root in a pint 
of milk boiled to half a pint, the dose being taken in the morning, on 
an empty stomach, and no other food taken till late in the day. 

The electric treatment appropriate would be by currents from the 
base of the brain to the feet — also from the knee and the lower end 
of the spine to the summit of the chest and region of Patience. 

TREATMENT OF AFFECTIONS OF THE THORAX. 

Pneumonia. — Channing says : " The testimony is universal as to 
the bad consequences attending the use of electricity in this disease ; 
at any rate in the active stages of inflammation," — which simply 
shows a great lack of proper knowledge. Dr. Wilson Philip also said 
that, "in ordinary cases of phthisis, nothing could be more im- 
proper than the use of galvanism." We cannot thus speak of gal- 
vanism as of a dose of medicine, for it is an agent of great variety 
of powers. We might as well speak of surgery as the application of 
a knife. American practitioners of the liberal school have not 
hesitated to use electric currents in both pneumonia and consump- 
tion, and Dr. Beard mentions the wonderful cures of consumption 
claimed by Dr. Bastings, but considers them incredible. There are 
some reports of favorable effects from galvanism, but the profession 
seems to have shrunk from the treatment of pneumonia by elec- 
tricity. 

The most powerful, prompt and efficient treatment for pneumonia 
is by the pneumatic method, for which I refer to the chapter on that 
subject. 

Whether we use the galvanic, primary or static, the current should 
be from the entire length of the sternum, the hypochondria and the 
lateral base of the chest, to the tibial region and the whole leg and 
foot ; also to the regions -of Health and Repose. The downward 
current should be the first, and continued long enough to produce a 
sedative effect, after which the posterior currents would be ap- 
propriate. 



584 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

We know that positive currents of electricity are powerfully tonic, 
acting upon the vasomotor nerves, contracting the bloodvessels, and 
thus overcoming the essential characteristic of inflammation by 
removing the congestion and enabling the bloodvessels to resist it. 
In doing this their influence is cooling, hence they fulfil the require- 
ments of pneumonia entirely, except that they are not sufficiently 
anodyne and expectorant. These qualities should be supplied by 
medicine. I would therefore administer an electric current qualified 
with hyoscyamus and directed to the whole region below the knee. 
This will relieve the congestion, and subdue the inflammation in a 
pleasant manner. 

If the inflammation be high or advanced, veratrum viride will 
powerfully aid in subduing it. Arnica is also an efficient contra- 
stimulant, lowering the rapidity of the pulse. A moist atmosphere, 
maintained by boiling water in the room, will be very beneficial, and 
any soothing agent in the boiling water, such as balsam of Peru or 
drosera and sugar, will improve its effect. Dextroquinine has a 
beneficial influence, but the faculty attach rather too much impor- 
tance to quinine. Declat's syrup of phenic acid is upon the whole 
rather better. But of all the febrifuges in pneumonia I know of 
none equal to Gnaphalium polycephalum (life everlasting is its 
common name). It is a most admirable tonic for the lungs, and I 
think should be our leading remedy. Sanguinaria is an admirable 
expectorant in small doses, with extensive influence on the skin, 
kidneys and liver. Its expectorant quality is much aided by squills. 
Penthorum is very similar to drosera as a soothing expectorant, and 
tussilago, by its soothing, healing action, makes an excellent aid to 
gnaphalium. The following proportions will make an admirable 
remedy in pneumonia generally, but might be varied to suit the 
peculiarities of each case : Gnaphalium, 10; tussilago, 5 ; hyoscyamus, 
3 ; sanguinaria, 1 ; veratrum, 1 ; Declat's syrup of phenic acid, 5 to 
10 ; liquorice or syrup, 20 to 50. 

Veratrum and phenic acid might be increased as the condition is 
more feverish, and hyoscyamus as its soothing influence is needed. 
Demulcents such as flaxseed and althea make a valuable addition, 
and Crawley or Jaborandi may be added if the skin is dry. The 
reader will understand that in speaking of remedies I generally refer 
to fluid extracts. 

If the apparatus of haemospasia is not within reach, ligatures on 
the thighs, with the legs in warm water, should be an indispensable 
adjunct of the treatment. To preserve the warmth of the lower 
limbs is of the highest importance in curing and in preventing 
pulmonic attacks. 



CHAT. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 585 

Asphyxia from drowning or poisoning requires vigorous and pro- 
longed treatment. As the restoration of breathing is the object 
after drowning, it may be mechanically accomplished, while the 
patient reclines at an angle of 45 degrees, by pressing the chest and 
abdomen firmly to expel the air, then suddenly releasing the 
abdomen and lifting the shoulders with the hands at the axillae — 
continuing this as long as necessary, keeping the patient warm. 

The Faradic current from the back of the neck to three inches 
below the umbilicus (Respiration) will stimulate deep breathing. A 
current at the phrenic zone, from side to side (on the level of the 
seventh or eighth rib), will also stimulate the diaphragm. A current 
between the upper dorsal vertebra and the lower end of the thigh, or 
the region of Vital Force, will have great power in sustaining life 
and restoring respiration. Where narcotic poisoning is the cause, 
treatment may be directed to the stomach and lower dorsal region. 
In all cases a current between the shoulders on the location of 
Health is proper. In a young lady whose case was reported by 
Dr. Williams in the Lancet, narcotism from the effects of laudanum 
was promptly relieved by " electro-magnetic shocks " across the 
shoulders. 

Direct action on the diaphragm has been successful in cases of 
drowning. In the experiments of Leroy D'Etoiles drowned animals 
were restored by electric currents sent into the diaphragm through 
long needles between the eighth and ninth ribs. 

This method was successfully applied by Dr. Ferguson of West- 
Eneath Dispensary to a drowned man after the failure of other efforts. 
The current of a fifty-cell battery was applied directly to the 
diaphragm by cutting down to it, and the diaphragm was at once put 
into action, resulting in recovery. 

Dr. J. J. Caldwell of Baltimore relieved a negro boy, drowned in 
the dock for half an hour and apparently dead, by applying a Faradic 
current several hours. 

Dr. Russell of King's College Hospital reports the relief of an 
infant of two months, supposed dead from the effects of laudanum, by 
electro-magnetic shocks from the back of the neck to the sternum. 
These roused and appeared to restore it, but it died from exhaustion a 
few hours later. If the shocks had been directed to the thighs 
instead of the sternum it would probably have survived. 

Dr. Barry treated an infant of nine months, narcotized by thirty 
drops of laudanum seven hours previously and in a state of profound 
coma, with electro-magnetism, which had to be kept up four hours 
and three-quarters before it was securely restored. 

A three weeks' infant, poisoned by Godfrey's Cordial five hours 



586 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

previously and apparently dying, was restored in ten minutes by 
Mr. Tubbs, with shocks through the spine and cardiac region, as 
reported in the Medical Gazette. 

A young man of 22, apparently dying from the effects of a dose of 
cubebs and opium, was relieved by Dr. Thos. S. Page, after a great 
variety of strong measures (including castigation) had been tried in 
vain, by giving him a shock from left to right through the heart, 
which restored consciousness and made him feel as if a gun had been 
fired off in him. 

Mr. Corp of Middlesex Hospital reported the case of a man 
" who had taken an ounce and a half of laudanum six hours pre- 
viously, whom vigorous measures, aided by flagellation with thin 
splints and wet towels, could not relieve, but who was quickly restored 
by electro-magnetism and shocks from the Leyden jar. 

A woman who had swallowed an ounce of laudanum was brought 
into the Middlesex Hospital, an hour after, unconscious. In half an 
hour vomiting and general reaction was produced by the battery, 
and in an hour she was quite lively, but needed further application 
to prevent a relapse, as stated in the Lancet. 

In these cases the nervous system is so insensible as to require the 
most powerful electric treatment greatly prolonged. 

In a case reported by Prof. W. H. Pancoast the battery was used 
fourteen hours y and saved the life of a patient who had taken one 
hundred and twenty grains of chloral and eight grains of morphia. 

Dr. J. J. Caldwell of Baltimore applied the Faradic current suc- 
cessfully, four hours after the usual remedies had failed, to a patient at 
the Maryland Inebriate Asylum, who had attempted suicide by opium. 
In the case of a child suffering from a poisonous dose of laudanum 
twelve hours previously, and not relieved by medical treatment, a 
powerful current for three hours restored her. The current was 
applied with the negative pole over the epigastrium and the positive 
to the pneumogastric nerve adjacent to the sterno-cleido muscle in 
the neck. 

That currents on this route — that is, along the course of the 
pneumogastric nerve — are efficient in sustaining the functions 
of the lungs and stomach was shown by the experiments of Dr. 
Wilson Philip on rabbits and dogs. The action of both lungs and 
stomach failed fatally after section of the pneumogastric nerve, but 
was fully sustained when a galvanic current was used, digestion and 
respiration being well maintained. 

I do not believe, however, that such currents are as efficient as if 
sent to the hypogastric region, three inches below the umbilicus, which 
excites deep respiration. The results are too feeble and slow. Dr. J. V. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 587 

Hennessey (in Albany Medical Annals) treated a case of poisoning 
in a woman by a grain and a quarter of morphine given hypoder- 
mically, and although atropine and brandy were given hypodermi- 
cally it required thirteen hours of treatment to restore her. It was 
seven hours before she became conscious of it. It required twelve 
hours to relieve morphine poisoning in a child of two and a half years, 
although atropine was administered and coffee given by rectal injec- 
tion. In this case the electrode was applied to the epigastrium at 
the beginning of the inspiration and removed at the end of it. I am 
quite sure the hypogastric application would have given speedier 
relief. 

Asthma was successfully treated by Dr. Wilson Philip with currents 
from the nape of the neck to the epigastrium or lower, from eight to 
sixteen cells, passing the current through thin metal plates to avoid 
concentration. If the current had been passed to the hypogastric 
region it would have been much better, or if passed between the 
sides of the chest (Inspiration). The current also benefited a cough, 
but was injurious in cases of inflammation. The current would not 
have been injurious but beneficial if passed from the chest to the 
feet. The relief given by galvanism in cases which defied medicine 
was prompt, — generally in a few minutes, — as reported by Philip 
and by Pascalis. Even emphysematous conditions may be relieved. 

The beneficial effect of galvanism on the lungs was shown by Dr. 
Philip in apoplexy, who " states that the respiration in sanguineous 
apoplexy is interrupted more by accumulation of phlegm than by the 
lessened action of the muscles of inspiration, the secretion assuming 
its character and remaining adherent on account of the withdrawal of 
the nervous energy from the lungs — a conclusion amply established 
by his experiments in the division of the eighth pair of nerves. This 
accumulation is often the cause of death." On passing the battery 
current through the lungs in this condition, Wilson Philip says : 
"After the rattling breathing had come on, and the patient seemed 
about to be suffocated, he was, at least a dozen times, made to 
breathe with ease, the accumulation of phlegm gradually disappear- 
ing on the application of galvanism, by which his life was evidently 
prolonged." The beneficial effect, I think, was simply the relief of 
congestion. 

Asthma, as an affection of respiration, must depend on the respira- 
tory tract of the brain as well as the lungs. Hence it is sometimes 
necessary to treat the brain on its respiratory tract, and also the re- 
spiratory tract on the body, around the umbilicus. The respiratory 
tract of the brain, which I locate in the Pons Varolii, has its exterior 
manifestation around the nose and mouth, through which we reach it. 



5 > ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

Any disease in this region affects respiration. Hence catarrh, and 
the morbid growths it produces in the posterior passages, may become 
a cause of asthma as well as of bronchitis and consumption. In 
such cases interior treatment of the nasal passages by electricity 
(and, if necessary, electrolysis) may become necessary. A large 
sponge electrode on the nostrils and mouth, with the other electrode 
on the shoulder, would be a good application. Respiration should 
also be stimulated on the entire respiratory tract around the umbil- 
icus. 

The effect of stimulating the respiratory tract of the brain through 
the mouth is illustrated by the experience of Onimus and Legros, 
who found the best restorative from asphyxia to be a current from 
the rectum to the mouth. This is explained by Sarcognomy. The 
same benefit would be obtained by a Faradic current between the 
mouth and the respiratory tract on the abdomen. I do not know, 
however, that the location would be any better than the middle cer- 
vical region, where we strike the origin of the phrenic nerves. 

The most direct and proper treatment in asthma is by a Faradic 
or an alternating current on the chest between the right and left 
sides, through the location marked Inspiration, just in front of the 
upper part of the humerus. The current or the hand applied on 
this part produces a full upward respiration, with a very calm, pleas- 
ant feeling, overcoming the feeling of constriction in the lungs. 
Stimulating respiration by the location below the umbilicus or on the 
face just above the chin greatly increases the depth of respiration, 
with an arousing effect. The other pole may be applied on the 
dorsal summit or on the centre of Health. It would also be a good 
combination to treat upon Inspiration on one side and Health on 
the other, treating both sides of the body successively. Some asth- 
matic remedy — such as grindelia robusta, for example — should be 
associated with the positive electrode. 

Phthisis pulmonalis, or consumption, which is mainly a tuber- 
culous disease, admits of successful treatment by electricity, to appre- 
ciate which we must understand its nature. The researches of 
Andral and Majendie, too little studied by medical authors, show that 
an abundance of the red elements of the blood — the globules or cor- 
puscles, as they are called — is the indispensable condition of good 
health, which gives activity to all our powers. The decline of this 
element marks the decline of vital power and the easy entrance of 
disease. A proper development of the red elements is incompatible 
with diseases generally, and especially with consumption, as they 
vitalize the normal structures and promote the speedy destruction or 
removal of abnormal elements. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMV. 589 

Normal blood depends for its development and maintenance chiefly 
upon the upper half of the brain and the regions of Health and Vital 
Force in the body. Hence, with an adequate development and activity 
of these regions, consumption is an impossibility, as they secure 
ample respiration, digestion and activity of the secretions which 
purify. 

A defective development or defective exercise of these functions 
predisposes to consumption, impoverishing the blood by lack of diges- 
tion and vitalization. Degenerate blood deposits tuberculous material, 
which in time develops suppuration and a variety of morbid conditions 
in the lungs. 

To vitalize the lungs by alternating currents between Inspiration 
and the upper dorsal region of the cord, and from Health to Health 
on the shoulders, is the first indication. Then alternate currents be- 
tween Health and Vital Force, followed by active exercise, will improve 
the constitution ; and similar currents between the lower dorsal region 
and the abdominal surfaces will increase the power of the digestive or- 
gans, which is indispensable to recovery. Large losses in the lungs 
by tubercle and suppuration may be recovered from if the digestive 
power is capable of yielding the material for a good supply of blood, 
to accelerate which we require a good supply of the most nourishing 
food and liquids. Animal food gives the richest supply, and carniv- 
orous animals are free from tuberculous diseases. The practice of 
Dr. Salisbury in feeding his patients from two to five or six pounds 
of beef daily seems to have had good results. Fat meats, cod-liver 
oil and hydrolein are used with good effects ; and the mineral elements 
of nutrition — iron and the phosphates — are also valuable. 

I did not propose in this work to lay down a course of medical treat- 
ment for diseases, but in speaking of electric treatment I cannot resist 
the temptation to make a few suggestions as to remedies which may 
be used in connection with electricity, or may be used to medicate 
the electric currents. Everything that enriches the blood is valuable. 
Tonics and alteratives are largely useful. Common salt and muriate 
of ammonia are anti-tuberculous and promote nutrition and health. 
Iodide of potassium or sodium in small quantities promotes the removal 
of all crude or unwholesome elements and benefits the lungs. Alnus 
rubra (tag alder) assists the action of the stomach, promotes all the 
secretions, and has a beneficial action on the skin which tends to 
relieve the lungs. The iodo-bromide of calcium has an excellent 
alterative quality, like the tag alder, and is rather more soothing. 

When the condition of the lungs is irritated, feverish or inflamma- 
tory, gnaphalium polycephalum is the most reliable remedy, and may 
be greatly aided by the soothing, healing qualities of tussilago. De- 



590 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

clat's syrup of nascent pbenic acid is a febrifuge which has a fine 
effect on the lungs, and Paraguay tea (ilex) has a fine effect on coughs, 
bronchial irritations, sore throat and neuralgia. Balsam of Peru has 
valuable soothing, healing properties. 

Drosera is very beneficial to irritated lungs. Piscidia and Hyoscy- 
amus are soothing nervines, and Cundurango has a very comfortable 
influence on the constitution. 

Bronchial irritations are benefited by Inula helenium, Sanguinaria, 
Yerba Santa, Collinsonia, Coptis (goldthread) and Quebracho, — the 
latter chiefly as a nervine stimulant. 

Cannabis Indica and Ergot have strengthening effects on the lungs. 
Constitutional stimulants may be found in Eryngium aquaticum, 
Horse-chestnut and Nitrate of Ammonia. For the general develop- 
ment of the blood and vital forces we may use Buchu, Buckeye, Red 
and white clover blossoms, Triosteum and Gillenia. Alnus, Angelica, 
Celery seed, Dandelion flowers, Lettuce (Lactuca elongata) and 
Scrophularia are invaluable for the stomach, — the latter two soothing 
and relieving its morbid conditions. 

For the night-sweats of consumption there is nothing better than 
Cinquefoil (five-finger), the influence of which is very wholesome. 
As tonics we shall find Ptelea, Hydrastis and Prunus Virginiana 
(wild cherry) valuable, — Ptelea being the most valuable for consump- 
tives. 

The liver may be relieved by Iris versicolor, Polymnia, Grindelia 
squarrosa, Gentian and Gentiana quinqueflora, or by the mild action 
of Dandelion and Hepatica. 

Many of these suggestions are based on my own investigations and 
original. If time permits I may hereafter review the materia medica 
and present my discoveries. 

In the treatment of consumption its hectic conditions may be 
relieved by the febrifuge treatment (Coolness, Repose and Health), 
and in some cases it may be necessary to stimulate the tibial region 
to tranquillize morbid conditions in the lungs. Perhaps the two 
most important functions to stimulate are Health and Vital Force. 
The adjacent organ of Nutrition is also important, to overcome emacia- 
tion, and should never be neglected. 

Bronchitis affects the portion of the lungs corresponding to the 
intellectual organs, and therefore has a sympathetic symptom in pain in 
the forehead. The bronchial region is congested, inflamed and tending 
to ulceration, and this inflammation extends more or less into the 
lungs, and may extend up as far as the larynx. The irritation develops 
a cough, and severe disease in this region is very exhausting to the 
vital forces, especially in influenza or grippe, and tends to produce 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMV. 59 1 

much oppression of the brain. It is generally associated with fever, 
and requires febrifuge treatment. As there is a secondary heat cen- 
tre in the brain, distinct from the chief centre, the medulla oblongata, 
and located between the eye and ear, there is a corresponding heat 
centre in the chest, below the mammae, which develops a feverish 
condition in affections of the lungs and heart, which also generally 
accompanies bronchitis. 

This disease requires the positive current to be applied over the 
whole extent of the sternum, and the negative to the summit and back 
of the shoulder, extending down upon Coolness and the entire space 
from that to the spine, thus making tonic and cooling currents. A 
similar effect to this is produced by quinine, the influence of which 
on the brain antagonizes the frontal and stimulates the lateral occipi- 
tal region. Hence it has been a favorite remedy in pulmonary irrita- 
tions, notwithstanding its objectionable effects, which make it inferior 
to Gnaphalium and the syrup of Phenic acid. 

Currents to the tibial region and haemospasia will exert a decisive 
influence on bronchitis, as on pneumonia. 

The soothing influences of Hyoscyamus, Paregoric, Tonga, Bro- 
midia, Paraguay tea, Hops, Poppy heads, Balsam of Peru, etc., will 
co-operate with Gnaphalium and syrup of Phenic acid, Sanguinaria, 
Drosera and Penthorum. 

Static insulation, which acts on the surface, will relieve the lungs, 
and is beneficial in all pulmonary affections. Jaborandi and Crawley 
are valuable to open the skin, and the former is especially valuable, 
as it has a decided effect on the larynx and bronchi, somewhat like 
Sanguinaria. Ptelea is a valuable tonic for the bronchial patient, 
and Saw Palmetto, recently introduced, is an efficient restorative. 

Remedies applied on the chest in a warm poultice of althea or 
althea and hops have a good effect, which is increased by passing the 
electric current through them. 

As chronic bronchitis, like irritations of the frontal brain, tends to 
great exhaustion, it needs tonics and a generous diet, almost as much 
as consumption. Animal food and a little ale or porter may be 
necessary, and a general tonic treatment on Health, Vital Force and 
Nutrition, as well as on the upper half of the dorsal region. 

Sarcognomy shows a relation between respiration and the abdomi- 
nal region. Hence the lungs are materially relieved in bronchitis and 
pneumonia by the action of the bowels produced by electricity or 
by gentle cathartics, such as Juglans, Celandine, Rhamnus frangula 
(which is very mild), or Iris, Gentiana, Bryonia, Cascaraand Phosphate 
of Soda. 

Nauseant remedies divert from the lungs and relieve their conges- 



59- ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [cilAP. XXV. 

tion, for nausea is connected with the pelvic region, and may be 
excited by the current from the front of the chest to the sacroiliac 
symphisis, or by emetics, of which a decoction of lobelia and boneset 
(Eupatorium perfoliatum) in equal parts is one of the best. 

In Pleurisy the location of the disease would indicate, according 
to Sarcognomy, more pain and irritation than in bronchitis and con- 
sumption, but not so much as in some diseases of the lower half of 
the body ; also an interference with pulmonary respiration requiring 
abdominal breathing, a tendency to affect the brain in an exciting 
way, and a development of fever. It tends to extend to the lungs 
and develop a cough. But it is not a dangerous disease if it does not 
lead to extensive effusion or suppuration. 

In all inflammations common-sense and experience direct us to 
divert the congestion from the inflamed part. This is easily done by 
cupping over the inflamed pleura and by haemospasia upon the arms 
and lower limbs. To these promptly efficient measures the positive 
current is an important adjunct, giving tone to the relaxed blood- 
vessels and diverting both blood and serous effusion. The current 
should be sent to the arms and lower limbs, especially the tibial region 
and the region of Health and upper dorsal spine. 

Cathartics and diuretics, as well as moderate diaphoretics, are bene- 
ficial in all inflammatory affections of the chest. Hot poultices of 
hops and althea or elm upon the pleuritic trouble are very beneficid; 
and warm water alone, in the form of a wet pack of maintained warmth, 
is beneficial in all inflammatory affections of the chest. The benefits 
of all external applications are increased by sending the electric cur- 
rent through them. 

When much serous effusion has occurred we may rely upon static 
and Faradic currents to disperse it, with the aid of diuretics, of which 
Galium, Polytrichum and Hypericum are the best, which may be aided 
by Jaborandi, to act on the skin. 

In diseases of the heart, pericarditis, endocarditis, hypertrophy 
and angina pectoris we need currents from the heart to the shoulder 
and upper dorsal region, reinforced by Convallaria, Cereus and Even- 
ing Primrose (CEnothera biennis). The latter I have discovered to be 
especially valuable in organic diseases of the heart and its valves ; it 
is very sedative, soothing, and almost soporific, with a fine influence 
on the bronchial and nasal region, larynx and throat. The Conval- 
laria (lily of the valley) I think preferable to Digitalis as a tonic for 
the heart, having like Digitalis also a diuretic action. Cereus 
(grandiflora) is a tonic sedative to the heart and brain — a genial, 
anti-inflammatory remedy. The Cereus Bonplandii may not be equal 
to the grandiflora, but has in addition a decided action on the spleen. 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY, 593 

In the dilated condition of the heart, which is a condition of weak- 
ness, manifested by the diffusion of cardiac sounds through the chest, 
the Convallaria would be good, and the Strophanthus might be used 
in small doses, which is not so soothing, but is a stimulating tonic to 
the heart. General tonics, such as Coca, Ptelea, Saw Palmetto and 
Syrupus roborans, would materially assist, in connection with a nourish- 
ing diet. 

Aneurisms have been treated by inserting needles partly insulated, 
through which a strong galvanic current produced a coagulum of the 
blood, which gives some relief and may sometimes cure. 

The diaphragm — Erroneous ideas of the diaphragm are quite com- 
mon. For example : " It is stated by Dr. Golding Bird that the charge 
of a Leyden jar transmitted from the pit of the stomach to the back 
causes the diaphragm to contract violently, expelling the air from the 
lungs with a loud shout." This is reversing the action of the dia- 
phragm. The expulsive action and shout are due to the abdom- 
inal muscles, the diaphragm being an inspiratory muscle. 

The treatment of the diaphragm has been explained under the head 
of asphyxia. The phrenic nerve coming from the middle cervical 
region and being nearly reached on the middle of the neck, 
while the corporeal location for deep respiration is three or four 
inches below the umbilicus, it follows that Faradic or alterna- 
ting currents between these locations are the proper method 
of producing deep respiration. But as the diaphragm itself may be 
reached by transverse currents through the trunk at the seventh and 
eighth ribs on the side, that method also is efficient. We may also 
stimulate respiration by currents between the cervical region and the 
lower end of the thigh behind the knee, or even in front, above the 
patella. 

Hiccough is commonly referred to the diaphragm, but is chiefly 
an affection of the abdominal muscles, and should therefore be treated 
on the lower dorsal region of the spine. The sedative influence of 
the region of Patience would assist in its treatment, and nervines such 
as Scutellaria, Leonurus and Xanthium would assist. 

TREATMENT OF THE ABDOMINAL REGION. 

The abdomen is the battle-ground or seat of fever, which is contin- 
uous in proportion as the location of the disease approaches the 
region of Calorification. 

When the vital power of the spinal region is sufficient to regulate 
abdominal action, we have proper assimilation and excretion, which 
produce sustained health. When that spinal power fails, disorders 
ensue, of which fever is a conspicuous portion. Hence, treatment of 



594 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

the spine by manipulation and cupping has often been successful in 
fevers. 

Electricity has great power over febrile conditions, for they tend to 
increase impressibility ; but the medical profession has failed as yet 
to realize its value. Dr. Gale of New York, in the last century, was 
the only leader in this direction, but without followers. 

In all fevers we need the soothing influence of electricity, directed 
to the feet and legs, as well as to Repose and Coolness. As long as 
the power of these regions is maintained, by electrodes on the tibial 
region and behind the humerus, we have a recuperative influence 
working against the fever. Why has not this been accidentally dis- 
covered in a half century of empirical electro-therapeutics ? It has 
not entirely escaped notice, as we find in the California Medical 
Journal a recommendation of Faradism as necessary in fever to 
soothe and strengthen the patient. It proposes to hold the negative 
on one foot and pass the positive all over the other limb, then to hold 
the negative on both feet and pass the positive over the trunk and 
arms, the operator holding the electrode and administering through his 
hands — which the writer says is more grateful than a wet sponge, 
but of course does not perceive the reason, for the reason is outside of 
medical dogmas. This is a very beneficial treatment, as the writer 
was convinced by experience, but needing to be completed by the cur- 
rent from the hypochondria to Coolness and Health. 

Dr. Rockwell speaks of the reduction of the pulse effected by 
general Faradization — a pulse of 115 being reduced to 103. This is 
due to the tonic power of electricity and to the increase of vital force 
from stimulating the posterior surfaces and lower limbs, relieving the 
abdominal oppression. It would be much more marked by direct- 
ing the current to the feet and to the locations of Tranquillity, 
Patience and Repose. 

In all fevers we need the influence of the febrifuge antiseptics at 
the positive pole, to charge the constitution with their restorative 
power. We need currents to Health from the hypochondria, and to 
Coolness from Calorification. If the brain or lungs are much affected, 
we need currents to the tibial region from the anterior base of the 
brain and the anterior base of the chest. We need also currents 
from the abdominal surfaces to the lower dorsal region, which is im- 
paired. 

Of the remedies available in fever, I would mention Declat's syrup 
of Phenic acid, Dextroquinine, Salicin, Cornine and Gnaphalium, as 
febrifuge tonics. Salicin especially antagonizes painful and rheu- 
matic conditions, and Gnaphalium has a special bearing on the lungs. 
Fucus Marina has, in addition to its febrifuge action, an alterative in- 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMV. 595 

flucnce and favorable effect on relaxed, flabby or dropsical conditions. 
Pyrus malus (apple-tree bark) is a tonic and slightly astringent febri- 
fuge, excellent in scarlet-fever, puerperal fever, affections of the 
throat, enlarged tonsils, enlarged liver, hemorrhoids, summer com- 
plaint and dysentery. Monesia, though not especially a febrifuge, is 
a fine antiseptic tonic, with valuable effects on the throat, lungs and 
uterine region. 

We need, in addition to the tonic antiseptic febrifuges, those reme- 
dies which control and evacuate the morbid materials developed by 
fever. Bisulphite of soda has this purifying action, controlling decom- 
position and resisting microbe development and pyemia. Boracic acid 
is a fine antiseptic, with a very fine influence on the throat and brain. 
Condy's fluid, especially as an external application, is decidedly febri- 
fuge, with a favorable influence on lungs and stomach, and anti-bac- 
terial action. 

The necessary evacuant and restorative influence on the bowels is 
found in a number of remedies. Chelidonium (celandine) is a very 
valuable and much neglected remedy. Its action externally is sooth- 
ing and healing, fully equal to arnica, and hence it is valuable as an 
application to hemorrhoids, and its influence on the intestines is 
more favorable than that of aloes. It is a good application to ulcers 
and morbid growths generally, and affects the bladder favorably. It 
might well be substituted for other cathartics generally. As a very 
mild and healthy evacuant there is nothing better than the Juglans 
cinerea (butternut) in fluid extract or in the Juglandin, which com- 
pares favorably with that mild evacuant, Rhamnus frangula. Iris ver- 
sicolor (blue flag) in fluid extract or its solid form, Iridin or Irisin, is in 
my opinion greatly preferable to the more fashionable and harsh Podo- 
phyllum and Podophyllin. It acts in a vigorous but restorative manner 
on the liver and bowels, with good effect on the kidneys and womb, 
and much more agreeable effect on the nervous system than Podo- 
phyllin. Gentian (Gentiana lutea) is a fine alterative tonic for the 
liver, and Leptandrin is a pure liver tonic ; neither of the two is 
purgative. 

Chelone glabra (balmony) is a fine tonic for stomach, liver, spleen 
and kidneys, useful in fevers and after exhausting diseases. Chianon- 
thus acts very beneficially on liver, stomach, spleen, kidneys and 
bowels, with a fine soothing and relieving influence on the nervous 
system, which makes it valuable in bilious fever, though not actively 
evacuant. Grindelia squarrosa, a remedy little known, is a very 
efficient remedy for the liver, spleen and stomach, having great power 
to reduce enlargement and congestion, for which it is a very valuable 
external application. Rumex (water clock) is a very soothing, purify- 



596 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

ing, cooling alterative. Its influence on the brain, stomach, lungs 
and female organs is very beneficial. Polymnia is perhaps our 
most efficient agent as a powerful alterative, reducing congestion and 
enlargement of the liver and spleen. 

Of soothing agents in fever, I would mention Hops (Humulus), 
which has also some tonic influence, and Evening Primrose, which is 
especially soothing when heart and lungs are affected. Cereus grandi- 
flora is a sedative which is not debilitating and which is very impor- 
tant in all affections of the heart. It is very appropriate in fever. 
Leonurus (motherwort) is a fine restorative nervine, in fevers and 
delirium tremens, which has no objectionable influence. 

To tranquillize and relieve morbid states of the stomach we may 
rely upon Lettuce (Lactuca elongata) and Scrophularia Marylandica. 
Alnus rubra will assist in promoting the flow of gastric juice. 
Sambucus nigra (elder flowers) not only soothes the stomach but has 
a fine influence on the skin, and is very appropriate in fever ; but 
for free perspiration we rely upon Crawley and Jaborandi. Nux vomica 
occupies an indefinite position among remedies, having a fine general 
influence, which may be appropriate in fever. It is tonic and altera- 
tive, assists torpid bowels and liver, and sustains the nervous system. 

For stimulants to relieve depression we may rely upon Eryngium 
aquaticum as the most efficient ; but brandy, wine and ale are some- 
times useful, and electricity is the most important stimulant. 

So far as diseases are dependent on microbes we must depend on 
the new remedies, which are not yet fully tested. Of these, Pyok- 
tanin appears to be the most harmless, and has a fine influence on the 
nervous system, as well as controlling power over inflammations. 

Intermittent Fever evidently requires a current toward the 
shoulders and spine ; but as the chill is approaching there should also 
be a current between the lumbar region and Calorification. In the 
febrile stage the current should be from the hypochondria to the 
shoulders and to Coolness just behind the humerus. The spleen 
and liver in the hypochondriac region should receive the positive cur- 
rent, but at the beginning an alternating current would be best, 
followed by the positive. 

Any strong impression, to rouse the spinal region and the occiput, 
would repel the attack, as was proven by Dr. A. Fenykovy at Nisch, 
when the military stock of quinine for the regiment gave out. He 
ordered that the patients should be rubbed twice a day along the 
spine with a simple ointment. The day following, the ague did not 
appear, and he has used this treatment since with such success that 
three-fourths of his patients have recovered without any quinine. 

Any one familiar with what is called the magnetic treatment woul 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 597 

undertake to cure oy manual treatment of the spine, and even the 
common rubber seems to have succeeded in this case. The treat- 
ment of the spine alone in such cases by cupping was tested by Dr. 
Gondret in 1850 (see page 85). 

The cure of ague reported by Luke Howard, F. R. S., was a happy 
application of the principles of Sarcognomy, but seems not to have 
instructed the medical profession. The patients, on an insulating 
stool, received sparks at the epigastrium which were drawn out at the 
spine. The cure would have been still better effected if the sparks 
had been taken from the back of the shoulders or the summit of the 
dorsal spine. 

Mr. Howard's application reduced the pulse speedily, if made in the 
hot stage ; and a permanent cure was made in a few treatments, even 
in obstinate cases. Why should not this be the method in all fevers ? 
In applying currents thus, the effect will be greatly increased by 
applying the proper febrifuge on the skin, and would be still more 
decisive if the skin were blistered ; which, however, is rarely required. 

In other cases electricity has been used with varying success, for 
want of guiding principles. The Italian Universal Annals says : 
«' Electricity has been used by Frank, Borgini, Aldini and others ; in 
these later times by Bossi of Rome, by Vizioli of Naples, by Shipul- 
ski, Krasnogladof, Deparquet, etc. Prof. De Renzi of Genoa has also 
largely experimented with it, and has found that in the majority of 
cases the fever is stopped, and frequently more promptly than with qui- 
nine. In nine cases the author has had five complete cures, two better- 
ing, and two with no success. They were treated with the continued 
and the Faradic current, — the first obtained with nine to sixty -two 
elements, and applied five to fifteen minutes along the spinal cord. 
The Faradic current has been more efficient than the galvanic. 
These experiments have confirmed the possibility of conquering inter- 
mittent fever with electricity ; but, so far, it has been impossible to 
ascertain why in some cases a rapid and complete cure is obtained, 
and in others an incomplete one, and what are the best means of 
application of electricity, and when it ought to be preferred to quinine." 

What else could be expected from a purely empirical practice, with 
no principles to guide it. Cures can be made w T ith either galvanic or 
Faradic or static electricity by those who understand Sarcognomy. 
Merely electrifying the spinal column is not enough in a serious case. 
The focus of the disease is at the spleen, and to a slight extent at the 
liver. Dispersing positive currents from that location are therefore 
necessary, and may be preceded by negative for a few minutes. The 
concentration must be upon the shoulder, aided by 1 umbo-hypo- 
gastric treatment, in the chill ; and concentration from the hypogastric 



59$ ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS : [CHAP. XXV. 

region to behind the arm, in fever, — also to the tibial region, if the 
fever is high. 

But as the patient is entitled to the speediest possible cure, the 
antiperiodic febrifuges should be applied under the positive electrode. 

The importance of treating the spleen was demonstrated by Dr. 
Babaieff, whose experience is quoted in the London Medical Record. 
He found that Faradization reduced the spleen, and cured in some 
cases in which quinine failed. Dr. V. F. Sprinion is also quoted as 
testifying to the cure of his cases and reduction of the spleen by gal- 
vanic and Faradic currents. Four cases of intermittent fever were 
permanently cured by him with Faradization alone, in five to ten 
seances. Thirty cases of intermittent fever, — tertian, quartan and 
quotidian, — cured by electricity, were reported by Dr. Blackwood 
in the Medical Bulletin since, and fortv-two cases were treated and gen- 
erally cured by Dr. Schroder of St. Petersburg, whose principal re- 
liance was Faraclizing the spleen. One-third of Dr. Blackwood's cases 
were cured by a single application. 

Galvanism is efficient in reducing enlargment of the liver and spleen, 
but should be aided by such remedies under the positive pole as 
polymnia, dextroquinine and grindelia squarrosa. Careful experi- 
ments have proved the power of quinine in reducing the size of the 
enlarged spleen. Muriate of soda and muriate of ammonia are 
almost as efficient. The reduction of the spleen and liver to a normal 
condition removes the foundation of intermittent fever, in doing which 
we may receive some aid from the iodide of potassium. But currents 
to the shoulder and spine are indispensable in the treatment. 

The principles of Sarcognomy as to the treatment of all fevers are 
clear and simple. Currents must be passed from Calorification to 
Coolness and from Disease to Health. Currents should be passed 
from Calorification to the tibial region and foot to relieve the fever 
and disturbance of the brain. Organs that are congested should be 
treated with dispersive current::, to the spine and to the region of 
Health, and the lower bowels should be sufficiently invigorated by 
lumbo-hypogastric alternating currents to promote the expulsion of 
effete matters. The kidneys, liver and spleen should receive tonic 
currents to enforce their duties, and with all these measures we 
should not neglect the proper febrifuges, administered by the medical 
electrode or in a wet cloth on the abdomen, through which the cur- 
rent is passed. In addition to these measures currents of hot water 
should be played against the abdomen, especially at Disease and Cal- 
orification, the effect of which would be increased if they were con- 
nected with the electrode of the positive current. 

In all abdominal affections of an irritated or inflammatorv character 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 5.99 

the treatment would be similar to that of fever. In dysentery and 
peritonitis a wet cloth, saturated with the proper remedies and laid 
over the entire surface of the abdomen, should have the positive cur- 
rent passed through it (the electrode gliding over the whole surface) 
and the negative on the spine, the shoulders or below the knee, — 
generally in all of these positions, for all these effects are needed. 
When these measures are used they will rapidly supersede the old 
methods of practice. 

Beard and Rockwell maintain that the Faradic is preferable to the 
galvanic in the treatment of all the viscera below the diaphragm, and 
to one unacquainted with Sarcognomy this may be a judicious direction, 
if it is understood that the currents are to be antero-posterior, — that 
is, that the spinal column shall be included in the circuit with the vis- 
cera, — for we thus invigorate the functions. 

But when we understand Sarcognomy we perceive many occasions 
for a one-way current, which is the galvanic or the primary. Such a 
current is often necessary from the hypogastric regions upward to the 
shoulders, to overcome the ardor of fever, the depression of melancholy 
and debility, the derangements of the uterine system, and the morbific 
tendencies of the hypochondriac region. It is also sometimes desira- 
ble to send a current to the abdominal region to stimulate inactive 
organs for a few minutes, but this should be only an exception to the 
rule that visceral organs should be stimulated in association with their 
spinal support. This joint stimulation is well given by the Faradic 
current, but I regard the alternating galvanic current, supplied by a 
commutator, as more appropriate to the abdominal region. For this 
purpose I have devised a commutator propelled by gravity, the speed of 
which may be increased or diminished by regulating the weight. The 
liabilities to evil in the galvanic current are overcome by commutation, 
which changes it from a one-way to an alternating current. 

The Stomach. ■ — In the treatment of the stomach the Faradic cur- 
rent is available for producing emesis. By placing one pole over the 
stomach and the other in the throat or on the neck, a very strong 
Faradic current (from several cells) will produce efficient vomiting. 
This method has been used to dislodge obstructions in the oesophagus. 
Vomiting may also be produced by introducing one of the poles in the 
stomach, as an insulated sound. 

The galvanic negative current in gentle application produces an 
increased gastric secretion. To produce a wholesome, vigorous action 
in the stomach, we should associate it with the lower dorsal region in 
our treatment. The whole gastro-intestinal tract shown on the chart 
should co-operate with the lower dorsal and lumbar regions. The 
layers of fat on the front of the abdomen frequently make a decided 



600 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

hindrance to electric currents, requiring additional electro-motive 
force. 

The abdominal organs all respond to Faradism. The stomach may- 
be contracted in its length or antero-posteriorly according to the dura- 
tion of the current. The circulation and normal action of the liver 
is increased and its congestion diminished ; the congestion of the 
spleen is reduced and the gall-bladder contracted. A gentle galvanic 
current from the mouth to the anus moves the bowels, and Faradic 
currents are by some preferred for stimulating the intestines. The 
stimulation of their contraction is generally accompanied by increase 
of their secretions. 

In all treatment of the stomach we must associate with it the lower 
half of the dorsal vertebrae. Doing this with Faradic or alternate cur- 
rents invigorates the stomach and overcomes obstinate vomiting, but 
I have not heard of the application of this method to sea-sickness, to 
which it seems so appropriate. I hope some of my readers may have 
the opportunity of applying the current against nausea from the sacro- 
iliac symphisis to the summit of the chest just above the mammae 
and also to the location of Health. 

Nausea and vomiting require a current from the sacroiliac sym- 
phisis to the mammae, and also to the centre of the scapula (Health) ; 
also from the hypochondria to Health. If resulting from inability 
of the stomach to digest its contents, alternating currents between 
the lower dorsal vertebrae and epigastrium would be proper. Very 
gentle currents from points one inch exterior to the occipital knob 
and half an inch lower — which is a nauseating region — to the loca- 
tion of Love or of Health would be beneficial. Currents of hot water 
on this spot would be beneficial, and the application of ice has been suc- 
cessfully used. Dr. Leven reported success by the application of 
electricity to the interior of the stomach with the oesophageal sound. 

Nausea and vomiting may be controlled, like all other conditions 
of gastric difficulty, by direct invigoration with currents alternate or 
reciprocal between the stomach and the lower dorsal vertebrae. This 
is the standard measure for all gastric derangements, and has been 
very successfully used even in cases of very obstinate vomiting. 

Cholera. — The great disturbance and deficiency of electricity in 
times of cholera would indicate the use of static electricity as an 
invigorating prophylactic. This opinion has been advocated by Dr. 
Vigouroux in the Progrcs Medical. 

As great abdominal congestion and general prostration, often 
attended by great nausea, is the characteristic of cholera, it is certain 
that strong currents from the abdominal region to the shoulders and 
upper occiput would antagonize and control it, if given with sufficient 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 601 

energy and persistence by either form of electricity. In severe cases 
haemospasia and external heat (blankets wrung out of hot water) would 
add greatly to our control of it. 

To this I would add vigorous Faradic or alternating galvanic cur- 
rents between the lumbar region and the organ of Calorification. 

The static current is equally or more efficient, but requires the aid 
of a commutator to act as an equable stimulant to the spinal and vis- 
ceral system. I think my experiments justify the assertion that an 
efficient electric treatment will control cholera more effectually than 
anything that has ever been tried. 

Diarrhoeas are of course treated on the same principle as cholera 
and readily checked. In many cases the domestic remedy — salt, 
vinegar and pepper, in an agreeable dilution — is sufficient. In more 
serious cases Beach's Neutralizing Cordial (rhubarb, saleratus and pep- 
permint in equal portions, with brandy and sugar, and sometimes 
cinnamon) or a little monesia or salacin would relieve, without requir- 
ing professional aid. 

Constipation and hernia. — Constipation is a condition in which 
all forms of electricity may be useful. The galvanic current from the 
mouth to the anus, even in the simple method of a zinc plate in the 
mouth and silver electrode in the anus, is a good remedy. The 
Faradic current between the spine and abdomen is especially 
valuable when atony or relaxation is the cause. The primary cur- 
rent with the negative on the spine is also efficient, and the alternating 
galvanic is better. The static current, either continuous or inter- 
rupted, is also very useful, and the use of a proper purgative in the 
medical electrode renders success certain. 

Placing a negative electrode in the anus and moving the other over 
the abdomen has proved efficient in some difficult cases. 

To overcome constipation we require effective treatment of the 
spinal column from the middle dorsal region to the sacrum. The 
ganglionic nerves along the column have no insulating material and 
therefore receive most freely the electric current, which is most 
effective when thus applied. Onimus and Legros say that : " Our 
physiological experiments demonstrate that the continued currents 
never provoke energetic and efficacious peristaltic contractions of the 
intestines, except when we electrize the spinal cord or splanchnic 
nerves. We must act on the spinal cord if we would affect the intes- 
tinal contractions. In paralysis and other nervous affections producing 
habitual constipation the electrization of the cord produces free and 
and frequent stools." It also restores the contraction of the bladder, 
producing a normal micturition, and the current to the stomach 
increases the secretion of gastric juice. The alternate current 



602 ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

between the spine and abdominal surface may be effectively used 
(the spine being covered by an electrode of vertical length). On the 
other hand strong interrupted currents or intense galvanic currents 
affect the nerves unfavorably, arresting peristaltic action, which shows 
that the galvanic is more appropriate than the Faradic current for 
intestinal action, though Onimus and Legros say that very feeble 
Faradic currents promote peristaltic action and Beard and Rockwell 
favor their general use for the abdomen 

Purgation in difficult cases is effected by introducing a partially 
insulated electrode high up the rectum and using the other Faradic 
pole on the lumbar and abdominal surfaces. The Journal of the 
American Medical Association gives examples of its success after the 
failure of purgatives and enemata. The applications were made for 
ten or twenty minutes, and repeated at intervals of three hours. 

Dr. Dewees says (in the N. Y. Medical Journal} : " There is in 
almost all cases of chronic constipation (from entire inactivity) 
excessive dryness, not only of the faeces, but of the mucous surface of 
the intestines. This state is speedily remedied by the current, the 
secretion of the bowels being announced in a few days. When the 
nervous prostration is very great, and the person should be of a 
relaxed leuco-phlegmatic habit, the gut is frequently found in an oppo- 
site condition, being relaxed and coated with a gluey mucus, the 
presence of faecal matter not being noticed by the bowel. After a 
few days' use of the battery this becomes remedied, in both states ; 
the intestine is stimulated, and a secretion of fresh mucus takes place, 
with increased propulsory powers." 

A remedy so powerful in intestinal obstruction must necessarily be 
valuable in cases of hernia, when strangulated and almost impossible 
to return. Dr. SuprienenKo, in 1882, demonstrated this in a case of 
inguinal hernia, which could not be reduced, by applying the positive 
pole on the hernial tumor and the negative on the lumbar vertebra, 
followed by application at the umbilicus. The hernia was overcome 
in about two minutes, for the application was judicious. In a still 
worse case, reported by Dr. Pergamin, after twelve hours of strangu- 
lation, fifteen minutes of Faradization and two minutes of manipula- 
tion, the hernia was reduced. Cerebral stimulants, as they divert 
from the pelvis, assist in the reduction. Strong coffee or belladonna 
may be used with benefit. 

Four cases of hernia have been reported in medical journals, in 
which electricity succeeded after other treatment had failed. In one 
case an inguinal hernia of ten years' standing had become strangulated. 
Nothing could relieve it until Faradization was tried, which made an 
impression in a few minutes, and caused a total disappearance of the 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 603 

swelling. In another inguinal hernia of twenty years' duration, stran- 
gulated for fourteen hours, it could not be reduced, but ten minutes' 
Faradization enabled them to reduce it,— one electrode being applied 
to the swelling, "the other to the ring and the neighboring abdominal 
walls." In another case, of eight hours' strangulation, fifteen minutes 
of Faradization made the tumor disappear. Another case of scrotal 
hernia as large as a man's head was Faradized in all directions and 
completely reduced, although three hours' labor upon it had previously 
failed. These cases were reported by a Russian medical journal. 

Dropsy and Corpulence.- — That dropsy may be relieved by elec- 
tricity is shown by a case reported by Dr. Koenig in the Revue Med- 
icate (1830). In a man of fifty, after suffering lumbago, dyspepsia, 
haemoptysis and cedematous swelling of the legs, the swelling ex- 
tended to the abdominal cavity. He had costive bowels, scanty 
urine, frequent pulse, enormous distension of the abdomen, and exten- 
sion of the anasarca to face and hands — yet purgatives and diuretics 
did no good. "Two needles were then inserted from one-eighth to 
one-sixth of an inch into the walls of the abdomen, on either side of 
the linea alba, and their number was subsequently increased. These 
were touched three times a day with the wires from a battery of sixty 
pairs, twenty or thirty contacts being made. The secretion of urine 
immediately increased, the skin became moist and the appetite 
returned. No internal remedy but infusion of juniper berries was 
used. In four weeks the oedema and ascites had greatly diminished, 
and a few weeks later the patient had perfectly recovered." (Chan- 
ning.) 

Dr. K. reported another case cured in the same way in three weeks, 
and also similar success in the use of galvanism in dropsies of the 
joints, in which he advises the needles to be introduced deep enough 
to reach the bone of the joint. 

Dr. Schusten, in the Revue Medicate, testified to the successful use 
of electro-puncture in articular dropsies, pericardial dropsy, chronic 
hydrocephalus, hydrothorax, hydrocele and ascites. 

Thus concurrent testimony shows the great power of dynamic elec- 
tricity over all effusions from serous membranes, as Dr. Gale long ago 
demonstrated the power of static electricity, and Wesley said that 
"electrifying cured dropsies supposed incurable." All this shows 
that electricity (especially in the static form) is a great invigorator of 
organic life. 

Hydrocele is readily cured with fine needles about four inches long. 
Dr. Pecchioli of Sienna originated the treatment nearly half a century 
ago. With four needles inserted in a double hydrocele and a current 
between them from a small battery, the fluid was nearly all removed in 



604 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

five hours. Three treatments completed the cure. Several very sat- 
isfactory reports of such treatment were made soon after its introduc- 
tion. 

The removal of dropsy by Faradism, after diuretics and all known 
treatment has failed, is now so well established by experience that we 
need not review the graphic reports of such cases. I would rnerely 
suggest that it will be more efficient when the kidneys and the hypo- 
gastric region are treated, — the former increasing the urine and the 
latter the perspiration. We should not neglect the co-operation of 
diuretics and diaphoretics, which may be included in the current and 
will reinforce the electricity. 

The Faradic treatment of the abdomen from its front to the spine 
is a valuable measure to impart vital energy to organs that tend to 
relaxation and congestive enlargement. Such treatment prolonged 
efficiently would improve the temperament and health, and diminish 
the abnormal fulness which is often a personal encumbrance. But 
to reduce corpulence we need in addition an ascending current from 
the organ of Nutrition to the shoulders. If the current be directed 
to the chest above the mammae the moral benefit will be a desirable 
acquisition to all who are not already too amiable and delicate. 

Rectal diseases may be treated by an electrode at the anus, or 
a flexible electrode introduced in the rectum, — the positive current 
overcoming relaxed congested conditions, and the negative serving 
to dissolve and dissipate tumors or morbid growths. In rectal 
treatment we should, as with all viscera, include the controlling spinal 
region in our treatment, which would beat the upper half of the sacrum. 

In the treatment of hemorrhoids the dispersive positive current of 
dynamic or static electricity is generally successful. The electrode 
should be insulated, excepting the portion applied to the tumor. In 
some old cases, in which the tumors are not sensitive, the negative 
pole may also be used ; and in cases requiring surgery, galvano-cautery 
is used, while the patient is under anaesthesia. The tumors may 
also be destroyed by electrolysis — inserting platinum needles heated 
by the current. 

Dr. Robert Newman of New York, having succeeded in the cure of 
urethral stricture by electricity, applied the same method, in 1871, to 
strictures of the rectum with success. The power of electrolysis 
against morbid growth and strictures has been well demonstrated in 
practice, yet as a matter of course still has the opposition from dis- 
tinguished surgeons which is regularly arrayed against radical prog- 
ress. 

In this treatment the galvanic current, regulated by a milliampere 
meter, is applied through an electrode which is insulated, ending in an 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 6o$ 

oval nickel-plated bulb from three-eighths to one inch in diameter, 
increasing as the stricture is expanded. The positive pole is applied 
by a wet sponge to the hand or abdomen of the patient, and the neg- 
ative metal bulb, lubricated with glycerine, introduced to the stricture. 
The current is gradually raised from zero to as much as is well borne, 
varying from five to fifteen or twenty milliamperes, but generally near 
five. In a seance of from five to fifteen minutes the electrode being 
kept against the stricture usually overcomes it and passes through. 
The current is then reduced to zero and the electrode removed. 
11 Seances may be repeated in one or two weeks." The electrodes are 
flexible and no force is used. In some cases it may become necessary 
to use needles in the substance of the stricture. This method succeeds 
where all other methods fail, and if it does not make a complete cure 
it produces decided improvement. Ten to fifteen cells are commonly 
used and a much stronger current can be borne than in urethral 
stricture. The patients experience great relief from a condition that 
is prostrating. Rectal diseases derange the whole nervous system. 

Rectal diseases have been very successfully treated by electricity. 
Dr. W. S. Shotwell {Maryland Med. Jour?) claims that it is superior to 
all other methods. His method is that of cutting through a fistula 
with a loop of platinum wire by a cauterizing current. He says the 
wound heals well without any dressing, but the bowels must be kept 
constipated one or two weeks. Hemorrhoids are treated also with a 
cauterizing loop of wire round the protruding hemorrhoids. 

The Liver. — We are told, in a recent publication by a Professor of 
Johns Hopkins University, that : " No effects are produced upon this 
organ by the electric current, so far as our present knowledge extends." 
The liver, however, is not an exceptional organ in the human body, 
and it is easy for any investigator to prove its excitability by electric- 
ity. It is therefore astonishing that such a statement should be 
found in a scientific text-book. Even the gall-bladder can be made to 
contract by direct electrization. 

Dr. Wilson Philip says : " I have repeatedly seen the same effect 
upon the biliary system which arises from calomel ; a copious bilious 
discharge from the bowels coming on within a few hours after its 
employment." 

The hepatic secretion is best promoted by alternating galvanic cur- 
rents through the liver from side to side and from the right hypo- 
chondria to the spine at the seventh dorsal. For giving tone to a 
relaxed and congested liver, I would use the Faradic current. Cur- 
rents between the liver and upper dorsal region have a tonic effect 
upon it. 

Dr. W. H. King, in a recent work on electro-therapeutics, says : 



606 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

"In functional disturbances of the liver I know of no remedy equal 
to galvanism. A medium-sized electrode (positive) should be pressed 
down under the ribs as near the liver as possible, and a large negative 
electrode on* the back in such a position as to bring the liver between 
the electrodes ; a current as strong lis can be borne should be passed 
for ten minutes at each treatment, and repeated two or three times 
a week. It is sometimes astonishing how the symptoms, such as 
mental depression and uneasiness of the right hypochondria, depen- 
dent upon it, disappear. After an acute hepatitis, which has left 
inflammatory deposits, this same treatment is very efficacious. In 
such cases the current can be reversed with advantage." This accords 
with Sarcognomy, and is the language not of a book-maker, but of a 
therapeutist. 

The electric current should be medicated with Leptandrin or 
Hydrastin to make a tonic impression on the liver. To excite its 
secretion we may use Iris or Iridin, Gentiana quinqueflora, Berberis 
(Barberry) and Cellandine. To overcome congested conditions we 
may rely upon Polymnia, Grindelia squarrosa, and the tonic power of 
nitro-muriaticacid in a weakly acid solution applied by a wet cloth or 
in a foot bath. 

We may act upon the gall-bladder by a current sent at the lowest 
level of the tenth rib on the right side, and on the spleen at the 
corresponding locality on the left side — marked G in the front view 
of the viscera. 

Electric development. — The power of electricity to promote 
growth has often been demonstrated. One of the most decisive illus- 
trations was the experiment of Dr. J. Reid on a frog (A 7 ! Y.Jom-. 
Med., May, 1847), the spinal nerves of which were cut so as to para- 
lyze the posterior limbs. On one side daily exercise of the limb was 
given by a weak battery, and at the end of two months it was unimpaired 
in development and strength, while the other limb, without electric ex- 
ercise, was reduced to half its size and its contractility impaired. Elec- 
tricity sustains not only the nutrition and strength of the muscles, but 
the normal state of their nerves, on which their strength mainly 
depends. Galvanism has not so much effect when the nerves are de- 
generate. Its operation is to raise the temperature and increase the 
circulation, which is followed by increased muscular power. As it 
operates through the nerves, the spine as well as the local nerves 
should be under its influence. Even in such a case as dropped hands 
from lead poisoning, which would seem to be local, the best effects 
were produced (by Dr. Bird) by sparks from the upper part of the 
spine. The local treatment was not usually effective. 

To promote growth, according to the principles of Sarcognomy, the 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDKD 13V SAKCOGNOMY. 607 

currents should be directed to the regions of Nutrition and Vital 
Force, from the portions of the chest anterior and interior to the 
axilla. The purpose will be promoted by stimulating the lower dorsal 
region and the adjacent portions of the back, which will promote 
digestion and assimilation. 

TREATMENT OF THE PELVIC ORGANS. 

One who learns by experience the value of electricity in controlling 
all female conditions and diseases will realize the vast amount of 
suffering endured by women, which might have been prevented by 
enlightened electro-therapeutics. I have just been treating a very 
intelligent lady who had for years suffered terribly at her menstrual 
periods, sometimes equal to the pains of confinement, with prolonged 
debility, without relief from the profession. In one hour after I began 
she was free from pains and discomfort, and passed through the day, 
which had usually been a period of suffering, as bright and happy as 
in her best condition. 

In all uterine affections electricity is of supreme value, and if aided 
by Helonias, Aletris, Cimicifuga and Viburnum compound, it should 
relieve women from menstrual troubles and add greatly to the evolu- 
tion of an improved generation. 

In amenorrhoea strong stmiulation is needed by alternating currents 
through the uterine and lumbo-sacral regions. In some cases, where 
the emotional nature is depressed, currents between the mammae and 
and scapula (Love and Health) will assist. 

In menorrhagia, a strong, tonic, positive influence should be applied 
to the groin and the uterine region — the negative being applied to 
the lumbo-sacral, the scapula (Health) and axilla. 

In dysmenorrhoea the condition may incline toward the inaction and 
feebleness of amenorrhoea or the hyperasmia and relaxation of menor- 
rhagia, requiring corresponding modification of treatment. An alter- 
nating lumbo-hypogastric current is generally appropriate. The 
influence of the negative pole at the lumbo-sacral is most important. 
Sometimes it is necessary on the scapula and axilla. 

Cases of menorrhagia and dysmenorrhoea have been treated heroi- 
cally by the positive pole of galvanism vigorously applied to the 
womb when it was much diseased. Dr. Mayo-Robson, F. R. C. S., 
speaks of using a current of 150 milliamperes for eight minutes with 
the positive pole in the uterus. He used a fifty-cell Leclanche bat- 
tery. For such a powerful current the circuit between the poles was 
probably not more than a few inches. Through the entire length of 
the person it would probably give but ten to fifteen milliamperes. 
One to two hundred milliamperes have been used in treating fibroid 



COS ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

tumors of the uterus by the method of Apostoli, which destroys the 
tumor. 

After parturition the condition is similar to that of menorrhagia, 
and requires positive currents to the womb, either externally or 
through the vagina, carried to the lumbo-sacral, the scapula and the 
axilla. This produces a prompt and satisfactory recovery, and phy- 
sicians are beginning to find it out. Dr. Apostoli has proposed it to 
the Paris Academy of Medicine, recommending after labor the appli- 
cation of the primary current to the womb eight or ten times in six 
days, and in cases of difficult labor fifteen or twenty times in ten to 
fifteen days, to hasten the restoration of the uterus and avoid slow 
convalescence. These views are very correct, but the application 
might be made twice daily. He also advocates strongly the use of 
Faradization, in every case of labor, as safe and successful — an opinion 
sustained by the best English and American practitioners. 

The plain instruction of Sarcognomy is that, as electricity (especially 
in the secondary and primary currents) is a powerful muscle contractor, 
producing this contraction by assisting the vital force, and as the 
lumbo-sacral region is the controlling region of the pelvic organs, 
there is no reason why we should not use alternating currents, Fara- 
dic or galvanic, between the lumbo-sacral and uterine regions, when, 
ever we need to invigorate the womb to perform its full duty in child- 
birth. 

Experience, too, has amply shown that this use of electricity is far 
better and safer, more prompt and reliable, than the use of ergot, and, 
instead of exhausting t or injuring, leaves the patient in far better con- 
dition than when she is exhausted by her own unaided efforts. 

Various methods have been suggested, none of which are so proper 
or beneficial as what Sarcognomy suggests. To reach the womb 
through the parietes of the abdomen does not bring into play the 
sustaining nerve force of the lumbo-sacral region, and we know that 
nerve force is necessary to sustain any action. The most powerful 
action is produced when the spinal cord is stimulated, and Ziems- 
sen's experiments on the exposed heart show that a current directed 
to its ganglia made a stronger impression than currents merely to its 
substance, greatly increasing its action. Currents applied only to 
muscles are much slower in producing effects than when the nerves 
are included. Hence I object to treating the uterus without the aid 
of the lumbo-sacral region. 

To send the current through the womb vertically, through the cer- 
vix and fundus, as proposed by Dr. Radford, or from the nape of the 
neck to the os, as proposed by Dr. McKenzie (which is the worst of 
all methods), fails also in stimulating the proper spinal region, and 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 609 

involves a serious clanger to the head of the child, whether it is toward 
the fundus or the os, fur a strong Faradic current might be fatal. 

The current between the cervix and the abdominal walls at the 
fundus, which is the only method proposed in the work of Professors 
Liebig and Robe, is very objectionable. 

Obviously there is but one proper method, which I have stated, and 
the current should be an alternating or reciprocal one, giving strong 
stimulation to the spine. It should be applied so as to reinforce the 
efforts of nature at each contraction, or may be used to rouse con- 
traction, if it has failed, and should not be continued long enough to 
produce exhaustion. 

Thus used, it diminishes the suffering, promotes expansion of the 
mouth of the womb and completes the expulsion of the placenta, 
operating also against the liability to hemorrhage and diminishing 
the exhaustion. Finally, by application at the completion of labor, it 
restores the tone of the parts and promotes a rapid recovery. For 
this object we need the positive current at the womb and groin, with 
the negative at the lumbo-sacral and the scapula. 

It may also be necessary sometimes to relieve the depression of the 
patient by a current from Melancholy to Cheerfulness. 

The applications to the parturient woman should be by broad elec- 
trodes or by the hand of the operator, using a wrist band to give the 
current to his hand, with which he may give the manual pressure 
desired and also learn the progress of the case ; the use of his hand 
moderating the current and keeping him well informed of its strength. 
There has been a great deal of heroic treatment of the womb by 
surgeons which electricity renders unnecessary. 

In the words of Dr. G. B. Massey, electricity is an absolute substi- 
tute for sharp curetting in all cases, and, where it can be conveniently 
performed, this operation is unjustifiable in the future. As compared 
with caustic and caustic solutions, it possesses the advantages of being 
easily and absolutely controllable, permitting either an alkaline or an 
acid caustic action to begin gradually and be terminated at any desired 
instant, accompanied at the same time by a distant action of a salu- 
tary nature. The caustic effect, moreover, may be confined to the 
interior of the uterine cavity, leaving the cervical mucous membrane 
untouched, or vice versa, by the use of a form of intra-uterine elec- 
trode devised by the author. As a means of controlling hemorrhage 
from the uterine cavity, whether due to malignant disease or not, 
powerful positive cauterization is unequalled." " It is an agent capable 
of being properly applied without the need of a very great amount of 
technical skill. Unfortunately such a student must also consent to 
abstain from reading any but the most recent works upon electro- 



OlO ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

therapeutics." " I have more than once been simply astounded at the 
lack of acquaintance with elementary physics on the part of physi- 
cians actively engaged in this work." 

Stricture of the urethra, which results most generally from sex- 
ual abuse and excess as well as venereal disease, and is generally pre- 
ceded by inflammation, occupies the most sensitive part of the human 
constitution, which has the most powerful influence over vitality, act- 
ing directly through the lumbo-sacral region. It produces sexual 
debility as well as nervous prostration. Bougies of soothing and 
tonic character introduced into the urethra give relief and sometimes 
cure, but electricity is the reliable treatment. 

The cure is effected by electrolysis ; that is, the dissolution and 
absorption of the morbid structures, and removal of the afflux. The 
positive current externally is proper for the latter, but a mild applica- 
tion of the negative pole in the urethra is what is required. Force is 
not used, nor anything at all painful. It is administered by a metal 
rod with a bulb on the end, about half an inch long — the rest of the 
rod being insulated by a catheter. The negative pole is less painful 
than the positive in this application. The alkaline development by 
the negative pole causes the dissolution and absorption. The cur- 
rents must be weak ; strong currents are injurious. The positive 
pole is quite objectionable in the urethra, as it coagulates the blood 
and produces a hard cicature. The Faradic current, which is useful 
as a tonic, is beneficially used in spasmodic stricture. 

This method of galvanic chemical absorption has been demonstrated 
by Dr. Robert Newman. In some tough, obstinate cases, however, 
he uses strong currents and leaves the catheter in the urethra to pre- 
vent adhesions. 

The positive pole, in these treatments, he placed in the patient's 
hand or on the thigh, or the supra-pubic region. In treatment of the 
genitals, from four to eight cells are usually sufficient. Repetitions 
of the application were made by Dr. Newman but once in from two 
to four weeks. He warns against frequent repetitions. 

Of course there is danger of urethral fever if harsh or imprudent 
methods are used, but by the combination of medicine with electric- 
ity, as in using medicated currents and also medicated bougies, I think 
all unfavorable results may be prevented. Currents which would 
produce inflammation may be used if guarded, as medical electricity, 
by cocaine or theine. 

"Electrode bougies" (says Dr. Newman, who has been most suc- 
cessful in the management of stricture) "are firm sounds insulated 
with a hard-baked mass of rubber. The curve of the bougies is short. 
The problem is to absorb the stricture, not to cauterize," by "weak 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 6ll 

currents at long intervals." " As a general rule, six to twelve cells 
may be used." " All strictures are amenable to treatment by electro- 
lysis." " Pain should never be inflicted." "For the absorption of 
the stricture, the negative pole is always used." "For the positive 
pole a carbon electrode is used, covered with sponge, moistened with 
warm water, and held against the cutaneous surface of the patient's 
hand, thigh or abdomen." 

The location of the positive pole is not a matter of indifference. 
The nearer it is placed, the milder must the current be. Any part of 
the hypogastric region (the front of the pelvis) would be appropriate. 

Impotence may be treated both by galvanic and Faradic currents 
between the lumbo-sacral and sacral locations and the genitals, which 
may be placed in a cup of warm water. The posterior electrode has 
been placed also in the rectum with success. 

In cases of Spermatorrhoea a current from the groin to the lumbo- 
sacral region is the most appropriate. The positive pole was applied 
to the perineum successfully by Dr. Newman. 

SKIN AND LIMBS. 

Skin diseases are effectively treated by galvanic currents. As a 
general rule the negative current may be applied through a sponge 
or roller electrode, followed by the positive. The sponge should be 
saturated with the proper remedies, among which I would mention 
Sambucus (elder flowers), Parcira brava, borax, alkaline washes, 
carbolic acid, menthol, veratrum viride, campho-phenique, camphor 
and salicylic acid, equal parts, rubbed together with water, like honey 
and subnitrate of bismuth. 

Galvanism was successfully applied to a case of cedematous ery- 
sipelas (see Boston Med. and Surg. Jozir. y Oct. y 1846) occupying the 
whole limb from groin to foot, enormously enlarged. The galvanic 
current through the limb greatly improved it, and reduced it to one- 
half of its size. 

Felons may be successfully treated by the positive pole of either 
the galvanic or Faradic current. Both have been successfully used. 

Cancers are beginning to be treated by electricity, and the results 
indicate that this may become the most successful method. 

Treatment of limbs. — Sprains are promptly relieved by galvan- 
ism, which relieves the "sprain immediately. 

Rheumatism, like neuralgia, in chronic cases sometimes requires 
severe treatment. If the positive pole is placed near a rheumatic 
joint, with a broad carbon or sponge electrode, and on the other side a 
metallic wire brush applied on the negative, — which is a very frequent 
method,— the combined effect of the current and the counter-irritation 




6l2 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

on the skin will relieve cases in which other methods fail. Prof. Seeiig- 
muller reports its success in a German journal. A similar success 
is obtained with static electricity, when sparks are vigorously drawn 
so as to irritate the skin. 

Rheumatic swellings of the joints and other parts were cured by 
Dr. Hoering of Heilbronn by galvanism. 

Dynamic electricity was successfully employed by M. Heller of 
Stuttgard to cure a case of false articulation with callous overgrowth 
from a fracture of the thigh of eight months' duration. Twelve 
applications, with one pole on the tumor, the other applied to the 
hand or foot, produced complete absorption of the callus. 

Contractions from paralysis or rheumatism require galvanism. 
A case is reported by M. Breschet (Hotel Dieu) of permanent spas- 
modic contraction of the fingers cured by galvano-puncture (twenty- 
five or thirty plates being used) after twelve applications. 

Dr. Hoering reports a case of spontaneous luxation of the femur 
of the left thigh, in which the ligaments were strengthened by elec- 
tric treatment applied to the left sacral and inguinal regions, with 
success after sixty-four applications of fifteen minutes. Curvature of 
the spine and weakness of the back have been treated beneficially by 
electricity, which in cases of curvature strengthens the muscles. 

USE OF APPARATUS. 

For the foregoing treatment the common portable battery, costing 
ten or fifteen dollars and supplied with a muriate of ammonia cell, will 
give good results, which will be greatly enhanced by using the medi- 
cal electrode and adapting the remedy to the patient. A great addi- 
tion is also made by magnetism, increasing the soothing, sustaining 
and tonic influence, especially fitting it for fever, inflammation and 
nervous debility. This combination is effected in my magnetic 
battery. 

The unwieldly size and cost of the galvanic battery has limited 
their use, but by combining the cells with a magnetic coil, to give 
electro-motive force, a powerful galvanic battery can be produced, not 
weighing over ten pounds, and therefore very portable, while costing 
but half as much as the usual style of battery of equal force. 

The maximum therapeutic value of electric apparatus, however, is 
found in the statico-magnetic machine. In this the nervous stimula- 
tion of static electricity is combined with the deeper and more per- 
manent action of magnetism, a tonic, soothing and conservative agent, 
operating upon the tissues in a restorative manner, and thus supplying 
all that is lacking in static electricity. When the static current is 
also combined with a medical influence, it becomes competent to pro- 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 6l3 

duce cures so prompt and marvellous as to excite astonishment. The 
expense of ^uch apparatus and its imperfect construction have 
hindered its adoption, but even the most imperfect static apparatus 
yields admirable results in practice, and makes a successful impres- 
sion on any form of disease. 

The idea given out by some physicians and manufacturers, that no 
satisfactory results can be obtained from instruments costing less 
than three or four hundred dollars, is absolutely untrue. A static 
apparatus with my improvements for magnetic and medicated cur- 
rents can be furnished for from sixty to seventy-five dollars, which 
will accomplish all that is realized by the most costly machines in 
the way of electric potency, and many curative results beyond their 
power. The static apparatus with my modifications can give two 
distinct therapeutic treatments at the same time to two patients, 
which treatments may be essentially different. 

Of the value of mineral magnetism as a hygienic power, and the 
method of using it, an additional chapter would be required for a 
proper exposition, but it would delay this volume, which has already 
been delayed so long that I must postpone that subject to a special 
treatise on electricity and electro-therapeutics, which I have long 
contemplated. 

Electro-puncture (introduced in 1816) is performed with 
needles not oxidizable, such as gold, silver, platinum or aluminum. 
It is powerful in the treatment of tumors and in producing coagula- 
tion in aneurisms. With a strong current the needles may be made 
red-hot for cautery. Two or three large cells will be sufficient. It 
is also successful in the severest cases of neuralgia. Majendie, with 
the electro-magnetic apparatus, cured a case of most intense and 
insupportable neuralgia in the superior maxillary nerve of the left 
side of the face, in a few minutes, by inserting the positive needle 
near the origin of the nerve and the negative near its terminations. 
In treating neuralgia of the tongue by this method, the pain was 
driven into the mental branch of the inferior maxillary ; from that it 
was expelled in the same way, and went to the infra-orbital nerve, from 
which it was finally expelled at the same sitting. 

The first application uniformly relieves, but repetition is needed to 
perfect the cure. 

Galvanism is employed with equal success either by puncture or 
by contact, and in severe cases strong enough to excoriate the skin, 
as from a forty-cell battery. Perspiration of the part is a common 
effect. In sciatica the cm rent is passed down. There is ample 
evidence of the success of this practice in the worst cases. But relief 
is also obtained from static electricity by drawing sparks, which is 



614 ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS [CHAP. XXV. 

more agreeable. No matter where the neuralgia, or how severe, elec- 
tricity furnishes a cure. 

Obstinate cases of chronic rheumatism have also been successfully- 
treated by electro-puncture, and gout has been heroically treated by 
French physicians — the platinum needles being inserted in the 
inflamed part and made incandescent, so as to produce an ulcer, which 
serves for counter-irritation. 

Cauterization is a successful remedy for poisoned wounds, if promptly 
applied. Two dogs were inoculated with the saliva of a rabid dog at 
Alfort Veterinary College. One died in twenty-eight days with 
hydrophobia. On the other the wound was cauterized with a forty- 
eight-cell battery, producing an eschar, which was detached on the 
twelfth day, preventing hydrophobia. In another case of a dog bit- 
ten by a rabid animal and cauterized forty '-four hours afterward there 
was no symptom of the disease after four months. Another pair of 
dogs was inoculated with saliva of a rabid dog, one of which died of 
hydrophobia in twelve days, and the other, cauterized after fifty four 
hours, was still well four months afterward. 

MEDICAL ELECTRICITY. 

The transmission of medical potencies by a current of electricity 
has long been with me a familiar fact, although it has been excluded 
from the knowledge of the medical profession by the materialistic 
dogmatism of the colleges. But for this dogmatism it would long 
since have become known. Physicians using electric apparatus, and 
discovering transmission of disease to themselves from patients when 
they hold the negative electrode, would have learned the carrying 
power of electricity. They would also have observed the difference 
in electric currents from different apparatus, and the unpleasant me- 
tallic influence from the apparatus in common use. 

To those who are familiar with psychometry, and who know 
that a medical potency can be felt from remedies held in the hands 
without actual contact of the medicine, the increased transmission of 
that influence by the addition of a current does not appear strange. 

I have been accustomed to instruct my students by placing them in 
a group with joined hands, generally moistened, and sending a current 
through the group, which has passed through a small portion of med- 
icine, which is sometimes used to saturate a piece of cloth or placed in 
a convenient electrode. The effect is always felt throughout the group 
by each one, but with different degrees of intensity in proportion to 
their sensibility. When their sensibility is equal, it is generally 
felt first by those nearest the medicine. They are generally able to 
describe the influence and properties of the medicine as well as if they 
had taken an effective dose. 





3/-a/rt d Pulse. 



As the reader will much better appreciate the contents of this volume by having 
even a limited knowledge of the demonstrated cerebral science, which is the main 
body of Anthropology, I present here an illustration of the general character of the 
different surfaces of the brain, ascertained by exploration of its exterior and interior 
regions — its basilar surfaces being represented through the face and neck. Each 
large division contains almost innumerable subdivisions, for I doubt if any two 
adjacent portions of the same convolution have precisely the same function. The 
subdivision has been carried as far as seemed judicious and practical, in my pub- 
lished busts and charts, in which one hundred and twenty-four subdivisions are 
presented, but are still incomplete statements of the various powers of the soul and 
organs of the brain. 

The physiological action of the brain upon the circulation as determined by exper- 
iments, is shown in the other engraving by the modifications which each region 
makes in the pulse. 

The entire science of the brain, with its derivative sciences of Psychometry, Path- 
ognomy, Pneumatology, Zoology, Archaeology, Sociology, etc., introducing a new 
world of thought, will appear in the Syllabus of Anthropology. The demon- 
strated doctrines of this science are in harmony with the most recent demonstrations 
by vivisection, though discovered nearly fifty years ago. They confirm many of the 
discoveries of Gall and Spurzheim, but modify or reject others. They have long 
been demonstrated in my collegiate lectures, and have been demonstrated as often 
as I thought necessary before scientific committees with universal acceptance. That 
I have not recently been engaged in urging them on professional or public attention, 
is due to the fact that professional men, even when convinced of scientific truths of 
a revolutionary character, have generally no disposition whatever to engage in the 
cultivation of a science foreign to all collegiate teachings and entirely unfamiliar to 
their patrons. I hold myself ever ready to repeat the demonstration of the psychic 
and physiological functions of the brain whenever any body of scientists worthy of 
such attention shall engage in the investigation. If the French Academy or any 

similar body in England should ask for a verification I would go abroad to meet them. 

(Op P . p. 615.) 



CHAP. XXV.] GUIDED BY SARCOGNOMY. 615 

When the medicine is concealed in an electrode its effect is not di- 
minished, and the description is soon given. When visited by Dr. A., 
a very intelligent physician, actively engaged in the use of electricity, 
I placed in his hands an electrode in which I had concealed a fluid ex- 
tract of hyoscyamus. When the current was passed, he promptly 
recognized a soothing nervine influence, and in less than a minute 
expressed the opinion that the medicine was hyoscyamus. 

I could procure as many testimonials to such facts as I had time to 
collect, but it seems as needless to accumulate testimony to a fact so 
easily shown as to prove in that way that ether is an anaesthetic. 
But a group of students were recently in my office and I publish here 
the statement made by them, remarking that four of the number were 
intelligent and experienced physicians. 

Boston, June 3, 1890. 
The undersigned have realized personally, in numerous experi- 
ments, that we are capable of feeling the medical influences of vari- 
ous medicinal substances, not knowing what they were, by receiving 
a current through the hands of either chemical or static electricity 
which had passed through the medicine in solution, and also would 
state that we have recognized the influence of a magnetic current, 
distinct in character from any form of electricity, by receiving a cur- 
rent which had passed through a magnet. 

J. L. Asire, Edw. C. Wales, 

J. P. Chamberlin, M. E. Ellwood, 

W. E. Wheelock, B. Eddy, 

J. W. Hastings, Mary E. Stringardt, 

S. C. Griffin, Helen C. Clark. 

The fuller illustration of medicated electric currents and of magnet- 
ism combined with electricity is reserved for a special treatise on elec- 
tro-therapeutics. 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION OF SARCOGNOMY. 

Change of plan — Concise review — Sympathy of brain and skin — Climate, cold, 
heat, moisture, electricity, clothing — Fever — Meningitis — Clammy sweats — Elec- 
tric shocks — Nervous prostration and sweating — Dr. Luys on the intellectual in- 
fluence of the skin — Illustrations of cutaneous anaesthesia and impairment of the 
brain — Eruptive fever and cerebral inflammation — Small-pox, erysipelas, and scar- 
latina — Typhus and typhoid fevers — Sympathy of subjacent organs. 

Pulmonary Sympathies — Correspondence of lungs with brain and relation to 
the Pons Varolii as the seat of respiratory power — Relation to the nose and mouth — 
Effects of catarrh and asthma — Sunstroke — Experiments on rabbits — Consumption 
and its p-ychic symptoms — Heat and perspiration — Bronchitis and affection of the 
front lobe — Its exhausting effect — Sympathy of the abdomen with respiration — 
Pneumonia : affecting the whole brain, delirium, heat of skin, perspiration, antago- 
nism to abdominal organs — Pleurisy: its relation to the womb; its more violent 
manifestations — Laryngitis: its influence on the brain — Sympathies of the Heart : 
Its correspondence in the brain — Mania from heart disease — Prostration of the 
brriin and impressibility — Mistakes of carditis for brain disease — Close sympathies 
of heart and brain — Different effects from other organs — Ganglia in the neck — 
Connection of apoplexy and hypertrophy of heart. 

Relations of the liver and subjacent region — Disease of its controlling tem- 
poro-sphenoid convolution — Relations of different parts of the liver — Its prox- 
imity to morbid influences — The great depression of spirits that it produces — Its 
influence in delirium tremens and in jaundice — Difference of its upper and lower 
surfaces — Morbid character of abdominal inflammation — Dysentery, typhoid, irri- 
tation of rectum and anus — Melaena — Fevers omitted. 

Sympathies of pelvic region — Relation to under-jaw region and destructive 
effects on nervous system — Illustration of this by orificial surgery — Relation of 
womb to hypersesthesia and hysteria — The two regions of sensibility in the brain 
and in the body — Relation ot uterine disease to insanity — Sympathy of brain and 
body not uniform — Pain of urethral caruncles — Prostrating effect of chronic dis- 
eases of the colon — Statements of Dr. Prout — Cases of rectal obstruction in Ireland 
— Injury of sacrum in a boy — of coccyx in a woman — Fractures cf thigh — Mental 
phenomena of hysteria and quasi disease — Inflammation of the bladder — Influence 
of the sexual faculties — Phvsiolosrical explanation — Extreme contagiousness — 
Puerperal mania — Morbid effects from glans and prepuce. 

Sympathies of the limbs — Correspondence of upper and lower — Passionate 
tendencies of gout and rheumatism — Remarkable effects of injuries of the knee and 
the foot. Conclusion. 



In preparing the present edition of Therapeutic Sarcognomy, I 
had made a review of the phenomena of diseases as recognized by 
standard authors, showing that the doctrines of Sarcognomy in 
reference to all parts of the body are fully sustained and in fact 
demonstrated by the phenomena of all organs in a state of disease. 
In fact a wise pathologist might have constructed something like a 
correct Sarcognomy by studying the physiological and mental effects 
of diseases. 

At the last moment I have reluctantly given up the idea of includ- 




To assist in understanding the complex relations 
of soul, brain and body in disease which are illus- 
trattd in Chapter twenty-six, I have presented the 
chart of Cerebral Somatology, and another of 
Corporeal Cerebrology (if such a term may be 
allowed) showing to what part of the brain the 
various parts of the body correspond. These cor- 
respondences are shown in disease more conspic- 
uously in proportion as the sensitiveness of 
the nervous system establishes more perfect and 
controlling sympathies between all parts, and are 
of course less apparent when the nervous sensibili- 
ties are dull. The sympathies and the psvchic 
capabilities of the nervous system are so great as 
to appear incredible to all who are not familiar with 
the subject, and as all these marvellous phenom- 
ena are carefully excluded from the curriculum of 
medical colleges I must refer the reader who desires 
to understand the higher phenomena of life to my 
Manual of Psychometry, now in the third edition, 
and the Syllabus of Anthropology, which I hope 
to issue about the end of 1891. 

I have introduced a sketch of the locations of the 
senses, which I discovered fifty-three years ago, 
and have taught and demonstrated ever since. 
The centre of vision is at the base of the front lobe, 
vertically over the pupil of ihe eye, and the func- 
tion is shared by all the convolutions behind the 
brow, each of which contributes an important ele- 
ment to its perfection, in the ability to recognize 
objects. Hearing-, behind the eye, is adjacent to 
the fissure of Sylvius, and the organ of Language. 
Feeling- occupies the anterior exterior portion of 
the temporo-sphenoidal lobe, at its base, parallel 
to the zygoma. These are the sensitive organs, but 
each anterior organ depends for its reinforcement 
and efficient energy upon a correlative occipital 
organ , according to a general law of cerebral science 
■which may easily be demonstrated, and my demon- 
strations are always accepted. The occipital or- 
gans which sustain the external senses are indicated 
in the engraving as correlative. Of these the cor- 
relative organ of vision is the part called the gyrus 
angularis, and vivisectors, having demonstrated its 
importance, have been led with Ferrier to believe 
it the entire seat of vision, which is a mistake, as 
the visual is an intellectual function and all intel- 
lectual functions are frontal. The cuneus, to which 
some would refer vision, co-operates with the gyrus 
angularis, but the latter is the essential seat of 
ocular vigor. 

As for hearing and feeling, their correlatives are 
near together, but hearing has a correlation also 
with the opposite ear, in the region above the ear, 
recognized as Cautiousness, a vigilant impulse 
which listens to all sounds in the vicinity, while 
the occipital organ relates chiefly to language and 
music. The correlative above the ear has been 
demonstrated by vivisection, but the occipital has 
not, as it is less developed in animals. The various 
lorrr.s of feeling and touch are subdivisions of the organ of Feeling ; smell and taste are in its anterior portion. 

The discovery of the correlative or sustaining organ of vision has been verified in pathological cases. In 
a case reported by Ratenoft, a student, twenty-two years of age, accidentally shot himself with a revolver, 
through the posterior parietal region of the brain, and produced complete loss of vision, but no motor or 
sensory symptoms. After opening the wound and removing the blood clot on the second day, vision returned, 
but with left lateral hemianopsia. Epileptic attacks followed, and death in six months. The bullet was 
found in- the left hemisphere. This was an injury of the correlative visual region. (Opp. p. 616.) 




CHAP. XXVI.] PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION. 617 

ing this review of pathology in the present edition, as it would enlarge 
the volume too much and delay its publication without corresponding 
advantage, as this volume will circulate beyond the bounds of the 
medical profession in the hands of many to whom pathological and 
medical details would neither be necessary nor interesting. Their 
chief value would be to physicians, to whom such evidences are 
desirable when they are not familiar with the decisive experiments on 
which the science is based. 

I cannot, however, entirely omit the pathological demonstration 
which to a philosophic thinker is quite important as illustrating Sar- 
cognomy in disease. Hence I now prepare a brief rhumi of the 
subject, showing in a concise and imperfect way that all parts of the 
body illustrate Sarcognomy in disease as well as in health. 

I shall pay special attention at first to the sympathies of the surface 
of the brain with the surface of the body, which is the cardinal doc- 
trine of experimental Sarcognomy. 

SYMPATHY OF THE BRAIN AND SKIN. 

Owing to this sympathy a warm glow of the skin is the condition 
most favorable to cerebral activity, and hence in warm climates the 
warmth maintained on the surface favors the early development of 
the brain, leading to early marriages, and produces the higher spiritu- 
ality and capacity for psychic marvels which are remarkable in tropi- 
cal climates. 

In colder climates the nervous system is less active and predominant 
and the muscular system more powerful. The highest social enjoy- 
ment is in warm apartments, while the coldness of out-door life is 
more favorable to the muscular system than to the brain. Hence 
northern climates produce muscular and hardy races, while southern 
climates produce delicacy and refinement without muscular energy or 
industry. Their life is happy in a quiet way, and they are generally 
deficient in practical energy. The antagonism of the brain and 
muscular system is illustrated every year by the indolence produced 
at the approach of warm weather. 

The electricity which gathers upon the skin in a dry atmosphere is 
highly favorable to the activity of the brain, while the free discharge 
of electricity from the surface in a moist atmosphere diminishes the 
cerebral energy. The dry, electric atmosphere of the mountains is 
more favorable to genius than the seaside. The contact of water 
with the skin is still more exhausting and cannot be endured long 
without injury. Hydropathic treatment has often produced injury 
by overlooking this tendency. 

The warm woollen and silken clothing of civilized nations maintains 



6l8 . PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

a degree of warmth and nervous life in the skin which sustains the 
activity of the brain, which is less apparent in the savages of cool 
climates, as neither their clothing nor their dwellings keep them very 
warm. The Indian, though superior in brain development to the 
negro, who comes from a warm climate, has not as active, excitable and 
emotional a brain. 

When exposed to penetrating cold there is dulness and inactivity 
of the brain and entire nervous system, which gradually advances to 
an irresistible drowsiness, and thus proves fatal by overpowering the 
brain. 

The normal action of the brain is promoted by cleanliness of the 
skin and the clothing, and very much oppressed by fou clothing of a 
dense texture which retains exhalations. The killing of rabbits by 
covering their bodies with a coating of glue, suet and rosin, by French 
physiologists, is a very conclusive demonstration of this cerebro-cuta- 
neous sympathy. The great oppression and debility which we feel 
from an excess of clothing is a similar illustration. 

The character of the skin seems to be an index of the brain, of 
which we judge as it is mirrored in the countenance ; and the lowest 
type of brain development is found in company with the cold, scaly 
and insensible surface of the fishes and in the cold-blooded reptiles, 
whose cold skin excites our loathing. From the dulness of aquatic 
animals it is a long step to the brillance of the brain power of birds, 
whose surface is warmly protected by a feathery clothing. There is 
also no lack of mental activity in animals clothed with fur and wool. 
The rhinoceros, tapir, hippopotamus and elephant have a less 
active nervous system, though the large size of the elephant's brain 
gives it a high grade of intelligence. 

This relation of the skin explains the superiority of Franklinism, 
which acts on the surface, over Faradism as a therapeutic agent, 
which penetrates the body. It leads us also to attach great value to 
woollen clothing, which maintains the most perfect condition of 
healthy vigor in the skin, and to dry^friction on the skin as a hygienic 
measure. 

This association of the brain and skin leads to the inference that 
eruptive fevers must have a special action on the brain, in addition to 
the febrile influence, which is itself debilitating and deranging as well 
as exciting to the nervous system. The cutaneous condition must 
affect the membranes of the brain, and thus produce an exciting and 
disturbing effect, according to the locality of the eruption. A critical 
report upon cerebral conditions in eruptive diseases would be valuable. 

A good illustration of cerebral sympathies was furnished by M. 
Trousseau in reference to cerebral meningitis, the diagnosis of which 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 619 

in the young subject, he says, may be aided by reference to the lungs 
and the skin. There is a peculiar sighing respiration — the child 
takes a long breath and remains without breathing from ten to fifty 
seconds, and then takes another deep respiration. The skin is liable 
to be reddened by the slightest friction or pressure, but this has no con- 
nection with fever. He stated that he had found this constantly in 
all cases of meningitis which he had seen for some time past. The 
quietude of respiration which he describes is like the physical tran- 
quillity which belongs to long-continued mental action. There is so 
little use of the muscles that there is little need for breathing, and 
we can hold the breath for a long time after quiet, protracted study. 

As healthy or unhealthy conditions of the skin affect the brain, so 
does the state of the brain react on the skin, in cerebral inflammations 
which develop superficial heat and depressed conditions which 
debilitate the skin. Hence treatment of the skin relieves the brain 
and treatment of the brain relieves the skin. Beard and Rockwell 
say that herpes, prurigo and eczema yield rapidly to central galvan- 
ization, which is treatment of the brain. 

The skin is the chief seat of calorification and regulator of 
temperature. Caloric vitalizes the brain as cold suppresses its 
action. Thus the skin modifies cerebral conditions. But Calorifica- 
tion (with which the skin is associated) appears on the cerebral chart 
to be adjacent to the throat and to the region of mental derangement. 
Hence the hot skin of fever excites and disturbs the brain, and fever or 
excessive calorification becomes associated with throat diseases and 
cerebral disorder. 

On the other hand, there is a great enfeeblement of the skin, pro- 
ducing cold, clammy and profuse perspiration, when the brain power 
is undermined in various diseases. We observe this in the colliqua- 
tive night sweats of consumption, in the relaxed perspiration which 
precedes death in apoplexy, and in many examples in which the 
perspiration is not beneficial to the disease. It is never beneficial 
when it proceeds from cerebral debility ; on the contrary, it is an ex- 
haustive condition. From investigations instituted by M. Sassicki 
he deduced the conclusions that " sweating decreases the power of the 
gastric juice and diminishes its acidity both relatively and absolutely. 
The stronger the perspiration the more the digestive power and the 
acidity are diminished." Hence the necessity for vinegar, salt and 
condiments in diet in summer. 

Whether it is the cause or (more probably) the effect of cerebral 
prostration, it is a sure sign. In typhus fever Dr. Henderson (see 
Medical Gazette, July 24, 1846) has stated that "copious perspiration 
in typhus is generally a symptom fraught with danger, and accord- 



620 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

ing to his experience such cases seldom recover, especially if the 
sweating is accompanied with quick pulse." "I have noticed (he 
says) a favorable change coincide with the occurrence of copious 
perspiration, but never a total cessation of the febrile symptoms. In 
the great majority of instances, instead of copious perspiration in 
typhus coinciding with symptoms of amendment, it happens that it 
ushers in or accompanies a state of hopeless prostration, stupor, 
hurried breathing and increased frequency of pulse." 

A case of sweating sickness was related by Dr. Laurie in the 
Monthly Journal oi October, 1846, in which the patient, an active man 
of 60, was seized with bilious vomiting and pain in the umbilical 
region, and the same night awoke with profuse perspiration for six 
hours, which saturated his body linen, bedclothes and mattress ; 
after this he was seized with an ague fit, cramps and abdominal pain, 
and when visited was found in a state of collapse, with husky, feeble 
voice, cold extremities and intense thirst, some vomiting and purging. 
He was relieved by stimulants. The connection of " immense " per- 
spiration with his condition of collapse is worth noticing. 

The intimate sympathy of the brain with the skin is shown in the 
facility with which consciousness is abolished by a shock of static 
electricity which traverses the surface. Dr. Franklin sent a discharge 
from two Leyden jars through six robust men, "they fell to the 
ground and got up again without knowing what had happened ; they 
neither heard nor felt the discharge." 

"Some time ago (says Prof. Tyndall in his lessons in electricity) I 
stood in this room with a charged battery of fifteen large Leyden jars 
beside me. Through some awkwardness on my part I touched the 
wire leading from the battery and the discharge went through me. 
For a sensible interval life was absolutely blotted out, but there was 
no traceof pain. After a little time consciousness returned. This 
may be regarded as an experimental proof that people killed by 
lightning suffer no pain." 

The superior importance of surfaces in physiology is illustrated by 
the assertion of Lallemand that he has never observed delirium in 
simple inflammation of the substance of the brain, but whenever it 
has appeared there was an inflammation of the arachnoid. The 
arachnoid inflammation is generally prior to the cerebral. 

Dr. Thomas Dowse, in a recent work on massage and electricity, 
says of the secretions of sweat when the skin is pale : " I assure you 
they are more common than is usually supposed, and it is indicative of 
a want of tone and a low degree of vitality of no small importance ; 
it is always associated with a form of nervous exhaustion — under- 
stand me, it is essentially neurotic, and is not unfrequently followed 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMV. 621 

by organic changes in the nerve centres, leading to mental disturbance, 
diabetes, albuminuria. There is a form of hyperidrosis called by 
Eulenberg "cpileptoid sweats." I think this form is very correctly 
named. A man will suddenly, after walking a few yards, and with- 
out any apparently exciting cause, break out into a profuse perspira- 
tion, become pale, hungry and faint, and lose resisting power, without 
vaso-motor dilatation or constriction ; indeed, it seems as though, for 
the time, the dilator and constrictor fibres were both paralyzed. 

"The normal secretion of sweat diminishes alo:i£j with other dc- 
rangements of nutrition of the skin, in some nervous diseases, and in 
degeneration of the motor ganglia of the anterior horns cf the fpincl 
cord. In some cases the nutrition of the skin is interfered with in a 
peculiar way, so that it becomes glossy and has the feeling and 
appearance of parchment." 

"The man who sweats profusely, when his fellows under the same 
influences do not do so, is more liable to functional and even degener- 
ative changes than others." 

Speaking of the connection between torpor cf the skin and torpor 
of the mind, he says : — 

"The patients are usually depressed, melancholic, and suffer from 
nervous exhaustion. They are also remarkably insensible to the 
Faradic and galvanic currents, and this insensibility seems to be in 
proportion to the obtuseness of their mental powers ; but it is interest- 
ing to note that as their mental condition improves, so their sensibility 
to Faradism gradually returns to its normal state." 

" I have noticed that this torpidity of intellectual power is associated 
with increased physical resistance to the Faradic current and to the 
general sensibility of the skin. Of course, in locomotor ataxy and 
general paralysis of the insane, this is a marked feature ; but I am 
attending now to cases where in most instances the patients are told 
that there is nothing at all the matter with them, and although we 
see that physical resistance is increased, we invariably find that moral 
resistance (will resistance) is below the normal standard." 

"We know that in the domain of intellectual activity proper, sen- 
sitive impressions are of the utmost importance ; tactile impres- 
sions are specially destined to provoke reactions in the intellectual 
sphere. These impressions unquestionably play a very important 
part in the cerebral activity (or otherwise") of a man's individ- 
uality. 'We all know (says Dr. Luys in his work on the Brain 
and its Functions) how fine, delicate and sensitive is the skin of 
women in general, and particularly of those who live in idleness and 
do no manual work ; how their sensitive nervous plexuses are in a 
manner exposed naked to exciting agencies of all sorts ; and how, from 



622 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

this very fact, this tactile sensibility, incessantly awake, and inces- 
santly in vibration, keeps their minds continually informed of a thou- 
sand sensations that escape us men, and of tactile subtleties of which 
we have no notion. Thus, in the idle women of society, and men with a 
fine skin, mental aptitudes are developed and maintained in the direct 
ratio of the perfectionment and delicacy of the sensibility of the skin. 
The perfection of touch becomes in a manner a second sight, which 
enables the mind to feel and see fine details which escape the gener- 
ality of men, and constitutes a quality of the first order, moral tact, 
that touch of the soul, as it has been called, which is the characteristic 
of organizations with a delicate and impressionable skin, whose senso- 
riiim, like a tender chord, is always ready to vibrate at the contact of 
the slightest impressions." 

" Inversely, compare the thick skin of the man of toil, accustomed to 
handle coarse tools and lift heavy burdens, and in whom the sensitive 
plexuses are removed from the bodies they touch by a thick layer of 
epithelial callosities, and see if, after an examination of his intellect- 
ual and moral sensibility, you are understood when you endeavor to 
evoke in him some sparks of those delicacies of sentiment that so 
clearly characterize the mental condition of individuals with a fine 
skin. On this point experience has long ago pronounced judgment, 
and we all know that we must speak to every one in the language that 
he can comprehend, and that to endeavor to awaken in the mind of a 
man of coarse skin a notion of the delicacies of a refined sentiment is 
to speak to a deaf man of the deliciousness of harmony, and to a blind 
man of the beauties of colors." 

" In the facts we have already cited respecting the pathogenic 
influence exercised by certain anaesthetics upon the genealogy of cer- 
tain forms of delirium, we should add as a complement the following 
observations reported by Dr. Auzony, which clearly show what a 
curious influence sensitive impressions may have upon psycho- 
intellectual phenomena in general. 

"The case was that of a young man, clever and rational, who sud- 
denly became undisciplined and rebellious to the utmost extent, and 
gave himself up to the worst tendencies, even to the compromising of 
the peace and honor of his family. Examination showed that he was 
completely ancesthetic. During his stay in the asylum he successively 
experienced several phases of anaesthesia, of which the appearance 
manifestly coincided with the return of his worst instincts. When 
sensibility reappeared in the skin, moral dispositions contrary to the 
preceding were observed to return in him, together with a very clear 
consciousness of his situation." 

" Some years ago I met with a case in which a young lady, aged 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 623 

about 23, stated that she was totally unconscious of sensations of 
any kind. In all her life she had never experienced pain, ' had never 
had a headache.' Heat or cold, sunshine or fog were all the same lo 
her; nothing seemed to affect either her health or her spirits; she 
was uniformly calm, easy going, imperturbable. She was married 
about a year after I first knew her, and to a lady friend whom she had 
known intimately in their days of school-girlhood, and who met her 
six or seven years afterwards, she said that her peculiarity had in no 
way changed. She was still insensible to pain, and during her three 
pregnancies had suffered nothing, even the critical periods of labor 
having been passed through without any physical distress. She was 
highly educated, musical, and pleasant in society ; the only abnormalty 
that her friend detected in her was her extreme coldness of manner 
in her own home, to her husband and children ; to the latter especially 
she was harsh and unreasonably exacting, and appeared totally devoid 
of the faintest rudiments of natural affection. 

" A case is known to me at the present time in which a young man, 
aged 21, exhibits entire insensibility to the sensation of pain. 
He is quite willing at any time to demonstrate this to his friends on 
their expressing incredulity on the subject, performing for their 
entertainment a variety of unnatural feats, such, for instance, as run- 
ning a darning needle through a finger or thumb, in at one side and 
out at the other, or pinning his hands to a table by means of four 
stout needles, driven through the thin part of the flesh extending 
between the fingers and thumb. About two years ago he underwent 
an extremely severe operation on one of his eyes, refusing to be 
placed under chloroform, and taking a conscious interest in the move- 
ments of the surgeons throughout the whole operation. I may men- 
tion that a very strong galvanic current produces but little impression 
upon him. He is a young man of peculiar temperament, given to the 
exhibition of fits of violent anger and passion on quite inadequate 
provocation, which are succeeded by great sullenness and silence for 
several hours. He sometimes show r s destructive tendencies, and will 
wantonly smash and spoil articles of value." 

Dr. Renaudin relates the case of a youth in whom a degenerate 
mental condition was produced by anaesthesia of the skin. He was 
doing well at school, when his mental and moral powers suddenly 
declined, and for unruly conduct he was expelled. Dr. Renaudin 
found an insensibility of the skin, which he regarded as the patholog- 
ical cause. This anaesthesia was intermittent, and when it was absent 
" he was docile and affectionate. When it reappears his evil instincts 
return, and we have reason to know they might have led him even to 
murder." 



624 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

As eruptive fevers concern the skin they affect the brain, while, in 
return, inflammations at the surface of the brain affect the skin. 
Hereafter students of Sarcognomy may observe how the locations on 
the brain and body correspond. Inflammation of the dura mater and 
arachnoid is, according to Dr. Thomas Watson, " marked by pain of 
the head, by fever, and by rigors which intermit, and so regular are 
the intermissions that the practitioner may be tempted to believe that 
he has got an aguish patient." In encephalitis he recognizes "a 
parched and dry skin, a frequent and hard pulse, flushing of the face 
and preternatural sensibility to external impressions." 

On the other hand, in the opposite condition of delirium tremens, 
when the brain is exhausted, demanding stimulants and tonics, "the 
skin is perspiring and most commonly the patient is drenched in 
sweat," the condition which "commonly accompanies prostration of 
the nervous system." In acute hydrocephalus, he says, " the face is 
flushed, the eyes are brilliant," " there are pain and tenderness of 
the abdomen," "the disease is very like an attack of continued 
fever." 

In small pox, says Watson, there is " nausea and vomiting, head- 
ache, sometimes wild delirium, sometimes convulsions." The condi- 
tion of the brain in bad cases affects the lungs and in fatal cases, 
says M. Roger, the lungs are frequently found gorged with blood. 

In erysipelas, says Watson, "generally there is some wandering 
of the mind, especially at night ; and in bad cases there is much 
delirium, and at length complete coma." "When death takes place - 
and the head is examined, serous fluid is usually discovered beneath 
the arachnoid and in the cerebral ventricles, and the veins of the pia 
mater are turgid." Inflammation of the brain, he says, is apt to 
follow when the erysipelas deserts the surface. " The extension of 
the inflammation, the supervention of delirium and coma while the 
external inflammation continues, are of common occurrence. This, 
then, is one way in which erysipelas is accustomed to prove fatal, by 
effusion within the head and coma." 

The close sympathy of the brain and upper portion of the lungs 
is such that skin diseases which affect the brain severely must also 
affect the lungs. In fatal cases of measles, according to Prof. John 
Bell, "the marks of pulmonic alteration are generally clear, and next 
are those of inflammation of the bowels and the brain." 

"In scarlatina the morbid alterations are chiefly sanguineous con- 
gestio7i of the brain, serous membranes, spleen, plates of Peyer and 
internal follicles. The brain exhibits increased vascularity, with 
opacity of the arachnoid membrane and effusions of serous or turbid 
fluid between it and the pia mater." (Bell.) 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 625 

There is a close analogy in the exanthemata : measles, scarlatina 
and small pox have similar conditions, affecting the brain and lungs. 
In scarlatina anginosa with a florid eruption, according to Watson, 
" many of the patients die apparently from inflammation or effusion 
within the head. They have violent headache, with furious delirium, 
which is followed by coma and death." The skin in this case differs 
widely from the skin of typhus. 

Dr. Cathcart Lees, in the Dtiblin Medical Press of July, 1850, 
speaks of a dangerous form of: delirium in scarlet- fever, resembling 
in some respects that of delirium tremens. Dr. Gregory of London 
speaks of this delirium in his lecture on eruptive ftvers, saying 
"delirium often of a fierce and unrestrainable kind seizes the adult. 
I have seen two patients in this disease, in the most raging frenzy, 
jumping out of bed naked, and dying on the floor of the chamber." 
Dr. Lees describes cases in which the patient continues wild, noisy 
and sleepless, in which life can be saved only by procuring sleep. 
Dr. H. Kennedy of Dublin says, in his work on scarlatina, that the 
delirium is purely nervous, as " when patients died with well-marked 
head symptoms, no morbid appearance was found in the brain to 
account for them." 

This condition of the brain is overcome by soothing measures 
on the skin — inunction with bacon fat or other oily matter 
applied by a healthy hand. " With rapidity (says Dr. Schneeman) the 
most painful symptoms of the disease are allayed, quiet, sleep, appetite, 
and good Jiumor return" under this treatment. 

The wild insanity of scarlatina is due not only to the condition of 
the skin but to the affection of the throat. Affections of the throat 
— scarlatina, diphtheria, cynanche, etc. — concern a region adjacent to 
the insane tendencies of the brain and therefore liable to producing 
insanity, dementia and paralysis. 

The conditions of the brain and skin cling together in close sympa- 
thy. Inflammation of the brain produces a hot, sensitive skin, and the 
condition of the brain in typhus is indicated by the very peculiar 
mordant heat of the skin mentioned by authors, which gives a 
peculiar sensation to the touch. It is also, according to Bartlett, " very 
generally attended with a peculiar and characteristic eruption upon 
the skin. The name of the disease has often been derived from this 
circumstance; hence it has been called petechial fever, spotted fever, 
maculated fever, and so on." The spots are often purplish and almost 
black, corresponding to the oppressed condition of the brain. Dr. 
Bell says, "the most characteristic symptom of typhuc is the exan- 
thematous eruption," and Dr. Copland expresses a similar view — 
that this eruption is as characteristic of typhus as their peculiar 



620 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

eruptions are of measles and scarlatina. The morbid condition 
of the skin is shown by its "pungent and offensive" odor, 
which "increases as the fever progresses, and toward the termina- 
tion of fatal cases, often resembles the fetor of putrid animal matter." 
The changing conditions of the skin correspond with those of the 
brain which is the seat of the fever — florid at the beginning and 
little offensive in odor, dark, petechial and offensive at the close, or 
improved as the disease subsides. The " calor mordicans " (pungent, 
biting heat) is usually more intense during the first week, but declin- 
ing afterwards as the pulse and the patient decline — the vital force 
being insufficient to maintain the temperature and the vitality of the 
skin declining with that of the brain. 

The medical profession has been much embarrassed in drawing the 
distinction between typhus and typhoid fever, which Sarcognomy 
explains, — typhus being properly a disease of the brain, while typhoid 
is essentially located at the hypogastric region of the ileum and there- 
fore identified with a region of the body which is not only feverish in 
tendency but tends to derange the brain and affect the skin. The 
diseases are therefore so analogous and have so many similar symp- 
toms that an absolute distinction is not possible, as they run into each 
other, and the older authors were not far wrong in taking them as one. 
Both illustrate the sympathy of the brain and skin and they affect 
both. 

We may then maintain that the skin and brain go together in health 
and in disease, and, as Sarcognomy shows the exact location of these 
sympathies, it gives us command of the entire brain and of its sub- 
divisions for therapeutic treatment. 

But the skin, being located on the body, sympathizes with the sub- 
jacent organs, enabling us to affect alike the bodily physiology and 
cerebral psychology. 

This was well explained by that able physiologist, the late Pro- 
fessor Macartney, in his most valuable work on inflammation, as 
follows: — 

" It is a law of the animal economy that internal and external sur- 
faces that are opposed to each other are more disposed to sympathize 
than tissues that are continuous. All local and superficial injuries, 
as inflammations of the skin, are liable to create an inflamed state of 
the nearest serous surface without involving the interjacent tissues. 
I have seen this opposite inflammation set up from burns and scalds, 
superficial military punishment, the irritation of a blister, tinea capitis 
spreading to the face, and erysipelas. It deserves remark that these 
internal inflammations have a peculiar character. They keep pace 
with the external source of irritation. The surface of the serous 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. &2J 

membrane is crowded with red vessels which do not, however, pour out 
serum. The parts are not conjoined by coagulable lymph, nor is there 
any tendency to the formation of pus. The constitution sympathizes 
more with inflammations of the serous membranes thus produced, and 
in a different manner, than with those arising originally on the serous 
surfaces. Instead of the inflammatory symptomatic fever, we observe 
prostration, anxiety, perturbation, and in severe cases there is delirium. 
The result is not unfrequently fatal." 

These remarks seem to apply to irritations affecting the abdomen, 
and the prostrating effects correspond with the laws of Sarcognomy, 
but I present them merely to show the power of the skin over sub- 
jacent structures and the consequent advantage of cutaneous treat- 
ment by the hand or any other means. 

PULMONARY SYMPATHIES. 

The general sympathy of the thorax and brain amounts to a com- 
plete correspondence of analogous surfaces, — the superior, inferior, 
anterior and posterior of one corresponding with the same in the other, 
as we shall find by examination. But there is also the special relation 
of the respiratory organs to respiratory centres, which I locate at the 
Pons Varolii, and which on my bust are marked around the nostrils 
and mouth. The entire subjacent tract maintains a close relation 
with respiratory conditions, as manifested in the red line of the anterior 
gums in pneumonia and their condition in consumption. 

It follows that all affections of the nostrils, mouth and throat affect 
the lungs. Asthma affords a fine illustration of this. In the Medi- 
cal Congress at Weisbaden in 1885, Dr. Hack gave his experience of 
nearly six hundred cases of asthma, in all of which he professed to 
discover a reflex neurosis, of which the nose was invariably the 
centre, the treatment of which was indispensable. 

It follows from these principles that the organs of respiration may 
be treated efficiently by treatment of the nose, and according to the 
New York Medical Times Dr. Goldsmith has treated whooping- 
cough successfully on this principle. He injected a solution of sali- 
cylic acid (1 to 1000) or corrosive sublimate (1 to 10,000) into the 
nose every two hours, six times the first day and four times the next 
day, which generally effected the cure. 

Brown-Sequard stated in one of his lectures that coughing and 
sneezing can be prevented by pressure on the lips in the neighborhood 
of the nose. This is on the expiratory tract, concerned in coughing 
and sneezing. But I think the result depends somewhat on the 
sensitive impressibility of the subject. 

We know that a little snuff or capsicum or other irritant applied 



628 



PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 



to the nostrils will produce sneezing, and even a little whiff of cool 
air may have the same effect. 

The complicated diseases produced by catarrh — the severe affec- 
tions of the lun°"S, the brain and the entire constitution — are familiar 
facts. A medical pretender has even undertaken to cure all diseases 
by application in the nostrils of his panacea. 

This engraving represents the internal face of the right hemisphere of the brain, 
divided exactly on the median line from the left hemisphere. It is introduced to 
show that in operating through the face by the hand we impress the Pons Varolii 

when we operate on 
what is marked on the 
chart as the respiratory 
region of the face. The 
Pons Varolii has been 
shown by pathological 
observations to be the 
seat of the respiratory 
^ function. In stimu- 
lating Calorification 
y through the chin we 
operate on the medulla 
oblongata which occu- 
pies the space from i 
to 2. The prominence 
above 2 is the Pons. 
The corpus callosum 
which connects the two 
hemispheres is the 
arch of white nervous 
substance indicated by 
the figures 28, 26, 27. 
The divided cerebel- 
lum is indicated by Fig. 
4. Fig. 7 refers to the 
tubercula quadrigemina above the cerebellum and below the corpus callosum, in 
which the optic nerve originates. The optic nerve is indicated at 21 — the oculo- 
motor at 20. The anterior commissure (about as large as the optic nerve), which 
is cut as it passes to the left hemisphere connecting the two regions of Sensibility, 
is indicated at 32. The septum lucidum, 25, is a thin vertical lamina below the 
corpus callosum; the fornix, 24, is a layer of fibres passing back from the anterior 
commissure, and dipping downward; the pineal gland, 8, 9, 10, is a small nervous 
body lying on the tubercula quadrigemina; the gyrus fornicatus, 30, and the 
interior frontal convolution, 31, are the seat of some of the higher faculties. This 
?roup of five — the septum, fornix, pineal gland and two convolutions — are in a 
realm of mystery. No investigator yet — not even Gall and Spurzheim — has 
pretended to any knowledge of their functions, with which I have been familiar 
many years. I shall make the first published exposition of their functions in the 
Syllabus of Anthropology. There is not sufficient interest in such knowledge at 
present to induce its publication except as a portion of a systematic treatise. 

The production of asthma by morbid growths and conditions in the 
posterior nostrils, and its cure by extirpating the morbid growths, is 
now well established by cases in practice. A case communicated to 
Dr. J. E. Schadle of St. Paul by Dr. John N. Mackenzie of Baltimore 
is worth mentioning. He says : " A man consulted me for violent 
attacks of asthma which compelled him to give up work entirely. 
Irritation of the sensitive area invariably produced an attack. He 
had two large posterior hypertrophies, both of which I removed with 
the cold wire-snare. At each revolution of the nut and tightening of 




CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 629 

the wire he was seized with a violent paroxysm , so threatening that I 
was fearful that the operation would have to be suspended. Seeing, 
however, that he came out of each attack with safety, I screwed the 
loop slowly home at long intervals, and finally cut through the masses. 
Relief was immediate, and that night he slept without his asthma for 
the first time in several years. No other treatment was used beyond 
the ordinary spray. Two years or more have passed and the patient 
has not returned." 

The close relation of the respiratory tract to the intuitive and 
intellectual regions of the brain is verified in the unfavorable effect 
of diseases of that region on the mind. Dr. R. P. Lincoln, of New 
York, speaks in the Medical Record of a "growing stupidity " from 
the morbid growths of catarrh in the posterior nasal region, which he 
relieved by galvano-cautery. 

Further illustrations are not necessary. I would merely mention 
that it is easy to show by nervauric experiment or by electricity 
that respiration may be affected through the respiratory tract at the 
nostrils and mouth, the external localities through which we reach 
the Pons Varolii ; consequently the structures that intervene exercise 
a controlling influence on respiration. Hence the appearance of the 
gums in pneumonia, and the irritation and feverishness of chil- 
dren in teething. Herpes labialis was mentioned by Dr. Tyrrell as a 
constant symptom in an epidemic of influenza at Sacramento. 

The direct sympathies of the lungs and brain were illustrated in 
Dr. S. Rogers' description, in the Madras Journal, of the effects of 
sunstroke in soldiers. The patients, he says, "complained of difficult 
breathing, with a sense of tightness and oppression about the chest." 

Kussmail and Tenner, in their experiments on rabbits, found that 
when they checked the circulation in the brain the respiration was 
much reduced — in one case from 135 to 18, and became snoring. 

Purgation, which gives relief to the brain, also relieves the lungs 
and improves the freedom of respiration. 

The close connection of the base of the lungs and base of the brain 
is shown in all violent exercises and passions, which produce deep res- 
piration bv the diaphragm, wrnle the gentler emotions produce ex- 
pansion only of the upper part of the chest. 

Consumption ranks above all diseases in the hopeful and spiritual 
tendencies of its victims. The favorite location of phthisis is in the 
upper portion of the lungs, especially on the left side ; thus occupying 
the region associated with Hope, Love and Conscientiousness, in front, 
extending laterally into Cheerfulness and Tranquillity. The hopeful 
spirit and refined emotions of consumptives, before the disease has 
destroyed the upper portion of the lungs, contrast with the gloomy 



63O PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

effects of hepatic disease, and the selfish, irascible temper which so 
often appears in gout and rheumatism. 

Coolness associates with the lateral posterior surface of the chest 
and hence, as the disease advances, chilly feelings frequently appear. 
My colleague, Prof. I. G. Jones, who was himself a victim of the dis- 
ease, says : " Chilly sensations will frequently be observed, even dur- 
ing the warmest weather." This coolness is also a characteristic 
premonitory symptom of pneumonia. Contrary to the common 
impression, the general tendency of the thorax is cooling rather than 
heating. Its heating influence belongs only to its basilar region — 
to depth of respiration. 

The hectic flush of the cheeks occupies a region indicative of ner- 
vous sensibility and debility. 

The exhaustion of the vital force of the brain by consumption 
results in the profuse perspiration which belongs to nervous exhaustion 
and appears. in night sweats when the brain has the least energy, and 
which appears still more profusely in fatal apoplexy. One of Wat- 
son's patients reduced the perspiration by sitting up at night, thus 
maintaining the activity of the brain. The great mortality of con- 
sumption is due to the fact that the seat of the disease is the region 
antagonistic to Vital Force. 

In bronchitis the portion affected is that which corresponds to 
the intellectual organs of the front lobe, and hence frontal headache 
is a regular symptom. Dr. Elliotson says of the headache of 
bronchitis, that patients almost always describe it as a splitting head- 
ache, and sometimes there is drowsiness. There is great congestion 
in the head. In influenza, as described by Watson, which is similar 
to bronchitis, " the patient is chilly and perhaps shivers ; presently 
headache occurs and a sense of tightness across the forehead." Accord- 
ing to Prof. Bell, when the pain in the forehead is not soon relieved, 
feelings of great depression are complained of ; the pulse becomes 
weak as well as quick, the brain is disturbed in its functions and the 
muscular -strength is much reduced. All this is the characteristic 
tendency of the front lobe, which in excitement utterly exhausts the 
vital forces. . p 

" The transition from this stage to death (says Prof. Bell) is soon 
made, especially in. those cases which have been neglected from the 
outset. A remarkable feature of the worst form of bronchitis is the 
rapidity with which the collapse and the symptoms of extreme pros- 
tration and debility succeed to high fever and well-marked local 
excitement. The whole course of these fatal cases is sometimes 
wonderfully rapid — death ensuing within two days from the com- 
mencement of the attack." 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 63 1 

In the moribund condition, according to Dr. Elliotson, " the pulse 
becomes weaker and softer, and, at the very last, vermicular; the sur- 
face becomes blue, and the forehead and skin are bedewed with a cold, 
clammy perspiration." The cough of chronic bronchitis, according to 
Prof. Bell, " wastes the body and reduces the strength." English 
writers speak of the great prostration of the patient in influenza, and 
Watson speaks of a greater loss of life by influenza than by cholera. 
The use of the lancet in such cases was destructive. The whole history 
of bronchitis illustrates the anti-vital tendency of the front lobe, with 
which the bronchial region is associated, and which participates by 
sympathy in the disease. Andral reports a case of bronchitis, ending 
in death from marasmus and debility, in which he found a "sero- 
purulent infiltration of the subarachnoid cellular tissue of the 
convexity of the cerebral hemispheres, and the lateral ventricles 
were distended with serum." Elliotson and Bell recommend 
cupping between the shoulders, which is the location indicated by 
Sarcognomy. 

Abdominal Respiration. — The location of respiratory impulses 
on the abdomen and the sympathy thereby established with the lungs 
is illustrated in disease. Purgation is an important part of pulmonary 
treatment. Prof. Bell insists on purgation in bronchitis — " free and 
early purging," — as necessary. So great is this sympathy that the 
faculty have often been puzzled by bronchitis of abdominal origin. 
There is a sympathetic organic cough described by Broussais, 
which he says is relieved by treatment of the gastritis. Gastritis 
was his hobby, but it was nothing more than gastric irritation, and 
such cases are distinguished from true bronchial disease by the 
absence of local symptoms in the chest. Bell mentions a liability to 
bronchitis as a consequence of gastro-enteritis. The liability to cough 
from intestinal irritation is shown in the cough produced by worms. 
Dr. Bell mentions a case of this kind in a girl, in whom the pulmonary 
symptoms (cough and remittent fever) were produced by worms and 
cured by a vermifuge. Autumnal remittent fever is sometimes asso- 
ciated with bronchitis — the symptoms alternating in the chest and 
abdomen. The special locality productive of the cough has not been 
designated by medical authors, but Sarcognomy locates it around and 
below the umbilicus, the severest cough being produced below. A 
similar cough may be produced in the impressible at that locality. 

The great sympathy of the lungs and skin is a necessary infer- 
ence from the sympathy of lungs and brain. Bronchitis is one of the 
dangers of scarlatina and small-pox. 

The front lobe being the seat of the most delicate and extensive 
sympathy and sensibility, the bronchial region necessarily possesses 



6$2 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

the same character, making us acutely susceptible to all atmospheric 
or epidemic conditions. " Not one man in ten thousand (says Wat- 
son) passes a winter without having a cold of some sort." 

Pneumonia illustrates Sarcognomy. The hyperaemia of the chest 
produces a corresponding hyperaemia of the brain. Its first approach 
in myself, in a cold, produces an abundant and pleasant action in the 
entire brain. But mental conditions are but little noticed in patho- 
logical reports. 

The tendency of the thorax is to produce a full and rather strong 
but steady pulse, as that of abdominal irritations is to produce a fee- 
ble and rapid pulse. The former tends to coolness, the latter to fever ; 
and this coolness or chilliness is a premonitory symptom of pneumo- 
nia for two or three days. 

The inflammation of pneumonia affects the brain, and produces 
severe headaches ; the determination to the anterior part of the brain 
produces flushing of the cheeks, which are supplied from the same 
artery. 

In a weak constitution there is determination to the head, coldness 
of extremities and inaction of bowels and kidneys. Majendie describes 
a dangerous pneumonia as showing a vacant stare, ideas wandering, 
general debility and nasal hemorrhage. As the mouth and nostrils 
•correspond externally to the respiratory tract in the brain, we find, 
according to Prof. Boiling of Nashville, a brick-red deposit on the 
gums in severe cases. Prof. Fredricq, a European writer, has 
observed the same thing in consumption (Revue Medicale, 1848). 
Prof. Jones has observed that the lips break out with fever blisters. 

Infants with pneumonia are disposed to breathe through the mouth 
instead of the nostrils. Barthez and Rilliet speak of gangrene of the 
mouth as a concomitant of pneumonia in children. 

Delirium is one of the most frequent accompaniments. " In children 
(says Ranking) it is frequently one of the first symptoms." Hour- 
man and Dechambre say that delirium usually accompanies pneu- 
monia in the aged pensioners of La Salpetriere. Delirium, accord- 
ing to Bell, is a symptom of great danger. Pneumonia in patients 
worn down by disease results, according to Laennec, in coma and 
death. Dr. Condie observes that head symptoms are more frequent 
in children when there is bronchitis co-existing. 

The sympathy of the brain and skin causes the pungent heat of 
typhus ; pneumonia by affecting the brain produces the same result 
on the skin. " Of all the symptoms of pneumonia (say Drs. Bright 
and Addison) the most constant and conclusive, in a diagnostic point 
of view, is a pungent heat of the surface. By this symptom alone 
the first stage of pneumonia has been repeatedly pronounced to 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 633 

exist, before asking a single question or making the slightest stetho- 
scopic examination of the chest." 

The skin is usually hot and dry. A profuse perspiration (indica- 
ting brain impairment) has been found by Dr. Bell to indicate fre- 
quently a fatal termination, with the cold skin and profuse sweating 
in which powerful stimuli produce very little effect, and death comes 
by exhaustion. 

As the functions of psychic organs associated with the thorax are 
antagonistic to those associated with the abdomen, it follows that 
the thoracic inflammation arrests the abdominal functions, the kidneys, 
stomach and bowels being interrupted. Hence a vigorous emeto- 
cathartic at the beginning is a very effective measure. 

Vigorous catharsis is recognized as necessary by the best practi- 
tioners, as it is for affections of the brain, with the additional reason 
that it unloads the respiratory abdominal tract and produces freer 
respiration. 

Pleurisy. — The sympathetic relations of pleurisy, according to 
Sarcognomy, differ from those of pneumonia, as the pleura has not so 
close a relation to the brain. It is a more inflammatory and less 
congestive affection and does not usually occupy so much of the 
thoracic surface. It may reach the axilla, the clavicle, shoulder, ster- 
num, mediastinum or whole front of the chest, and margins of false 
ribs, but usually occupies a smaller area. Its most usual location is 
at and just below the mammae, and as the mammae are in close sym- 
pathy with the womb a pain in this region is sometimes a symptom 
of uterine disease. The womb and mammae are both associated with 
the sentiment of love. 

The connection of pleurisy with uterine conditions is inevitable 
when it occupies this position. Dr. Bell recognizes pleurisy as one 
of the most frequent complications of puerperal fever. Cruveilhier 
speaks of puerperal pleurisy as occurring epidemically, and mentions 
a pleurisy which attacks females just before delivery. At La Matern- 
ite he was accustomed to examine and percuss those in whom feverish 
symptoms were marked. He says the prognosis of puerperal pleurisy 
is bad, few of those attacked surviving. 

When the pleurisy attacks the inferior surfaces, the results are 
unpleasant — hiccough, nausea and vomiting, and sometimes jaundice, 
may ensue. All basilar surfaces have a depressing, exciting and 
unpleasant tendency. 

When the disease runs across the front, below the mammae, it 
affects a region of sensibility, excitability, imagination and morbidity, 
producing an effect approximating insanity, which was well described 
by Cleghorn in his " Diseases of Minorca," who portrays the wild 



634 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

excitement, dreams and ravings of the patients in this disease, when 
the inferior and anterior portions of the chest were affected. The 
symptoms are very different and much more quiet when the upper 
portion of the chest is involved. 

Laryngitis relates to the brain rather than the body. Cerebral 
science shows that the tendency of such a disease is to produce 
excitement, restlessness, nervous or mental exhaustion and a 
lethargic tendency, all of which are verified in its history. In severe 
cases there is high fever, disturbed respiration, dry, hot skin, great 
restlessness and a dull, drowsy, almost comatose condition. Its mor- 
tality (given by some as fifty per cent) is due to its exhaustion of 
the nervous system, similar to that of diphtheria — such is the ten- 
dency of the under-jaw region. 

That the larynx corresponds to the location of Amativeness just 
below the medulla oblongata, would imply that its diseases would 
interfere with the sexual faculty. The relation, however, is better 
established by the fact that sexual puberty causes development of the 
larynx and voice and that all sexual irregularities affect the voice. 

SYMPATHIES OF THE HEART. 

The Heart affords a clear illustration of Sarcognomyin its diseases 
and excitements. Its form indicates that its superior lateral and 
inferior surfaces correspond with similar surfaces of the brain, but 
the verification of this would require much minute pathological 
research. 

A remarkable illustration of the character of the different regions 
of the heart has recently been presented by McWilliam in the Jour- 
nal of PJiysiology, showing that the superior region has the same moder- 
ating influence upon the heart as the superior anterior region of the 
brain has upon all vital processes. 

The inhibition or checking of cardiac activity has been heretofore 
ascribed solely to the pneumogastric nerve ; but he shows that in 
mammalian hearts there is a distinct " inhibitory area on the dorsal 
aspect of the auricles, stimulation of which causes a distinct inhibi- 
tion, as when the vagus itself is excited." It is by means of this lo- 
cality, which contains many ganglia and nerve cells, connecting with 
the auricles and ventricles, that the inhibition is produced, for when 
it is made anaesthetic by the application of cocaine in a four per cent 
solution, inhibition no longer takes place by irritating the pneumogas- 
tric or the local area itself. Evidently, then, this portion of the auricles 
has the subduing power over the heart, checking the muscular energy 
of its inferior portion, the ventricles. We may also observe that the 
chief energy of the heart belongs to its more posterior portion, the 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. £?>$ 

left ventricle, — a feebler action occurring in the more anterior or riffht 
side, which is also slightly superior, —and this right ventricle furnishes 
the material upon which the left ventricle acts, without which it would 
cease, as the anterior region of the brain furnishes the psychic mate- 
rial or impressions which rouse the posterior region, without which it 
would go to sleep. Thus the correspondence of the heart with the 
general pathognomic law of vitality is illustrated perhaps as nearly as 
the peculiar form of the heart allows. The law is apparent in all organs. 
The lungs have their gentler action above, and the tendency to con- 
sumption ; but greater force below, sustaining violent exertions and 
tending toward inflammation. The abdomen has its soothing and sus- 
taining functions above and its heating, expulsive, depressing in- 
fluences below. The liver belongs to the base of the thoracic system, 
to which it gives its gloomiest influence, sympathizing with the pelvic 
base of the abdomen. The limbs as they descend from the trunk take 
on a more restless and violent tendency, sympathizing below the knee 
and elbow with the abdomen, but above with the thorax. The heart 
as a whole corresponds with its location. 

Its interior position in the body, near to its inferior half and central 
to its superior region, corresponds to the location in the brain of the 
white fibres proceeding to the corpus callosum, and thus brings it into 
sympathy with the entire brain. Hence the heart responds to every 
cerebral action. All the posterior organs give it strength in various 
degrees, and all the anterior organs give it various degrees of soft- 
ness, merging into weakness; and it is easy to demonstrate this by 
examining the pulse as the organs are excited. This was the class 
of experiments on Dr. Lane which I made in 1843, before a commit- 
tee of Boston physicians, eliciting the remark from one of them that 
my experiments were "too perfect." It was demonstrated by a pub- 
lic experiment in the medical college at Louisville, Ky. The same 
thing is illustrated by every variation of the pulse under emotional 
or passional influence. 

The close general relation of the heart and brain is more intimate 
than is generally believed. Failure of one produces prompt failure 
of the other. Spiritual consciousness sometimes continues when the 
heart seems at rest, but the brain does not act so as to produce any 
effect. 

Advanced inflammation of the heart paralyzes the brain, and in 
the various stages of inflammatory development the effect on the 
brain is so great as to be mistaken for inflammation of the brain, 
causing the heart to be entirely overlooked. I have the records of 
about twenty cases of inflammation at the heart, in which this mistake 
was made. 



6$6 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

Sir Thos. Watson says that an important symptom of pericarditis 
is "delirium, sometimes quiet but often wild and furious, not depend- 
ent upon any disease of the encephalon." " Patients laboring 
under rheumatic carditis very frequently become affected with deli- 
rium or violent mania, or stupor and coma, or convulsions, or all of 
these in succession, and you might suppose they were laboring under 
inflammation of the brain or of its membranes." This he regards 
not as a metastasis, but as a sympathetic affection. " Again and 
again, when death has occurred and the delirium had been extreme, 
no traces of disease have been discoverable within the skull, while 
marks of violent and intense inflammation were visible in the peri- 
cardium." 

The prostration of the energies of the brain by this sympathy 
explains the quiet taciturnity of the patients, and the loss of courage, 
or expression of fear and alarm, which Bertin spoke of as a charac- 
teristic symptom of heart disease. 

The feeble and passive conditions developed by advanced inflam- 
mation in pericarditis or endocarditis render the patient more impres- 
sible and susceptible of nervauric treatment, as I realized in my first 
experiments in 1841, when I relieved an alarming case of pericarditis 
by treatment upon the brain with the hand. 

As a specimen of the cases in which pericarditis is mistaken for 
brain disease, I give an abstract of one reported by Dr. G. Burrows : 
" Boy at Christ's Hospital — restless, sleepless, delirious — pain in 
forehead — - a convulsion on third day — coma and death on fourth day 
— all treatment directed to the brain. No disease found in brain — 
pericardium covered with a layer of lymph, and fibres of heart dark, 
soft and infiltrated with pus." How forcibly do such cases teach us 
the necessity of cultivating the psychometric diagnosis, which, with a 
rational practice, would have saved this life. 

While the entire brain thus shares the morbid excitement and the 
prostration of the heart, it as regularly shares all its other conditions, 
rising in energy as the heart works vigorously, declining as the heart 
becomes quiescent, and sinking in total prostration as the heart is 
weakened and softened in continued fever. There is no other organ 
which by its position and relations thus corresponds with the entire 
brain, so as to represent the entire person, — as the heart is considered 
in popular language the representative of the entire character and 
purposes. 

Other organs not occupying this central position have no such 
representative character, and in their excitement or irritation they 
operate in a one-sided manner to change the balance of the character. 
Thus below the diaphragm we have the liver, corresponding in loca- 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMV. 6^/ 

tion with the tract at the base of the middle lobe (the lower or third 
temporal convolution) which develops the morbid, hypochondriac 
and melancholy influences in its anterior portion, and in its posterior, 
which approximates combativeness and business energy, promotes 
a certain force of character which has originated the popular idea of 
a bilious temperament, while the influence of its anterior portion has 
been ascribed to the hypochondria. 

The stomach lies behind a region of ^sensibility, somnolence and 
nervous refinement, and hence associates with indolent pleasures and 
the social impulses (Adhesiveness) which lie between its anterior 
surface and its spinal control. 

The hypogastric region is the source of calorification and typhoid 
fever — and the pelvic region the seat of the influences that derange 
the nervous system. The thighs are the seat of the greatest physi- 
cal energy and most furious passions, the legs of pure animality, 
and the feet of mental prostration and dulness ; while, in opposition 
to all these debasing influences, the thorax, sympathizing with the 
upper half of the brain, maintains the dignity of human nature and 
produces the great man whose energies if the chest is developed 
upwards are directed to noble objects, but if its development be 
chiefly at the waist will have a selfish direction, — from which it is 
fortunate for the world's salvation that woman is comparatively free, 
her waist being charmingly small. The opposite character is seen in 
the gorilla, in which the base predominates over the summit of the 
chest. 

Under the influence of malaria the human race degenerates, and 
the lank chest and drooping attitude proclaim its inferiority, as the 
expanded chest of the mountaineer proclaims his superiority and 
power of endurance. 

Our consideration of the heart would not be complete without 
referring to the fact that the immediate source of its energy is found 
in the three ganglia of the neck. These ganglia lie in the sphere of 
the basilar region of the brain — the neck. All influences through 
the neck produce animal force and excitement. The thick neck is a 
familiar indication of animal force, passion and strong circulation. 
It has also been recognized as an indication of apoplectic tendencies, 
and very properly, too, for the great cardiac energy drives the blood 
against the brain with a force which becomes destructive. 

The total number of cases of apoplexy from hypertrophy of the 
heart which Dr. Hope had observed exceeded those arising from all 
other causes ; whence he was led to coincide in opinion with MM. 
Bertin and Bouillaud that hypertrophy predisposes more strongly to 
apoplexy than what is termed the apoplectic constitution itself, and 



658 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

that in most cases those who present the apoplectic constitution in 
conjunction with symptoms of determination of blood to the head are 
at the same time affected with hypertrophy of the heart. This opin- 
ion is strongly corroborated by the observation of M. Richerand, 
who states that his repeated examinations of the bodies of apo- 
plectic patients have proved to his satisfaction that the excessive 
power of the left ventricle of the heart more directly tends to the 
production of apoplexy than the short neck and large head which 
according to most writers constitutes the apoplectic constitution. 

In 132 cases, compiled by Dr. Burrows, of apoplexy and sudden 
hemiplegia, 84 were accompanied by diseased heart. 

The famous physician, Cabanis, had three apoplectic attacks and 
died in the fourth. The left ventricle of his heart was an inch thick 
and three times the natural size. 

RELATIONS OF THE LIVER AND SUBJACENT REGION. 

The neurological relation of the liver is with the base of the mid- 
dle lobe, just over the cavity of the ear, extending forward and back- 
ward. When this region is small, the liver is usually inactive. 

I am quite sure that with sufficient observation the connection 
of this inferior portion of the temporo-sphenoidal lobe with the 
abdominal organs would be demonstrated, even with the imperfect 
observation that exists. I believe illustrations could be found by 
any one who had sufficient time for research. 

I have met with a good illustration in Prof. T. M. Rotch's 
report on Diseases of Children in Bosto?i Medical aiid Surgical Journal, 
May 30, 1889. Dr. Rotch says : " A child aged nineteen months came 
under observation for subcutaneous naevus. This was incised, and two 
days later she contracted scarlet-fever. During convalescence the child 
was taken with high temperature and symptoms of peritonitis. She 
died two weeks later. A post-mortem examination showed no trace of 
peritonitis. Venous congestion was found in the anterior third of the 
under and outer' surface of the left side of the brain, and a firm 
clot, the size of a walnut, in the temporo-sphenoidal lobe. The limita- 
tion of the clot was distinct and the brain substance around it was 
firm. It was apparently of recent origin. The left lateral sinus was 
filled in its posterior two-thirds by an organized clot obviously of 
some date. The symptoms in this case were entirely misleading, 
and apart from convulsions on the day of death, pointed strongly 
to peritonitis." 

This is a clear demonstration that the temporo-sphenoidal lobe can 
affect the abdominal organs so far as to counterfeit the symptoms 
of active diseases. 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 639 

The psychic relations of the liver are with the psychic qualities of 
the base of the middle lobe, the tendency of which is to depression 
of spirits, fretfulness, melancholy, hypochondria, irritability, apprehen- 
sion, anger and mental disorders of that character. 

The liver associates, by the laws of pathognomy, with the pelvic or 
hypogastric region, and thus co-operates with its calorific power and 
tendency to mental and nervous derangement. 

The different portions of the liver have different psychic relations. 
The posterior portion associates, from its position, with the jealous, 
aggressive, combative tendencies. Hence the liver is greatly affected 
by the angry passions, and when we provoke a man greatly we are 
said to stir his bile. There is a gradation between the hypochondriac 
portion of the liver in front and the hostile portion at the back. All 
intense excitements in the liver disturb the mental serenity and clear- 
ness and may run to delirium. 

The proximity of the liver to the location marked disease makes it 
a frequent focus of morbid action, and my professor of medical prac- 
tice, whose lectures I attended in 1833-34, had a very simple theory 
that all disease depended on a congestion of the liver produced 
by weakened action of the heart, and was to be removed by hepatic 
purgatives, — calomel, aloes, and rhubarb. Dr. Wilson Philip says : 
" There are few local diseases of which the liver does not more or 
less partake." "Depressing passions often instantly derange its 
function, and seldom fail, if long continued, to affect its structure." 
" It is not uncommon for blows on the head to produce inflammation 
of the liver, an effect they rarely, if ever, produce on any other of the 
abdominal or thoracic viscera." It is generally enlarged by disease 
wherever located, and attains its greatest dimensions from active 
disease in hepatitis, and next to that, according to Piorry's meas- 
urements, in heart disease. In rheumatism, typhus, pneumonia, con- 
sumption, bronchitis and ague it is enlarged on an average fully 
one-third in its linear measurements on the right side. 

The psychic association of the liver with the melancholic and de- 
ranging hypogastric region is illustrated by the anatomical connection, 
as the blood of the intestines goes by the portal vein to the liver. The 
reception of this degenerate blood from fecal regions andrthe prompt 
reception of liquids absorbed from the stomach (especially alcoholic) 
give to the liver a low vital condition, which causes other organs to sus- 
tain it, while it acts, like the ileum, as a scavenger. ' 

The liver furnishes combustible elements to the blood, to maintain 
its temperature, and, like the pancreas, assists in digesting fatty and 
animal foods, which are calorific. In cholera its secretion is sup- 
pressed ; the restoration of which indicates recovery. 



64O PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

The upper and lower surfaces of the liver have different relations, 
according to pathognomy. The upper surface has its relations upward 
with the brain and lungs, by which it produces a cough, a headache, or 
cerebral oppression. The lower surface relates downwards, producing 
nausea and extreme prostration (relating to Disease),, sympathizing 
with the pelvic region of nausea. The difficult breathing and hurried 
respiration appearing in hepatitis are produced by the upper surface 
of the liver. 

" A peculiar symptom of all forms of hepatitis (says Prof. Jones) 
is the great lowness of spirits, with a peculiarly depressed condition 
of the nervous energies, affecting the moral and intellectual faculties, 
so that the individual becomes morose and unsociable." In chronic 
cases he says : " A very striking and diagnostic symptom is the peculiar 
lowness of spirits and gloomy forebodings of the patient. Individuals 
of naturally buoyant and sprightly dispositions are often changed to 
gloomy, morose and desponding hypochondriacs. Those before cheer- 
ful and amiable become cross, crabbed and unsociable, — in short, un- 
dergo an entire change of manner, and apparently of character." 

Dr. Philip says : " All affections of the liver produce depression of 
spirits, hence the name melancholy. In its organic affection, this 
symptom is generally more uniform ; its secretion is also more uni- 
formly deranged. In some cases the patient becomes more or less 
lethargic, the mind at times wandering, and the long-continued irrita- 
tion of the liver occasionally gives rise to some of those states which 
dispose to the different forms of apoplexy. The headaches of bilious 
subjects every one has witnessed." Hydrocephalus he mentions as 
one of the serious effects of the liver on the brain. Another effect is 
difficult breathing and cough, which sometimes becomes permanent. 

No severe disease of the liver can exist without affecting the brain. 
A diseased, yellow and atrophied condition of the liver was reported 
by Drs. Bamberger and Michly in women who were attacked with 
agitation and delirium and died comatose. The spleen in these cases 
was enlarged and softened. 

Delirium tremens is one of the cerebral affections which are largely 
due to the liver. Dr. S. Thompson and Dr. Corf from extensive obser- 
vation in hospitals maintain this view, and have cured attacks by 
vigorous dosing with calomel and cathartics, finding no need for 
opiates. 

The tendency of the upper surface of the liver to affect the lungs 
and brain produces sometimes a pain under the right shoulder-blade. 
The affection of the head is most apt to appear near the median line 
and especially near the coronal suture. Some persons have professed 
to diagnose disease of the liver by finding a tenderness at that spot. 



CHAT. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 64I 

Jaundice, being a state of forced inaction of the liver, has very- 
different symptoms from its active diseases. It may be produced by 
fright, mental anxiety or passion, and as a negative condition is not 
a serious affair; but jaundice produced by disease immediately below 
the liver is a deadly condition, as it involves the region of Disease. 
M. Leudet states that phlebitis of the vena porta produces irregular 
shivering, great prostration, delirium and coma. Portal congestion, a 
symptom of various congestive diseases, is a prostrating influence 
which may alone become fatal, and when overcome by strong 
emetics the relief is great. 

Jaundice alone, being an inactive condition of the liver, produceg 
no disturbance of the brain or lungs, and may coexist with good 
general health ; but active diseases of the liver produce many 
morbid effects, according to the location of the disease in the liver, a? 
pathognomy indicates. 

Prof. Stokes speaks of inflammation at the upper surface of the live* 
as liable to extend to the base of the lungs or resemble pleurisy, and 
requiring similar treatment — he cared not whether the disease had 
passed the diaphragm or not ; but just below the liver the effects were 
entirely different. " Here we come (says Prof. Stokes) to an interest- 
ing and curious fact. You recollect that in speaking of gastro-enteric 
inflammation I alluded to the nature of the accompanying fever, and 
stated that it was commonly of a low character and that there were no 
local inflammations in which the fever was so often typhoid as in affec- 
tions of the gastro-intestiual surface. This, I believe, has been one 
great cause of the ignorance of medical practitioners with respect to 
gastric and enteric inflammations ; they have been most commonly 
looked upon as cases of typhus and treated accordingly." 

Thus there seems to be a morbific or prostrating locality just below 
the liver (where the portal vein brings in the most degenerate blood. 
of the entire circulation) which constitutes the seat of the lowest 
vitality or closest approximation to disease. This explains the deadly 
power of a disease located just below the liver, — yellow fever, — in 
which the liver is not congested, but the stomach is chiefly involved. 

Stokes and Graves describe a gastro-intestinal fever in Meath Hospi- 
tal which proved fatal in the first sixteen cases, some dying in four 
to six hours. Disease near the portal vein brings deadly prostration. 
In inflammation of the stomach, according to Watson, there is fever of 
a low type and a small, weak pulse ; the patient is pale and faint, with 
collapsed features, cold extremities and a damp skin. "In all this 
we see a tendency to death by asthenia?' " The mode of dying in 
these cases is precisely what Bichat describes as death beginning at the 
heart." " Intense inflammation of the stomach may destroy life in 



642 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

twenty-four hours." In this prostration from vital exhaustion the 
pulse is almost or quite imperceptible, and medical aid extremely 
unsuccessful. 

In gastritis, according to Prof. Stokes, "the patient rapidly falls into 
a low typhoid state. There is no form of inflammation, except that 
which accompanies severe peritonitis, in which the typhoid state comes 
on so rapidly. Inflammations of the digestive tube differ in general 
from similar affections of other organs chiefly in this, that prostration 
rapidly supersedes excitement. A patient laboring under inflammation 
of the brain will exhibit for a long time the decided symptoms of high 
excitement, and of what has been termed the phlogistic diathesis. 
Acute pneumonia and inflammatory affections of other parts will go on 
for days, without prostration, and require the use of the lancet ; but 
gastritis is a disease in which the inflammatory symptoms, as they are 
called, last but for a very short time." 

ABDOMEN AND LOWER LIMBS. 

The tendency of the abdominal system to exhaustion, disease, fever 
and death, as taught by Sarcognomy, might be illustrated by volumes ; 
and this tendency remains in the organs after death, as a source of 
infection. Prof. Macartney says (Macartney on Inflammation, p. 62) : 
"The sero-purulent fluid found in the large cavities after death (if no 
means of prevention be employed) seldom fails to infect persons, and 
the most dangerous animal fluid is that contained in the cavity of the 
abdomen after puerperal peritonitis, or the serum found in parts which 
have suffered diffused or gangrenous inflammation." 

We now perceive that the pathological phenomena of the brain, the 
lungs, the heart, the pleura, the liver and the abdomen correspond 
with what Sarcognomy indicates, and if it were worth the trouble one 
might build up a system of Sarcognomy from the facts of pathology 
alone. 

Dysentery and typhoid are diseases of great suffering, — especially 
the former. Sarcognomy shows that the inferior portions of the body 
have strong tendencies to restlessness, gloom, pain and suffering. 
Dysentery, which occupies the lower part of the trunk and often 
extends into the rectum, is a disease of torturing pain as well as de- 
pression. This difference in the upper and lower regions is verified 
in pyaemia. According to Dr. Sedillot " the most common seat of the 
muscular abscess is in the thickness of the muscles of the calf, where, 
though causing great pain, it may produce but little redness or swelling. 
The vast purulent collections occasionally occurring in t»he pectoral 
and deltoid muscles are sometimes only discoverable by attentive 
exploration, so little do the patients complain of them" How great 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 643 

the contrast between the mental conditions of thoracic diseases and the 
prostrating gloom and suffering which begin in the liver and extend 
to all below, showing the maximum of irritation and pain in the gout 
and rheumatism of the lower limbs. 

There is probably no more severe pathological suffering than that 
of the rectum and anus which was experienced by the lower class of 
Irish, in the famine of 1846-7-8, from the impaction of potato skins in 
the bowels. The pain of the rectum and anus was described as pierc- 
ing like a knife, forbidding sleep, and sometimes producing cramps of 
the lower limbs. It was pronounced by women ten times worse than 
that of the severest labor. 

All diseases of the bowels have more or less of the character which 
Sarcognomy assigns to the abdomen, — relaxation, debility, enfeebled 
pulse, prostration, despondency and oppression of the brain, fever 
and a putrescent tendency. Many pages might be filled with illus- 
trations of this, if I were preparing a systematic work. Melaena or 
hemorrhage of the bowels is described by Prof. Wood as follows, 
after speaking of the feelings of oppression, dejection of spirits, languor, 
weakness, and pale, sallow or dingy complexion : " A patient in this 
condition is unexpectedly affected with griping pain, nausea, in- 
creased paleness, and more or less giddiness, faintness, depression of 
pulse, and weakness of the extremities, attended by a discharge from 
the bowels, which on examination proves to be blood of a black color, 
very offensive, and otherwise altered in character. In some instances, 
again, the hemorrhage comes on without any premonitory symptoms, 
and the evacuation from the bowels and its attendant depression are 
the first obvious signs of disease. This depression is sometimes ex- 
treme, and the patient may sink beyond the point of reactio7i. Sudden 
p7'ostration and death have occurred without any evacuation." 

" Next to diseases of the brain (says Dr. E. H. Dorland) no other 
class of ailment is capable of producing the amount of physical and 
mental suffering, systemic functional disturbance and general ner- 
vous debility, as are diseases of the rectum." The chief pathological 
relation of the abdomen is to fever, to which each of the viscera 
contributes its peculiar share, according to the laws of Sarcognomy. 
I had written a full exposition of fevers as viewed in the light of 
Sarcognomy, which they illustrate, but do not deem it expedient to 
introduce the essay in this volume. 

The contrast between the upper and lower portions of the human 
body is very great. The bosom, the seat of love, is highly attractive, 
and is offered to the beloved object. The nobility of the form lies in 
the development of the chest. The odors of the bosom and axilla are 
pleasant. The lower end of the trunk, the region of the buttocks, 



644 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVL 

is associated only with ideas of aversion arid disgust and unpleasant 
odors. Diseases involving the lower part of the trunk are not only 
painful and distressing but offensive. The most offensive portion of 
the cutaneous surface is that between the toes. The climax of offen- 
sive disease is reached in the neighborhood of the sacrum, which con- 
trols the leg and foot, in certain conditions of the rectum. This was 
most forcibly illustrated in the Irish famine after 1846, when the rec- 
tum in many peasants became obstructed with potato skins, requiring 
mechanical removal. Dr. Popham, of the Cork North Infirmary, 
says, after describing the condition and severe sufferings of these 
patients : " Another sign which we considered almost pathognomonic 
of this ailment was the peculiar fetor emanating from the patient. 
It is impossible to describe this offensive smell by comparison, as it 
was altogether sui generis, presenting nothing of the natural feculent 
odor of the evacuations. It appeared to us more like the effluvium 
from a combination of vegetable and animal matters in an advanced 
stage of putrescence. Its insupportable nature to the stomach may 
be judged from the fact that during the measures necessary for the 
relief of the patients, the nurses of the Infirmary, though habituated 
to disagreeable smells, could not abide this putrid and disgusting odor, 
without being seized with retching. Its rapidity of diffusion was also 
remarkable, the air of the whole hospital becoming quickly saturated 
with it. When the senses have once taken cognizance of it the unfor- 
tunate person can be at once detected amongst a host of applicants 
for relief." 

The lower limbs being associated with the base of the trunk and 
the basilar region of the brain brings them into close connection with 
animal life as well as its offensive elements. Hence the danger of 
amputation and injuries, which is greater in proportion as they 
approach the seat of Vital Force on the thigh. The report of three 
hundred amputations at Guy's Hospital, London, for 1859, shows that 
thirty per cent of the amputations of the lower limbs resulted fatally, 
and but ten per cent of the upper limbs. In traumatic amputations 
of the lower limbs sixty per cent were fatal. 

Intense stimulation of the lower limbs has great power to rouse 
the dormant vitality of the base of the brain. 

The relation of the lower limbs to the brain is not realized by phy- 
sicians generally as it should be to enable them to relieve the head 
and chest. It was well enforced by Prof. Stokes, in his lecture on 
Encephalitis, as follows: "You will meet with cases of cerebral 
inflammation in the last stage, with profound coma, general paralysis, 
an imperceptible pulse and tracheal rattle. It is a melancholy thing 
to be called to a case of this description, where the ordinary means 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 645 

furnished by medicine are so inadequate to the removal or even the 
alleviation of symptoms, and yet it is a fact that even under these cir- 
cumstances cases have been cured by the adoption of an extraordinary 
measure. This consists in the employment of enormous and sudden 
counter-irritation, by pouring boiling water over the lower extremities, 
while at the same time ice is applied to the head. This is certainly 
an extraordinary and barbarous method, but it has succeeded in 
rescuing the patient as it were from the jaws of death. One of the 
most singular cases of this kind is recorded by Lallemand — that of 
a man upwards of sixty, who in consequence of a fall on the head 
was attacked with encephalitis, which was mistaken for an essential 
fever until the tenth day. At this time he was first seen by Lalle- 
mand, who found him laboring under severe and long-continued syn- 
cope ; the right extremities flexed ; the hand firmly closed ; the 
surface on this side insensible ; the eyelids closed ; the eyes turned 
up, squinting and insensible to light ; complete loss of hearing and 
intelligence. The body was covered with a cold viscid sweat ; the 
respiration frequent and stertorous, and the pulse absent. Lallemand 
proposed pouring boiling water on the ankles, and at the same time 
applying ice to the head, which was consented to with great reluc- 
tance by the other medical attendants. At the moment the boiling 
water was applied there was a sudden motion of the whole body; the 
left arm was agitated, the eyes opened, and the pulse could be felt at 
the wrist. In half an hour the boiling water was applied to the thighs 
with still greater effect, — color returned to the face and the pulse 
became fuller. From this time improvement went on. Deep, sup- 
purating wounds were produced by the boiling water, which took 
more than six weeks to cicatrize. The patient's recovery was per- 
fect. In Dr. Mackintosh's work you will find this practice recom- 
mended." 

Dr. H. E. Greene of Kentucky reports a severe and protracted 
case of epilepsy in a negro, defying all medical treatment, which was 
suspended after he fell in a fit and burned badly the whole of the 
bottom of the left foot. During four months his fits ceased and his 
health was good, but the fits returned after the foot was healed. 

SYMPATHIES OF THE PELVIC REGION. 

The inferior pelvic region of the body, corresponding to the under, 
jaw region of the head (covering the interior basis of the middle lobe) 
is the antagonist of that portion of the brain at the temporal arch, just 
behind a vertical line from the ear, which sustains the tone of the 
brain and entire nervous system, and has therefore been called Sanity. 
The inferior pelvic region, the antagonist of Sanity, tends to general 



646 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

unsoundness or insanity, as it prostrates the entire nervous system 
when it becomes the controlling element, — by which I mean suppress- 
ing" its opposite. It must be borne in mind that no function of any 
organ is evil in its normal action in association with its opposite. Evil 
exists only when the balance is destroyed. 

As this location is in the body, its effects are chiefly physiologi- 
cal derangement and exhaustion, but by inevitable sympathy they im- 
pair and derange the brain and nervous system. Unsoundness of mind, 
erroneous judgment and unwise impulses are very common conditions, 
but it is not until reason is completely overpowered that the term in- 
sanity is used. 

Every physician knows how completely the constitution of the male 
is destroyed by sexual excesses,* and how completely uterine derange- 
ments prostrate the nervous system of woman. In other words, any 
considerable irritation located in the lower pelvic region, and thus con- 
centrating the vital action in that direction, drawing it away from 
the tonic regions of the constitution, is fatal to nervous integrity. The 
general experience of the medical profession would sanction this 
statement, but the most remarkable illustrations of its truth have been 
recently furnished by Prof. E. H. Pratt of the Chicago Homoeopathic 
Medical College, in his work on orificial surgery. That he should ex- 
aggerate the truth is not surprising and does not diminish the value 
of his instructive experience. Prof. Pratt boldly asserts that : " In all 
pathological conditions, surgical or medical, which linger persistently 
in spite of all efforts at removal, from the delicate derangements of 
the brain substance that induce insanity, and the various forms of neu- 
rasthenia; to the great variety of morbid changes repeatedly found in 
the coarser structures of the body, there will invariably be found 
more or less irritation of the rectum, or the orifices of the sexual sys- 
tem, or both. In other words, I believe that all forms of chronic dis- 
eases have one common predisposing cause, and that cause is a nerve 
waste occasioned by orificial irritation at the lower openings of the 
body. These irritations induce a rigidity of the sphincters guarding 
the parts, which either continues, sympathetically affecting the rest 
of the involuntary muscular system, and steadily draining the nervous 
power that supplies it, until the whole struggle terminates in a rigor 
mortis, or, tiring out in the hopeless grip, relaxes into the inertia of 
paralysis." 

As these statements (though too sweeping as to the origins of dis- 

* Lallemand (on spermatorrhoea) expresses it forcibly by saying, " I regard sperm- 
atorrhoea as the true cause of all the cases of hypochondriasis, ischuria and debility 
which are attributed to affections of the urinary organs. This position is proved, I 
think, by the weakness and rare occurrence of erection, the rapidity of ejaculation and 
the increased fluidity of the semen observed in most of these patients." 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 647 

eases) appear to be sustained by his cases, the question naturally arises. 
Why do irritations in this locality have these tremendous deranging 
effects on vitality, so different from the effects of irritations elsewhere? 
Dr. Pratt's explanation is the best he could derive from the common 
physiology, but Sarcognomy replies that the vital forces or functions 
have special locations for all these tendencies and capacities, and there 
is a definite law for their location, which embraces a system of antag- 
onism or opposite tendencies. According to these laws animal force 
and intensity or violence of action increase as we descend in the brain 
and body — the base of the brain and the base of the trunk having 
the maximum of violent force, which is exhausting and injurious when 
predominant, while the summit of each have their maximum of gentle- 
ness and stability of vital action, which is happy in its tendency. 

Sensibility, increasing as we descend, attains its maximum in the 
head at the base of the middle lobe, where Ferrier demonstrated its 
location in the monkey, about thirty years after I had discovered it in 
man. Passional violence and force also increase along with sensibility, 
but occupying a more posterior location, as in the human constitution 
power is behind and sensibility before. The maximum sensibility 
that gives pleasure is found in the sexual apparatus, and the intensity 
of this overrules all other human motives, so that it stimulates ani- 
mals to battle and often stimulates men to murder even the innocent 
object of their passion, as well as competing rivals. 

Of course painful distutbances in this region are more overwhelm- 
ing than such disturbances anywhere else, and I recollect that Dupuy. 
tren, the famous French surgeon, expressed the opinion that laudanum 
was three times more effective in the rectum than in the stomach. 

There are two locations relating to sensibility in the brain, and 
two corresponding locations in the body. The most familiar location 
is at the base of the middle (or temporo-sphenoidal) lobe, just above 
the level of the zygoma (cheekbone), a location which I discovered in 
1837-38, and which has of late been illustrated by Ferrier's experiment 
on the monkey, abolishing sensibility by injuring the base of the brain. 
There is another correlative location, the external avenue to which is 
just below the prominence of the chin and the internal location at the 
medulla oblongata. This is correlative with the temporal organ, but 
differs materially. The temporal organ has an intellectual character, 
and gives us knowledge of objects touched or felt ; the posterior organ 
is not intellectual, but produces a peculiar excitability and intensity of 
feeling, which acts upon the emotions and passions instead of the in- 
tellect. The corresponding locations on the body are, for the tempo- 
ral organ the epigastric region, nearer to the sternum than the umbili- 
cus, where any one can verify the sensibility by proving with a sudden 



648 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

pressure that it is the seat of the greatest sensibility in the body, as the 
opposite region, the shoulder, is the seat of the greatest hardihood. 
The lower organ has its representative, in Sarcognomy, below the um- 
bilicus at a space corresponding to the womb. Hence uterine excite- 
ments (especially in hysteria) develop a remarkable exaltation and per- 
version of sensibility, both physical and moral — giving rise to a great 
variety of diseases or quasi diseases, which are not organic, and which 
disappear in a marvellous manner by mild or even mental agencies 
properly applied. Hyperesthesia is especially the characteristic of 
hysteria, of which the etiology and pathology were elaborately devel- 
oped in the classical work of Prof. Schutzenberger. He shows that dis- 
ease of the ovaries is a very prominent but not universal cause, and 
that pressure on the ovaries may induce pain and convulsive action. 
Hyperesthesia is the special indication of hysteria. According to M. 
Bricquet this hysterical hyperaesthesia is located in the muscles, and 
felt immediately beneath the skin, where very slight pressure or 
scratching will produce very great pain. This symptom was present in 
all but twenty of four hundred hysterical women. It has often been 
maltreated from not understanding its. nature as due to hysteria. 
Schutzenberger speaks of this as a pathological condition, the mate- 
rial element of which is unknown ; but there is no such material ele- 
ment as he seeks, — exaltation of the uterine nerves is entirely sufficient, 
or the corresponding nervous cause may be in the medulla oblongata. 
In this state very slight electro-magnetic currents become intolerable, 
and they are all cases in which the gentle manual treatment prescribed 
by therapeutic Sarcognomy is promptly efficient. Hyperaesthesia about 
the head is found in about nine-tenths of these cases ; and also hyperaes- 
thesia of the muscles of the back is frequently found, but five times more 
frequently in the lower than the upper part of the back, and much more 
often on the left side than the right. This must not be confounded 
with disease of the spine. 

A very remarkable fact is the close sympathy between the two loca- 
tions of Sensibility on the body, producing epigastralgia as a common 
symptom of hysteria, — being observed, according to M. Bricquet, in 
317 out of 358 hysterical subjects. The two organs in the brain, accord- 
ing to the fixed laws of cerebral science, are correlative, co-operative 
and similar. Being thus co-operative in action on the brain, we should 
expect a similar co-operation and sympathy in the body, which is veri- 
fied by the epigastric pains just stated in five-sixths of the cases of 
hysteria reported by M. Bricquet. This epigastralgia is produced, ac- 
cording to M. Bricquet, not only by fully developed hysteria and men- 
strual derangements, but by depressing moral emotions, as in girls sub- 
jected to unkind treatment. The pain is continuous and severe, and 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 649 

may be aggravated by emotion, but is not affected by digestion, and he 
condemns the mistake of treating this as an affection of the stomach or 
solar plexus. It tends more to the left than the right side. The study 
of the brain explains this emotional relation, as the organ of Sensibility 
is closely connected with that of emotional excitement. 

This hyperesthesia and epigastralgia have been sadly misunderstood 
heretofore, and thus allowed to continue through life, wearing out the 
patient, making active occupation intolerable, and bringing on emaci- 
ation and premature old age. M. Bricquet affirms the ease with 
which it is relieved, and every magnetic healer finds it under his 
control. 

The pleuritic extension of this pain has been mentioned, and M. 
Bricquet speaks of it as extending, after epigastralgia, in a semi-circle 
from the fifth to the eighth ribs, chiefly on the left side. The hyperes- 
thesia of hysteria produces intense pain and sensibility to pressure, but 
is free from inflammation, and differs materially from rheumatism and 
neuralgia and is much more easily relieved. Its dependence on the 
sexual system, which is the seat of the greatest sensibility, is further 
illustrated by the remark of Dr. Garratt (the electrician) that "there is 
not a question that habitual indulgence in mere thoughts of venery 
may also produce it, and much more the habitual excess." Thus we 
perceive the two correlative organs in the brain are thoroughly illus- 
trated by their correspondences in the body ; and a complete investiga- 
tion would show that all organs which co-operate or antagonize in the 
brain have,~in their somatic organs, as shown by Sarcognomy, a similar 
co-operation or antagonism. 

Sarcognomy indicates that the lower pelvic region is the seat of 
physiological insanity or derangement, corresponding to cerebral in- 
sanity, capable of deranging every bodily function, and of this Prof. 
Pratt has given many new illustrations of great value. He states 
that dilation or stretching of the sphincter ani, including its internal 
portion, will produce a greater effect upon a patient in anaesthesia 
than any other operation, as it causes an oppression and almost entire 
paralysis of breathing, if done with force. " A similar effect (he adds) 
is often seen in the use of sounds in the sexual organs, but it is not so 
marked or so constant." It may be added that the same degree of 
force is not used. 

He gives the sympathy of involuntary fibres, contracting and 
relaxing, as his explanation "why orificial work has such instantane- 
ous and truly marvellous effects upon the entire circulation, warming 
at once all parts that before were abnormally cold, and cooling parts 
that were abnormally hot, starting, as if by magic, functions that had 
been long dormant, and subduing those that had been abnormally 



65O PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

active ; in a word, more or less completely re-establishing uniformity 
of circulation and function." 

These results attained by a successful surgeon fully establish as a 
practical therapeutic doctrine the principle of Sarcognomy that the 
lower pelvic region is the source of nervous derangement for the body 
and that by removing its irritations we may restore the normal and 
more vigorous action of the nervous system. I feel much indebted 
to Dr. Pratt for giving this demonstration of what I have long known 
to be true, but he is mistaken in limiting explanation by the term 
orifices. " Orifices " exist and occupy a great part of the space, but 
it is not really necessary that the irritations should be in the orifices, 
to produce deleterious effects. The injurious effects arise and obtain 
their maximum at the inferior pelvic region, and analogous effects are 
developed as we approach that region, whether in the sacrum, the 
bladder, the womb, or the lower small intestines, in which we have the 
cause of the very deranging effects seen in typhoid. The extreme 
mobility and irregularity of the nervous system under the influence 
of the womb approximates closely to the phenomena of insanity,* and 
even counterfeits a great variety of diseases which are explained when 
we find that they belong to the protean condition of hysteria. 

That the lower pelvic pain produced in the rectum should almost 
suspend respiration is explained by the close connection of the pelvic 
region with the higher emotions, which give expansion to the chest. 
Love ever agitates the respiration and expands the lungs when in- 
tense, and sexual love belongs to the region from the sacro-lumbar 
junction to the external genitals, in the exercise of which respiration 
is greatly affected. 

* The connection of uterine disease and mania was illustrated by Dr. Lever in Guy's 
Hospital Reports (Oct., 1849), by a case xn which a woman who had borne six chil- 
dren was subject to melancholy, insomnia and religious delusions, fearing eternal 
damnation, with an increase of the symptoms at catamenial periods. Treatment in 
an asylum, not directed to the uterine condition, had not relieved her. The uterus 
was enlarged somewhat, ante-verted, deeply congested, with granulations and strong 
pulsation in its bloodvessels, and discharging a thick mucus. Cupping the sacrum 
and local treatment of the uterus, including leeching, restored her to health and san- 
ity. Dr. L. reports a similar case, and states his conclusion that insanity some- 
times depends on disease of the sexual organs and may become permanent unless 
they are treated, and that at the close of the treatment counter-irritation over the 
sacrum will be a valuable auxiliary. 

" Simple feverishness in nervous subjects or in those whose brain is kept in a con- 
stant state of activity will often occasion delirium. Violent pain may also cause 
it. Some organs seem also to have the privilege of being in their diseases accom- 
panied by this symptom. The ruomb is one of those. In some instances of painful 
and difficult menstruation, the patients are delirious at each period. Others become 
partially insane at the beginning of pregnancy, and puerperal mania has been met 
with frequently by all those who have given much attention to the practice of mid- 
wifery." — Andral : Lectures on General Pathology. 

In cases of Abortion artificially procured, Majendie says that he has ascertained 
that serious mental disorders or incurable mental alienation often follow — in other 
cases, horrible sufferings, abdominal neuralgia, etc., arise, which are as bad as death 
itself. 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 65 1 

The most remarkable feature of Dr. Pratt's operations is their sim- 
plicity and success. Mechanical dilation of the anal region, removal 
of rectal pockets and hemorrhoidal tumors, and the introduction of 
sounds into the genital organs have been his main reliance, though 
he has also used electric, pneumatic and homoeopathic medical treat- 
ment quite judiciously, as I infer from his language, but to what ex- 
tent he has relied upon them is not apparent from his brief mono- 
graph. 

To give the full force of Dr. Pratt's testimony, his entire book 
should be quoted. I will venture, however, to quote the very brief 
statement of the character of each case and the mode of treatment. 

Twenty cases are reported by the author, embracing " Nervous 
prostration," " Insanity and insomnia with constipation," "Secon- 
dary syphilis" (two cases), "Nervous prostration, followed by cough, 
hectic fever and night sweats," " Constipation, — congestion of the 
liver, following operation," "Articular inflammation," "Albuminuria,'* 
" Hyperaemia of the liver," "General debility with complications," 
" Rheumatism, dropsy and heart failure," " Jaundice," " Chronic bron- 
chitis, nervous prostration, slight paralysis agitans and rheumatism," 
"Melancholia," "Hydrocephalus," " Chronic diarrhoea," "Priapism," 
"Supra and infra-clavicular abscesses," "Abscess with infiltration of 
pus," and " Abscess of the groin." 

The operations in these cases were stretching the sphincter, removal 
of rectal pockets, removal of rectal papilla, passage of urethral 
sounds, dilation of the uterine canal, excision of piles, dilation of the 
uterus by sounds, cauterizing of rectal ulcer, circumcision, and removal 
of remains of hymen. The brief reports of the cases are very interest- 
ing and are corroborated by thirty-two similar reports from other physi- 
cians. I would mention his case of melancholia: "A stout, heavy 
man, aged forty-seven, afraid of everybody and everything ; has not 
left his room for months, and yet presenting no organic lesion ; 
bowels regular." A contracted sphincter and four rectal pockets 
were discovered and treated, and a contracted prepuce slit and sound 
passed. Result : perfectly cured in three weeks, though "he had been 
under the care of doctors, more or less, for ten years." 

The most marvellous examples are the two cases of syphilis, cured 
without medicine, by removal of rectal pockets and papilla and passing- 
sounds. These cases show the wonderful recuperative power of the 
nervous system when relieved from the lower pelvic irritation which 
prostrates its power, and the importance of looking for hypo-pelvic 
irritations when the recuperative power of nature is inefficient. Thev 
give additional force to the teaching of Sarcognomy that in all cases 
of insanity and paralysis the hypo-pelvic region should be investigated 



652 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

and should be subjected to tonic treatment for the sympathetic effects 
on the brain. This will produce a new era in the treatment of insanity. 
Positive currents from the perineum to dorsal spine summit and to 
the axilla will become a leading element of treatment in addition to 
surgical and medical measures. 

Of the cases reported as treated and cured by orificial surgery in 
this volume, there were twelve cases of chronic headache combined 
with various other symptoms, two of neuralgia, one of blindness, one 
of paralysis, one of hydrocephalus, one of priapism, one of melan- 
cholia and two of insanity, — twenty-one neurological affections in the 
fifty-two cases. 

It is to be observed that the sympathy between the body and the 
brain varies greatly in different constitutions. In those impressible 
individuals upon whom I have made the most satisfactory experiments, 
the sympathy is very close and the brain responds promptly to every 
experiment on the body. But in those whose sensibility and impres- 
sibility are moderate the brain is much less affected by bodily condi- 
tions and the body itself is less affected by external influences and 
by mental conditions. The sensitive nervous system brings soul, 
brain and body into closer communion with each other, as well as closer 
communion with the influences of nature, art and society, so that 
they are more amenable to treatment, whether it be medical, nervau- 
ric or psychic. When the nervous sensibility is below par, mental 
influence is of less importance and treatment requires to be more 
strictly local. 

I have referred to these cases because they make so striking and 
practical a demonstration of what is taught by Sarcognomy and con- 
firmed by all relevant pathological history — the increasing intensity 
of functions as we descend in the trunk, and the antagonism of these 
intense functions to the orderly action of the brain, although they 
may, under control, act in harmony with it to intensify or strengthen 
its action. The sexual power, which is so destructive in its riotous 
excess, is one of the most important elements in lending its intensity 
to invigorate both love in its passionate strength and courage in its 
passional energy. 

An illustration of this intense sensibility in morbid conditions is 
shown in sensitive urethral caruncles, which are described in the 
Columbia Hospital Report of 1873, as follows : 

" If we except fissure of the anus, there is no disease of so trifling 
a magnitude, productive of so much intense suffering as irritable 
caruncle. I have known women who would bear the pains of child- 
birth without a murmur shrink from the necessity of urinating, and 
put it off until the bladder became over-distended, and when finally 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 653 

compelled to pass water, their groans revealed the excruciating ago- 
nies they endured. Prof. Simpson reports the case of a shepherd's 
wife who had one of these sensitive caruncles at the orifice of the 
urethra, and whenever she was obliged to pass water was in the habit 
of going some distance from her cottage, in order that she might 
moan and scream unheard, so intense and intolerable was the suffer- 
ing." 

The influence of these pelvic irritations (which are not confined 
to orifices but occupy a large space), in deranging the entire nervous 
system, has innumerable illustrations, and is familiar to physicians. 
Prof. Stokes, referring to this, says : " If the encephalitis be 
caused by the suppression of bleeding piles or a sudden checking 
of the menstrual flux, leeches to the anus or vulva are found useful." 

A good illustration of the exhaustive influence which may be 
developed in the iliac and inguinal regions is shown in a case reported 
by Dr. Geo. Johnson of malignant disease affecting a retained testicle 
in the abdominal cavity. The disease produced considerable pain, 
and the patient (a tutor at College) began to lose flesh and strength. 
A tumor appeared above Poupart's ligament on the right side, which 
then rapidly extended to the median line, producing great emaciation 
and exhaustion, and death in about a month from its appearance. 

This exhaustion and emaciation are equally conspicuous in dysen- 
tery and typhoid. In this case the mental symptoms were not 
reported. 

Dr. Wm. Cumming, F. R. C. P. E., described, in the Medical Gazette 
of December, 1849, a disease located in the lower bowels and accom- 
panied by the discharge of a peculiar membranous, fibrinous matter 
from the bowels, which are alternately constipated and relaxed — in 
some uniformly costive. There is frequently a discharge of blood in 
evacuation, and a sense of exhaustion afterwards. The evacuation is 
generally painful. They have a fixed pain in the left iliac region 
(or sometimes the hypochondriac, or both), of a gnawing, irritating 
character, sometimes acute and severe. The pain in the course of 
the colon is increased an hour or two after the taking of food, and is 
temporarily relieved by the counter-irritation of a mustard plaster. 

The patients look emaciated and anxiotts, with a peculiar and char- 
acteristic expression. " In all there is more or less nervousness, 
greatly increased towards night, inducing sleeplessness, and when 
towards morning sleep does come on, nightmare is frequent — dreams 
(generally of an unpleasant nature), invariable. One lady was 
troubled with spectral illusions." Prof. Simpson found the com- 
mand of language in such cases very much impaired, but Dr. C. says 
in many cases this symptom is absent. 



654 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

"When the affection has been of long duration the mental irrita- 
bility is very great, and, what is more painful still, the patient's views 
and feelings are perverted and 'distorted" The disease often originates 
in drastic purgation, and is more common in females than in males — 
often accompanied by dysmenorrhea. 

Dr. C. found all the cases easily cured by omitting aperients and 
using electro-galvanism between the spine and iliac region, aided by 
tar internally — the galvanism regularly overcoming constipation and 
dispersing the morbid conditions. These cases show clearly the 
tendency of the iliac region to depression, exhaustion, and mental 
impairment and derangement. 

The effect of hypogastric diseases on the brain and the connection 
of this region with the liver (to which the venous blood from the 
intestines is carried) are illustrated in Dr. Prout's work on the 
"Stomach and Urinary Disorders," p. 75, as follows: "Excessive 
acidity of the cecum is generally accompanied by a deficient secretion 
of bile, and sometimes by a complete temporary suppression of the 
bilious discharge, apparently from spasmodic constriction of the com- 
mon gall duct, or it may be of the biliary ducts themselves. In this 
state of things all individuals feel more or less of uneasiness ; but the 
point we wish to mention is that certain individuals, under these 
circumstances, experience what is called a nervous JieadacJie. This 
species of headache is frequently accompanied by nausea, is confined to 
the forehead, and, when severe, produces complete intolerance of light 
and sounds, and a state of mind bordering on delirium. After a 
greater or less period, the pain ceases, sometimes quite suddenly ; 
and the remarkable circumstances to be mentioned here are: that this 
sudden termination is preceded by a peculiar sensation (sometimes 
accompanied by an audible clicking noise) in the region of the gall 
duct ; that immediately afterwards a gurgling sensation is felt in the 
upper bowels, as if a fluid was passing through them ; and that, in a 
few seconds, when this fluid, which we suppose to be bile, has reached 
the cecum, the headache at once vanishes like a dream. One of the 
greatest martyrs to this species of headache I have ever seen invaria- 
bly experiences the train of symptoms above described, and I have 
witnessed it in a greater or less degree in many instances ; indeed I 
have experienced it in my own person." 

What are the psychic and physiological effects of rectal irritation 
by impacted materials was shown in Ireland, and reported by Dr. 
Popham of the Cork Infirmary in the Lancet of June 19, 1850. The 
patients were suffering from impaction in the rectum of potato skins 
and matter of diseased potatoes, producing great internal tenderness 
and an erysipelatous ring of two or three inches around the anus. 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 655 

There was a peculiar offensiveness of fetor emanating from the 
patient, compelling those around him to nausea or vomiting, but sel- 
dom any nausea or vomiting in the patient — the appetite not being 
affected — the site of the irritation being remote from the small intes- 
tines and stomach. In some feeble subjects there was prostration 
and chilliness of the surface ; in those of more sanguine temperament, 
the surface was hot and perspiring. The pulse under irritation seldom 
rose above ioo, and fell back when the irritation was relieved. The 
pain was sometimes worse than that of parturition. 

A notable moral symptom in this disease is the recklessness of the 
patients and their disregard of decency. As to the mental condition 
of such patients, it fully illustrated the low animal condition associated 
with the region of the sacrum. Dr. Popham said : " They are unable 
to rest in any position, but throw themselves about without seeming 
much to regard either personal injury or the natural restraint imposed 
by the presence of others." Some of the persons are very intractable, 
requiring to be held down by force, while under treatment ; and, 
maddened by pain, they seem not indisposed to follow the example 
of Horace's patient, " cum fit pugil, et medicum urget." 

All irritations at the base of the trunk disturb the brain. Dr. Roe- 
ser reported in a German journal, in 1859, a case in which the coc- 
cyx of a woman was separated from the sacrum and forced to the 
left. Pain extended up to the neck and arm, and she could not move. 
Her countenance was distorted, and there was " confused headache and 
some mental distzirbance" When it was restored by pressure she 
'felt as if roused from a dream and all her pains vanished." * 

Even at the head of the thigh we have this disturbing influence. 
In Malgaigne, on fractures, it is stated that "extra capsular fracture, 
like the other variety, may involve much more serious dangers ; too 
often, whether from the shock occasioned by the external violence, 
or from some unfortunate predisposition of the patient, there ensues 
nervous delirium, or intense fever of the adynamic type, which sooner 
or later terminates fatally." In cases progressing unfavorably after 
the first dangers are over, " the pain about the seat of the injury per- 
sists ; ©edematous swelling of the affected limb, and sometimes even 
of the sound one, occurs ; a slow fever undermines the strength, im- 
pairs the appetite and disturbs the sleep ; and in hospitals there appear 
occasionally, also, symptoms of scurvy." The tendency of severe 
injuries at the summit of the thigh must necessarily be adynamic. 
Wounds and surgical operations in that region are very fatal. 

* " Hoffman mentions a boy, who, after a blow on the sacrum, was seized with a 
violent convulsive affection, nearly resembling tetanus, with loss of memory, diffi- 
cult articulation and delirium. The complaint continued with great severity for five 
days, and afterwards returned at nearly regular periods for six months." — Abcrcrom- 
bte y p. 281. 



656 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

In the region of the womb we find an exalted sensibility, tending 
to mental irregularity, sometimes approaching insanity, and tending 
strongly to imaginative deception. Dr. Watson says the deceptive 
appearances displayed in the bodily functions and feelings find their 
counterpart in the mental. Dr. Prout says the whole energies of the 
patient's mind are bent on deception. 

Hysteria, which has been called the Protean disease from its vast 
variety of symptoms, appears to be an exalted sensibility and excita- 
bility associated by some recondite law with the imagination so as to 
produce a fantastic play of conditions which give a dramatic imitation 
of insanity, convulsions of various kinds, and almost every form of 
disease, — the dramatic imitation being often so perfect as to deceive 
spectators and even puzzle physicians. 

It is often difficult indeed to tell to what extent the diseases of 
women are the products of organic trouble, or of the nervous condi- 
tions which belong to the hysteric temperament and appear or dis- 
appear with but slight, if any, organic cause. We may have a variety 
of convulsions resembling epilepsy and tetanus, we may have apparent 
diseases of the joints and contractions of limbs, apparent palsies of 
every variety, coughing, vomiting, haematemesis, haemoptysis, inflamed 
breasts, hiccoughs, spinal diseases, pains of every variety, and even 
quasi inflammations. 

What does it all mean ? Simply exalted sensibility, and impressi- 
bility, liable to experience extreme effects from slight causes, and to 
be controlled by mental conditions, but lacking in self-control. 

How is this produced ? The sensibilities, increasing as we descend 
in the body, attain an extremely high development in the sexual sys- 
tem, of which the womb is the chief element in woman. This uterine 
sensibility, belonging to a portion of the medulla oblongata, is by 
the law of Pathognomy associated with the portion of the brain just 
above the cheekbone, which is the region of sensibility, and impressi- 
bility, and which might be called an involuntary region, as it has the 
minimum degree of will-power, or rather antagonizes the will, and 
subjects the individual to any transient influence. This sensitive 
region is closely associated in action with the region of Imagination, 
Versatility and Pliability, which gives the Protean capacity of realiz- 
ing any mental condition; just as, in the occiput, Firmness is associated 
with Combativeness in resisting every external influence. No woman 
with much Firmness and Combativeness will be controlled by hys- 
teria. 

The womb is a part of the pelvic or hypogastric apparatus which 
deranges the nervous system. But unlike the other hypogastric 
organs, which belong to the destructive, feverish, wasting and exhaust- 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 657 

ing apparatus, and leave their effects visible in exhaustive emaciation, 
gloom, suffering, fever, insanity and death, the womb belongs to the 
ascending group of developing functions, and consequently the victims 
of hysteria are neither feverish, insane, gloomy nor emaciated, but pre- 
sent generally a plump and pleasing appearance which contradicts 
their dramatic display of diseases. 

The bladder and rectum, which belong to the class of downward 
acting expulsives, dealing only with the offensive and injurious, have 
terrific effects when they are the seat of irritations ; and the male gen- 
itals, differently constituted, have much more pernicious liabilities than 
the female, as Pathognomy indicates. 

In inflammation of the bladder we have general fever (though the 
bladder is not so closely associated with calorification as the ileum), 
accompanied by prostration, anxiety and restlessness. The pain, 
extending to the perineal and rectal regions and even into the 
abdomen, is often accompanied by nausea. The bowels are irritated 
and deranged. It ultimates in great cerebral depression, with a dull, 
stupid, typhus condition, with a pale, cadaverous countenance, deli- 
rium and coma, and sometimes convulsions. 

The bladder is next to the region of complete mental derangement, 
and coincides with lethargy, which we locate at the pubes. Hence 
its dull, drowsy influence. 

In chronic cystitis there is "fever, anxiety, restlessness and gene- 
ral distress," " the strength gives way, rapid emaciation takes place, 
and the patient dies, in a hectic state, worn out." 

Spasm of the bladder produces a feeble pulse, pale surface, some- 
times cold perspiration, with " great restlessness and general distress." 

Of all physiological functions the sexual are those which have the 
greatest power over the mind. In their normal action, under the 
control of the higher faculties, they sustain love, hope, and imaginative 
brightness of the intellect, which they develop as puberty comes on ; 
but in their abnormal or disordered condition their action is reversed, 
and in their excess they are debasing and destructive, like all unbridled 
and controlling action of the lower half of the body. In this they are 
like the other functions of the lower half of the spinal cord — the mus- 
cular functions which use the lower limbs. In their normal action, 
subordinate to the higher powers, they give force to the character, en- 
ergy to courage, and ability to endure severe exertion. In their ex- 
cessive action they tend to brutalize the character and exhaust the 
entire nervous system, producing prostration and death, with de- 
fibrinized blood, by over-exertion. 

Dr. Bell observes, very justly, that " there cannot be derangement of 
function in any part of the animal economy, without some change in 



6$S PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

the disposition, mood or mind of the individual. But in no case is 
this fact so strongly exemplified as in either congenital or acquired 
defects of the genital organs." " Love and all its associations would 
be for an eunuch what song and orchestral accompaniments are to 
a deaf-mute — things unfelt and unappreciated except by analogies " — 
a statement which shows the unnatural folly and mischief of those 
systems of religious fanaticism which war against the Divine wisdom 
of the human constitution, by endeavoring to ignore or suppress an 
indispensable portion. 

" Can there be, for example (says Dr. Bell), a greater contrast in the 
disposition, feelings and general frame of mind between a young girl 
suffering under chlorosis and uterine atony and the same person a 
year afterwards, with rich blood coursing through her heart and limbs 
and new vitality in her uterine organs ? " Even the suspicion of im- 
potence, he says, sometimes causes persons to keep aloof from society 
with feelings of aversion or suspicion degenerating into misanthropy. 

The portion of the body between the sacrum and coccyx behind 
and the os pubis in front is the portion which corresponds to the re- 
gion of mental derangement in the brain, productive of fierce insanity, 
mania, idiocy, dementia, paralysis and lethargy, and adjacent to hyste- 
ria and melancholy. On the body melancholy appears in front of the 
hips, and hysteric excitability between the pubes and navel. From this 
location it appears that the excessive excitability which in the brain 
makes the liability to insanity and idiocy occurs in the body where 
the sexual organs, rectum, prostate gland and nerves proceeding 
to the lower extremities are located. From the latter we may derive 
the animation and wild energy of passion, which belong to insanity, 
while from the sexual functions we derive the animation and excite- 
ment of normal life, as well as the utter prostration, wretchedness, 
imbecility and paralysis which they produce in their unrestrained, ex- 
cessive activity. The insane tendencies of the rectal and anal regions 
are shown in the reports of orificial surgery and the conditions of the 
Irish patients described by Popham. 

The reader will observe, however, that the body is not the organ 
of the soul, but the organ of physiological functions ; consequently, 
the rage, the animalism, the delusion, melancholy and imbecility of 
which we speak, in the body, are not its own functions under irritation, 
but its effects upon the brain, and unless the brain is affected they are 
simply corporeal results of an analogous character — derangements of 
the higher functions of the nervous system in the body, as shown in 
many diseases and so well illustrated in the reports of orificial surgery. 

In the brain the most posterior part of the deranging region pro- 
duces wildness of excitement and turbulent rage, with terrible energy 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 659 

— the most anterior produces Lethargy. So, in the body, the most 
posterior portion corresponds with the nerves supplying the genitals* 
and the lower extremities, which produce wild, restless muscularity, 
without intelligence ; and the most anterior portion corresponds with the 
pubic surface, over the bladder, which produces the dull, lethargic or 
comatose condition attributable to urea (the most narcotic element in 
the body), and the sexual action which rapidly destroys cerebral and 
nervous power. 

The reader may well imagine my surprise in discovering the exter- 
nal localities of such functions in the body as Sarcognomy reveals 
(though my surprise was diminished by their previous recognition in 
the brain), and this surprise was not removed until I could perceive an 
anatomical and physiological basis for the discovery in the facts that all 
parts of which Sarcognomy reveals the tendency have an interior struc- 
ture and operation precisely adapted to realize the psycho-physiological 
tendencies revealed by Sarcognomy. 

Of the insanifying effects of the sexual organs we see ample il- 
lustrations, which would require a large volume to portray them, 
in the fierceness and warfare among animals in their amative season 
(the rutting season of deer), in the jealousies and combats among 
men, in the murders prompted by disappointment in courtship or jeal- 
ousy in marriage, in the total prostration, demoralized and wrecked 
lives of profligate libertines, the hopeless mental prostration and ruin 
produced by masturbation and by the abandoned licentiousness of both 
sexes. The first French book I ever read — Tissot on Onanism — was 
a frightful record of the ruin produced by this vice, the terrible con- 
sequences of which are too well known to need repetition here; suffice 
it to say that physiology and pathology clearly show that the base of the 
trunk, when it has undue influence on life, works the destruction of 
the whole nervous system of the body, as the corresponding region 
of the brain works the destruction of the mental and moral faculties by 
its unbridled excess, although in its symmetrical normal action, as 
an assistant to the higher powers, it is as necessary and valuable as the 
powers of locomotion and calorification. 

In the female sexual system the influence of the womb is less ab- 
normal in its excitement, and I have already 'spoken of its derang- 
ing influence in hysteria as less destructive than the irritations behind 
and below it. But the womb in its abnormal and downward condi- 
tions becomes the bane of woman's life in dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia 
and misplacement. Its position is, according to Pathognomic law, a 
barometer of woman's condition, and when it goes down her whole 

* Sir Astley Cooper savs that in cases of irritable testes the pain produced by 
touch is felt in the back and groin. 



660 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. -XXVI. 

life goes down with it, as her whole life is elevated in the latter stages 
of gestation, to be prostrated again by its downward expulsive action 
and the consequences thereof; a critical and tragical time, which may 
result in prostrating and dangerous disease — in puerperal fever, which, 
being associated with a region of maximum sensibility, has the maxi- 
mum degree of contagiousness. The typhus fever, which plays upon 
the brain, produces such contagious energy that a single approach to 
the bedside has sometimes resulted in an overpowering contagion and 
speedy and fatal attack. Puerperal fever is still more contagious, be- 
cause it belongs to the region of maximum sensibility, and physicians, 
with every possible precaution of disinfection, sometimes carry the dis- 
ease from one patient to another. I have even a stronger record in 
the case of a physician, Dr. Huntley of Jarrow-on-Tyne, described in 
the British Medical Journal, February, 1875, who had a remarkable ex- 
perience of persistent contagion that was truly marvellous. Puerperal 
fever broke out in his practice and seemed to be confined to his patients. 
Changing his clothes, bathing, etc., failed to prevent the contagion, and 
he went to Ireland, staying there six weeks to dissipate the contami- 
nation ; but in the first two or three cases on resuming practice the in- 
fection reappeared, and he gave up this branch of his practice to a 
substitute in whose practice no puerperal fever appeared. He thought, 
therefore, that the toxic influence might be associated with his per- 
son. This could not be established, however, unless he had entirely 
laid aside his former clothing. At any rate it illustrates the intense 
sensitiveness and susceptibility of the uterine region, which is also 
illustrated in the familiar fact that hysteria is contagious, and when 
one case appears in a female hospital it rapidly spreads, whether by 
mental or physical sympathy. It is illustrated, too, in the extreme im- 
pressibility of the gestating female, which affects the condition of her 
offspring, and in the contagious diffusion of superstitious fanaticism, 
with its wild, hysterical actions, due to the hysterical element in both 
sexes. 

The puerperal fever has more serious consequences than hysteric ex- 
citement, as it is liable to run into puerperal mania. It frequently runs 
into a wild, incoherent and furious character, but very seldom into de- 
mentia. 

The deranging influences of the external genitals of the male, in 
their disorders, are better understood of late. Abnormal states of the 
glans and prepuce in children are sometimes connected with aphasia as 
their cause, which is explicable only by the fact that the larynx corre- 
sponds with the location of the organ of Amativeness in the brain, and 
is associated in its development with sexual puberty. 

Dr. A. A. Camp, basing his views chiefly on the^experience of Dr. 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 66 1 

L. A. Sayre of New York, says : "In many children, partial paralysis, 
lack of power of co-ordination and apparent idiocy, are dependent, in 
a great part at least, upon some irritation of the genital organs. In 
males this is sometimes clue to a constriction around the glans penis, 
producing continual priapism, the result of which is wasting and ex- 
haustion of the nervous system, sufficient to produce more or less 
paralysis, and in some instances a complete loss of speech and vision. 
In girls, on the other hand, much the same results are produced by an 
irritation of the clitoris, which is not uncommon. All kinds of treat- 
ment for such cases are utterly useless, unless we recognize and remove 
the cause of the irritation. ... Of course this condition presents 
itself to us in all degrees of severity, from one of simple irritation to 
that of complete constriction of the prepuce, and so its symptoms will 
also vary." 

" Prominent among the most marked cases are the following symp- 
toms : Sometimes the patients are to all intents and purposes idiotic. 
They are neither able to speak nor walk, nor to feed themselves ; 
sometimes they are blind. On account of falling, and reflex convul- 
sions of the extremities, the disease, by an inaccurate observer, might 
be called epilepsy. The patient usually sits cross-legged, and in some 
there presents such a rigidity of the tendons that it is almost impossible 
to produce flexion of the legs. Certain phases of this deformity have 
been mistaken by even astute observers, who have been on the point 
of operating for a*club-foot." 

Dr. Sayre was once called by the famous Dr. Sims to operate up- 
on a boy of five years (who was unable to walk from his knees being- 
placed at an angle of 45 degrees) and " perform tenotomy upon his 
hamstring tendon." Dr. Sayre discovered that it was not a contrac- 
tion of the flexors, but paralysis of the extensors, and therefore, instead 
of cutting, had him subjected to the galvanic current, in doing which 
he found the penis tender, erect, and imprisoned in the contracted pre- 
puce. Touching the orifice of the urethra produced a convulsive move- 
ment and orgasm. Circumcision was performed, the glans uncovered 
and the parts soon restored to their natural condition, and the child 
fully restored in three weeks without any other treatment than this 
operation. A psychometric observer would not have made the mis- 
take of Dr. Sims. 

Dr. Sayre mentions a case of hip disease in a boy, which apparently 
had no other cause than the state of the prepuce and irritation of the 
glans penis. 

Dr. Camp relates the case of a boy of about four years, in whom there 
appeared to be congenital paralysis of the lower limbs, as he had never 
used them, and also paralysis of the sphincters, resulting in involuntary 



662 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

discharge of urine and faeces. He found the penis in semi-erection, 
and notwithstanding a previous circumcision, which did some good, 
there was adhesion at the corona glandis, which he dissected away and 
healed the wound. He quickly recovered the control of the sphinc- 
ters, and was very slowly regaining the use of his lower limbs. 

I need not dwell upon the horrors of syphilis, to illustrate any fur- 
ther the pernicious energy of sexual disorders in the destruction of 
the integrity of the nervous system — a mischief which is the more 
widely and terribly diffused on account of the great sensitiveness and 
consequent contagiousness attached to the sexual system ; a law 
which is efficient in establishing sympathy, unity and harmony in the 
conjugal relation, and also efficient in diffusing evil, in demoralization; 
disease and misery. 

SYMPATHIES OF THE LIMBS. 

The upper and lower limbs are parallel and analogous in their rela- 
tions — those of the upper limbs being on a higher or more psychic 
plane. 

The arms sympathize with the trunk according to their parallelism, 
— the ^humerus with the chest, the forearm with the abdomen, the 
wrist and hand with the pelvic region. Hence we affect digestion and 
assimilation by the internal surface of the forearm, and calorification 
and sensibility by the wrist and hand. It has long been known that 
we may produce coolness by plunging hands and wrists in cold water, 
and that their warmth has a diffusive influence. Dr. Reeves of West 
Virginia has utilized this principle by applying cold water to the 
wrists in typhoid fever, which readily reduced the temperature. He 
passed the cold water through rubber tubing wrapped around the 
wrists. 

The control of all inflammatory diseases, especially of the head and 
chest, by diversion to the region below the knees, has been fully illus- 
trated in the chapter on Pneumatic treatment ; but the psychic rela- 
tions of the thigh and leg require a fuller illustration. 

Passing below the region of the evil passions, sensuality and insanity, 
at the base of the trunk, we reach the region of muscularity and tur- 
bulent impulse on the thighs, which is controlled by the lower portion 
of the spine, the seat of the evil passions, which find their executive 
instruments in the lower limbs. Turbulence is the most comprehen- 
sive term for the thighs, and this becomes more violent as we 
descend the thigh, reaching its maximum of violence at the knees, 
from which we may expect the most violent and uncontrollable dis- 
plays of temper. Below the knees the same blind animalism exists, 
with less and less of intelligence as we descend to the foot, in which 
intelligence disappears. 



CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 663 

The passionate character of the thighs is well illustrated in the 
history of gout and rheumatism. "The gouty patient (says Watson) 
is apt to be excessively dejected and hypochondriacal, morbidly atten- 
tive to every bodily feeling, disposed to exaggerate his sufferings, and 
apprehensive of the worst event." " In the head, occur pain, giddi- 
ness, transient affections of the vision and of the hearing, threaten- 
ings of palsy and apoplexy." 

" How few are the men (says Dr. Ashburner) who acquire gouty 
habits, who do not lose the power of calm reasoning. They are 
notoriously an irritable race. Their irritability often leads them to 
conclude that every one is wrong except themselves. No matter if 
you can bring abundant evidence to prove the insanity of their con- 
duct, it is of no avail." 

While irritative diseases develop this passionate violence, injuries 
of a different character, free from inflammation, produce a different 
effect, as I realized last year by a severe fall on the knees, which pro- 
duced a great impairment for some weeks of all the energies of mind 
and body. Dr. J. A. Roberts reported in the Eclectic Medical Jotmial 
of October, 1887, a case of swelling in the thyroid and parotid glands, 
accompanied by a painful swollen knee, which produced a sullen, 
crabbed state of mind, so that "he could scarcely speak, unless asked 
a question," and the doctor " had hard work to gain his confidence." 
But after opening the gland, discharging its pus, and aspirating four 
ounces of fluid from the knee, he " became quite talkative," and 
"anything I wished was cheerfully granted." 

The great changes of deportment and sentiments in patients are 
explained by the nature and location of their diseases to those who 
understand Sarcognomy. 

Pain is itself an irritating element, but in other parts of the body 
it may be accompanied by fortitude or resignation ; but in the foot, 
which is the site of the first attack of gout, the irritation is accompa- 
nied by the violence of the lower limbs and the unreasoning or anti- 
cerebral character of the foot. This local disturbance deranges the 
balance even of strong constitutions; but if we would realize fully the 
character which Sarcognomy recognizes in each spot, we must have a 
constitution sufficiently weak, sensitive and impressible to surrender 
to the control of the local excitement. In such a case the mind may 
be entirely perverted by an irritation in the foot, as in a case reported 
by Dr. Anderson of idiocy and violence produced by an injury of the 
foot and the tibial nerve, the irritation of which extended up the thigh. 

Dr. James Anderson of New York reported in the N. Y. Medical and 
Physical Journal of December, 1822, a case of prostration of the intel- 
lect from an injury of the foot affecting the anterior tibial nerve. The 



664 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION [CHAP. XXVI. 

patient, G. T., a lad of fourteen years, of plethoric habit and nervous 
temperament, "received an injury on the top of the foot from a stone 
thrown with violence by one of his playmates." The injury was 
attended to, but appeared unimportant until eight or ten weeks later, 
when pain and swelling occurred and were treated by Dr. Kissam with 
fomentations, saturnine applications, and, as the pain increased and 
irritation extended, frequent blisters, "saline cathartics and other 
purgatives," and "large anodynes " were used without success. The 
pain extended up the trunk of the nerve, affecting the adjacent mus- 
cles with spasms, " the pulse increased in frequency and force," 
"though the digestive organs performed their duty with wonted 
regularity if not increased strength." 

The pain now extended above the knee and was very severe; bella- 
donna, cicuta, assafcetida, gave no relief. The great toe was drawn 
at right angles by the extensor pollicis, and any attempt to return it 
produced great suffering. 

"At about three months from the time of the accident the whole 
system became involved in these spasmodic irritations, and his ner- 
vous energy enfeebled. The common sensorium was disturbed : he 
lost his reasoning and recollection, was unable to distinguish occa- 
sional visitors, or recognize even his parents or any members of the 
family ; his mind became imbecile and idiotic ; he was deprived of the 
ability to read or distinguish the lettei's of the alphabet. As the pain 
extended up and beyond the thigh it spasmodically affected the muscles 
of respiration, and at the invasion of each paroxysm of suffering his 
breathing became more frequent and labored. This frequency of 
respiration was generally the first indication of approaching exacerba- 
tion. Though his distress was most acute, he gave no utterance to his 
feelings. While the paroxysms were on him he would roll his fist and 
imitate the actions of a pugilist, but with much greater violence and 
rapidity, often striking his nearest and best friends and all around 
him. If no person was in reach of his arms, the force of his actions 
would be lost in the air." The violent actions and excited respira- 
tion belong, according to Sarcognomy, to the lower part of the thigh. 

It was determined finally to divide the tibial nerve. An incision 
was made on the outside of the tibia, about four inches above the 
ankle, and about an inch of the nerve cut out. The toe then resumed 
its place, the local affections soon ceased, the wound healed, and his 
health of body and mind was restored. 

Something slightly analogous to this was related by Brown-Sequard 
in his lectures, on the authority of C. DeMorgan, as follows : 

" A lad aged fourteen as he was getting up in the morning was 
heard by his father to be making a great noise in his bedroom. On 






CHAP. XXVI.] OF SARCOGNOMY. 665 

the latter rushing into the room, he found his son in his shirt, violently 
agitated, talking incoherently, and breaking to pieces the furniture. 
His father caught hold of him and put him back into bed, when at 
once the boy became composed, but did not seem at all conscious of 
what he had done. On getting out of bed he had felt somethi?ig odd, 
he said, but he was quite well. A surgeon who was sent for found 
him still reading quietly, with a clean tongue and cheerful counte- 
nance, and wishful to get up. He had never had epilepsy, but had 
enjoyed good health hitherto. He was told to get up ; but on put- 
ting his foot on the floor and standing up his countenance instantly 
changed, the jaw became instantly convulsed, and he was about to 
rush forward, when he was seized and pushed back onto the bed. 
At once he became calm again, said he had/*?// odd, but was surprised 
when asked what was the matter with him. He had been fishing on 
the previous day, and having got his line entangled had waded into 
the river to disengage it, but was not aware that he had hurt his 
feet in any way, or that he had even scratched them. ' But in holding 
up the right great toe with my finger and thumb, to examine the sole 
of the foot, the leg was drawn up, and the muscles of the jaw were 
suddenly convulsed, and on letting go the toe these effects instantly 
ceased.' 

" There was no redness, nor swelling, but on the bulb of the toe a 
small elevation, as if a bit of gravel, less than the head of a pin, had 
been pressed beneath the cuticle. On compressing this against the 
nail cautiously, a slight convulsion ensued ; there was no pricking 
when pressed, but he said something made him feel very odd. The 
slightly raised part was clipped away, no gravel was found, but the 
strange sensation was gone and never returned." 

Here I must pause in this hasty pathological illustration of Sarcog- 
nomy, although the theme is not half exhausted. Time does not 
permit a fuller exposition at present, and the readers of this volume 
care less for these illustrations, which are not really needed, than for 
the full development and practical application of the science. To 
those who do not know the absolute certainty of Sarcognomy as 
a science, and have made no experiments for its illustration, it is 
probable that the facts of pathology may be useful in relieving them 
from the feeling of uncertainty which embarrasses the approach to a 
new and revolutionary doctrine in science. 

It is true that a full development of the facts of pathology would 
of itself organize a system of Sarcognomy in the mind of a clear 
thinker, and there may be those whose minds are so engrossed in 
pathological studies, and so averse to the experimental methods that 



666 PATHOLOGICAL DEMONSTRATION. [CHAP. XXVI. 

illustrate Sarcognomy, as to prefer that kind of evidence, of which 
there is a great abundance already in medical literature, and a still 
larger amount will appear when the human constitution and its 
diseases shall have been studied in the light of Sarcognomy. 

CONCLUSION. 

In presenting this brief abridgment of what I had intended saying 
of the pathological illustration of Sarcognomy, I trust the reader will 
accept it, not as the demonstration of the doctrine, but merely as a 
hint or indication of the wealth of illustrative facts which may be 
adduced, which would fill several vermes, and which, if I should no 
have time to collect and present them, will, I trust, be presented by 
some of the indefatigable devotees of science. Every day of the year 
there are facts enough developed among millions of patients to make 
a demonstration entirely complete and satisfactory of all the doctrines 
pf Sarcognomy. When the science becomes known, these facts will 
no longer be neglected. 

The ease with which experiments upon the brain and the body may 
be. made by any intelligent person according to my methods, the con- 
sciousness of the action of the different portions of the brain which 
any sensitive person may attain in studying the sensations of his own 
head, and the innumerable illustrations of Sarcognomy observable in 
disease will make the subject so clear to intelligent inquirers, that the 
wonder will be, hereafter, how anything so plain and so accessible could 
have been so long overlooked and its first scientific announcement 
received with such absent-minded indifference, owing to the mental 
perversions of a false education and the self-satisfied enjoyment of 
old theories, with a thoughtless unconsciousness of the vast realms of 
knowledge upon which mankind are slowly entering. This work, I 
hope, may be the means of stimulating the sincere and fearless lovers 
of beneficent science to explore still farther the boundless realm to 
which it has opened the way, which will be enjoyed by thousands 
when the hand that pens these lines shall have vanished from earthly 
scenes. 



GLOSSARY 



Of Unfamiliar Words, which Readers Unfamiliar with 

Scientific Language are Advised to Peruse 

Before Reading this Volume. 



Abiogenesis — production of life without 
prior life (now considered impossible). 

Ablation — taking away, as in cutting out 
parts of the brain. 

Acephalous — without a brain. 

Achromatic — without color (applied to 
glasses which refract light without pro- 
ducing colors). 

Actinism — the active chemical power of 
light. 

Acupuncture — treatment by puncture 
with a needle. 

Adjuvant — assisting. 

Albumen — the substance of the white of 
an egg and the serum of blood (found 
also in vegetable substances). 

Albuminoid — similar to albumen. 

Alimentation — supplying with food. 

Alvine — relating to the intestines. 

Amaurosis — blindness from paralysis of 
the optic nerve. 

Amceba — a minute microscopic living 
body which moves and changes its 
form. 

Amceboid — similar to amoebae. 

Amenorrhcea — deficiency of the menses. 

Amorphous — without shape. 

Ampere — a certain amount of electric 
force equal to one volt of power passing 
through one ohm of resistance. 

Anastomose — to unite with another 
tube, as when two arteries connect. 

Anelectrotonous — the condition of a 
nerve produced by entrance of a posi- 
tive current. 

Angular gyrus — see gyrus angularis. 

Anaesthesia — suppression of sensibility. 

Anaesthetic — capable of producing an- 
aesthesia. 

Anaemia — deficiency and poverty of the 
blood. 

Aneurism — a morbid enlargement of an 
artery. 

Anode — the entrance of a current of elec- 
tricity. 

Anodyne — pain relieving. 

Antiphlogistic — antagonistic to inflam- 
mation. 

Antiseptic — opposed to putrefaction. 

Antithesis — opposition or contrast. 

Aorta — the largest artery of the body, 
proceeding from the heart. 



Aphonia — loss of voice. 

Aphasia — loss of language or speech. 

A priori — reasoning before knowing the 
facts is called the a priori method. 

Assimilation — appropriating to the liv- 
ing body. 

Asphyxia — stopping of breath, as from 
drowning, hanging, etc. 

Athlete — one well trained and strong. 

Atonic — lacking tone or strength. 

Atrophy — loss of flesh. 

Atropine — the active element of bella- 
donna. 

Auricle — one of the cavities of the heart 
that receives the blood. 

Ascultation — listening (with a stetho- 
scope, commonly, to explore disease). 

Axilla — the cavity under the shoulder. 

Bacilli — microscopic substances in the 
blood supposed to produce disease. 
They are regarded as vegetable infu- 
soria. 

Bacteria — minute bodies found in de- 
composing or morbid fluids, generally 
about the ten-thousandth of an inch 
long. 

Basilar — belonging to the base. 

Bichromate of potash — a combination 
of chromic acid with potash. 

Bifurcation — forki ng. 

Bifurcated — forked or divided. 

Bioplasm — the living matter from which 
the tissues of the body are formed. 

Bougies — slender instruments which are 
introduced into the urethra. 

Cadaveric — appertaining to a corpse. 

Caisson — a frame or box used under water 
in bridge building; also a box for am- 
munition in war. 

Caloric — the element or force which pro- 
duces heat. 

Capillary— the adjective applied to a 
minute hair-like tube. 

Capsule — a small cap, cover or seed ves- 
sel. 

Carbohydrates — compounds of carbon 
and hydrogen. 

Carbon — a simple substance, nearly pure 
in charcoal, entirely pure in the dia- 
mond. 



66S 



GLOSSARY 



Cardiac — relating to the heart. 

Caries — decay of bones. 

Carotid — the name of an artery in the 
neck, carrying blood to the head. 

Carnification— making flesh. 

Catalepsy — a sudden suspension of sen- 
sibility and voluntary motion. 

Ca i electrotonous — the nervous condi- 
tion produced at the negative pole. 

Cathode — the vicinity of the negative 
pole. 

Caidate — with a tail. 

Cellular— composed of cells. 

Cephalic — relating to the brain. 

Cerebellum— the little brain beneath 
the cerebrum and behind the ears. 

Cerebrum — the chief mass of the brain, 
with surface composed of convolutions. 

Cervical — relating to the neck. 

Chorda tympani — the name of a nerve 
of the seventh pair going to the tym- 
panum. 

Chorea — an agitating or convulsive dis- 
ease commonly called St. Vitus' dance. 

Chylopoietic — relating to the formation 
of chyle in the digestive organs. 

Cilia — very minute hair-like bodies that 
have a vibratory motion. 

Cilio-spinal — relating to a dorsal por- 
tion of the spinal cord, which affects 
the iris. 

Coagulate — to curdle or solidify albu- 
minous liquids. 

Coherence — adhering together; consis- 
tency. 

Collocation — placing 'together. 

Coma — unconsciousness and oppression of 
the brain. 

Commissure — a structure • that unites 
other parts (a term used in the anatomy 
of the brain). 

Commutator — that which changes or re- 
verses. 

Complement — that which completes. 

Concomitant — that which goes with it. 

Convoluted — composed of convolutions. 

Cornea — the anterior part of the eyeball. 

Coronal — pertaining to the upper sur- 
face. 

Corpuscle — a minute particle. 

Corrigent — correcting. 

Corpora striata — the striped bodies; 
white and gray substances just behind 
the front lobe, which send fibres to the 
spinal system. 

Corpus callosum — the firm body of 
white fibre connecting the right and 
left hemispheres of the cerebrum. 

Crepitant — crackling or snapping. 

Crural — relating to the thighs. 

Cuneus — a portion of the occipital lobe 
of the brain at the median line, corre- 
sponding to the upper part of the occip- 
ital bone. 

Decussate — to cross, as do the anterior 
fibres of the medulla oblongata. 



Defecation — discharging the contents 
of the bowels. 

Deltoid — the name of the shoulder 
muscle that lifts the arm. 

Diagnosis — discovery of condition in 
disease. 

Diaphragm — the thin muscle at the 
base of the lungs which pulls them 
down for inspiration. 

Diaphoresis — perspiration. 

Divagation — going astray. 

Dorsal — relating to the back. The dor- 
sal vertebrae of the spine extend from the 
neck to the loins. 

Dynamometer — an instrument to meas- 
ure strength. 

Dysmenorrhea — diseased, painful, dis- 
orderly menstruation. 

Electrode — that through which electric- 
ity passes. 

Electrolysis — decomposition by electric- 
ity- 

Electrolytic — pertaining to electro- 
lysis. 

Electro-magnetism — magnetism pro- 
duced by electricity. 

Embrocation — a liquid remedy applied 
to the surface. 

Embryo — the first rudiments of an ani- 
mal or plant. 

Empirical — guided by experience (some- 
times applied contemptuously to those 
not guided by scientific doctrines). 

Ensiform cartilage — the lower end of 
the sternum or breastbone. 

Epigastrium — the surface over the stom- 
ach. 

Epithelium — the cuticle covering a mu- 
cous membrane. 

Expiratory — relating to expiration. 

Extensor — that which extends (applied 
to muscles that extend the limbs). 

Fahrenheit — the name of the inventor 
of the thermometer in common use 
among the English nations. 

Faradic — developed by Faraday (ap- 
plied to the electric action produced by 
induction). 

Femur — the thigh bone. 

Fcetus — the unborn infant. 

Fibril — a delicate fibre. 

Fibrous — composed of fibres. 

Fibrillary — of a fibrous nature. 

Flexors — the term applied to muscles 
that bend the limbs. 

Gallic acid — an astringent acid found 
abundantly in the gall nut. 

Galvanoscope — an instrument to show 
galvanic action. 

Galvanized — treated with a galvanic cur- 
rent. 

Ganglion— an enlargement in the course 
of a nerve; also a tumor on a tendon. 



GLOSSARY. 



6O9 



Gangrene — mortification or death of the 
tissues. 

Gelatinous — similar to gelatine. 

Globule — a very small round body. 

Granules — little grains. 

Gyrus angularis — a convolution of each 
occipital lobe midway from right to 
left and from upper to lower margin. 

Hebetude — dulness; stupidity. 

Helix — coils of wire used in a battery. 

Hemiplegia — paralysis of one side of 
the body. 

HvEMOSPASiA — control of the blood by 
atmospheric pressure. 

H^emostasis — control of the blood by 
ligatures. 

Hemorrhage — loss of blood. 

Hemorhoids — piles (tumors near the 
anus). 

Haemoptysis — spitting blood (hemor- 
rhage from the lungs). 

Hepatic — relating to the liver. 

Hepatization — acquiring a solid texture 
like the liver. 

Homogeneous — of a uniform constitution. 

Humerus — the arm bone from shoulder 
to elbow. 

Hydrangea — as a medicine a tonic for 
the kidneys. 

Hydrastis — or golden seal; a powerful 
tonic, especially for mucous membranes. 

Hydrocephalus — water on the brain. 

Hydrogen — a simple element; the light- 
est of gases, a constituent of water. 

Hydrotherapia — water cure (treating 
diseases with water). 

Hygiene — the science of health. 

Hyoscyamus — henbane (an anodyne ner- 
vine). 

Hyperesthesia — excessive sensibility. 

Hypertrophy — overgrowth. 

Hypnotism — properly, producing sleep; 
but improperly applied to producing a 
passive state and controlling the mind 
by suggestion. 

Hypochondria — the space at the base of 
the ribs ; the mental condition which 
that portion produces. 

Hypogastric — a term applied to the 
lower part of the abdomen. 

Hypophosphite — a substance partly com- 
posed of hypophosphorous acid, united 
to a base. 

Hypostatic — caused by stagnation or a 
lower position. 

Hypothesis — a supposition or theory. 

Ileum— the lower intestine between je- 
junum and colon. 

Ilium — the hip bone. 

Induction — the effect of an electric cur- 
rent in producing another current in 
adjacent bodies. 

Inertia — the tendency to remain in a 
fixed condition either of rest or motion. 

Influx — inflowing. 



Infusoria — microscopic animalculx 
found in infusions. 

Inspiratory — relating to inspiration or 
taking breath. 

Insulated — separated from other things 
(applied in electricity to bodies sur- 
rounded by non-conductors). 

Integument — the skin or covering. 

Jugular — the name applied to the large 
veins in the neck, carrying blood from 
the head. 

Lancinating — tearing; lacerating. 

Leyden jar — a glass used to hold static 
electricity, having one charge on the 
inside which keeps a similar charge on 
the outside. 

Locomotor ataxy — a dangerous disease 
of the spinal cord interfering with the 
control of the muscles. 

Lumbago — a rheumatic affection of the 
muscles of the loins. 

Lumbo-sacral — applied to the junction 
of the lumbar vertebrae with the sa- 
crum. 

Luxation — dislocation of a bone. 



Mammae — the female breasts. 

Marasmus — wasting away. 

Mechano-therapy — curing by mechan- 
ical means. 

Median — the middle; between. 

Medulla — the marrow; medulla oblon- 
gata (the oblong head of the spinal 
marrow in the base of the skull). 

Membrane — a skin-like tissue composed 
of fibres found in the interior of the 
body, either mucous, serous or fibrous. 

Meningeal — relating to the meninges or 
membranes of the brain. 

Meningitis — inflammation of the mem- 
branes around the brain. 

Miasmatic — of the nature of miasm or 
malaria. 

Micro-organisms — very small living 
bodies. 

Milliampere — the thousandth part of an 
ampere or electrical current. Ten mil- 
liamperes are an efficient galvanic cur- 
rent. 

Molecules — the smallest particles into 
which bodies may be divided. 

Mucous — of the nature of mucus, a viscid, 
glairy fluid on the surface of internal 
membranes. 

Nascent — being developed. 

Nates — the buttocks. 

Neophyte — a new convert. 

Nervaura — the emanation of the nervous 
system. 

Neurasthenia — exhaustion of the ner- 
vous system. 

Neurine — the matter of which the ner- 
vous system is composed. 



.670 



GLOSSARY. 



Neurological — relating to neurology, 
the science of the nervous system. 

Nucleus — a centre with some degree of 
density, around which matter gathers 
or organizes. 

Nymphomania — uncontrollable sexual im- 
pulse in a woman. 

Occiput — the back part of the head. 
Occipital — relating to the occiput. 
GEsophagus — the tube in the throat 

through which we swallow. 
Oleaginous — of an oily nature. 
Optimistic — disposed to recognize only 

the hopeful aspect of a subject. 
Osseous — bony. 
Osmosis — the passage of a fluid through 

a membrane or porous partition. 
Ovum — an egg (or the vesicle from which 

animal life originates). 
Ova — plural of ovum. 
Oxygen — the gas in the atmosphere that 

sustains life. 
Oxidizable — capable of being oxidized 

or rusted. 

Papillae — minute projections containing 
nerves. 

Parietal — from parietes (the side walls) ; 
the name applied to the skull bones 
of the middle superior and upper lateral 
part of the head. 

Parenchyma — the substance of animal 
organs, distinct from the bloodvessels. 

Pathognomy — the science of the expres- 
sion of feeling or impulse (a mathemat- 
ical science). 

Pathological — relating to disease. 

Pelvis — the cavity between the hips, 
sacrum and pubis. 

Periphery — the part remote from the 
centre. 

Periscope — a comprehensive general 
view. 

Peristaltic — a term applied to the con- 
tractile movement of the intestines. 

Peritonitis — inflammation of the peri- 
toneum. 

Pia mater — a fine membrane on the sur- 
face of the brain. 

Pineal gland — a small nervous structure 
lying on the tubercula quadrigemina, at 
the origin of the optic nerve. 

Plastic — capable of being moulded in- 
to form. 

Pleurisy — inflammation of the pleura 
which invests the lungs. 

Plumule — the expanding germ of a plant. 

Pneumogastric — the name of a nerve go- i 
ing from the medulla oblongata to the 
lungs and stomach. 

Pneumonia — inflammation of the lungs. \ 

Pneumatology — the science of the soul. j 

Polypi — the plural of polypus (a tumor 
named from the animal polypus). 

Ponderable — capable of being weighed 1 
or having weight. 



Popliteal— relating to the popliteal mus- 
cle, a flexor muscle from the upper end 
of the thigh to the tibial bone. 

Potential— possessing power. 

Precordial— before the heart. 

Priority— being before. 

Protein— a general term applied to such 
a compound of carbon, oxygen, hy- 
drogen and nitrogen as is found in an- 
imal substances generally. 

Protoplasm— organized matter capable 
of life (a conception similar to protein). 

Psora — a cutaneous disease or itch. 

Puberty — sexual development. 

Radicle — a small root. 

Ramollissement — a French word for 
softening (usually applied to the brain). 

Rationale — a reasonable explanation. 

Recurrent — running back. 

Regimen— regulation or mode of living. 

Reophore — a current bearer in electric- 
ity- 

Rheostat — a current obstructor. 

Rhonchus — a rattling, wheezing sound 
in breathing. 

Rigor mortis — the stiffness of death. 

Sacrum — the bone forming the end of 
the spinal column. 

Sanative — promoting health. 

Satyriasis — excessive sexual impulse in 
a man. 

Sciolism — superficial, incorrect knowl- 
edge. 

Sensorium — the part that recognizes sen- 
sations (usually applied to the brain.) 

Serous — of the nature of serum (also ad- 
plied to membranes which are not mu- 
cous.) 

Serosity — a serous fluid. 

Siesta — a short sleep in the afternoon. 

Solar plexus — a mass of ganglionic 
nerves below the diaphragm, near the 
spine. 

Somnambulism — literally, sleep-walking ; 
a dreamy condition in which the subject 
has much intelligence and intuition. 

Somniloquence — speaking in the som- 
nambulic condition. 

Soporific — capable of producing sleep. 

Sorbefacient — promoting absorption. 

Spermatozoa — the animalcular moving 
bodies in semen. 

Sternum — the breastbone. 

Striata — literally striped. The corpora 
striata are the nervous substance just 
behind the front lobe from which mus- 
cular impulses proceed. 

Synthesis — putting things together. 

Terra incognita — a Latin expression 

for an unknown land. 
Thalami— the first large expansion of the 

ascending fibres of the brain, above the 

medulla oblongata and pons. 
Therapeutic — heal i ng. 



GLOSSARY. 



671 



Thoracic — relating to the thorax. 

Thorax — the portion of the trunk con- 
taining the ribs. 

Tibia — the principal bone from the knee 
to the foot. 

Tox ic — poisonous. 

Trachea — the windpipe in the neck. 

Translucent — allowing light to pass 
through. 

Traumatic — relating to or caused by 
wounds. 

Trifacial — the name applied to the three- 
branched nerve of the face, or fifth 
pair. I 

Tubercle — a small deposit of devitalized ' 
substance occurring in various parts of 
the body, chiefly in the lungs. 

Turgid — swelled or bloated. 

Tympanitic — showing a flatulent dis- 
tension of the abdomen. 

Ulna — the chief bone of the forearm. 
Unstriated — not striped (a descriptive 

term applied to the structure of the vol- | 

untary muscles). 

Vertebra — one of the bones that make 
the spinal column or backbone. 



Vitreous body — the clear fluid in the back 
of the e\e. 

Vascular — composed of vessels. 

Vasomotor — moving or controlling the 
vessels (a term applied to the minute 
ganglionic nerves which govern the ar- 
teries). 

Ventricle — one of the muscular portions 
of the heart which propels the blood. 

Vibriones — the infusoria developed in 
putrefying animal fluids, not materially 
different from bacteria. 

Vesicle — literally a minute cell or bladder. 

Visceral — relating to viscera, the soft or- 
gans in the trunk. 

Volition — the art of willing or deter- 
mining. 

Vivisection — cutting up living animals. 

Vortices — plural of vortex, place of a 
whirling movement of fluids similar to 
an eddy or whirlwind. 

Viscera — organs in the trunk, abdominal 
and pulmonary. 

Zona pellucida — pellucid zone (the 
transparent ring surrounding the yolk in 
the centre of the ova of mammalian 
animals). 



pHRAG/V/ 



CAVITVO.' \ 

PEBITONtUIVl 

PANCREA3 
DUODENUM 




COMMON I LIAC 



PERITONEUM 

VESTING IMC LIVEB 



[-^PERITONEUM 



OMENTUM 



MALL IMTEST. 
oiuioeo 



% % 



This engraving in addition to the other views of. the viscera will 
nelp the physician to apprehend more readily the effects of manual 
and electric treatment. We see in this view, that independent of the 
distribution of the spinal nerves and the sources of the ganglionic 
nerves, the relations of proximity should be considered. Thus the 
rectum is adjacent to the sacrum, and the bladder is nearly on the 
same level, the womb lying between. The five lumbar vertebrae, count- 
ing up from the section of the common iliac artery, are seen to be op- 
posite the mass of intestines — the two upper lumbar vertebrae, which 
are adjacent to the kidneys, are opposite to the pancreas and to the 
lower margin of the stomach, while the transverse colon corresponds 
to the second and third lumbar vertebras. The stomach corresponds 
to the last two dorsal vertebrae and first lumbar, and the liver, as its 
development varies, may occupy any portion of the level of the six 
lower dorsal vertebrae. 

These positions should be borne in mind when we pass electric cur- 
rents through the organs, or when we would reach them by the influ- 
ence of the hands or of cupping apparatus. 



RYNX 

SPINAL 
Cord 
>5final 
Vertebrae 



£6mmon Duct-\)$ 




<$? 



lLEO-CC£CAu^ 

Valve - * 

COECU 

Append iy. 
VERMiFowusHk 



Ar-iUS 



The Digestive Organs, or Alimentary Canal, are here drawn 
out to show all the constituent parts, which are duly labelled. 
This will prepare the reader to understand the next engraving, 
which shows the parts nearly in their natural position. 



Vena Innomwata 
Descending 

Vena Cava 
Arch of Aorta 

R. Auricle. 



Transvsr.se 

MESOtOLON 

Jejunum 



Ascending Colon 
Ileum. 



LONOITUDINAL 

Band of- Colon 



I s 
ti 



Subclavian! 

.Carotid 



L.A0R1CU.&. 



LVlntricui 




The Ribs on.one 
Side of the Che$t 



End of Transverse. 

FThANSv«5E COU " ON 
MESOCOLON 

DESCENDING COUON 



-Mesocolon 
Jejunum 



Sigmoid Flejcurc 

PpendrcVermifo^m/5 



G o e c Uj\- 



In this view, which includes the heart and its large blood- 
vessels, the uplifted colon conceals the stomach, liver and spleen. 
The names explain all the parts except the mesocolon, which is 
a band formed by the peritoneum (investing all the abdominal 
organs) to which the colon is attached. 




IntJuqular 
R.Carotid A. 



Art. Innoniinata 

Carotid A. 
I nt Jugular 

End of 
T»-\orm:ic Duct 

Thoracic Duct and Aorta. — In this view the vessels are presented horizontally as they appear when 
lying down. The reader will turn up the engraving to understand their normal position. We see the aorta 
turning its arch between the fourth vertebra and second rib to descend — in the chest called the thoracic aorta, 
and below the diaphragm the abdominal aorta. The nourishing chyle, gathered by the lacteals from the 
intestines* together with the lymph gathered by the lymphatic absorbents from the entire left side and entire 
lower half of the body, goes into the receptaculum chyli (receptacle of chyle) opposite the second lumbar ver- 
tebra, and, being now similar in most respects to the blood, the duct ascends eighteen or twenty inches and 
enters the left subclavian vein (coming from the arms) near the first rib. It flows into the vein in the hori- 
zontal position much more freely than when we are standing; up ; hence that position favors nourishment 
and growth. The horizontal position is the best for rest and digestion. The right and left subclavian veins, 
fed by the rightand left jugulars from the head, are seen going to the superior vena cava (which carries their 
blood to the right heart) to enter its auricle. This great vein also receives a supply from the vena azygos, a 
singular vein coming up and bringing blood from below the diaphragm to mingle with the blood from above 
in the vena cava, just before it reaches the heart. On the right side we see the right subclavian vein receiving 
the right lymphatic duct, which brings in the lymph absorbed from the right side of the upper part of the 
body. 




LOWER END OF TRUNK OF FEMALE DIVIDED ON MEDIAN LINE. 
In this view, the names of each part being inscribed, little comment is necessary. The bladder is shown 
fully distended, pressing back the parts behind it, which would come forward when it is emptied. The 
junction of the sacrum and last lumbar vertebra is shown. 



THERAPEUTIC 
APPARATUS. 



Dr. J. P. Chamberlin, 

President of the Buchanan Anthropological Society, 

Boston, 

Having given his attention to the therapeutic measures introduced by Prof. 
Buchanan, offers his services to those who are interested in the subject, in furnishing 
the apparatus for therapeutic treatment described in " Therapeutic Sarcognomy." 

The apparatus for pneumatic treatment is not now in the market, and any one 
who wishes to procure it would have to pay an enormous price or manufacture it 
himself. To promote the introduction of anything so valuable would be an act of 
philanthropy, and Dr. C. has made the necessary arrangements and study of the 
subject to enable him to offer the pneumatic cases for the limbs, together with air 
pump and spinal cupping glasses, three in number, for the sum of $45, or any por- 
tion thereof at the same rates. This would enable any intelligent person to demon- 
strate the wonderful power of pneumatic treatment or Hsemospasia, in the control 
of many diseases, as shown by Prof. Buchanan. 

If applications should be received for the pneumatic cabinet, for treatment of the 
entire body, Dr. C. will report the terms upon which he can procure its manufacture. 

He will also receive orders and supply the new ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC 
APPARATUS of Prof. Buchanan at the following rates : 

The new Magnetic and Medical Battery, vh.'ch is designed to furnish the 
soothing, hygienic current of magnetism, and of all kinds of medical potency, con- 
veyed by electricity, for $30. A similar battery, with Dr. Buchanan's new helix and 
rheotome, giving a fine, powerful current, capable of adjustment and variation 
of speed and power, always reliable, and the flexible electrode, making treatment 
under the clothing easy, for $45. 

The Statico-Magnetic Battery, combining the diffusive, wholesome and irre- 
sistible power of static electricity with the soothing, tonic power of magnetism, which 
is considered the ne plus ultra of electro-therapeutics, can be furnished, with its mag- 
netic and medical attachments and duplex attachments for giving two currents at 
once, all invented by Prof. Buchanan, for $65. 

The Portable Galvanic battery, giving as strong a galvanic current as physi- 
cians generally require in practice, can be furnished for $iS. This is the only bat- 
tery of the kind, being the application of a new principle in the use of galvanism. 
Dr. C. may be addressed at South Weymouth, Mass., or 6 James St., Boston. 



their investigations and conclusions, occupying an entire page, in which they say 
41 they have had sufficient evidence to satisfy them that Dr. Buchanan's views have 
a rational experimental foundation, and that the subject opens a field of investiga- 
tion second to no other in immediate interest, and in promise of important future 
results to science and humanity." Even more favorable reports were made at that 
time by committees in Boston. 

In 1843 the subject was fully investigated by the Faculty of the Indiana State 
University (under President Wylie) at Bloomington, who published their report of 
several columns, and expressed their acceptance of the science as follows, — saying 
that it "develops the rudimentary science of phrenology into a perfect and pro- 
found science, which explains the phenomena of animal magnetism and which ren- 
ders intelligible those things in physiology — disease and insanity — which have 
heretofore been entirely inexplicable." 

" If the science of Neurology as discovered and developed by Dr. Buchanan be 
anything at all, it furnishes a key to the whole philosophy of man — the whole of 
the laws of his moral and physical nature — the noblest of all sciences. If he has 
made a single discovery in physiology he has made more than any previous explorer 
of that science, in furnishing us this key to the whole of its principles by his cere- 
bral and corporeal experiments." " Although our story may resemble the legends 
of romance or necromancy in the great powers that have been displayed over the 
human mind, its wonderful character will subserve its chief aim and end — to 
induce those who are interested in the science of man, in education and moral phi- 
losophy to make these subjects a matter of experimental inquiry." 

The medical class attending the lectures of Dr. Buchanan in the Eclectic Medical 
Institute (the leading medical college of Cincinnati) in the session of 1849-50 ex- 
pressed themselves as follows : " While, therefore, we gratefully accord distinguished 
honor to the labors of Dr. Gall and his coadjutors, we do at the same time regard 
the contributions which have been made to Anthropology by Dr. Buchanan as far 
exceeding those of his predecessors. We have personally performed many of the 
experiments set forth in the Journal of Man, and can testify, as can many in this 
city who have witnessed our experiments in private circles, that the half has not 
yet been published to the world." 

It is unnecessary to quote from pages of similar endorsements during the last 
forty years — the most recent being from the students of the College of Therapeu- 
tics, who say in their published statements in 18SS : "We, in common with all 
others who have had the pleasure of witnessing the demonstrations of Dr. Buchanan 
in Therapeutic Sarcognomy, Psychometric Diagnosis and Electro-therapeutics, 
regard them as beyond the shadow of a doubt, and as surpassing both in philo- 
sophic importance and practical utility any physiological discoveries of the present 
century, and laying the foundation for a truly scientific system of therapeutics." In 
1889 they said : " We one and all unite in pronouncing the instruction given as the 
first and only clear, satisfactory and complete explanation ever received of the sci- 
ence of man and mind in all relations." 

Psychometry being recognized by its friends as the most important contribution 
of the century to psychic science, and Sarcognomy as the most important addition 
ever made to Biology — a fortiori, it is evident that Anthropology, of which they 
are constituent portions, has larger claims upon the enlightened than anything 
which has been presented in the entire history of science and philosophy. Yet 
it is not simply as science and philosophy that the Anthropological sciences are 
presented by Dr. Buchanan, but as the greatest possible intellectual contribution to 
human welfare. The purpose of his life, embodied in these sciences, is to promote 
and make possible that social reconstruction and elevation of humanity which will 
abolish the degradation of poverty, pestilence and crime. That Anthropology, 
accepted and applied, will lead to this result will become apparent to all faithful 
students of the science. 

The Syllabus of Anthropology will be issued for $3.00 in December, 1812, or 
sooner if practicable. Subscribers who wish to receive it when first issue T should 
send their address to Dr. J. R. Buchanan, 6 James St., Boston. 



MANUAL OF PSYCHOMETRY: The Dawn of a 
New Civilization. Third Edition. With Portrait of 
Mrs. Buchanan. 

The "Manual of Psychometry " demonstrates by numerous experiments that 
there are divine faculties in man, superior to the external tenses and external intel- 
lect, by means of which knowledge may be attained with wonderful rapidity, which 
is far beyond the established sciences, and beyond the ordinary means of research, 
upon which the world has heretofore relied. Upon this subject philosophy and 
science have heretofore been in the dark, and the wonderful di.-covery of Professor 
Buchanan in 1842, endorsed by many of our best thinkers, is the opening of a new 
era lor intellectual progress. The " Manual of Psvchometry" is the first complete 
presentation of this momentous science (and art) which is destined to enlarge all 
sciences, to overturn all existing philosophies, and to extend its influence into every 
sphere of human intelligence. 

This volume of 500 pages shows in its preface that it is but a partial and limited 
exposition of a grand science, that will require several other volumes to complete its 
illustration. The introduction opens with the very terse and expressive poem in which 
the Rev. Jno. Pierpont illustrated the truth and greatness of Psychometry at the 
Yale anniversary, and proceeds to show the nature, power and scope of the science, 
the presentation of which is arranged in three parts : 1st, the original sketch and 
history of the discovery; 2d, the uses and applications of Psychometry ; 3d, the new 
philosophy and religion to which Psychometry leads. 

RECOGNITION OF PSYCHOMETRY. 
This work needs no other endorsement than that so gracefully given in his poem 
on progress by the Rev. Jno. Pierpont, and the endorsement of *its doctrines by the 
Faculty of the Indiana State University and the Faculty of the leading medical col- 
lege of Cincinnati, the E. M. Institute; but to show the unanimous accord of liberal 
minds, a few of the recent expressions of the press are quoted : 

"The like of this work is not to be found in the whole literature of the past. . . . He has given a lifetime 
to the study of psychical science in its various branches, and his 1 ame stands honorably among those who 
have extended the real boundaries of knowledge " — Home Journal, New York. 

" The author, Dr. Buchanan, has been an investigator and an ardent student along this line of thought for 
nearly half a century. He has written several works which have shown evidence of research and profound 
thought." — Chicago Inter -Ocean. 

" Dr. Buchanan is among the most eminent of the physicians of the American Eclectic School and would 
for that reason alone be set down by the adherents of the ' tegular' school as a 'crank.' Harvey was a 
crank, but we believe now-a-days in the circulation of the blood. . . . He will certainly be entitled to 
rank among the pioneers in experimental investigation." — Chicago Times. 

'"The more considerate would be inclined 10 look upon him as a century in advance of his time." — 
People's Health Journal, Chicago. 

" He is a moral Columbus. . . . He has boldly navigated unknown seas, till he has found a far greater 
and more important world than the Genoese navigator discovered. His Manual of Psychometry is in many re- 
spects one of the most remarkable works ever published. By the more liberal portion of the medical profes- 
sion Dr. Buchanan is justly regarded as the highest living authori y on the brain and nervous system, and 
many have been looking for years for some exposition from his pen r f the world of scientific wonders with. 
which for more than forty years he has been familiar, and of which he has been the recognized exponent." 
— Hartjord Times. 

" The literature of America and Europe during the present century has produced no work superior to the 
Manual of P.-ychometry, either for originality and profundity cf thought, elevation of moral principle, revo- 
lutionary power, or practical utility." — Banner oj Light, Boston. 

*' It can hardly fail to originate an active discussion throughout the literary and scientific world. As an 
experimental s-cience, it is likely to make its way to universal recognition. But the recognition of Psy- 
chometry involves a tremendous change in the ODinions of the world, the teachings of colleges, and the 
prevalent doctrines of science and philosophy." — Health Monthly, New York. 

"The credulity of the reader is taxed to the utmost extent ; but the author's observations seem to have 
been conducted scientifically, and his deductions therefrom logically drawn." — Health Journal, Chicago. 

" The above is an extraordinary title, suggesting the 'dawn of a new civilization,' and it is the title of an 
extraordinary book. Our readers know the scientific standing of Prof. Buchanan, and the profound original 
physiological discoveries for which the world is indebted to hi* genius and untiring labors for half a century. 
When such an author brings forth a volume with the c'aim that it embodies discoveries which may be the dawn 
of a n<>w civilization, it demands more than ordinary attention. . . . To physicians this is a work of 
the highest importance. The chapter on Psychometry in medicine illustrates by experiments the philosophy 
of Homoeopathy and Allopathy, the philosophy of contagion, and the principles of diagnosis. It shows 
how professional success is attained, ard how the skilful physician may diagnosticate the condition of 
patients at a distance whom he knows only by correspondence. In addition to biographical, medical, and 
geological scence (all of which are essentially charged and enlarged by Psychometric investigations), this 
volume shows a great many practical applications in the study of character, in determining the destiny of 
the young, in forming conjugal and business associations, in selecting candidates for important offices, and 
in determining questions of guilt or innocence. But the limits of our notice are quite insufficient forgiv- 
ing an idea of the multifarious contents of this curious work. We can but assure the readers that it is in- 
tensely interesting as well as marvellous. The scientific reader feels as if he were transported to a realm of 
romance, yet all is presented in the form of simple scientific experiments which have been repeated a hun- 
dred thousand times, and which invite the reader to repeat them for himself. No one can read this volume 
in a candid spirit without feeling a conviction that the author has opened up a new and wonderful world 
of science, and no physician can read it withovit gaining very important ideas concerning diagnosis and the 
action of medicines." — Medical Advocate, New York. 

Published by the author ($2.16 by mail). Remit to 

Dr. JOS. RODES BUCHANAN, 6 James Street, Boston. 



(FOURTH EDITION.} 

THE NEW EDUCATION: Moral, Industrial, Hy- 
gienic, Intellectual. By Prof. J. R. Buchanan, 
Author cf "Anthropology," "Therapeutic Sarcog- 
nomy," and " Manual of Psychometry." 

The following are a few of the spontaneous commendations of this work immedi- 
ately following its publication : — 

Rev. B. F. BARRETT, one of the most eminent writers of his church, says : 

" We are perfectly charmed with your book. I regard it by far as ihe most valu- 
able work on education ever published. You have herein formulated the very wis- 
dom of heaven on the highest and most momentous of all themes. Your work is 
destined, in my judgment, to inaugurate a new era in popular education. It con- 
tains more and higher wisdom on the subject of which it treats than all ihe other 
books ever "written on education." 

Rev. Dr. W. P, STRICKLAND says : 

"The book is a desideratum long wanted, and it seems to me every Christian 
and every man who has a shade of philanthropy ought not only to bid it God-speed, 
but to pray and labor and give to plant these truths in the minds and heart of the 
community. God bless the author! His great work will live when all bigoted 
opposers are forgotten." 

"This is an important work on a most important subject. The importance of 
the book is indicated by the very significant fact that Mrs. Elizabeth Thompson, 
the noted philanthropist of New York, has purchased half the edition for gratuitous 
distribution. Dr. Buchanan has set before himself the Herculean task of revolu- 
tionizing our entire system of education. . . . These points are enforced with 
unflagging energy, with great originality, and with elaborate but always pertinent 
illustration." — Boston Commonwealth. 

" Clear, fresh, and forcible in every page, there has appeared no work like it, none 
which can compare with it in practical suggestiveness." — H. T. in Religio-Philo- 
sophical Joitrnal. 

" Great as have been the improvements made in educational matters during the 
past quarter of a century, they are small and inadequate compared to the system 
proposed by Dr. Buchanan." — Hartford Times. 

*'The high opinion we have heretofore expressed of this profoundly original and 
instructive work is more than sustained by the judgment of the best and most lib- 
eral writers." — Banner of Light. 

"A copy of it should be in every household and on every teacher's desk. The 
twelfth chapter relates to ' Ventilation and Health,' and contains matter of such vital 
importance that were it all the book contained, it would more than compensate the 
reader for any outlay of time or money he may have made upon it. ... A needed 
book, whose teachings would lift humanity out of darkness into light." — Newmarket 
Advertiser. 

"The originality of this work is remarkable. It is one of those works which, like 
Bacon's ' Novum Organum ' or Hahnemann's ' Organon,' compels us, if we accept 
it, to make a new departure from old methods and principles." — Health Monthly. 

"The author displays learning and deep study of every branch of morals, and 
presents his knowledge in a convincing manner. The book is moreover extremely 
interesting even to the ignorant or superficial reader." — Boston Globe. 

" The chapter on ventilation alone makes your book invaluable. No language 
can sufficiently commend it. Every family, all architects, builders, school commit- 
tees, proprietors of halls, theatres, churches, school-houses, colleges and hospitals 
should have it." — Rev. Wm. Bradley, Boston. 

Pages might be filled with similar testimonials from enlightened teachers and 
friends of progress, who have received this volume with enthusiasm, the first edition 
being sold in three months. Being published by the author, copies may be obtained 
by addressing Dr. J. R. Buchanan, Boston, remitting the price, $1.50, by postal 
order or registered letter. 



THE DOUBLE CYLINDER LAW BATTERY. 

This battery has been brought to a high state of 
perfection. Its £. M. F. is 1.5 volts and its internal re- 
sistance .5 of an ohm at the start 
and continues the same until the zinc 
is consumed and the solution exhausted. 
Cells put in use in 1880 are still 
working as well as at the start, nothing 
but the zinc and solution, costing but 
a few cents, ever having been re- 
newed. 

Endorsed by the following author- 
ities in their works : Alex. J. C. Skene, 
G. Betton Massey, H. R. Biglow. 
More than 13,000 cells in use for electro-therapeutical 
work. 




THE BAILEY CURRENT REGULATOR 




For regulating the strength 
of the current or dosage this in- 
strument perfectly supplants the 
switch-board as a means of 
modifying the current. It im- 
poses equal work upon all cells 
of the battery. The CUR- 
RENT REGULATION is 
perfect. From full strength of 
the battery down to a current 
so feeble as to be impercep- 
tible to the most sensitive organ, 
and this without any possibility 
of breaks in the circuit or sud- 
den shocks to the patient; a 
most important feature. With 
the regulator but two wires are 
necessary leading to the battery. 
No more rule of thumb in 
electro-therapeutics. 

Sole manufacturers : 
LAW TELEPHONE CO., 

85 John St., New York. 



>A 



A D 2.9 



" THE LONG LOOKED FOR COMES AT LAST." 

During the past three years, over one thousand Practical Electricians have 
used what we originallv recommended to them as 

" TUB BEST OPEN-GIRCDIT BATTERY in tlie WORLD." 

We believed what we then stated, and to-day the opinions of our numerous cus- 
tomers throughout the country overwhelmingly confirm the statement. Kindly 
examine the following report: 

Report on the performance of two cells L,eclanche and two cells SAMSON Battery, ex- 
amined for their E. M. F., Internal Resistance and Current Strength, by Prof. 
A. E. Dolbear, of Tufts College, Nov. 15th, 1889 : 



NAME OF CELL. 


E. M. F. 


INT. RES. 


Current At 
Outset. 


C, After 30 

Minutes. 


Genuine Gonda " Disque " Lee. 
E. G. L. Co.'s " Disque " Lee. 
Samson No. i, 
Samson No. 2, 


1.46 volts. 

1.52 " 

j. 44 " 
i-47 " 


1.25 ohms. 

.14 " 
.11 " 


.61 ampere- 

.63 '• 
1. 16 " 
1. 21 " 


. mpere. 
•37 
•5 2 " 

.70 " 



" The cells were all put in circuit with a resistance of 1.1 ohms, and kept on that cir- 
cuit for the above measure of current. The very small internal resistance of the two 
SAMSONS enables them to give a current very nearly twice as great at the beginning 
as either of the others, while the SAMSON No. 2 gave a stronger current (.70 am- 
pere) after half an hour short circuit than either of the Disque Leclanche cells at the 
beginning. It should be remarked here that the SAMSON No. 1 was a smaller cell 
than the No. 2, and of course would not be expected to give the current of the large 
one. 

" It appears, however, that the SAMSON cells are much more energetic than the 
ones they were compared with ; so much so, that one of them is about as good as two 
of the latter kind for such service as the production of strong currents or strong 
magnetic effects. The device of making the carbon cylindrical and fluted enables 
them to contain a large quantity of the binoxide of manganese, and presents a large 
surface to the solution. The shape of the zinc and its proximity to the carbon is 
another advantage for such work. I have also tested the cells for telephone work 
and find them very superior. Their small internal resistance enables them to give 
a stronger current through the induction coil than any Leclanche cell I have ever 
tested. This amounts to 25 or 30 per cent. The cell meets my commendation." 



The SAMSON'S great superiority grows out of its remarka- 
bly low internal resistance, which enables it to give a current for ordinary 
circuits from one-third to one-half stronger than the best Open-circuit Cells ; it does 
not polarize as readily as other sal-ammoniac cells ; and polarization does not de- 
stroy its efficiency or materially shorten its life, its negative element being practically 
inexhaustible. It recuperates quickly after having been over-taxed and 
short-circuited, and will do more effective work after repeated short-cir- 
CUitingS than any other sal-ammoniac cell. It does not require to be " regener- 
ated " or doctored : Simply give it a rest, and it quickly regains its strength. 

This wonderful French battery is warranted to stand more hard usage 
and continue its service longer and more stubbornly, than any other open-circuit 
battery made. About 80,000 now in use in this country. 

For Descriptive Circulars Address, 

The Electric Gas Lighting Company, 

No. 195 Devonshire Street, Boston, Mass. 

Sole Manufacturing Agents for the United States. 






% 




J. **, v 



£°* .' 






q. *-.T 






%f : 



J8?s /\ f WW' <rH> '-.W /\ "WR-* ** v % --S| 



>* 



\- P«fe 



A 9* 































4 O • 1 



\* $++ 
















•a. '• . » « «<S 



5* ••"'• o. a* » ' # » 



<» ''TV. 4 ,0 




.o* ..»•-•. *< 



+*rf 



• ^ri* : 






k"« «i, j* •* 



a<i 






b o 












y^* -= ->^v o ^'-*m-\<r -o.->^-'.d 




0" ♦*«itf% t »_ o J* ,. 











^<c. 



>•* 








J.°V V 



^°«6 - 






•."^•' #' V* 77 ' 7 '^ %'^-.o> _ V*^'-*V* V 

%'*^£\«^ V"*-.vr.**/v*' -%/*S??\.<^ %/*-.v?V 



^°* 






' v* K 



>°V '"." 



. '•^•" ,o° +? - 




*>%. '. 






■I 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




DD0ES7^Sbb0 






■ 

■ 

■ 



■ u/li 



m 



